DCM Config Guide

4011746 Rev W
Digital Content Manager (DCM)

Configuration Guide
Software Package Release 7.5
Notices
For Your Safety
Explanation of Warning and Caution Icons

Avoid personal injury and product damage! Do not proceed beyond any symbol
until you fully understand the indicated conditions.
The following warning and caution icons alert you to important information about
the safe operation of this product:
You may find this symbol in the document that accompanies this product.
This symbol indicates important operating or maintenance instructions.
You may find this symbol affixed to the product. This symbol indicates a
live terminal where a dangerous voltage may be present; the tip of the flash
points to the terminal device.
protective ground terminal.
chassis terminal (normally used for equipotential bonding).
You may find this symbol affixed to the product. This symbol warns of a
potentially hot surface.
You may find this symbol affixed to the product and in this document.
This symbol indicates an infrared laser that transmits intensity-modulated
light and emits invisible laser radiation or an LED that transmits
intensity-modulated light.
Important
Please read this entire guide. If this guide provides installation or operation
instructions, give particular attention to all safety statements included in this guide.
4011746 Rev W iii

Notices
Notices
Trademark Acknowledgments
Cisco, Cisco Systems, the Cisco logo, the Cisco Systems logo, ROSA, Copernicus,
and SciCare are registered trademarks or trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.
and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
All other trademarks shown are trademarks of their respective owners.
Publication Disclaimer
Cisco Systems, Inc., assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions that may
appear in this publication. We reserve the right to change this publication at any
time without notice. This document is not to be construed as conferring by
implication, estoppel, or otherwise any license or right under any copyright or
patent, whether or not the use of any information in this document employs an
invention claimed in any existing or later issued patent.
Copyright
© 2009 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. No part of this
publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, by photocopy,
microfilm, xerography, or any other means, or incorporated into any information
retrieval system, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express
permission of Cisco Systems, Inc.
AVC/MPEG-4/H.264 Products
With respect to each AVC/MPEG-4/H.264 product, Cisco is obligated to provide the
following notice:
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE
FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i)
ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD ("AVC VIDEO")
AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER
USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,
L.L.C. SEE HTTP:// WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
4011746 Rev W v
Notices
Accordingly, please be advised that service providers, content providers and

broadcasters are required to obtain a separate use license from MPEG LA prior to
any use of AVC/MPEG-4/H.264 encoders and/or decoders.
vi 4011746 Rev W
Safe Operations
Safe Operations
The software described in this guide is used to monitor and / or manage Cisco
equipment. Certain safety precautions should be observed when operating
equipment of this nature.
For product specific safety requirements refer to the appropriate section of the
documentation accompanying your product.
4011746 Rev W vii

Contents
Contents
Notices v
Safe Operations vii
Chapter 1 Introduction 29
Introducing the Digital Content Manager............................................................. 30
General .......................................................................................................... 30
Modular Concept ......................................................................................... 32
Principle ........................................................................................................ 34
Introducing the Web Browser User Interface ....................................................... 36
About the Web Browser User Interface .................................................... 36
Using the Context Sensitive Online Help................................................. 37
Browsing through a Tree ............................................................................ 37
Using Short-Cut Menus .............................................................................. 37
Using the Apply and Reload Command Button ..................................... 38
Image Legend ............................................................................................... 38
Using Popup Windows............................................................................... 39
About Web Browser Toolbars.................................................................... 39
Displaying the About Window.................................................................. 39
Showing Contact Information.................................................................... 40
Web Browser User Interface Security .................................................................... 41
Introduction .................................................................................................. 41
Logging On or Off the Web Browser User Interface .............................. 42
Configuring the Security............................................................................. 44
Login Page Information .............................................................................. 47
Changing the Session Timeout .................................................................. 48
Licensing .................................................................................................................... 49
Obtaining License Files ............................................................................... 49
Introduction .................................................................................................. 49
Checking the License Overview ................................................................ 51
Install a New License File ........................................................................... 52
Checking the Version Information ......................................................................... 54
Importing and Exporting Settings.......................................................................... 55
Introduction .................................................................................................. 55
Exporting Configuration Settings.............................................................. 55
Importing Configuration Settings ............................................................. 56
Using the Identify Me Utility .................................................................................. 58
4011746 Rev W ix
Contents
Chapter 2 Configuration 59
Device Configuration ............................................................................................... 60
Changing the Device Name ....................................................................... 60
Adding or Removing SNMP Trap Destinations ..................................... 61
Activating or Deactivating the DCM ........................................................ 64
Setting the Device Clock ............................................................................. 65
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports .......... 71
Modifying the Static Route Table for the Management Ports ............... 73
Configuring IP Security .............................................................................. 75
Configuring the GPIO Contacts................................................................. 80
Card Configuration .................................................................................................. 84
Changing the Name of an Interface Card ................................................ 84
Configuring the Resource Setup of a Transcoder Card.......................... 84
Shutting Down the IP Video Gateway Card............................................ 86
ASI Port Configuration ............................................................................................ 87
Introduction .................................................................................................. 87
To Configure an ASI Input Port................................................................. 88
To Configure an ASI Output Port ............................................................. 90
To Configure a Mirror Port ........................................................................ 91
Checking the ASI Port Parameters ............................................................ 92
GbE Port Configuration ........................................................................................... 94
Configuring the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port .............................. 94
Adding or Deleting Static ARP Table Entries........................................ 102
Adapting the Static Route Table .............................................................. 105
Configuring VLAN.................................................................................... 107
Joining or Leaving GbE Ports to IGMP Multicast Groups................... 110
Checking the Routes to Destination Devices ......................................... 114
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature ....................................................... 116
Checking the GbE Statistics...................................................................... 119
SDI Port Configuration .......................................................................................... 124
Introduction ................................................................................................ 124
Configuring an SDI Port ........................................................................... 125
Using SDI Generators................................................................................ 125
Changing the Display Mode ................................................................................. 128
Introduction ................................................................................................ 128
To Change the Display Mode of ON IDs, TS IDs, SIDs, and/or
PIDs.............................................................................................................. 128
Chapter 3 Using the Tree View 131

Introducing the Services Trees.............................................................................. 132
About the Tree............................................................................................ 132
Top Node .................................................................................................... 134
Card Branch ................................................................................................ 135
Port Branch ................................................................................................. 136
Transport Stream Branch .......................................................................... 139
x 4011746 Rev W
Contents
SDI Branch .................................................................................................. 143

Statmux Pools Branch................................................................................ 146
Statmux Pool Branch ................................................................................. 146
Service Branch ............................................................................................ 147
Transrating Group Branch........................................................................ 151
Component Branch.................................................................................... 152
General Remarks........................................................................................ 155
Introducing the Advanced Routing Tree ............................................................ 156
Introduction ................................................................................................ 156
Output Service Branch .............................................................................. 157
Sources for Program Switching Branch .................................................. 158
Main, Alternate, Merged, Backup Service Branch ................................ 159
Merged Components Branch ................................................................... 160
Component Merge Rule Branch .............................................................. 162
Source for Splicing Branch........................................................................ 162
Changing Tree Settings .......................................................................................... 164
Introduction ................................................................................................ 164
To Change the Tree Settings..................................................................... 167
Representation Mode of the Incoming Services ................................................. 169
Introduction ................................................................................................ 169
Card Representation Mode ...................................................................... 169
Port Representation Mode........................................................................ 170
Transport Stream Representation Mode ................................................ 170
Service Representation Mode................................................................... 171
Changing the Representation Mode ....................................................... 172
Finding Services or Transport Streams in a Tree ............................................... 173
Introduction ................................................................................................ 173
To Search a Service or Transport Stream................................................ 173
Locating a Passed Service in the DCM Inputs Tree .............................. 174
Locating the Destination to where an Incoming Service is
Passed .......................................................................................................... 175
Determining the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the DCM
Inputs Tree............................................................................................................ 176
Introduction ................................................................................................ 176
To Determine the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the
DCM Inputs Tree ....................................................................................... 176
Chapter 4 Multiplexing 179

Section A Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams .............. 181
Settings of Incoming Services................................................................................ 182
Introduction ................................................................................................ 182
Changing Service Settings on the Service Settings Table of a
Particular Incoming Transport Stream ................................................... 182
Changing Service Settings on the Service Settings Table of a
Particular Port ............................................................................................ 183
Settings of Incoming Transport Streams ............................................................. 185
4011746 Rev W xi
Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................ 185

Changing Setting of a Single Transport Stream .................................... 188
Changing Setting of Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular
Port............................................................................................................... 189
Adding Preconfigured Transport Stream Entries ................................. 190
Changing the Default Value for Incoming Transport Stream
Parameters .................................................................................................. 191
Section B Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams ........................... 195
Creating Outgoing Transport Streams ................................................................ 196
Introduction ................................................................................................ 196
Creating Outgoing Transport Streams by Adding Individual
Transport Streams to a Port...................................................................... 200
Creating a Transport Stream by Passing an Incoming Transport
Stream to a Port.......................................................................................... 202
Creating SPTSs by Passing Incoming Services to a GbE Port.............. 205
Passing a Transport Stream Transparently to an Output .................... 207
Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams ................... 209
Introduction ................................................................................................ 209
To Change Transport Stream Settings for a Single Transport
Stream.......................................................................................................... 211
To Change Settings for Multiple Transport Streams of a
Particular GbE Port.................................................................................... 213
Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams ................ 215
Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams ................. 218
Introduction ................................................................................................ 218
Changing Advanced Parameters for a Single Transport Stream ........ 219
To Change the Advanced Settings for Multiple Transport
Stream of a Particular Port........................................................................ 220
Changing Default Values for the Advanced Transport Stream
Settings ........................................................................................................ 221
Configuring Automatic Pass Rules ...................................................................... 224
Introduction ................................................................................................ 224
Assigning or Changing TS Auto Pass Rules .......................................... 224
Section C Forward Error Correction............................................................................... 227
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 228
General ........................................................................................................ 228
FEC Profiles ................................................................................................ 228
FEC Schemes .............................................................................................. 231
FEC Packet Transportation....................................................................... 232
Sending Arrangements ............................................................................. 232
Overhead and Latencies ........................................................................... 232
Requirements.............................................................................................. 232
Configuring the FEC Settings for Incoming Transport Streams ...................... 234
To Configure the FEC Settings for a Single Incoming Transport
Stream.......................................................................................................... 234
To Configure the FEC Settings for Multiple Incoming Transport
Streams of a Particular Port...................................................................... 235
xii 4011746 Rev W

Contents
To Configure the FEC Settings for a Preconfigured Incoming

Transport Stream ....................................................................................... 237
Changing the Default FEC Settings for Incoming Transport
Streams ........................................................................................................ 240
Checking the FEC Statistics ...................................................................... 241
Configuring the FEC Settings for Outgoing Transport Streams ...................... 243
To Configure FEC Setting for a Single Outgoing Transport
Stream.......................................................................................................... 243
To Configure FEC Settings for Multiple Outgoing Transport
Streams of a Particular Port...................................................................... 245
Generating FEC Errors .............................................................................. 247
Changing the Default FEC Settings for Outgoing Transport
Streams ........................................................................................................ 248
Section D Service Re-Multiplexing ................................................................................. 251
Passing Individual Services................................................................................... 252
Introduction ................................................................................................ 252
Drag and Drop Method ............................................................................ 252
Muxing Method ......................................................................................... 253
Preconfiguring Services ......................................................................................... 255
Introduction ................................................................................................ 255
Adding Preconfigured Services ............................................................... 255
Removing Preconfigured Services .......................................................... 257
Service Auto Passing Rules ................................................................................... 258
Introduction ................................................................................................ 258
Switching On or Off Service Passing Rules............................................ 258
Changing the Default Service Auto Pass Rules..................................... 259
Passing all Services of an Incoming Transport Stream...................................... 260
Introduction ................................................................................................ 260
Drag and Drop Method ............................................................................ 260
Muxing Method ......................................................................................... 261
Using Virtual Services ............................................................................................ 263
Introduction ................................................................................................ 263
Adding Virtual Services............................................................................ 263
Removing Virtual Services ....................................................................... 264
Using Still Picture Services .................................................................................... 266
Introduction ................................................................................................ 266
Creating Clips............................................................................................. 266
Uploading or Removing Clips ................................................................. 268
Assigning a Clip to a Service.................................................................... 270
Section E Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components........................................ 271
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 272
Passing Individual Components .......................................................................... 274
Merging Components ............................................................................................ 277
Introduction ................................................................................................ 277
Merging an Incoming Service into an Outgoing Service ..................... 277
Merging Particular Components of an Incoming Service in an
Outgoing Service........................................................................................ 283
4011746 Rev W xiii

Contents
Adding Dummy Component References into a PMT .......................... 289

Merging Unreferenced Components ...................................................... 290
Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Service Components................................. 297
Introduction ................................................................................................ 297
Checking Service Component Settings................................................... 300
Tracking Rules............................................................................................ 303
EMM Components.................................................................................................. 312
Introduction ................................................................................................ 312
Passing EMM Components ...................................................................... 312
Checking the EMM Component Parameters ......................................... 315
Remapping EMM Components ............................................................... 317
Removing EMM Components from an Outgoing Transport
Stream.......................................................................................................... 318
Private Data Components...................................................................................... 320
Introduction ................................................................................................ 320
Passing Private Data Components .......................................................... 320
Checking the Private Data Component Parameters ............................. 321
Remapping Private Data Components ................................................... 323
Removing Private Data Components ..................................................... 324
Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components.................................... 326
Passing Unreferenced Components ........................................................ 326
Remapping Unreferenced Components ................................................. 330
To Check the Settings of Unreferenced Components........................... 331
Removing Components ............................................................................ 333
Overruling Elementary Stream Type................................................................... 335
Introduction ................................................................................................ 335
Creating ES Stream Type Overrule Entries............................................ 336
Changing ES Type Overrule Entries ....................................................... 336
Removing ES Type Overrule Entries ...................................................... 337
Adding and Modifying PMT Descriptors ........................................................... 339
Introduction ................................................................................................ 339
Adding Descriptors Manually ................................................................. 340
Importing Descriptors from a File........................................................... 341
Removing Descriptors Manually............................................................. 343
Removing Descriptors Using PMT Rules............................................... 344
Ordering Descriptors Using PMT Rules................................................. 345
Removing PMT Rules................................................................................ 347
Changing the Default PMT Descriptor Rule Parameters..................... 348
Section F PSI/SI/PSIP Information ................................................................................ 351
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 352
Program Specific Information .................................................................. 352
Service Information ................................................................................... 352
Program System Information Protocol ................................................... 354
Changing the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode.......................................... 356
Introduction ................................................................................................ 356
To Change the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode for a Single
xiv 4011746 Rev W

Contents
To Change the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode for

Multiple Transport Streams on a Particular Port .................................. 357
To Change the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode............. 358
Viewing PSI/SI/PSIP Information....................................................................... 360
Introduction ................................................................................................ 360
To View the PSI/SI Information of Incoming Transport Streams ...... 360
To View the PSI/SI Information of Outgoing Transport Streams ...... 363
Providing an Outgoing Transport Stream with PSI/SI/PSIP
Information........................................................................................................... 365
Introduction ................................................................................................ 365
Transparently Passing PSI/SI/PSIP Information from an
Incoming Transport Steam ....................................................................... 369
Passing Sub Table Information from an Incoming to an
outgoing Transport Stream ...................................................................... 371
Changing the PSI/SI/PSIG Output Mode ............................................. 379
Changing the Table Playout Interval ................................................................... 385
Introduction ................................................................................................ 385
Changing the Table Playout Interval Parameters for a Particular
Changing the Table Playout Interval Parameters for all
Transport Streams on a Particular Port .................................................. 388
Changing the Default Playout Interval Parameters.............................. 389
Remapping Tables .................................................................................................. 391
Introduction ................................................................................................ 391
Remapping PSI/SI/PSIP Tables.............................................................. 391
Changing SI Information ....................................................................................... 393
Determining the Network PID Insertion into the PAT ........................ 393
Changing SDT Settings for a Particular Service .................................... 394
Adding or Removing Time Offset Descriptors to or from a TOT....... 397
Changing PSIP Information .................................................................................. 400
Modifying the TVCT or CVCT................................................................. 400
Modifying the STT ..................................................................................... 404
Changing the Start PID of the EIT/ETT Tables..................................... 406
Changing the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Settings for Newly Created
Transport Streams................................................................................................ 407
Exporting PSI/SI ..................................................................................................... 410
Introduction ................................................................................................ 410
To Export PSI/SI from Incoming Transport Streams ........................... 410
To Export PSI/SI from Outgoing Transport Streams........................... 411
Section G Changing Service Parameters ........................................................................ 413
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 414
To Check the Service Routings for a Particular Outgoing Transport
Stream.................................................................................................................... 415
To Change the Settings of Outgoing Services..................................................... 417
Determining the PCR for an Outgoing Service .................................................. 419
Introduction ................................................................................................ 419
To Determine the PCR for an Outgoing Service.................................... 419
4011746 Rev W xv
Contents
Adding a Dummy PCR to an Outgoing Service.................................... 421

Delaying Service Components.............................................................................. 423
Introduction ................................................................................................ 423
Example 1.................................................................................................... 423
Example 2.................................................................................................... 424
Example 3.................................................................................................... 425
Adding PID Sync Delay Groups.............................................................. 425
Deleting PID Sync Delay Groups ............................................................ 426
To Change Scrambling Settings of Outgoing Services ...................................... 428
To Change Transrating Specific Parameters of Outgoing Services ................. 430
To Change DPI Settings for Outgoing Services.................................................. 433
Section H Activating or Stopping Streaming ................................................................ 439
Activating or Stopping Streaming of Outgoing Transport Streams................ 440
Introduction ................................................................................................ 440
To Activate a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream........................... 440
To Activate All Outgoing Transport Streams on a Port ....................... 441
To Stop a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream.................................. 442
To Stop all Outgoing Transport Streams on a Port ............................... 442
Activating or Stopping Streaming of Outgoing Services .................................. 444
Introduction ................................................................................................ 444
Activating or Stopping Streaming via the DCM Outputs Tree........... 444
Activating or Stopping Streaming via the Service Settings Table ...... 445
Modifying the Default Value of the Streaming Parameter for
Outgoing Services ...................................................................................... 446
Section I Removing Outgoing Services and Transport Streams................................. 449
Removing Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream ................................. 450
Introduction ................................................................................................ 450
To Remove Individual Services ............................................................... 450
To Remove a Number of Services from an Outgoing Transport
Stream.......................................................................................................... 451
To Remove all Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream............. 452
Removing Outgoing Transport Streams.............................................................. 454
Removing a Particular Transport Stream............................................... 454
Removing a Number of Transport Streams ........................................... 455
Section J Viewing Service Grooming.............................................................................. 457
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 458
To View Service Grooming ................................................................................... 461
Chapter 5 Transrating 463

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 464
General ........................................................................................................ 464
Applications................................................................................................ 464
Bit Rate Limiting ........................................................................................ 465
Statistical Re-multiplexing........................................................................ 466
Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams.................................................. 468
Introduction ................................................................................................ 468
xvi 4011746 Rev W

Contents
Transrating Board Settings ....................................................................... 470

Creating a Transrating Group.................................................................. 473
Adding Services to a Transrating Group................................................ 475
Changing the Transrating Group Parameters ....................................... 477
Adapting the Transrating Properties of a Service ................................. 477
Removing Services from a Transrating Group...................................... 479
Deleting a MPTS Group............................................................................ 480
Checking the Transrating Comparison................................................... 481
Single Program Transport Stream Transrating................................................... 484
Introduction ................................................................................................ 484
Transrating Board Settings ....................................................................... 484
Creating a Multi-TS Transrating Group ................................................. 487
Changing Transrating Settings ................................................................ 488
Adding SPTSs to a Multi-TS Transrating Group................................... 489
Changing the Transrating Parameters of a SPTS .................................. 493
Moving an SPTS from or to a Transrating Group ................................. 495
Removing Multi-TS Transrating Groups ............................................... 496
Checking a Transrating Comparison ...................................................... 498
Transrating Examples ............................................................................................ 500
Transport Stream with Multiple Transrating Groups .......................... 500
Statistical Re-multiplexing of a SPTS Transrating Group .................... 502
Statistical Multiplexing in Combination with Rate Limiting .............. 503
Chapter 6 Digital Program Insertion and Program Switching 505

Digital Program Insertion ................................................................................................... 507
Introducing Digital Program Insertion ................................................................ 508
General ........................................................................................................ 508
Splicing Event Triggered by an AD-Server............................................ 511
Splicing Event Triggered by a Cue Insertion Device............................ 512
Splicing Event Triggered by the DCM.................................................... 513
Configuring Splicing Channels............................................................................. 514
Introduction ................................................................................................ 514
Configuring Splicing Channels using the Service Page of a
Particular Transport Stream ..................................................................... 517
Configuring Splicing Channels using the Service Page of all
Transport Streams on a Particular Port .................................................. 521
Configuring Splicing Channels using Advanced Routing .................. 526
Configuring Splicing Channels using the Drag and Drop
Method of Advanced Routing ................................................................. 529
Defining Custom DPI Mapping Entries ................................................. 531
Checking the IP Address of the AD Servers ....................................................... 535
Triggering Splicing Events Manually .................................................................. 536
Introduction ................................................................................................ 536
To Trigger a Primary / Insertion Channel Substitution....................... 536
To Trigger a Insertion / Primary Channel Substitution....................... 536
4011746 Rev W xvii

Contents
Program Switching .............................................................................................................. 539

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 540
Configuring Alternate Services............................................................................. 542
Adding or Deleting Alternate Services................................................... 542
Merging a Service into a Main, Alternate, or Virtual Service.............. 549
Merging Components into a Main, Alternate, or Virtual Service....... 554
Adding a Backup Service to a Main, Merged, or Alternate
Service.......................................................................................................... 561
Configuring the Splicing Channel........................................................... 564
Performing Program Switching ............................................................................ 571
Introduction ................................................................................................ 571
Activating the Service ............................................................................... 571
Chapter 7 Scrambling 573

Section A DVB Simulcrypt Scrambling .......................................................................... 575
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 576
Introducing Conditional Access System.............................................................. 577
Introduction ................................................................................................ 577
Scrambling, Control Word, and Cryptoperiod...................................... 578
Access Criteria and Access Rights........................................................... 578
Entitlement Control Messages ................................................................. 579
Entitlement Management Messages ....................................................... 581
Event Information Scheduler ................................................................... 582
PSI/SI Generator........................................................................................ 584
Private Data Generator ............................................................................. 585
Scrambling Levels...................................................................................... 586
Simulcrypt Scrambling.............................................................................. 588
Timing Parameters..................................................................................... 589
Steps To Take........................................................................................................... 592
Changing the Scrambling Mode ........................................................................... 595
Introduction ................................................................................................ 595
Changing the Scrambling Mode for a Particular Outgoing
Changing the Default Scrambling Mode to DVB Simulcrypt ............. 596
Allowing Scrambling for Services ........................................................................ 597
Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters .............................................. 599
Introduction ................................................................................................ 599
Entitlement Control Message Generators .............................................. 600
Entitlement Management Message Generators..................................... 622
Event Information Schedulers.................................................................. 635
PSI/SI Generators ...................................................................................... 640
Changing the Scrambler Properties ........................................................ 644
Configuring the Access Criteria............................................................................ 647
Introduction ................................................................................................ 647
General Settings ......................................................................................... 648
Setting up the Transport Stream Model ................................................. 648
xviii 4011746 Rev W

Contents
Defining Access Criteria ........................................................................... 657

Scrambling Control................................................................................................. 666
Introduction ................................................................................................ 666
General Settings ......................................................................................... 671
Changing the ECM ID Mode.................................................................... 672
Checking the DCM Devices to which a Transport Stream
Belongs ........................................................................................................ 673
Enabling or Disabling Scrambling........................................................... 674
Event logging.............................................................................................. 677
Advanced Settings ..................................................................................... 678
Section B BISS Scrambling................................................................................................ 683
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 684
General ........................................................................................................ 684
About Session Word and Control Word ................................................ 684
Operation Modes ....................................................................................... 684
Starting or Stopping Scrambling .......................................................................... 685
Introduction ................................................................................................ 685
Starting Scrambling using the Short-Cut Menu in the DCM
Outputs Tree............................................................................................... 685
Starting Scrambling via the Scrambling Settings Table of the
Outgoing Transport Stream ..................................................................... 686
Stopping Scrambling using the Short-Cut Menu in the DCM
Outputs Tree............................................................................................... 687
Starting Scrambling via the Scrambling Settings Table of the
Outgoing Transport Stream ..................................................................... 688
Configuring the BISS Scrambling Parameter for an Outgoing
Transport Stream ................................................................................................. 690
Introduction ................................................................................................ 690
To Configure the Scrambling Parameters .............................................. 690
Changing the Default Scrambling Parameters ...................................... 691
Chapter 8 IP Video Gateway 693

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 694
General ........................................................................................................ 694
Licensing ..................................................................................................... 694
Redundancy................................................................................................ 695
Specifying Incoming RTP Streams ....................................................................... 696
Introduction ................................................................................................ 696
Adding RTP Stream Entries ..................................................................... 696
Removing RTP Stream Entries................................................................. 697
Checking Incoming Video Signal Parameters .................................................... 698
Introduction ................................................................................................ 698
To Check Settings of Incoming Video Signals ....................................... 698
Configuring Incoming Streams............................................................................. 699
Changing Settings of Incoming SDI Streams ......................................... 699
Changing Settings of Incoming RTP Streams ........................................ 700
4011746 Rev W xix

Contents
Routing Streams to the Output ............................................................................. 702

Routing an Incoming RTP Stream to an SDI Output Port ................... 702
Routing an Incoming SDI Stream to the GbE Port................................ 702
Routing a Generated SDI Stream to an SDI Output Port ..................... 703
Routing an SDI Stream to the Monitor Port........................................... 704
Viewing Routings ...................................................................................... 705
Activating or Stopping Streaming........................................................................ 707
Activating Streaming................................................................................. 707
Stopping Streaming ................................................................................... 708
Configuring Outgoing Streams............................................................................. 709
Changing Settings of Outgoing SDI Streams......................................... 709
Configuring Settings of Outgoing RTP Streams.................................... 710
Checking IP Video Gateway Statistics ................................................................. 713
Introduction ................................................................................................ 713
To Check the IP Video Gateway Statistics.............................................. 713
Reset the IP Video Gateway Statistics..................................................... 713
Chapter 9 Transcoding 715

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 716
General ........................................................................................................ 716
Licensing ..................................................................................................... 717
Processing Possibilities ............................................................................. 717
Service Redundancy .................................................................................. 718
Using the Transcode Overview Page...................................................... 718
Routing a Service to the Output via a Transcoder Card ................................... 721
Introduction ................................................................................................ 721
Passing an Incoming Service to the Transcoder Card .......................... 721
Passing a Transcoded Service to the Output ......................................... 722
Naming the Service in the DCM Processing Tree .............................................. 724
Introduction ................................................................................................ 724
To Name the Service.................................................................................. 724
Configuring a Transcoded Video Component ................................................... 725
Introduction ................................................................................................ 725
To Configure a Transcoded Video Component .................................... 726
Determining the Caption Service Descriptor for a Transcoded Video
Component ........................................................................................................... 727
Introduction ................................................................................................ 727
To Determine the Caption Service Descriptor ....................................... 727
Configuring a Transcoded Audio Component................................................... 730
Introduction ................................................................................................ 730
To Configure a Transcoded Audio Component.................................... 732
Configuring the Service Related Transcode Settings of a Service.................... 734
Introduction ................................................................................................ 734
To Configure the Service Transcode Settings ........................................ 734
xx 4011746 Rev W
Contents
Chapter 10 Backup Scenarios 737

GbE Port Backup..................................................................................................... 738
Introduction ................................................................................................ 738
Changing the GbE Port Backup Parameters .......................................... 740
Transport Stream Backup ...................................................................................... 741
Introducing Transport Stream Backup ................................................... 741
Assigning Backup Transport Streams..................................................... 743
Performing a Manual Backup Transition ............................................... 748
Changing the Backup Switching Parameters......................................... 750
Service Backup ........................................................................................................ 751
Introducing Service Backup ..................................................................... 751
Assigning Backup Services to Main and Merged Services .................. 753
Assigning Backup Services to a Transcoded Service ............................ 755
Performing a Backup Transition.............................................................. 757
Changing the Backup Switching Parameters......................................... 758
SDI/RTP Service Backup ....................................................................................... 760
Introduction ................................................................................................ 760
Assigning a Backup Stream to an SDI Stream ....................................... 760
Assigning a Backup Stream to an RTP Stream ...................................... 761
Performing a Main-to-Backup or Backup-to-Main Transition ............ 761
Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager ................................................. 763
Introduction ................................................................................................ 763
Steps to Take............................................................................................... 766
Performing a Manual Restore Action after a Main-to-Backup
Transition .................................................................................................... 768
Standalone Device Backup .................................................................................... 769
Introduction ................................................................................................ 769
Steps to Take............................................................................................... 770
Special Cases............................................................................................... 772
Configuring the Device Backup Settings................................................ 773
IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager............................. 775
Introduction ................................................................................................ 775
Chapter 11 Alarm Monitoring 779

Alarm Overview ..................................................................................................... 780
Card Related Alarms ................................................................................. 780
Device Related Alarms.............................................................................. 786
Configuring the Alarms ......................................................................................... 789
Introduction ................................................................................................ 789
Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all Alarms ....... 790
Generating Test Messages ........................................................................ 790
Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms..................................... 791
Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms.................................. 792
Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers.............................................. 794
Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers............................ 802
4011746 Rev W xxi

Contents
Configuring the Stuffing Rate Too Low and Payload Bit Rate
Too Low Alarm .......................................................................................... 808
Configuring the Card Not Operational Alarm ...................................... 809
Configuring Device Operational Failure Alarm.................................... 812
Checking the Alarms .............................................................................................. 816
Introduction ................................................................................................ 816
Checking the Alarm Summary Page....................................................... 817
Alarms Related to Incoming Transport Streams ................................... 818
Alarms Details Related to Incoming Transport Streams...................... 819
Alarms Related to Incoming Services ..................................................... 820
Alarms Details Related to Incoming Services........................................ 821
Alarms related to Incoming SDI or RTP Streams.................................. 822
Alarm Details related to incoming SDI or RTP Streams ...................... 823
Alarms Related to Outgoing Transport Streams................................... 823
Alarms Details Related to Outgoing Transport Streams...................... 824
Alarms Related to Outgoing Services ..................................................... 825
Alarms Details Related to Outgoing Services........................................ 826
Alarms related to Outgoing SDI or RTP Streams.................................. 827
Alarm Details related to outgoing SDI or RTP Streams ....................... 828
To Check the Device Status Overview Table ......................................... 829
Downloading the Alarm History............................................................. 829
Chapter 12 Checking Bit Rates 831

Checking the Bit Rates in the DCM Input and Output Tree............................. 832
To Check the Bit Rates in the Service Overview Trees ......................... 832
Opening a Popup Window with Transport Stream Bit Rates ............. 833
Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables............................................................. 835
Introduction ................................................................................................ 835
Checking the Input Bit Rates.................................................................... 836
Checking the Output Bit Rates................................................................. 844
Checking the Bit Rates of the Services in the DCM Processing
Tree .............................................................................................................. 853
Restarting the Bit Rate Measurement...................................................... 855
Chapter 13 Additional Features 857

Section A Digital Transport Formatter........................................................................... 859
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 860
General ........................................................................................................ 860
Source Stream Combining ........................................................................ 860
Scrambling .................................................................................................. 860
ASI Interface Card Mode .......................................................................... 861
Changing the ASI Interface Card Mode .............................................................. 862
Configuring a DTF Transport Stream .................................................................. 863
Configuring Scrambling......................................................................................... 865
Uploading the SWDF ................................................................................ 865
xxii 4011746 Rev W

Contents
Configuring the Scrambling Parameters of the DTF Transport

Stream.......................................................................................................... 866
Configuring the Scrambling Parameters for Transport Streams
within a DTF............................................................................................... 866
Section B Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency Networks.............................. 869
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 870
About Single Frequency Networks ......................................................... 870
About the Timing Information ................................................................ 871
Integrating a DCM into a SFN Application ........................................... 871
Steps to Take............................................................................................................ 872
Changing Reference Clock Settings ..................................................................... 873
Introduction ................................................................................................ 873
To Change Reference Clock Settings....................................................... 873
Changing SFN Adaptation Settings ..................................................................... 875
Introduction ................................................................................................ 875
To Change SFN Adaptation Settings ...................................................... 875
Section C IP Statmux Controller...................................................................................... 879
DCM IP Statmux Concept ..................................................................................... 880
Introduction ................................................................................................ 880
DCM IP Statistical Multiplexing.............................................................. 882
IP Statmux Configuration...................................................................................... 885
Introduction ................................................................................................ 885
Setting the DCM IP Statmux Controller Setting.................................... 885
Setting Up ................................................................................................... 886
To Set Up the Bit Rate Budget.................................................................. 889
To Set Up the Statistical Multiplexing Parameters ............................... 892
Changing Statmux Pool Settings using the DCM GUI...................................... 896
Changing Statmux Pool Settings ............................................................. 896
Checking the Statmux Settings of the Encoders .................................... 900
Checking the Video Bit Rate Overview of a Statmux Pool .................. 901
Chapter 14 Software Upgrade 905

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 906
About the Upgrade Software ................................................................... 906
System Requirements................................................................................ 906
Installing the Upgrade-It Software Package ....................................................... 907
Upgrading the DCM Software .............................................................................. 910
Introduction ................................................................................................ 910
Opening the Upgrade-It Tool................................................................... 911
Selecting the Software Module ................................................................ 912
Selecting the Device................................................................................... 913
Flashing the Software................................................................................ 914
General Remarks........................................................................................ 914
4011746 Rev W xxiii

Contents
Appendix A Customer Information 917

Product Support...................................................................................................... 918
Obtaining Support ..................................................................................... 918
Support Telephone Numbers................................................................... 918
Return Products for Repair.................................................................................... 920
Introduction ................................................................................................ 920
Obtaining an RMA Number and Shipping Address ............................ 920
Packing and Shipping the Product.......................................................... 921
Appendix B Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS 923

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 924
About ROSA NMS..................................................................................... 924
Installing the ROSA NMS Drivers........................................................................ 925
Introduction ................................................................................................ 925
To Install the ROSA Drivers..................................................................... 926
Making Task Instances........................................................................................... 930
Introduction ................................................................................................ 930
To Make a Task Instance........................................................................... 930
Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS ....................................................................... 932
Introduction ................................................................................................ 932
To Map a DCM into ROSA NMS............................................................. 932
Working with the Graphical User Interfaces ...................................................... 935
Opening the Web Browser User Interface.............................................. 935
Opening the Graphical User Interface of a Task or Component......... 936
Using DCM Macros ................................................................................................ 939
Introduction ................................................................................................ 939
Installing the DCM Macros ...................................................................... 940
Creating Config Files................................................................................. 941
Adding Service Component Tracking Rules ......................................... 942
Removing Service Component Tracking Rules..................................... 944
Importing PSI/SI Data .............................................................................. 945
Starting or Stopping Streaming ............................................................... 946
Removing PSI/SI from an Outgoing Transport Stream....................... 947
Passing Incoming Services to an Outgoing Transport Stream ............ 949
Removing Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream .................... 949
Starting a Splicing Event........................................................................... 950
Stopping a Splicing Event......................................................................... 952
Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers.............................................. 953
Changing the Service Backup Revertive Mode ..................................... 954
Triggering a Service Backup Transition ................................................. 957
Performing a Transport Stream Backup Transition.............................. 960
Joining GbE Port Pairs to a Multicast Group ......................................... 962
Modifying the Unsolicited IGMP Message Version Parameter .......... 964
Executing a Macro ..................................................................................... 965
xxiv 4011746 Rev W

Contents
Appendix C Extended Operations 969

Downloading MIBs from the DCM...................................................................... 970
Introduction ................................................................................................ 970
To Download MIB files ............................................................................. 970
Viewing Trace Logs ................................................................................................ 972
Introduction ................................................................................................ 972
Filtering the Card Trace Logs................................................................... 973
Changing the ORB Trace Level................................................................ 974
Checking the Trace Logs........................................................................... 975
Downloading Trace Logs.......................................................................... 976
Capturing Live Network Data .............................................................................. 978
Introduction ................................................................................................ 978
To Capture Network Data ........................................................................ 978
Restarting the System............................................................................................. 980
Introduction ................................................................................................ 980
To Restart the DCM System ..................................................................... 981
Appendix D Additional Configuration 983

Configuring IPsec on Windows............................................................................ 984
Introduction ................................................................................................ 984
To Configure IPsec on a Computer Running Windows XP or
Windows 2000 Server................................................................................ 984
To Configure IPsec on a Computer Running Windows Vista .......... 1005
Glossary 1021
Index 1041
4011746 Rev W xxv

Safe Operations
Preface
Introduction
This configuration guide provides the necessary information to configure and to
operate the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900, the Cisco DCM Series
D9900 Digital Content Manager, and the Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content
Manager using the web browser user interface of the device. In this configuration
guide these devices are further indicated by DCM.
Audience
The audience of this configuration guide includes authorized and trained personnel
who are responsible for the configuration and operation of the DCM.
Required Knowledge
To use this configuration guide, the personnel should have a basic knowledge about
the technology used in relation to this product.
Related Publication
Refer to the following publications for more information concerning the DCM:
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 - System Guide, part number
4011745. This guide is shipped with the DCM.
Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager - System Guide, part number
Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager - System Guide, part number
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 - Data Sheet
Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager - Data Sheet
Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager - Data Sheet
Both data sheets can be found on our web site at the following location:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps9230/products_data_sheets_list.html
Digital Content Manager (DCM) IP Statmux Application Note, part number 4022070
ROSA Network Management System - User's Guide
ROSA Element Manager - User's Guide
ROSA Element Manager - Installation and Operation Guide
4011746 Rev W xxvii

Safe Operations
IIOP Protocol Driver - User's Guide, part number: 6985041

SI Editor - User's Guide, part number: 6985061
Statmux Pool Manager - User's Guide, part number 4022297
Digital Headend Backup - User's Guide, part number 6985066
Document Version
This is the nineteenth release of this configuration guide.
xxviii 4011746 Rev W

1 Chapter 1
Introduction
General
This chapter provides an introduction to the Digital Content Manager
(DCM) Model D9900, the Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content
Manager, and the Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager
and description how to work with the web browser user interface of
these devices.
In this Chapter
Introducing the Digital Content Manager................................................. 30
Introducing the Web Browser User Interface ........................................... 36
Web Browser User Interface Security ........................................................ 41
Licensing ........................................................................................................ 49
Checking the Version Information ............................................................. 54
Importing and Exporting Settings.............................................................. 55
Using the Identify Me Utility ...................................................................... 58
4011746 Rev W 29
Chapter 1 Introduction
Introducing the Digital Content Manager

General
The Digital Content Manager (DCM) is a compact MPEG processing platform
capable of supporting extremely high numbers of video stream processing. This
platform provides a 1U system, called Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content
Manager, and two 2U system, called Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900
and Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager.
The following illustration depicts a Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content
Manager, a Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager, and a Digital Content
Manager (DCM) Model D9900.
The Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager provides two I/O slots and
the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 and Cisco DCM Series D9901
Digital Content Manager four I/O slots.
30 4011746 Rev W
Each I/O slot can be populated with:

an ASI Interface Card containing 10 ASI ports
an ASI SFN Interface Card containing eight ASI ports and two GPS reference
signal inputs
an GbE Interface Card containing two pairs GbE ports
a Transcoder Card
or
an IP Video Gateway Card (Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager
only). The IP Video Gateway Card exists in a GbE version and a 10GbE version
containing 2 GbE or 2 10GbE ports, 6 SDI ports, a reference input port, and a
monitoring output port.
These devices provide hot swappable and redundant power supplies.
A more detailed description of these devices together with technical specifications of
the housing and equipment can be found on the data sheet of the corresponding
device.
4011746 Rev W 31
Modular Concept
The DCM is a fully modular concept built around a 1 RU or 2 RU high housing.
The flexible modular concept ensures easy system capacity upgrades. The
following illustration represents the modular concept of the DCM.
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 / Cisco DCM Series D9900
Digital Content Manager
32 4011746 Rev W
Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager
The following DCM equipment is available:

DCM housing
- 48 - - 60 V dc or 100 - 240 V ac Power Supply Unit (PSU)
ASI Interface Card
ASI SFN Interface Card
GbE Interface Card with or without FEC option
IP Video Gateway Card (Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager only)
Transcoder Card
Co-Processor Card
PSU slot cover plate
Interface card slot cover plate
4011746 Rev W 33
When the DCM leaves our assembly line, the device is configured as ordered.
When the device is not fully populated, the device can always be upgraded at a later
date by adding interface cards and/or Co-Processor Cards.
Principle
The following block diagrams depict the functional blocks of the DCM.
DCM Housing
ASI Interface Card with Co-Processor Card
34 4011746 Rev W
GbE Interface Card with Co-Processor Card and FEC Card
IP Video Gateway Card
Transcoder Card
4011746 Rev W 35
Introducing the Web Browser User Interface

About the Web Browser User Interface
The web browser user interface of the DCM is a pure HTML based Graphical User
Interface (GUI) that can be opened using Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher or
Mozilla Firefox 3.0 or higher. By entering the IP address of the DCM in the address
box of the internet explorer web browser, the web browser user interface of the
device will be opened. The following illustration shows the opening page (Login
page) of the DCM GUI.
Notes:
The procedure to log on the web browser user interface can be found in topic
Web Browser User Interface Security on page 41.
The Login page of the DCM can be provided with additional information. More
information concerning the Login page information can be found in topic Login
Page Information on page 47.
36 4011746 Rev W
Using the Context Sensitive Online Help

The web browser user interface of the DCM is provided with a context sensitive
online help. This online help can be opened by pressing the Help link on the
right-hand side of the header pane. Pressing the help ( ) button on a particular
item on the web browser user interface opens the online help with information for
that item.
Browsing through a Tree

The incoming and outgoing services of the DCM as well as the DCM configuration
are represented using trees. You can browse through a tree by collapsing or
expanding branches. A branch that can be expanded is indicated by a + sign and an
expanded branch is indicated by a - sign.
To expand a branch, point to the + sign in front of the branch.
To collapse a branch, point to the - sign in front of the branch.
Using Short-Cut Menus

Particular branches in a tree are provided with a short-cut menu. A short-cut menu
can be activated by right-clicking on the branch.
4011746 Rev W 37
Some of the short-cut menu options carry out commands immediately, and other
options display a sub page so that additional parameters can be entered or checked.
Using the Apply and Reload Command Button

Particular pages and sub pages of the web browser user interface of the DCM can be
provided with a Reload command button and an Apply command button.
When changes are made to settings on a certain page or sub page, clicking on the
Apply command button will send these new settings to the DCM.
Note: When settings are changed on multiple pages or sub pages, only the settings
on the page or sub page for which the Apply command button is pressed, are sent to
the DCM.
When settings are accidentally changed on a certain page or sub page, clicking on
the Reload command button restores these settings to the previous settings as long
as the Apply command button on this page or sub page is not pressed. The Reload
command button can also be used to update readouts on the page or sub page to
which the command button belongs to.
Image Legend
A description of the icons used by the web browser user interface of the DCM can be
found on the help - Legend sub page. The following procedure explains how to
display the help - Legend sub page.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Legend link that
appears after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The help - Legend sub page is displayed.
38 4011746 Rev W
Using Popup Windows

Particular information is given by the DCM using popup windows. When popup
blocking software is active on your PC, these popup windows might be blocked. In
this case a message box is displayed.
Deactivate this popup blocking software if you use the web browser user interface of
the DCM.
About Web Browser Toolbars

Some toolbars for web browsers (for example the Google Toolbar) offer an
automated form fill in option. This option tries to fill in some fields in forms on
web pages that were already visited once in the past (for example to automatically
fill in name and address if possible).
Because the embedded user interface of the DCM consists of pages with large forms
this feature can slow down your page considerably. Therefore it is recommended
to disable this option when you work with the DCM GUI.
Displaying the About Window

The version of the software package installed on the DCM can be found on the
About popup window of the user interface. The following procedure explains how
to open this popup window.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the About link that is
located at the right hand side of the header pane.
Result: The about popup window is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 39
Tip: The version information of the software, hardware, and firmware of the
different DCM components can be found on the Version Info sub page of the web
browser user interface. More information concerning this Version Info sub page
can be found in topic Checking the Version Information on page 54.
Showing Contact Information

The following procedure describes how to display Cisco's contact information for
obtaining product support.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Contact link after
clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Help - Contact sub page containing the contact information is
displayed.
40 4011746 Rev W
Web Browser User Interface Security

Introduction
To prevent people from gaining access to the DCM, the web browser user interface
of the DCM is provided with a security feature. This security feature confirms the
identity of the users who are attempting to access the device, protects the device
configuration from inappropriate access by users, and provides a simple and
efficient way to set up and maintain the security of the DCM.
To configure the DCM security, Security Accounts should be defined. A Security
Account consists of a unique user name with password. By adding Security
Accounts to Security Groups, particular access permissions and rights can be given
to users. Three Security Groups are defined each having a different access level:
Guests: read-only access
Users: read-write access (without security configuration)
Administrators: full control (with security configuration)
The security of the DCM is provided with three pre-defined User Accounts. The
table below shows these pre-defined accounts.
User Name Password Security Groups

Guest Guest Guests (read-only access)
User User Users (read-write access, without security configuration)
Administrator Administrator Administrators (full control)
Notes:
Both the User Name and Password are case-sensitive.
Similar user names cannot be used, even when uppercase and lowercase
characters are combined, for instance user and User.
For security reason each action done to the DCM using the web browser user
interface will be logged into the Security Log or Action Log. More information
concerning these logs can be found in topic Viewing Trace Logs on page 972.
4011746 Rev W 41
Logging On or Off the Web Browser User Interface

When the web browser user interface of the DCM is uploaded from the device after
entering the IP address in the Address box of the web browser, the Login page of the
web browser user interface is displayed.
Perform the following steps to log on to the DCM web browser user interface.
1 On the Login page of the DCM web browser user interface, enter the user name
in the User Name box and the password in the Password box.
Note: Both parameters are case sensitive.
2 Press the Login command button to confirm.
Result: You are logged on to the web browser user interface and the Service
page is displayed. The user name of the security account that is logged on
appears at the right-hand side of the web browser user interface header.
Note: When the inactivity of the user interface reached a particular time (called
session timeout), the web browser user interface of the DCM will automatically be
logged off. The following popup is displayed when this time is reached.
42 4011746 Rev W
After pressing the OK command button, the Login page of the user interface will
be displayed.
Tip: The procedure to change this time can be found in topic Changing the Session
Timeout on page 48.
The following step explains how to log off the DCM web browser user interface.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Logout link.
Result: The web browser user interface is logged off and the Login page is
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 43
Configuring the Security

Adding Security Accounts
Perform the following steps to add a Security Account.
1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group.
2 Point to the Security link.
Note: When a user is logged on using a Security Account that belongs to the
Users or Guests Security Group, the Security link is not applicable.
Result: The Security page is displayed.
Tip: The rows in the Security Accounts table can be re-ordered using a
particular parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can
toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter
header.
3 Under the Add New User settings, complete the following steps:
a In the User Name box, enter a name for the new account.
b In the Security Group drop down box, select the Security Group to which the
new account has to belong.
c In the Password and Re-enter Password box, enter the password for the new
account.
4 Press the Add command button.
Result: The new Security Account is added to the Security Accounts table.
44 4011746 Rev W
Changing Security Account Settings

Perform the following steps to change Security Account settings.
Security Group.
Users or Guests Security Group, the Security link is not applicable.
3 In the Security Accounts table, adapt the following parameters of the Security
Account for which settings should be changed:
When the name of the Security Account should be changed, enter the new
name in the corresponding User Name box.
When the Security Account has to belong to another Security Group, select
the desired group in the Security Group drop down box.
When the password should be changed, tick the corresponding check box
and enter the new password in both password boxes.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: The rows in the Security Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular
parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle
between ascending and descending order by pointing the parameter header.
Deleting Security Accounts

The following procedure explains how to delete security accounts.
Security Group.
Users or Guests Security Group, the Security page is not applicable.
4011746 Rev W 45
3 In the Security Accounts table, tick the check box(es) in front of the row(s) of the
Security Account that must be removed.
Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Security Accounts table,
tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and
tick the check box of the last row.
The rows in the Security Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular
parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle
between ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter
header.
4 Press the Remove Checked Items command button to confirm or the Reload
command button to abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Remove Checked Items command button, the
selected Security Accounts are removed from the Security Accounts table.
Notes:
At least one Security Account belonging to the Administrators Security Group
must be present in the Security Accounts table.
When a Security Account is deleted from a Security Group while a user is logged
on to the DCM using this Security Account, the user has access to the DCM as
long as he is logged on.
46 4011746 Rev W
Login Page Information

Introduction
To inform the user about the DCM during logging on (maintenance,
reconfiguration... ), additional information can be added to the Login page of the
DCM. The following picture shows a Login page with additional information.
Adding Login Page Information

The following steps explain how to add information to the Login page.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Maintenance link
after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Help - Maintenance sub page is displayed.
2 In the Display Login screen info text box, enter the text that must be displayed
on the Login page.
3 Press the Enable command button.
4011746 Rev W 47
Changing Login Information

The procedure below describes how to change the information text on the Login
page.
2 In the Display Login screen info text box, modify the text that must be
displayed on the Login page.
3 Press the Change command button.
Disabling Login Information

The following procedure explains how to disable the login information.
2 Press the Disable command button.
Changing the Session Timeout

When the inactivity of the web browser user interface of the DCM reaches the time
defined in the Timeout parameter, the user interface will be logged off. The
following procedure describes how to change this Timeout parameter.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Default Settings
link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
2 Under the Session settings, select the desired timeout value in the Timeout drop
down box.
3 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
48 4011746 Rev W
Licensing
Licensing
Obtaining License Files
Our License-IT web server application provides retrieval of licenses 24 hours a day 7
days a week. After submitting the equipment's Device Host ID and a certificate
key, an option kit will be provided. The Device Host ID can be found on the
Configuration - Licenses sub page of the web browser user interface of the DCM.
The procedure to open the Configuration - Licenses sub page containing the Device
Host ID of the DCM can be found in sub topic Checking the License Overview on page
51.
The Hesule web server interface can be accessed by entering the following URL in
your web browser:
http://online.sciatl.com/license-it
Once the license file is available, the corresponding licenses can be enabled by
uploading this file, see topic Install a New License File on page 52.
Introduction
Particular options of the DCM are license based; meaning licenses are required to
use these options. A number of these options are on a per license basis:
Each transrated or spliced service needs one or more licenses depending on the
definition of the service. The following table reflects the license consumption in
relation with the service definition.
Service Definition Number of Licenses Required for:

Transrating Splicing
Standard Definition (SD) 1 1
High Definition (HD) 4 2
Each service that must be scrambled or each service that contains components
that must be scrambled needs one DVB_SCRAMBLING license.
Each incoming or outgoing Transport Stream for which forward error correction
is enabled consumes one FEC_COP3_CODEC license.
Each component for which the PID Sync Delay feature is switched on needs 1
PID_SYNC license.
Each ASI Interface Card participating in a DTF/MTR application needs 1
DTF_CONCENTRATOR license. And for each ASI Interface Card for which the
encapsulated services must be scrambled, a DTF_SCRAMBLING license is
required.
4011746 Rev W 49
Each outgoing Transport Stream on an ASI SFN Interface Card for which the
SFN feature is enabled needs 1 MIP_INSERTION license.
Sub table passing of EITs needs the EIT_FILTERING license and passing all EIT
other p/f sub tables using the Auto Pass EIT Other PF feature needs the
EIT_FILTERING_ADVANCED license.
Each SDI stream that is encapsulated or decapsulated consumes one
GW_IP_STREAM license. Each IP Video Gateway Card is provided with one
free GW_IP_STREAM license. This free GW_IP_STREAM license is not included
in the license count.
Using DCM's still picture service insertion feature needs the
SLATE_GENERATION license.
Each transcoded SD video component consumes one SD_AVC_TRANSCODE
license.
Each transcoded HD video component consumes one SD_AVC_TRANSCODE
license and one HD_AVC_TRANSCODE_EXTENSION license.
Each Layer II Audio to AAC audio conversion consumes one
LAYERII_AUDIO_TRANSCODE license.
Each Dolby® Digital AC-3 Audio to AAC audio conversion consumes one
LAYERII_AUDIO_TRANSCODE license and one
AC3_AUDIO_TRANSCODE_EXTENSION license
Using 10GbE SFP modules into the IP Video Gateway Card needs the
GW_10G_GBE license.
Modifying the priority bit in the header of the MPEG packets needs the
PRIORITY_BIT_ADAPTATION license.
Licenses for license based options are offered to the DCM using a license file. When
the DCM leaves our assembly line, the device is provided with a license file
containing the licenses you ordered. If your DCM needs more licenses than its
license file provides, the licenses can be upgraded by installing a new license file.
The procedure to install a new license file can be found in sub topic Install a New
License File on page 52.
50 4011746 Rev W
Licensing
Checking the License Overview

The following procedure explains how to check the license overview of a DCM.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the License link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Licenses sub page is displayed with the following
information:
Device Host ID table

– Device Host ID: a unique identifier of the DCM that is used for creating
new license files
– Validation Key: represents the key used to validate the license file
4011746 Rev W 51
License Overview table

– Type: represents the license type, for instance TRANSRATING.
– Installed: represents the installation status of the option to which the
license belongs to.
– Count: represents the total number of licenses for this license type.
– Usage: represents the number of licenses in use for this license type.
– Key: represents the license key for this license(s).
Install a New License File

Introduction
A new license file can be installed into the DCM via the web browser user interface
of the DCM or using FTP.
Installing a License File using the Web Browser User Interface

The following procedure describes how to install a new license file using the web
browser user interface.
Note: A license file can only be installed via the web browser user interface if you
are logged on to the web browser user interface using a Security Account belonging
to the Administrators Security Group. More information concerning security groups
can be found in topic Web Browser User Interface Security on page 41.
Security Group.
2 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Licenses link that
Result: The Configuration - Licenses sub page is displayed.
3 Click on the Browse... command button.
Result: The Choose File dialog is displayed.
52 4011746 Rev W
Licensing
4 Browse to the new license file and select this file.

The following picture gives an example of a license file.
5 Click on the Open command button.

Result: The Choose File dialog is closed and the name of the new license file
appears in the Update License File box.
6 Press the Update command button.
Result: A confirmation box is displayed.
7 Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to

Note: After pressing the OK command button, it takes about 15 seconds before
the new licenses become active.
4011746 Rev W 53
Checking the Version Information

The Configuration - Version Info sub page of the web browser user interface of the
DCM represents the version numbers of the software, hardware, and firmware of the
different DCM components. The following picture shows the Configuration -
Version Info sub page of a DCM populated with an ASI Interface Card and a GbE
Interface Card populated with Co-Processor and FEC Card.
Note: By pointing to the parameter header in a version table, an ascending or

descending order of the rows can be chosen.
Perform the following steps to check the version information of the DCM.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Version Info link
that appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Version Info sub page is displayed.
54 4011746 Rev W
Importing and Exporting Settings

Introduction
The web browser user interface of the DCM allows exporting and importing of the
device configuration setting file or the configuration settings of a particular IP Video
Gateway Card. This feature is useful for backup or (re-)configuration purposes.
Note: A configuration setting file can only be imported if you are logged on to the
web browser user interface using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group. More information concerning security groups can be found in
topic Web Browser User Interface Security on page 41.
Exporting Configuration Settings

The following procedure explains how to export the configuration settings file of the
DCM or of an IP Video Gateway Card.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Backup link that
Result: The Configuration - Backup sub page is displayed.
2 In the Export Device Settings to File drop down box, select Device to export the
device configuration settings or the IP Video Gateway Card for which the
configuration settings should be exported.
3 Press the Export command button.
Result: The File Download dialog is displayed.
4 Click on the Save command button.
4011746 Rev W 55
Result: The Save As dialog is displayed.

Note: If the file should be saved in a different folder, locate and open the folder.
5 In the File Name box, enter a name for the file.
6 Click on the Save command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
Importing Configuration Settings

The procedure below describes how to import configuration settings.
Security Group.
2 On the web browser user interface, point to the Backup link that appears after
clicking on the Configuration link.
3 In the drop down box beside the Browse command button, select Device to
import device configuration settings or select the IP Video Gateway Card to
import settings for the corresponding card.
4 Point to the Browse command button.

Result: The Choose file dialog is displayed.
5 Browse to the configuration file and select this file.
6 Tick the check boxes of the settings that must be excluded during the importing
process.
Exclude All GbE Settings: all setting concerning the GbE ports.
Exclude 1:1 Device Backup Settings: all settings for standalone device
backup. For more information concerning standalone device backup, please
refer to topic Standalone Device Backup on page 769.
Exclude Scrambler Configurator Settings: the configuration settings for
scrambling. More information about scrambling can be found in chapter
Scrambling on page 573.
Exclude Settings Backup's Own Settings: all these exclude settings.
56 4011746 Rev W
Exclude NTP's Drift File: the file containing the clock drift as measured by
NTP. Since this file is interface card specific, excluding this file is
recommended if the settings file must be imported by a device different from
the source device.
Exclude IPsec Settings: the IPsec settings. More information about IPsec
can be found in topic Configuring IP Security on page 75.
Exclude Static Routes for Mainboard Settings: the Static Route table. For
more information about the Static Route table can be found in topic Adapting
the Static Route Table on page 105.
Exclude Device Name and Board Names: the device name and interface card
names.
Exclude IGMP Settings: all IGMP settings.
Exclude Basic GbE Settings: with the exception of the IGMP and VLAN
settings, all GbE settings will be excluded.
Note: After setting or clearing Import Device Settings check boxes and pressing
the Apply command button, these settings (called Settings Backup's Own Settings)
are stored on the device. Each time configuration settings are imported into the
DCM, these Settings Backup's Own Settings will be used to determine the
imported configuration settings. To avoid overwriting the Settings Backup's
Own Settings of the device by these of the configuration file during the importing
process, the Settings Backup's Own Settings can be excluded by ticking the
Exclude Settings Backup's Own Settings check box.
Result: The Choose file dialog is closed and the path and the file name appear in
the Import Device Settings from File box.
8 Click on the Import command button.
Result: A confirmation popup window is displayed.

Result: After pressing the OK command button, the DCM will be rebooted.
WARNING:
During booting the DCM, the outgoing services will be interrupted.
Note: Booting the DCM can take some time depending on the configuration and
the features of the device.
4011746 Rev W 57
Using the Identify Me Utility

When a headend is populated with multiple DCM devices, a particular DCM can be
identified by means of the Identify My utility of its web browser user interface.
This utility starts blinking the red front panel LEDs on the front of the device
simultaneously for 30 seconds. The following steps describe how to use DCM's
Identify Me utility.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM that must be located, point to the
Maintenance link that appears after clicking on the Help link.
2 Click on the Identify Me command button.
58 4011746 Rev W
2 Chapter 2
Configuration
Introduction
This chapter covers the configuration of the DCM. This chapter
provides the device configuration procedures, card configuration
procedures as well as port configuration procedures.
In this Chapter
Device Configuration ................................................................................... 60
Card Configuration ...................................................................................... 84
ASI Port Configuration ................................................................................ 87
GbE Port Configuration ............................................................................... 94
SDI Port Configuration .............................................................................. 124
Changing the Display Mode ..................................................................... 128
4011746 Rev W 59
Chapter 2 Configuration
Device Configuration
Changing the Device Name
To facilitate the identification of the DCM in an application, a name with maximum
40 characters can be given to the device.
Note: The name of the DCM appears in the title bar of the web browser.
Tips:
The hardware configuration of the DCM is depicted in the Hardware
configuration box.
Clicking on an interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the
Configuration - Interface sub page of the corresponding interface card.
The following procedure explains how to change the device name.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page with System sub page is displayed.
2 Under the System Settings, enter a name in the Name box.
60 4011746 Rev W
to reload the previous setting.
Note: The System Settings table also contains the DCM model to which the web
browser user interface belongs.
Adding or Removing SNMP Trap Destinations

Introduction
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol used to manage
remote devices. This protocol was designed for managing all kinds of devices such
as routers, switches, and also broadcast equipment. More information concerning
SNMP can be found in RFC 1157.
The DCM is able to generate SNMP Traps, containing information about an
error/informational condition, and to send these Traps to particular Trap
destinations. The SNMP Trap Destinations Settings table on the SNMP page
represents to which IP address(es) the traps are sent and the community string for
these destinations.
The DCM is also accessible using a standard MIB browser. To provide
authentication, privacy, and authorization, the standard community-based security
is used. A Read Community string (by default: public) has to be used for retrieval
SNMP operations and a Write Community string (by default: private) for modification
SNMP operations. The procedure to change these community strings can be found
in topic Changing the Read and Write Community Strings on page 63.
The MIB files available on the DCM can be downloaded to the hard disk of a PC.
These MIB files can then be used to create for instance an application-specific user
interface. The procedure to download the MIBs from the DCM to the hard disk of a
PC can be found in appendix Downloading MIBs on page 969.
Defining SNMP Trap Destinations

The following explains how to define a SNMP Trap destination.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the SNMP link that
Result: The Configuration - SNMP sub page is displayed.
2 In the IP Address box under the Add New SNMP Trap Destination settings,
enter the IP address of the trap destination.
Note: The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
4011746 Rev W 61
3 In the Community String box, enter a community string for this trap destination.
4 Click on the Add command button to confirm.
Result: After pressing the Add command button, the new Trap destination is
added to the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table.
Tip: To sort the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table by a particular

parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. You can toggle between
the ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter header.
Changing the SNMP Trap Format

The following procedure explains how to change the SNMP Trap format.
2 Under the SNMP Trap settings, select one of the following formats in the Format
drop down box.
- Standard: standard SNMP handling (default)
- Standard + Mystro: SNMP handling as defined by the mystro-videoport MIB
62 4011746 Rev W
Removing Trap Destinations

Perform the following steps to remove Trap Destinations.
2 In the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table, set the check box(es) in front of
the Trap destination row(s) that should be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the SNMP Trap Destination
Settings table, point to the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and point to the check box of the last row.
3 Press the Remove Checked Items command button to confirm.
Result: After pressing the Remove Checked Items command button, the Trap
destinations are removed from the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table.
Changing the Read and Write Community Strings

The following procedure explains how to change the Read Community and Write
Community strings.
2 In the Read Community box, enter the community string for the retrieval of
SNMP operations.
3 In the Write Community box, enter the community string for the modification
SNMP operations.
4011746 Rev W 63
Activating or Deactivating the DCM

For reconfiguration purposes or for participating in for instance device backup
applications, it can be useful to deactivate the DCM.
Deactivating a DCM performs following actions:
When the Output Streaming parameter for ports is set to Auto, streaming
through these ports is switched off.
When the Enable Hot Backup parameter is cleared, the connection with the
Entitlement Control Message Generator will be lost. More information
concerning this parameter can be found in topic Overruling the ECMG Channel
Status Message Parameter Values on page 611.
When the IP Alias - Mode parameter for ports is set to Auto, the IP aliasing
feature becomes inactive. More information about the IP Aliasing feature can be
found in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE
Interface Card on page 116 or in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the
Management Ports on page 71.
Activating a DCM performs the following actions:
When the Output Streaming parameter for ports is set to Auto, streaming
through these ports is switched on.
When the Enable Hot Backup parameter is cleared, the connection with the
Entitlement Control Message Generator is established.
When the IP Alias - Mode parameter for ports is set to Auto, the IP aliasing
feature becomes active. More information about the IP Aliasing feature can be
found in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE
Interface Card on page 116 or in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the
Management Ports on page 71.
The following procedure describes how to deactivate or activate a DCM.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the System link that
Result: The Configuration - System sub page is displayed.
2 In the Power Up Activation drop down box under the System Settings, select
Active to activate or select Inactive to deactivate the DCM after a reboot action of
the DCM.
64 4011746 Rev W
3 In the Current Activation drop down box, select Active to activate or select
Inactive to deactivate the DCM.
Setting the Device Clock

Introduction
The internal clock of the DCM can be set manually or can be synchronized at regular
time...
with an external device (for instance with a Time Server...) by using the Network
Time Protocol (NTP).
by using the TOT or TDT (DVB), or by using the STT (ATSC).
When the settings on the Configuration - Clock sub page of the DCM are properly
configured and after pressing the Apply command button, the synchronization
cycles are started by executing a time synchronization action.
Note: For applications that require accurate clock synchronization, such as DPI,
make sure that the following conditions are met:
Use an accurate time server. The lower the jitter of the clock of the time server,
the higher the accuracy of the clock of the DCM will be.
Make sure that the DCM is in a temperature-controlled environment.
The network between DCM and time server must be symmetric; the average
time required for a network packet to travel from DCM to time server must be
the same as the average time required for a network packet to travel from time
server to DCM.
Avoid persistent high loads on the network between DCM and time server, such
as a network backup of a server.
Since the timestamps in the TDT, TOT, or STT are not accurate enough, we advise
against synchronizing the clock of the DCM using SI tables for applications that
require accurate clock synchronization.
Changing the Device Time

Perform the following steps to change the current time of the DCM.
Tip: The current device time is shown at the right-hand side of the web browser user
interface header.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Clock link that
Result: The Configuration - Clock sub page is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 65
Tip: The Configuration - Clock sub page is also displayed after clicking on the
current device time at the right hand side of the web browser user interface
header.
2 In the Synchronization drop down box, select Disabled.
Result: The User Time setting is displayed.
3 In the User Time box, enter the time and date using the following notation:
YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss with:
– YYYY: year
– MM: month
– DD: day
– hh: hour
– mm: minutes
– ss: seconds
4 In the Time Zone Selection drop down box, select the desired time zone.
Note: After changing the time zone and pressing the Apply command button,
the graphical user interface will be restarted and the following message will be
displayed:
The User Interface is restarting. This can take a minute. After the restart you will have
to log in again. You will be redirected to the login page in 00:39.
The Logon page will be displayed after a while, log on as usual.
Synchronizing with a NTP Server

The following steps explain how to synchronize the DCM with a Time-Server using
NTP.
Result: The Clock sub page is displayed.
header.
2 In the Synchronization Type drop down box, select NTP.
Result: The NTP Server Configuration settings are displayed.
66 4011746 Rev W
4 In the NTP Server IP Address box, enter the IP Address of the Time-Server and
press the Add Server To List command button. The octets of the IP address
must be separated by dots.
Result: The IP address of the Time-Server is added to the NTP Servers table.
Repeat this step for all Time-Servers that should be used for time
synchronization.
5 In the Alarm Threshold (ms) parameter, enter the maximum time difference
between the DCM and a NTP server. When this threshold is exceeded after a
time synchronization action, an NTP Offset alarm will be generated.
Note: Time-Servers can be removed from the NTP Servers table by ticking the check
box(es) in front of the corresponding IP Address(es) and pressing the Removed
Checked Items command button. To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the
NTP Servers table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
4011746 Rev W 67
Checking NTP Statistics

The NTP statistics table gives the list of NTP servers each accompanied by their
current states. Each row in the NTP statistics table also provides a summary of the
remote peer associated with the NTP server. The following procedure explains how
to check the NTP statistics.
Result: The Configuration - Clock sub page is displayed.
header.
2 Click on the NTP Statistics command button.
Result: The Configuration - Clock - NTP Statistics sub page containing the NTP
Statistics table is displayed.
The following parameters are displayed:

IP Address: represents the IP address of the NTP server
Tally: represents the status of the NTP server selection for time
synchronization. The following values are used:
– space: the NTP server is not reachable.
– x : the NTP server is a false ticker.
– . : the NTP server is not a member of the ten closest NTP servers.
– - : the NTP server is an outlier
– + : the NTP server is a candidate for time synchronization.
– # : the NTP server is almost used for time synchronization.
– * : the NTP server is used for time synchronization.
Ref ID: identifies the time source to which the NTP server is synchronized.
.INIT. means that no response has been received so far.
Stratum: represents the level defining the distance from the reference clock.
A stratus 1 NTP server is directly linked to the reference clock. A stratus 2
NTP server is linked to a stratus 2 NTP server. A stratus 3 NTP server is
linked to a stratus 3 NTP server... If a NTP server is not responding, the
value 16 is displayed.
68 4011746 Rev W
REF Type: represents the NTP server type. The following values are used:
– l : local
– u : unicast
– m : multicast
– b : broadcast
Last Poll: represents the time that elapsed since the last poll attempt,
expressed in seconds.
Poll Int: represents the polling interval, expressed in seconds.
Reach: represents the reachability status of the NTP server. This is an 8-bit
octal number representing whether the NTP server responded during the last
eight poll attempts. When the value differs from 377, check the IP network.
Delay (ms): represents the packet roundtrip delay, expressed in milliseconds.
Offset (ms): the time offset expressed in milliseconds between the clock of
the DCM and the NTP server.
Jitter (ms): represents the time variation expressed in milliseconds between
the NTP servers and the DCM.
Synchronizing using an SI Table

The following steps explain how to synchronize the DCM by using the TOT or TDT
(DVB) or by using the STT (ATSC).
Result: The Clock sub page is displayed.
header.
2 In the Synchronization Type drop down box, select Time Table.
Result: The Time Sync using SI Table settings are displayed.
4011746 Rev W 69
4 In the Time Table drop down box, select the table that must be used to
synchronize the device: TDT, TOT, or STT.
5 In the Input Card drop down box, select the name of the interface card that
receives the incoming Transport Stream to which the table belongs to.
6 In the Input Port drop down box, select the name of the input port of this
Transport Stream.
7 In the Input Type drop down box, select the input port type:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the GbE port
receiving the stream must be joined to the multicast group.
8 In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the source
device streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop down
box is set to GbE Multicast.
9 In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
receiving this Transport Stream.
Note: The Input UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input Type drop down
box is set to ASI.
10 In the Sync Interval drop down box, select the time between two consecutive
synchronization actions: Every Hour, Every 6 Hours, Every 12 Hours, Every Day,
Every 7 Days, Every 14 Days, or Every 31 Days.
70 4011746 Rev W
Tip: A synchronization action can be started at any time by pressing the Sync now
command button.
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports

Introduction
To eliminate additional clients to feed backup DCMs in a backup application or to
avoid the need for additional client licenses, the DCM supports IP address takeover
by using IP aliasing. The IP aliasing feature of the DCM works as follows:
When a client has to send IP packets to a port of the main DCM and the client's ARP
table is not yet or no longer populated with ARP entries for this port, the client
broadcasts an ARP request message containing the IP address of these packets.
When IP aliasing is active on a network interface of the main DCM, the DCM
responds with an ARP reply message containing IP address and MAC address of the
port. When the client receives the ARP reply, it ads an ARP entry containing the
mapping between IP address and MAC address for this port and starts sending IP
packets to this port. When the backup DCM is activated, it broadcasts several
gratuitous ARP messages containing the alias IP address and the MAC address of
the corresponding backup DCM port. When the client receives such message it
refreshes the ARP entry of the IP address matching the Alias IP address. Now the
IP packets with destination IP address matching the alias IP address for the main
DCM port will be sent to the corresponding backup DCM port.
Three modes can be used for IP aliasing:
Inactive: the IP alias feature is not active.
Active: the IP alias feature is active.
Auto: the IP alias feature matches the DCM status, meaning the IP alias Mode is
active when the DCM status is active and vice versa.
The following procedures describe how to change the IP alias mode for a
management port and how to add or remove IP aliases to or from a management
port. The GbE ports of a GbE Interface Card also support IP Aliasing. The
procedures to change the IP alias mode for a GbE port of an interface card and how
to add or remove IP aliases to or from such port is described in topic Configuring the
IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 116.
Note: IP Aliasing can only be used for Advertising Servers.
4011746 Rev W 71
Changing the IP Alias Mode

The following procedure describes how to change the IP alias mode of a
management port.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the Mode drop down box in the IP Alias table of the port for which the IP
alias mode must be changed, select Inactive, Active, or Auto.
Adding an IP Alias
The following steps explain how to add a new IP alias to a management port.
2 In the Port drop down box under the Add New Alias settings, select the port to
which an IP alias must be added.
3 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address for the alias.

4 Press the Add Row command button to confirm.
Result: The IP alias is added to the corresponding IP Alias table.
72 4011746 Rev W
Removing IP Aliases
Perform the following procedure to remove an IP Alias from a management port.
2 In the IP Alias 10/100 Port or IP Alias GbE Port table, set the check box in the
row of the IP alias that must be removed.
3 Press the Remove Checked Rows button.

Result: The IP alias is removed from the corresponding table.
Modifying the Static Route Table for the Management Ports

Introduction
During the IP settings configuration of both management ports (10/100 and GbE
port) using the IP Configuration Tool, only one default gateway for both ports can be
defined. If both networks connected to the management ports consist of more than
one subnet, then additional routes (called static routes) must be configured on the
device.
Tip: The IP settings of both management ports can be checked in the Network
Settings table on the Configuration - System sub page.
Note: When the IP Address of a management port is changed using the IP

Configuration Tool, the Static Route entries for this port will be removed
automatically.
4011746 Rev W 73
Adding Static Route Entries

The following procedure describes how to add static route entries for a management
port.
1 On the web browser user interface DCM, point to the Routes link that appears
after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Routes sub page is displayed.
2 Under the Add New Static Route settings, complete the following parameters:
a In the Port selection box, select the 10/100 Port or GbE Port selection button.
b In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the destination network or
destination host. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: Using an IP address in the range from 169.254.0.0 up to 169.254.255.255
is not allowed.
c In the Subnet Mask box, enter the Subnet Mask of the destination network
(this parameter is not relevant when a host IP address is entered). The octets
of the Subnet Mask must be separated by dots.
d In the Gateway box, enter the IP address of the port of the router to the
destination port. The octets of the gateway must be separated by dots.
Notes:
– Using the default gateway is not allowed.
– The gateway must be in the same subnet of the selected interface.
e Press the Add command button.
Result: The new static route is added to the Static Route Settings table
74 4011746 Rev W
Removing Static Routes Entries

The procedure below explains how to delete static route entries.
1 On the web browser user interface DCM, point to the Routes link that appears
after clicking on the Configuration link.
2 In the Static Route Settings table, tick the check boxes preceding each static
route entry that must be removed and press the Remove Checked Rows
command button.
Tip: To tick the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static Route Settings
table, tick the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT]
key, and tick the last row that must be removed.
Result: All selected static route entries are removed from the Static Route
Settings table.
Configuring IP Security
Introducing IP Security
IP security (IPsec) ensures secure communication by providing authentication and
encryption mechanisms for network traffic between two peers. IPsec can use
several different encryption and authentication mechanisms to accommodate
various implementations and security needs. To ensure that two peers use the
same protocols when communicating with each other, a policy is set up that defines
a set of security parameters and encryption algorithms that can be configured in
each of both peers.
The DCM allows setting up IPsec for both the 10/100 management port and GbE
management port separately.
4011746 Rev W 75
Note:
Setting up IPsec for third party equipment (for instance a CA system) is not part
of this User's Guide. Please refer to the documentation that is shipped with the
equipment.
When the communication between the DCM and the computer running the web
browser user interface of the DCM must be secured by using IPsec, IPsec must
also be configured for this computer. The procedures to setup IPsec for a
computer running Windows can be found in appendix Configuring IPsec on
Windows on page 984.
Key Exchange
To establish an IPsec session, the peers need to exchange encryption keys in a secure
way. The DCM uses Internet Key Exchange (IKE) for this purpose. IKE is
configured to use preshared keys that can be set by the user. IKE will use 3DES
encryption and MD5/SHA1 hashing.
IPsec Packets
After a key is exchanged, the peers negotiate the structure of the IP packets. IPsec
modifies IP packets between the two peers by adding optional headers and
encrypting the data. Potentially, two headers can be used for this purpose: the
Authentication Header (AH) and the Encapsulated Security Payload Header (ESP).
To meet current requirements, however, the DCM uses only ESP; AH is not used.
When using ESP, two options ensure data integrity: the encryption algorithm (for
instance 3DES) and the hashing algorithm (for instance MD5). The DCM is
configured to accept a number of ESP proposals, that is, a number of combinations of
encryption and hashing algorithms. Any combination of the following encryption
protocols with the MD5 and SHA1 authentication protocol is accepted: AES 256, AES
128, 3DES, and NULL.
Note: To establish an IPsec session, the computer communicating with the DCM
must support at least one of the above combinations.
Adding IPsec Peers

The following steps describe how to add peers to the IPsec peer list of the DCM.
Security Group.
2 On the web browser user interface, point to the System link that appears after
76 4011746 Rev W
3 Under the Add New IPsec settings, complete the following parameters:
a In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the new IPsec peer. The octets
of the IP address must be separated by dots.
b In the Pre Shared key and Retype Pre Shared Key box, enter the pre shared
key for the new IPsec peer.
c Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The new IPsec peer is added to the IPsec Settings table.
4 Continue adding IPsec peers by repeating step a up to c or press the Apply

command button to confirm or the Reload command button to abort the
operation.
Deleting IPsec Peers

The following steps describe how to remove peers from the IPsec peer list of the
DCM.
Security Group.
3 In the IPsec Settings table, tick the check boxes preceding each IPsec peer that
must be removed and press the Remove Checked Rows command button.
4011746 Rev W 77
Tip: To tick the check boxes of consecutive rows in the IPsec Settings table, tick
the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and
tick the last row that must be removed.
Result: All selected IPsec peers are removed from the IPsec Settings table.
Note: If IPsec is enabled, at least one IPsec peer must be present in the IPsec Settings
table. When all IPsec peers are ticked and the IPsec mode is set to IPsec Traffic Only,
the following message appears in the Invalid User Input table on top of the
Configuration - System sub page.
Remove Checked Rows - Removing all IPsec settings when IPsec Traffic Only is active is
not allowed.
To deal with this, set the IPsec parameter to Allow All Traffic before removing all
peers.
Changing the IPsec Filter

The IPsec filter determines if non-IPsec traffic on a management port is allowed or
not. The settings of this filter are:
Allow All Traffic: the traffic on the corresponding port is not filtered
IPsec Traffic Only: only IPsec traffic matching the settings of an IPsec peer is
allowed.
WARNING:
When the IPsec mode is set to IPsec Traffic Only for the management port that is
used by the computer running the web browser user interface, and no valid IPsec
peer for this computer is added to the IPsec Settings table, the DCM becomes
inaccessible for this computer. This can be fixed by opening the web browser
user interface on a computer with valid IPsec peer or IPsec can be bypassed by
using the DCM hardware key. The procedure to bypass IPsec by using the
hardware key can be found in following topic.
Perform the following procedure to change the IPsec mode.

Security Group.
Result: The Configuration - System sub page containing the Network Settings
table is displayed.
78 4011746 Rev W
3 In the row of the corresponding management port, select one of the following
settings in the IPsec drop down box.
IPsec Traffic Only
Allow All Traffic
Note: The IPsec drop down box is only applicable when IPsec peers are added to
the IPsec Settings table.
Bypassing IPsec by using the Hardware Key

When the DCM becomes inaccessible due to wrong IPsec peer entries in the IPsec
Settings table, the IP security can be bypassed by:
plugging in the DCM hardware key into the I/O connector at the rear panel of
the DCM
and
unassigning IPsec on the computer running the web browser user interface as
described in topic To Unassign IPSec on page 1003.
Note: The DCM hardware key can be made by connecting pin 1 to pin 6 of the
mating field-wiring connector for this I/O connector.
The illustration below shows the I/O connector of the Model D9900 with mating
field-wiring connector.
The illustration below shows the I/O connector of the Model D9901 with mating
field-wiring connector.
4011746 Rev W 79
When IPsec is bypassed, the web browser user interface becomes accessible as a
device without IPsec and the IPsec configuration can be fixed. During this IPsec
bypassing process, a No IP SEC warning icon is displayed in the web browser user
interface header, see picture below.
Note: When the DCM hardware key is plugged in, the Hardware Key Inserted alarm is
active and a ROSA message can be generated.
Configuring the GPIO Contacts

Introduction
The DCM is equipped with 5 General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) pins. With the
exception of the first GPIO pin, which can be used to bypass IPsec (Security
Overrule), the GPIO pins can be configured to...
trigger a Primary to Insertion Channel or an Insertion to Primary Channel
substitution (digital program insertion)
trigger a service backup transition
reboot the DCM (Warm Restart)
80 4011746 Rev W
The following illustrations depict the GPIO contact location with mating field-wiring
connector.
Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900
To facilitate the DCM configuration, the GPIO contacts can be renamed (for example
DPI, Service Backup, Reboot...). This name will then be used in the user interface.
The assert level of a pin can be set to High or Low. High means that for input
functions the action will be executed at a high level (or floating level because the
presence of an internal pull up resistor) and for output functions the pin will be put
in a high state.
Low means that for an input function the action will be done when the pin is
shortened to ground and for output functions the pin will be put in a low state.
The pin layout and signal specifications of the GPIO contacts can be found in the
System Guide that is shipped with the DCM.
Notes:
Using GPIO contacts is license based. Each configured contact consumes one
GPI_ENABLED License. More information concerning licenses can be found in
topic Licensing on page 49.
4011746 Rev W 81
DCM with software package version 7.5 only supports applications with input
functions, configuring contacts for output functions is not possible.
To Configure the GPIO Contacts

The following steps describe how to configure the GPIO contacts.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the GPIO link that
Result: The Configuration - GPIO sub page is displayed.
2 Tick the Enable check box of the GPIO pin that must be configured.
Result: The GPIO settings of the corresponding pin are configurable.
3 In the Name box, enter a unique name for the GPIO pin.
4 In the Active drop down box, select the assert level of the GPIO pin, High or Low.
Note: The Configuration - GPIO sub page is only accessible if GPI_ENABLED
Licenses are installed.
Assigning a GPIO Contact for Rebooting the DCM

The following procedure describes how to assign a GPIO contact for rebooting the
DCM.
1 On the web browser user interface, point to the Maintenance link that appears
2 Under the Reboot settings, select the GPIO pin that has to trigger a reboot in the
Triggered by GPIO drop down box.
82 4011746 Rev W
Tip: For more information concerning rebooting the DCM, please refer to topic
Restarting the System on page 980.
4011746 Rev W 83
Card Configuration
Changing the Name of an Interface Card
Each card of the DCM can be labeled with a name. A logical card name will
facilitate the identification of the card in the web browser user interface. Perform
the following procedure to change the name of a card.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card that must be
renamed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the interface card is displayed.
3 Enter a name in the Name box under the Card Settings.
Tip: The picture above depicts the Card Settings of an interface card. The Card
Settings of an IP Video Gateway Card and Transcoder Card are similar.
Configuring the Resource Setup of a Transcoder Card

Introduction
A Transcoder Card is capable to process the following video/audio component
combinations.
HD Video SD Video Audio

0(x) 0 32
0(x) 2 28
0(x) 4 24
0(x) 6 20
0(x) 8 16
0(x) 10 12
0(x) 12 8
0(x) 14 4
0(x) 16 0
84 4011746 Rev W
Card Configuration
(x) A
DCM with software package version 7.5 only supports standard definition
MPEG-2 to H.264 video conversion.
Before starting the transcode configuration, the DCM needs the knowledge of the
used video/audio component combination.
Important: Changing this combination while a transcoding process is running might
interrupt this transcoding process.
Changing Video / Audio Component Combination

The following steps describe how to change the video/audio component
combination of a Transcoder Card.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the Transcoder Card for which
the video/audio component combination must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the corresponding Transcoder
Card is displayed.
3 Under Resource Setup settings, select the video/audio component combination
in the Configurations drop down box.
The following combinations can be chosen:

0 HD - 0 SD - 32 Audio
0 HD - 10 SD - 12 Audio
Note: When the Transcoder Card already performs an audio or video
conversion, the video/audio component combinations which can't be combined
with the conversion in progress are grayed out. For example: when the
Transcoder Card performs three SD video conversion, 0 HD - 0 SD - 32 Audio and
0 HD - 2 SD - 28 Audio can not longer be chosen.
4011746 Rev W 85
Important: Changing this video/audio component combination while a transcoding

process is running might interrupt this transcoding process.
Shutting Down the IP Video Gateway Card

Introduction
The DCM's IP Video Gateway Card is hot swappable, meaning this card can be
removed without powering of the DCM. To prevent damaging the IP Video
Gateway Card during disconnecting, the card must be shut down. This can be done
via the web browser user interface of the DCM or by pressing the eject button. The
procedure to shut down the card via the eject button and the procedure to remove
the card can be found in the system guide that is shipped with the device.
To Shut Down the IP Video Gateway Card

The following procedure describes how to shut down an IP Video Gateway Card.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the IP Video Gateway Card that
must be shut down.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the IP Video Gateway Card is
displayed.
3 Click on the Hot Swap command button.
Result: The following confirmation box is displayed.
4 Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to

The IP Video Gateway Card can be removed when the LEDs on the card start
blinking.
86 4011746 Rev W
ASI Port Configuration

Introduction
General
The ASI Interface Card and ASI SFN Interface Card of the DCM are provided with a
number of ASI ports, which can be configured individually either as input or output
port. The ASI Interface Card is populated with 10 ASI ports and the ASI SFN
Interface Card with 8. The configuration parameters of the ASI ports can be found
on the Configuration - Interface sub page of the ASI interface card. The ASI port
numbering used by the GUI is shown in the illustration below.
ASI Interface Card
ASI SFN Interface Card
Tip: The ASI SFN Interface Card is also provided with two GPS reference signal
inputs. More information about these inputs can be found in topic Integrating the
DCM into Single Frequency Networks on page 869.
ASI Input Bandwidth Limitation

The bandwidth of an incoming Transport Stream on an ASI port can be limited.
When the bandwidth of the Transport Stream exceeds a particular value, packets
will be dropped and the ASI Input Bandwidth Exceeded alarm will be activated.
Due to the clock inaccuracy of the source device and the DCM (max. 30 ppm/clock),
a margin of 20 Kbps will automatically be added to the given limit (Input Rate Limit
(Mbps) parameter). This avoids dropping packets by clock differences between
both devices.
Tip: The Input Rate Limit (Mbps) parameter can also be modified via SNMP using
the SA_Europe_DCM_SMI2.mib.
4011746 Rev W 87
ASI Output Port Mirroring

An ASI input or output port can be mirrored to one or multiple ASI output ports
belonging to the same interface card. When an ASI port is configured as a port
mirror for another ASI output port (mirror port), the output of this port is an exact
copy of the output of the mirrored port. For a single ASI interface Card, maximum
5 ports can be mirrored and one port can have maximum nine mirror ports. For an
ASI SFN Interface Card, maximum 4 ports can be mirrored and one port can have
maximum 7 mirror ports.
Once a port is mirrored to a port, additional configuration has to be done on the
mirrored port. Configuring mirror ports is not possible. When an alarm arises on
a mirrored port, only an alarm will be generated for the mirrored port, not for the
mirror ports.
In the DCM Outputs tree on the Service - Tree View sub page, a mirrored output
port and its mirror ports are combined in one port branch. The following
illustration depicts a branch of output port 3 mirrored to port 1, 2, and 4.
When an input port is mirrored to one or multiple output ports, the mirror output
port(s) is (are) not visible in the DCM Outputs tree.
For more information concerning the DCM Inputs and Outputs tree, please refer to
topic Introducing the Services Trees on page 132.
Note: When a port is mirrored to a port, all settings for this mirror port and all
routings to this port are removed.
To Configure an ASI Input Port

The following procedure explains how to configure an input port of an ASI Interface
Card or ASI SFN Interface Card.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which an
ASI input port must be configured.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the I/O settings of the
interface card is displayed.
Tip: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the interface card can also be
displayed by right-clicking on the card in the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree
and pointing to Configuration in the short-cut menu.
88 4011746 Rev W
Note: The Name, Type, Enabled, Packet Format, and Output Mode parameter
of a mirror port are not applicable, see topic To Configure a Mirror Port on page
91.
3 In the Name box of the ASI port in question, enter a name for this input port. A
logical name will facilitate the identification of the ASI input port in the web
4 In the Type drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Input.
Result: When the Type parameter is set to Input, both the Packet Format and
Output Mode parameter are grayed out.
WARNING:
When the port type is changed, the related Transport Stream and service
settings are removed!
5 In the Enable drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Enabled to enable
the ASI input port or Disabled to disable the port.
6 When the bandwidth of the Transport Stream on the incoming ASI port must be
limited, tick the Input Rate Limit (Mbps) check box and enter the value in the
corresponding box.
Note:
- If the ASI connector is fed with a valid signal, the packet format (188 Bytes or
204 Bytes) of this incoming signal is displayed in the Packet Format box of
the ASI port, otherwise the packet format is indicated by Undefined.
- Changing an Input port to an Output port is not possible when services or
components of the port are passed to the output.
4011746 Rev W 89
To Configure an ASI Output Port

The following procedure explains how to configure an output port of an ASI
Interface Card or ASI SFN Interface Card.
1 On the web user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which a
port must be configured.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the I/O Settings table
of the interface card is displayed.
Note: The Name, Type, Enabled, Packet Format, and Output Mode parameter
of a mirror port are not applicable, see topic To Configure a Mirror Port on page
91.
3 In the Name box of the ASI port in question, enter a name for this output port.
A logical name will facilitate the identification of the ASI output port in the web
4 In the Type drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Output.
WARNING:
When the port type is changed, the related Transport Stream and service
settings are removed!
5 In the Enable drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Enabled to enable
the ASI output port or Disabled to disable the port.
6 In the Packet Format drop down box, select 188 Bytes or 204 Bytes. When the
packet format is set to 204, 16 null bytes for Reed Solomon FEC bytes are added
to the outgoing packets.
90 4011746 Rev W
7 In the Output Mode drop down box, set the output mode of the outgoing ASI
stream to Byte (burst mode) or to Packet mode. This parameter is default set to
Byte.
To Configure a Mirror Port

The following procedure describes how to configure a mirror port.
1 On the web user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which a
mirror port must be configured.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the I/O Settings table
of the interface card is displayed.
3 In the Mirror of Port drop down box of the corresponding port, enter the port
number of the mirrored port.
Note:
After pressing the Apply command button, all settings for this port and all
routings to this port are removed and the selected port is mirrored to this port.
With the exception of the Mirror of Port parameter, all port parameters of a
mirror port are not applicable.
4011746 Rev W 91
Port mirroring can be disabled by setting the Mirror of Port parameter of the
mirror port to None.
Checking the ASI Port Parameters

A parameter overview per ASI port together with a graphical representation of the
port location on the rear panel of the DCM can be found on the port Configuration
sub page of the web browser interface. The following illustration depicts a port
Configuration sub page.
Perform the following steps to view the parameter overview of a particular ASI port.
1 On the web browser user browser interface of the DCM, point to the
Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, expand the interface card branch for which a
port must be checked.
3 Double click this port.
Result: The Configuration sub page of the port in question is displayed with the
following interface information.
- Number: port number
92 4011746 Rev W
- Name: port name

- Type: input or output port
- State: state of the port
- Packet format: 188 or 204 bytes
- Output mode: Burst (byte) or Packet mode
Tips:
configuration box. The corresponding ASI port is highlighted. Clicking on an
interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the Configuration -
Interface sub page of the corresponding interface card.
The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the settings to configure the
corresponding port can directly be accessed by pressing the Configure Port
command button.
The Configuration page of a particular port can also be displayed by
right-clicking on the port in the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to Configuration in the short-cut menu.
4011746 Rev W 93
GbE Port Configuration

Configuring the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port
Introduction
A GbE Interface Card is equipped with four SFP cages that can be populated with
GbE SFT transceivers and the IP Video Gateway Cad with two SFP cages that can be
populated with either GbE SFT Transceivers or 10GbE SFP Transceivers. Both
Ethernet ports of an IP Video Gateway Card make one port pair and the ethernet
ports of the GbE Interface Cards make two port pairs. Since both ports of a port
pair are considered as one virtual port, particular settings are configurable per
individual port and particular settings configurable per port pair.
Important: The DCM needs the knowledge of the speed of the SFP transceivers
installed into the IP Video Gateway Module. The procedure to do this can be found
in topic Setting the Speed Mode of the IP Video Gateway Card Ethernet Ports on page 95.
The illustration below shows these GbE port pairs.
GbE Interface Card
IP Video Gateway Card
Note: The GbE ports within a port pair can be configured in such a way that they can
participate into GbE port backup applications. More information concerning GbE
port backup can be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Backup Parameters on page
738.
94 4011746 Rev W
Setting the Speed Mode of the IP Video Gateway Card Ethernet Ports
Introduction
The GbE ports of the IP Video Gateway Card can be populated with either GbE SFP
transceivers or with 10GbE SFP Transceivers. The DCM needs the knowledge of
the SFP modules installed into the card. This can be done by specifying the
corresponding speed mode of the ports, 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps.
Important: Changing the speed mode to 10 Gbps needs the GW_10G_GBE license.
To Set the Speed Mode of the Ethernet Ports

The following procedure describes how to set the speed mode of the Ethernet ports
of an IP Video Gateway Card.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the IP Video Gateway Card for
which the GbE port speed mode must be set.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.
3 In the Mode drop down box under the GbE Port Speed settings, select 1 Gbps or
10 Gbps.
Result: After changing the Mode parameter, a warning is displayed informing

that the IP Video Gateway Card must be restarted.
5 Restart the card as described in topic Shutting Down the IP Video Gateway Card on
page 86.
Configuring the GbE Port Settings

To configure GbE ports, the following parameters can be changed:
Name parameter
IP Address parameter
The IP addresses in the following ranges are not allowed:
- 0.0.0.0 - 0.255.255.255 (reserved by IANA)
- 127.0.0.0 - 127.255.255.255 (reserved by IANA)
- 224.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 (multicast addresses)
Subnet Mask parameter
4011746 Rev W 95
Auto Negotiation parameter

Auto-Negotiation is a function where a device learns the capabilities of the
device at the other end of the link and configures itself to the highest common set
of capabilities. This setting must be equal to the auto-negotiation setting of the
connected system. For Electrical GbE SFP Transceivers without 1000Base-X
auto-negotiation capabilities, this parameter must be disabled. For Electrical
GbE SFP Transceivers with 1000Base-X auto-negotiation capabilities, this
parameter must be enabled. More information concerning SFP transceivers can
be found in the System Guide shipped with your DCM.
Note: For an IP Video Gateway Card of which the GbE ports are populated with
10GbE SFP modules and for which the GbE Port Speed - Mode parameter is set
to 10 Gbps, the Auto Negotiation parameter is not applicable.
Filtering parameter
As described in topic Settings the GbE UDP Boundary on page 100, UDP packets
are filtered using the destination UDP port number. All UDP packets for which
the destination UDP port number is greater than the GbE UDP boundary setting
parameter are considered as MPEG (GbE Interface Card) or SDI (IP Video
Gateway Card) data packets. A second filtering on these MPEG/SDI data
packets is by default done by using IP address filtering. All UDP packets for
which the destination IP address matches the IP address of the GbE port will be
processed. For certain reasons, for instance for IP aliasing, this second
MPEG/SDI data packet filtering must be done by using MAC address filtering.
All MPEG/SDI data packets for which the MAC address matches the MAC
address of the GbE port will be processed.
The following filters can be used:
- Disabled: all MPEG/SDI data IP packets will be processed.
- MAC Only: all MPEG/SDI data IP packets matching the MAC address of the
GbE port will be processed.
- IP Only (default): all MPEG/SDI data IP packets matching the IP address of
the GbE port will be processed.
- MAC and IP: all MPEG/SDI data IP packets matching the IP address and the
MAC address of the GbE port will be processed.
Note: Both the IP Address and Subnet Mask parameter for a port become
inapplicable if IP aliases are added to this port. More information concerning the IP
Aliasing feature can be found in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE
Ports on page 116.
96 4011746 Rev W
The following procedure explains how to change the interface parameters of a GbE
port.
WARNING:
After changing network settings of a GbE port, the routes will be removed and
should be reapplied.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP
Video Gateway Card for which GbE port interface parameters must be changed.
3 For an IP Video Gateway Card, point to the Interface GbE link.
Result: The Configuration - Interface GbE sub page is displayed.
4 Perform the following settings in the GbE Name and Network Settings table:
Note: For an IP Video Gateway Card, port A is indicated by 1 and port B by 2.

a In the Name box of the port in question, enter a name of maximum 40
characters. A logical port name facilitates the identification of the GbE port
in the application.
b In the IP Address box of the port in question, enter the IP address that
should be assigned to this port. The octets of the IP address must be
separated by dots.
c In the Subnet Mask box of the port in question, enter the mask that
determines the subnet to which the IP address belongs. The octets of the
Subnet Mask must be separated by dots.
d Switch on or off auto-negotiation by selecting On or Off in the Auto
Negotiation drop down box of the port in question.
e In the Filtering drop down box, select one of the following values: Disabled,
MAC Only, IP Only, or MAC & IP.
4011746 Rev W 97
Changing GbE Port Pair Settings

To configure a GbE port pair, the following parameters can be changed.
Enable parameter: determines the status of a GbE port pair, Enabled/Disabled.
Disable Mode parameter: determines the disable state of the port pair.
- Port Only Disabled: the GbE port pair is disabled.
- Full Link Disabled: the GbE port pair is disabled in such a way that the device
connected to this port pair detects link loss. This setting is useful in case of
device backup with the Digital Headend Backup Task of ROSA® NMS.
Port Mirroring parameter: determines the mirroring mode of the ports within
the GbE port pair.
- Disabled: only the active port of the GbE port pair streams out MPEG/SDI
data packets.
- Mirror 1 on 2 or Mirror 3 on 4: the backup port of the port pair streams out an
exact copy of the main port.
Note: Port mirroring works only correctly for multicast destinations. Streaming
out unicast traffic to different destinations is not possible with this as the streams
are an exact copy of each other.
Mirror of Port Pair parameter: determines the mirroring mode of the GbE port
pair of a GbE Interface Card. When the mirroring mode of a port pair is
switched on, the active port of the port pair will playout the same data as the
active port of the mirrored port pair.
Notes:
- Switching on mirroring for both port pairs of a GbE Interface Card is not
possible.
- To determine the source IP address for an outgoing Transport Steam
belonging to a port pair for which the mirrored mode is switched on, the
following rules or used (order of priority)
the IP address of the mirrored port will be used for both port pairs if the
IP address of the mirrored port is forced.
the source IP address of the VLAN will be used if the Transport Stream
belongs to a VLAN and a VLAN is configured for the port pair (active or
mirror).
the IP address of the port will be used if the stream belongs to a VLAN
and no VLAN is configured for the port pair (active or mirror).
the IP address of the port (active or mirror) will be used if the stream do
not belong to a VLAN.
98 4011746 Rev W
- The Mirror of Port Pair parameter is not applicable for an IP Video Gateway
Card since such card is only equipped with one GbE port pair,
Output Streaming parameter: determines the outgoing MPEG/SDI data packet
streaming through the port pair.
- On: output streaming is switched on.
- Off: output streaming is switched off.
- Auto: output streaming follows the active/inactive state of the device,
meaning output streaming is switched off when the DCM is inactive and vice
versa.
Note: The actual streaming state is an internal port state. This does not mean
that the Transport Streams will be streamed out at this port. Physically output
streaming needs:
- The Enabled parameter of the GbE port pair is Enabled.
- Output Streaming parameter for the port pair is set to On (or set to Auto for
an active device).
- The selected port is active (not in port backup state).
- The Streaming parameter of the streams is set to Activate.
The following procedure explains how to configure a GbE Port Pair.
Result: The Configuration - Interface GbE sub page is displayed
4 Perform the following settings in the GbE Settings table.
Notes:
For an IP Video Gateway Card, port A is indicated by 1 and port B by 2.
The Mirror of Port Pair parameter is not applicable for the port pair
belonging to an IP Video Gateway Card
a In the Enable drop down box of the port pair in question, select Enabled or
Disabled.
b In the Disable Mode drop down box, select Port Only or Full Link.
4011746 Rev W 99
c In the Port Mirroring drop down box of the port pair in question, select
Mirror X on Y or Disabled.
d In the Mirror of Port Pair drop down box of the port pair in question, select
X-Y to determine the mirrored port or None to disable the mirroring mode of
the port pair.
Result: After changing the Mirror of Port Pair parameter, the following
confirmation box is displayed.
Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to

e In the Output Streaming drop down box of the port pair in question, select
one of the following values: On, Off, or Auto.
Settings the GbE UDP Boundary

The GbE UDP boundary setting acts as a filter for the incoming traffic. All traffic
with UDP port greater than this setting will be considered and processed by the
DCM as MPEG/SDI data. All traffic below this setting will be processed as non
MPEG/SDI data. The Boundary parameter can be set between 0 and 65535 for each
GbE Interface Card/IP Video Gateway Card and the default value is 6000. The
following procedure explains how to set the GbE UDP boundary setting.
Video Gateway Card for which the boundary setting must be changed.
4 In the Boundary box under the GbE UDP Boundery Setting, enter the UDP Port
value for the GbE UDP boundary setting.
100 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port

The interface parameters of a GbE port together with a graphical representation of
the port location on the rear panel of the DCM can be found in the Info table on the
Configuration sub page of the port. The following illustration depicts a port
Configuration sub page of a Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900.
Perform the following steps to view the Info sub page of a particular GbE port.
1 On the web browser user browser interface of the DCM, point to the
Configuration link.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, expand the GbE Interface Card branch or IP
Video Gateway Card branch for which a GbE port must be checked.
3 Double click on this port.
Result: The Configuration page of the port in question is displayed with the
following interface parameters:
4011746 Rev W 101

Number: port number

Name: port name
Type
State: state of the port pair to which this port belongs
MAC Address: MAC address of the port
IP Address: IP address of the port
Subnet Mask: Subnet Mask of the subnet to which this port belongs
Auto-Negotiation: the auto-negotiation state of the port
Note: More information concerning the interface parameters of a GbE port can be
found in topic To Configure the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port on page 95.
Tips:
configuration box. The corresponding GbE port is highlighted. Clicking on an
interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the Configuration -
Interface sub page of the corresponding interface card.
The Configuration - Interface sub page of the GbE Interface Card or
Configuration - Interface GbE of the IP Video Gateway Card to which the port
belongs can be accessed by pressing the Configure Port command button.
The Configuration page of a particular port can also be displayed by
right-clicking on the port in the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to Configuration in the short-cut menu.
Adding or Deleting Static ARP Table Entries

Introduction
For unicast IP streaming (1 sender and 1 receiver) within a particular LAN the DCM
needs the knowledge of the MAC address of the device to which must be streamed.
Before the DCM starts streaming to a device with a particular IP address, it starts the
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to identify the MAC address of this device by
broadcasting an ARP request message and receiving an ARP reply message, which
contains the MAC address, from the device.
102 4011746 Rev W

When a DCM is integrated into a unidirectional application, the system is not able to
receive ARP reply messages after broadcasting ARP request messages. To deal
with this the MAC address can manually be mapped to the IP address by adding a
static ARP table entry.
Note: Static ARP combined with VLAN is partially supported. If a static ARP is
required on a VLAN port, a configuration on the underlying physical port is needed.
Meaning this configuration applies to all VLAN ports attached to the physical port.
More information concerning the VLAN functionality of the DCM can be found in
topic Configuring VLAN on page 107.
To Add a Static ARP Table Entry

The following procedure explains how to add a static ARP entry to the ARP table.
Video Gateway Card for which static ARP entries should be added to the ARP
table.
3 Point to the ARP link.
Result: The Configuration - ARP sub page is displayed.
4 Under the Add New Static ARP Entry settings, tick the Port check box(s) of the
port(s) for which a static ARP entry must be added.
5 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address. The octets of the IP address must
be separated by dots.
6 In the MAC address box, enter the MAC address associated with the entered IP
address. The octets of the MAC address must be separated by colons.
7 Click on the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
Result: After pressing the Add command button, the new Static ARP entry is
added to the Static ARP Settings table.
4011746 Rev W 103

Deleting Static ARP Entries

The following procedure explains how to delete Static ARP entries from the ARP
table.
Video Gateway Card for which static ARP entries should be removed from the
ARP table.
3 Click on the ARP link.
Result: The Configuration - ARP sub page is displayed.
4 Tick the check box(es) in front of the Static ARP entry (entries) that must be
removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static ARP Settings table,
tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick
the check box of the last row.
selected entry (entries) will be removed from the Static ARP Settings table.
104 4011746 Rev W

Adapting the Static Route Table

Introduction
When the DCM has to stream to a device situated outside the subnet to which the
DCM belongs to, the Address Resolution Protocol is inadequate. To deal with this a
Static Route Table must be setup containing the necessary information about the
routes to that second network.
In the illustration above DCM A requires the knowledge of the router port that
participates into the subnet of the DCM and the IP settings of LAN 2 of DCM B.
Note: Static routes combined with VLAN is partially supported. If a static route is
required on a VLAN port, a configuration on the underlying physical port is needed.
Meaning this configuration applies to all VLAN ports attached to the physical port.
More information concerning the VLAN functionality of the DCM can be found in
topic Configuring VLAN on page 107.
To Add a New Static Route Entry

The procedure below explains how to add a new static route entry to the static route
table.
Video Gateway Card for which static route entries should be added to the Static
Route table.
4011746 Rev W 105


3 Point to the Routes link.
4 Under the Add New Static Route settings, tick the Port check box(es) of the
port(s) for which a static route entry must be created.
5 Tick the Default Gateway check box if a direct reachable IP router is used.
Note: When the Default Gateway check box is set, both the IP address and the
Subnet Mask parameter are not applicable.
6 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the destination network or
destination host. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
7 In the Subnet Mask box, enter the Subnet Mask of the destination network
(when a host IP address is entered, this parameter is not relevant). The octets of
the Subnet Mask must be separated by dots.
8 In the Gateway box, enter the IP address of the port of the router to the
destination port. The octets of the Gateway must be separated by dots.
9 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
Result: After pressing the Add command button, the new static route entry is
added to the Static Route Settings table.
To Remove a Static Route Entry

Perform the following steps to remove a static route entry from the static route entry
table.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the icon of the GbE Interface
Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which static route entries should be removed
from the Static Route table.
3 Select the Routes link.
106 4011746 Rev W

4 Tick the check box(es) in front of the entry (entries) that must be removed from
the Static Route Settings table.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static Route Settings
table, point to the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and
hold down the [SHIFT] key, and point to the check box of the last row that must
be removed.
selected route entry (entries) will be removed from the Static Route Setting
table.
Configuring VLAN
Introduction
About Virtual Local Area Network
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network configuration in which
devices communicate using Local Area Network (LAN) protocols as if they were
the same physical LAN, but where they are in fact on physical separate LAN.
Broadcast and other LAN traffic remains within the LAN.
Software masks the physical topology of the devices and provides a logical
topology, which is more suitable to the user’s requirements.
About a DCM in a VLAN Environment
VLAN port pairs can be configured for a GbE port pair with VLAN identifier
and with own IP address and subnet mask for each port in the port pair.
Remark
When a VLAN port pair is defined:
the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream coming from the
corresponding VLAN must match the IP address of the VLAN port pair.
the filtering of the GbE ports must be set to MAC only or Disabled and not the
default value (IP only). More information concerning Filtering can be found in
topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 95.
4011746 Rev W 107

Notes
The DCM with software version 7.5 supports:
- VLAN tagging of outgoing Transport Stream packets
- VLAN Tagging of IGMP packets
- VLAN tagging of dynamic ARP packets (both request and replies)
- When no source IP address is given using the web browser user interface of
the DCM, the source IP address of a VLAN tagged outgoing Transport
Stream is the IP address of the VLAN port. If no such port exists, the IP
address of the GbE port (physical port) is used.
The procedure to change the source IP address of an outgoing Transport
Stream can be found in topic Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing
Transport Streams on page 218.
The following list describes the VLAN functionality of the DCM:
Streaming different Transport Streams with same destination multicast IP
address and same UDP port, and different VLAN ID is not allowed.
Receiving multicast Transport Streams on the same GbE port with identical IP
address/UDP port from two different VLANs is not possible.
Receiving unicast Transport Streams on the same GbE port with identical UDP
port from two different VLANs is not possible.
IP aliasing on VLAN ports is not possible.
Static ARP and static routing (in particular default gateway) on VLAN ports are
only partially supported. More information about static ARP can be found in
topic Adding or Deleting Static ARP Table Entries on page 102 and about static
routing in topic Adapting the Static Route Table on page 105.
Adding VLAN Port Pairs

Perform the following procedure to add VLAN port pairs to a particular port pair.
Video Gateway Card for which VLAN port pairs must be added.
3 Click on the VLAN link.
Result: The Configuration - VLAN sub page is displayed.
108 4011746 Rev W

4 Perform the following settings under the Add New VLAN settings.
a In the Port Pair selection box, point to the port pair for which a VLAN port
pair must be added.
b In the VLAN ID box, enter a unique VLAN identifier for the corresponding
VLAN port pair. A VLAN ID in the range from 1 up to 4094 can be used.
c In the First IP Address box, enter an IP address for the first port in the port
pair. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
d In the First Subnet Mask box, enter the subnet mask for the first port in the
port pair. The octets of the subnet mask must be separated by dots.
e In the Second IP Address box, enter an IP address for the second port in the
port pair. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: The IP addresses of both ports must not be in use by a GbE port,
another VLAN port pair, or IP aliasing.
f In the Second Subnet Mask box, enter the subnet mask for the second port in
the port pair. The octets of the subnet mask must be separated by dots.
g Click on the Add command button.
Result: The VLAN port pair is added to the VLAN Settings table.
Note: The number of VLAN port pairs is limited to 118/GbE Interface Card.
Removing VLAN Port Pairs

The following steps explain how to remove VLAN port pairs from a particular GbE
port pair.
Video Gateway Card for which VLAN port pairs must be removed.
3 Click on the VLAN link.
4011746 Rev W 109

Result: The Configuration - VLAN sub page is displayed.

4 In the VLAN Settings table, tick the check box(es) of the VLAN port pair rows
that must be removed.
Tips:
To sort the VLAN Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing to the header.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows, tick the check box of the first row
that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the
check box of the last row that must be removed.
5 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Result: The selected row(s) is (are) removed from the VLAN Settings table.
Note: When a VLAN port is in use (for instance if an IGMP Multicast Group with
corresponding VLAN ID is joined) the port pair can not be removed.
Joining or Leaving GbE Ports to IGMP Multicast Groups

Introduction
The Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a dynamic protocol to register hosts
in a multicast group on a particular LAN by exchanging IGMP messages. The
DCM is compatible with IGMP version 1, 2, and 3.
When the DCM participates into a VLAN environment, the IGMP packets must be
VLAN tagged corresponding the VLAN port pairs. More information concerning
VLAN can be found in topic Configuring VLAN on page 107.
Joining a GbE Port to a Multicast Group

Perform the following steps to join one or more GbE ports of a GbE Interface Card or
an IP Video Gateway Card to a multicast group.
110 4011746 Rev W


Video Gateway Card for which GbE port pair(s) must be added to a Multicast
Group.
Result: The Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Point to the IGMP link.
Result: The IGMP sub page is displayed.
4 Under the Join or Modify Multicast Group settings, configure the following
parameters:
a In the Port Pair selection box, select the Port Pair selection button of the port
pair that should be added to the Multicast Group.
b In the Available VLAN IDs drop down box, select the VLAN ID
corresponding the VLAN port pair. Select None to choose the native GbE
port pair (without VLAN tags).
c In the Multicast IP Address box enter the IP address of the multicast group.
The octets of the multicast IP address must be separated by dots.
d In the Filter drop down box, select the source filtering:
– Include: adds the IP address(es) to the include list of sources. An Include
source list contains the IP addresses from which multicast reception is
allowed.
– Exclude: adds the IP address(es) to exclude list of sources. An Exclude
source list contains the IP addresses from which multicast reception is not
allowed.
e In the Source IP Address box, enter the IP address that must be added to the
Include or Exclude source list.
Notes:
– When multiple IP addresses must be added to the source list, point to the
Insert Row command button to enlarge the Join or Modify Multicast
Group table and enter the IP address in the corresponding Source IP
Address box.
4011746 Rev W 111

– Successive IP addresses can be added to the source list by inserting a

range. The following steps explain how to insert a range:
Tick the Insert IP Address Range check box.
In the First Source IP Address box, enter the first IP address of the
range.
In the Count box, enter the number of successive IP addresses.
Point to the Insert Range command button.
Result: The IP addresses are added to the Join or Modify Multicast Group
table.
f Click on the Join command button.
Result: The IP addresses are added to the source list and appear in the IGMP
Settings table.
Notes:
The source filtering can always be adapted by changing the filter parameters and
pressing the Join command button.
When no source IP addresses must be specified, select Exclude in the Filter drop
down box without specifying source IP addresses.
In an IGMPv2 environment the Filter parameter must be set to Exclude.
When the network between a router and the DCM (using IGMPv3) is populated
with snooping switches supporting IGMPv2, the Version parameter under the
Unsolicited IGMP Message settings must be set to IGMPv2.
The DCM will use always the lowest version, when the Version parameter is set
to IGMPv3 and other equipment uses a lower version, the DCM will send out the
lower version IGMP messages.
112 4011746 Rev W

Leaving the Multicast Group Membership of a GbE Port

The following steps explain how to cancel a multicast group membership of a GbE
port.
Video Gateway Card for which GbE ports must be removed from a multicast
group.
3 Point to the IGMP link.
Result: The IGMP sub page is displayed.
4 In the IGMP Settings table, tick the check box(es) in front of the entry (entries)
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the IGMP Settings table,
point to the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and
point to the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Leave Checked Items command button to confirm or the Reload
Result: After pressing the Leave Checked Items command button, the entries
are removed from the IGMP Settings table.
4011746 Rev W 113

Checking the Routes to Destination Devices

Introduction
Particular status parameters of the routes to destination devices to which should be
streamed are categorized on the Status - Destinations sub page of the web browser
user interface. The route parameters that can be found on the Status - Destinations
sub page are:
Port: represents the port number for the route.

VLAN ID: represents the VLAN identifier.
IP Address: represents the IP Address of the destination device.
Routing: represents the status of the route to the destination device, possible
values:
- Not Routable: no route to the destination device
- Routable (via Gateway): a route to the destination device exists, the destination
device is situated in another subnet of the DCM port and the connection is
established using a router.
- Routable (Destination in LAN): a route to the destination device exists. The
destination device is situated in the same subnet of the DCM port.
- Not Applicable
ARP: represents the result of ARP, possible values:
- Destination Resolved: the DCM received an ARP reply message from the
destination device that is situated in the same subnet.
114 4011746 Rev W

- Destination Unresolved: the DCM doesn't receive an ARP reply message from
the destination device in the same subnet after broadcasting ARP request
messages.
- Gateway Resolved: the destination device is situated in another subnet and the
DCM receives an ARP reply message from the router to this subnet.
- Gateway Unresolved: the destination device is situated in another subnet and
the DCM doesn't receive an ARP reply message from the router after
broadcasting ARP request messages.
- Destination has Static ARP: the static ARP entry is used for the route to the
destination device (same subnet) or to the router (different subnet).
- Multicast
- Not Applicable
Tip: To sort the Destinations Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the
table header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the parameter header.
To Check the Routes to Destination Devices

The following steps explain how to check the connection parameters of destination
devices.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Destinations link
after clicking on the Status link.
Result: The Status - Destinations sub page is displayed.
2 In the drop down box, select the interface card for which status parameters of the
routes to destination devices must be checked.
Result: The Destinations Overview table of the selected interface card is
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 115

Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature

Introduction
To eliminate additional clients to feed backup DCMs in a backup application or to
avoid the need for additional client licenses, the DCM supports IP address takeover
by using IP aliasing. The IP aliasing feature of the DCM works as follows:
When a client has to send IP packets to a port of the main DCM and the client's ARP
table is not yet or no longer populated with ARP entries for this port, the client
broadcasts an ARP request message containing the IP address of these packets.
When IP aliasing is active on a network interface of the main DCM, the DCM
responds with an ARP reply message containing IP address and MAC address of the
port. When the client receives the ARP reply, it ads an ARP entry containing the
mapping between IP address and MAC address for this port and starts sending IP
packets to this port. When the backup DCM is activated, it broadcasts several
gratuitous ARP messages containing the alias IP address and the MAC address of
the corresponding backup DCM port. When the client receives such message it
refreshes the ARP entry of the IP address matching the Alias IP address. Now the
IP packets with destination IP address matching the alias IP address for the main
DCM port will be sent to the corresponding backup DCM port.
Three modes can be used for IP aliasing:
Inactive: the IP alias feature is not active.
Active: the IP alias feature is active.
Auto: the IP alias feature matches the DCM status, meaning the IP alias Mode is
active when the DCM status is active and vice versa.
Notes:
The following procedures describe how to change the IP alias mode for a GbE
port on a GbE Interface Card and how to add or remove IP aliases to or from
such port. The management ports also support IP Aliasing. The procedures to
change the IP alias mode for management port and how to add or remove IP
aliases to or from such port is described in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing
Feature for the Management Ports on page 71.
IP aliasing can only be used for Advertising Servers.
IP aliasing can not be combined with VLAN port pairs. For more information
concerning the VLAN functionality of the DCM can be found in topic Configuring
VLAN on page 107.
For IP Aliasing, the filtering of the GbE port must be set to MAC only or Disabled
and not the default value (IP only). More information concerning Filtering can
be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 95.
116 4011746 Rev W

Changing the IP Alias Mode

The following procedure describes how to change the IP alias mode of a GbE port.
4 In the Mode drop down box in the IP Alias table of the port for which the IP
alias mode must be changed, select Inactive, Active, or Auto.

Adding an IP Alias
The following steps explain how to add a new IP alias to a GbE port.
4 In the Port drop down box under the Add New Alias settings, select the port to
which an IP alias must be added.
5 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address for the alias. The octets of the IP
address must be separated by dots.
Result: The IP alias is added to the corresponding IP Alias Port table.
4011746 Rev W 117


Result: When an IP alias is added to a port, the IP Address and Subnet Mask
parameter of this port becomes inapplicable.
Removing IP Aliases
Perform the following procedure to remove an IP alias from a GbE port.
4 In the IP Alias Port table of the corresponding port, set the check box in the row
of the IP alias that must be removed.

5 Press the Remove Checked Rows button.
Result: The IP alias is removed from the corresponding table.
118 4011746 Rev W

Checking the GbE Statistics

Introduction
The Status - GbE Statistics sub page represents more information concerning the
overall statistics on traffic passing through each GbE port of the DCM. The values
displayed are accumulated since the last start-up or the last reset. These figures can
be refreshed by pressing the Reload command button.
The counters on the Status - GbE Statistics sub page can also be shown in rate
representation mode (number of frames per second). These figures are refreshed
every 10 seconds. For some reasons it can be useful to switch off this automatic
refresh action. Therefore if the representation mode is set to Rate, the Status - GbE
Statistics sub page is provided with a Refresh drop down box that can be used to
switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the automatically refresh action.
The following list describes the counters shown on the Status - GbE Statistics sub
page.
Frames Received OK (Counters)
- Total frames received: the total number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port
- Broadcast frames: the number of frames successfully received by the
corresponding port and which were directed to the broadcast address
- Multicast frames: the number of frames successfully received by the
corresponding port and which are directed to a multicast address
- Control frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, of which the Length/Type field was provided with the
special Control Frame ID
4011746 Rev W 119

- VLAN tagged frames: the number of error-free VLAN frames received by

the corresponding port
- Pause frames: the number of pause frames received by the corresponding
port
- 64 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, which had a length of 64 bytes
- 65-127 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, which had a length between 65 and 127 bytes
- 1024-max byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, which were between 1024 bytes and the maximum
length as specified by IEEE 802.3-2002
- Oversized frames: the number of frames received by the corresponding port,
of which the length exceeds the maximum length as specified by IEEE
802.3-2002
Reception Errors (Counters)
- FCS/CRC error: the total number of packets received by the corresponding

port, which had a length between 64 and 1518 bytes, but had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error)
or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error)
- Length/Type out of range: the number of frames received by the
corresponding port, which had a length of at least 64 bytes and where the
length/type field contained a length value that did not match the number of
MAC client data bytes received
120 4011746 Rev W

- Invalid Opcode: the number of error-free frames received by the

corresponding port, of which the Length/Type field was provided with
MAC Control type identifier 88-08 but with opcode other than the PAUSE
opcode
- Undersized frames: the number of error-free, well-formed frames received
by the corresponding port, which had a length less then 64 bytes
- Fragments: the number of frames received by the corresponding port, which
had a length less than 64 byte and with a bad Frame Check Sequence field
Frames Transmitted OK (Counters)
- Total frames transmitted: the total number of error-free frames transmitted

by the corresponding port
- Broadcast frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port to a broadcast address
- Multicast frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port to a multicast address
- Control frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port, of which the Length/Type field were provided with the
MAC Control Frame type identifier 88-08
- 64 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port, which had a length of 64 bytes
- 65-127 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
4011746 Rev W 121


- 1024-max byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port, which were between 1024 bytes and the maximum
length as specified by IEEE 802.3-2002
- VLAN tagged frames: the number of error-free VLAN frames transmitted by
the corresponding port
- Pause frames: the number of pause frames transmitted by the corresponding
port
Transmission errors (Counters)
- Oversized frames: the number of frames transmitted by the corresponding

port, of which the length exceeds the maximum length as specified by IEEE
802.3-2002
- Buffer underrun: the number of frames discarded because the transmit
buffer became empty during frame transmission
Global (Counters)
- Total Bytes received: the total number of bytes received by the

corresponding port
- Total Bytes transmitted: the total number of bytes transmitted by the
corresponding port
Checking the GbE Statistics

The following procedure explains how to check the GbE statistics.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to GbE Statistics link after
clicking on the Status link.
Result: The GbE statistics are displayed.
Tip: To sort the tables by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the
parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the
parameter header.
122 4011746 Rev W

2 In the Card drop down box, select the card for which GbE statistics should be
checked.
3 In the Mode drop down box, select Rates or Counters.
4 In the Refresh drop down box, select 10 sec or Stop.
4011746 Rev W 123

SDI Port Configuration

Introduction
The IP Video Gateway Card provides IP-encapsulation/decapsulation of
uncompressed SDI video. At the transmitter site, the IP Video Gateway Card
enables SDI video to be carried over 1GbE or 10GbE and at the receiving site the IP
Video Gateway Card converts the IP-encapsulated stream back to an uncompressed
SDI stream. The following illustration shows an IP Video Gateway Card.
The IP Video Gateway Card is populated with 2 GbE or 2 10GbE ports, 6 SDI ports, a
reference input (REF), and a loop through output (MON). The following
illustration shows these connectors.
124 4011746 Rev W

Configuring an SDI Port

The following steps explain how to enable and disable an SDI port and to rename a
port.
which the SDI settings must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the IP Video Gateway Card
containing the SDI Port Settings table is displayed.
3 In the Name box, enter a name for the port.

4 For optical SDI ports, select Input or Output.
Note: The SDI ports of the corresponding IP Video Gateway Card must be
populated with appropriate SFP transmitter of receiver modules. For more
information, please refer to the system guide shipped with your DCM or to the
Installation and Operation Instructions - Digital Content Manager (DCM) IP Video
Gateway Card shipped with the IP Video Gateway Card.
5 In the Enabled drop down box, select Enabled to enable the port or Disabled
otherwise.
6 Repeat step 3 and 4 for all ports for which settings must be changed.
Using SDI Generators

Introduction
The IP Video Gateway Card is provided with 6 SDI generators that can be used for
testing the functionality of the card or for replacing a missing incoming SDI signal.
The SDI generators are able to produce SDI signals having different formats,
framerates, and colors. A generator signal can easily be dragged and dropped to
the corresponding SDI output port or to the monitoring port.
4011746 Rev W 125

Each SDI generator is linked to an SDI output port. When an input loss alarm
occurs on the input for which the signal is routed to the output, the output port can
be disabled (SDI No Stream Mode parameter = 0 VDC) or a particular signal
generated by an SDI generator can be played out (SDI No Stream Mode parameter
= Generator).
When SDI generators are enabled, the streams are shown in the DCM inputs tree.
To Configure SDI Generators

Perform the following procedure to configure SDI generators.
which the SDI generator settings must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the IP Video Gateway Card is
displayed.
3 In the SDI Generator Settings table, complete the following settings in the row
of the SDI generator for which the configuration must be changed.
4 In the Enable drop down box, select Enabled to enable the corresponding
generator or Disabled to disable the generator.
126 4011746 Rev W

5 In the Mode drop down box, select the desired video format. This format must
match the format of the corresponding incoming video signal. Depending on
the licenses installed on the DCM, the video formats are: 3G 1080p 50fps, 3G
1080p 60fps, HD 720p 30fps, HD 720p 25fps, SD PAL, SD NTSC, HD 1080i 30fps,
HD 1080i 25fps, HD 1080i 30fps, HD 1080p 30fps, HD 1080p 25fps, HD 720p 60fps,
or HD 720p 50fps.
6 In the Color Mode drop down box, select one of the following values:
RGB: a signal will be generated with a fixed color
RGB Cycling: a signal will be generated with cycling color
7 In the Color (RGB) boxes, enter the desired RGB values in the corresponding
boxes (default set to black, RGB: 0:0:0). The first box indicates the brightness of
Red, the second Green and the third Blue.
Note: These parameters are only applicable if the Color Mode parameter is set to
RGB.
Changing the SDI No Stream Mode

The following steps describe how to change the SDI no stream mode of an IP Video
Gateway Card.
which the SDI generator settings must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the IP Video Gateway Card
containing the SDI No Stream Mode setting is displayed.
3 In the SDI No Stream Mode drop down box, select the desired value: 0 VDC or
Generator.
Note: Changing the SDI No Stream Mode parameter from 0 VDC to Generator
automatically disables all SDI generators.
4011746 Rev W 127

Changing the Display Mode

Introduction
In the web browser user interface of the DCM, the display mode for the following
parameters can be set to decimal or to hexadecimal:
Original Network Identifier (ON ID)
Transport Stream Identifier (TS ID)
Service Identifier (SID)
Packet Identifier (PID)
The value of a parameter for which the display mode is set to hexadecimal is
prefixed by 0x.
To Change the Display Mode of ON IDs, TS IDs, SIDs, and/or PIDs

The following procedure explains how to change the display mode for ON IDs, TS
IDs, SIDs, and/or PIDs.
2 Click on the Defaults Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page containing the Display
Mode settings is displayed.
128 4011746 Rev W

Changing the Display Mode
3 In the Display Mode box, select Decimal or Hex in the drop down box of the
identifier in question.
4 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
4011746 Rev W 129

3 Chapter 3
Using the Tree View
Introduction
This chapter describes how to use the tree view of the web browser
user interface of the DCM.
In this Chapter
Introducing the Services Trees.................................................................. 132
Introducing the Advanced Routing Tree ................................................ 156
Changing Tree Settings .............................................................................. 164
Representation Mode of the Incoming Services ..................................... 169
Finding Services or Transport Streams in a Tree ................................... 173
Determining the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the
DCM Inputs Tree ........................................................................................ 176
4011746 Rev W 131

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View
Introducing the Services Trees

About the Tree
The incoming services as well as the outgoing services are shown on the Tree View
sub page of the web browser user interface. The left hand pane of the page reflects
the incoming services and the right hand pane the outgoing services. By default
both the incoming and outgoing services are represented using trees (called DCM
Inputs and DCM Outputs tree) for which the branches can be expanded or
collapsed by pressing respectively the or sign. The representation of the
incoming services can be changed, see topic Representation Mode of the Incoming
Services on page 169.
When the DCM is equipped with a Transcoder Card, the Tree View sub page is
provided with an additional pane, called Processing Tree pane. After expanding
this pane, the DCM Processing Tree is displayed populated with the services for
which video and/or audio component conversion must be done. Expanding and
collapsing the Processing Tree pane can be done by pressing respectively the
and button in the Processing Tree header. More information can be found in
topic Transcoding on page 715.
The following illustration depicts the Tree View sub page of the web browser user
interface.
132 4011746 Rev W

The trees can automatically be refreshed at regular time. During such tree refresh
action the following popup is displayed.
The procedure to configure the tree refresh actions is described in topic Changing
Tree Settings on page 164.
Tip:
A tree can be refreshed manually by right-clicking in the corresponding tree
pane and pointing to Reload in the short-cut menu.
The configuration of the tree refresh actions can temporarily be changed via the
popup that appears after clicking on the refresh ( ) icon on the Tree View sub
page.
In this popup, select the refresh rate in the corresponding drop down box (30
second, 1 minute, 5 minutes, or no refresh) and tick the check box of the tree(s)
for which another refresh rate must be chosen.
This temporary changed tree refresh configuration will be cleared as soon as the
Tree View sub page is left.
In a tree, each branch is provided with particular information concerning the branch.
The following topics describe the different branch types.
4011746 Rev W 133

Top Node
Branch Representation
The following illustration depicts the top node of the DCM Inputs, DCM Outputs,
and DCM Processing tree.
Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on a top node displays a short-cut menu to perform following actions:
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree
Settings Displays the Configuration - Default Settings sub page with
display mode and session timeout settings
Bit Rates DCM Inputs tree: Displays the Bit Rates - Input sub page
with bit rate figures of the incoming services
DCM Outputs tree: Displays the Bit Rates - Output sub

page with bit rates figures of the outgoing Transport
Streams
DCM Processing tree: Displays the Bit Rates - Processing

sub page with bit rates figures of the services routed to the
output via the Transcoder Card
Status Displays the Status - Device sub page with the device status
overview
Configuration Displays the Configuration - System sub page
134 4011746 Rev W

Card Branch
The illustration below explains a card branch.
Notes:
When an interface card is equipped with a Co-Processor and/or FEC Card (GbE
Interface Card only) Co-proc and/or FEC appears in the card branch of the DCM
Inputs, DCM Outputs, and DCM Configuration tree.
When the Statmux Controller function of a GbE Interface Card is enabled,
Statmux appears beside the interface card type.
Icon Overview
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a card branch.
Indication Description
(green) Icon of an interface card, IP Video Gateway Card, or Transcoder Card
(red) Icon of an interface card, IP Video Gateway Card, or Transcoder Card with
major or critical alarm
Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on a card branch displays a short-cut menu to perform following
actions:
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the selected card
4011746 Rev W 135

Menu Item Action

Settings DCM Inputs and DCM Outputs tree: displays the
Configuration - Default Settings sub page containing the
display mode setting
DCM Processing tree: displays the Service - Overview sub page

(not applicable for an IP Video Gateway Card)
Bit Rates DCM Inputs tree: Displays the Bit Rates - Input sub page with
bit rate figures of the incoming services
DCM Outputs tree: Displays the Bit Rates - Output sub page
with bit rates figures of the outgoing Transport Streams
DCM Processing tree: Displays the Bit Rates - Processing sub

page with bit rates figures of the services routed to the output
via the Transcoder Card
(not applicable for an IP Video Gateway Card)

overview
Configuration Displays the Configuration - Interface sub page for the selected
card
Port Branch
The illustration below explains a port branch.
ASI or GbE port
SDI Port
SDI Generators
Monitor port
136 4011746 Rev W

Notes:
A GbE port is labeled with the port names of the port pair. The black colored
port name indicates a streaming port and the gray colored port name a port that
doesn't stream. For more information please refer to topic Configuring the GbE
Port Backup Parameters on page 738.
When an ASI port is mirrored to one or more output ports, these ports are
combined into one branch, see illustration below.
More information concerning ASI port mirroring can be found in topic ASI Port
Configuration on page 87.
When a GbE Port Pair of a GbE Interface Card is mirrored, the port pairs are
combined into one branch in the DCM Outputs tree, see picture below.
For information about port pair mirroring, please refer to topic Configuring the
GbE Port Backup Parameters on page 738.
Icon Overview
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a port branch.
(black) Icon of an enabled input port
(red) Icon of an enabled input port with active major or critical alarm
(gray) Icon of a disabled input port
(black) Icon of an enabled output port
(red) Icon of an enabled output port with active major or critical alarm
(gray) Icon of a disabled output port
(black) Icon of an enabled bidirectional port
(red) Icon of an enabled bidirectional port with active major or critical alarm
(gray) Icon of a disabled bidirectional port
4011746 Rev W 137

Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on a port branch displays a short-cut menu to perform following
actions:
DCM Inputs tree
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the selected port
Settings Displays the Service - Services sub page of the selected port
Bit Rates Displays the Bit Rates - Input sub page with bit rate figures of
the incoming services on the selected port
overview
Configuration Displays the Configuration sub page of the selected port
DCM Outputs tree
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the selected port
Settings Displays the Service - TS Output sub page of the selected port
(GbE port only)
Stop Streaming All Stops streaming of all outgoing Transport Streams on the
TS's selected port
138 4011746 Rev W

Menu Item Action

Start Streaming All Starts streaming of all outgoing Transport Streams on the
TS's selected port
Bit Rates Displays the Bit Rates - Output sub page with bit rate figures of
the outgoing Transport Streams on the selected port
overview
Configuration Displays the Configuration sub page of the selected port
Transport Stream Branch

The illustration below explains a Transport Stream branch on an ASI Interface Card.
The illustration below explains a Transport Stream branch on a GbE Interface Card.
Notes:
A pink colored name of an SPTS indicates an SPTS with merged service(s).
More information concerning merged services can be found in topic Merging
Components on page 277.
(RTP) in the branch of an Outgoing Transport Stream indicates that the packets
in which the Transport Stream is encapsulated, are enlarged with an RTP
Header. For more information, please refer to topic Changing Settings of
Outgoing Transport Streams on page 209.
(FEC) in the branch indicates a Transport Stream for which Forward Error
Correction (FEC) is enabled. For more information concerning FEC, please refer
to topic Forward Error Correction on page 227.
4011746 Rev W 139

(SFN Enabled) in the branch indicates a Transport Stream for which the SFN
Mode is enabled. More information can be found in section Integrating the DCM
into Single Frequency Networks on page 869.
A Transport Stream in backup state or the service of an SPTS in backup state is

indicated by an exclamation mark.
When a TS Loss Alarm is active for an incoming Transport Stream, the
corresponding Transport Stream icon in the DCM Inputs tree is red colored.
The alarm indication for an incoming service will also be propagated to the
Transport Stream branch in the DCM Inputs tree. In the DCM Output tree the
Transport Stream icon is red colored if an alarm occurs for the Transport Stream
or for the Transport Stream content. Transport Stream alarm indications will be
propagated to the corresponding port and card branch.
Icon Overview
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a Transport Stream
branch.
(blue) Icon of a Multi Program Transport Stream (MPTS)
(blue) DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an MPTS for which services are passed from the
input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an MPTS for which services are missing at the
input
(red) Icon of an MPTS with alarm indication
(gray) Icon of a non-streaming MPTS
Icon of a transparent loop through Transport Stream

(white)
(blue) Icon of a Single Program Transport Stream (SPTS)
(blue) DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an SPTS for which the service is passed from the
input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an SPTS for which the service is missing at the
input
(red) Icon of a SPTS with alarm indication
(gray) Icon of a non-streaming SPTS
(gray) Icon of a non-streaming SPTS for which the service is missing at the input
140 4011746 Rev W

(red) DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication for which the
service is passed from the input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication for which the
service is missing at the input
(blue) Icon of an SPTS containing a scrambled service
(blue) DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an SPTS containing a scrambled service for which
the service is passed from the input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication containing a
scrambled service for which the service is missing at the input
(red) Icon of an SPTS containing a scrambled service with alarm indication
(red) DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication containing a
scrambled service for which the service is passed from the input but not
present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication containing a
scrambled service for which the service is missing at the input
(gray) Icon of a non-streaming SPTS containing a scrambled service
(gray) Icon of a non-streaming SPTS containing a scrambled service for which the
service is missing at the input
Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on a Transport Stream branch displays a short-cut menu to perform
following actions:
DCM Inputs tree
4011746 Rev W 141

Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected
Transport Stream
Settings Displays the Service - TS Input sub page of the selected
Transport Stream
Find Destinations Locates the corresponding destinations in the DCM Outputs
tree.
For a MPTS: the corresponding transparent loop through

Transport Stream
For a SPTS: the corresponding outgoing service or

corresponding transparent loop through Transport Stream
Bit Rates Opens the TS Bit Rates Detail popup of the selected Transport
Stream
Status Opens the TS Status Detail popup of the selected Transport
Stream
Configuration Displays the Configuration - Interface sub page of the interface
card to which the selected Transport Stream belongs to
DCM Outputs tree
Menu Item Action

Transport Stream
Settings Displays the Service - TS Output sub page of the selected
Transport Stream
SI Settings Displays the SI Components sub page of the selected Transport
Stream
Activate Streaming Stops streaming of the selected Transport Stream
Stop Streaming Activates streaming of the selected Transport Stream
142 4011746 Rev W

Menu Item Action

Undo Loop Through Transforms a transparent loop through Transport Stream on an
ASI Interface card into a standard Transport Stream.
Remove All Services Removes all services from the selected Transport Stream
Delete Deletes the selected Transport Stream (GbE Interface Card)
Bit Rates Opens the TS Bit Rates Detail popup for the selected Transport
Stream
Status Opens the TS Status Detail popup for the selected Transport
Stream
card to which the selected Transport Stream belongs to
SDI Branch
The following illustration depicts a branch of an SDI stream and a branch of an RTP
encapsulated SDI stream.
Incoming SDI stream
Incoming SDI stream encapsulated into RTP packets
Outgoing SDI stream
Outgoing SDI stream encapsulated into RTP packets
4011746 Rev W 143

Icon Overview
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in an SDI branch.
Icon of an SDI or RTP stream present at the input
Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output for which streaming is activated
Icon of a missing incoming SDI or RTP stream
Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output without routing
(red) Icon of an SDI or RTP stream with alarm indication present at the input
Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output with alarm indication for which
streaming is activated
(red) Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output with alarm indication for which
the incoming stream is missing
(gray) Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output for which streaming is not
activated
(gray) Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output with alarm indication for which
streaming is not activated
Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on an SDI or RTP stream branch displays a short-cut menu to perform
following action:
DCM Inputs tree
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected SDI or
RTP stream
Settings Displays the Service - SDI Stream Settings sub page or Service
- RTP Stream Settings sub page
144 4011746 Rev W

Menu Item Action

Find Destinations Locates a passed stream in the DCM Outputs tree, see topic
Locating a Passed Service or Stream in the DCM Outputs Tree on
page 175
Delete Removes RTP stream entries
Status Opens the TS Status Detail popup for the selected stream
Configuration Opens the Configuration - Interface GbE or Configuration -
Interface sub page
DCM Outputs tree
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected SDI or
RTP stream
Settings Displays the Service - SDI Stream Settings sub page or Service
- RTP Stream Settings sub page
Find Source Locates the routed stream in the DCM Inputs tree
Stop Streaming Stops streaming
Activate Streaming Activates streaming
Delete Removes the selected stream from the output
Status Opens the TS Status Detail popup for the selected stream
Configuration Opens the Configuration - Interface GbE or Configuration -
Interface sub page
Note: The short-cut menu of the SDI branch under the Monitor branch is slightly
different.
4011746 Rev W 145

Statmux Pools Branch

The Statmux Pools branch contains all Statmux Pools of the corresponding GbE
Interface Card. The following picture depicts a Statmux Pools branch.
Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on a Statmux Pools branch displays a short-cut menu to perform
following action:
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the card
Settings Displays the Statmux Settings and Statmux Pool Settings table
Status Displays the Status - Device sub page containing the device
status overview
Configuration Displays the Configuration - Interface sub page of the
corresponding interface card
Statmux Pool Branch

The following illustration explains a Statmux Pool branch.
146 4011746 Rev W

Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on a Pool branch displays a short-cut menu to perform following
action:
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the card
Settings Displays the Statmux Settings and Statmux Pool Settings table
Bit Rates Displays the Service - Graph sub page showing a video bit rate
overview of the selected pool
Status Displays the Status - Device sub page containing the device
status overview
corresponding interface card
Service Branch
The illustration below explains a service branch.
Notes:
A pink colored service name indicates a service with merged service(s). More
information concerning merged services can be found in topic Merging
A service in backup state is indicated by an exclamation mark.
When a Service Loss alarm occurs, the service icon will be red colored. The
alarm indication will be propagated to the corresponding Transport Stream,
Transrating Group (if present), port, and interface card. More information
about service loss triggers can be found in topic To Configure Triggers for Services
Present at the Input on page 796.
4011746 Rev W 147

Icon Overview
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a service branch.
(blue) Icon of a service for which streaming is activated
(red) Icon of a service with alarm indication for which streaming is activated
Icon of a service at the output for which streaming is stopped.

(gray)
Icon of a service in the Processing Tree for which no components are
transcoded.
(blue) Icon of a service at the output for which streaming is activated and for which
the service is missing at the input.
Icon of a preconfigured service for which streaming is activated and for
which the service is not yet or no longer available at the input.
Icon of a service at the output for which the service is missing at the input
(gray)
and for which streaming is stopped.
(red) Icon of a service at the output with alarm indication for which streaming is
activated and for which the service is missing at the input.
Icon of a preconfigured service with alarm indication for which streaming is
activated and for which the service is not yet or no longer available at the
input.
(blue) Icon of a scrambled service for which streaming is activated
(red) Icon of a scrambled service with alarm indication for which streaming is
activated
Icon of a scrambled service for which streaming is switched off.
(gray)
(blue) Icon of a scrambled service at the output for which streaming is activated
and for which the service is missing at the input
(red) Icon of a scrambled service at the output with alarm indication for which
streaming is activated and for which the service is missing at the input
Icon of a scrambled service at the output for which the service is missing at
(gray)
the input and for which streaming is stopped.
148 4011746 Rev W

Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on a service branch displays a short-cut menu to perform following
action:
DCM Inputs tree
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected service
Settings Displays the Service - Service sub page of the selected service
Find Destinations Locates a passed service in the DCM Outputs tree, see topic
Locating a Passed Service in the DCM Outputs Tree on page 175
Bit Rates Opens the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview popup for the
selected service
Status Opens the Detailed TS Status Overview for the selected service
card to which the selected incoming service belongs to
DCM Outputs tree
4011746 Rev W 149

Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected service
Settings Displays the Service - Service sub page of the selected service
Advanced Routing Displays the Advanced Routing tree of the service
Find Source Locates the passed service in the DCM Inputs tree
Find Active Source Locates the passed active service (= not in backup state) in the
DCM Inputs tree
Enable Scrambling Enables scrambling
Disable Scrambling Disables scrambling
Delete Removes the selected service from the output
Bit Rates Opens the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview popup for the
selected service
Status Opens the Detailed TS Status Overview popup for the selected
service
card to which the selected outgoing service belongs to
DCM Processing tree
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the services in the DCM Processing tree
Settings Displays the Service - Overview containing the services passed
to the output via the corresponding Transcoder Card
Advanced Routing Displays the Advanced Routing tree of the corresponding service
(SPTS only)
150 4011746 Rev W

Menu Item Action

DCM Inputs tree
Find Destinations Locates a passed service in the DCM Outputs tree, see topic
Locating a Passed Service in the DCM Outputs Tree on page 175
Bit Rates Displays the Detailed Processing Service Bit Rates Overview
popup for the selected service
Status Displays the Detailed Processing Service Status Overview
Transcoder Card to which the service belongs to
Transrating Group Branch

The illustration below explains a Transrating Group branch.
Notes:
The alarm indication for Transport Stream or Transport Stream content will be
propagated to the Transrating Group branch by using a red colored icon.
More information about Transrating can be found in chapter Transrating on page
463.
Icon Overview
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a Transrating Group
branch.
Icon of a MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group
Icon of a Selective Services type Transrating Group
Icon of a Multi-TS type Transrating Group
Icon of a Transrating Group with alarm indication
4011746 Rev W 151

Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on a Transrating Group branch displays a short-cut menu to perform
following actions:
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the port to which the Transrating Group
belongs to
Settings Displays the Service - Transrater sub page of the selected
Transrating Group
Delete Deletes the selected Transrating Group
Bit Rates Displays the Service - Comparison sub page of the selected
Transrating Group
card to which the selected Transrating Group belongs to
Component Branch
The illustration below explains a branch of an incoming component.
The illustration below explains a branch of an outgoing component.
152 4011746 Rev W

Notes:
Each incoming Transport Stream is populated with an EMM PIDs main node
containing the incoming EMM components and an Unreferenced PIDs main
node containing the unreferenced components.
Each outgoing Transport Stream is populated with an EMM PIDs main node
containing the passed EMM components and an Unreferenced PIDs main node
containing the passed unreferenced components.
An empty main node is indicated by (None available).
Components for which the stream type is remapped by changing the Output
Standard mode of the outgoing Transport Stream or by creating ES type overrule
entries are indicated in the DCM Outputs tree.
Icon Overview
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a component branch.
Icon of an Elementary Stream
Icon of a scrambled Elementary Stream

Icon of an Elementary Stream at the output for which the PID is missing at
the input
Icon of a scrambled Elementary Stream at the output for which the PID is
missing at the input
Icon of the EMM PIDs main node
Icon of the Unreferenced PIDs main node
4011746 Rev W 153

Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on a Component branch displays a short-cut menu to perform
following actions:
DCM Inputs tree
Menu Item Action

component
Bit Rates Opens the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview popup of the
service to which the selected incoming component belongs to
card to which the selected incoming component belongs to
DCM Outputs tree
Menu Item Action

component
Settings Displays the Service - Component sub page of the selected
component
Block PID Blocks the selected component (if possible)
Bit Rates Opens the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview popup of the
service to which the selected outgoing component belongs to
Status Opens the Detailed TS Status Overview popup
154 4011746 Rev W

Menu Item Action

card to which the selected outgoing component belongs to
DCM Processing tree
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the settings of the service population in the DCM
Processing tree
Settings Displays the Service - Overview containing the services passed
to the output via the corresponding Transcoder Card
Bit Rates Displays the Detailed Processing Service Bit Rates Overview
Transcoder Card to which the service belongs to
General Remarks
With the exception of the component branches, each branch is provided with bit
rates figures. These figures appear by pausing the cursor on the arrow beside
the branch. More information concerning these bit rates figures can be found in
chapter Checking Bit Rates on page 831.
The order of the services and GbE Transport Streams can be changed. More
information about changing the order in the trees can be found in topic Changing
Tree Settings on page 164.
4011746 Rev W 155

Introducing the Advanced Routing Tree

Introduction
The Advanced Routing tree gives a graphical overview of incoming services used to
create an outgoing service including backup services, merged services, merged
components, insertion channel for DPI...
The following illustration depicts an example of an Advanced Routing tree.
In the Advanced Routing tree the incoming services that are currently played out are
in bold.
This tree is typically used for setting up a program switching application. More
information concerning DCM's Program Switching feature can be found in section
Program Switching on page 539.
The Advance Routing tree for a service can be displayed by right-clicking on the
corresponding outgoing service and pointing to Advanced Routing in the short-cut
menu.
Tip: The Advanced Routing tree can be refreshed by pressing the Reload command
button or by right-clicking in the corresponding tree pane and pointing to Reload in
the short-cut menu.
156 4011746 Rev W

Output Service Branch

The illustration below explains an Output Service branch on a GbE Interface Card.
The illustration below explains an Output Service branch on an ASI Interface Card.
Icon Overview
(blue) Icon of a service for which streaming is activated
(red) Icon of a service with alarm indication for which streaming is activated
Icon of a service for which streaming is stopped.

(gray)
(blue) Icon of a service for which streaming is activated and for which the service is
missing at the input.
Icon of a service for which the service is missing at the input and for which
(gray)
streaming is stopped.
(red) Icon of a service with alarm indication for which streaming is activated and
for which the service is missing at the input.
(blue) Icon of a scrambled service for which streaming is activated
activated
Icon of a scrambled service for which streaming is switched off
(gray)
(blue) Icon of a scrambled service for which streaming is activated and for which
the service is missing at the input
activated and for which the service is missing at the input
Icon of a scrambled service for which the service is missing at the input and
(gray)
for which streaming is stopped.
4011746 Rev W 157

Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on an Output Service branch displays a short-cut menu to perform
following actions:
Menu Item Action

Reload From Device Reloads the Advanced Routing tree
Settings Displays the Service - Service sub page of the outgoing service
DCM Inputs tree
Delete Not applicable
Sources for Program Switching Branch

The illustration below explains a Sources for Program Switching branch.
Short-cut Menu
Right-clicking on a Sources for Program Switching branch displays a short-cut menu
to perform following actions:
158 4011746 Rev W

Menu Item Action

Settings Not applicable
Add Alternate Source Adds an alternate source to the outgoing service
Remove All Removes all alternate sources from the outgoing service
Alternates
Main, Alternate, Merged, Backup Service Branch

The illustration below explains a Main Service branch.
The alternate, merged, and backup branch are similar.
Icon Overview
(blue) Icon of a service present at the input
(red) Icon of a service with alarm indication
(blue) Icon of a preconfigured service for which the service is not yet or no longer
available at the input.
(red) Icon of a preconfigured service with alarm indication for which the service is
not yet or no longer available at the input.
(blue) Icon of a scrambled service
activated
Icon of a non-active backup service
(gray)
4011746 Rev W 159

Short-cut Menu
The illustration below displays the short-cut menu of the Main Service branch. The
short-cut menus of the Alternate, Merged, and Backup Service Branch are similar.
Menu Item Action

Settings For a Main or an Alternate Service branch: displays the
Service - Alternates sub page.
For Merged Service branch: displays the Service - Service -

Merge Details sub page.
For Backup Service branch: displays the Service - Service -

Backup Services sub page. This menu item is only
applicable if the main or alternate service to which the
backup belongs to is activated.
Show In Input Tree Highlights the main service in the input tree
Add Merged Service Adds a merged service to the main or alternate service
Add Backup Service Adds a backup service to the main, alternate, or merged service
Merged Components Branch

The merged components branch contains the component merge rules that apply to a
particular incoming service.
The illustration below explains a merged components branch.
160 4011746 Rev W

Icon Overview
(blue) Icon of a service present at the input
(red) Icon of a service with alarm indication
(blue) Icon of a preconfigured service for which the service is not yet or no longer
available at the input.
(red) Icon of a preconfigured service with alarm indication for which the service is
not yet or no longer available at the input.
(blue) Icon of a scrambled service
activated
Icon of a non-active backup service
(gray)
Short-cut Menu
The illustration below displays the short-cut menu of the merged components
branch.
Menu Item Action

Settings Displays the Service - Service - Merge Details sub page of the
corresponding service.
Show In Input Tree Highlights the corresponding service in the input tree
Add Merged Opens the Input Component Selection popup dialog for
Component creating a component merge rule for the corresponding service
Delete Removes the branch with the corresponding component merge
rules
4011746 Rev W 161

Component Merge Rule Branch

The following illustration explains a component merge rule branch.
Short-cut Menu
The illustration below displays the short-cut menu of the component merge rule
branch.
Menu Item Action

Settings Displays the Service - Service - Merge Details sub page of the
Delete Removes the component merge rule
Source for Splicing Branch

The following illustration explains a Source for Splicing branch.
162 4011746 Rev W

Short-cut Menu
The illustration below displays the short-cut menu of the Source for Splicing
branch.
Menu Item Action

Settings Opens the DPI tab page for changing splicing channel settings
Add Splicing Source Opens the Add Splice Source popup for configuring a splicing
channel
Delete Deletes the splicing channel
4011746 Rev W 163

Changing Tree Settings

Introduction
To enhance the usability of the DCM Inputs, DCM Outputs, and DCM Processing
trees, following adaptations can be done:
Sort GbE TS in Tree by and Sort Services in Tree by parameter
The order of the Transport Streams and services in the DCM Inputs and DCM
Outputs trees can be modified by changing the Sort GbE TS in Tree by
parameter to order the Transport Streams and the Sort Services in Tree by
parameter to order the services. The values that can be used to sort Transport
Streams are:
- IP Address
- ON ID
- TS ID
- UDP Port
The values that can be used to sort the services are:
- Service Name
- Service ID
Tree Refresh Rate and Trees To Refresh parameter
The trees can automatically be refreshed at regular time intervals. By default
the refresh rate is set to No Refresh but it can be set to 30 seconds, 1 minute, or 5
minutes.
Removal Warning in Tree parameter
Using the short-cut menu on the DCM Outputs tree is quite easy. To protect
the application from for instance accidentally removing of Transport Streams, an
additional confirmation can be asked before the action will be executed. For
certain reasons, for instance during reconfiguration actions, it can be useful to
disable this feature. When this feature is enabled, an additional confirmation
will be given for the following actions:
- Stopping Transport Stream streaming
- Removing Transport Streams
- Removing services
- Removing Transrating Groups
164 4011746 Rev W

Drop on SPTS: desired action parameter

During a drag and drop action of a service to an outgoing Single Program
Transport Stream (SPTS) the following actions can be done:
- Merging the service into the service of the SPTS
- Adding the service to the Transport Stream
When the Drop on SPTS: desired action parameter is set to Ask for Service Merge
or TS Add, a popup will appear asking the desired action. The following picture
shows this popup.
Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter

During a drag and drop action of an incoming Transport Stream to a GbE port,
the following actions can be done:
- Creating a Transport Stream and passing all services
- Creating a Transport Stream for which passing rules are activated. More
information about TS auto pass rules can be found in topic Creating Outgoing
- Passing a Transport Stream transparently. For more information about
transparently passed Transport Streams (named Transparent Loop Through
Transport Stream), please refer to topic Transparent Loop Through Transport
Streams on page 198.
When the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter is set to Ask for the
Desired Action, a popup will be displayed if an incoming Transport Stream is
dropped on a GbE port asking the desired action.
The following picture shows this popup.
4011746 Rev W 165

Menu appearance parameter

Particular links in the header of the web browser user interface of the DCM
display sub links. These sub links can be displayed by pausing the cursor or
clicking on the corresponding main link or only by pointing to this link. The
Menu appearance parameter determines how to handle the main links to display
the corresponding sub links.
Warning to Apply Settings on Tab Change parameter
Several sub pages provide multiple tab pages (for example the Service - Service
sub page). When a parameter is changed on a tab page and another tab page is
chosen without applying the setting, the parameter will not be modified. When
the Warning to Apply Settings on Tab Change parameter is enabled, a warning
will be given. The following picture shows such warning.
Note: This feature does not apply to tab pages with Apply All command
button.
166 4011746 Rev W

To Change the Tree Settings

The following steps explain how to change the tree settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Default Settings
link after clicking on the Configuration link.
2 In the Sort GbE TS in Tree by drop down box, select one of the following
settings to sort the Transport Streams in the DCM Inputs and DCM Outputs
tree:
IP Address
ON ID
TS ID
UDP Port
3 In the Sort Services in Tree by drop down box, select one of the following
settings to sort the services in DCM Inputs and DCM Outputs tree:
Service Name
Service ID
4 In the Removal Warning in Tree parameter, select Enabled to switch on the
confirmation feature or Disabled to switch off this feature.
4011746 Rev W 167

5 In the Drop on SPTS: desired action drop down box, select one of the following
settings:
Always Add to TS: during a drag and drop action of a service to an outgoing
SPTS, the service will be added to the Transport Stream.
Ask for Service Merge or TS Add: during a drag and drop action of a service to
an outgoing SPTS, a popup appears asking for a service merge or a Transport
Stream add.
6 In the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action drop down box, select one of the
following settings:
Create TS and Pass All Services: during dragging and dropping an incoming
Transport Stream to a GbE port, an outgoing Transport Stream containing all
input services will be created.
Ask for Desired Action: during dragging and dropping an incoming Transport
Stream to a GbE port, a popup will be displayed asking the desired action.
7 In the Menu appearance drop down box, select one of the following items:
2 stage: two clicks & Go: the sub links appear only after pointing to the main
link.
Floating: one click & Go: the sub links appear after pausing the cursor on or
after pointing to the main link.
8 In the Tree Refresh Rate drop down box, select the desired refresh rate: stop
(default), 30 sec, 1 min, or 5 min.
9 In the Trees To Refresh box, set the check box of the tree(s) that must be
refreshed.
10 In the Warning to Apply Settings on Tab Change drop down box, select Enabled
or Disabled.
11 Point to the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
168 4011746 Rev W

Representation Mode of the Incoming Services

Introduction
In the left hand pane of the Service page the incoming services can be represented in
four different modes:
Card representation mode
Port representation mode
Transport Stream (TS) representation mode
Service representation mode
Note: After opening the web browser user interface the trees on both panes are
collapsed and the incoming services are shown in Card representation mode.
Card Representation Mode

With the incoming services in Card representation mode, the highest level in the tree
view is card level. From this card level, you can browse through the cards, ports,
transport streams, and services to a particular component. The illustration below
shows the DCM Inputs tree in Card representation mode.
4011746 Rev W 169

Port Representation Mode

With the incoming services in Port representation mode, the highest level is port
level. The name of the interface card to which the port belongs to is indicated
beside the port in the tree. The illustration below depicts the DCM Inputs tree in
Port representation mode.
Transport Stream Representation Mode

With the incoming services in TS representation mode, the highest level is transport
stream. The position of the card and the port number to which the transport stream
belongs to is indicated beside the transport stream. The illustration below depicts
the DCM Inputs tree in TS representation mode.
170 4011746 Rev W

Service Representation Mode

With the incoming services in Service representation mode, all services at the device
inputs are categorized in a table.
A service is accompanied with the following information:
Card: represents the card receiving the service.
Port: represents the name of the port receiving the service.
IP Address: represents the IP address of the destination port to which the
Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.
UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the destination port to which the
Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.
ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the SDT).
TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the PAT).
SID: represents the Service Identifier of the incoming service (as defined in the
PAT).
Name: represents the name of the incoming service.
Tip: To sort the Input Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
4011746 Rev W 171

Changing the Representation Mode

The following steps explain how to change the representation mode of the incoming
services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the view ( ) drop down box, select the desired representation mode.
Card
Port
TS
Service
172 4011746 Rev W

Finding Services or Transport Streams in a Tree

Introduction
When the Service - Tree View sub page is populated with a large number of services
and Transport Streams, it can take some time to locate a particular item in a tree.
Therefore the panes on the Service - Tree View sub page are provided with a search
function.
Services and Transport Streams passed to the output can easily be located at the
input and at the output.
Note: Components within a service or Transport stream cannot be localized using
the search function.
To Search a Service or Transport Stream

Perform the following procedure to locate an incoming or outgoing service or
Transport Stream using the search function.
2 Right-click on the pane where the search function must be started.
Result: The Search popup dialog is displayed.
3 In the Search box, enter the search criteria.

Note: The search function of the web browser user interface is case-insensitive.
4 Under Search In, tick the tree(s) where services/Transport Stream must be
located.
Tip: The check box of the pane where the search action was started is by default
ticked.
4011746 Rev W 173

Result: The Search popup dialog displays the results of the search action in the
Search results table.
Tips:
The search results can be highlighted in the tree(s) by clicking on the
corresponding Highlight arrow.
Searching in multiple trees at the same time is possible by selecting the
corresponding tree check boxes under Search in and pressing the Search
command button.
Pressing the button in the Processing Tree header opens Search popup
dialog with Processing Tree check box set.
Entering the search criteria in the search box on the DCM Inputs or DCM
Outputs pane and pressing the Search command button opens the Search
popup dialog with results for the selected pane.
Locating a Passed Service in the DCM Inputs Tree

The following procedure explains how to locate a passed service in the DCM Inputs
tree.
Result: The Service - View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the service or SPTS that must be located at
the input.
174 4011746 Rev W

3 Right-click on this service or SPTS and point to Find Source in the short-cut
menu.
Result: The incoming service is highlighted in the DCM Inputs tree.
Tips:
To locate the active service in a service backup application, right-click on the
service or SPTS and point to Find Active Source in the short-cut menu.
The find source and find active source action can also be done in the DCM
Processing tree.
Locating the Destination to where an Incoming Service is Passed

The following procedure explains how to locate a passed service or Transport
Stream in the DCM Outputs tree.
Result: The Service - View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the service or Transport Stream that must be
located at the output.
3 Right-click on this service or Transport Stream and point to Find Destinations in
the short-cut menu.
Result: A popup is displayed with all destinations.
4 Click on the Highlight Destination arrow to highlight the service or Transport

Stream in the DCM Outputs tree.
Tip: This action can also be used on the DCM Processing tree.
4011746 Rev W 175

Determining the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the

DCM Inputs Tree
Introduction
A Transport Stream node in the DCM Inputs tree can be present for several reasons.
The following list shows these reasons:
The Transport Stream or any part of the Transport Stream (Service, Component,
EMM PID...) is passed to the output.
The Transport Stream is configured as backup source for another input
Transport Stream.
The Transport Stream was detected less than 2 minutes ago at the input.
There is a specific service loss trigger configured for at least one service in the
Transport Stream.
There is a specific Transport Stream loss trigger configured for this Transport
Stream.
There are specific FEC settings configured for this Transport Stream.
There is a specific compact CA descriptor setting for this Transport Stream.
This Transport Stream is configured for Transport Stream backup.
There is a specific input standard configured for this Transport Stream.
There is a specific time base selection setting for this Transport Stream.
The Transport Stream signal is present at the input.
There is a specific input standard configured for this TS
To Determine the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the DCM Inputs

Tree
The following procedure describes how to determine why a Transport Stream node
is shown in the DCM Inputs tree.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the corresponding Transport Steam or to a
service belonging to this Transport Stream.
3 Right-click on this Transport Stream or service and point to Status in the
short-cut menu.
176 4011746 Rev W

Determining the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the DCM Inputs Tree
Result: A popup is displayed containing the Why is this TS visible in the input
tree? table.
4011746 Rev W 177

4 Chapter 4
Multiplexing
Introduction
This chapter outlines the re-multiplexing capabilities of the Digital
Content Manager (DCM).
In This Chapter
Section A Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or
Transport Streams.............................................................................. 181
Section B Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport
Streams ................................................................................................ 195
Section C Forward Error Correction............................................. 227
Section D Service Re-Multiplexing ............................................... 251
Section E Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components...... 271
Section F PSI/SI/PSIP Information .............................................. 351
Section G Changing Service Parameters ...................................... 413
Section H Activating or Stopping Streaming .............................. 439
Section I Removing Outgoing Services and Transport
Streams ................................................................................................ 449
Section J Viewing Service Grooming............................................ 457
4011746 Rev W 179

Section A Modifying Settings of Incoming
Services or Transport Streams
Introduction
This section describes how to change settings of incoming services and
incoming Transport Streams.
In this section
Settings of Incoming Services.................................................................... 182
Settings of Incoming Transport Streams ................................................. 185
4011746 Rev W 181

Chapter 4 Multiplexing
Settings of Incoming Services

Introduction
The user name of a service as well as the alarms used to trigger a service loss alarm
can be configured for each individual incoming service. These settings can be done
on the Service Settings table containing all services of a particular incoming
Transport Stream or on the Service Settings table containing all services of all
incoming Transport Streams on a particular port.
Note: The procedure to configure the Service Loss alarm for an incoming service can
be found in topic Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 794.
Changing Service Settings on the Service Settings Table of a Particular

Incoming Transport Stream
The following procedure describes how to change settings on the Service Settings
table containing all services of a particular incoming Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service Link.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream containing
the services for which settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this incoming Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport
Stream and point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page containing the Service Settings table of
the selected Transport Stream is displayed.
Note: Each service in the Service Settings table is prefixed by its service
identifier and service name.
182 4011746 Rev W

Settings of Incoming Services
5 Enter a name in the User Name box for the service that must be renamed. A
name with maximum 99 characters can be given, double-quotes in the name are
not allowed.
Tip: When no SDTa (DVB) or VCT (ATSC) is available, the user name will be
used by the web browser user interface to identify the service. For more
information, please refer to topic Changing SDT Settings for a Particular Service on
page 394.
Changing Service Settings on the Service Settings Table of a Particular

Port
The following procedure describes how to change settings on the Service Settings
table containing the services of all incoming Transport Streams on a particular port.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the services for which
settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to Settings in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page containing the Service Settings table of
the selected port is displayed.
Note: Each service in the Service Settings table is prefixed by the destination IP
Address and UDP port number of the incoming Transport Stream (GbE port
only) to which the service belongs to and the service identifier and service name.
4 Enter a name in the User Name box for the service that must be renamed. A
name with maximum 99 characters can be given, double-quotes in the name are
not allowed.
4011746 Rev W 183

Tip: When no SDTa (DVB) or VCT (ATSC) is available, the user name will be
used by the web browser user interface to identify the service.
184 4011746 Rev W

Settings of Incoming Transport Streams

Introduction
Changing incoming Transport Stream settings can be done on the TS Settings table.
This TS Settings table can be displayed for a single incoming Transport Stream (see
topic Changing Setting of a Single Transport Stream on page 188) or for all incoming
Transport Streams on a particular port (see topic Changing Setting of Multiple
Transport Stream of a Particular Port on page 189).
When incoming Transport Streams or services appear at the input, the settings of
these incoming Transport Streams and services will get the default values. The
procedure to change these default values can be found in topic Changing the Default
Incoming Transport Stream parameters on page 191.
The DCM allows preconfiguring of incoming Transport Streams. When an
incoming Transport Stream becomes available at the input matching a preconfigured
incoming Transport Stream, this Transport Stream will get these settings. The
procedure to define preconfigured incoming Transport Streams can be found in
topic Adding a Preconfigured Transport Streams on page 190.
The following list describes the incoming Transport Stream settings that can be
modified.
Input Standard parameter
The type of a component in a service is indicated using the stream_type
parameter in the Program Map Table (PMT). Depending on the standard, the
association between the component type and the stream_type number differs,
see table below.
Component Type
Stream type 0x01 (1) 0x02 (2) 0x03 (3) 0x04 (4) 0x06 (6) 0x80 (128) 0x81 (129)
Mode
DVB Video Video Audio Audio Res Res
ATSC Video Video Audio Audio Audio Res (Video) Audio
DC-II Video Video Audio Audio Video AC-3
For particular digital processes, for example for Transrating or DPI, the DCM
requires the knowledge of this component type - stream_type association,
therefore the standard must be given for each incoming Transport Stream.
The Input Standard mode for incoming Transport Streams is default set to DVB.
When most of the incoming Transport Streams are compliant with another
standard, it is useful to change this default value.
4011746 Rev W 185

Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor mode

This mode must be enabled when the CA system uses Mediaguard Compact CA
descriptors in the incoming Transport Stream with additional EMM PID or ECM
PID references in the private data bytes. The mode is by default disabled.
When this mode is enabled, these ECM components are automatically passed to
the output during the service passing process. The EMM components become
visible at the input and can be passed to the outputs like other EMM
components. The procedure to pass EMMs can be found in topic Passing and/or
Remapping Non-Service Components on page 326.
MPEG Priority Bit mode
This mode determines the priority bit in the header of the MPEG packets and can
be set to:
- Transparent: the priority bit will not be changed
- Force to 0: the priority bit will be set to 0
- Force to 1: the priority bit will be set to 1
The MPEG Priority Bit parameter is only displayed when the DCM is provided
with PRIORITY_BIT_ADAPTATION License.
Time Base Selection mode and CBR Latency (GBE Interface Card only)
Particular IP decoders (in for instance set top boxes) may not tolerate IP jitter
introduced by the originating device (own introduced jitter) or IP jitter
introduced by the IP infrastructure between the origin (for instance a server) and
the MPEG decoder (network jitter). The DCM supports two dejittering
methods: a general dejitter mode, that can be used to dejitter VBR and CBR
streams and a CBR mode that should only be used for CBR streams. Both
dejittering methods are based on PCR measurements and need the knowledge of
the PCR that must be used. The Time Base Selection parameter determines the
PCR PID and mode that will be used to de-jitter GbE input content:
- Auto: any PID containing a PCR can be used.
- Auto Referenced PCR: a PCR PID referenced in the PMT of a service, which is
present in the Transport Stream, is used.
- Forced PCR: the PCR PID referenced in the PMT of a service, which is selected
using its SID, is used.
- CBR - Auto: any PID containing a PCR can be used.
- CBR - Auto Referenced PCR: a PCR PID referenced in the PMT of a service,
which is present in the Transport Stream, is used.
- CBR - Forced PCR: the PCR PID referenced in the PMT of a service, which is
selected using its SID, is used.
186 4011746 Rev W

For the CBR mode the CBR Latency parameter that is used to determine the
dejitter buffer can be configured between 10 and 110 ms and is by default set to
110 ms.
Usage:
The general dejitter mode can be used in most configurations.
If the input stream has a constant bit rate, CBR dejitter mode can be used.
In the following cases CBR mode should be used...
– if the latency of a stream passed from GbE should be lower than 110ms.
– if the PCR of the input stream contains sporadic errors, CBR dejitter
mode can be used to avoid glitches in the output stream (for example if
the accuracy of the PCR cannot be guaranteed over time or if the PCR
interval is too high).
For incoming MPTS GbE streams, using the CBR dejitter mode is strongly
recommended.
CBR dejitter mode should not be used in combination with DPI when the
insertion stream is not present permanently, even if the insertion stream has
a constant bit rate. If a service is passed to an output, it takes a few seconds
more in CBR dejitter mode
Remark:
CBR mode can only be used if the input streams have a constant bit rate.
Notes:
When the Time Base Selection mode is set to Auto Referenced or CBR - Auto
Referenced and no service is found from which a PCR can be used, the device
starts working in Auto or CBR - Auto until a suitable service appears at the
input.
Changing the Time Base Selection mode or CBR Latency parameter might
introduce a glitch at the output.
Changing the mode from Forced or Auto Referenced PCR to Auto will always
be done without changing the currently used PCR PID for the Transport
Stream. No CC Errors will then be generated but PCR glitches are possible.
The CBR Latency parameter is a card wide setting, meaning changing this
parameter applies to all incoming Transport of the corresponding interface
card. The procedure to change this setting can be found in topic Changing
the Default Value for Incoming Transport Stream Parameters on page 191.
Remark:
The DCM cannot handle incoming VBR MPTS GBE streams.
4011746 Rev W 187

Changing Setting of a Single Transport Stream

The following steps explain how to change Transport Stream settings of a single
incoming Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream for which
Transport Stream setting should be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream
and point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page containing the TS Settings table for the
selected incoming Transport Stream is displayed.
Tip: The corresponding incoming Transport Stream is identified by its ON_ID

and TS_ID.
4 In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard mode:
DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).
5 In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the desired
mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx).
6 In the MPEG Priority Bit drop down box, select the desired value: Default
(xxxxxx), Transparent, Force to 0, or Force to 1.
Note: The MPEG Priority Bit drop down box is only displayed if the DCM is
provided with PRIORITY_BIT_ADAPTATION License.
7 In the Time Base Selection drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select one
of the following values: Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, CBR - Auto, CBR -
Auto Referenced PCR, CBR - Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx).
8 When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR or CBR - Forced
PCR, enter the SID of the service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the SID
box (GbE Interface Card only).
Tip: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx).
The default value is shown between brackets. The procedure to change these
default values can be found in topic Changing the Default Value for Incoming Transport
Stream Parameters on page 191.
188 4011746 Rev W

Changing Setting of Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular Port

The following steps explain how to change Transport Stream settings of multiple
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which Transport Stream setting
should be changed.
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page containing the TS Settings table for all
incoming Transport Streams of the selected port is displayed.
4 In the TS Settings table, perform the following steps for each Transport Stream
for which settings must be changed.
Tip: The incoming Transport Streams of the selected port are identified by IP
address and UDP port number.
a In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard
mode: DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).
b In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the
desired mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx).
c In the MPEG Priority Bit drop down box, select the desired value: Default
d In the Time Base Selection drop down box, select one of the following
values: Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, CBR - Auto, CBR - Auto
Referenced PCR, CBR - Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx).
e When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR or CBR - Forced
PCR, enter the SID of the service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the
SID box.
4011746 Rev W 189

Tip: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx).
default values can be found in topic Changing the Default Value for Incoming
Transport Stream Parameters on page 191.
Adding Preconfigured Transport Stream Entries

The web browser user interface of the DCM allows preconfiguring Transport
Streams with Transport Stream settings for a GbE Interface Card. Such Transport
Stream is preconfigured by adding a Preconfigured Transport Stream entry in the TS
Settings table containing all Transport Streams of a particular port. When the
incoming Transport Stream appears at the corresponding port, the Transport Stream
will get these settings. The following steps explain how to add a preconfigured
Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which settings of preconfigured
Transport Streams should be changed.
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the TS Settings link.
Result: The Service - TS Settings sub page is displayed.
5 Under the Add Preconfigured TS settings, complete the following settings:
a In the Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
– Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is a
unicast IP address.
– Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is
a multicast IP address.
190 4011746 Rev W

b Enter the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream in the IP

Address box and the UDP port number in the UDP Port box.
c In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard
mode: DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).
d In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the
desired mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx).
e In the MPEG Priority Bit drop down box, select the desired value: Default
f In the Time Base Selection drop down box, select one of the following
values: Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, CBR - Auto, CBR - Auto
Referenced PCR, CBR - Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx).
g When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR or CBR - Forced
PCR, enter the SID of the service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the
SID box.
h Press the Add command button to confirm.
Result: The preconfigured Transport Stream is added to the TS Settings
table.
Tips:
The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx).
default values can be found in topic Changing the Default Value for Incoming
Transport Stream Parameters on page 191.
As long as a preconfigured incoming Transport Stream do not match an
incoming Transport Stream, the preconfigured Transport Stream can be removed
by ticking the check box of the corresponding entry and pointing to the Remove
Checked Items command button.
Note: Adding a preconfigured incoming Transport Stream with Input Standard,
Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor, MPEG Priority Bit (if available), and Time
Base Selection parameter set to Default (xxxxx) is not possible.
Changing the Default Value for Incoming Transport Stream Parameters

The following procedure describes how to change the default value for the incoming
Transport Stream parameters. These values will be used for each incoming
Transport Stream for which the associated parameters are set to default.
WARNING:
Changing default values involves changing the associated parameter for all
incoming transport streams for which the value is set to default.
4011746 Rev W 191

2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
default standard mode for incoming Transport Streams should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Point to the Default Settings link.
4 Click on the TS tab.
Result: The TS tab page is displayed.
5 Under the Input TS Default Settings, modify the following parameters if
required:
6 In the Input Standard drop down box in the TS Default Settings table, select the
desired value: DVB, ATSC, or DC-II.
7 In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the desired
value: Enabled or Disabled.
8 In the MPEG Priority Bit drop down box, select the desired value: Default
9 In the Time Base Selection drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select the
desired value: Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, CBR - Auto, or CBR - Auto Referenced
PCR.
10 Tick the CBR Latency (ms) check box if a latency different from the default value
must be chosen and enter the desired latency in the corresponding box.
11 Press the Apply all command button to confirm or the Reload all command
Note: After changing the Time Base Selection and/or CBR Latency (ms)
parameter and pressing the Apply command button, the following confirmation
box is displayed:
192 4011746 Rev W


abort.
4011746 Rev W 193

Section B Creating and Configuring Outgoing
Transport Streams
Introduction
This section describes how to create outgoing Transport Streams and
how to configure these Transport Streams.
In this section
Creating Outgoing Transport Streams .................................................... 196
Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport
Streams ......................................................................................................... 209
Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport
Streams ......................................................................................................... 218
Configuring Automatic Pass Rules .......................................................... 224
4011746 Rev W 195

Creating Outgoing Transport Streams

Introduction
General
Before services can be passed to an outgoing Transport Stream, the output port must
be provided with one or more outgoing Transport Streams. Since an ASI output
port only has one Transport Stream, each ASI port is by default provided with one
Transport Stream with default settings. In contrast with the ASI output ports, the
GbE ports accept multiple Transport Streams.
During the Transport Stream creation process particular parameters are filled with
default values. The procedure to change these default values can be found in topic
Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams on page 215.
Once outgoing Transport Streams are created, the corresponding parameters can be
changed as described in topic Changing Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams on
page 209.
Transport Stream Auto Pass Rules

Transport Stream (TS) auto pass rules for an incoming Transport Stream can be
assigned to each outgoing Transport Stream. When TS auto pass rules for an
incoming Transport Stream are assigned to an outgoing Transport Stream, the
complete content of the incoming Transport Stream will be passed to this outgoing
Transport Stream, including unreferenced components. The TS auto pass rules also
determine the content of the outgoing Transport Stream if the content of the
incoming Transport Streams varies. Meaning, when new services, Entitlement
Management Messages (EMMs), and/or unreferenced component are added to the
incoming Transport Stream, this new content will automatically be passed to the
outgoing Transport Stream depending on the assigned TS auto pass rule(s). The
following TS auto pass rules can be assigned:
Pass Unreferenced PIDs rule: all unreferenced components will automatically be
passed to the output.
Pass EMMs rule: all EMMs will automatically be passed to the output.
Pass Services rule: all services will automatically be passed to the output.
196 4011746 Rev W

WARNING:
We strongly advise against performing processing like forcing PIDs, PID
remapping, passing components or services from other incoming Transport
Streams, DPI, scrambling... on the content of outgoing Transport Streams with
Pass Unreferenced PIDs rule assignment without the knowledge of the packet
identifiers of the unreferenced components that can be added to the
corresponding incoming Transport Stream. Otherwise conflicts between
unreferenced components passed from the input and components present at the
output can arise resulting in CC errors.
TS auto pass rules can automatically be assigned during the creation of an outgoing
Transport stream by passing an incoming Transport Stream to a port. TS auto pass
rules can also be assigned to an existing outgoing Transport Stream. When TS auto
pass rules are automatically created during the Transport Stream creation process,
the rules automatically refer to the passed incoming Transport Stream.
The PSI/SI information of the outgoing Transport Stream to which TS auto pass
rules are assigned, is by default regenerated by the DCM (Output mode set to
Generate). The procedure to change this mode is described in topic Changing the
PSI/SI Generation Mode on page 379.
Notes:
When services or EMMs are removed from the input, their nodes are indicated
by their not-present icon and configuration settings are kept. Removing these
nodes must be done manually.
When unreferenced components are removed, all references at the output will be
removed.
When services are automatically passed to an outgoing Transport Stream with
Pass Service rule assignment and services, which are still present at the input, are
manually removed from the outgoing Transport stream, these services will be
passed again when the service population of the incoming Transport Stream
changes.
When services are automatically added to an incoming Transport Stream that is
passed with Pass Services rule assignment to an outgoing Transport Stream
containing a MPTS - all Services Transrating Group, the services will
automatically be added to the Transrating Group. These new services will get
default configuration settings.
When services are added to an incoming Transport Stream that is passed with
Pass Services rule assignment to an outgoing Transport Stream containing one
or more Selective Services Transrating Group, the services will not be added to a
Transrating Group.
4011746 Rev W 197

When no TS auto pass rules are assigned to an outgoing Transport Stream, no

unreferenced components are passed from the incoming Transport Stream to the
output and the content of the outgoing Transport Stream remains static. Meaning,
when new services, unreferenced component, or EMMs are added to the incoming
Transport Stream, this new content will not automatically be passed to the output.
Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams

To copy an incoming Transport Stream to the output without manipulating the
content of the Transport Stream, the Transparent Loop Through feature of the DCM
can be used. This feature transparently passes incoming Transport Streams
(including stuffing) to the output and is useful for interface conversion (ASI to GbE
or vice versa) and monitoring purposes.
When an input Transport Stream is transparently passed to the output, all input
components are dynamically passed to the outgoing Transport Stream. Additional
configuration to the outgoing Transport Stream, service, and component settings is
not longer possible and advanced MPEG processing, like Transrating, Scrambling...
can not be done. Only interface related settings, like: destination IP address,
destination UDP port, VLAN, RTP/UDP, and FEC, can be modified.
The procedure to pass an incoming Transport Stream transparently to an output can
be found in topic Passing a Transport Stream Transparently to an Output on page 207.
In the DCM Outputs tree Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams are
indicated by means of a white colored Transport Stream icon, see picture below.
Notes:
A Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream branch has no children, meaning
the services and components of such branch are not displayed since these are the
same as at the input.
Incoming Transport Streams without PAT can transparently be passed.
When an incoming Transport Stream with errors is transparently passed to the
output, these errors will also be present in the outgoing Transport Stream.
The packet format of an outgoing Transport Stream on an ASI port is 188 bytes
with output mode set to Packet, independent of the packet format of the
incoming Transport Stream
Tip: To protect the content of Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream,
Transport Stream backup is possible. For more information about Transport Stream
backup, please refer to topic Transport Stream Backup on page 741.
198 4011746 Rev W

Transport Stream Creation Methods

To facilitate the configuration of the DCM, different Transport Stream creating
methods are foreseen:
Creating outgoing Transport Streams by adding individual Transport Streams.
TS auto pass rules must be assigned manually if required.
Creating an outgoing Transport Stream by passing an incoming Transport
Stream to a port.
For a GbE port, TS auto pass rules can automatically be assigned.
For an ASI port, the existing outgoing Transport Stream will be replaced by the
incoming Transport Stream and TS auto pass rules are automatically assigned.
Creating multiple Single Program Transport Streams by passing individual
incoming services to a GbE port. TS auto pass rules must be assigned manually
if required.
Creating a Transparently Loop Through Transport Stream
General Notes
During the Transport Stream creation process to a GbE port an IP address must
be assigned. Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams
has the following restrictions.
- For SSM, use address from the range 232.0.0.0 - 232.255.255.255.
Exception: addresses 232.0.0.0 ... 232.0.0.255 are reserved.
- For ASM, use address from the range 239.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255.
Exception: addresses 239.0.0.0 ... 239.191.255.255 are reserved.
- Streaming MPEG data packets to addresses in the range 224.0.0.0 - 224.0.0.255
is strongly discouraged because this may cause trouble on for instance
routers.
For more information please refer to RFC 3171 or to Cisco's Guidelines for
Enterprise IP Multicast Address Allocation.
During for instance a service or Transport Stream backup transition, a PCR
discontinuity at the output of the DCM might occur. Some downstream
equipment uses the PCR for dejittering purposes and doesn't tolerate a PCR
discontinuity. To deal with this the PCR Continuity feature can be enabled to
keep the PCR continuous. More information about this feature can be found in
topic Transrating Board Settings on page 470.
4011746 Rev W 199

Creating Outgoing Transport Streams by Adding Individual Transport

Streams to a Port
Perform the following procedure to add an individual Transport Stream to a GbE
port.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing GbE port,
3 Double-click on this GbE port or right-click on the GbE port and select Settings
in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the GbE port in question is
displayed.
4 Under the Add New TS settings, complete the following settings:
a Enter the Original Network Identifier for the new Transport Stream in the
ON ID box and the Transport Stream Identifier in the TS ID box.
Tip: Both the ON ID and the TS ID can be entered using the decimal or
hexadecimal notation, independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal
value must be prefixed by 0x. For more information concerning the display
mode, please refer to topic Changing the Display Mode on page 128.
b In the Output Standard drop down box, select the desired output standard
mode.
– Transparent
– Force Uplink
– Force Video
– Force Audio3
c In the Streaming drop down box, select Active to enable streaming and
Stopped to disable streaming of the Transport Stream through the output port.
200 4011746 Rev W

d Clear the Use Default Settings check box to fill the following parameters
manually or tick this check box to fill these parameters by defaults.
– IP Address parameter
Note: Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams
has some restrictions. More information can be found in topic
Introduction on page 196.
– UDP Port parameter
– Total Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter
– Output Protocol parameter
– Output Rate parameter
Tip: Filling these parameters by defaults reduces the number of parameter
adaptations during the Transport Stream adding process. The procedure to
change these defaults can be found in Changing Default Values for Outgoing
e Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
Result: After pressing the Add command button the newly created Transport
Stream is added to the TS Settings table.
Tips:
The Sum of CBR TS box below the TS Settings table indicates the sum of the bit
rates of the outgoing constant bit rate Transport Streams on the selected port and
the Active Sum box the sum of the bit rates of the outgoing transport streams for
which streaming is active.
For more information concerning the Transport Stream parameters, please refer
to topic Changing Standard Settings of an Outgoing Transport Stream on page 209.
4011746 Rev W 201

Creating a Transport Stream by Passing an Incoming Transport Stream to

a Port
To a GbE port
An outgoing Transport Stream for a GbE port can be created by passing an incoming
Transport Stream to this port. All services of the incoming Transport Stream are
automatically passed to this outgoing Transport Stream. When auto pass rules
must be assigned to the outgoing Transport Stream during the Transport Stream
creation process, the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter must be set to
Ask for the Desired Action. For more information, please refer to topic Changing Tree
Settings on page 164.
Note: Only services within the incoming Transport Stream will be passed to the
output when no TS auto rules are assigned to the newly created Transport Stream,
no EMMs or unreferenced components.
The following procedure explains how to create a new outgoing Transport Stream
for a GbE port by dragging and dropping an incoming Transport Stream to this port.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream that must be
passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port for which the outgoing
Transport Stream must be created.
4 Select the branch of the incoming Transport Stream and drag and drop this
Transport Stream to the icon of the GbE port.
Result: When the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter is set to Ask
for the Desired Action, the following popup is displayed.
202 4011746 Rev W

Select the Create TS and Pass all Services to create an outgoing Transport
Stream containing all services of the passed incoming Transport Stream or
select Activate Automatic Pass Rules to assign auto pass rules to the outgoing
Transport Stream. Once the selection is made, press the OK command
button to confirm or the cancel command button to abort the operation.
Result: An outgoing Transport Stream is created populated with the services of the
passed incoming Transport Stream. When auto pass rules are assigned, the
unreferenced components and EMMs are also passed and the ON ID and the TS ID
of the newly created outgoing Transport Stream match the IDs of the passed
incoming Transport Stream. A number of parameters are filled with the defaults as
defined on the Default Settings sub page of the GbE Configuration page. More
information concerning these defaults can be found in topic Changing Default Values
for Outgoing Transport Streams on page 215.
Note:
The Streaming parameter of the newly created outgoing Transport Stream is set
to Stopped, meaning that the Transport Stream is not streamed through the GbE
port. The procedure to enable streaming can be found in topic Activating or
Stopping Streaming on page 439.
Individual components (EMMs and unreferenced components) can be passed,
blocked, and if needed remapped manually; more information concerning
passing and remapping of unreferenced components can be found in topic
Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 326.
To an ASI port
An ASI port can only be populated with one outgoing Transport Stream. When an
incoming Transport Stream is dropped to an ASI port, the existing outgoing
Transport Stream will be replaced by the dropped Transport Stream. The newly
created outgoing Transport Stream is automatically labeled with the ON ID and TS
ID of the incoming Transport Stream and assigned with TS auto pass rules. All
components within this incoming Transport Stream are passed to the outgoing
Transport Stream, including the unreferenced component.
The following procedure explains how to create a new outgoing Transport Stream
for an ASI port by dragging and dropping an incoming Transport Stream to this
port.
4011746 Rev W 203

passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the ASI port for which the outgoing
Transport Stream must be created.
Transport Stream to the icon of the ASI port.
Result: The following dialog is displayed asking the desired action.
5 Select the Activate Automatic Pass rules selection button and press the OK
command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to abort the
operation.
Result: After pressing the OK command button, the following confirmation box
is displayed asking to replace the existing outgoing Transport Stream.

204 4011746 Rev W

Creating SPTSs by Passing Incoming Services to a GbE Port

Introduction
Single Program Transport Streams (SPTSs) can be created by passing individual
services of incoming Transport Streams to a GbE port. Two methods can be used,
the Drag and Drop method and the Muxing method. The Drag and Drop method is
useful when a discreet number of SPTSs must be created. The Muxing method is
recommended if a large number of SPTSs should be created.
A number of parameters of the newly created SPTSs are filled with defaults. The
procedure to define these defaults can be found in topic Changing Default Values for
The Streaming parameter of the newly created SPTSs is set to Stopped, meaning that
newly created outgoing SPTSs do not stream through the GbE port. The procedure
to enable streaming can be found in topic Activating or Stopping Streaming on page
439.
Drag and Drop Method

The following steps explain how to create a SPTS on a GbE port using the Drag and
Drop method.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming service for which an outgoing
SPTS must be created.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port for which the outgoing SPTS
must be created.
4 Select the branch of the incoming service and drag and drop the service to the
branch of the GbE port.
Result: An outgoing SPTS is created containing the passed service.
4011746 Rev W 205

Muxing Method
The following steps explain how to create SPTSs on a GbE port using the Muxing
method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box GbE
Port (SPTS).
Result: The Input Services and Output GbE Ports tables are displayed.
Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output GbE Ports table by a particular
parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input Services table, set the check boxes of the services for which outgoing
SPTSs must be created.
4 In the Output GbE Port table, set the check box(es) of the GbE port(s) on which
the outgoing SPTSs must be created.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input Services and
Output GbE Ports table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
206 4011746 Rev W

Result: After pressing the Pass command button the SPTSs are created. All
check boxes in the Input Services table as well as the check boxes in the Output
GbE Ports table will be cleared.
Passing a Transport Stream Transparently to an Output

An incoming Transport Stream at a GbE port as well as an incoming Transport
Stream at an ASI port can transparently be passed to the output. Before incoming
Transport Streams can transparently be passed to a GbE output port, the Drop TS
on GbE Port: desired action parameter must be set to Ask for the Desired Action. For
more information, please refer to topic Changing Tree Settings on page 164.
The following procedure describes how to transparently pass an incoming Transport
Stream to an output.
passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port to which the Transport Stream
must be passed.
Transport Stream to the icon of the port.
Result: A popup is displayed asking the desired action.
4011746 Rev W 207

Note: The picture above is the popup that appears if the incoming Transport
Stream is dropped on a GbE port. The popup that appears if the Transport
Stream is dropped to an ASI port is similar.
5 Select the Pass the TS Transparently selection button and press the OK
command button.
Note: When the transport stream is dropped to an ASI port, the following
Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button

Result: After pressing the OK command button, the incoming Transport Stream
is transparently passed to the selected port.
Tip: A Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream can be removed by right-clicking
on the icon of the outgoing Transport Stream and pointing to Undo Loop Through
in the short-cut menu. Performing the Undo Loop Through action on such stream
on a GbE port removes the Transport Stream and doing this action on such stream
on an ASI port automatically creates a standard Transport Stream having default
settings.
Notes:
A Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream branch has no children, meaning
the services and components of such branch are not displayed since these are the
same as at the input.
Since the bit rates figures are displayed for the incoming Transport Stream in the
DCM Inputs tree, no bit rate figures are displayed for the corresponding
Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream in the DCM Outputs tree.
The bit rate of a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream is not included in
the bit rate of the port to which the Transport Streams belongs to.
When an incoming Transport Stream is transparently passed to an output port of
an ASI SFN Interface Card of which the SFN mode is enabled, the ASI SFN
adaptation settings will be lost. More information can be found in section
Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency Networks on page 869.
208 4011746 Rev W

Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams

Introduction
For each outgoing Transport Stream the DCM needs the knowledge of the following
standard Transport Stream parameters:
IP Address: IP address of the destination port to which the outgoing Transport
Stream must stream
Note: Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams has some
restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on page 196.
UDP Port: UDP port number of the destination port to which the outgoing
Transport Stream must stream
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier (ON ID) labels the outgoing Transport
Stream with the source network of the Transport Stream.
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier (TS ID) is used to identify the outgoing
Transport Stream from other Transport Streams in the application.
Total Bit Rate (Mbps): The maximum bit rate that can be used by the
corresponding Transport Stream. This parameter is not applicable if the Output
Rate parameter is set to VBR.
Output Standard: the service type coding used by particular set top boxes differs
according to the standard. Therefore the DCM allows remapping of the PMT
elementary stream_type by changing the Output Standard mode. The following
table gives the PMT Elementary Stream_Type remapping possibilities.
Stream Type Remapping
Component Type Video 1st Audio 2nd Audio 3rd Audio 4th Audio
Mode
Transparent pass pass pass pass pass
Force Video force 0x2 pass pass pass pass

Force Uplink force 0x2 force 0x3 force 0x81 pass pass
Force Audio 3 force 0x2 pass pass force 0x6 pass
The Stream Type of an elementary stream recognized as a specific component
type will be remapped to the specific value as indicated in the Stream Type
Remapping table.
An elementary stream, for which the stream type is remapped, is indicated in the
DCM Outputs tree and Service Component Settings table.
4011746 Rev W 209

- DCM Outputs tree
- Service Component Settings table
Tip: The DCM allows remapping the stream type of individual components
by defining ES type overrule entries. For more information please refer to
topic Overruling Elementary Stream Type on page 335.
Output Protocol: The IP packets in which an outgoing Transport Stream is
encapsulated can be enlarged with an RTP header (RTP streaming). RTP stands
for real time transport protocol and is the protocol standard for streaming media
(video conferencing, audio conferencing, video streaming over the internet...).
- RTP: the IP packets are enlarged with RTP Header.
- UDP: the IP packets are not enlarged with RTP header.
Notes:
- The RTP standard requires that an even UDP port number is chosen for an
RTP stream.
- For forward error correction (FEC) the Output Protocol parameter must be
set to RTP. For more information concerning FEC, please refer to topic
Forward Error Correction on page 227.
Tip: In the DCM Output tree an outgoing Transport Stream of which the Output
Protocol parameter is set to RTP, is indicated by (RTP).
Streaming: For backup or configuration purposes it can be useful to enable or

disable streaming of the Transport Stream through the output port.
- Stopped: streaming of the Transport Stream is disabled.
- Active: streaming of the Transport Stream is enabled.
210 4011746 Rev W

(Output) Rate: The bit rate of an outgoing Transport stream can be fixed or
variable. Set the Output Rate mode to CBR to define a constant bit rate
Transport Stream or VBR to define a variable bit rate Transport Stream.
Notes:
During the Outgoing Transport Stream creation process certain TS settings are
automatically filled by default values. The procedure to change these default
values is described in topic Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams
on page 215.
The IP Address, UDP Port, Output Protocol, and Rate parameters are only
applicable when the outgoing Transport Stream belongs to a GbE port.
For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream on a GbE port, only the IP
Address, UDP Port, Output Protocol, and Streaming parameters are applicable.
For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream on an ASI port, only the
Streaming parameters are applicable.
To Change Transport Stream Settings for a Single Transport Stream

The procedure below describes how to change the Transport Stream settings for a
single Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which settings
must be changed.
3 Double-click on the Transport Stream or right-click on the Transport Stream and
point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Point to the TS or TS/TR tab.
Result: The TS or TS/TR tab page is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 211

5 Under the TS Settings, adapt the parameters that must be changed for the
corresponding Transport Stream.
Tip: Pressing the arrow beside Configure TOT (PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard
Mode = DVB or Mixed) or Configure STT (PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode
= ATSC or Mixed) displays the corresponding table sub page. For more
information, please refer to topic Adding or Removing Time Offset Descriptors to or
from a TOT on page 397 or Modifying the STT on page 404.
Notes:
Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams has some
restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on page
196.
Since variable bit rate MPTSs may arise dejittering issues further in the chain,
the following confirmation box is displayed if the Rate parameter for an
MPTS is set to VBR:
Click on the OK command button to confirm.

When forward error correction is enabled, the Output Protocol parameter
must be set to RTP. Changing the Output Protocol parameter from RTP to
UDP and forward error correction is enabled displays a message box asking
to disable FEC.
212 4011746 Rev W


For more information concerning FEC, please refer to topic Forward Error
Correction on page 227.
Notes:
The new ON ID and TS ID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal
notation, independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be
prefixed by 0x. For more information concerning the display mode, please refer
to topic Changing the Display Mode on page 128.
The IP Address, UDP Port, Output Protocol, and Rate parameter are not
displayed in the TS Output sub page for a Transport Stream on an ASI port.
When settings of multiple Transport Streams on a particular GbE port must be
changed, the TS Output sub page for a port can be used. This sub page gives an
overview of the settings of all outgoing Transport Streams for a particular port.
For more information, please refer to sub topic To Change Transport Stream
Settings for Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular Port on page 213.
For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream on a GbE port, only the IP
Address, UDP Port, and Output Protocol parameters are applicable.
For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream, the TS tab page also
provides references of the corresponding incoming Transport Stream.
To Change Settings for Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular GbE

Port
The following procedure describes how to change the Transport Stream settings for
multiple Transport Streams of a particular port.
4011746 Rev W 213


2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the output port containing the Transport
Streams for which settings must be changed.
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output page of the selected port is displayed.
4 In the TS Settings table, modify the parameters.

Notes:
Changing the Output Protocol parameter from RTP to UDP while forward
error correction is enabled is not possible. For more information concerning
FEC, please refer to topic Forward Error Correction on page 227.
Since variable bit rate MPTSs may arise dejittering issues further in the chain,
the following confirmation box is displayed if the Rate parameter for an
MPTS is set to VBR:

For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams, the Total Bit Rate
(Mbps), Output Standard, and Rate parameter are not applicable in the TS
Settings table.
Tip: When particular parameters for all Transport Streams on a port must be
changed to similar values, the Update all TS function of the web browser user
interface can be used. The following procedure describes how to use this function.
214 4011746 Rev W

1 Under the Update all TS settings, enter the desired value in the box or select the
desired value in the drop down box of the parameter that should be changed for
all Transport Streams of the selected ports.

Result: The settings are changed in the TS Settings table.
Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams

During the Transport Stream creation process particular parameters are filled in
with default values. To facilitate the configuration of outgoing Transport Streams,
other values can be given to these defaults. The parameters for which defaults can
be changed are:
The IP settings of the destination device to which the outgoing Transport Stream
must stream (only for a GbE Interface Card)
- Start IP Address parameter: the IP address that will be used during the
outgoing Transport Stream creation process. When the Increment Scheme
parameter is set to IP Address + 1, each time a new outgoing Transport
Stream is created the IP address will be increased by 1.
Note: Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams has
some restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on
page 196.
- Start UDP Port parameter: the UDP Port number that will be used during the
outgoing Transport Stream creation process. When the Increment Scheme
parameter is set to UDP Port + 1 or UDP Port + 2, each time a new outgoing
Transport Stream is created the UDP port number will be increased by 1 or 2.
- Source UDP Port parameter: the source UDP port for the outgoing Transport
Stream.
4011746 Rev W 215

- Increment Scheme parameter: When a Transport Stream is added to a GbE

port, the destination IP settings are adapted using one of the following
increment schemes:
IP Address + 1: the default IP address for the newly created Transport
Stream is equal to the IP address as defined in the Start IP Address
parameter and each time increased by one if occupied.
UDP Port + 1: the UDP port for the newly created Transport Stream is
equal to the UDP port number as defined in the Start UDP Port
parameter and each time increased by one if occupied.
UDP Port + 2: the UDP port for the newly created Transport Stream is
equal to the UDP port number as defined in the Start UDP Port
parameter and each time increased by two if occupied.
IP Address + 1 and UDP Port + 1: the IP address and UDP port for the
newly created Transport Stream is equal to the IP address and UDP port
as defines in the Start IP Address and Start UDP Port parameter and
each time increased by one if occupied.
- Output Protocol parameter
Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter
Output Standard parameter
SI Table Playout parameters: for more information, please refer to topic
Changing the PSI/SI Table Playout Rate on page 385.
PMT Descriptor Rules: for more information, please refer to topic Adding and
Modifying PMT Descriptors on page 339.
The following procedure explains how to change the default outgoing Transport
Stream settings.
default values for the outgoing Transport Stream parameters should be changed.
displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
4 Point to the TS tab.
216 4011746 Rev W

5 Under the Output TS Default Settings, modify the default settings.
Note: For an ASI Interface Card, only the Standard parameter is applicable.
4011746 Rev W 217

Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport

Streams
Introduction
For each outgoing Transport Stream on a GbE port, the follow advanced setting can
be configured.
VLAN identifier and VLAN priority
When the DCM participates into VLAN application, the Transport Streams can
be VLAN tagged. The IP packets in which an outgoing Transport Stream is
encapsulated are enlarged with a VLAN header including VLAN Identifier
(VLAN ID) and VLAN Priority. The VLAN ID parameter ranges from 0 to
4094 and the VLAN Priority parameter from 0 to 7.
Type of Service
The Type of Service parameter (ToS) determines the IP packet header field that
indicates the type or quality of the service for this IP packet. A value can be
given between 0 and 255 and is default set to 0.
Time to Live
To prevent indefinite looping of IP packets in a network, the lifetime of IP
packets can be limited by defining a time to live to these packets. This time to
live parameter (TTL) determines a field in IP packet header that specifies how
many routers a packet can pass before being discarded. Each time an IP packet
passes a router, the TTL field of the packet is decreased by one and will be
discarded if it reaches 0. A value can be given between 1 and 255 and is default
set to 64.
UDP Size
This parameter determines the number of MPEG packets that will be
encapsulated into a single UDP packet. This parameter can be set between 1
and 7 and its default value is 7.
Note: A DCM with software package version 6.0 or lower, the number of MPEG
packets into a single UDP packet is fixed to 7.
Source IP and Source UDP
The source IP address and the source UDP port in the IP packets of an outgoing
Transport Stream are by default the IP address and the UDP port of the GbE
port. For certain reason (for instance VLAN applications) it can be useful to
change these parameters.
Note: During the outgoing Transport Stream creation process particular advanced
Transport Stream setting are automatically filled by default values. The procedure
to change these default values is described in topic Changing Default Values for the
Advanced Transport Stream Settings on page 221.
218 4011746 Rev W

Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams
Changing Advanced Parameters for a Single Transport Stream

The following procedure describes how to change the advanced setting for a single
Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which advanced
parameters must be changed.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Point to the Advanced tab.
Result: The Advanced tab page containing the Advanced Settings is displayed.
5 In the TOS box, enter a correct type of service value.

6 In the TTL box, enter a correct time to live value.
7 Tick the Source IP check box and enter the source IP address for the IP packets of
the outgoing Transport Stream in the Source IP box. The octets of the address
8 In the Source UDP box, enter the source UDP port for the IP packets of the
outgoing Transport Stream.
9 In the UDP Size drop down box, select the number of MPEG packets that must
be encapsulated into a UDP packet.
10 Tick the VLAN On check box to enabling VLAN tagging for the selected
outgoing Transport Stream or clear the check box to disable VLAN tagging.
11 In the ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.
12 In the Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.
Note: The ID and Priority parameters are only applicable when the VLAN On
check box is ticked.
4011746 Rev W 219

To Change the Advanced Settings for Multiple Transport Stream of a

Particular Port
The procedure below describes how to change the advanced setting of multiple
outgoing transport Streams of a particular port.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port for which advanced parameters of
multiple Transport Streams must be changed.
3 Double-click on the port or right-click on the port and point to Settings in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected port is displayed.
4 Click on the TS Advanced link.
5 Result: The Service - TS Advanced sub page is displayed.
6 In the Advanced Settings table, perform the following steps:
Tip: In the Advanced Setting table, each outgoing Transport Stream is indicated
(TS identification) by source IP address, UDP port, ON ID, and TS ID.
a Tick the VLAN On check box to enabling VLAN tagging for the selected
outgoing Transport Stream or clear the check box to disable VLAN tagging.
b In the ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.
c In the Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.
Note: The ID and Priority parameters are only applicable when the VLAN
On check box is ticked.
d In the TOS box, enter a correct type of service value.
e In the TTL box, enter a correct time to live value.
f Tick the Source IP check box and enter the source IP address for the IP
packets of the outgoing Transport Stream in the Source IP box. The octets of
the address must be separated by dots.
g In the Source UDP box, enter the source UDP port for the IP packets of the
220 4011746 Rev W

h In the UDP Size drop down box, select the number of MPEG packets that
must be encapsulated into a UDP packet.
Note: When particular parameters of all Transport Streams in the Advanced
Settings table must be changed to similar values, the Update all TS function of the
web browser user interface can be used. The following procedure describes how to
use this function.
1 Under the Update all TS settings, set or clear the VLAN Enabled check box and
enter the desired value in the box of the parameter that should be changed for all
Transport Streams of the selected ports.
Note: The ID and Priority boxes are only applicable when the VLAN Enabled
check box is ticked.
Result: The settings are changed in the TS Settings table.
Changing Default Values for the Advanced Transport Stream Settings

The procedure below describes how to modify the default values for the advanced
Transport Stream settings.
default values for the advanced Transport Stream parameters should be changed.
displayed.
Result: The Advanced tab page is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 221

5 Under the Default VLAN Settings settings, modify the following parameter:
a Tick the VLAN On check box of the port pair for which VLAN tagging must
be switched on.
b In the ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.
c In the Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.
6 Under the Advanced TS Settings, modify the following parameters:
a In the TOS box, enter a type of service value.

b In the TTL box, enter a time to live value.
7 In the Alarm Settings table, modify the following parameters:
a Tick the Enabled check box of the Stuffing Rate Too Low row and enter a
correct value in the corresponding Threshold box.
b Tick the Enabled check box of the Payload Bitrate Too Low row and enter a
correct value in the corresponding Threshold box.
For detailed information concerning the alarms settings of an outgoing Transport
Stream, please refer to topic Configuring the Stuffing Rate Too Low and Payload Bit
Rate Too Low Alarm on page 808.
222 4011746 Rev W

9 In the Output TS Default Settings table, modify the following parameter:
a In the UDP Size drop down box, select the number of MPEG packets that
must be encapsulated into a UDP packet.
10 Click on the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
4011746 Rev W 223

Configuring Automatic Pass Rules

Introduction
During creating an outgoing Transport Stream by passing an incoming Transport
Stream to an output port, TS auto pass rules referred to this incoming Transport
Stream can automatically be assigned to the created Transport Stream. When TS
auto pass rules are assigned during this process, all rules (Pass Unreferenced PIDs,
Pass EMMs, and Pass Services rule) will be activated. Once an outgoing Transport
Stream is created, the TS auto pass rules and the identification setting of the
incoming Transport Stream to which these rules refer to can always be changed.
Outgoing Transport Streams created without TS auto pass rule assignments can
always be provided with rules.
For more information concerning TS auto pass rules, please refer to subtopic
Transport Stream Auto Pass Rules on page 196.
Assigning or Changing TS Auto Pass Rules

The following steps describe how to assign or to change TS auto pass rules for a
particular outgoing Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream to which TS auto pass
rules must be assigned or for which rules must be changed.
Result: The Service - TS Output page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 In the Service - TS Output page click on the Auto Pass link.
Result: The Service - TS Output page containing the TS Auto Pass Rules and
Service Auto Pass Rules settings are displayed.
224 4011746 Rev W

Configuring Automatic Pass Rules
5 Perform the following steps under TS Auto Pass Rules settings.

a In the Input Card drop down box, enter the name of the interface card that
receives the Transport Stream to which the rules refers to.
b In the Input Port drop down box, enter the name of the port that receives this
Transport Stream.
c In the Input Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
– ASI: for an ASI input port
– GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
– GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
d In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
source device streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop
down box is set to GbE Multicast.
e In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port that
receives the Transport Stream.
box is set to ASI.
f Set or clear the Pass Unreferenced PIDs, Pass EMMs, and/or Pass Services
check box.
Tip: TS auto pass rules can also be assigned and changed via SNMP using the
SA_Europe_DCM_SMI2.mib.
4011746 Rev W 225

Section C Forward Error Correction
Introduction
This section outlines the FEC option of the Digital Content Manager.
In this section
Introduction ................................................................................................. 228
Configuring the FEC Settings for Incoming Transport Streams .......... 234
Configuring the FEC Settings for Outgoing Transport Streams .......... 243
4011746 Rev W 227

Introduction
General
Due to its nature (occasionally packet loss, packet reordering, and/or packet
jittering) a traditional IP network is not the perfect channel for transmitting
broadcast-quality compressed video content. The Forward Error Correction (FEC)
developed by the PRO-MPEG forum is a unique technology to enhance the
robustness of video traffic over IP networks. The DCM supports Pro-MPEG Code
of Practice (COP) #3 release2, which is based on the exclusive or (XOR) boolean
operator applied to a number of data packets.
When a packet (called FEC packet) is created by performing the XOR boolean
operation on a number of RTP packets, a missing RTP packet can always be
reconstructed by performing the XOR operation on the FEC packet and the
remaining RTP packets.
FEC = RTP1 XOR RTP2
RTP1 = FEC XOR RTP2
RTP2 = FEC XOR RTP1
FEC Profiles
The PRO-MPEG forum provides two FEC profiles: 1D FEC and 2D FEC, each having
multiple FEC schemes.
1D FEC Profile
The 1D FEC profile maps the RTP packet stream across columns (matrix of data
packets), see illustration below.
228 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
The XOR boolean operation is performed on the column RTP packets. This
approach provides robustness against single missing RTP packets and multiple
consecutive missing packets as long as only one packet is missing in a column
and the numbers of consecutive missing packets do not exceed the number of
columns (L).
Example: When data packets 9, 10, and 11 are missing at the receiver side, these
packets can be reconstructed by means of the remaining column packets and
FEC packet 1, 2, and 3.
In the example, a burst loss of maximum 4 consecutive data packets can be

reconstructed.
2D FEC Profile
The error protection can be enhanced by performing the XOR boolean on both
the column packets and row packets. As depicted in the following illustration a
FEC packet is created for each row and for each column.
4011746 Rev W 229

The 2D FEC scheme is able to reconstruct multiple missing packets in a singe

row and in a single column.
Example: In the illustration below, data packet 1, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13 are lost.
Data packet 1, 7, and 13 can be reconstructed by means of the remaining row

packets and associated row FEC packets ('1, '2, and '3). Once data packet 1, 7,
and 13 are reconstructed, data packet 9, 10, 11, and 12 can be reconstructed by
the associated column data packets and column FEC packets (1, 2, 3, and 4).
230 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
FEC Schemes
The FEC scheme is determined by the number of columns or row Length (L) and the
number of rows or column Depth (D). Pro-MPEG Code of Practice #3 specifies
following limits:
For 1D FEC profile:
L * D ≤ 100
1 ≤ L ≤ 20
4 ≤ D ≤ 20
For 2D FEC profile:
L * D ≤ 100
4 ≤ L ≤ 20
4 ≤ D ≤ 20
Note: For outgoing Transport Streams the DCM allows using L x D ≤ 256.
The following table depicts the L and D limitation:
: For 1D FEC only
: For 1D FEC and 2D FEC
: Allowed by the DCM but not by Pro-MPEG Code of Practice #3
: Not allowed
4011746 Rev W 231

FEC Packet Transportation

The column FEC and row FEC packets are transmitted using separate streams. The
web browser user interface of the DCM allows configuring the destination multicast
IP address of the FEC streams as well as the UDP port numbers.
Tips:
For unicast streaming the IP address for both FEC streams matches the IP
address of the Transport Stream to which the FEC packets applies to. The UDP
port number for the column FEC stream is by default the UDP port number of
the Transport Stream increased by 2 and for the row FEC stream the UDP port
number of the Transport Stream increased by 4.
For multicast streaming the UDP port number for both FEC streams matches the
UDP port of the Transport stream to which both streams applies to. The IP
address of the column FEC stream is by default the IP address of the Transport
Stream increased by 1 and the IP address of the row FEC stream the IP address
increased by 2.
Important: For Pro-MPEG Code of Practice (COP) #3 release2 compliant streams, the
UDP port for the column FEC stream is two higher than Transport Stream UDP port
and the UDP port for the row FEC stream is four higher.
Sending Arrangements
The DCM implements both Pro-MPEG COP#3 release 2 Annex A and Annex B FEC
packet sending arrangement.
Annex A (non block aligned FEC arrangement): Each FEC packet is transmitted
L packets after the last data packet it pertains to.
Annex B (block aligned FEC linearisation): Column FEC packets are sent by
using an interleaver.
Overhead and Latencies

The overhead on the transmission and the decoder latency created by adding FEC
packets depends on the FEC profile (1D or 2D) and the FEC scheme. For instance a
1D profile with a column depth of 4 rows generates an overhead of 25 %.
Requirements
Forward error correction needs a FEC Card on the corresponding interface card. In
the DCM Configuration, DCM Inputs, and DCM Outputs tree the presence of a FEC
Card is indicated in the Card branch.
232 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
The FEC option of the DCM is on a per license basis, each incoming Transport
Stream, preconfigured incoming Transport Stream, and outgoing Transport Stream
for which FEC error protection is enabled and each incoming Transport Stream for
which packet reordering is enabled, needs one FEC License. More information
concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 49.
4011746 Rev W 233

Configuring the FEC Settings for Incoming Transport Streams

To Configure the FEC Settings for a Single Incoming Transport Stream
The procedure below describes how to configure the FEC parameters for a single
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the Transport Streams for which FEC settings
must be configured.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page containing the TS FEC table is
displayed.
4 In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following error protection profiles:
Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D FEC profile is used.
Packet Reordering: only RTP packet reordering without FEC will be done.
Default (xxxxxxxx): the default value will be used. The default value is
shown between brackets.
5 Perform the following steps for the column FEC stream:
a In the left hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
– Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream is
a unicast IP address.
– Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream
is a multicast IP address.
b For an incoming column FEC stream with multicast destination IP address,
enter the IP address in the Column FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Type drop
down box.
c In the left hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the
column FEC stream.
234 4011746 Rev W

6 In case of FEC 2D profile, perform the following steps for the row FEC stream:
a In the right hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
– Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
unicast IP address.
– Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
multicast IP address.
b For an incoming row FEC stream with multicast destination IP address, enter
the IP address in the Row FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP address
down box.
c In the right hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the
row FEC stream.
Note: The Row FEC Stream IP box and the right hand Type drop down box and
UDP box are only applicable when the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
Tips:
When the FEC parameters are configured properly, the L, D, FEC overhead, and
latency appear in the TS FEC table.
The arrow in the Statics column can be used to open the TS_FEC_Statistics
popup. More information concerning FEC statistics can be found in sub topic
Checking the FEC Statistics on page 241.
To Configure the FEC Settings for Multiple Incoming Transport Streams of

a Particular Port
The following procedure explains how to configure FEC settings for multiple
incoming Transport Streams of a particular port.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Streams for
which FEC settings must be configured.
short-cut menu.
4 Click on the TS FEC link.
Result: The Service - TS FEC sub page containing the FEC Settings table is
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 235

Tips:
In the FEC Settings table, each row represents an incoming Transport Stream
or a preconfigured Transport Stream. More information concerning
preconfigured Transport Streams can be found in topic To Configure the FEC
Settings for a Preconfigured Incoming Transport Stream on page 237.
An incoming or preconfigured Transport Stream is identified by its
destination IP address and UDP port.
Note: The Service - TS FEC sub page is only applicable if the GbE Interface Card
is provided with FEC Card.
5 In the Mode drop down box of the corresponding Transport Stream, select one of
the following error protection profiles:
Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile is used.
Packet Reordering: only RTP packet reordering without FEC will be done.
Default (xxxxxxxx): the default value will be used. The default value is
shown between brackets.
6 Perform the following steps for the column FEC stream:
a In the left hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
– Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream is
– Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream
b For an incoming column FEC stream with multicast destination IP address,
enter the IP address in the Column FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP
down box.
c In the left hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the
column FEC stream.
7 In case of FEC 2D profile, perform the following steps for the row FEC stream:
a In the right hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
– Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
unicast IP address.
– Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
236 4011746 Rev W

b For an incoming row FEC stream with multicast destination IP address, enter
the IP address in the Row FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP address
down box.
c In the right hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the
row FEC stream.
Note: The Row FEC Stream IP box, the right hand Type drop down box and
UDP box are only applicable when the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
Tips:
When the FEC parameters of an incoming Transport Stream are properly
configured, the L, D, FEC, and latency overhead appears in the FEC Settings
table.
The arrow in the Statics column of an incoming Transport Stream can be used to
open the TS_FEC_Statistics popup. More information concerning FEC statistics
can be found in sub topic Checking the FEC Statistics on page 241.
To Configure the FEC Settings for a Preconfigured Incoming Transport

Stream
Particular settings of Transport Streams which are not yet at the input of the DCM
can be preconfigured. The following steps explain how to configure the FEC
settings for preconfigured Transport Streams.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which Transport Streams must be
preconfigured.
short-cut menu
Result: The Service - TS FEC sub page containing the Add Preconfigured TS
settings is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 237

5 Under the Add Preconfigured TS settings, configure the FEC settings for the
preconfigured Transport Stream as described in the following steps.
– Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is a
unicast IP address.
– Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is
a multicast IP address.
b Enter the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream in the IP
box and the UDP port number in the UDP box.
c In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following values:
– Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
– FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile is used.
– FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile is used.
– Packet Reordering: only RTP packet re-ordering without FEC will be done.
d In the FEC Streams drop down box, select one of the following values:
– Same IP and UDP+2, UDP+4: The FEC streams have the destination IP
address of the incoming Transport stream. The destination UDP port of
the column FEC stream is the UDP port number of Transport Stream
increased by 2 and the destination UDP port number of the row FEC
stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream UDP port increased
by 4.
– Same UDP and IP+1, IP+2: The FEC streams have the destination UDP
port of the incoming Transport stream. The destination IP address of the
column FEC stream is the Transport Stream IP address increased by 1
and the destination IP address the row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only)
the Transport Stream IP Address increased by 2.
– Custom Setting: The settings for the Column and Row FEC streams are
configurable.
e Perform the following steps if the FEC Streams parameter is set to Custom
Setting.
238 4011746 Rev W

– In the Column Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following
values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC
stream is a unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC
stream is a multicast IP address.
– For an incoming column FEC stream with multicast destination IP
address, enter the IP address in the Column IP box and the UDP port in
the UDP box. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the
Column Socket Type drop down box.
– In the Row Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following
values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream
– For an incoming row FEC stream with multicast destination IP address,
enter the IP address in the Row FEC Stream IP box and the UDP port in
the UDP box. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Row
Socket Type drop down box.
Note: The Row Socket Type drop down box, Row IP and UDP box are only
applicable when the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
6 Click on the Add Row command button.
Result: The preconfigured Transport Stream is added to the FEC Settings table.
Notes:
Preconfigured incoming Transport Streams with FEC settings for which the
Mode is set to FEC 1D, FEC 2D, or Packet Reordering can only be done when free
FEC licenses are available. More information concerning licenses can be found
in topic Licensing on page 49.
In the FEC Settings table, preconfigured Transport Streams with configured FEC
settings can be removed by ticking the check box of the corresponding
preconfigured Transport Stream and pressing the Remove Checked Items
command button.
4011746 Rev W 239

Changing the Default FEC Settings for Incoming Transport Streams

The following procedure describes how to change the default FEC parameter values
for incoming Transport Streams. These values will be used for each incoming
Transport Stream for which the associated parameters are set to default.
WARNING:
Changing the default value involves changing the associated parameter for all
incoming transport stream for which the value is set to default.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which
default FEC parameter values for incoming Transport Streams should be
changed.
displayed.
Result: The Configuration - Defaults sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the FEC tab.
Result: The FEC tab page table is displayed.
5 Under the Default Input FEC Settings, change the following parameters if
required:
a In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following error protection
profiles:
– Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
– FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile is used.
– FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile is used.
– Packet Reordering: only RTP packet reordering without forward error
correction will be done.
b In the FEC Stream drop down box, select one of the following values:
– Same IP and UDP+2, UDP+4: The FEC streams have the destination IP
address of the incoming Transport stream. The destination UDP port of
the column FEC stream is the UDP port number of Transport Stream
increased by 2 and the destination UDP port number of the row FEC
stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream UDP port increased
by 4.
240 4011746 Rev W

– Same UDP and IP+1, IP+2: The FEC streams have the destination UDP
port of the incoming Transport stream. The destination IP address of the
column FEC stream is the Transport Stream IP address increased by 1
and the destination IP address the row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only)
the Transport Stream IP Address increased by 2.
Note: The FEC Stream drop down box is only applicable if the FEC 1D or
FEC 2D profile is selected.
Checking the FEC Statistics

The following steps describe how to check the FEC statistics for a particular
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the Transport Streams for which FEC
statistics must be checked.
4 In the TS FEC table, click on the arrow in the Statistics column.
Result: A popup is displayed containing the TS FEC statistics of the
4011746 Rev W 241

The following TS FEC Statistics are displayed.

Valid Packets: represents the number of IP packets received by the DCM for
the corresponding Transport Stream.
Missing Packets: represents the number of lost IP packets of the
Fixed Packets: represents the number of reconstructed IP packets by the
DCM for the corresponding Transport Stream.
Duplicated Packets: represents the number of duplicated IP packets of the
Reordered Packets: represents the number of reordered IP packets by the
DCM for the corresponding Transport Stream.
Packets Out of Range: represents the number of frames that can't be added
to the matrix (RTP header sequence of the packet doesn't match the matrix).
Tips:
The TS FEC statistics can be restarted by pointing to the Reset command button.
After loading the statistics from the DCM, the statistic figures are refreshed at
regular time, meaning no command button should be pressed to reload the
figures. For some reasons it can be useful to switch off these automatically
refresh actions. Therefore this popup window is provided with a Refresh drop
down box that can be used to switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the automatically
refresh actions.
242 4011746 Rev W

Configuring the FEC Settings for Outgoing Transport Streams

To Configure FEC Setting for a Single Outgoing Transport Stream
Perform the following steps to configure FEC settings for a particular Transport
Stream.
Tip: During the Outgoing Transport Stream creation process certain FEC settings are
automatically filled by default values. To facilitate the configuration of outgoing
Transport Streams, other values can be given to these defaults. The procedure to
change these default values is described in topic Changing the Default FEC Settings for
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Streams for which FEC
settings must be configured.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Advanced tab.
Result: The Advanced tab page is displayed.
5 Under the FEC Settings, change the following parameters if required:
a In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following settings:
– Disabled: forward error correction is disabled.
– FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile will be used.
– FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile will be used.
4011746 Rev W 243

Note: When the Output Protocol parameter of the Transport Stream is set to
UDP and the Mode parameter is set to FEC 1D or FEC 2D, a message box is
displayed asking to change the protocol to RTP.
Press the OK command button to confirm.

b In the Sending Arrangement drop down box, select Annex A or Annex B.
c Enter the destination IP address for the column FEC stream in the Column
FEC Stream IP box and the destination UDP port number in the
corresponding UDP box.
Notes:
– The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
– Both the Column FEC Stream IP box and UDP box are not applicable if
the Mode parameter is set to Disabled.
d Enter the destination IP address for the row FEC stream in the Row FEC
Stream IP box and the destination UDP port number in the corresponding
UDP box.
Notes:
– Both the Column FEC Stream IP box and UDP box are only applicable if
the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
e To determine the FEC scheme, enter the number of columns in the L box and
the column depth (number of rows) in the D box.
Note: The L and D box are not applicable if the Mode parameter is set to
Disabled.
Tip: Configuring FEC for outgoing Transport Streams can also be done via SNMP
using the SA_Europe_DCM_SMI2.mib.
244 4011746 Rev W

To Configure FEC Settings for Multiple Outgoing Transport Streams of a

Particular Port
The following procedure explains how to configure FEC settings for multiple
Transport Streams of a particular port.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Streams
for which FEC settings must be configured.
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS FEC page containing the FEC Settings table port is
displayed.
Tips:
In the FEC Settings table each outgoing Transport Stream is identified by
destination IP Address and UDP port, ON ID, and TS ID.
To sort the FEC Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table
5 Perform the following steps in the row of the Transport Stream for which FEC
settings must be configured:
Note: When the Output Protocol parameter of the Transport Stream is set to
UDP and the Mode parameter is set to FEC 1D or FEC 2D, a message box is
displayed asking to change the protocol to RTP.
4011746 Rev W 245

Press the OK command button to confirm.

c Enter the destination IP address for the column FEC stream in the Column
FEC Stream IP box and the destination UDP port number in the
corresponding UDP box.
Notes:
– Both the Column FEC Stream IP box and UDP box are not applicable if
the Mode parameter is set to Disabled.
d Enter the destination IP address for the row FEC stream in the Row FEC
Stream IP box and the destination UDP port number in the corresponding
UDP box.
Notes:
– Both the Column FEC Stream IP box and UDP box are only applicable if
the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
e To determine the FEC scheme, enter the number of columns in the L box and
the column depth (number of rows) in the D box.
Disabled.
6 Repeat step a up to e for all Transport Streams for which the FEC settings must
be configured.
abort the configuration.
Tips:
When particular FEC parameters for all Transport Streams on a port must be
changed to similar values, the Update all TS function of the web browser user
interface can be used. The following procedure describes how to use this
function.
a In the Update all TS table, enter the desired value in the box or select the
desired value in the drop down box of the parameter that should be changed
for all Transport Streams of the selected ports.
246 4011746 Rev W

Note: Changing the Mode to FEC 1D or FEC 2D is only possible when the
Output Protocol parameter of the Transport Streams is set to RTP.
b Press the Update command button.
Result: The settings are changed in the FEC Settings table.
c Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
Configuring FEC for outgoing Transport Streams can also be done via SNMP
using the SA_Europe_DCM_SMI2.mib.
Generating FEC Errors

For test purposes the DCM is able to generate FEC errors for a particular Transport
Stream by dropping IP packets. FEC errors can be created for a single burst cycle or
can be generated continuously. A single burst cycle consists of a number of
dropped packets (bad packets) after transmitting a number of good packets. The
following procedure describes how to generate FEC errors.
Security Group and point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the
Service link.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Stream
for which FEC errors must be generated.
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS FEC page containing the FEC Error Generation settings
is displayed.
5 In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following items:
Disabled: the FEC error generating process is disabled.
Single burst: the single FEC error burst will be executed.
Continuous: the continuous FEC generation process is enabled.
6 In the Good Packets box, enter the number of good packets that must be
transmitted before packets will be dropped.
4011746 Rev W 247

7 In the Bad Packets box, enter the number of packets that must be dropped
during one burst cycle.
8 Enter the destination IP address of the Transport Stream in the TS IP box and the
UDP port number in the UDP box.
9 Press the Set command button
Result: The FEC error generating process is started. When applying new error
generation settings the previous error condition will be cleared automatically.
Notes:
The continuous FEC error generating process can be stopped by setting the
Mode to Disabled and pressing the Set command button.
A reboot of the DCM will clear the current error generation settings.
Changing the Default FEC Settings for Outgoing Transport Streams

During the creation process of outgoing Transport Streams, particular FEC
parameters are filled with default values. To facilitate the configuration of outgoing
Transport Streams these default values can be changed. The following steps
explain how to change the default FEC parameter values.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for
which the default FEC parameter values should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected GbE Interface
Card is displayed.
Result: The Configuration - Defaults sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the FEC tab.
Result: The FEC tab page is displayed.
5 Under the Default Output FEC Settings, change the following parameters if
required.
248 4011746 Rev W


c In the FEC Streams drop down box, select one of the following values.
– Same IP and UDP+2, UDP+4: When a new Transport Stream is created,
the FEC stream(s) will get the IP address of the Transport stream. The
column FEC stream will get the Transport Stream UDP port increased by
2 and the row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream
UDP port increased by 4.
– Same UDP and IP+1, IP+2: When a new Transport Stream is created, the
FEC stream(s) will get the UDP port of the Transport stream. The
column FEC stream will get the Transport Stream IP address increased by
1 and the row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream IP
Address increased by 2.
Disabled.
d Enter the number of columns in the L box and the column depth (number of
rows) in the D box for determining the FEC scheme.
Disabled.
4011746 Rev W 249

Section D Service Re-Multiplexing
Introduction
This section describes service re-multiplexing capabilities of the Digital
Content Manager.
In this section
Passing Individual Services....................................................................... 252
Preconfiguring Services ............................................................................. 255
Service Auto Passing Rules ....................................................................... 258
Passing all Services of an Incoming Transport Stream.......................... 260
Using Virtual Services................................................................................ 263
Using Still Picture Services ........................................................................ 266
4011746 Rev W 251

Passing Individual Services

Introduction
Two passing methods can be used to pass individual incoming services to an
outgoing Transport Stream, the Drag and Drop method and the Muxing method.
When a discreet number of individual services should be passed to a Transport
Stream, the Drag and Drop method is useful. When numbers of services must be
passed to one or more Transport Stream, the Muxing method is recommended.
An incoming service can be passed to an outgoing Transport Stream more than once.
The service ID will then be remapped and the components are shared between the
corresponding output services.
Note: Services can also be passed to an outgoing Transport Stream using ROSA's
Macro Component. More information about macro's can be found in topic Using
DCM Macros on page 939.

Perform the following steps to pass a discreet number of individual incoming
services to an outgoing Transport Stream using the drag and drop method.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming service that must be passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service must be passed.
4 Select the branch of the incoming service and drag and drop this service on the
icon of the outgoing Transport Stream.
Result: The incoming service is added to the outgoing Transport Stream.
252 4011746 Rev W

Passing Individual Services
Muxing Method
The following steps explain how to pass numbers of services to one or more
outgoing Transport Stream(s) using the Muxing method.
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box TS
(MPTS).
Result: The Input Services and Output Transport Streams table are displayed.
Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Transport Stream table by a particular
3 In the Input Services table, set the check boxes of the services that must be
passed.
4 In the Output Transport Streams table, set the check box(es) of the outgoing
Transport Stream(s) to which the services must be passed.
Output Transport Streams table, tick the check box of the first row, press and
hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
4011746 Rev W 253

Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected services are passed
to the selected outgoing Transport Stream(s). All check boxes in the Input
Services table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transport Streams table
will be cleared.
254 4011746 Rev W

Preconfiguring Services
Introduction
The DCM allows configuring outgoing services which are not yet at the input of the
device. Therefore preconfigured services must be added to the outgoing Transport
Stream. Such preconfigured service can then be configured the same way as passed
services. Once the service becomes available at the input of the DCM, the service
will be passed to the output and processed by the DCM (Transrating, Scrambling,
DPI...) as preconfigured.
Adding Preconfigured Services

The following steps explain how to add preconfigured services to an outgoing
Transport Stream.
clicking on the Service page.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
preconfigured services must be added.
and point to Settings in the short cut menu.
4 Point to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the Routing tab.
Result: The Routing tab page is displayed.
6 Under the Add Preconfigured Service settings, modify the preconfigured
service parameters as described in the following steps:
4011746 Rev W 255

Tip: Preconfigured services can also be added via the Service and Scrambling
tab page on the Service - Service sub page.
Note: For adding preconfigured services, the No Input check box must be
cleared.
receives the Transport Stream from where this service should be passed.
b In the Input Port drop down box, enter the name of the port that receives this
Transport Stream.
– GbE Unicast: for a GbE Unicast input port
When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the
GbE port receiving the stream must be joined to the multicast group.
source device of this Transport Stream streams.
e In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
box is set to ASI.
f In the Input SID box, enter the Service Identifier of the incoming service for
which a preconfigured output service must be created.
Result: The preconfigured service is added to the Service Routing table.
256 4011746 Rev W

Removing Preconfigured Services

The following steps explain how to remove preconfigured services from an outgoing
Transport Stream.
preconfigured services must be removed.
displayed.
6 In the Service Routing table, tick the check box preceding each row that must be
removed.
Tips:
To sort the Service Routing table by a particular parameter, click on the table
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Service Routing table, tick
the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key,
and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
Results: The rows are removed from the Service Routing table.
4011746 Rev W 257

Service Auto Passing Rules

Introduction
When services are passed from an incoming Transport Stream to an outgoing
Transport Stream, all components within the service are passed by default. Once a
service is passed and components are added to the incoming service, these
components are automatically passed to the outgoing service.
In an outgoing service particular components can be blocked by switching off
service auto passing rules assigned to the outgoing Transport Stream to which a
service belongs to.
Service passing rules can be switched on or off for the following components:
ES
ECMs
ES ECMs
Note: Component tracking rules prior service passing rules, meaning components
passed or blocked by defining component tracking rules will be passed or blocked
without taking service passing rules into account.
Tip: During the service passing process, the service auto pass rules are automatically
configured by defaults. The procedure to change these default values is described
in topic Changing the Default Service Auto Pass Rules on page 259.
Switching On or Off Service Passing Rules

The following procedure explains how to switch on or off service passing rules for
services of a particular outgoing Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which service
passing rules must be switched on or off.
displayed.
4 Click on the Auto Pass tab.
Result: The Auto Pass tab page containing the TS Auto Pass Rules and Service
Auto Pass Rules table are displayed.
258 4011746 Rev W

Service Auto Passing Rules
5 Under the Service Auto Pass Rules setting, set the check box for the component
type for which the service passing rule must be switched on or clear the check
box to switch off the rule.
Changing the Default Service Auto Pass Rules

The following procedure describes how to change the default service auto pass rules.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Configuration link.
default service auto pass rules must be changed.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page, point to the TS tab.
5 Result: The TS tab page is displayed.
6 Under the Default Service Auto Pass Rules settings, set the check box for the
component type for which the default service auto passing rule must be switched
on or clear the check box to switch off the default rule.
4011746 Rev W 259

Passing all Services of an Incoming Transport Stream

Introduction
Both the drag and drop method and the muxing method can be used to pass all
services of an incoming Transport Stream to an Outgoing Transport Stream. When
an incoming Transport Stream is passed to an outgoing Transport Stream, the
components within this incoming Transport Stream which do not belong to a service
(no reference in the PMT or CAT), will not be passed, for instance ghost components.
Individual components can be passed and if needed remapped manually, more
information concerning passing and remapping of unreferenced components can be
found in topic Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 326.

The following procedure explains how to pass al services of an incoming Transport
Stream to an outgoing Transport Stream using the drag and drop method.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream of which all
services must be passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream in which the
services must be passed.
Transport Stream to the icon of the outgoing Transport Stream.
Result: All services of this incoming Transport Stream are added to the outgoing
Transport Stream.
Notes: When an incoming Transport Stream is passed to a GbE port, a new outgoing
Transport Stream is created containing the services of the incoming Transport
Stream. More information can be found in topic Creating a Transport Stream by
Passing an Incoming Transport Stream to a GbE Port on page 202.
260 4011746 Rev W

Passing all Services of an Incoming Transport Stream
Muxing Method
The following procedure explains how to pass al services of an incoming Transport
Stream to an outgoing Transport Stream using the Muxing method.
appears after pointing to the Service link.
2 In the Input drop down box select TS and in the Output drop down box TS
(MPTS).
Result: The Input TS and Output Transport Streams table are displayed.
Tip: To sort the Input TS or Output Transport Streams table by a particular

parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. You can toggle between
3 In the Input TS table, set the check box(es) of the Transport Stream for which the
services should be passed.
4 In the Output Transport Streams table, set the check box(es) of the Transport
Streams to which the services must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input TS and Output
Transport Streams table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down
4011746 Rev W 261

Result: After pressing the Pass command button the services of the selected
incoming Transport Stream(s) are passed to the selected outgoing Transport
Stream(s). All check boxes in the Input TS table and Output Transport Stream
table will be cleared.
262 4011746 Rev W

Using Virtual Services

Introduction
A virtual service is an outgoing service without references to the input. Such
outgoing service can be labeled with a service identifier and a service name. When
a virtual service is added to an outgoing Transport Stream...
a default empty PMT will be generated for this service with PCR PID set to 8191,
the PAT of the outgoing Transport Stream will be updated with a reference to
this empty PMT,
if the SI Output Standard - Mode of the outgoing Transport Stream is set to DVB
or Mixed, the Output Mode of the SDT to Generate, and the SDT Output to Force
Output, an SDT will be generated,
if the SI Output Standard - Mode of the outgoing Transport Stream is set to
ATSC or Mixed, the Output Mode of the VCT to Generate, and the VCT Output
to Force Output, an VCT will be generated,
if the SI Output Standard - Mode of the outgoing Transport Stream is set to
ATSC or Mixed and the Output Mode of the MGT to Generate, an MGT will be
generated.
Tip: A virtual service can also be created as alternate service. For more information
about alternate services and the procedure to create a virtual alternate service can be
found in section Program Switching on page 539.
Adding Virtual Services

The following procedure describes how to add a virtual service to an outgoing
Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which a
virtual service must be added.
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 263

Result: The Routing tab page is displayed containing the Add Preconfigured
Service settings and Service Routing table.
6 Under the Add Preconfigured Service settings, tick the No Input check box and
press the Add command button to confirm.
Result: A virtual service is added to the Service Routing table and indicated by
Virtual in the Input - Name box.
Removing Virtual Services

Perform the following steps to remove virtual services from a Transport Stream.
virtual services must be removed.
displayed.
Result: The Routing tab page is displayed containing the Add Preconfigured
Service settings and Service Routing table.
264 4011746 Rev W

6 In the Service Routing table, tick the check box preceding each virtual service
Tips:
In the Service Routing table, a virtual service is indicated by Virtual in the
Input - Name box of the service.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Service Routing table, tick
the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key,
and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
Results: The rows are removed from the Service Routing table.
4011746 Rev W 265

Using Still Picture Services

Introduction
A still picture service or slate service is a service provided with a still image video
component that can be used to notify subscribers about service loss, service ending...
A still picture service can be created by assigning a clip to an existing outgoing
service or to a created virtual service. The existing video component and PCR will
then be replaced by components generated by the DCM and the audio component(s)
will be blocked but the reference(s) in the PMT remain(s). The corresponding
references can then be blocked by rules.
Important:
When a virtual service is used to create a slate service, this virtual service must
be provided with a dummy video component and with a dummy PCR or with a
PCR from an incoming service. More information can be found in topics Using
Virtual Services on page 263, Adding Dummy Component References into a PMT on
page 289, and Determining the PCR for an Outgoing Service on page 419.
Since a still picture service is created at the output of the DCM, the output signal
containing the still picture service must be connected to the input of the DCM if
the still picture service must be used to backup a particular incoming service.
Before a clip can be assigned to an outgoing service, a clip data file must be created
and uploaded to the device. For creating such clip data file, Cisco has developed
the Slate Generator Tool which transforms an image into a Transport Stream
MPEG-2 Video Stream file, and encapsulates this file together with an XML file into
a single archive file. Such archive file can then be uploaded to the DCM by using its
web browser user interface.
Note: Using DCM's still picture service insertion feature needs
SLATE_GENERATION licenses. Each still picture service occupies one license.
Creating Clips
Introduction
The Slate Generator Tool is a command line tool able to transform an image file into
a clip file that can be uploaded by the DCM. This tool is a part of the Continuum
DVP Digital Content Manager Upgrade Package and can be obtained via your customer
service representative.
The following file formats can be processed by the Slate Generator Tool: JPG, PNG
(portable network graphics), BMP (bitmap), and GIF (graphics interchange format).
266 4011746 Rev W

Important: Since the aspect ratio and the form of scanning (progressive or
interlaced) of the clip file is determined by the resolution of the image file, the
resolution of the image file must match the resolution of the desired still picture
video component. The supported resolutions and frame rates can be found in the
following table.
The following table shows the relation between the resolution, aspect ratio, and form
of scanning.
Width Height Aspect Progressive/

Ration Interlaced
704 480 4:3 P
720 576 4:3 P
1280 720 16:9 P
1920 1080 16:9 I
The frame rates that can be given are: 23.976, 24, 25, 29.97, 30, 50, 59.94, and 60
frames/sec.
Installing the Slate Generator Tool

The following procedure describes how to install the Slate Generator Tool.
1 Open Windows Explorer and browse to the location where the Continuum DVP
Digital Content Manager Upgrade Package is stored.
2 Under Tools\SlateGenerator, double-click on SlateGenerator.exe.
Result: A self-extracting dialog is displayed.
3 Browse to the location where the tool must be installed and click on the Extract
command button.
Result: The tool is installed on the given location.
To Create the Clip

The following procedure describes how to create a clip file using the Slate Generator
Tool.
1 Click the Start command button and point to Run…
Result: The Run dialog is displayed.
2 In the Open drop down box, type cmd and press the OK command button.
Result: A Command Prompt box is displayed.
3 Browse to the folder where Slate.exe is located by typing the following instruction
at the command prompt:
<drive>:
for example: c:
cd <location>\SlateGenerator
4011746 Rev W 267

for example: cd DCMtools\SlateGenerator

with <drive> the label of the disk and <location> the location where the
Slate Generator Tool is installed.
4 At the command prompt, type the following instruction:
Slate.exe [-b<bitrate> ] <image-file> <frame rate>
with
– -b<bitrate> (optional) the maximum bitrate for the outgoing still picture
service expressed in bits/sec
– <image-file> the location and the name of the image file and
– <frame rate> the frame rate of still picture video component.
For example: c:\DCMtools\SlateGenerator>Slate.exe -b5000000
Images\bluebells.jpg 25
Result: A clip file (with .tgz extension) is created and located next to the image
file.
Note: A temp directory is created, containing intermediate files. This directory can
be removed after generating the clip file.
Uploading or Removing Clips

Uploading Clips
Perform the following procedure to add a clip to the DCM.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card containing the
outgoing service to which the clip must be assigned to and point to the Clips
link.
Result: The Configuration - Clips page is displayed containing the Clip Data
table and Add Clip settings.
3 Under the Add Clip settings...
a Enter a name for the clip in the Name box.

b Click on the Browse... command button.
Result: The standard file upload dialog of the internet browser is opened.
c Locate the clip file and press the Open command button.
d click on the Add command button.
268 4011746 Rev W

Result: The uploaded clip is added to the Clip Data table.
Tip: In the Clip Data table, a clip can be renamed by entering the new name in
the name box of the corresponding clips and pressing the Apply command
button.
Removing Clips
The following steps describe how to remove a clip.
Note: A clip that is used for still picture services can not be removed.
outgoing service to which the clip must be assigned and point to the Clips link.
Result: The Configuration - Clips page is displayed containing the Clip Date
table and Add Clip settings.
3 In the Clip Date table, tick the check box preceding each clip that should be
removed.
Tip: The check box of a clip that is in use by a still picture service is grayed out.
4 Click on the Remove Checked Items to confirm the operation.
4011746 Rev W 269

Assigning a Clip to a Service

The following procedure describes how to assign a clip to a service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream containing
the service to which a clip must be assigned.
displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the TR / Clips / Delay tab.
Result: The TR / Clips / Delay tab page containing the Transrated Services
Setting tab and Update All settings is displayed.
6 In the Transrated Services Setting tab, select the clip in the Clip drop down box
of the service to which a clip must be assigned.
270 4011746 Rev W

Section E Passing, Blocking, and Remapping
Components
Introduction
This section outlines the component re-multiplexing capabilities of the
Digital Content Manager.
In this section
Introduction ................................................................................................. 272
Passing Individual Components .............................................................. 274
Merging Components ................................................................................ 277
Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Service Components..................... 297
EMM Components...................................................................................... 312
Private Data Components.......................................................................... 320
Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components........................ 326
Overruling Elementary Stream Type....................................................... 335
Adding and Modifying PMT Descriptors ............................................... 339
4011746 Rev W 271

Introduction
Passing, blocking, and remapping components are processes used:
to keep the content of a service in a outgoing Transport Stream static
for instance by keeping the PID of outgoing components constant, although the
PIDs change in the incoming Transport Stream.
to keep the bitrate of an outgoing Transport Steam under control
for instance by removing unnecessary components (blocking) from an outgoing
Transport Stream.
During the passing process of services to an outgoing Transport Stream, all service
components (which are components referred in the PMT) will be passed. The PID
of an outgoing service component will get the PID of the corresponding incoming
service component. When two incoming service components with same PID are
passed to an outgoing Transport Stream, one of the outgoing components gets a new
unique PID.
All components of a particular incoming service can be passed to an outgoing
service by using Service Merging. Unreferenced components within an incoming
Transport Stream can be merged into an outgoing service by using the Add Custom
PID function. Merging components into an outgoing service is described in topic
Merging Components on page 277.
Components within a service can be passing, blocking, and/or remapping by
defining component tracking rules. More information can be found in topic Passing,
Blocking, and Remapping Service Components on page 297.
Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) with references in the CAT table are by
default blocked. The procedure to pass (and to remap if required) EMMs to an
outgoing Transport Stream is described in topic Passing and/Or Remapping EMM
Private date components offered to the DCM by the Private Data Generator via the
PDG to Mux interface are also blocked by default. These components can be passed
and remapped as described in topic Passing and/or Remapping Private Data
Components, which have no references in the PMT or CAT, are by default blocked
by the DCM. The procedures to pass and/or to remap unreferenced components
can be found in topic Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 326.
Individual incoming components can easily be passed by using the drag and drop
method. The procedure to pass individual component is described in topic Passing
Individual Components on page 274.
272 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
Note:
When a component must be removed from the output, which has its PID shared
with another component, both components must be blocked. For instance when
a video component that is shared with a PCR must be removed both the video as
well as the PCR component must be blocked.
The table below shows the priorities that are used when PIDs are assigned to
outgoing components.
Higher
Components forced by using PID Multiplexing, SI, generated ECMs
Components passed, blocked, or remapped by using component
Priority
tracking rules.
Level
Component passed without component tracking rule
Lower
Example: When an unreferenced component is forced to PID 100 using

Transport Stream PID Multiplexing and a tracking rule is defined to force a
service component to PID 100, then the unreferenced component will be forced
to PID 100 and the service component remapped to another PID.
4011746 Rev W 273

Passing Individual Components

An incoming referenced or unreferenced component can easily be passed to the
output by using the drag and drop method.
Note: A component can only be dropped to the Unreferenced PIDs node, to the
service node of an MPTS, or to an SPTS node.
The following steps explain how to pass individual components to the output.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming component that must be
passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the node to which the component must be
passed.
4 Select the branch of the incoming component and drag and drop this component
on the icon of the node.
Note: When the incoming component is dropped to a service node or SPTS node,
the following message box appears.
274 4011746 Rev W

Passing Individual Components
In the Stream Type box, enter the value of the stream type of the component.
The value can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation. A
hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x.
Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button
The following table shows the stream type with corresponding value represented in
decimal and hexadecimal notation.
Value Stream Type
Dec Hex
0 0 Reserved
1 1 MPEG-1 Video
2 2 MPEG-2 Video
3 3 MPEG-1 Audio
4 4 MPEG-2 Audio
5 5 Private sections
6 6 PES Packets containing Private Data
7 7 13522 MHEG
8 8 DSM CC
9 9 ITU-T Rec. H.222.1
10 0xA ISO/IEC 13818-6 type A
11 0xB ISO/IEC 13818-6 type B
12 0xC ISO/IEC 13818-6 type C
13 0xD ISO/IEC 13818-6 type D
14 0xE Auxiliary
15 0xF ISO/IEC 13818-7 Audio
16 0x10 MPEG-4 part 2 Video
17 0x11 MPEG-4 Audio
18 0x12 MPEG-4 SL-packetized stream
19 0x13 MPEG-4 SL-packetized stream
20 0x14 Synchronized Download Protocol
21 0x15 Metadata in PES packets
22 0x16 Metadata in metadata_sections
23 0x17 Metadata in Data Carousel
24 0x18 Metadata in Object Carousel
4011746 Rev W 275

Value Stream Type
Dec Hex
25 0x19 Metadata in Synchronized Download Protocol
26 0x1A IPMP stream
27 0x1B AVC Video (H.264 | MPEG-4 part 10)
276 4011746 Rev W

Merging Components
Merging Components
Introduction
Components within an incoming service as well as unreferenced components within
an incoming Transport Stream can be merged into an outgoing service. Merging all
components within an incoming service can be done using Service Merging and
merging particular components within an incoming service can be done by creating
component merge rules. Components within the outgoing service can then be
remapped or blocked by defining component tracking rules.
Unreferenced components can be merged into an outgoing service by using the Add
Custom PID function.
Note: During a merging process the PMT section can exceed 1 kB. Particular
equipment is not able to handle this correctly. Therefore an alarm will be generated
when the PMT section exceeds 1 kB.
Tips:
Merging components into an outgoing service member of a Transrating group is
allowed.
In the DCM Output tree the name of the outgoing service or SPTS in which
service components are merged, is pink colored.
Merging an Incoming Service into an Outgoing Service

Introduction
Merging all components within an incoming service into an outgoing service can be
done in three different ways:
Using the drag and drop method
Using the muxing method
Using the add new merged service method
For program switching, components can also be merged into alternate services.
More information concerning program switching can be found in section Program
Switching on page 539.
4011746 Rev W 277


The following procedure describes how to merge an incoming service into an
outgoing service using the drag and drop method.
Note: Before an incoming service can be merged into the service of an outgoing
SPTS, the Drop on SPTS: desired action parameter should be set to Ask for Service
Merge or TS Add. More information concerning the Drop on SPTS: desired action
parameter can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 164.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Tree View - Service sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming service that should be merged.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service in which the incoming
service should be merged.
4 Select the branch of the incoming service and drag and drop this service to the
branch of the outgoing service.
Note: When the service is dropped on an SPTS, the following popup is

displayed.
Point to the Merge Service into SPTS selection button and press the OK
command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to abort the
operation.
278 4011746 Rev W

Merging Components
Result: All components and service level descriptors of the incoming service are
merged into the outgoing service. Since the PCR is always taken from the main
service, the PCR will not be merged in.
Important: If merged services is combined with alternate services, the drag and drop
action will be applied to the currently active alternate. More information
concerning alternate services can be found in topic Program Switching on page 539.
Muxing Method
The following procedure describes how to merge an incoming service into an
outgoing service using the muxing method.
2 In both the Input drop down box and Output drop down box select Service.
Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Services table by a particular

parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. You can toggle between
3 In the Input Services table, set the check box(es) of the services for which all
components must be merged into outgoing services.
4 In the Output Services table, set the check box(es) of the services in which all
components of incoming services must be merged.
Output Services table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down
4011746 Rev W 279

Result: After pressing the Pass command button all components of the selected
incoming services are merged into the selected outgoing services. All check
boxes in the Input Services table and Output Services table will be cleared.
Add New Merged Service Method

The following steps describe how to merge an incoming service into an outgoing
service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream containing the
outgoing service in which all components of an incoming service must be
merged.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this stream and point to
Settings in the short-cut menu.
4 Click on the Service link and point to the Routing tab.
5 In the Service Routing table, click on the Merged arrow of the corresponding
outgoing service.
Result: The Merged Services and Components and Add New Merged Service
or Merged Service Component table are displayed.
6 Under the Add New Merged Service or Merged Service Component settings,
complete the following settings to identify the incoming service for which all
components must be merged.
280 4011746 Rev W

Merging Components
a In the Input Card drop down box, select the card receiving the incoming
service.
b In the Input Port drop down box, select the port receiving this service.
receiving this service.
box is set to ASI.
f In the SID box, enter the service identifier of this incoming service.
g Press the Add command button.
7 Repeat step a up to g for all incoming services that must be merged into this
outgoing service or press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload
Checking the Merged Services into an Outgoing Service

The following procedure describes how to check the merged services into an
outgoing service.
the merged service of a service should be checked.
outgoing service.
Result: The Merged Services table containing the service population and
component merge rules of the corresponding outgoing service is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 281

Each row is accompanied with following information:

- Type:
Main: indicates the service in which services are merged.
Merged Service: indicates a service for which all components are merged
into the Main service
Merged Comp: indicates a component merge rule
- Input - Card: represents the card receiving the service.
- Input - Port: represents the port receiving the service.
- Input - IP Address: represents the IP address of the destination port to which
the Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.
- Input - UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the destination port to
which the Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.
- Input - ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the incoming
Transport Stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the SDT).
- Input - TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming
Transport Stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the PAT).
- Input - SID: represents the Service Identifier of the incoming service (as
defined in the PAT).
- Input - Name: represents the name of the incoming service.
- Input - Present: indicates the presence of the incoming service at the input.
- Backup: link to the Service - Service - Backup Services sub page containing
the service backup settings and backup to main service assignments.
Tips:
The Component Merge Rules parameters indicate the component merge rule
that applies to the corresponding incoming service for this outgoing service.
More information concerning component merge rules can be found in topic
Merging Particular Components of an Incoming Service in an Outgoing Service on
page 283.
To sort the Merged Services table by a particular parameter, click on the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
282 4011746 Rev W

Merging Components
Removing Merged Services from an Outgoing Service

Perform the following steps to remove merged services from an outgoing service.
merged services must be removed from a service.
outgoing service.
Result: The Merged Services and Components table containing the service
population and component merge rules of the corresponding outgoing service is
displayed.
Tip: To sort the Merged Services and Components table by a particular

6 Tick the check box, which is located beside the Type parameter of the services
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Merged Services table,
tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick
the check box of the last row.
Merging Particular Components of an Incoming Service in an Outgoing

Service
Introduction
Particular components of an incoming service can be merged into an outgoing
service by defining component merge rules. All components matching the rules
exactly will be merged into the service.
4011746 Rev W 283

When an incoming component is dragged and dropped to an outgoing service, a

component merge rule matching the component will be created.
Component merge rules can also be added to alternate services for program
switching. More information concerning program switching can be found in
section Program Switching on page 539.
Adding Component Merge Rules

The following procedure describes how to add component merge rules to an
outgoing service.
outgoing service in which components of an incoming service must be merged.
outgoing service.
284 4011746 Rev W

Merging Components
complete the following settings to identify the incoming service for which
service.
box is set to ASI.
7 Complete the following settings to set up a component merge rule:
a Tick the Select Component Merge Rule check box.
b In the Track Type drop down box, select the component merge rule type.
c For a Tag type component merge rule, enter the tag of the component in the
Component Tag box.
4011746 Rev W 285

d For a Stream Type type component merge rule, select the stream type of the
component in the Stream Type drop down box.
– When an audio stream type is chosen, enter the 3-character language
code (as specified by ISO 639-2 [15]) in the Language box.
– For Stream Type = User Defined, enter the value of the stream type in the
Stream Type Value box.
e For an ECM PID or ES PID type component merge rule, enter the PID value
in the Input PID box.
f Click on the Add command button.
Result: The component merge rule is added to the Merged Services and
Components table.
Checking Component Merge Rules

The following procedure describes how to check component merge rules of a
particular outgoing service.
the service for which component merge rules must be checked.
outgoing service.
Result: The Merged Services table containing the merged services and the
component merge rules.
Each row is accompanied with following information:

- Type:
Main: indicates the service in which services are merged.
286 4011746 Rev W

Merging Components
Merged Service: indicates a service for which all components are merged
into the Main service
Merged Comp: indicates a component merge rule
- The parameters of the incoming service to which the rule applies to:
– Input - Card: represents the card receiving the service.
– Input - Port: represents the port receiving the service.
– Input - IP Address: represents the IP address of the destination port to
which the Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.
– Input - UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the destination
port to which the Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to,
streams.
– Input - ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the
incoming Transport Stream to which the service belongs to (as defined in
the SDT).
– Input - TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming
Transport Stream to which the service belongs to (as defined in the PAT).
– Input - SID: represents the Service Identifier of the incoming service (as
defined in the PAT).
– Input - Name: represents the name of the incoming service.
– Input - Present: indicates the presence of the incoming service at the
input.
- The rule parameters:
– Component Merge Rule - Type: represents the component merge rule
type: Component Tag, Stream Type, ES PID, or ECM PID.
– Component Merge Rule - Tag: for a Component Tag rule type, this
parameter represents the component tag.
– Component Merge Rule - Stream Type: represents stream type for a
Stream Type rule
– Component Merge Rule - Stream Type Value: represents the value for a
User Defined Stream Type rule.
– Component Merge Rule - Language: represents the language for an
audio Stream Type rule.
– Component Merge Rule - Input PID: represents the input PID for an ES
PID or ECM PID rule type.
- Backup: link to the Service - Service - Backup Services sub page containing
the service backup settings and backup to main service assignments.
Tip: To sort the Merged Services table by a particular parameter, click on the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
4011746 Rev W 287

Adding a Component Merge Rule by Dragging and Dropping an Incoming

Component
The following procedure explains how to create a component merge rule by
dragging and dropping an incoming component to an outgoing service.
component must be merged.
3 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming component for which a
matching component merge rule must be created.
to the branch of the outgoing service.
Result: A matching component merge rule is created.
Removing Component Merge Rules

The following steps describe how to remove component merge rules.
outgoing service for which component merge rules must be removed.
288 4011746 Rev W

Merging Components

outgoing service.
6 In the Merged Services and Components table, tick the check box preceding the
rule that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Merged Services and
Components table, tick the check box of the first row that must be removed,
press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that
must be removed.
7 Click on the Remove Checked Items command button.
Adding Dummy Component References into a PMT

Introduction
The DCM allows adding dummy component references into a PMT with following
stream type: EISS, Baseline EBIF, Video (0x02), or Video (0x80).
To Add Dummy Component References into a PMT

The following procedure describes how to add a dummy component reference into
the PMT of the Primary channel.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port containing the outgoing service for
which a dummy component reference to the PMT must be added.
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 289

6 Point to the Custom PIDs link below the Service Component Settings table.
Result: The Service - Component - Custom PIDs sub page containing the
Custom PID Settings and Add Custom PID Row table is displayed.
7 Under the Add Custom PID Row settings, complete the following settings:
a Tick the No Input check box.
b In the PID box, enter the PID for the dummy component reference.
Tip: A hexadecimal value as well as a decimal value can be entered. A
c In the Output SID drop down box, select the service for the dummy
component reference.
d In the Output ES Type drop down box, select EISS, Baseline EBIF, Video
(0x02), or Video (0x80).
e Click on the Add Row command button to confirm.
Result: The new row is added to the Custom PID Settings table.
Merging Unreferenced Components

Introduction
Merging unreferenced incoming components into an outgoing service can be done
by dragging and dropping the component into the outgoing service or by using the
Add Custom PID feature.
Important: Merging unreferenced incoming components into an outgoing service
can not be fully combined with alternate services: merging unreferenced
components only works on the main alternate service when it is the active alternate.
More information concerning alternate services can be found in section Program
Switching on page 539.
290 4011746 Rev W

Merging Components
Merging Unreferenced Components into an Outgoing Service using the Add

Custom PID Row Feature
The following procedure describes how to merge unreferenced incoming
components into an outgoing service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree browse to the Transport Stream containing the service
in which unreferenced components must be merged.
Result: The Service - Component - Custom PIDs sub page containing the
Custom PID Settings and Add Custom PID Row table is displayed.
7 Under the Add Custom PID Row settings, complete the following settings:
receives the Transport Stream containing the component.
b In the Input Port drop down box, enter the name of the port that receives the
Transport Stream containing the component.
4011746 Rev W 291


e In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port that
receives the Transport Stream containing the component.
box is set to ASI.
f In the PID box, enter the PID of the component.
g In the Output SID drop down box, select the service in which the component
must be merged.
h In the Output ES Type box, enter the elementary stream type of the
component.
i Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The new row is added to the Custom PID Settings table.
Merging Unreferenced Components into an Outgoing Service using the Drag and
Drop Method
The following steps describe how to merge unreferenced components into an
outgoing service.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the Unreferenced PIDs branch containing the
unreferenced component that must be merged and expand this branch.
component should be merged.
292 4011746 Rev W

Merging Components
4 Select the branch of the unreferenced incoming component and drag and drop
this component to the branch of the outgoing service.
Result: The Stream Type popup dialog is displayed.
5 In the Stream Type box, enter the stream type of this unreferenced component.
Result: After pressing the OK command button, the unreferenced incoming
component is merged into the outgoing service.
Checking the Unreferenced Components Merged into an Outgoing Service

The following steps explain how to check the unreferenced components merged into
an outgoing service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream containing the service
for which the merged unreferenced components must be checked.
4011746 Rev W 293


Result: The Service - Component - Custom PIDs sub page is displayed.
The merged unreferenced components listed in the Custom PID Settings table
are accompanied with following information:
Output - SID: represents the service identifier of the outgoing service in
which the component is merged.
Output - Name: represents the name of the outgoing service in which the
component is merged.
Output - ES Type: represents the stream type of the component.
Input - Card: represents the interface card receiving the component.
Input - Port: represents the port receiving the component.
Input - Type: represents the input type.
Input - IP Address: represents the IP address to which the source device
streams.
Input - UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the input port
receiving the component.
Input - PID: represents the packet identifier of the component.
Tip: The rows in the Custom PID Settings table can be re-ordered using a
particular parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. Toggle
between ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.
294 4011746 Rev W

Merging Components
Removing Individual Merged Components from an Outgoing Service

Perform the following steps to remove individual merged components from an
outgoing service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree browse to the Transport Stream containing the services
for which merged unreferenced components must be removed.
Result: The Service - Component - Custom PIDs sub page is displayed.
7 In the Custom PID Settings table, tick the check box(es) in front of the row(s) of
the merged components that must be removed.
Tips:
The rows in the Custom PID Settings table can be re-ordered using a
particular parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter.
Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the
parameter header.
4011746 Rev W 295

To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Custom PID Settings table,
tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold
down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be
removed.
8 Point to the Remove Checked Rows command button.
296 4011746 Rev W

Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Service Components

Introduction
The web browser user interface of the DCM is provided with a number of
component tracking rule types that can be used to keep the content of a service in an
outgoing Transport Stream constant and to block unnecessary components.
Tip: With the exception of the PMT, blocking service components can also be done
in the DCM Outputs tree on the Service - Tree View sub page by right-clicking on
the service component and clicking on Block PID in the short-cut menu. A PID
Level component tracking rule will be created that can be handled as manually
created tracking rules.
When a component tracking rule is defined, the service component matching this
rule will be processed (passed, blocked, or remapped).
The following list describes the different methods to identify a service component.
Component Tag
The service component identification is based on the component tag from the
Stream Identifier Descriptor in the PMT.
PCR
The identification is based on the PCR of the service.
Stream Type
The service component identification is based on the stream type of the
component. Pre-defined as well as user-defined stream types can be used. The
following table lists the pre-defined stream types.
Stream type Description

Video (0x01) MPEG 1 Video (ISO/IEC 11172 Video)
Video (0x02) MPEG 2 Video (ITU-T Rec. H.262 | ISO/IEC 13818-2 Video or ISO/IEC
11172-2 constrained parameter video stream)
Video (0x1B) AVC Video (ITU-T Rec. H.264 | ISO/IEC 14496-10 Video)
Video (0x80) DC-II (DigiCipher-II) MPEG 2 Video
Audio (0x03) MPEG 1 Audio (ISO/IEC 11172 Audio)
Audio (0x04) MPEG 2 Audio (ISO/IEC 13818-3 Audio)
Audio (0x0F) MPEG 2 AAC audio with ADTS transport syntax (ISO/IEC 13818-7)
Audio (0x11) MPEG 4 AAC audio with LATM transport syntax (ISO/IEC 14496-3)
ATSC AC-3 ATSC AC-3 Audio
Audio
4011746 Rev W 297

Stream type Description

DVB AC-3 Audio DVB AC-3 Audio
Data (0x06) Private data (ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 PES packets
containing private data)
DVB Teletext Private data (0x06) with descriptor tag 0x56
DVB Subtitles Private data (0x06) with descriptor tag 0x59
ES PID
The identification is based on the Elementary Stream PID.
ECM PID
The service component identification is based on Entitlement Control Message
(ECM) components passed for Service Level Scrambling. More information
concerning Service Level Scrambling can be found in topic Scrambling Levels on
page 582.
ES ECM PID
The identification is based on ECM components passed for Elementary Stream
Level Scrambling. The ECM component matching the defined input PID and ES
Output PID will be processed. More information concerning Elementary
Stream Level Scrambling can be found in topic Scrambling Levels on page 582.
ECM CAS ID
The identification is based on the CAS ID of the ECM components passed for
Service Level Scrambling. The ECM component matching the defined CAS ID
will be processed. More information concerning Service Level Scrambling can
be found in topic Scrambling Levels on page 582.
ES ECM CAS ID
The identification is based on the CAS ID of the ECM components passed for
Elementary Stream Level Scrambling. The ECM component matching the
defined CAS ID and ES Output PID will be processed. More information
concerning Service Level Scrambling can be found in topic Scrambling Levels on
page 582.
Tracking rules can be defined based on these identifications.
Notes:
If a component tracking rule is defined with audio stream type identification and
a language descriptor is available for the service component, a language must be
given. When no language descriptor is available for the service component, this
language parameter must be empty.
If a component tracking rule is defined with user-defined stream type
identification, a stream type value must be specified.
298 4011746 Rev W

When no component tracking rule with ES ECM PID identification matches the
parent component of the ES ECM, a good matching rule must be created for this
component. This will be done automatically if the Create Rule feature is used.
More information about good matching and perfect matching can be found in
sub topic Matching Behavior further in this topic.
When a service is removed from an outgoing Transport Stream, the associated
component tracking rule(s) will also be removed.
During the matching process a component can match several rules. To determine
which rule is applied, priorities are assigned. The following table lists these
priorities.
All Component blocking

PCR Component forcing using PCR type component tracking rule
ES Component forcing using Component Tag type component
Higher tracking rule
Component forcing using Stream Type type component tracking
rule
Component forcing using ES PID type component tracking rule
Priority
Level ECM Component forcing using ECM CAS ID type component
tracking rule
Component forcing using ECM PID type component tracking
rule
Lower ES level Component forcing using ES ECM CAS ID type component
ECM tracking rule
Component forcing using ES ECM PID type component
tracking rule
Example: When a component tracking rule is defined to block a service component

and a second rule is defined to remap the same service component, the
corresponding service component will be blocked.
Matching Behavior
Blocking of a service component will be done if the identification defined in the
tracking component rule matches the component perfectly (perfect match):
- The PCR of the service component matches the PCR value of the defined
rule.
- The component tag of the service component matches the component tag
value of the defined rule.
- In case of video components, the stream type of the service component
matches the stream type of the defined rule.
4011746 Rev W 299

- In case of audio components, the stream type and language of the service
component match to the stream type and language defined by the rule.
When no language is specified in the rule, the audio component without
language in the language descriptor will be identified.
- In case of private data components, the stream type of the component
matches the stream type of the defined rule (with additional descriptor tag
for teletext or subtitles if so desired).
- For PID matching (ES PID, ECM PID, and ES ECM PID) the PIDs are equal.
- For CAS ID matching, the CAS ID matches the CAS ID of the defined rule.
Passing and/or remapping service components have the same perfect matching
behavior as blocking but extended with following good matching exception:
When a service type component tracking rule is defined and no service
component matches this rule exactly, the rule will be applied to a similar
component. For instance when a component tracking rule is defined with
stream type equal to Video (0x01) and the service only contains a video service
component with stream type Video (0x02), then this service component will be
passed/remapped.
Notes:
- When the Stream Type parameter of the incoming Transport Stream is set to
DC-II, a service component with stream type equal to Video (0x80) will also
be identified as video.
- All audio languages match as long as the stream type is the same.
Components with Audio (0x3), Audio (0x4), and Audio (0x81) stream type
can not be mixed.
When multiple service components match a component tracking rule, then a
random component matching this rule will be processed.
Checking Service Component Settings

The settings of service components belonging to an outgoing Transport Stream are
shown in the Service Component Settings table on the Service Components tab
page on the Service - Component sub page of the corresponding Transport Stream.
Note: Components forced using Transport Stream PID Multiplexing are indicated by
means of a ticked check box in the Output PID - Current column.
300 4011746 Rev W

In the Service Components Settings table, each service component is accompanied

with following information.
Output PID - Current: represents the Packet Identifier (PID) of the outgoing
service component.
Component Description:
- Type: represents the component classification.
- ES PID: represents the PID of the elementary stream to which an ES ECM
belongs to.
- SID: represents the Service Identifier (SID) of the outgoing service to which
the component belongs to.
- Name: represents the name of the service.
- ES Type: represents the type of the elementary stream.
- Language: represents the language of the service component.
- CA ID: represents the identifier of the Conditional Access (CA) system.
Status - Current: indicates the status of the service component.
- Passed
- Blocked
- Blocked by System
- Blocked by DPI
- Blocked by TS Rule
Input:
- Card: represents the interface card slot number of the port receiving the
incoming Transport Stream to which the service component belongs to.
4011746 Rev W 301

- Port: represents the number of the port receiving the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- IP Address: represents the destination IP address of the IP stream containing
the incoming Transport Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port, on which enters
the Transport Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
- PID: represents the Packet Identifier of the incoming service components.
- Tag: represents the component tag from the Stream Identifier Descriptor in
the PMT.
- Type: represents the passing method of the component
Auto: the component is passed during service passing process or during
merging a service into an outgoing service.
Custom: the component is passed by merging the component into the
outgoing service individually.
Tracking Rule: contains the command button for the tracking rule action that
can be performed.
- Create Rule: command button used to auto-create a tracking rule for the
corresponding service component. The best tracking with highest priority
for the corresponding service component is chosen by default.
For instance when a tracking rule is added after clicking on the Create Rule
command button in the row of an audio service component, a Stream Type
tracking rule is created with:
– Tracking - Stream Type parameter: Audio (0x03)
– Tracking - Language parameter: the language as defined in the language
descriptor
– Output - SID parameter: the Service Identifier of the outgoing service to
which the component belongs to
– Output - PID parameter: the Packet Identifier of the incoming service
component if the PID is unique or a remapped PID if the PID is not
unique in the outgoing Transport Stream
– Status - New: Passed
- Goto Rule: if a rule already exists for a service component, this command
button can be used to jump to and to highlight the row in the Component
Tracking Rules table containing the tracking rule for the corresponding
302 4011746 Rev W

service component.
The following procedure explains how to check the settings of service components in
a particular outgoing Transport Stream.
service belongs to for which service component settings must be checked.
and select Settings in the short-cut menu.
4 Point to the Component link.
Result: The Service Components tab page containing the Service Component
Settings table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Service Component Settings table by a particular parameter, click
on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
Tracking Rules
Introduction
The following ways can be used to create service component tracking rules:
By adding a default service component tracking rule.
By creating a service component tracking rule for a particular service component.
A component tracking rule will be added to the Component Tracking Rules
table containing defaults for best tracking with highest priority for the
corresponding service component.
By creating best match pass service component rules for all service components.
For each service component a service component tracking rule will be added to
the Component Tracking Rules table containing defaults for best match pass
tracking with highest priority.
By creating PID type pass rules service component rules for all service
components.
For each service component a service component tracking rule will be added to
the Component Tracking Rules table containing defaults for PID type pass
tracking with highest priority.
4011746 Rev W 303

Tips:
The status of the component tracking rule is shown in the Rule Status - Active
column.
Service component tracking rules can also be defined by executing the
DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro via ROSA®'s Macro Component. For more
information please refer to topic Using DCM Macros on page 939.
Notes:
In the Component Tracking Rule table, a TS PID force rule using the same PID
as a PID level components tracking rule will be red colored.
A service component tracking rule adaptation mostly results in a PMT
adaptation, meaning each time a component tracking rule is added, changed, or
deleted and the Apply command button is pressed, the PMT will be updated.
Therefore it is advisable to modify (adding, creating, modifying, and deleting)
the complete set of component tracking rules before pressing the Apply
command button.
When multiple service components match a service component tracking rule, the
rule will only be applied to one service component. To deal with this, multiple
rules must be defined.
Adding a Tracking Rule

The following procedure describes how to add a service component tracking rule.
service belongs to for which service component tracking rules must be added.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the Service Components tab.
6 Click on the Add row command button at the bottom of the Component
Tracking Rules table
304 4011746 Rev W

Result: A new row is created in the Component Tracking Rules table.

7 Modify the service component tracking rule as described in sub topic Modifying
Tracking rules on page 307.
Creating a Tracking Rule for a Particular Service Component

The procedure below describes how to create a service component tracking rule for a
particular service component.
service belongs to for which a service component tracking rule for a particular
service component must be created.
4 Point to the Service - Component sub page.
6 In the Service Component Settings table, point to the Create Rule command
button in the row of the service component for which a tracking rule must be
created.
Result: A component tracking rule is added to the Component Tracking Rules
table containing defaults for best tracking with highest priority for the
corresponding service component.
Creating Best Match Pass Rules for all Service Components

The following procedure explains how to create best match pass service component
tracking rules for all service components.
service belongs to for which best match pass service component tracking rules for
all service components must be created.
4011746 Rev W 305


6 Click on the For all Applicable Rows command button beside the Create Best
Match Pass Rules box.
Result: The Component Tracking Rules table is filled with tracking rules for all
service components.
Creating PID Type Pass Rules for all Service Components

The following procedure explains how to create PID type pass service component
tracking rules for all service components.
service belongs for which PID type pass service component tracking rules for all
service components must be created.
Result: The Service Components tab is displayed.
6 Click on the For all Applicable Rows command button beside Create Best
Match Pass Rules box.
Result: The Component Tracking Rules table is filled with tracking rules for all
service components.
306 4011746 Rev W

Modifying Tracking Rules

The procedure below describes how to change a component tracking rule.
service belongs to for which service component tracking rules must be changed.
Tip: The TS Output sub page can also be opened by double-clicking on the
Transport Stream.
6 In the Tracking - Type drop down box of the Component Tracking Rules table,
select the component type that has to be used to define the tracking rule.
For Component Tag, enter the tag in the Tracking - Tag box.
For Stream Type, select the stream type in the Tracking - StreamType drop
down box.
– When an audio stream type is chosen, the corresponding language can be
entered in the Tracking - Language box.
– When User Defined is chosen, a stream type value can be given in the
Tracking - Stream Type Value box and a language in the Tracking -
Language box.
For ES PID or ECM PID, enter the PID of the incoming component in the
Input PID box.
For ES ECM PID, enter the PID of the incoming component in the Input PID
box and the PID of the outgoing elementary stream in the ES Output PID
box.
For ECM CAS ID, enter the CAS ID of the ECM in the CAS ID box.
For ES ECM CAS ID, enter the CAS ID of the ECM in the CAS ID box and the
PID of the outgoing elementary stream in the ES Output PID box.
7 In the Output - SID box, select the Service Identifier of the service to which the
service component must be passed or for which service the service component
must be blocked.
8 In the Output - PID box, enter a PID value for the outgoing service component if
required.
4011746 Rev W 307

Note: The Output - PID parameter is only applicable if the Status - New
parameter is set to Pass.
9 In the Status - New drop down box select one of the following rule operations
Pass: the service component matching the component tracking rule will be
passed with PID remapping.
AutoPass: the service component matching the component tracking rule will
be passed, PID remapping will only be done to prevent PID collisions.
Block: the service component matching the component tracking rule will be
blocked.
Note: A component tracking rule adaptation mostly results in a PMT adaptation,
meaning each time a component tracking rule is added, changed, or deleted and
the Apply command button is pressed, the PMT will be updated. Therefore it is
advisable to modify (adding, creating, and deleting) the complete set of
component tracking rules before pressing the Apply command button.
Tip: A rule applied to a service component can be highlighted by pressing the Goto
Rule command button in the row of the corresponding component in the Service
Component Settings table.
Note: By changing rule parameters, the rule can be applied to another component,
for instance when the Tracking - Type parameter is changed from ES PID to PCR,
the rule will be applied to the PCR of the service to which the component belongs.
Deleting Tracking Rules

The following steps explain how to delete tracking rules for service components.
service component tracking rules must be removed.
4 Point to the Component sub page.
308 4011746 Rev W

6 On the Service Components tab page, scroll to the Component Tracking Rules
table that can be found below the Service Components Settings table.
7 In the Component Tracking Rules table, tick the check box(es) in front of the
row(s) of the tracking rule(s) that must be removed.
Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Component Tracking
Rules table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and
hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must
be deleted.
The rows in the Component Tracking Rules table can be sorted by a specific
parameter by pointing to the column header of this parameter. You can
toggle between ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter
header.
selected tracking rule rows are removed from the Component Tracking Rules
table.
Tip: Service component tracking rules can also be removed by executing the
DCM.RemoveRules macro via ROSA®'s Macro Component. For more information
please refer to topic Using DCM Macros on page 939.
Defining Default Tracking Rules

During the passing process of services from the input to the output, the services can
automatically be provided with tracking rules with default values. When a service
is passed matching a default tracking rule, the tracking rule entry will be added to
the Component Tracking Rules table of the corresponding outgoing Transport
Stream. Default tracking rules are helpful:
For easy configuration when passing services or automatically pass services
using service auto pass rules: specify at board level which type of components of
an output service should be passed, all other components are blocked by default.
Disabling the service auto pass rules for the corresponding Transport Stream is
required.
For instance pass only video (component types 1 and 2) and audio (component
types 3 and 4), block all other component types.
4011746 Rev W 309

For easy configuration when passing services or automatically pass services

using service auto pass rules: specify at board level to block for instance certain
data components. By default all other components will be passed. Enabling
the service auto pass rules for the corresponding Transport Stream is required.
When passing SPTSs to a GbE output, all component types can have the same
PID. For instance video output PID 1000, audio is 1001, and teletext is 1002.
Notes:
When default AutoPass or Pass tracking rules are defined, it is advised to disable
the default service auto pass rules.
Default Transport Stream rules to pass/block all new components have lower
priority than component rules.
Conflicting board level rules are not allowed: for instance it is not possible to
pass and block a certain component type or component tag... (same conflicts are
also not allowed for service component rules on Transport Stream level)
When a board level rule is created to for instance autopass component type 0x4
and a service is passed that has 2 components with component type 0x4, only
one of them will get passed (if Transport Stream rules specify that all
components should be blocked by default). Reason is that a rule can only be
applied to one component only.
The procedure to disable service auto pass rules can be found in topic Switching
On or Off Service Passing Rules on page 258.
The following steps explain how to add default tracking rules.
default tracking rules must be defined.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page, point to the TS tab.
5 Click on the Add Row command button that is located below the Default
Tracking Rules table.
Result: An entry is added to the Default Tracking Rules table.
310 4011746 Rev W

6 Modify the default tracking rule entry as described in sub topic Modifying
Tip: A default tracking rule entry can be removed by ticking the check box of the
entry, pointing to the Remove Checked Rows command button, and clicking on the
Apply command button to confirm the operation.
4011746 Rev W 311

EMM Components
Introduction
In a Conditional Access System, the Entitlement Management Message Generator
(EMMG) offers the Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) via the EMMG to
MUX interface or via a Transport Stream. Both the EMMs received via the EMMG
to MUX interface and the EMMs received via a Transport Stream must be passed to
the corresponding outgoing Transport Stream. More information concerning
Conditional Access Systems can be found in chapter Scrambling on page 573.
Passing EMM Components

Introduction
Both the drag and drop method and the muxing method can be used to pass EMM
components from an incoming Transport Stream to an Outgoing Transport Stream.
The Drag and Drop method is useful when a discreet number of individual EMM
components should be passed to an outgoing Transport Stream. When multiple
EMM components must be passed to one or more outgoing Transport Streams, the
Muxing method is recommended.

The steps below describes how to pass EMM components to an outgoing Transport
Stream using the drag and drop method.
Result - The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to EMM component in the EMM PIDs main
node of the corresponding incoming Transport Stream.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the EMM PIDs main node of the outgoing
Transport Stream to which EMM components must be passed.
312 4011746 Rev W

EMM Components
4 Select the branch of the EMM component and drag and drop this component to
the EMM main node of the corresponding outgoing Transport Stream.
Result: The EMM component is added to the EMM main node of the outgoing
Transport Stream.
Muxing Method
The following procedure explains how to pass EMM components to an outgoing
Transport Stream using the Muxing method.
2 In the Input drop down box, select EMM.
Result: The Input EMM, EMM Generated, Private Data, and Output Transport
Streams tables are displayed.
4011746 Rev W 313

Note: The EMMs entering the DCM via the EMMG to MUX interface populate
the EMM Generated table and the EMMs via an incoming Transport Stream
populate the Input EMM table.
Tip: To sort the Input EMM, EMM Generated, or Output Transport Streams
table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter.
Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input EMM or EMM Generated table, set the check box(es) of the EMM
component(s) that must be passed.
Transport Stream(s) to which the EMM component(s) must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input EMM, EMM
Generated, and Output Transport Streams table, tick the check box of the first
row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last
row.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected EMM components
are passed to the selected outgoing Transport Stream(s). All check boxes in the
Input EMM or EMM Generated table as well as the check boxes in the Output
Transport Streams table will be cleared.
314 4011746 Rev W

EMM Components
Checking the EMM Component Parameters

The following procedure explains how to check the parameters of the EMM
components passed to an outgoing Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which EMM
component parameters must be checked.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the EMM Components tab.
Result: The EMM Components tab page is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 315

Tips:
- The EMM Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the
EMM Main node or EMM component in the DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to Settings in the short-cut menu.
- To sort the EMMs and Generated EMMs table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
Note: The EMMs entering the DCM via the EMMG to MUX interface populate
the Generated EMMs table and the EMMs via an incoming Transport Stream
populate the EMMs table.
- EMMs table:
Output PID - Current: the current PID of the EMM component
Output PID - New: this parameter is used to remap the EMM
component.
Type: component type
Input - Card: the interface card of the incoming Transport Stream to
which the EMM component belongs to
Input - Port: the port number of the incoming Transport Stream to which
the EMM component belongs to
Input - IP Address: the IP address of the device that streams the
Transport Stream to which the EMM component belongs to
Input - UDP Port: the UDP port of the device that streams the Transport
Stream to which the EMM component belongs to
Input - ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream
the EMM component belongs to
Input - TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream to
which the EMM component belongs to
Input - PID: the Packet Identifier of the incoming EMM component
- Generated EMMs table
Output PID - Current: the current PID of the EMM component
Output PID - New: this parameter is used to remap the EMM
component.
Type: component type
Input - Proxy Name: name of the EMM Generator as defined during the
configuration process of the scrambling specific parameters of the DCM
(via ROSA®'s SCS Configurator)
316 4011746 Rev W

EMM Components
Input - Client ID: a unique label to identify the EMM Generator

Input - Channel ID: a unique label to identify the EMM channel
Input - Stream ID: a unique label to identify the EMM stream
Input - Data ID: a unique identifier to identify the EMM stream allocated
by the CAS.
Remapping EMM Components

The following procedure explains how to remap EMM components.
component(s) must be remapped.
Tips:
6 In the row of the EMM component that should be remapped, tick the Output
PID - New check box.
7 Enter the new PID in the Output PID - New box. A value within the range 0
(0x0) - 8190 (0x1FFE) can be entered.
Notes:
The new PID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation,
independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by
0x. For more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic
Changing the Display Mode on page 128.
PID value 8191 (0x1FFF) cannot be used.
4011746 Rev W 317

PIDs occupied by the following components can not be used:

– manual remapped SI tables
– manual remapped service components
– manual remapped Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) entering
the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream and via the EMMG to MUX
interface
– passed Transport Stream components
– passed Private Data components
– PSI tables of which the generation mode is set to Transparent
Removing EMM Components from an Outgoing Transport Stream

The following steps explain how to remove EMM components from an outgoing
Transport Stream.
component(s) must be removed.
Tips:
6 In the EMMs and Generated EMMs table tick the check box, which is located
beside the Current column, of each EMM that must be removed.
318 4011746 Rev W

EMM Components
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the EMMs and Generated
EMMs table, tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and
hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be
removed.
4011746 Rev W 319

Private Data Components

Introduction
In a Conditional Access System a Private Data Generator (PDG) offers the Private
Data components via the PDG to MUX interface or via a Transport Stream. Private
Data components entering the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream must be
considered as unreferenced components. More information concerning
unreferenced components can be found in topic Passing and Removing Unreferenced
Passing Private Data Components

The following procedure explains how to pass private data components, which enter
the DCM via the PDG to MUX interface, to an outgoing Transport Stream.
2 In the Input drop down box, select EMM.
Result: The Input EMM, EMM Generated, Private Data, and Output Transport
Streams tables are displayed.
Tip: To sort the Private Data and Output Transport Streams table by a
particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle
between ascending and descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Private Data table, set the check box(es) of the Private Data component(s)
that must be passed.
320 4011746 Rev W

4 In the Output PID box of the Private Data components that must be passed,
enter a unique PID value.
Transport Stream(s) to which the Private Data component(s) must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Private Data and Output
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected Private Data
components are passed to the selected outgoing Transport Stream(s). All check
boxes in the Private Data table as well as the check boxes in the Output
Transport Streams table will be cleared.
Checking the Private Data Component Parameters

The following procedure explains how to check the parameters of the Private Data
components, which enter the DCM via the PDG to MUX interface and passed to an
component(s) must be removed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the TS Components tab.
Result: The TS Components tab page is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 321

Tips:
- The TS Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the
Private Data main node or Private Data components of a Transport Stream in
the DCM Outputs tree and pointing to Settings in the short-cut menu.
- To sort the Private Data PIDs table by a particular parameter, click on the
The following Private Data component parameters can be checked:
- Output PID - Current: the current PID of the Private Data component
- Output PID - New: this parameter is used to remap the Private Data
component.
- Type: component type
- Input - Proxy Name: name of the Private Data Generator as defined during
the configuration process of the scrambling specific parameters of the DCM
(via ROSA®'s SCS Configurator)
- Input - Client ID: a unique label to identify the Private Data Generator
- Input - Channel ID: a unique label to identify the Private Data channel
- Input - Stream ID: a unique label to identify the Private Data stream
- Input - Data ID: a unique identifier to identify the Private Data stream
allocated by the CAS
322 4011746 Rev W

Remapping Private Data Components

The following procedure describes how to remap Private Data components, which
are offered to the DCM via the PDG to MUX interface.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which Private
Data component(s) must be remapped.
Tips:
Private Data components of a Transport Stream in the DCM Outputs tree and
pointing to Settings in the short-cut menu.
4011746 Rev W 323

6 In the Private Data PIDs table, enter a new PID in the Output PID - New box of
the Private Data component that must be remapped.
Notes:
interface
Removing Private Data Components

The procedure below describes how to remove Private Date components, which
enter the DCM via the PGD to MUX interface, from an outgoing Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which Private
Data component(s) must be removed.
324 4011746 Rev W

Tips:
Private Data main node or Private Data components of a Transport Stream in
the DCM Outputs tree and pointing to Settings in the short-cut menu.
6 In the Private Data PIDs table tick the check box, which is located beside the
Current column, of each Private Data component that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Private Data PIDs table,
tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
4011746 Rev W 325

Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components

Passing Unreferenced Components
When an incoming Transport Stream is passed by dragging and dropping the
complete Transport Stream to the output, only the services and components referred
to these services are passed. The components without reference in the PMT or CAT
table are not passed.
Passing non-service components to an outgoing Transport Streams can be done
using the PID Multiplexing or using the drag and drop method.
Note: Merging non-service components into an outgoing service can be done using
the Add Custom PID method. For more information please refer to topic Merging
Individual Components into an Outgoing Service on page 291.
To Pass Components Using PID Multiplexing

The following procedure explains how to pass unreferenced components to an
outgoing Transport Stream using PID Multiplexing.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which
components must be passed.
5 Click on the TS Component tab.
Result: The TS Component tab page is displayed.
326 4011746 Rev W

6 Scroll to the PID Multiplexing settings.
7 In the Input Card drop down box, select the name of the interface card that
receives the incoming Transport Stream to which the component belongs to.
8 In the Input Port drop down box, select the name of the input port of this
Transport Stream.
9 In the Input Type drop down box, select the input port type:
When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the GbE
port receiving the stream must be joined to the multicast group.
device streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop down
11 In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
box is set to ASI.
12 Multiple incoming components with consecutive PIDs can be passed and
remapped by defining an Insert PID Range. Perform the following additional
steps to pass and remap multiple incoming components.
a Tick the Insert PID Range check box.
Result: The First Input PID, Last Input PID, and First Output PID boxes
become applicable.
4011746 Rev W 327

b In the First Input PID box, enter the PID of the incoming component with
the lowest PID value of the consecutive incoming components.
c In the Last Input PID box, enter the PID of the incoming component with the
highest PID value of the consecutive incoming components.
d In the First Output PID box, enter the PID of the component with the lowest
PID value.
Tip: When these components must be remapped, enter a new PID for the
component with the lowest PID value in the First Output PID box, after
pressing the Insert Range command button, the other components get a new
consecutive PID value.
e Press the Insert Range command button.
Result: The Input PID/Output PID rows in the PID Multiplexing table are
cleared and enlarged with the new passed components.
Notes:
Since the Input PID/Output PID rows are cleared after pressing the Insert
Range command button, these additional steps to pass and remap multiple
consecutive incoming component must be performed before individual
incoming components are passed and remapped.
When no individual incoming component must be passed, step 13 and 14 can
be omitted.
13 In the Input PID box, enter the PID of the incoming component that must be
14 In the Output PID box, enter a new PID for the outgoing component.
Tip: Pressing the Insert Row command button creates additional Input
PID/Output PID rows in the PID Multiplexing table that can be used to pass
multiple incoming components.
15 Point to the Add command button to confirm the passing process.
Notes:
PIDs can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation, independent of
the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x. For more
information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic Changing the
Display Mode on page 128.
- manual remapped SI tables
- manual remapped service components
- manual remapped Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) entering the
DCM via an incoming Transport Stream and via the EMMG to MUX interface
- passed Transport Stream components
328 4011746 Rev W

- passed Private Data components

- SI tables of which the generation mode is set to Transparent
To Pass Components Using the Drag and Drop Method

The following procedure explains how to pass unreferenced components to an
outgoing Transport Stream using the drag and drop method.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the unreferenced component in the
Unreferenced PIDs main node of the incoming Transport Stream.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Unreferenced PIDs main node of the
outgoing Transport Stream in which the component must be dropped.
4 Select the branch of the incoming unreferenced component and drag and drop
this component to the icon of the Unreferenced PIDs main node of the outgoing
Transport Stream.
Note: Components within incoming services can also be dragged and dropped to the
Unreferenced PIDs main node of an outgoing Transport Stream. When the
dropped service component has a reference in the PMT or CAT of the Transport
Stream (the dropped component is already present into a service) the component
will be forced to its original value and added to the TS Component Settings table.
4011746 Rev W 329

Remapping Unreferenced Components

The DCM avoids PID collisions at its output by remapping conflicting PID values
automatically. PID remapping can also be done manually by means of the web
browser user interface. The following procedure explains how to remap
unreferenced components.
components should be remapped.
Tips:
Unreferenced PIDs main node or Unreferenced components of a Transport
Stream in the DCM Outputs tree and pointing to Settings in the short-cut
menu.
330 4011746 Rev W

- To sort the TS Component Settings table by a particular parameter, click on

the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
6 Enter the new PID in the Output PID box.
Note:
interface
To Check the Settings of Unreferenced Components

Perform the following steps to check the settings of unreferenced components.
Transport Stream component belongs to.
Result: The TS Output sub page is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 331

Tips:
Unreferenced PIDs main node or Unreferenced components of a Transport
Stream in the DCM Outputs tree and pointing to Settings in the short-cut
menu.
Note: The TS Components Settings table is also populated with the manually
remapped service components and the manual remapped EMMs.
The following parameters can be found in the TS Component Settings table.
Output PID
– Current: the packet identifier of the outgoing component. This packet
identifier (PID) is by default equal to the packet identifier of the incoming
component. When two incoming components with the same PID are
passed to the output, one of the outgoing components gets a new unique
PID.
– New: the PID of the outgoing component. This parameter can be used
for component remapping purposes.
Type: represents the kind of component passing.
332 4011746 Rev W

Input
– Card: the interface card of the incoming Transport Stream to which the
component belongs to
– Port: the port number of this incoming Transport Stream
– IP Address: the IP address of the destination port to which this Transport
Stream streams
– UDP Port: the UDP port number of the of the destination port to which
this Transport Stream streams.
– ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of this Transport Stream
– TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of this Transport Stream
– PID: the Packet Identifier of the incoming component
Removing Components
The following procedure explains how to remove unreferenced components from
the output.
components must be removed.
Tips:
Private Data components of a Transport Stream in the DCM Outputs tree and
pointing to Settings in the short-cut menu.
6 Tick the check box(es) for the unreferenced component(s) that should be
removed.
4011746 Rev W 333

Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the TS Components Settings
table, tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold
removed.
7 Press to the Remove command button.
334 4011746 Rev W

Overruling Elementary Stream Type

Introduction
The DCM allows overruling the stream type of outgoing components by creating ES
type overrule entries. When an outgoing component matches an ES type overrule
entry, the stream type of the component will be overruled with the value defined in
the entry.
Creating ES type overrule entries is done on service level by assigning a stream type
value to a particular component PID. A stream type value can be given between 0
and 255 (0x00 and 0xFF). The stream type of the component with matching PID
will then be overruled. Since ES type overrule entries are created on service level,
the rules will be removed after removing the corresponding service from the
A component, for which the stream type is overruled, is indicated in the DCM
Outputs tree and Service Component Settings table.
DCM Outputs tree
Service Component Settings table
WARNING:
ES type overruling is done as a last step during the PMT and VCT
generation, meaning the new stream type is not interpreted by the device
during multiplexing, transrating, splicing, scrambling...
Note: If an ES type overrule entry conflicts with the Output Standard parameter of
the outgoing Transport Stream to which the component belongs to, the
corresponding entry has higher priority than the Output Standard parameter.
More information about the Output Standard parameter can be found in topic
Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Stream on page 209.
4011746 Rev W 335

Creating ES Stream Type Overrule Entries

The following procedure describes how to create an ES type overrule entry for a
particular service.
for which ES type overrule entries must be created.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab page.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column on the row
of the PMT of the service for which ES type overrule entries must be added.
Result: The Add ES Type Overrule are displayed.
7 In the PID box, enter the PID of the component for which the stream type must
be overruled.
8 In the New ES Type box, enter the value of the stream type.
Tip: The value can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation,
independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x.
For more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic
Changing the Display Mode. on page 128
Changing ES Type Overrule Entries

The following procedure describes how to change ES type overrule entries.
336 4011746 Rev W

for which ES type overrule entries must be changed.
of the PMT of the service for which ES type overrule entries must be changed.
Result: The PSI information of the selected PMT is displayed.
7 In the ES Type Overrule table, change the New ES Type parameter of the
entry(ies) that must be changed .
Removing ES Type Overrule Entries

The following procedure describes how to remove ES type overrule entries.
for which ES type overrule entries must be removed.
4011746 Rev W 337


of the PMT of the service for which ES type overrule entries must be removed.
7 In the ES Type Overrule table, tick the check boxes of the entries that must be
removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the ES Type Overrule table,
tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
338 4011746 Rev W

Adding and Modifying PMT Descriptors

Introduction
The inner loop descriptors as well as the outer loop descriptors of a PMT are
categorized in the PMT Settings table on the Service - SI Table - PMT sub page of
the corresponding outgoing service. The following picture depicts such Service - SI
Table - PMT sub page.
4011746 Rev W 339

In both the inner and outer loop of a PMT descriptors can be added by creating
individual descriptor entries via the web browser user interface or by importing
descriptor files. Descriptor files can be created by for instance ROSA® SI Editor
Task. Individually added descriptors and descriptors imported via descriptor files
can easily be removed. Descriptors passed during the service passing process can
be removed by defining PMT rule entries (called descriptor removal rules).
Descriptors matching descriptor removal rules will be removed. Descriptor
removal rules can be created for inner loop descriptors as well as for outer loop
descriptors.
The order of the inner loop and outer loop descriptors can be changed by creating
PMT rule entries (called descriptor order rules). Each descriptor order rule has a
criterion consisting of descriptor Tag and optionally descriptor content bytes. The
descriptor matching the first rule will be first in the PMT, descriptors matching the
second rule, second... The order of the descriptors within the PMT depends on the
order of the descriptor order rules.
Note: These settings are only used when the Output - Mode for the PMT is set to
Generated or Transparent Generated. The rules can be applied to PMTs generated by
the DCM as well as PMTs imported by a PSIG.
Adding Descriptors Manually

Descriptors can be added to the list of outer loop descriptors or to a list of inner loop
descriptors. For adding an inner loop descriptor, the PID of the corresponding
component must be given. Perform the following steps to add descriptors
manually.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
descriptors must be added.
displayed.
of the PMT for which descriptors must be added.
340 4011746 Rev W

Tip: The Service - SI Table - PMT sub page containing the PSI information of a
particular PMT is also accessible via the arrow in the PMT column of the Service
Settings table on the Settings tab page on the Service - Service sub page.
7 Under the Add PMT Descriptor settings, complete the following settings:
a In the Name box, enter a name for the descriptor.

b In the PID box, enter the PID of the component to which the descriptor must
be added (inner loop descriptor). When no PID is entered, the descriptor
will be added to the outer loop of the PMT.
c In the Tag box, enter the tag for the descriptor.
Notes:
– The value for this parameter can be entered using the decimal or
hexadecimal notation. A hexadecimal notation must be prefixed by 0x.
– A list of descriptors can be found in ETSI EN 300 468.
d In the Data box, enter the data string for the descriptor.
Note: The value for this parameter can only be entered using its hexadecimal
notation and cannot be prefixed by 0x.
e Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The Descriptor is added to the PMT Descriptor table.
8 Continue adding descriptors by performing step 6 or press the Apply command
button to add the descriptor(s) to the PMT.
Importing Descriptors from a File

A descriptor file created by for instance ROSA®'s SI Editor Task can easily be
imported. After importing such file the descriptors are added to the corresponding
descriptor lists. After importing the file, for each descriptor a row is added to the
PMT descriptors table; the name and PID parameters are configurable. Descriptors
already part of a list are not removed and descriptors exactly matching are not
added twice. The following steps describe how to import descriptors from a file.
4011746 Rev W 341

descriptors must be imported.
displayed.
of the PMT for which descriptors must be imported.
7 Under the Add PMT Descriptor settings, tick the Import Data From File check
box.
8 Point to the Browse... command button that appears after ticking the Import
Data From File check box.
Result: The Choose file dialog is displayed.
9 Browse to the descriptor file and select this file.
Result: The Choose file dialog is closed and the path and file name appear in the
Data File box.
11 Press the Add Row command button.
12 Click on the Apply command button.
342 4011746 Rev W

Removing Descriptors Manually

Perform the following procedure to remove descriptors manually.
Note: Only manually added descriptors and descriptors imported from a file can be
removed using following procedure.
descriptors must be removed.
displayed.
of the PMT from which descriptors must be removed.
7 In the PMT Descriptor table, tick the check box of the row of the descriptor(s)
Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the PMT Descriptor table, tick
the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be deleted.
4011746 Rev W 343

The rows in the PMT Descriptor table can be sorted by a specific parameter
by pointing to the column header of this parameter. You can toggle
between ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter
header.
Removing Descriptors Using PMT Rules

PMT rules can be created to remove inner loop and outer loop descriptors. These
descriptor removal rules can be used to remove descriptors passed during the
service passing process.
Note: Manually created descriptors and descriptors imported via a file cannot be
removed by using descriptor removal rules.
The following steps explain how to create descriptor removal rules.
descriptor removal rules must be created.
displayed.
of the PMT for which descriptors removal rules must be created.
7 Under the Add PMT descriptor Rule settings, complete the following settings:
344 4011746 Rev W

a In the Type drop down box, select Inner Loop Removal to create a removal rule
for inner loop descriptors or select Outer Loop Removal to create a removal
rule for outer loop descriptors.
b In the Tag box, enter the tag that must be used to make a descriptor selection
based on tag.
Note: The value for this parameter can be entered using the decimal or
c In the Bytes box, enter the bytes that must be used to make a descriptor
selection based on bytes.
Notes:
– The value for this parameter can only be entered using its hexadecimal
– These bytes are the first bytes of the descriptor and are optionally in the
rule.
d Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The rule is added to the Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules or
Inner Loop Descriptor Removal Rules table depending on the type
selection.
8 Continue adding descriptor removal rules by performing step 7 or press the

Apply command button to confirm the operation.
Ordering Descriptors Using PMT Rules

PMT Rules can also be created to order the inner loop and outer loop descriptors
within a PMT. The descriptor order in the PMT depends on the descriptor rule and
the order of the rule in the Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules or Inner Loop
Descriptor Order Rules table.
The following steps explain how to order descriptors in the PMT using PMT rules.
descriptor order rules must be created.
4011746 Rev W 345

displayed.
of the PMT for which descriptors order rules must be created.
7 Under the Add PMT Descriptor Rule settings, complete the following settings:
a In the Type drop down box, select Inner Loop Order to create a descriptor
order rule for inner loop descriptors or select Outer Loop Order to create a
rule for outer loop descriptors.
based on tag.
d Press the Add Row command button.
346 4011746 Rev W

Result: The rule is added to the Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules or Inner
Loop Descriptor Order Rules table depending on the type selection.
Note: The order of the rules in both the Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules
and Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table can be changed by pressing
the arrow in the Order column of the rule.
8 Continue adding descriptor order rules by performing step 7 or press the Apply
command button to confirm the operation.
Removing PMT Rules

The following procedure explains how to remove PMT rules.
PMT rules must be removed.
displayed.
of the PMT for which PMT rules must be removed.
4011746 Rev W 347

7 In the Rules table for which PMT rules must be removed, tick the rows of the
rules that must be removed.
Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in a Rules table, tick the check box
of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key,
and tick the check box of the last row that must be deleted.
The rows in a Rules table can be sorted by a specific parameter by pointing to
the column header of this parameter. You can toggle between ascending
and descending order by clicking on the parameter header.
8 Click on the corresponding Remove Checked Rows command button.
Changing the Default PMT Descriptor Rule Parameters

During the creation process of outgoing Transport Streams, default descriptor rules
can be added. The following procedure describes how to add default descriptor
rules.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the icon of the interface card for
which the default setting must be changed.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page, point to the PMT tab.
Result: The PMT tab page is displayed.
348 4011746 Rev W

5 Under the Add PMT Descriptor Rule settings complete the following settings:
a In the Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
– Inner Loop Removal: to create a removal rule for inner loop descriptors
– Outer Loop Removal: to create a removal rule for outer loop descriptors
– Inner Loop Order: to create a descriptor order rule for inner loop
descriptors
– Outer Loop Order: to create a rule for outer loop descriptors
based on tag.
d Press the Add command button.
Result: The rule is added to the Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules,
Inner Loop Descriptor Removal Rules, Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules,
or Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table depending on the type selection.
4011746 Rev W 349

Note: The order of the rules in both the Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules
and Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table can be changed by pressing
the arrow in the Order column of the rule.
Note: Entries in the Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules, Inner Loop Descriptor
Removal Rules, Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules, or Inner Loop Descriptor
Order Rules table can be removed by ticking the check box in front of the entry and
pressing the Remove Checked Rows command button.
350 4011746 Rev W

Section F PSI/SI/PSIP Information
Introduction
This section describes how to check PSI/SI/PSIG information, how to
provide an outgoing Transport Stream with this information, and how
to modify this information.
In this section
Introduction ................................................................................................. 352
Changing the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode.............................. 356
Viewing PSI/SI/PSIP Information........................................................... 360
Information .................................................................................................. 365
Changing the Table Playout Interval ....................................................... 385
Remapping Tables ...................................................................................... 391
Changing SI Information ........................................................................... 393
Changing PSIP Information ...................................................................... 400
Transport Streams....................................................................................... 407
Exporting PSI/SI......................................................................................... 410
4011746 Rev W 351

Introduction
Program Specific Information
Program Specific Information (PSI) is the MPEG information that is transmitted
periodically within a Transport Stream and identifies what parts of the Transport
Stream belong to a particular program. This information contains the following
tables:
Program Association Table (PAT)
The PAT provides information about all services within a particular Transport
Stream. It associates the number of the service with the PID of the Program
Map Table (PMT) and gives the location of the Network Information Table (NIT).
Conditional Access Table (CAT)
The CAT is the link to the components (Entitlement Management Messages or
EMMs) containing the encrypted Access Rights needed to descramble a
scrambled service.
Program Map Table (PMT)
Each service within a Transport Stream has a PMT sub table which lists
information on all the components (video, audio, or data) belonging to that
service. The table lists the type of each component, the PID of the components,
as well as various descriptors. The PMT provides also the location of the
Program Clock Reference (PCR) field for the service.
The following table lists the PID and table identifier of the PSI tables.
Table PID Table ID

PAT 0 (0x0000) 0 (0x00)
CAT 1 (0x0001) 1 (0x01)
PMT 2 (0x02)
Service Information
Service Information (SI) used in DVB environments provides additional information
for receivers/decoders and contains electronic program guide (EPG) information,
such as the nature of a service, the timing and the channel on which it can be located,
and the countries in which it is available.
352 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
The DCM with software package version 7.5 process following SI tables:
Network Information Table (NIT)
The NIT provides information on physical network parameters such as channel
frequencies, satellite transponder details, modulation characteristics... NIT
actual (NITa) describes the current network and NIT other (NITo) describes the
other networks.
Service Description Table (SDT)
The SDT provides information about services within a Transport Stream such as
service name, language, running status, country availability... The SDT actual
(SDTa) describes the services within the current Transport Stream while the SDT
other (SDTo) describes the services within other Transport Streams.
Event Information Table (EIT)
The EIT provides information about events in the network such as start time,
duration of the events...
- The EIT actual present/following (EITa p/f) contains information on the
current and next event for the current Transport Stream.
- The EIT actual schedule (EITa sch) contains information on several events
following the current event for the current Transport Stream.
- The EIT other present/following (EITo p/f) contains information on the
current and next event for other Transport Streams.
- The EIT other schedule (EITo sch) contains information on several events
following the current event for other Transport Streams.
Time and Date Table (TDT)
The TDT carries the UTC-time and date information.
Time Offset Table (TOT)
The TOT provides time zone offsets, daylight saving information, UTC-time... to
give local time.
Bouquet Association Table (BAT)
The BAT provides information regarding bouquets. A bouquet is a logical
collection of services, which may traverse the boundary of a network.
Running Status Table (RST)
The RST is used to update the running status of events.
Application Information Table (AIT)
The AIT provides the information of interactive applications of services.
4011746 Rev W 353

The following table lists the PID and table identifier of the SI tables.
Table PID Table ID

NITa 16 (0x0010) 64 (0x40)
NITo 16 (0x0010) 65 (0x41)
SDTa 17 (0x0011) 66 (0x42)
SDTo 17 (0x0011) 70 (0x46)
EITa p/f 18 (0x0012) 78 (0x4E)
EITo p/f 18 (0x0012) 79 (0x4F)
EITa sch 18 (0x0012) 80 .. 95 (0x50 .. 0x5F)
EITo sch 18 (0x0012) 96 .. 111 (0x60 .. 0x6F)
TDT 20 (0x0014) 112 (0x70)
BAT 17 (0x0011) 74 (0x4A)
RST 19 (0x0013) 113 (0x71)
TOT 20 (0x0014) 115 (0x73)
AIT 116 (0x74)
Program System Information Protocol

Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP) used in ATSC environments
provides receivers/decoders information to divide incoming Transport Streams into
different channels, includes caption information and electronic programming
guides. The DCM with software package version 7.5 process following PSIP tables:
System Time Table (STT)
The STT provides time information like: current time and date, time offset
between GPS and UTC, and daylight savings time.
Master Guide Table (MGT)
The MGT provides the size, type, PID value, and version number for all PSIP
tables in a Transport Stream with the exception of these for the STT.
Virtual Channel Table (VCT)
The CVCT (Cable VCT) and TVCT (Terrestrial VCT) provide information for all
virtual channels in a Transport Stream like: major and minor channel numbers,
short channel name, and information for navigation and tuning.
Ratings Region Table (RRT)
The RRT provides rating information for different regions or countries.
354 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
Event Information Tables (EIT)

The EITs provide schedule information for events on virtual channels like: titles,
start times... Each EIT table spans a period of three hours and the total number
of EITs available is 128. EIT-0 covers the programs within the current three
hour timeslot, EIT-1 covers the next three hours, and so on.
Extended Text Tables (ETT)
The ETTs provide additional information for the virtual channels (ETT-V) and
the events (ETT 0 - 127). For events, each ETT table spans a period of three
hours and the total number of ETTs available is 128. ETT-0 covers the events
within the current three hour timeslot, ETT-1 covers the next three hours, and so
on.
Cable Emergency Alert Message table (CEAM)
The CEAM table provides the messages of the Emergency Alert System (EAS) for
the national warning system in the U.S.
The following table lists the PID and table identifier of the PSIP tables.
Table PID Table ID

STT 8187 (0x1FFB) 205 (0xCD)
MGT 8187 (0x1FFB) 199 (0xC7)
CVCT 8187 (0x1FFB) 201 (0xC9)
TVCT 8187 (0x1FFB) 200 (0xC8)
RRT 8187 (0x1FFB) 202 (0xCA)
EIT 203 (0xCB)
ETT 204 (0xCC)
CEAM 8187 (0x1FFB) 216 (0xD8)
4011746 Rev W 355

Changing the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode

Introduction
Before modifying PSI/SI/PSIP information it is strongly recommended to choose the
PSI/SI/PSIP output standard mode. This mode determines which tables are added
to an outgoing Transport Stream. The values that can be chosen for this mode are:
MPEG2 (PSI): PAT, CAT, and PMT
DVB (PSI + DVB SI): PAT, CAT, PMT, NITa, NITo, SDTa, SDTo, BAT, EITa p/f,
EITo p/f, EITa sch, EITo sch, TDT, TOT, and AIT
ATSC (PSI + PSIP): PAT, CAT, PMT, MGT, TVCT, CVCT, RRT, EIT, ETT, STT,
and CEAM
Mixed (PSI + SI + PSIP)
Changing the PSI/SI/PSIP output standard mode of a Transport Stream can be done
on the SI Components sub page of the corresponding outgoing Transport Stream
(see following topic) or can be done on the Service - TS SI sub page containing all
outgoing Transport Streams of a particular port (see topic To Change the PSI/SI/PSIP
Output Standard for Multiple Transport Streams on a Particular Port on page 357).
WARNING:
Changing the PSI/SI/PSIP output standard of a Transport Stream removes all
PSI/SI/PSIP related settings for this Transport Stream.
Tip: Since a newly created outgoing Transport Stream gets the default value for the
PSI/SI/PSIP output standard mode, it is recommended to change this default value
when most of the outgoing Transport Streams must have the same PSI/SI/PSIP
output standard mode. The procedure to change this default value is described in
topic To Change the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard on page 358.
To Change the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode for a Single Transport

Stream
The following steps explain how to change the PSI/SI/PSIP output standard mode
for a particular outgoing Transport Stream.
clicking on the Service link
Result: The Service- Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the transport stream for which the
PSI/SI/PSIP output standard mode must be changed.
356 4011746 Rev W

4 Click on the SI Components tab that appears after pointing to the Component
link.
5 In the Mode drop down box, select the desired output standard mode: Mixed,
MPEG2, DVB, or ATSC.

To Change the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode for Multiple Transport

Streams on a Particular Port
The following procedure describes how to change the PSI/SI/PSIP output standard
mode for multiple outgoing Transport Streams on a particular port.
clicking on the Service link
Result: The Service- Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Streams
for which the PSI/SI/PSIP output standard mode must be changed.
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected port is displayed.
4 Click on the Output Standard tab page after pointing to the TS SI link.
Result: The Output Standard tab page of the selected port is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 357

5 In the SI Output Standard table, change the Mode drop down box of the
Transport Streams to the desired standard.
Note: Changing the PSI/SI/PSIP output standard mode for all Transport Streams to
the same standard can be done by selecting the desired mode in the Mode drop
down box under the Update All TS settings and pressing the Update command
button.
To Change the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode

The following steps describe how to change the default PSI/SI/PSIP output
standard mode for newly created outgoing Transport Streams.
default PSI/SI/PSIP output standard should be changed.
displayed.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page, point to the SI Table tab.
358 4011746 Rev W

Result: The SI Table tab page containing the SI Output Standard settings is
displayed.
5 Select the desired output standard mode in the Mode drop down box and press
the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command button to
4011746 Rev W 359

Viewing PSI/SI/PSIP Information

Introduction
The PSI/SI information for both the incoming and the outgoing Transport Streams
can be displayed using the web browser user interface of the DCM.
A DCM with software package version 7.5 allows viewing the following
information:
MPEG2
Incoming and outgoing PAT, CAT, and PMT
DVB-SI
Incoming and outgoing NITa, NITo, SDTa, SDTo, BAT, EITa pf, EITo pf, EITa
sch, EITo sch, TDT, TOT, and AIT
Note: Only outgoing AIT, NITo, SDTo, BAT, EITo pf, and EITo sch tables that are
imported by a PSIG can be displayed.
PSIP
Incoming MGT, TVCT, CVCT, RRT, and STT
To View the PSI/SI Information of Incoming Transport Streams

The following procedure explains how to view the PSI/SI of incoming Transport
Streams.
service information must be checked.
4 Click on the SI View link.
Result: The Service - SI View sub page of the selected incoming Transport
Stream is displayed.
5 Perform the following steps to display the required PSI/SI information.
a Under the Add Table settings, select the table in the Table drop down box
for which information must be checked.
360 4011746 Rev W

b For a PMT, select the service in the Service drop down box.
c For a NITo, enter the Network Identifier (TS ID) in the Network ID box.
d For an SDTo, enter the Original Network Identifier (ON ID) in the ON ID
box and the Transport Stream identifier in the TS ID box.
e For a BAT, enter the Bouquet identifier in the Bouquet ID box.
f For an EITa pf table, select the corresponding service in the Service drop
down box.
g For an EITo pf table, enter the ON ID, TS ID, and Service Identifier (SID) in
the corresponding boxes.
h For an EITa sch table, select the corresponding service in the Service drop
down box and the corresponding table identifier in the drop down box
beside the Table drop down box.
4011746 Rev W 361

i For an EITo sch table, enter the ON ID, TS ID, and SID in the corresponding
boxes and select the corresponding table identifier in the drop down box
beside the Table drop down box.
j For an AIT table, enter the PID and the application type in the corresponding
boxes.
k For an RRT, enter the region ID in the corresponding box.
l Press the Add command button.

Result: The selected table is added to the SI Table In Tree table and the data
added to the SI Tree.
362 4011746 Rev W

Note: Some tables, like PAT, CAT, PMT, and SDTa, are immediately added
to the tree. Other tables will get the status Pending. Pressing the Reload
command button changes the status to Loaded (success) or Not Found (failure).
Tips:
– You can browse through the SI Tree by expanding and collapsing
branches.
– A table can be removed from the user interface by ticking the check box
of the corresponding PSI/SI table in the SI Table In Tree table and
clicking on the Remove Checked Items command button.
– A PSI/SI table can be refreshed by clicking on the corresponding Reload
command button in the row of the corresponding table.
– All PSI/SI tables can be refreshed by clicking on the Reload All
command button.
6 Repeat step 5 for all PSI/SI that must be displayed.
To View the PSI/SI Information of Outgoing Transport Streams

The following steps describe how to view PSI/SI of an outgoing Transport Stream.
Note: PSI/SI can not be checked when the Output-Mode parameter of the table is
set to Stop.
PSI/SI must be checked.
displayed.
Result: The Components sub page is displayed.
5 In the Components sub page, point to the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab is displayed.
of the table that must be checked.
Tip: The EIT and other table population in the SI Table Settings table can be
reduced by using filters ( ). The following list shows these filters:
– Exclude EIT and others: no EIT tables and no other tables (tables referring to
another Transport Stream) are displayed (used by default).
– EIT (DVB) for <service>: only the DVB EIT tables for the corresponding
service will be displayed.
4011746 Rev W 363

– Show All Imported Tables: only the tables imported via the PSIG to MUX
interface are displayed.
– Show All Other (DVB): all other tables (tables referring to another
Transport Stream) are displayed.
Result: The PSI/SI information of the selected table is displayed in the SI Tree.
Tip: You can browse through the PSI/SI information by expanding and
collapsing branches.
364 4011746 Rev W

Providing an Outgoing Transport Stream with PSI/SI/PSIP Information

Information
Introduction
About the Internal PSIG Generator of the DCM
The PSI/SI/PSIP information in a newly created outgoing Transport Stream
depends on the PSI/SI/PSIP output standard and the default generation mode of
the tables. The following list shows the tables that can be generated by default by
the DCM for a newly created outgoing Transport Stream:
MPEG: PAT, CAT, and PMT
DVB: PAT, CAT, PMT, SDTa, EITa p/f, EITa sch first 8 days, EITa sch after 8
days, TDT, and TOT
PSIP: PAT, CAT, PMT, MGT, TVCT, CVCT, RRT, STT, EITs, and ETTs
When services are passed to the output, these tables will be generated by the DCM
corresponding with the PSI/SI/PSIP information of the incoming services. For
instance, when a service is added to an outgoing Transport Stream, the PMT sub
table from the incoming service will be added to the output and the part of the
SDTa/CVCT/TVCT corresponding with the incoming service will be added to the
outgoing SDTa/CVCT/TVCT.
Tip: The Generation parameter in the Default SI Table Playout table for a
PSI/SI/PSIP table determines if the table is automatically generated by the DCM or
not during the Transport Stream creation process. The procedure to change this
parameter can be found in topic Changing the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Settings for Newly
Created Transport Streams on page 407.
Note: After passing a service from an incoming Transport Stream containing
Motorola PSI to an outgoing Transport Stream, particular Motorola PSI belonging to
this service will also be passed. Some Motorola PSI (Program Information Message:
PIM and Program Name Message: PNM) information can be blocked by setting the
Motorola PSI parameter to Blocked. This parameter must be set before starting
passing process. The procedure to set this parameter can be found in topic
Changing the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Settings for Newly Created Transport Streams on page
407.
About PSIG Information from Other Sources

Instead of using PSI/SI/PSIP information from the internal PSIG of the DCM or for
insertion of tables that are not generated by the DCM, information from other
sources can be used. These sources can be:
An external PSIG connected via the PSIG to MUX interface
4011746 Rev W 365

An incoming Transport Stream (MPEG Transport Stream or engineering

Transport Stream)
PSI/SI/PSIP information offered to the DCM using the PSIG to MUX interface for
which the ON ID and TS ID match the IDs of the outgoing Transport Stream are
automatically added to the corresponding Transport Stream and overrules the
information generated by the DCM PSIG. The output generation mode for such
tables is Transparent Generated - PSIG (Transp. Gen. - PSIG). The procedure to assign
a PSIG to a DCM via the PSIG to Mux interface can be found in topic To Assign a
PSI/SI Generator Interface using the Web Browser User Interface on page 641.
PSI/SI/PSIP information offered to the DCM using an incoming Transport Stream
must be passed transparently to an outgoing Transport Stream, meaning the table
will be added to the outgoing Transport Stream without modifications by the DCM.
Transparently passing of tables can be done in different ways:
Transparent PID passing via the SI Table Settings table
Transparent PID passing using the Muxing method
(For a DCM with software package version 7.5, only the RRT table can be passed
using this method)
Transparent PID passing using PID multiplexing
This method is only recommended for PSI/SI/PSIP information that is not
supported by the DCM. The procedure to pass components using PID
Multiplexing can be found in topic Passing and Removing Transport Stream
When for instance PSI/SI/PSIP information is offered to a DCM through a Transport
Stream created by an external SI generator containing information for multiple
services, the sub table passing feature of the DCM allows passing the information only
for the desired service (sub table) to the output. The procedure to use DCM's sub
table passing feature can be found in topic Passing Sub Table Information from an
Incoming to an outgoing Transport Stream on page 371.
(For a DCM with software package version 7.5, the sub-table feature can only be used
for EITa p/f, EITo p/f, CEAM and RRT tables).
About the PSI/SI/PSIP Generation Mode

The Output - Mode parameter determines the source of the PSI/SI/PSIP
information.
Generate: The PSI/SI/PSIP information is by default generated by the DCM.
Transparent: The PSI/SI/PSIP information is passed from an incoming Transport
Stream without modifications by the DCM. In this case the DCM requires the
input identification settings of the incoming Transport Stream containing this
PSI/SI/PSIP information. When a table is transparently passed, all additional
information on the same PID is also passed (for instance SDTo when passing
SDTa).
366 4011746 Rev W

Important: If tables share the same PID (for instance TDT and TOT) and the
Output - Mode parameter of these tables is set to Transparent, an Operation Not
Succeeded will be displayed if the input reference for these tables is modified.
To deal with this, set the Output - Mode parameter for one of these tables to
Transparent and for the other tables to Stopped.
Transp. Gen. - PSIG: The PSI/SI/PSIP information coming from a PSIG via the
PSIG to MUX interface is inserted into an outgoing Transport Stream. When the
ON ID and the TS ID of the PSI/SI/PSIP information of the PSIG match the ON
ID and TS ID of the outgoing Transport Stream, the corresponding information
will automatically be inserted into this outgoing Transport Stream and the
Output - Mode parameter is set to Transp. Gen. - PSIG. The Output - Mode
parameter can always be changed to another value but will be overruled to
Transp. Gen. - PSIG when the DCM receives an update from the PSIG for this
information.
DCM's Pure Import Tables feature allows inserting PSI/SI/PSIP information into
an outgoing Transport Stream without modifying this information, meaning the
tables are played out exactly as imported (binary identical). This feature can be
switched on by enabling the Do Not Modify parameter. The procedure to enable
or disable this parameter can be found in topic Changing the PSIG Interface
Connection Parameters using the Web Browser User Interface on page 642.
Transp. Gen. - Input: The PSI/SI/PSIP information generated by the DCM will be
modified with sub-table information from an incoming Transport Stream. In
this case the DCM requires the input identification settings of this PSI/SI/PSIP
information. Table information like SID, ON ID, and TS ID will be modified to
match the outgoing Transport Stream / service. With the exception of the
CEAM table that follows the input (a CEAM table has no repetitive behavior),
the playout interval of the tables will be changed to the settings for the outgoing
Transport Stream.
Stop: The corresponding PSI/SI/PSIP information will not be inserted into the
The following tables show the generation modes that can be used for the PSI, SI, and
PSIP tables.
PSI
Table Generate Transparent Transp. Transp. Stopped

Gen. - PSIG Gen. - Input
PAT -
CAT -
PMT -
4011746 Rev W 367

SI

NITa - -
NITo - - - -
SDTa -
SDTo - - - -
BAT - - -
EITa p/f
EITo p/f - - -
EITa sch first 8 days -
EITa sch after 8 days -
EITo sch first 8 days - - - -
EITo sch after 8 days - - - -
TDT -
TOT -
AIT - - -
PSIP

MGT - -
TVCT - -
CVCT - -
RRT (*) - -
EIT 0 - - -
EIT 1 - - -
EIT 2 and 3 - - -
EIT 4 up to 127 - - -
ETT - - -
ETT 0 - - -
ETT 1 - - -
ETT 2 and 3 - - -
ETT 4 up to 127 - - -
368 4011746 Rev W


STT - -
CEAM - - -
(*) Only for region 1.

Tip: PSI/SI exported from the DCM or created by means of ROSA's SI Editor can be
uploaded to the DCM using the Macro Component. Macro's can also be used to
remove PSI/SI from a Transport Stream. More information concerning macro's can
be found in topic Using DCM Macros on page 939.
Transparently Passing PSI/SI/PSIP Information from an Incoming

Transport Steam
Perform the following steps to pass PSI/SI/PSIP information from an incoming
Transport Stream transparently to an outgoing Transport Stream.
Note: When the Output - Mode parameter of a table is set to Transparent, all tables
on this PID will be transparently passed, even if not indicated in the user interface.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which the
PSI/SI/PSIP information must be passed.
Result: The SI Components tab page containing the SI Table Settings table is
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 369

Tip: To sort the SI Table Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the
table header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and
6 In the Output - Mode drop down box of the table that transparently must be
passed, select Transparent.
7 Perform the following steps to identify the incoming PSI/SI/PSIP information:
a In the Input - Card drop down box, select the name of the interface card
receiving the Transport Stream to which the PSI/SI/PSIP information
belongs to.
b In the Input - Port drop down box, select the name of the input port.
c In the Input - Type drop down box, select the input port type:
– GbE Multicast: for an GbE Multicast input port
d In the Input - IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
Note: The Input - IP Address box is only applicable if the Input - Type drop
e In the Input - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
receiving the Transport Stream.
Note: The Input - UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input - Type drop
down box is set to ASI.
f In the Input - PID box, enter the PID of the PSI/SI/PSIP information.
Tips:
To reduce the parameter adaptations during the configuration of the DCM, the
default value of the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode for newly created Transport
Streams can be changed. The procedure to change the default PSI/SI/PSIP
output mode is described in topic Changing the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Settings for
Newly Created Transport Streams on page 407.
370 4011746 Rev W

Changing the Output - Mode parameter for all EITa p/f tables can be done by
selecting Set All EITa p/f to Transparent in the Mode drop down box under the
EIT TS Configuration, settings, specifying incoming PSI/SI/PSIP sub table
information, and clicking on the Apply to EIT command button.
Important: Changing the input reference is not allowed for tables for which the
Output - Mode is set to Transparent and sharing the same PID. To deal with
this, set the Output - Mode parameter for these tables to stopped and then to
Transparent again and modify the input reference.
Passing Sub Table Information from an Incoming to an outgoing Transport

Stream
Introduction
When PSI/SI/PSIP information is offered to a DCM through a Transport Stream
created by an external SI generator containing information for multiple services, the
Sub Table Passing feature of the DCM allows passing the information only for the
desired service (sub table) to the output.
DCM's Sub Table Passing feature can also be used to convert incoming EIT actual p/f
information to outgoing EIT other p/f information.
To prevent reconfiguring the system each time a channel line-up change occurs, all
EIT other p/f tables can automatically be passed through to the output by using the
Auto Pass All EIT Other pf feature. An exception list can then be made to make
exceptions. The procedure to pass all EIT other p/f tables automatically from an
incoming Transport Stream to an Outgoing Transport stream using the Auto Pass All
EIT Other pf feature can be found in topic Passing Through All EIT other p/f Tables
Automatically to the Output on page 374.
Notes:
Sub Table Passing of EITs is license based, the Sub Table Passing feature needs the
EIT_FILTERING license.
Passing all EIT other p/f sub tables using the Auto Pass All EIT Other PF feature
requires the EIT_FILTERING_ADVANCED license.
4011746 Rev W 371

Passing Sub Table Information for an EITa p/f, CEAM, or RRT Table
Perform the following steps to pass EITa p/f, CEAM, or RRT sub table information
from an incoming Transport Stream to an outgoing Transport Stream.
PSI/SI/PSIP sub table information must be passed.
displayed.
Tip: To sort the SI Table Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the
6 In the drop down box, select one of the following values:
For a sub table from an EITa p/f (DVB), select EIT (DVB) xxxxx for the
service for which sub tables must be passed.
For a CEAM or RRT table (ATSC), select Exclude EIT, ETT and Other
7 In the Output - Mode drop down box of the corresponding table, select Transp.
Gen. - Input.
8 Perform the following steps to specify the incoming PSI/SI/PSIP sub table
information:
belongs to.
372 4011746 Rev W

b In the Input - Port drop down box, select the name of the input port.
g In the SID-Ext box (RRT and EITa p/f), enter the SID of the incoming service
to which the sub table refers to.
Tips:
default value of the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode for newly created Transport
Streams can be changed. The procedure to change the default PSI/SI/PSIP
output mode is described in topic Changing the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Settings for
Newly Created Transport Streams on page 407.
Changing the Output - Mode parameter for all EITa p/f tables can be done by
selecting Set All EITa p/f to Transp Gen -Input in the Mode drop down box under
the EIT TS Configuration settings, specifying incoming PSI/SI/PSIP sub table
information, and clicking on the Apply to EIT command button.
4011746 Rev W 373

Passing Sub Table Information to an EIT other p/f Table

Perform the following steps to pass EIT p/f sub table information from an incoming
Transport Stream to an outgoing Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which the sub
table information must be passed.
6 In the drop down box, select Show All Other (DVB).
Result: The Add Specific Other Table settings are displayed.
7 Under Source TS complete the following parameters:

a In the Board drop down box, select the name of the interface card of the
incoming Transport Stream to which the sub table belongs to.
b In the Source TS - Port drop down box, select the port of this incoming
Transport Stream.
c In the Source TS - Type drop down box, select the port type:
d In the Source - IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
Note: The Source - IP Address box is only applicable if the Input - Type
drop down box is set to GbE Multicast.
374 4011746 Rev W

e In the Source - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
Note: The Source - UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input - Type drop
8 Under Input, complete the following steps to determine the EIT other p/f sub
table at the input.
a If the information of a EIT actual pf sub table has to be converted to a EIT
other p/f sub table and passed to the output, select EITa pf (0x4f) in the Table
on Input - Table ID drop down box, otherwise select EITo pf (0x4f).
b In the Table on Input - ONID box, enter the ON ID of the Transport Stream
containing the service to which the sub table is related to.
c In the Table on Input - TSID box, enter the TS ID of this Transport Stream.
d In the Table on Input - SID-Ext box, enter the service identifier of this
service.
e In the Table on Input - PID box, enter the PID of the EIT p/f table for which
the sub table must be passed and/or converted.
9 When the service to which the EIT other pf is related to has to be changed at the
output, complete the following steps under Table on Output.
a Tick the ONID check box and enter the ON ID of the Transport Stream
containing the service in the corresponding box.
b Tick the TSID check box and enter the TS ID of this Transport Stream in the
corresponding box.
c Tick the SID-Ext check box of this service in the corresponding box.
d In the PID box, enter the PID for the outgoing EIT other pf table.
10 Point to the Add command button to confirm.
Passing Through All EIT other p/f Tables Automatically to the Output
The following steps explain how to pass all EIT other p/f tables of a particular
incoming Transport Stream automatically to an outgoing Transport Stream and how
to make exceptions.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream to which all
EIT other p/f tables of a particular incoming Transport Stream must
automatically be passed through.
4011746 Rev W 375


6 In the drop down box, select Show All Other (DVB).
Result: The Auto Pass All EIT Other pf Tables settings are displayed.
7 Tick the Enable check box for enabling this feature or clear this check box for
disabling.
8 Under Source TS, complete the following settings to determine the incoming
Transport Stream of which all EIT other p/f tables must be passed.
a In the Board drop down box, enter the name of the interface card receiving
this incoming Transport Stream.
b In the Port drop down box, enter the name of the port that receives this
Transport Stream.
c In the Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the GbE
port receiving the stream must be joined to the multicast group.
d In the IP box, enter the multicast IP address to which the source device of this
Transport Stream streams.
Note: The IP box is only applicable if the Type drop down box is set to GbE
Multicast.
e In the UDP box, enter the UDP port number of the input port receiving this
Transport Stream.
Note: The UDP box is not applicable if the Type drop down box is set to ASI.
f In the PID box, enter the PID of the incoming EIT p/f tables.
9 Under Output, enter the PID for the outgoing EIT other p/f tables in the PID
box.
10 Under Exception List, click on to make an exception list.
376 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Add Exception List Item popup dialog is displayed.
a In the ONID box, enter the ON ID of the Transport Stream containing the
service to which the sub table is related to.
b In the TSID box, enter the TS ID of this Transport Stream.
c In the SID List box, enter the SID(s) of the service(s) to which the EIT other
p/f sub table(s) is (are) related to. Multiple SIDs must be separated by a
comma.
d Click on the OK command button to confirm.
Result: The exceptions are added to the Exceptions List.
Tip: An exception entry can be removed by clicking on the corresponding

.
e Repeat this step for all exceptions that must be made.
Passing Tables Using the Muxing Method

The following steps describe how to pass a table of an incoming Transport Stream to
the output using the Muxing method.
Note: DCM with software package version 7.5 only supports passing RTTs using the
Muxing method.
2 In the Input drop down box select the type of the table that must be passed.
Result: The Input (XXX) and Output Transport Streams tables are displayed.
4011746 Rev W 377

Tip: To sort the Input (XXX) or Output Transport Streams table by a particular
3 In the Input (XXX) table, set the check box(es) of the table(s) that must be passed.
4 In the Output Transport Streams table, set the check box(es) of the Transport
Streams(s) to which the RRT(s) must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input (XXX) and Output
Result: After pressing the Pass command button all check boxes in the Input
(XXX) table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transport Streams table
will be cleared.
378 4011746 Rev W

Changing the PSI/SI/PSIG Output Mode

To Change the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Mode (except EIT/ETT ATSC and EITo p/f DVB
tables)
The following steps explain how to change the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode for a table.
Notes:
default value of the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode can be changed. The procedure
to change the default PSI/SI/PSIP output mode is described in topic Changing
the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Settings for Newly Created Transport Streams on page 407.
The steps below explain how to change the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode for the
PSI/SI/PSIP tables with the exception of the EIT (ATSC) tables. The procedure
describing how to change the output mode for EIT (ATSC) tables can be found in
topic Changing the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Mode of ATSC EIT/ETT Tables on page 382.
regeneration mode of a PSI/SI/PSIP table must be changed.
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 379

Tips:
To sort the SI Table Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the
The entry population of the EIT, ETT, and other tables in the SI Table
Settings table can be reduced by using filters ( ). The following list shows
these filters:
– Exclude EIT, ETT and others: no EIT, ETT, other tables (tables referring to
– EIT (DVB) for <service>: only the EIT tables (DVB) for the corresponding
service will be displayed.
– EIT - ETT (ATSC): only the EIT and ETT tables (ATSC) are displayed.
– Show All Imported Tables: only the PSI/SI/PSIP information coming from
a PSIG via the PSIG to MUX interface is displayed. The information is
read-only.
– Show All Other (DVB): all other tables (tables referring to another
Transport Stream) are displayed.
6 In the Output - Mode drop down box, select the desired generation mode.
Generate
Transparent
Transp. Gen. - Input
Transp. Gen. - PSIP
Stop
Note: When the generation mode is set to Transp. Gen. - Input, the input
identification settings of the stream containing the SI settings must be given.
belongs to.
b In the Input - Port drop down box, select the name of the input port used to
receive the Transport Stream to which the PSI/SI/PSIP information belongs
to.
380 4011746 Rev W

g In the SID-Ext box, enter the SID of the incoming service to which the sub
table refers to (Transp. Gen. - Input only).
Tips:
The arrow in the View column of the SI Table Settings table can be used to
display the PSI/SI/PSIP information of the corresponding table.
When Output - Mode parameter of a table is set to Transparently Generated and
no PSIG data is available for the table, the table will be generated. When the
PSIG data becomes available, the table will be generated with this information.
In case of a NITa, an empty section will be added.
Modifying the Mode parameter for all EITa sub tables to a particular value can
be done in one step by selecting the operation in the Mode drop down box in the
EIT TS settings table and pointing to the Apply to EIT command button.
These operations are:

Stop All EITa p/f: the Mode parameter for all EITa present/following sub
tables is set to Stop.
Generate All EITa p/f: the Mode parameter for all EITa present/following sub
tables is set to Generate.
Stop All EITa sch: the Mode parameter for all EITa schedule sub tables is set to
Stop.
Generate All EITa sch: the Mode parameter for all EITa schedule sub tables is
set to Generate.
Generate EITa sch first 8 days: the Mode parameter for all EITa schedule first 8
days tables are set to Generate.
Set All EITa p/f to Transparent Generated: the Mode parameter for all EITa
present/following is set to Transparent Generated.
Notes:
When the Output - Mode parameter of a table is set to Transparent, all tables on
this PID will be transparently passed, even if not indicated in the user interface.
4011746 Rev W 381

When tables are offered to a DCM by a PSIG, tables unknown by the DCM can
be imported which are not normally available on the DCM. Importing a PMT of
a service unknown by the DCM is also possible. Such tables are labeled with
Import Only and the Output - Mode parameter can only be set to Generated or
Transparently Generated.
When a service is passed to the output, the AIT table that is part of the service
will automatically be passed to the output. Such AIT tables must be blocked as
service components. The procedure to block service components can be found
in topic Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Service Components on page 297.
Changing the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Mode of ATSC EIT/ETT Tables

The procedure below describes how to change the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode for
ATSC EIT/ETT tables.
PSI/SI/PSIP output mode of ATSC EIT tables must be changed.
6 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select EIT - ETT (ATSC).
Result: The ATSC EIT - ETT Settings, ATSC EIT Current PID Usage, and
ATSC EIT Current PID Usage tables are displayed.
7 In the ATSC EIT - ETT Settings table, modify the following parameters for each
service.
382 4011746 Rev W

a In the Mode drop down box, select the PSI/SI/PSIP generation mode for the
– Stop
– Generate EIT
– Generate EIT and ETT
b When the mode is set to Generated ... , enter the range of EIT and/or ETT
tables that must be generated in the Range drop down box.
Possible values are: First 3 hours, First 6 hours, First 12 hours, First day, First
week, and All
c Repeat step a and b for all services.
Tip: Once the Apply command button is pressed, the PIDs occupied by ATSC
EIT and ETT tables (except ETT-V) can be displayed in the ATSC-EIT Current
PID Usage and ATSC-ETT Current PID Usage table by pressing the Reload
command button. Filling up the tables takes some time.
Tip: Modifying the Mode parameter for all EIT and ETT sub tables (ATSC) to a
particular value can be done by performing the following steps:
regeneration mode of a PSI/SI table must be changed.
4011746 Rev W 383


6 In the EIT TS Configuration table, select one of the following options in the
Mode drop down box and point to the Apply to EIT command button.
Generate PSIP-EIT - First 3 hours: the Mode parameter for EIT sub tables for
the first 3 hours is set to Generate.
Generate PSIP-EIT - First Day: the Mode parameter for EIT sub tables for the
first day is set to Generate.
Generate PSIP-EIT - First week: the Mode parameter for EIT sub tables for the
first week is set to Generate.
Generate PSIP-EIT - All: the Mode parameter for all EIT sub tables is set to
Generate.
Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - First 3 hours: the Mode parameter for EIT and
ETT sub tables for the first 3 hours is set to Generate.
Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - First Day: the Mode parameter for EIT and ETT
sub tables for the first day is set to Generate.
Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - First week: the Mode parameter for EIT and ETT
sub tables for the first week is set to Generate.
Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - All: the Mode parameter for all EIT and ETT
sub tables is set to Generate.
Stop All PSIP-EIT: the Mode parameter for all EIT and ETT sub tables is set to
Stop.
384 4011746 Rev W

Changing the Table Playout Interval

Introduction
During the Transport Stream creating process and service passing process, the
playout interval parameter for PSI/SI/PSIP information gets default values. The
tables below show the minimum, maximum, and default values for the PSI/SI/PSIP
playout interval parameters.
PSI
Table Table Playout Interval (ms)
Minimum Default Maximum

PAT 100 500 60000
CAT 100 500 60000
PMT 100 500 60000
SI

NITa 100 10000 60000
NITo 100 10000 60000
SDTa 100 2000 60000
SDTo 100 10000 60000
BAT 100 10000 60000
EITa p/f 100 2000 60000
EITo p/f 100 10000 60000
EITa sch first 8 days 100 10000 60000
EITa sch after 8 days 100 30000 60000
EITo sch first 8 days 100 30000 60000
EITo sch after 8 days 100 30000 60000
TDT 100 30000 60000
TOT 100 30000 60000
AIT 100 30000 60000
4011746 Rev W 385

PSIP

PSIP-MGT 100 500 60000
PSIP-TVCT 100 400 60000
PSIP-CVCT 100 400 60000
PSIP-RRT 100 60000 60000
PSIP-EIT 0 100 500 60000
PSIP-EIT 1 100 3000 60000
PSIP-EIT 2 and 3 100 60000 60000
PSIP-EIT 4 up to 127 100 60000 60000
PSIP-ETT 100 400 60000
PSIP-ETT 0 100 500 60000
PSIP-ETT 1 100 3000 60000
PSIP-ETT 2 and 3 100 60000 60000
PSIP-ETT 4 up to 127 100 60000 60000
PSIP-STT 100 1000 60000
These values can be changed for a particular Transport Stream or for all Transport
Streams on a particular port.
Tip: To reduce the number of parameter adaptations, the default playout interval
values can be changed. The procedure to change these default values can be found
in topic Changing the Default Playout Interval Parameters on page 389.
Note: When a table is imported (PSIG) and the PSIG has specified a playout rate for
this table, the playout rate specified by the PSIG will be used. This setting will be
used when the PSIG does not specify a playout rate.
Changing the Table Playout Interval Parameters for a Particular Transport

Stream
The following procedure describes how to change PSI/SI/PSIP table playout
interval parameters for a particular Transport Stream.
PSI/SI/PSIP table playout interval values must be changed.
386 4011746 Rev W


Result: The Service -TS Output sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab page containing the SI Table Settings and SI
Table Playout tables is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Playout table, change the Interval (ms) parameter for the table(s)
for which the playout interval must be changed.
Note: The entries in the SI Table Playout table depend on the selected
PSI/SI/PSIP output standard. The table above shows the SI Table Playout
table with table entries for DVB.
4011746 Rev W 387

Changing the Table Playout Interval Parameters for all Transport Streams
on a Particular Port
Perform the following steps to change PSI/SI/PSIP table playout interval values for
all Transport Stream on a particular port.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port for which PSI/SI/PSIP table
playout interval values for all Transport Streams must be changed.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click this port and point to Settings in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page for the selected port is displayed.
4 Click on the Table Playout tab that appears after pressing the TS SI link.
Result: The Service - TS SI sub page containing the SI Table Playout table is
displayed.
Note: The entries in the SI Table Playout table depend on the selected
PSI/SI/PSIP output standard. The table above shows the SI Table Playout
table with table entries for DVB.
388 4011746 Rev W

5 In the SI Table Playout table, change the Interval (ms) parameter for the table(s)
for which the playout interval must be changed.
Note: Since an ASI port only accepts one outgoing Transport Stream, this procedure
is not applicable for an ASI port.
Changing the Default Playout Interval Parameters

The following procedure describers how to change the default values for the
PSI/SI/PSIP table playout interval parameters.
default values for the PSI/SI/PSIP table playout interval parameters should be
changed.
displayed.
Result: The SI Table tab page containing the Default SI Table Playout table is
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 389

5 In the Default SI Table Playout table, enter the desired value in the Interval
(ms) box of the corresponding PSI/SI/PSIP table.
390 4011746 Rev W

Remapping Tables
Remapping Tables
Introduction
The web browser user interface of the DCM allows remapping of the PID of the
following PSI/SI/PSIP tables:
PSI: PAT, CAT, and PMT
SI: NITa, NITo, SDTa, SDTo, BAT, EITa p/f, EITo p/f, EITa sch, EITo sch, TDT,
TOT, and AIT
PSIP: MGT, TVCT, CVCT, RRT, EIT, ETT, STT, and CEAM
All tables can be remapped to a value between 0 (0x0) and 8190 (0x1FFE).
Notes:
Remapping of a PSI/SI/PSIP table to a PID occupied by a manual remapped
component is not allowed but remapping to a PID that is occupied by an SI table
is allowed.
Remapping of a PSI/SI/PSIP table to a PID occupied by an SI Table, for which
the SI Generation mode is set to Transparent, is not allowed.
Remapping of AIT tables which are passed from the input must be remapped as
described in topic Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Service Components on page
297.
Remapping of other SI tables can be done using the procedure describes in topic
Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 326.
Remapping PSI/SI/PSIP Tables

The following procedure describes how to remap a PSI/SI/PSIP table.
Note: Remapping EIT and ETT tables (ATSC) is not possible, only the EIT Start PID
and ETT Start PID parameter determining the PIDs for the EIT and ETT tables
(ATSC) can be changed. The procedure to change these parameters and to change
the PID of the ETT-V table can be found in topic Changing the Start PID of the
EIT/ETT Tables on page 406.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which a
PSI/SI/PSIP table should be remapped.
4011746 Rev W 391


5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed containing the SI Table
Settings table.
Note: The EIT entry population in the SI Table Settings table can be reduced by
using filters ( ). The following list shows these filters:
Exclude EIT, ETT and others: no EIT, ETT, and other tables (tables referring to
EIT (DVB) for <service>: only the EIT tables for the corresponding service
will be displayed.
Show All Other (DVB): all other tables (tables referring to another Transport
Stream) are displayed.
6 Tick the Output - PID check box in the row of the PSI/SI/PSIP table that must
be remapped and enter the new PID in the Output - PID box.
Note: The PID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation,
independent on the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x.
For more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic Default
Values for Settings of Incoming Transport Streams.
392 4011746 Rev W

Changing SI Information
Determining the Network PID Insertion into the PAT
Introduction
For the Network PID insertion into the PAT, three different modes can be used:
Enabled: The Network PID will always be inserted, even when the NITa is not
present.
Disabled: No Network PID will be inserted.
Automatic: The Network PID will be inserted when the NITa is not blocked.
When most of the newly created Transport Streams must have the same Network
PID insertion mode, the configuration of the DCM can be facilitated by setting a
default value for this parameter. The procedure to set this default value can be
found in topic Changing the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Settings for Newly Created Transport
Streams on page 407.
To Set the Network PID Insertion Mode for a Transport Stream

The following procedure describes how to set the Network PID insertion mode for a
particular Transport Stream.
Network PID insertion mode must be set.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab page containing the SI Table Settings and SI
Table Playout table is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, click on the View arrow in the PAT row.
Result: The PAT information sub page for the corresponding outgoing Transport
4011746 Rev W 393

7 In the Mode drop down box under the NIT in PAT settings, select the desired
mode: Auto, Disabled, or Enabled.
Changing SDT Settings for a Particular Service

Introduction
The Service Description Table (SDT) is used to list the names and other parameters
of services within a Transport Stream. An SDT (SDT actual) for the services in the
actual Transport Stream is mandatory, an SDT (SDT Other) for services in another
Transport Stream is optional in a compliant DVB Transport Stream.
The web browser user interface allows changing the following service settings in the
SDT Actual:
SDT
- Input: indicates the presence of an incoming SDT for the service.
- Output: determines the outgoing SDT for the service. Possible values are:
Force Output: the SDT of the incoming service will be passed to the
outgoing service. The parameters of the outgoing table are determined
by the values of the following parameters. If the SDT for the incoming
service is absent, a SDT will be created for the outgoing Service. Default
values will then be used for all parameters set to Transparent.
Follow Input Presence: the SDT of the incoming service will be passed to
the outgoing service. The parameters of the outgoing table are
determined by the values of the following parameters. No SDT will be
provided for the outgoing service if the SDT for the incoming service is
absent.
394 4011746 Rev W

Name
- Input: indicates the name of the incoming service.
- Output: determines the name of the outgoing service.
Service Type
- Input: indicates the type of the incoming service.
- Output: determines the Service Type parameter in the SDT actual for the
outgoing service. Possible values are: Transparent, DigitalTV, FmRadio, Ntsc,
DataBroadcast, RcsMap, RcsFls, DvBMhp, Mpeg2 HD, DigitalRadio, SD
DigitalTv, SD NVOD Time Shifted, SD NVOD Reference, HD DigitalTv, HD
NVOD Time Shifted, HD NVOD Reference, Teletext, NVOD Reference, NVOD
Time Shifted, Mosaic, Pal, Secam, and Dd2Mac.
EIT Schedule Flag
- Input: indicates the presence of EIT Schedule information for the service in
the incoming Transport Stream.
- Output: determines the EIT Schedule Flag parameter in the SDT actual for
the outgoing service. The following values can be set: Transparent, Present,
and Not Present.
EIT Present/Following
- Input: indicates the availability of EIT present/following information for the
service in the incoming Transport Stream.
- Output: determines the EIT Present/Following parameter in the SDT actual
for the outgoing service. The following values can be set: Transparent,
Present, and Not Present.
Running Status
- Input: indicates the status of the incoming service.
- Output: determines the Running Status parameter in the SDT actual for the
outgoing service. The following values can be set: Transparent, Start Soon,
Pausing, Running, Future, and Not Running.
Free CA Mode:
- Input: indicated that all components within the incoming service are
scrambled or not.
- Output: determines the Free CA Mode parameter in the SDT actual for the
outgoing service. The following values can be set: Transparent, Not
Scrambled, and Scrambled.
4011746 Rev W 395

Service Provider Name

- Input: indicates the name of the service provider of the incoming service.
- Output: determines the Service Provider Name parameter in the SDT actual
for the outgoing service.
Notes:
When a parameter is set to Transparent, the parameter in the SDT actual of the
outgoing service will be copied from the SDT actual of the incoming service.
If no SDT Actual section for a service is present in the SDT Actual of the
incoming Transport Stream to which the service belongs, a section for this
service can be inserted in the SDT Actual of the outgoing Transport Stream.
These parameters will only be used when the Output - Mode parameter for the
SDT is set to Generate.
To Change SDT Settings

The following procedure explains how to change the parameters of the outgoing
SDT Actual for a particular service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which the SDTa of
a service must be adapted.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, click on the arrow in the View column of the row
of the SDTa table.
Result: The SDTa information is displayed.
7 In the Service drop down box, select the service for which the SDTa must be
adapted.
Result: The SDT Settings for the selected service is displayed.
396 4011746 Rev W

8 Set the Name check box to rename the service and enter a new name in the
Name box.
9 In the SDT, Service Type, EIT Schedule Flag, EIT Present/Following, Running
Status, and Free CA Mode drop down box, select the desired values.
10 Set the Service Provider Name check box to rename the service provider and
enter a new name in the Service Provider Name box.
Adding or Removing Time Offset Descriptors to or from a TOT

To Add Time Offset Descriptors
The following steps explain how to add a Time Offset Descriptor to a TOT.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link that
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which a Time
Offset Descriptor must be added to the TOT.
4 In the Service - TS Output sub page, point to the TS or TS/TR tab.
5 Click on the Configure TOT arrow in the TS Settings table.
Result: The Service - SI Table - TOT sub page is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 397

6 Under the Add Time Offset Descriptor settings, modify the following
parameters:
a In the Country Code drop down box, select the country to which the
descriptor applies.
b In the Region ID box, enter the identifier of the time zone in the country to
which the descriptor applies.
c In the Time Zone box, select the time zone to which the country belongs to.
All other parameters of the Add Time Offset Descriptor are determined on the
basis of these parameters.
7 Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The descriptor is added to the Local Time Offset Descriptor table.
Note: These settings will only be used when the Output - Mode parameter for the
TOT is set to Generate.
To Remove Time Offset Descriptors

The following procedure explains how to remove a Time Offset Descriptor, which is
created using the web browser user interface of the DCM, from a TOT.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which a Time
Offset Descriptor must be removed from the TOT.
398 4011746 Rev W


4 In the Service - TS Output sub page, point to the TS or TS/TR tab.
5 Click on the Configure TOT arrow in the TS Settings table.
Result: The Service - SI Table - TOT sub page is displayed.
6 In the Local Time Offset Descriptor table, set the check box(es) of the
descriptor(s) that must be removed.

Result: The selected descriptor(s) is (are) removed from the Local Time Offset
Descriptor table.
4011746 Rev W 399

Changing PSIP Information

Modifying the TVCT or CVCT
Introduction
The Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table (TVCT) or Cable Virtual Channel Table
(CVCT) lists all virtual channels available in an ATSC Transport Stream and the
virtual channels in other ATSC Transport Streams (optional). CVCT is used in cable
applications and TVCT in terrestrial applications. The DCM allows modifying
following TVCT and CVCT section fields:
VCT
- Input: indicates the presence of an incoming VCT for the service.
- Output: determine the outgoing VCT for the service. Possible values are:
Force Output: the VCT of the incoming service will be passed to the
outgoing service. The parameters of the outgoing table are determined
by the values of the following parameters. If the VCT for the incoming
service is absent, a VCT will be created for the outgoing Service. Default
values will then be used for all parameters set to Transparent.
Follow Input Presence: the VCT of the incoming service will be passed to
the outgoing service. The parameters of the outgoing table are
determined by the values of the following parameters. No VCT will be
provided for the outgoing service if the VCT for the incoming service is
absent.
400 4011746 Rev W

Block: the VCT for the service is blocked.

Short Name: the short name of the virtual channel
Long Name: the long name of the virtual channel
Channel Number: the major and minor channel number. The major channel
number gives the highest order digits of the channel number and the minor
channel number the lowest digits. Both parameters can be set between 1 and 99.
Modulation Mode: the modulation used to transmit individual channels.
Possible values are: Transparent, Analog, QAM64, QAM256, VSB8, or VSB16
Access Controlled: determines if events associated with the virtual channel may
be access controlled or not. Possible values are: Transparent, Yes, or No.
Hidden: determines if the channel can be accessed or not by direct entry of the
virtual channel number. Possible values are: Transparent, Yes, or No.
Hide Guide: determines if the virtual channel and its events may appear or not
in EPG displays. Possible values are: Transparent, Yes, or No.
Service Type: identifies the type of service set in the virtual channel. Possible
values are: Transparent, Analog, Digital Television, Digital Audio, or Digital Data.
Source ID: identifies the programming source associated with the virtual
channel.
Path Select (CVCT only): associates a virtual channel with a transmission path of
an active channel. Possible values are: Transparent, Yes, or No.
Out of Band (CVCT only): determines if the virtual channel is carried on the
out-of-band physical transmission channel or carried within a tuned multiplex.
Possible values are: Transparent, Yes, or No.
ETM Location: indicates the existence and location of an Extended Text Message
(ETM) for the virtual channel. Possible values are: Transparent, No ETM, Internal
ETM, or External ETM.
ETM: determines the extended text message in the ETT-V table.
Note: When a parameter is set to Transparent, the corresponding value will be copied
from the incoming section.
To Modify the TVCT or CVCT

The following procedure describes how to change TVCT or CVCT.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which the TVCT
must be changed.
4011746 Rev W 401


4 Click on the SI Components tab that appears after clicking on the Component
link.
5 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column of the
TVCT or CVCT table entry.
Result: The Service - Component - PSIP-TVCT or PSIP - CVCT sub page is
displayed.
6 In the Service drop down box, select the service for which the TVCT or CVCT
table section must be modified.
Result: The TVCT or CVCT Settings and ETM table for the selected service are
displayed.
7 Under the TVCT or CVCT Settings, modify the following parameters if
required:
a Tick the desired VCT output mode: Follow Input Presence, Block, or Force
Output.
b Tick the Short Name check box to rename the channel and enter the new
name in the Short Name box.
c Set the Long Name check box to rename the channel and enter the new name
in the Long Name box.
402 4011746 Rev W

d To change the major and minor channel number, tick the Channel Number
check box and enter the major number in the left hand Channel Number box
and the minor number in the right hand Channel Number box.
e In the Modulation Mode drop down box, select Transparent, Analog, QAM64
(CVCT only), QAM256 (CVCT only), VSB8 (TVCT only), or (TVCT only)
VSB16.
f In the ETM Location drop down box, select Transparent, No ETM, Internal
ETM, or External ETM.
g In the Access Controlled drop down box, select Transparent, Yes, or No.
h In the Hidden drop down box, select Transparent, Yes, or No.
i In the Hide Guide drop down box, select Transparent, Yes, or No.
j In the Service Type box, select Transparent, Analog, Digital Television, Digital
Audio, or Digital Data.
k Tick the Source ID check box and enter the new identifier in the Source ID
box.
l In the Path Select drop down box, select Transparent, Yes, or No.
m In the Out of Band drop down box, select Transparent, Yes, or No.
8 Under the ETM settings tick the check box if the extended text message must be
forced and enter the ETM in the corresponding box.
Abort the operation.
Adding a Service Location Descriptor to a VCT

The following procedure explains how to add a service location descriptor to a
CVCT or TVCT.
Note: Adding a service location descriptor to a VCT affects all services of the
corresponding outgoing Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which a service
location descriptor must be added to or removed from a VCT.
4011746 Rev W 403


link.
5 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column of the
TVCT or CVCT table entry.
Result: The Service - Component - PSIP-TVCT or PSIP - CVCT sub page is
displayed.
6 Under the CVCT TS Settings or TVCT TS Settings, tick the Add Service
Location Descriptor check box.
Tip: When the VCT table is transparently passed to the outgoing Transport
Stream and the Add Service Location Descriptor check box is not set, the
adapted service location descriptor from the incoming VCT will be added.
When the Add Service Location Descriptor check box is ticked, all services will
have the descriptor.
Modifying the STT

Introduction
To allow determining the correct time by the receiver/decoder, the STT table
provides the current GPS time, the GPS UTC offset, which defines the offset between
GPS and UTC time standards, and information needed to negotiate daylight savings
time. This information is derived from the time zone.
Modifying the GPS UTC Offset

The following procedure describes how to modify the GPS UTC offset parameter for
a particular interface card.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link.
GPS UTC offset parameter must be changed.
displayed.
404 4011746 Rev W

Result: The SI Table tab page containing the Default Settings is displayed.
5 In the GPS UTC Offset box, enter the GPS UTC Offset (in seconds) for the
selected interface card.
Changing the Time Zone

The following procedure describes how to change the Time Zone.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which the time
zone for the STT table must be changed.
link.
5 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column of the STT
table entry.
Result: The Service - TS Output - PSIP-STT sub page is displayed containing
the Time Zone settings.
6 In the Time Zone drop down box, select the desired time zone or select Follow
Device Time Zone if the time zone of the device should be used.
4011746 Rev W 405

Changing the Start PID of the EIT/ETT Tables

The procedure below describes how to change the start PID for the ATSC EIT and
ETT tables and how to change the PID of the ETT-V table.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which the start
PID of the EIT tables must be changed.
6 Under the TS SI Settings, modify the following settings if required.
a In the EIT Start PID box, enter the PID value for table EIT 0. Table EIT 1, 2...
get consecutive PID values.
b In the ETT Start PID box, enter the PID value for table ETT 0. Table ETT 1,
2... get consecutive PID values.
c In the ETT-V PID box, enter the PID value for the ETT-V table.
Tip: When these parameters for most of the newly created Transport Streams
should be set to the same values, it is advisable to change its default value. The
procedure to change this default value can be found in following topic.
Note: Changing the EIT Start PID and/or ETT Start PID is not a forcing setting. For
all needed components a free PID starting from the free start PID is allocated.
406 4011746 Rev W

Changing the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Settings for Newly Created Transport Streams

Transport Streams
During the creation process of outgoing Transport Streams, particular PSI/SI/PSIP
related settings are filled in with default values. When most of the desired settings
differ from the default values, it is recommended to change the default values. The
following procedure describes how to change the default PSI/SI/PSIP settings for
newly created Transport Streams.
default PSI/SI settings should be changed.
displayed.
Result: The SI Table tab page containing the Default SI Table Playout and
Default Settings table is displayed.
5 In the Generation column of the Default SI Table playout table, select the
desired mode for the corresponding table.
4011746 Rev W 407

6 Modify the following parameters under the Default Settings:
a In the NIT in PAT Mode drop down box, select one of the following values:
– Enabled: The Network PID will always be inserted, even when the NITa
is not present.
– Disabled: No Network PID will be inserted.
– Automatic: The Network PID will be inserted when the NITa is not
blocked.
b In the EIT Start PID box, enter the default PID value for table EIT 0. Table
EIT 1, 2... get consecutive PID values as far as they are available.
c In the ETT Start PID box, enter the default PID value for table ETT 0. Table
ETT 1, 2... get consecutive PID values as far as they are available.
d In the ETT-V PID box, enter the PID value for the ETT-V table.
e In the PSIP-EIT Generation drop down box, select one of the following
options.
– Generate PSIP-EIT - First 3 hours: the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode
parameter for EIT sub tables for the first 3 hours is by default set to
Generate.
Generate.
Generate.
– Generate PSIP-EIT - First Day: the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode parameter
for EIT sub tables for the first day is by default set to Generate.
– Generate PSIP-EIT - First week: the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode
parameter for EIT sub tables for the first week is by default set to
Generate.
– Generate PSIP-EIT - All: the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode parameter for all
EIT sub tables is by default set to Generate.
– Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - First 3 hours: the PSI/SI/PSIP output
mode parameter for EIT and ETT sub tables for the first 3 hours is by
default set to Generate.
408 4011746 Rev W

Changing the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Settings for Newly Created Transport Streams

– Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - First Day: the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode
parameter for EIT and ETT sub tables for the first day is by default set to
Generate.
– Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - First week: the PSI/SI/PSIP output
mode parameter for EIT and ETT sub tables for the first week is by
– Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - All: the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode
parameter for all EIT and ETT sub tables is by default set to Generate.
– Stop All PSIP-EIT: the PSI/SI/PSIP output mode parameter for all EIT
sub tables is by default set to Stop.
f In the Motorola PSI drop down box, select Pass to pass Motorola PSI or
Block to block this information.
4011746 Rev W 409

Exporting PSI/SI
Introduction
PSI/SI from an incoming or outgoing Transport Stream can be exported to the hard
disk of your PC. This information can then be opened by using ROSA's SI Editor
Task.
Notes:
DCM with software package version 7.5 allows exporting the information of the
incoming and outgoing PAT, CAT, PMT, NITa, NITo, SDTa, SDTo, EITa/o
present/following, EITa/o schedule, BAT, TDT, TOT, and AIT.
AIT tables which are passed from the input can not be exported.
PSI/SI can be created or edited by ROSA's SI Editor task, importing this information
into the DCM can be done by ROSA's SI Distributor task.
Note: When a PMT is imported for an outgoing Transport Stream and the associated
service is not present in this Transport Stream, this PMT will be played out. This
PMT will be handled as a TS component and can't be edited. This can be useful to
create an outgoing Transport Stream by passing individual service components to
the outgoing Transport Stream (passed to the unreferenced PID node) and importing
the required PSI. No advanced processing (like transrating, scrambling...) can be
done to such Transport Stream.
To Export PSI/SI from Incoming Transport Streams

Perform the following steps to export PSI from incoming Transport Streams.
service information must be exported.
Result: The Service - Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the SI View link.
Result: The Service - SI View sub page of the selected incoming Transport
5 In the Table drop down box, select the table for which information must be
exported.
410 4011746 Rev W

Exporting PSI/SI
6 For a PMT, select the service in the Service drop down box.
7 Point to the Export to File command button.

8 Point to the Save command button.
Note: Some tables (for instance PAT, CAT, PMT) are immediately added to the tree.
Other tables will get the status Pending. Pressing the Reload command button
change the status to Loaded (success) or Not Found (failure).
To Export PSI/SI from Outgoing Transport Streams

The following procedure explains how to export PSI/SI from an outgoing Transport
Stream.
Result: The Service - Tree View page is displayed.
PSI/SI information must be exported.
4011746 Rev W 411

displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the SI components tab.
Result: The SI components tab page is displayed.
of the table that must be exported.
7 Point to the Export command button.
412 4011746 Rev W

Section G Changing Service Parameters
Introduction
This section describes how to change the settings of outgoing services.
In this section
Introduction ................................................................................................. 414
To Check the Service Routings for a Particular Outgoing
Transport Stream ........................................................................................ 415
To Change the Settings of Outgoing Services......................................... 417
Determining the PCR for an Outgoing Service ...................................... 419
Delaying Service Components.................................................................. 423
To Change Scrambling Settings of Outgoing Services .......................... 428
To Change Transrating Specific Parameters of Outgoing
Services......................................................................................................... 430
To Change DPI Settings for Outgoing Services...................................... 433
4011746 Rev W 413

Introduction
The settings of outgoing services are categorized on the Service - Service sub page
by using following tab pages:
Routing tab page: This tab page shows the service routing of an outgoing
Transport Stream. This page can also be used for deleting services from an
outgoing Transport Stream (see topic Removing Services from an Outgoing
Transport Stream on page 450).
Settings tab page: This tab page can be used to change the service identifier
(SID), service name and/or service definition parameter (SD or HD) of services
belonging to a particular outgoing Transport Stream.
Scrambling tab page: This tab page can be used to configure the scrambling
specific parameters of services belonging to an outgoing Transport Stream. For
more information about scrambling, please refer to chapter Scrambling on page
573.
TR / Clips / Delay tab page: This tab page can be used to configure the
transrating specific parameters and the PID sync delay parameters of services
belonging to an outgoing Transport Stream. More information about
transrating can be found in chapter Transrating on page 463.
DPI tab page: This tab page can be used to configure Splicing Channels for
services of an outgoing Transport Stream. For more information about Digital
Program Insertion, please refer to chapter Digital Program Insertion on page 505.
Note: The Routing, Setting, and Scrambling tab page can also be used for adding
preconfigured services to an outgoing Transport Stream. More information
concerning preconfiguring services can be found in topic Preconfiguring Services on
page 255.
414 4011746 Rev W

To Check the Service Routings for a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream
To Check the Service Routings for a Particular Outgoing

Transport Stream
The following procedure describes how to check service routings for an outgoing
Transport Stream.
appears after clicking the Service link.
service settings must be checked.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Routings tab.
Result: The Routings tab page containing the Service Routing table is displayed.
The Service Routing table provides the following information.

Output - SID: the service identifier (SID) of the outgoing service. The SID of
an outgoing service is by default equal to the SID of the incoming service.
When two incoming services with same SID are passed to the output, one of
the outgoing services gets a new unique SID.
Output - Name: the name of the outgoing service. The name of an outgoing
service is by default equal to the name of the incoming service.
Input -Card: the interface card of the incoming Transport Stream to which
the service belongs to
Input -Port: the port of the incoming Transport Stream to which the service
belongs to
Input -IP Address: the IP address of the destination device
Input -UDP Port: the UDP port number of the destination device
4011746 Rev W 415

Input -ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service belongs to
Input -TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
Input -SID: Service Identifier of the incoming service
Input -Name: Name of the incoming service
Input - Backup: Link to the Backup Services sub page
416 4011746 Rev W

To Change the Settings of Outgoing Services
To Change the Settings of Outgoing Services

The following procedure explains how to change the service identifier (SID), service
name and/or service definition parameter (SD or HD) of a particular outgoing
service.
service settings must be changed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Settings tab.
Result: The Settings tab page is displayed.
6 In the Service Settings table, modify the following settings if required.
a In the Forced SID column, tick the check box of the row of the service for
which the SID must be modified and enter the new SID in the corresponding
box.
b In the Forced Name column, tick the check box of the row of the service for
which the name must be modified and enter the new name in the
corresponding box.
c In the SD/HD drop down box of the corresponding row, select the definition
of the service.
d In the Streaming column, tick the check box to activate streaming or clear the
check box to stop streaming of the corresponding service.
4011746 Rev W 417

Tip: For more information concerning activating and stopping streaming of a

particular outgoing service, please refer to topic Activating or Stopping
Streaming of Outgoing Services on page 444.
Tips:
Pressing the arrow in the PMT column opens a sub page containing the
corresponding table information of the service.
The Merged column indicates if a service is merged into the outgoing service.
When a service is merged, Yes with an arrow appears in the Merged column of
the corresponding service row. Pressing this arrow opens the Service - Service
- Merge Detail sub page. For more information about merged services, please
refer to topic Merging Components on page 277.
Note: After clearing the Forced SID check box, the service will not be remapped to
its original value, you have to change the SID manually as described in the
procedure above.
418 4011746 Rev W

Determining the PCR for an Outgoing Service

Introduction
For an outgoing service (virtual or regular services) a PCR PID value can be
specified that will be used in the generated PMT. An incoming PCR PID can be
specified or a dummy PCR (PCR PID without source PID reference) can be
configured.
Important:
Configuring a dummy PCR means that only the reference to that PCR value will
be updated in the PMT, no PCR packets will be generated.
If the PID of the PCR is already occupied by another component, the PCR will
get another PID value.
To Determine the PCR for an Outgoing Service

The following steps describe how to determine the PCR for an outgoing service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service for which the PCR
must be determined.
3 Double-click on this service or right-click on this service and point to Settings in
the short-cut menu.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Service link.
6 In the Service Routing table, click on the Adv Routing arrow of the
Result: The Routing tab page of the Service - Alternates page is displayed.
7 Point to the Settings tab page.
Result: The Alternate Service PCR Settings table is displayed.
8 Tick the Enable check box of the corresponding service.
4011746 Rev W 419

9 Point to the PCR box ( ).

Result: The following popup dialog is displayed.
Note: The No Input check box must not be set.

10 In the Input Selection - Card drop down box, select the card to which the
incoming PCR belongs to.
11 In the Input Selection - Port drop down box, select the port that receives this
PCR.
12 In the Input Selection - Type drop down box, select the input port type.
13 In the Input Selection - IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which
the source device streams.
Note: The Input Selection - IP Address parameter is only applicable if the Input
Selection - Type parameter is set to GbE Multicast.
14 In the Input Selection - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the port of
the incoming Transport Stream to which the PCR belongs to.
Note: The Input Selection - UDP Port parameter is not applicable if the PCR
belongs to an ASI input port.
15 In the Input Selection - PID box, enter the PID of the PRC.
420 4011746 Rev W

Adding a Dummy PCR to an Outgoing Service

The following steps describes how to add a dummy PCR to a service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service for which a dummy
PCR must be created.
the short-cut menu.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Service link.
6 In the Service Routing table, click on the Adv Routing arrow of the

4011746 Rev W 421

10 Tick the No Input check box.

11 Under the Output Selection settings, enter a PID for the PCR in the Preferred
PID box.
422 4011746 Rev W

Delaying Service Components

Introduction
The PID Sync Delay feature of the DCM allows synchronizing of components within
a particular outgoing service by automatically synchronizing all (indicated)
components to the same time base (same PCR) and additionally delaying these
components with a given value.
With the PID Sync Delay feature components within an outgoing service can
additionally be delayed up to 10000 milli-seconds.
The PID Sync Delay feature is license based, meaning each component that is
delayed needs one PID_SYNC license. More information concerning licenses can be
found in topic Licensing on page 49.
Important: The PID Sync Delay feature must be used in combination with merged
services if the components of the incoming services have another PCR.
Note: The PID Sync Delay feature can not be used on outgoing services participating
into Transrating or DPI applications.
Example 1
When the video (and audio) components of a service containing video, audio, and
data components are transcoded by a simple decoding/encoding process, only the
video (and audio) is processed, no data components. When this transcoded video
(and audio) and data components are offered to the DCM and merged into one
outgoing service, the video (and audio) and data are asynchronous due to the delay
that arises during the transcoding process and the other time clocks (PCRs) used in
the encoder.
Transcoding DCM
A / V / Data A/V A/V
Decoder Encoder A / V / Data
a
A / V / Data D at
lay
+ de A = audio
V = video
The video (and audio) and data can then be synchronized by delaying the data (and
audio) and automatically shifting the time stamps (PTSs/DTSs) to the same time
base (PCR) of the video.
4011746 Rev W 423

Example 2
When audio streams of a service are processed separately from the video/data
streams, a delay arises between both streams.
Merged Service
PCR 1
Main service V1
Service A1
PCR 1 (V 2)
V1 merging
A2
A1 PCR 2
(V 3)
A3
PCR 3
Audio
processing
1
Audio
processing
2
If the audio streams are merged into the main service and supplied downstream, a
delay must be given to the video/data streams and the PTSs of the audio streams
must be modified so that they are again in sync with the video/audio streams. To
deal with this, two PID Sync Delay groups must be created:
one PID Sync Delay group containing the video/data streams with a PID Sync
Delay matching the processing time of the audio streams
a second group containing the audio streams for updating the PTSs. The PID
Sync Delay of this group must be set to 0.
424 4011746 Rev W

Example 3
When audio streams of a main service must be replaced by audio streams from local
services, the local services must be merged in the outgoing main service. The audio
services have their own PCR which is different from the video service, meaning
delaying the audio services is not required but their PTSs need to be changed.
Main service Merged Service

PCR 1 Service PCR 1
V 1-1 merging V 1- 1
A 1-1 (A 1-1)
A 1-2 (A 1-2)
A 2-1
A 3-1
Audio service
PCR 2
A 2-1
Audio service
PCR 3
A 3-1
The audio streams of the local services can be synchronized with the video PCR of
the main service by adding both audio streams to a PID Sync Delay group with a
delay value equal to 0. When both audio streams have different delays, groups
must be created for both streams and provided with the corresponding delay value.
Adding PID Sync Delay Groups

The following procedure describes how to add a PID Sync Delay group.
the service for which a PID Sync Delay group must be added.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the TR / Clips / Delay tab.
Result: The TR / Clips / Delay tab page is displayed.
6 In the Transrated Services Settings table, point to delay arrow of the service for
which components must be delayed.
Result: The Service Component Settings and PID Sync Delay table are
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 425

Tip: The Service Component Settings table shows all components of the
selected service.
7 Click on the Add Row command button below the PID Sync Delay table.
Result: An empty PID Sync Delay group entry is added to the PID Sync Delay
table.
8 In the Delay (ms) box, enter the delay that must be added to the service
component(s). A value between 0 and 10000 ms can be given.
9 In the PID List box, enter the PID(s) of the component(s) that must be delayed.
Multiple PIDs must be separated by a comma.
Deleting PID Sync Delay Groups

The following steps describe how to delete PID Sync Delay groups.
the service from which PID Sync Delay groups must be removed.
426 4011746 Rev W

6 In the PID Sync Delay table, tick the check box preceding each PID Sync Delay
group that must be removed.

Result: The selected group(s) is (are) removed from the PID Sync Delay table.
4011746 Rev W 427

To Change Scrambling Settings of Outgoing Services

This topic describes how to modify the scrambling specific parameters for an
outgoing service. These parameters are:
Scrambling parameter
Before a service or components within a service can be scrambled, the scrambling
parameter of the service must be set to Scrambled Allowed. Each service of
which the Scrambling parameter is set to Scrambling Allowed occupies one
Scrambling license.
Block CA Info parameter
For each service the Conditional Access information can be blocked. Blocking
CA information involves:
- removing all CA descriptors from the PMT
- removing CA_identifier descriptors from the SDT sub table
- removing CA_identifier descriptors from the EIT sub tables
- clearing the free_ca_mode bit in the EIT
- blocking the corresponding ECM components
The steps below explain how to change scrambling parameters of services belonging
to a particular outgoing Transport Stream.
scrambling specific service settings must be changed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Scrambling tab.
Result: The Scrambling tab is displayed.
428 4011746 Rev W

To Change Scrambling Settings of Outgoing Services
6 In the Scrambling Settings table, modify the following settings if required.
a In the Scrambling drop down box, select one of the following settings:
– Scrambling allowed: scrambling is allowed for the service or for
components belonging to the service.
– No Scrambling: scrambling is not allowed for the service or for
components belonging to the service.
Note: The Scrambling drop down box is only applicable if the interface card
of the outgoing Transport Stream to which the service is passed is provided
with a Co-Processor Card.
b In the Block CA Info column, tick the check box if CA info must be blocked.
Tip: For more information concerning scrambling, please refer to chapter Scrambling
on page 573.
4011746 Rev W 429

To Change Transrating Specific Parameters of Outgoing

Services
The following steps explain how to configure the transrating parameters of a service.
transrating specific service settings must be changed.
6 In the Transrated Services Settings table, modify the following parameters if
required.
Tips:
The Transrated Services Settings table contains all services of an outgoing
Transport Stream.
– When the outgoing Transport stream is provided with multiple
Transrating Groups, the Transrating Group to which the service belongs
to, are shown in the TR Group Name column.
– The Transrating settings are not applicable if the services do not belong to
a Transrating Group.
The services in the Transrating Services Settings table are indicated by their
SID and name.
430 4011746 Rev W

To Change Transrating Specific Parameters of Outgoing Services
a In the Rate Control drop down box, select one of the following settings:
– Stat Muxed: the service participates in the Statistical Re-multiplexing
group of the Transrating Group and will be transrated if necessary.
– Rate Limited: the service will be transrated with a maximum rate limit.
– Pass Through: no transrating will be performed on this service, only
delayed.
b In the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the minimum bit rate for this service.
Note: The Min Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter is only applicable when the Rate
Control parameter is set to Stat Muxed.
c In the Max Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum bit rate for this service.
Note: The Max Bit Rate (Mbps) is not applicable when the Rate Control
parameter is set to Pass Through.
d In the Priority box, enter the priority setting for the service. The priority
parameter can be set between 0 (low) and 10 (high) and the default value is 5
(normal).
7 Continue adapting more services or press the Apply command button to confirm
or the Reload command button to abort the operation.
Note: Both the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) and Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameters take only
the video component within the service into account.
Tips:
When particular parameters of all services of a Transrating Group must be
changed to similar values, the Update All function of the web browser user
interface can be used. The following steps describe how to use this function.
a Under the Update All settings, enter or select the desired value in the box of
the parameter that should be changed for all services of this Transrating
Group.

Result: The settings are changed in the Transrating Group Settings table.
Note: Particular values in the Transrating Group Settings table can still be
changed if necessary.
4011746 Rev W 431

For more information concerning transrating, please refer to chapter Transrating

on page 463.
432 4011746 Rev W

To Change DPI Settings for Outgoing Services

The following procedure explains how to configure Splicing Channels for services
belonging to an outgoing Transport Stream.
Tip: More information about Digital Program Insertion can be found in chapter
Digital Program Insertion on page 505.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream, which
includes the service that must be configured for DPI.
Result: The Service - TS Settings of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the DPI tab.
Result: The DPI tab page is displayed.
6 In the DPI Settings table, complete the following settings to set up a Splicing
Channel for a particular service.
Tip: The DPI Settings table containing a particular service can also be displayed
by double-clicking the service or by right-clicking the service and pointing to
Settings, and clicking on the DPI tab.
Note: The services in the DPI Settings table are labeled with their Service
Identifier (Primary Channel - SID) and name (Primary Channel - Name).
a Set the Primary Channel - Enable check box to define a Splicing Channel for
this service.
b In the Output Channel - Name box of the service in question, enter a name to
identify the Splicing Channel.
Note: When the splicing events for this channel are triggered by an
AD-Server, the name entered in the Output Channel - Name box must match
the name given by the AD-Server.
c Point to the Mode box ( ).
4011746 Rev W 433

Result: The Mode popup dialog is displayed.
i In the DPI Modes table, set or clear the check boxes of the following
modes:
Off: DPI is switched off.
SCTE-30 / 35: splicing events are triggered by an AD-Server.
SCTE-35 Only: splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion device.
Manual: splicing events are triggered via the web browser user
interface of the DCM.
GPIO: splicing events are triggered via the GPIO contacts of the
device.
Note: Not all combinations can be made. When a check box is selected
for a mode that can't be combined with an already selected mode, this
already selected mode will be disabled.
ii Tick the Custom PID Mapping check box to enable or clear this check
box to disable this feature.
iii When a splicing event is triggered using the GPIO contacts, select the pin
configuration for triggering a Primary to Insertion Channel substitution in
the To Insertion drop down box and the pin configuration for triggering
an Insertion to Primary Channel substitution in the To Main drop down
box. The procedure to create pin configurations can be found in topic
Configuring the GPIO Contacts on page 80.
Note: After opening or closing a GPIO contact to trigger a substitution, it
take some time (processing time) before the substitution will be executed
(± 3000 ms). To achieve a very accurate splicing, a delay can be giving in
the Splice Delay (ms) box to cover this processing time.
434 4011746 Rev W

iv Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command

Result: The abbreviations of the chosen settings are displayed in the Output
Channel - Mode box ( ).
d Point to the Output Channel - Options box ( ).
Result: The Options popup dialog is displayed.
i In the PMT Mode drop down box, select one of the following values.
Follow Insertion (FI): During a splicing event the PMT fragments for
the spliced components in the PMT of the Output Channel are taken
from the PMT of the Insertion Channel.
Follow Primary (FP): During a splicing event the PMT fragments for
the spliced components in the PMT of the Output Channel are taken
from the PMT of the Primary Channel.
Note: The PMT Mode drop down box is not applicable if the Output
Channel - Mode parameter is set to SCTE-30 / 35.
ii Set the Add Unspliced Insertion PIDs (AP) selection box to pass
components from the Insertion Channel, that do not match components of
the Primary Channel, to the Output Channel after a Primary to Insertion
Channel substitution. Switching on this feature is typically used in for
instance ETV applications.
Note: The Add Unspliced Insertion PIDs (AP) selection box is only
applicable if the Output Channel - Mode parameter is set to SCTE-30 /
35.
iii Set the Clear PID Bit Rates (CPBR) selection box to clear the bit rates of
the components of the Primary channel that are not matched with a
component of the Insertion Channel.
Note: The Clear PID Bit Rates (CPBR) selection box is not applicable if
the Custom PID Mapping feature is enabled.
Channel - Options box ( ).
e Point to the Insertion Channel - Input box ( ).
4011746 Rev W 435

Result: The Input Selection popup is displayed.
Note: The Insertion Channel parameters are not applicable if splicing events
are triggered by an AD-Server (Output Channel - Mode = SCTE-30 / 35).
i In the Insertion Channel - Card drop down box, select the card to which
the port of the incoming Insertion Channel belongs.
ii In the Insertion Channel - Port drop down box, enter the number of the
port to which the incoming Insertion Channel belongs.
iii In the Insertion Channel - Type drop down box, select the input port
type.
iv In the Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address box, enter the multicast
IP address to which the source device streams.
Note: The Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address parameter is only
applicable if the Insertion Channel - Type parameter is set to GbE
Multicast.
v In the Insertion Channel - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of
the port of the incoming Transport Stream to which the Insertion Channel
belongs to.
Note: The Insertion Channel - UDP Port parameter is not applicable if
the Insertion Channel belongs to an ASI input port.
vi In the Insertion Channel - SID box, enter the service identifier of the
Insertion Channel.
vii Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command
Result: The chosen settings are displayed in the Insertion Channel - Input
box ( ).
436 4011746 Rev W

Notes:
When the Custom PID Mapping feature is enabled the sub page to define custom
PID mapping entries can be accessed by pressing the arrow that appears in the
PIDs column. More information about custom PID mapping can be found in
topic Defining Custom DPI Mapping Entries on page 531.
As soon as a Splicing Channel is defined for a service (Primary Channel check box
is set) one or two DPI licenses, depending on the service definition (SD or HD), is
(are) consumed. The availability of DPI licenses for the Splicing Channel is
shown in the License column.
The Status column represents the status of the Splicing Channel: Primary or
Insertion.
When the Insertion Channel is present at the input, the Service Name of the
Insertion Channel together with the Original Network identifier (ON-ID) and
Transport Stream Identifier (TS-ID) of the Transport Stream containing the
Insertion Channel is displayed in the Info box.
When an Insertion Channel is defined for a particular output channel and the
Transport Stream containing the Insertion Channel is not yet present at the GbE
port, a Transport Stream reservation is created.
After entering the Apply command button, all Splicing Channels with Output
Channel - Mode equal to Manual are added to the DPI Start/Stop table.
Tips: Splicing Channels can also be configured via SNMP using the
4011746 Rev W 437

Section H Activating or Stopping Streaming
Introduction
This section describes how to start and how to stop streaming.
In this section
Activating or Stopping Streaming of Outgoing Transport
Streams ......................................................................................................... 440
Activating or Stopping Streaming of Outgoing Services ...................... 444
4011746 Rev W 439

Activating or Stopping Streaming of Outgoing Transport

Streams
Introduction
Once outgoing Transport Streams are created and configured properly, streaming of
the Transport Stream should be activated. The procedures to activate and to stop
streaming using the web browser user interface of the DCM are described in the
following sub topics. Streaming can also be activated or stopped by executing
macros via ROSA®'s Macro Component. For more information please refer to topic
Using DCM Macros on page 939.
Note: The ease with which streaming of Transport Streams can be activated and
stopped can lead to accidentally stopping streaming. To protect the application
from accidentally stopping streaming, an additional confirmation can be asked.
The procedure to enable or disable this confirmation feature can be found in topic
Changing Tree Settings on page 164.
To Activate a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream

The following steps explain how to activate streaming of an outgoing Transport
Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream that must be
activated.
440 4011746 Rev W

Activating or Stopping Streaming of Outgoing Transport Streams
3 Right-click on the Transport Stream and select Activate Streaming in the

short-cut menu.
Result: Streaming is activated for the selected Transport Stream.
To Activate All Outgoing Transport Streams on a Port

The following steps explain how to activate streaming of all outgoing Transport
Streams on a port.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the port for which all outgoing
Transport Streams must be activated and select Start Streaming all TS's in the
short-cut menu.
Result: Streaming is activated for all Transport Stream on the selected port.
4011746 Rev W 441

To Stop a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream

The following steps explain how to stop streaming of an outgoing Transport Stream.
Result: The Service Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream that must be stopped.
3 Right-click on this Transport Stream and select Stop Streaming in the short-cut
menu.
Result: When the confirmation feature is switched on, the following


To Stop all Outgoing Transport Streams on a Port

The following steps explain how to stop streaming of all outgoing Transport Streams
on a port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Service link.
Result: The Service page is displayed.
442 4011746 Rev W

Activating or Stopping Streaming of Outgoing Transport Streams
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the port for which all outgoing
Transport Streams must be stopped and select Stop Streaming all TS's in the
short-cut menu.
Result: When the confirmation feature is switched on, the following


4011746 Rev W 443

Activating or Stopping Streaming of Outgoing Services

Introduction
For maintenance or trouble shooting purposes it can be useful to stop streaming a
service in an outgoing Transport Stream. Once the necessary work on the service is
done, streaming of the service can be activated again with all its previously applied
settings.
Activating or Stopping Streaming via the DCM Outputs Tree

Stopping Streaming of an Outgoing Service
The following steps explain how to stop streaming of an outgoing service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the service for which streaming must be
stopped.
3 Right-click on the service and select Stop Streaming in the short-cut menu.
Result: Streaming is stopped for the selected service.
444 4011746 Rev W

Activating Streaming of an Outgoing Service

The following steps explain how to activate streaming of an outgoing service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the service that must be activated.
3 Right-click on the service and select Activate Streaming in the short-cut menu.
Result: Streaming is activated for the selected service.
Activating or Stopping Streaming via the Service Settings Table

The following steps explain how to activate or to stop streaming of services via the
Service Settings table.
the service(s) for which streaming must be activated or stopped.
4011746 Rev W 445


5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Settings tab.
Result: The Settings tab page is displayed.
6 In the Service Settings table, tick or clear the Streaming check box of the
service(s) for which streaming must be activated or stopped.
Modifying the Default Value of the Streaming Parameter for Outgoing

Services
Perform the following steps to change the default value of the Streaming parameter
for the outgoing services on a particular interface card.
default value of the Streaming parameter of the outgoing services must be
changed.
displayed.
446 4011746 Rev W

5 Under the Default Output Service Settings, tick or clear the Streaming check
box.
4011746 Rev W 447

Section I Removing Outgoing Services and
Transport Streams
Introduction
This section describes how to remove services or transport streams
from the output.
In this section
Removing Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream ..................... 450
Removing Outgoing Transport Streams.................................................. 454
4011746 Rev W 449

Removing Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream

Introduction
Depending on the number of services that must be removed from an outgoing
Transport Stream, three different methods can be used:
Removing individual services
Removing a number of services
Removing all services
Note: Services can also be removed from an outgoing Transport Stream using
ROSA's Macro Component. More information about macro's can be found in topic
Using DCM Macros on page 939.
To Remove Individual Services

The following procedure explains how to remove individual services from an
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the service that must be removed.
3 Right-click on the service in question and select Delete in the short-cut menu.
450 4011746 Rev W

Note: The ease with which services can be removed from the DCM Outputs tree
can lead to accidentally removing of services from the output. To protect the
application from accidentally removing of services, an additional confirmation
can be asked. The procedure to enable or disable this confirmation feature can
be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 164.
When this feature is enabled, the following confirmation box will be displayed
after selecting Delete in the short-cut menu.

cancel the operation.
Result: The service is removed from the outgoing Transport Stream.
Tip: A service can also be removed from an outgoing Transport Stream by dragging
and dropping the service to the wastebasket.
To Remove a Number of Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream

The following steps explain how to remove a number of services from an outgoing
Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which services
must be removed.
4011746 Rev W 451

6 In the Service Routing table, tick the check box, which is located beside the Card
column, of each service that must be removed.
Tips:
header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Services Routing table, tick
the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
Result: The selected services are removed from the outgoing Transport Stream.
To Remove all Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream

Perform the following steps to remove all services from an outgoing Transport
Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which all services
must be removed.
452 4011746 Rev W

3 Right-click on this Transport Stream and select Remove all Services in the
short-cut menu.
Note: The ease with which services can be removed from the DCM Outputs tree
can lead to accidentally removing of services from the output. To protect the
application from accidentally removing of services, an additional confirmation
can be asked. The procedure to enable or disable this confirmation feature can
be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 164.
after selecting Remove all Services in the short-cut menu.

Result: All services are removed from the outgoing Transport Stream.
4011746 Rev W 453

Removing Outgoing Transport Streams

Removing a Particular Transport Stream
Perform the following procedure to remove an outgoing Transport Stream from a
GbE Output.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream that should be
removed.
3 Right-click on this Transport Stream and select Delete in the short-cut menu.
Note: The ease with which Transport Streams can be removed from the DCM
Outputs tree can lead to accidentally removing of Transport Streams from the
output. To protect the application from accidentally removing of services, an
additional confirmation can be asked. The procedure to enable or disable this
confirmation feature can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 164.

454 4011746 Rev W

Removing Outgoing Transport Streams
Result: The Transport Stream is removed from the DCM Outputs tree.
Tip: An outgoing Transport Stream can also be removed from a GbE port by
dragging and dropping the icon of the Transport Stream to the wastebasket.
Note: Removing the outgoing Transport Stream from an ASI output is not possible.
Removing a Number of Transport Streams

The following steps explain how to remove a number of Transport Streams from a
GbE port.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port from which Transport Streams
should be removed.
3 Right-click on this GbE port and point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
Tip: To sort the TS Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending
4 Tick the check box, which is located beside the IP Address column in the TS
Settings table, of each Transport Stream that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the TS Settings table, tick the
check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the
Result: The selected Transport Streams are removed.
4011746 Rev W 455

Section J Viewing Service Grooming
Introduction
This section describes how to display the service grooming overview.
In this section
Introduction ................................................................................................. 458
To View Service Grooming ....................................................................... 461
4011746 Rev W 457

Introduction
The routing made by passing incoming services to outgoing Transport Streams can
easily be checked in the Service Grooming table on the Service - Table View sub
page. The transparently passed through Transport Streams can be found in the
Loop Through TSs table. To reduce the number of items in both tables, the items
can be filtered. The following filters can be used:
Input/Output filter
- Input: shows all services at the input and the routing made to the output.
- Output: shows all services passed to the output.
Card filter
- All: shows the routing made an all interface cards.
- Card x: shows the routing made for the selected interface card.
The following picture shows a Service - Table View sub page.
458 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
In the Service Grooming table, each service is accompanied with following

information.
Input Services
- Card: represents the name of the card that receives the service.
- Port: represents the number of the port receiving the Transport Stream to
which the service belongs to.
- IP Address: represents the destination IP Address of the Transport Stream to
- UDP: represents the destination UDP port of the Transport Stream to which
the service belongs to.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream to
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream to
which the service belongs to. Pressing the TS ID value opens the Service -
TS Input sub page containing the settings of the Transport Stream to which
the service belongs to.
- SID: represents the Service Identifier of the incoming service.
- Name: represents the name of the incoming service.
Processing
- Card: represents the Transcoder Card to which the service is dropped.
- Name: represents the name of the service used by the Transcoder Card.
Output Services
- Card: represents the card to which the service is passed.
- Port: represents the number of the port to which the service is passed.
When the service is passed to a GbE Interface Card, pressing the Port value
opens the Service - TS Output sub page containing the settings of all
outgoing Transport Streams of this port.
- IP Address: represents the IP Address of the destination device to which the
outgoing Transport Stream, the service belongs to, streams.
- UDP: represents the UDP Port of the destination device to which the
Transport Stream, the service belongs to, streams.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the outgoing Transport
Stream to which the service belongs.
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the outgoing Transport
Stream to which the service belongs. Pressing the TS ID value opens the
Service - TS Output sub page containing the settings of the outgoing
4011746 Rev W 459

Transport Stream.
- SID: represents the Service Identifier.
- Name: represents the name of the service.
Transrating
- Name: represents the name of the Transrater Group to which the service
belongs.
- Type: represents the type of the Transrater Group to which the service
belongs.
In the Loop Through TSs table, each Transport Stream is accompanied with
following information.
Input TS
- Card: represents the name of the card receiving the Transport Stream.
- Port: represents the number of the port receiving the Transport Stream.
- IP Address: represents the destination IP address of the incoming Transport
Stream.
- UDP Port: represents the destination UDP port of the incoming Transport
Stream.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream.
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream. Pressing the TS ID value opens the Service - TS Input sub page
containing the settings of the incoming Transport Stream.
Output TS
- Card: represents the name of the card to which the Transport Stream is
passed.
- Port: represents the number of the port to which the Transport Stream is
passed. Pressing the Port value opens the Service - TS Output sub page
containing the settings of all outgoing Transport Streams of this port.
- IP Address: represents the destination IP address of the outgoing Transport
Stream.
- UDP Port: represents the UDP port of the outgoing Transport Stream.
460 4011746 Rev W

To View Service Grooming
To View Service Grooming

Perform the following steps to check and to filter the Service Grooming table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Table View link
after pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Table View sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input/Output drop down box, select the input/output filter.
3 In the Card drop down box, select the card filter.
Note: If an interface card is missing and services are passed from this missing
card, the name of this missing card is replaced in the drop down box by Card X
(not present) with X the slot position of the missing card.
Tip: To sort the Service Grooming table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order
4011746 Rev W 461

5 Chapter 5
Transrating
Introduction
The DCM can be provided with a Transrating option. This chapter
gives a brief description about Transrating and the procedures to set
up the DCM for transrating purposes.
In this Chapter
Introduction ................................................................................................. 464
Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams...................................... 468
Single Program Transport Stream Transrating ...................................... 484
Transrating Examples ................................................................................ 500
4011746 Rev W 463

Chapter 5 Transrating
Introduction
General
The transrating option of the DCM allows rate shaping for bandwidth capacity
optimization purposes, like re-compression to lower bit rates of individual services,
open loop statistical re-multiplexing...
The Co-Processor Card, used for advanced digital processing, optimizes the
bandwidth capacity for the outgoing Transport Stream of the interface card on
which the Co-Processor Card is plugged.
The Transrating option of the DCM is on a per license basis, each transrated service
needs one or more Transrating Licenses depending on the service definition. A
transrated SD service takes one Transrating License and a HD service takes four
licenses.
Applications
The DCM with transrating option is applicable in many applications; some of these
applications are described in the following list:
Re-Compressing of Services and Transport Streams: In order to target the bit
rate of a Transport Stream in which the chosen modulation scheme fits, services
can be re-compressed. Re-compressing of Transport Streams or groups of
services within a Transport Stream can be done using Statistical Re-multiplexing
or using Bit Rate Limiting. Re-compressing can also be used to free-up
bandwidth in the Transport Stream for new services like Internet...
Rate Limiting of Single Program Transport Streams: In applications where
video services are distributed over IP, the maximum bit rates of the Single
Program Transport Streams (SPTS) are specified in most situations, for instance
to 3 Mbps in case of DSL applications. To fulfill these specifications, the bit
rates of the individual Transport Streams must be limited.
Transport Stream Bit Rate Overload Protection: The bit rates of incoming
services received from different sources and passed to an outgoing Transport
Stream are not often constantly or not exactly at the agreed specifications. The
DCM with transrating option can be used to ensure the full utilization of the
maximum bandwidth without bit rate overloads.
Note: Only the video part of a service can be transrated. The audio part of a service
containing video or services without video cannot be transrated and are passed
through.
464 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
Bit Rate Limiting

Bit rate limiting is a transrating process on individual services to keep the maximum
bit rate lower than or equal to an adjustable bit rat value. Bit rate limiting can be
done on services with Constant Bite Rate (CBR) or on services with Variable Bit Rate
(VBR). The following diagrams give a graphical representation of bit rate limiting
on a CBR service and on a VBR service.
Bit rate limiting on CBR service
Service with CBR Service with CBR
Bitrate (Mbps)
Bitrate (Mbps)
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
Bit rate limiting on VBR service

Service with VBR Service with VBR
Bitrate (Mbps)
Bitrate (Mbps)
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
Note: If the maximum bit rate for rate limiting is set to a small value, rate limiting a
VBR service may results in a CBR program. In the example above, when the
maximum rate limit is set to for instance 2 Mbps, the service after rate limiting
becomes a CBR service.
Service with VBR Service with CBR
Bitrate (Mbps)
Bitrate (Mbps)
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
When the bit rate of a service does not exceed the maximum bit rate, the service will
not be processed. In this case the bit rate of the outgoing service matches the bit
rate of the incoming service.
4011746 Rev W 465

Statistical Re-multiplexing
Statistical Re-multiplexing is a transrating process keeping the total bit rate of a
group of services under control by reducing the bit rate of individual services
according to the actual needs of these services compared to the other services in the
group. Statistical Re-multiplexing can be used in applications where the total bit
rate of a group of services must be reduced or where the Transport Stream must be
protected against bit rate overflow.
Bit Rate Reduction
When several services must be passed to an outgoing Transport Stream of which
the maximum bit rate is lower that the sum of the bit rates of these services,
statistical re-multiplexing can be done on all services or on a part of these
services. The following illustration shows a graphical representation of bit rate
reduction on a complete Transport Stream using Statistical Re-multiplexing.
Stuffing
30
Bitrate (Mbps)
25
20
15
10
Statistical
Re-Multiplexing
30
Bitrate (Mbps)
25
20
15
10
Statistical Re-Multiplexing can also be used to free up some bandwidth for new
services.
466 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
Bit Rate Overload Protection

When services from different Transport Streams must be aggregated into a new
multiplex and one or more of these services are available with Variable Bit Rate
(VBR), the total bit rate of the outgoing Transport Stream is out of control.
Statistical Re-Multiplexing can be used to protect a Transport Stream against bit
rate overload. The following illustration depicts a graphical representation of a
Statistical Re-multiplexing process on a Transport Stream to keep the total bit
rate under control.
Incoming Transport Stream 1, Incoming Transport Stream 2,
30
Bitrate (Mbps)
Bitrate (Mbps)
25 25
20 20
15 15
10 10
5 5
0 0
MUX
Overflow
30
Maximum bit rate
Bitrate (Mbps)
25 Transport Stream
20
15
10
Statistical
Re-Multiplexing
30
Maximum bit rate
Bitrate (Mbps)
25 Transport Stream
20
15
10
The services which should participate into a transrating process must be added to a
group (called Transrating Group). The bit rate variation of each service in a
Transrating Group can be limited by adding a minimum and a maximum bit rate
limit. Since high quality services require more bandwidth than low quality
services, each service within a Transrating Group can be provided with a priority.
Services with higher priority are allocated more bandwidth than services with lower
priority.
4011746 Rev W 467

Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams

Introduction
Transrating Groups
Services, which should be transrated, must be inserted into a Transrating Group.
Two Transrating Group types can be used for MPTS transrating: the Selective Services
Transrating Group type and the MPTS - all Services Transrating Group type.
Transrating Groups are represented using icons. The following table shows these
group icons:
Icon Description
MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group
Selective Services type Transrating Group
A MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group contains all services within the
outgoing Transport Stream. It is obvious that only one MPTS - all Services type
Transrating Group can be created within a Transport Stream. When an incoming
service is passed to an outgoing Transport Stream containing a MPTS - all Services
type Transrating Group, the service is automatically added to this Transrating
Group.
A Selective Services type Transrating Group is used when not all services of an
outgoing Transport Stream participate into the transrating process or when the
outgoing Transport Stream requires multiple Transrating Groups. The total bit rate
of each individual Selective Services type Transrating Group can be set. It is obvious
that the sum of the individual bit rates can't exceed the total bit rate of the outgoing
Transport Stream. Once a Selective Services type Transrating Group is created, the
services for this Transrating Group must be added.
Notes:
Since transrating gives a small delay to services, a service that doesn't participate
in a transrating process but should be synchronized with a transrated service,
must be added to the transrating group and passed through.
In contrast with MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group which includes all
components, a Selective Services type Transrating Group do not include Transport
Stream components like PAT, CAT, SDT, NIT EMMS... A Selective Services type
Transrating Group with all services of a Transport Stream is not the same as a
MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group.
468 4011746 Rev W

Transrating Mode
Once the Transrating Group(s) are added to a Transport Stream and populated with
services, the transrating mode must be determined for each individual service
belonging to the Transrating Group(s). The DCM device supports three transrating
modes:
Pass Through mode:
The service will be passed through with a particular delay without transrating.
This delay is used to synchronize the service with the transrated services in the
Transrating Group.
Rate Limited mode:
The service will be transrated with a maximum bit rate limit. This maximum bit
rate limit must be entered in the Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter.
Stat Muxed mode:
The service will participate into the statistical multiplexing group of the
Transrating Group. For Statistical Re-multiplexing the following parameters
can be defined:
- Min Bit Rate (Mbps): the lower limit of the bit rate during transrating
- Max Bit Rate (Mbps): the upper limit of the bit rate during transrating
- Priority: Depending on the complexity of the services, the total available bit
rate of the Transrating Group is spread over the services depending on the
complexity of the scenes. The bit rate assigned to a service can be influenced
by giving a particular priority to the service. A higher priority gives a
bigger bit rate share than a lower priority. For example a Sport service
needs more bit rate than a Talk Show service. This Priority parameter can
be set between 0 (low) and 10 (high) and the default value is 5 (normal).
Note: Setting the priority of all services to 10 results in the same distribution
as setting the priority of all services to for instance 9.
4011746 Rev W 469

Transrating Board Settings

Introduction
Video Quality Algorithm Optimization parameter
For transrating the DCM allows using three rate control algorithms: a rate
control algorithm for performance optimization and two algorithms for quality
optimization (Quality and Extended GOP). The Extended GOP rate control
algorithm can be used to eliminate the breathing effect that arises when the GOP
length is more than 0.5 seconds. Compared to Transrating using the Performance
rate control algorithm, transrating using the Quality and Extended GOP rate
control algorithm gives better video quality but slightly decreases the number of
services that can be transrated by a Co-Processor Card.
Transrater delay parameters
The delay that arises during the transrating process is by default 1400 ms
(Standard Coarse Delay mode). Due to this small transrating delay, black
frames might occur during splicing events. These black frames can be
eliminated by using a transrating delay of 1800 ms (Extended Coarse Delay
mode).
For Transport Stream re-synchronization purposes the Predefined Coarse Delay
mode can be used. When the coarse delay mode is set to Predefined, a delay will
be given to all outgoing Transport Streams of the corresponding interface card.
Note: This Predefined Coarse Delay mode can only be used for IP Statmux
application.
The delay use by this mode is determined by the following parameters:
- Frame Rate Delay parameter: frame rate of the incoming video, 25 Hz or 30
Hz
- Input Board Type Delay parameter: interface card receiving the video, ASI
or GbE
- Fine Delay parameter: Low, Normal, or High
The table below shows the transrating delay values for the given parameter
combinations.
Coarse Delay Frame Rate Delay Input Board Type Fine Delay Delay
Mode Delay
Standard n.a. n.a. n.a. 1400 ms
Extended n.a. n.a. n.a. 1800 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI Low 755 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI Normal 1040 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI High 2040 ms
470 4011746 Rev W

Mode Delay
Predefined 25 Hz GbE Low 645 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE Normal 930 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE High 1930 ms
PCR Continuity parameter

keep the PCR continuous. The corresponding service must be member of a
Transrating group and Component tracking rules are required to keep the PCR
values constant.
Important: The PCR continuity feature only works for services that are spliceable
or transrated (Statmux or Rate-Limit). This feature does not work for the
pass-through services that are part of a Transrater group.
Note: Changing the Algorithm Optimization, Transrating delay, and/or PCR
Continuity parameters needs a reboot of the corresponding Co-Processor Card.
Rebooting the Co-processor Card interrupts the outgoing services.
Changing Transrating Board Settings

Perform the following procedure to change transrating board settings.
Co-Processor Card for which transrater board settings should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the TR Board
Settings for the selected interface card is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 471

Note: The TR Board Settings are only available for an interface card populated
with Co-Processor Card.
3 In the Algorithm Optimization drop down box, select the desired rate control
algorithm, Quality, Performance or Extended GOP.
4 In the Coarse Delay drop down box, select the desired mode:
Standard
Extended
Predefined
Note: Before changing the Coarse Delay parameter to Predefined, all Transrating
Groups of the corresponding interface card must be removed.
5 If the Coarse Delay parameter is set to Predefined, modify the following
parameters if required.
a In the Frame Rate Delay drop down box, select the frame rate of the
incoming video 25 Hz or 30 Hz.
b In the Input Board Type Delay drop down box, select the interface card: ASI
or GbE.
c In the Fine Delay drop down box, select the desired value: Low, Normal, or
High.
6 In the PCR Continuity drop down box, select enabled or disabled.
Result: The corresponding Co-Processor Card reboots.
472 4011746 Rev W

Creating a Transrating Group

The following procedure explains how to create a MPTS Transrating Group.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which a
transrating group must be created.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected outgoing Transport
4 In the Service - TS Output sub page, point to the TS/TS tab.
Result: The TS/TS tab page containing the Add New Transrating Group, the
Transrating Group Settings, and the TS Settings is displayed.
5 Perform the following settings under the Add New Transrating Group settings.
a In the Name box, enter a name of maximum 30 characters. A logical name

facilitates the identification of the Transrating Group in the application.
b In the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the total bit rate that can be used by
the transrating group. The total bit rate of a Transrating Group can vary
between 1 and 950 Mbps.
Note:
– The sum of the total bit rates of the Transrating Group(s) and the bit rates
of the services not belonging to a Transrating Group can never exceed the
total bit rate of the outgoing Transport Stream. When the sum is less
than the total bit rate of the Transport Stream, the difference between
both bit rates can then be used further down in the chain.
– For a MPTS - all Services Transrating Group this total bit rate includes the
bitrates of all components within the Transport Stream. For a Selective
Services Transrating Group, Transport Stream level components like PAT,
CAT... are not included.
4011746 Rev W 473

c In the Type drop down box, select the desired Transrating Group type.
– MPTS - all Services: all services of the outgoing Transport Stream are
added to the Transrating Group.
– Selective Services: an empty Transrating Group will be created and the
operator can decide which services must be added to the Transrating
Group. The procedure to add services to a Selective Services type
Transrating Group can be found in topic Adding Services to a Transrating
Group on page 475.
abort the operation
Results:
Transrating Group settings are added to the Transrating Group Settings
table.
Tip: The arrow in the Detail column is a link to the Transrating Group
Setting table containing the transrating parameters of the service within the
selected Transrating Group. For more information concerning the
Transrating Group Setting table, please refer to topic Adapting the
Transrating Properties of a Service on page 477.
In the DCM Outputs tree, the Transrating Group is added to the outgoing
Transport Stream in question.
Tip: A Transrating Group can also be created via SNMP using the
474 4011746 Rev W

Adding Services to a Transrating Group

Introduction
When an incoming service is passed to an outgoing Transport Stream containing a
MPST - all Services type Transrating Group, the service is automatically added to the
Transrating Group. Adding services to a Selective Services type Transrating Group
can be done using the Drag and Drop method or using the Muxing method. When
a discrete number of individual services should be passed to a Transrating Group,
the Drag and Drop method is useful. When numbers of services must be passed to
one or more Transrating Groups, the Muxing method is recommended.
WARNING:
As long as the SD/HD parameter of a HD service is not set to HD, the service can
not participate in the transrating process. The procedure to change the SD/HD
parameter of a service can be found in topic To Select the Service Definition on
page 417.

Perform the following procedure to add a service to a Selective Services type
Transrating Group using the Drag and Drop method.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which services
must be added to a Transrating Group.
3 Drag and drop the branch of the service to the branch of the Transrating Group.
4011746 Rev W 475

Note: Passing a service from an incoming Transport Stream to an outgoing

Transport Stream and adding this service to a Selective Services type Transrating
Group can be done in one action by dragging the service from the DCM Inputs tree
and dropping this service into the Transrating Group.
Muxing Method
Perform the following procedure to add a service to a Selective Services type
Transrating Group using the Muxing method.
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box
Transrating Group.
Result: The Input Services and Output Transrating Groups tables are
displayed.
Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Transrating Groups table by a

passed.
4 In the Output Transrating Groups table, set the check box(es) of the Transrating
Group(s) to which the services must be passed.
Output Transrating Groups table, tick the check box of the first row, press and
hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
476 4011746 Rev W

to the selected Transrating Group(s). All check boxes in the Input Services
table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transrating Groups table will be
cleared.
Changing the Transrating Group Parameters

The Transrating Groups settings, which are given during the Transrating Group
Creating process, can be changed. The following procedure explains how to change
these Transrating Group settings.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transrating Group for which settings
must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transrating Group or right-click on this Transrating Group
Result: The Service - Transrating sub page of the selected Transrating Group is
displayed.
4 Adapt the Name and/or Total Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter of the Transrating
Group.
Adapting the Transrating Properties of a Service

The following steps explain how to adapt the transrating properties of a service.
scrambling specific service settings must be changed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Transrating tab.
Result: The Transrating tab page is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 477

6 Perform the following steps in the Transrating Services Settings table.
Tips:
The Transrating Services Settings table contains all services of an outgoing
Transport Stream.
– When the outgoing Transport stream is provided with multiple
Transrating Groups, the Transrating Group to which the service belongs
to can be found in the TR Group Name column.
– The Transrating settings are not applicable if the services do not belong to
a Transrating Group.
The services in the Transrating Services Settings table are indicated by their
SID and name.
– Stat Muxed: the service participates in the Statistical Re-multiplexing
group of the Transrating Group and will be transrated if necessary.
– Rate Limited: the service will be transrated with a maximum rate limit.
– Pass Through: no transrating will be performed on this service, only
delayed.
b In the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the minimum bit rate for this service.
c In the Max Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum bit rate for this service.
d In the Priority box, enter the priority setting for the service. The priority
(normal).
7 Continue adapting more services or press the Apply command button to confirm
Note: Both the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) and Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameters take only
the video component within the service into account.
478 4011746 Rev W

Tips:
The transrating specific settings of outgoing services can also be modified on the
Transrating Group Settings table on the Service - Transrater sub page. This
table contains the outgoing services belonging to a specific Transrating Group.
This sub page can be opened by double-clicking on the Transrater Group Icon in
the DCM Outputs tree.
When particular parameters of all services of a Transrating Group must be
a Under the Update All settings, enter or select the desired value in the box of
the parameter that should be changed for all services of this Transrating
Group.

Tip:
Transrating parameters of services can also be modified on the Transrating tab
page on the Service - Service sub page, see topic To Change Transrating Specific
Parameters of Outgoing Services on page 430.
Changing Transrating parameters can also be done via SNMP using the
Removing Services from a Transrating Group

Services member of a Selective Services type Transrating Group can be moved within
the Transport Stream using a drag and drop action.
Note: Since a MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group covers all services within
the outgoing Transrating Group, moving services outside the Transrating Group is
not allowed.
4011746 Rev W 479

The following steps explain how to move a service from a Selective Services type
Transrating Group.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transrating Group of which services
must be moved.
3 Drag and drop branch of the service outside the Transrating Group.
Note: Moving a service outside a Transport Stream is not allowed.
Deleting a MPTS Group

A Transrating Group created for a particular Transport Stream can easily be
removed. Removal of a Transrating Group from a Transport Stream will not
remove the services, which are member of this Transrating Group, from the
Transport Stream. Perform the following steps to remove a Transrating Group
from a Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transrating Group that must be
removed.
3 Double-click on this Transrating Group or right-click on the Transrating Group
and select Delete in the short-cut menu.
Note: The ease with which Transrating Groups can be removed from the DCM
Outputs tree can lead to accidentally changing of outgoing Transport Stream
content. To protect the application from accidentally removing of Transrating
Groups, an additional confirmation can be asked. The procedure to enable or
disable this confirmation feature can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on
page 164.

Tip: A Transrating Group can also be removed by dragging and dropping the
branch of the Transrating Group to the wastebasket.
480 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Transrating Comparison

Introduction
Once a Transrating Group is populated with services and the Transrating
parameters are properly configured, a graphical representation of the bit rates of the
services before and after transrating is depicted on the Service - Comparison sub
page.
The Service - Comparison sub page is refreshed automatically every 10 seconds. A
manual refresh can be executed by pressing the Reload command button. The
following illustration shows an example of a Service - Comparison sub page.
The Incoming Service Bit Rate diagram depicts the bit rates of the services before
transrating and the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram at the right hand side the bit
rates after transrating. The red line in the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram
represents the Transport Stream bit rate and the black line represents the total used
bit rate of the Transrating Group. For VBR Transport Streams the red line is not
displayed.
The Services table provides the legend of the diagrams together with the input
(before transrating) and output bit rates (after transrating) and average compression
ratio (expressed in percent) of the services.
4011746 Rev W 481

Tip: To sort the Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of
the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the
header.
Notes:
When the total bit rate of the Transrating group is higher than the sum of the bit
rates of the incoming services for this Transrating Group, the bit rates of the
outgoing services will have a larger variation than the bit rates of the incoming
services. This is a normal behavior of the DCM transrater.
To determine the current output bitrate of a service, the bitrate of al components

are taken into account, including shared components. When components are
shared with multiple services of a particular Transrating Group, the sum of the
service bit rates will exceed the black line indicating the total bit rate of the
Transrating Group.
482 4011746 Rev W

To Check a Transrating Comparison

Perform the following steps to check the Service - Comparison sub page of a
Multi-TS Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, press the Tree View link after
pointing to the Service link.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group for which
the Transrating comparison must be checked.
3 Right-click on the Multi-TS Transrating Group and point to Bit Rates in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Comparison sub page displays.
4011746 Rev W 483

Single Program Transport Stream Transrating

Introduction
The DCM allows bit rate limiting on individual Single Program Transport Streams
(SPTSs) and Statistical Re-multiplexing of multiple SPTSs. Re-compression of
SPTSs can be useful in for instance DSL application where the bit rate of the
individual Transport Streams is limited (for instance 3 Mbps).
Statistical Re-multiplexing on SPTSs is useful in for instance DSL applications where
the backbone capacity is limited, for instance 40 SPTSs of 3 Mbps via a backbone
limited to 100 Mbps.
Before SPTSs can be re-compressed, one or more Multi-TS Transrating Groups must
be created depending on the application. Once the Transrating Groups are created,
the groups must be populated with the SPTSs. The transrating parameters for the
SPTSs must then be adapted.
The procedures to set up a SPTS re-compression application are fully described in
the following sub topics.
Note: Multi-TS Transrating groups can only be used for GbE outputs.
Transrating Board Settings

Introduction
Video Quality Algorithm Optimization parameter
For transrating the DCM allows using three rate control algorithms: a rate
control algorithm for performance optimization and two algorithms for quality
optimization (Quality and Extended GOP). The Extended GOP rate control
algorithm can be used to eliminate the breathing effect that arises when the GOP
length is more than 0.5 seconds. Compared to Transrating using the Performance
rate control algorithm, transrating using the Quality and Extended GOP rate
control algorithm gives better video quality but slightly decreases the number of
services that can be transrated by a Co-Processor Card.
Transrater delay parameters
The delay that arises during the transrating process is by default 1400 ms
(Standard Coarse Delay mode). Due to this small transrating delay, black
frames might occur during splicing events. These black frames can be
eliminated by using a transrating delay of 1800 ms (Extended Coarse Delay
mode).
For Transport Stream re-synchronization purposes the Predefined Coarse Delay
mode can be used. When the coarse delay mode is set to Predefined, a delay will
be given to all outgoing Transport Streams of the corresponding interface card.
484 4011746 Rev W

Note: This Predefined Coarse Delay mode can only be used for IP Statmux
application.
The delay use by this mode is determined by the following parameters:
- Frame Rate Delay parameter: frame rate of the incoming video, 25 Hz or 30
Hz
- Input Board Type Delay parameter: interface card receiving the video, ASI
or GbE
- Fine Delay parameter: Low, Normal, or High
The table below shows the transrating delay values for the given parameter
combinations.
Mode Delay
Standard n.a. n.a. n.a. 1400 ms
Extended n.a. n.a. n.a. 1800 ms
PCR Continuity parameter

keep the PCR continuous. The corresponding service must be member of a
Transrating group and Component tracking rules are required to keep the PCR
values constant.
Important: The PCR continuity feature only works for services that are spliceable
or transrated (Statmux or Rate-Limit). This feature does not work for the
pass-through services that are part of a Transrater group.
4011746 Rev W 485

Note: Changing the Algorithm Optimization, Transrating delay, and/or PCR

Continuity parameters needs a reboot of the corresponding Co-Processor Card.
Rebooting the Co-processor Card interrupts the outgoing services.
Changing Transrating Board Settings

Perform the following procedure to change transrating board settings.
Co-Processor Card for which transrater board settings should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the TR Board
Settings for the selected interface card is displayed.
Note: The TR Board Settings are only available for an interface card populated
with Co-Processor Card.
3 In the Algorithm Optimization drop down box, select the desired rate control
algorithm, Quality, Performance or Extended GOP.
4 In the Coarse Delay drop down box, select the desired mode:
Standard
Extended
Predefined
Note: Before changing the Coarse Delay parameter to Predefined, all Transrating
Groups of the corresponding interface card must be removed.
5 If the Coarse Delay parameter is set to Predefined, modify the following
parameters if required.
a In the Frame Rate Delay drop down box, select the frame rate of the
incoming video 25 Hz or 30 Hz.
b In the Input Board Type Delay drop down box, select the interface card: ASI
or GbE.
c In the Fine Delay drop down box, select the desired value: Low, Normal, or
High.
6 In the PCR Continuity drop down box, select enabled or disabled.
486 4011746 Rev W

Result: The corresponding Co-Processor Card reboots.
Creating a Multi-TS Transrating Group

The following procedure explains how to create a Multi-TS Transrating Group.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE Port for which a Transrating Group
must be created.
3 Double-click on this GbE port or right-click on this port and select Settings in the
short-cut menu.
4 Point to the Transrating link.
Result: The Service - Transrating sub page containing the Transrating Group
Settings, Add New Transrating Group, and Update All Transrating Groups
table is displayed.
5 Perform the following steps under the Add New Transrating Group settings.
a In the Name box, enter a name (maximum 50 characters). A logical name

facilitates the identification of the Transrating Group in the application.
b In the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the total bit rate that can be used by
this Transrating Group. The total bit rate of a Multi-TS Transrating Group
can be set between 1 and 950 Mbps.
Nota: The total bit rate for Multi-TS Transrating Group includes all
components within the SPTS.
Note: After pressing the Add command button the Transrating Group is added to
the Transrating Group Settings table.
4011746 Rev W 487

The arrow in the Detail column is a link to the Transrating Group Setting table
containing the transrating parameters of the SPTSs within the selected
Transrating Group.
Tip: A Transrating Group can also be created via SNMP using the
Changing Transrating Settings

Perform the following procedure to change the settings of a Transrating Group.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE Port for which transrating group
short-cut menu.
4 Click on the Transrating link.
table is displayed.
5 Perform the following steps in the Transrating Group Settings table.
Tip: The arrow in the Detail column is a link to the Transrating Group Setting
table containing the transrating parameters of the SPTSs within the selected
Transrating Group. For more information concerning the Transrating Group
Setting table, please refer to topic Changing the Transrating Parameters of a SPTS
on page 493.
a In the Name box of the Transrating Group Settings table, enter a new name.
b In the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box of the Transrating Group Settings table,
enter the total bit rate that can be used by this Transrating Group.
Tip: When particular parameters of all Transrating Groups on a port must be
changed to similar values, the Update All Transrating Groups function of the web
browser user interface can be used. The following procedure describes how to use
this function.
488 4011746 Rev W

1 In the Update All TS table, enter the desired value in the box of the parameter
that should be changed for all Transrating Groups of the selected ports.

Adding SPTSs to a Multi-TS Transrating Group

Introduction
A Multi-TS Transrating Group can be populated by moving individual SPTSs which
are already passed to the GbE Port or by passing individual services or Transport
Streams directly from the input to the Transrating Group.
Note: Passing incoming Multi Program Transport Streams (MPTS) or individual
incoming services to a Multi-TS Transrating Group will encapsulate the services into
individual SPTSs.
Moving a SPTS to a Multi -TS Transrating Group

The following procedure explains how to move a SPTS, which is already passed to a
GbE port, to a Multi-TS Transrating Group.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group to which
SPTSs must be moved.
3 Drag and drop the branch of the SPTS to the icon of the Multi-TS Transrating
Group.
4011746 Rev W 489

Result: The SPTS is moved to the Multi-TS Transrating Group.
Passing Incoming Services or Transport Streams to the Multi-TS Transrating

Group
Introduction
Incoming services can be passed to a Multi-TS Transrating Group using the Drag &
Drop method or using the Muxing method. When a discrete number of services
should be passed to a Multi-TS Transrating Group, the Drag and Drop method is
useful. When numbers of services must be passed to one or more Multi-TS
Transrating Group, the Muxing method is recommended. The Drag and Drop
method allows passing an incoming Transport Stream to a Multi-TS Transrating
Group.
Note: After passing services to a Multi-TS Transrating Group, streaming of the
newly created SPTSs must be activated. The procedure to activate Transport
Streams can be found in topic Activating or Stopping Streaming on page 439.

Perform the following steps to pass incoming services or Transport Streams to a
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group to which
services of Transport Streams must be moved.
3 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the service or Transport Stream that must be
passed.
490 4011746 Rev W

4 Drag and drop the branch of the service or Transport Stream to the icon of the
Result: The service or Transport Stream is passed to the Multi-TS Transrating

Group.
Note: Passing an incoming Transport Stream to a Multi-TS Transrating Group
results in creating of individual SPTSs for each service member of this Transport
Stream.
Muxing Method
The following procedure describes how to pass incoming services to a Multi-TS
Transrating Group using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link after
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box
Transrating Group.
Result: The Input Services and Output Transrating Groups tables are
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 491

Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Transrating Groups table by a

passed.
4 In the Output Transrating Groups table, set the check box(es) of the Multi-TS
Transrating Group(s) to which the services must be passed.
to the selected Multi-TS Transrating Group(s). All check boxes in the Input
Services table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transrating Groups table
will be cleared.
Note: SPTSs can also be created by passing one or more Transport Streams to a GbE
port. The following procedure explains how to pass one or more Transport Streams
to a GbE port using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link after
2 In the Input drop down box select TS and in the Output drop down box
Transrating Group.
Result: The Input TS and Output Transrating Groups tables are displayed.
492 4011746 Rev W

3 In the Input TS table, set the check boxes of the services that must be passed.
4 In the Output Transrating Groups table, set the check box(es) of the SPTS
Transrating Group(s) to which the services must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input TS and Output
Transrating Groups table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold
down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
Changing the Transrating Parameters of a SPTS

The following steps explain how to change the transrating parameters of a SPTS
member of a Multi-TS Transrating Group.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group containing
the SPTS for which transrating setting must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Multi-TS Transrating Group or right-click on this group and
select Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Transrater sub page containing the Transrating Group
Settings and Update All table for the selected Multi-TS Transrating Group is
displayed.
4 Perform the following steps in the Transrating Group Settings table.
4011746 Rev W 493

Tip: To identify a SPTS in the Transrating Group Settings table on the Service -
Transrater sub page, each outgoing SPTS is accompanied by its Original
Network Identifier (ON ID), its Transport Stream Identifier (TS ID), its name,
and the IP Address and UDP Port number to which the SPTS has to stream.
– Stat Muxed: the SPTS participates in the Statistical Re-multiplexing group
of the Transrating Group and will be transrated if necessary.
– Rate Limited: the SPTS will be transrated with a maximum rate limit.
– Pass Through: no transrating will be performed on this SPTS, only
delayed.
b In the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the minimum bit rate for this SPTS.
c In the Max Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum bit rate for this SPTS.
d In the Priority box, enter the priority setting for the SPTS. The priority
(normal).
5 Continue adapting more SPTSs or press the Apply command button to confirm
Note: Both the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) and Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter take the
complete SPTS content into account.
Tips:
When particular parameters of all SPTSs of a Transrating Group must be
a In the Update All table, enter or select the desired value in the box of the
parameter that should be changed for all SPTSs of this Transrating Group.

494 4011746 Rev W

Transrating parameters of an SPTS can also be modified on the Transrating tab
page on the Service - Service sub page, see topic To Change Transrating Specific
Parameters of Outgoing Services on page 430.
Changing Transrating parameters can also be done via SNMP using the
Moving an SPTS from or to a Transrating Group

A SPTS can easily be moved from outside a Multi-TS Transrating Group to inside a
Multi-TS Transrating Group or vice versa as long as the SPTS and the Transrating
Groups belong to the same GbE port
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM point to the Tree View link after
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the SPTS that must be moved.
3 Drag and drop the branch of the SPTS to the desired place.
Note: Moving a SPTS outside a GbE Port is not allowed.
4011746 Rev W 495

Removing Multi-TS Transrating Groups

Introduction
Depending on the number of Multi-TS Transrating Groups that must be removed
from a GbE port, two different methods can be used:
Removing individual Transrating Groups
Removing a number of Transrating Groups
Removing a Multi-TS Transrating Group from a GbE Port will not remove the
outgoing SPTSs, which are included in the Transrating Group, from the GbE port.
Removing Individual Multi-TS Transrating Groups

The following steps explain how to remove individual Multi-TS Transrating Groups.
Result: The Service - Tree View page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group that must
be removed.
3 Right-click on the Multi-TS Transrating Group in question and select Delete in
the short-cut menu.
Note: The ease with which Transrating Groups can be removed from the DCM
Outputs tree can lead to accidentally changing of outgoing Transport Stream
content. To protect the application from accidentally removing of Transrating
Groups, an additional confirmation can be asked. The procedure to enable or
disable this confirmation feature can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on
page 164.

Tip: A Transrating Group can also be removed by dragging and dropping the
icon of the Transrating Group to the wastebasket.
496 4011746 Rev W

Removing a Number of Multi-TS Transrating Groups

Perform the following steps to remove multiple Transrating Groups.
Result: The Service - Tree view sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE Port for which a transrating group
short-cut menu.
table is displayed.
4 In the Transrating Group Settings table tick the check box, which is located
beside the Name column, of each Transrating Group that must be removed.
Tips:
To sort the Transrating Group Settings table by a particular parameter, click
on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Transrating Group
Settings table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
4011746 Rev W 497

Checking a Transrating Comparison

Introduction
Once a Multi-TS Transrating Group is populated with SPTSs and the Transrating
parameters are properly configured, a graphical representation of the bit rates of the
SPTSs before and after transrating is depicted on the Service - Comparison sub
page.
The Service - Comparison sub page is refreshed automatically every 10 seconds. A
following illustration shows an example of a Service - Comparison sub page.
The Incoming Service Bit Rate diagram depicts the bit rates of the SPTSs before
transrating and the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram the bit rates after
transrating. The black line in the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram represents the
total used bit rate of the Transrating Group.
The Service table provides the legend of the diagrams together with the input
(before transrating) and output bit rates (after transrating) and average compression
ratio (expressed in percent) of the SPTSs.
header.
498 4011746 Rev W

Note: When the total bit rate of the Transrating group is higher than the sum of the
bit rates of the incoming services for this Transrating Group, the bit rates of the
outgoing SPTSs will have a larger variation that the bit rates of the incoming
services. This is a normal behavior of the DCM transrater.
To Check a Transrating Comparison

Perform the following steps to check the Service - Comparison sub page of a
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group for which
the Transrating comparison must be checked.
3 Right-click on the Multi-TS Transrating Group and point to Bit Rates in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Comparison sub page displays.
4011746 Rev W 499

Transrating Examples
Transport Stream with Multiple Transrating Groups
Statistical Re-multiplexing keeps the total bit rate of a group of services under
control. Within this group the services have Variable Bit Rates (VBR). When a
Transport Stream with VBR services is offered to for instance our MQAM
Modulator, which builds four QAM channels from one incoming Transport Stream,
the bit rates of these QAM channels are out of control. By creating a Transport
Stream containing four Transrating Groups with the services for each individual
QAM channel, the bit rate of the Transport Stream as well as the bit rates of the
individual Transrating Groups can keep under control.
Note: More information concerning our MQAM Modulator can be found in the
MQAM Modulator - Models D9477-1, D9477-2, D9477-3 - Installation and Operation
Guide, part number 717866.
The following illustration shows a graphical representation of a Transport Stream
containing four Transrating Groups.
Statistical
Re-Multiplexing
190
Transrating
180
Group
170 150
160 140
38.5
150 130
140 120
Transrating
130 110
Group
Bitrate (Mbps)
Bitrate (Mbps)
100
38.5
120
110 90
100 80
90 70
Transrating
38.5
80 60
Group
70 50
60 40
50 30
38.5
Transrating
40 20
Group
30 10
20 0
10
0
500 4011746 Rev W

In the example, four Selective Services type Transrating Groups should be created on
the outgoing Transport Stream each having a total bit rate of 38.5 Mbps. The total
bit rate of the Transport Stream should be set to 154 Mbps. Pass the services to the
Transrating Group belonging to one of the four QAM channels. The following
illustration depicts the tree of an outgoing Transport Stream for a MQAM Modulator
containing four Selective Services type Transrating Groups.
4011746 Rev W 501

Statistical Re-multiplexing of a SPTS Transrating Group

In DSL applications, the output of the DCM contains multiple Single Program
Transport Streams (SPTSs). When the bandwidth of the backbone is limited,
Statistical Re-multiplexing can be used to optimize the bandwidth usage efficiency.
SPTS 30
4
4 Mbps
0
SPTS 29
4
4 Mbps 100
0 SPTS 30
SPTS 28
4 Stat Mux 95
SPTS 29
4 Mbps
0 SPTS 28 SPTS
90
Transrating
SPTS 3 Group
SPTS 2 5 SPTS 2
4
4 Mbps SPTS 1
0 0
SPTS 1
4
4 Mbps
0
In the example above, a SPTS Transrating Group must be created containing the
SPTSs. The maximum bit rate of the Transrating Group should be set to 100 Mbps
and the bit rate of the individual SPTSs to 4 Mbps. The following illustration shows
a set up of a Transrating Group populated with SPTSs.
502 4011746 Rev W

Statistical Multiplexing in Combination with Rate Limiting

The DCM device allows combining Bit Rate Limiting with Statistical Multiplexing.
When Bit Rate Limiting is combined with Statistical Multiplexing, Bit Rate limiting
priors Statistical Multiplexing. Meaning that the required bit rate for the services
that should be bit rate limited is allocated prior the bandwidth used for Statistical
Multiplexing. If the bit rate of an incoming service that should be rate limited is less
than its limit, the bit rate surplus of this service is added to the bit rate pool used for
Statistical Multiplexing.
In the example below the shaded services from Transport Stream 1 and Transport
Stream 2 must be re-multiplexed into a Transport Stream of 29 Mbps. The services
of Transport Stream 2 must be bit rate limited to 4 Mbps. The services of Transport
Stream 1 must be statistical multiplexed. A part of the Transport Stream bandwidth
should be reserved for future services (2 Mbps).
Incoming Transport Stream 1, Incoming Transport Stream 2,
30
Bitrate (Mbps)
Bitrate (Mbps)
25 25
20 20
15 15
10 10
5 5
0 0
MUX
Statistical
Re-Multiplexing and
Bitrate Limiting
Stuffing
30
25
Bitrate (Mbps)
20
Total bit rate Bit Rate
15 Transrater Transport
Group: Stream:
10 27 Mbps 29 Mbps
0
Rate limited at 4 Mbps
4011746 Rev W 503

Parameters to set
Outgoing Transport Stream, bit rate = 29 Mbps
MPTS - All Services Transrating Group, maximum bit rate = 27 Mbps
Three services Transport Stream 2
- Rate Control = Rate Limited
- Max Bit Rate (Mbps) = 4 Mbps
Five services Transport Stream 1
- Rate Control = Stat Muxed
- Min Bit Rate (Mbps) = for instance 2
- Max Bit Rate (Mbps) = for instance 5
504 4011746 Rev W

6 Chapter 6
Digital Program Insertion and
Program Switching
Introduction
This chapter provides general information concerning Digital Program
Insertion and Program Switching and the procedures to set up a DCM
to participate into such application.
In This Chapter
Digital Program Insertion................................................................. 507
Program Switching ............................................................................ 539
4011746 Rev W 505

Digital Program Insertion
Introduction
This section describes the Digital Program Insertion (DPI) feature of
the DCM and gives more information on how to set up DPI
application.
In this section
Introducing Digital Program Insertion.................................................... 508
Configuring Splicing Channels................................................................. 514
Checking the IP Address of the AD Servers ........................................... 535
Triggering Splicing Events Manually ...................................................... 536
4011746 Rev W 507

Chapter 6 Digital Program Insertion and Program Switching
Introducing Digital Program Insertion

General
Digital Program Insertion (DPI) allows content replacement of services for digital
video (for instance local advertising insertion). The DPI option of the DCM is based
on the SCTE 35 and SCTE 30 standards.
A service substitution can be triggered by an Advertising Server (called AD-Server)
(based on SCTE 30), a Cue Insertion device (based on SCTE 35), or manually by using
the web browser user interface or the GPIO contacts of the DCM. In DPI
environments the following nomenclature is used:
Primary Channel: the service that must be replaced
Insertion Channel: the service that must replace the Primary Channel
Output Channel: the outgoing service
In-Point: the moment a Primary to Insertion Channel substitution must be executed
Out-Point: the moment a Insertion to Primary Channel substitution must be
executed
The illustration below depicts the principle of an In-Point splicing event and an
Out-Point splicing event.
When a Primary to Insertion Channel or an Insertion to Primary Channel substitution is

triggered the Co-Processor Card of the DCM processes both streams to achieve a
seamless transition. During a splicing event, video, audio, and particular data
components of the Insertion Channel matching the components of the Primary Channel
are spliced, the device remains passing all other components from the Primary
Channel by default. For particular applications (for instance ETV), it can be useful to
pass all components within the Insertion Channel to the Output Channel after a
Primary to Insertion Channel substitution. For this purpose, DCM's Add Unspliced
Insertion PIDs feature can be used.
508 4011746 Rev W

The following list shows the components that will be spliced by default.
The video component of the Insertion Channel matching the video component of
the Primary Channel
Notes:
- Only MPEG2 video, including DC-II variant, can be spliced. Other types are
not considered to be video.
- Splicing two video components within the same channel is not allowed.
When the Primary Channel provides two video components, the custom mode
(see further) must be used to assign one video component and to block the
other video components.
The audio components of the Insertion Channel matching the audio components
of the Primary Channel (preferably of the same language)
MPEG2 matches only MPEG-2 and AC-3 only AC-3.
Notes:
- AAC will be spliced as data components and is not seamless.
- If the Insertion Channel does not contain enough audio components to match
all audio components in the Primary Channel, the audio components will be
duplicated.
The ETV Integrated Signaling Stream (EISS) components of the Insertion Channel
matching the EISS components of the Primary Channel
The Baseline ETV Binary Interchange Format (EBIF) components of the Insertion
Channel matching the Baseline EBIF components of the Primary Channel
The DVB teletext components of the Insertion Channel matching the DVB teletext
components of the Primary Channel
The DVB subtitle components of the Insertion Channel matching the DVB subtitle
components of the Primary Channel (preferably of the same language)
Note: If the Insertion Channel does not contain enough subtitle streams to match
all subtitles components in the Primary Channel, the subtitle components are
duplicated.
Tip: To prevent updating the PMT during a splice event for which only the Insertion
Channel contains EISS or EBIF components, dummy component references can be
inserted into the PMT of the Primary Channel. The procedure to insert such
references can be found in topic Adding Dummy Component References into a PMT on
page 289.
4011746 Rev W 509

In contrast with this default matching behavior, a custom mode can be used to
define the content of the Output Channel during the splicing event by passing
components of the Primary Channel and by assigning components of the Insertion
Channel to components of the Primary Channel. During a splicing event all
components not passed from the Primary Channel to the Output Channel will be
blocked and all components from the Insertion Channel assigned to components of
the Primary Channel will be spliced. This custom mode can only by used for manual
splicing or splicing triggered via a Cue Insertion device (based on SCTE 35).
To save bandwidth after a Primary to Insertion Channel substitution, the bit rate of the
components of the Primary Channel that remain in the Output Channel can be cleared
by using the Clear PID Bit Rates feature. Meaning the components are removed
from the outgoing Transport Stream but the components are still referred into the
PMT.
The DPI option of the DCM is on a per license basis, each service that participates
into a DPI application needs one or more Splicing licenses depending on the service
definition. A SD service takes one splicing license and a HD service takes two
licenses. DPI licenses are occupied as soon as Splicing Channels are created.
Notes:
For Digital Program Insertion the DCM requires one or more Co-Processor cards
and free Splicing licenses.
When a Primary Channel contains a SD service and the Insertion Channel a HD
service, the SD/HD parameter of the Primary Channel service must be set to HD.
Such a Splicing Channel consumes two Splicing licenses. The procedure to
change the SD/HD parameter of a service can be found in topic To Change the
Settings of Outgoing Services on page 417.
During a splicing event, black frames might occur, this can be solved by
increasing the transrating delay. More information can be found in topic
Transrating Board Settings on page 470.
DISCLAIMER
Splicing programs without transrating can lead to big bit rate variations on the
spliced program. Splicing without transrating does not give bit rate control over
the spliced program.
510 4011746 Rev W

Splicing Event Triggered by an AD-Server

Introduction
The following illustration depicts DCM integration into a SCTE 30 compliant DPI
application with multiple AD-Servers.
IP Network
AD-Server 1
Time Server
AD-Server 1 (NTP)
Advertising
Advertising
MPEG Encoder +
CUE Insertion Service + Cue Messages DCM
Service + Cue Messages
MPEG Encoder +
CUE Insertion
Principle
When a DCM is integrated into a SCTE 30 based DPI application, a certain time
before the In-Point of a splicing event the AD-Server informs the DCM about the
service that must be spliced (Primary Channel), the advertising (Insertion Channel),
start time of the splicing event, and duration using a Splice Request message. At
start time of the splicing event, the AD-Server streams the advertising to the DCM
via an ASI port or GbE port. The Co-Processor card of the DCM processes both
streams to achieve a seamless transition between the Primary Channel and the
Insertion Channel. After a particular time, equal to the duration parameter, a
seamless Insertion to Primary Channel substitution is performed.
Notes:
An Insertion to Primary Channel substitution can also be triggered by an
additional Splice Request message.
The information in the Cue Messages inserted by a CUE Insertion device into the
incoming transport stream of the DCM (SCTE 35 based) is redirected to all
connected AD-Servers for the specific channel. This information can be used by
the AD-Servers to determine the parameters of the Splice Request messages.
When the Primary Channel is scrambled by the DCM, the Insertion Channel will
also be scrambled during the Splicing Event Duration.
4011746 Rev W 511

Before messages can be sent between the AD-Server and the DCM a TCP/IP socket
must be set up; this is a client/server connection with the AD-server client and the
DCM device server. Therefore the AD-Server needs the knowledge of the
IP-address of the used Ethernet port of the DCM device. For each service with
splicing opportunities, a Splicing Channel must be created.
Time Synchronization
Due to the time differences between the AD Servers and the DCM and the
unpredictability of the delay on TCP/IP messages, time synchronization between
the AD Servers and DCM is required to achieve a very accurate splicing. To keep
the AD Servers and the DCM synchronized, the Network Time Protocol (NTP) can
be used. The DCM (NTP client) can be synchronized with one of the AD Servers
(NTP server) or the DCM and AD servers can be synchronized with a separate
Time-Server. The procedure to synchronize the DCM with a Time-Server using
NTP can be found in topic Synchronizing with a Time-Server on page 66.
Splicing Event Triggered by a Cue Insertion Device

The following illustration depicts a SCTE 35 based DPI application for which the
splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion device. In the application below the
Cue Insertion device is integrated into the MPEG encoder (our Encoder Model
D9032).
MPEG Encoder +
CUE Insertion
Service +
Cue Messages
Service or
Advertising Advertising
DCM
A certain time before starting a splicing event, the Cue Insertion device of the MPEG
encoder inserts a Splice Insert Cue message into the Transport Stream containing the
splicing event start time and splicing event duration. At the splicing event start
time, the co-processor of the DCM processes both streams to achieve a seamless
transition between the Primary Channel and the associated Insertion Channel.
After a particular time, equal to the duration parameter, a seamless Insertion to
Primary Channel substitution is performed.
Notes:
When the Splice_Immediate flag of the Splice Insert Cue message is set, the DCM
will start the splice event directly after receiving the Cue message.
Instead of using the duration parameter, an Insertion to Primary substitution can
be triggered by an additional Splice Insert Cue message.
512 4011746 Rev W

Before a splice substitution can be performed, a Splicing Channel must be created and
the DCM requires the knowledge of the service for the Insertion Channel.
Splicing Event Triggered by the DCM

The DCM allows triggering a splicing event via the web browser user interface or via
the GPIO contacts of the device. The following illustration depicts a graphical
representation of a DPI application for which the splicing event is triggered by the
web user interface of the DCM.
Service
Service or
Advertising
DCM
Advertising
Before a splice substitution can be performed, a Splicing Channel must be created and
the DCM requires the knowledge of the service for the Insertion Channel.
4011746 Rev W 513

Configuring Splicing Channels

Introduction
Splicing Channels can be configured in four different ways:
using the Service page of a particular Transport Stream, see topic Configuring
Splicing Channels using the Service Page of a Particular Transport Stream on page 517
using the Service page of all Transport Streams belonging to a particular port
(GbE port only), see topic Configuring Splicing Channels using the Service Page of all
Transport Streams on a Particular Port on page 521
using the right-click menu of the Advanced Routing feature, see Configuring
Splicing Channels using Advanced Routing on page 526
using the drag and drop method of the Advanced Routing feature, see Configuring
Splicing Channels using the Drag and Drop Method of Advanced Routing on page 529
As seen in the introduction of this chapter, a custom mode can be used to determine
the components of the Output Channel during a splice event. Passing components
from the Primary Channel and assigning components from the Insertion Channel to
components of the Primary Channel are done by defining Custom PID Mapping
entries. For more information concerning defining Custom PID Mapping entries,
please refer to topic Defining Custom DPI Mapping Entries on page 531.
Note: This custom mode is only useful for manual triggered splice events, splice
events triggered by a GPIO contact of the DCM, or splice events triggered by a Cue
Insertion device (SCTE 35).
To set up a Splicing Channel, the DCM needs the knowledge of the following
information:
Primary Channel parameters
- Enable parameter: enables or disables the Splicing Channel for the service.
- SID parameter (read only parameter): service identifier of the service.
- Name parameter (read only parameter): name of the service
Output Channel parameters
- Name parameter: the name of the Splicing Channel. When the splicing
events for this channel are triggered by an AD-Server, the name entered in
the Name box must match the name given by the AD-Server.
- DPI Modes table parameter:
Off: DPI is switched off.
SCTE-30 / 35: splicing events are triggered by an AD-Server.
514 4011746 Rev W

SCTE-35 Only: splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion device.

Manual: splicing events are triggered via the web browser user interface
of the DCM.
GPIO: splicing events are triggered via a GPIO contact of the device.
Note: Not all combinations can be made. When a check box is selected for a
mode that can't be combined with an already selected mode, this already
selected mode will be disabled.
- Custom PID Mapping parameter: enables or disables the Custom PID
Mapping feature.
- PIN Mapping - To Insertion parameter: determines the GPIO pin
configuration used to trigger a Primary to Insertion Channel substitution (DPI
Modes table parameter set to GPIO).
- PIN Mapping - To Main parameter: determines the GPIO pin configuration
used to trigger an Insertion to Primary Channel substitution (DPI Modes table
parameter set to GPIO).
Tip: The procedure to create pin configurations can be found in topic
Configuring the GPIO Contacts on page 80.
- PIN Mapping - Splice Delay (ms) parameter: After opening or closing a
GPIO contact to trigger a substitution, it take some time (processing time)
before the substitution will be executed (max. 1000 ms). The delay
parameter covers this time to achieve a very accurate splicing.
If the configured splice delay < 1000 ms, the splice is not accurate. It can
take 1000 ms between activating the GPIO contact and the splice, even if
the configured delay is smaller.
If the configured splice delay > 1000 ms, the splice is accurate, it takes
exactly the configured delay between activating the GPIO contact and the
splice.
Besides this splice delay there is an extra processing delay (1400 ms
depending on transrater delay parameter).
For example: if an accurate splice is needed at 5 PM and the splice delay is
set to 1000 ms, the GPIO contact should be triggered 1000 ms before 5 PM.
The splice at the output of the DCM will be visible 1400 ms after 5 PM.
- PMT Mode parameter:
Follow Insertion (FI): During a splicing event the parts of the PMT
describing the spliced components of the Output Channel are taken form
the PMT of the Insertion Channel.
Follow Primary (FP): During a splicing event the PMT fragments for the
spliced components in the PMT of the Output Channel are taken form the
PMT of the Primary Channel.
4011746 Rev W 515

Note: The PMT Mode parameter is not applicable if the Output Channel -
Mode parameter is set to SCTE-30 / 35.
- Add Unspliced Insertion PIDs (AP) parameter: enable this parameter to
pass components from the Insertion Channel, that do not match components
of the Primary Channel, to the Output Channel after a Primary to Insertion
Channel substitution or disable this parameter otherwise. This feature is
typically used in for instance ETV applications.
applicable if the Output Channel - Mode parameter is set to SCTE-30 / 35.
- Clear PID Bit Rates (CPBR) parameter: enable this parameter to clear the bit
rates of the components of the Primary channel that do not match a
component of the Insertion Channel or disable this parameter otherwise.
Note: The Clear PID Bit Rates (CPBR) selection box is not applicable if the
Custom PID Mapping feature is enabled.
Insertion Channel parameters
- Card parameter: the card to which the port of the Insertion Channel belongs to
- Port parameter: the port to which the Insertion Channel belongs to
- Type parameter: the type of the input port
- Multicast IP Address parameter: the multicast IP address to which the
source device streams. This parameter is only applicable if the Insertion
Channel - Type parameter is set to GbE Multicast.
- UDP Port parameter: the UDP port number of the port receiving the
Transport Stream the Insertion Channel belongs to. This parameter is not
applicable if the Insertion Channel belongs to an ASI input port.
- SID parameter: the service identifier of the Insertion Channel.
- PIDs parameter: when the Custom PID Mapping feature is enabled, this
parameter shows an arrow that can be pressed to access the sub page for
defining custom PID mapping entries. More information about custom PID
mapping can be found in topic Defining Custom DPI Mapping Entries on page
531.
- License parameter (read only): shows the availability of DPI licenses for the
Splicing Channel.
- Status parameter (read only): shows the actual status of the Splicing Channel,
Primary or Insertion.
516 4011746 Rev W

- Info parameter (read only): when the Insertion Channel is present at the input,
this parameter displays the Service Name of the Insertion Channel together
with the Original Network identifier (ON-ID) and Transport Stream
Identifier (TS-ID) of the Transport Stream containing the Insertion Channel.
Note: The Insertion Channel parameters are not applicable if splicing events are
triggered by an AD-Server (Output Channel - Mode = SCTE-30 / 35).
General remarks
As soon as a Splicing Channel is defined for a service (Primary Channel check box
is set) one or two DPI license, depending on the service definition (SD or HD), is
(are) consumed.
Splicing Channels can also be configured via SNMP using the
When an Insertion Channel is defined for a particular Output Channel and the
Transport Stream containing the Insertion Channel is not yet present at the GbE
port, a Transport Stream reservation is created.
To prevent PMT updates during a splice event for which only the Insertion
Channel contains EISS or EBIF components, dummy references for these
components can be inserted into the PMT of the Primary channel. The procedure to
add dummy references into the PMT can be found in topic Adding Dummy Component
References into a PMT on page 289.
The Splicing Channels with Output Channel - Mode equal to Manual are shown
in the DPI Start/Stop table.
Configuring Splicing Channels using the Service Page of a Particular

Transport Stream
The following procedure explains how to configure Splicing Channels using the
Service page of a particular Transport Stream.
includes the service that must be configured for DPI.
4011746 Rev W 517


5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the DPI tab.
Result: The DPI tab page is displayed.
6 In the DPI Settings table, complete the following settings to set up a Splicing
Channel for a particular service.
Note: The services in the DPI Settings table are labeled with their Service
a Set the Primary Channel - Enable check box to define a Splicing Channel for
this service.
modes: Off; SCTE-30 / 35, SCTE-35 Only, Manual, or GPIO.
518 4011746 Rev W

box and enter the delay to cover the processing time in the Splice Delay
(ms) box.
Note: For splicing events triggered by using the GPIO contacts, both the
To Insertion parameter as well as the To Main parameter must be
configured.
i In the PMT Mode drop down box, select one of the following values:
Follow Insertion (FI) or Follow Primary (FP).
Channel substitution.
35.
the components of the Primary channel that do not match with a
component of the Insertion Channel.
4011746 Rev W 519

Result: The Input Selection popup is displayed.
the port of the Insertion Channel belongs to.
ii In the Insertion Channel - Port drop down box, enter the number of the
port to which the Insertion Channel belongs to.
type: ASI, GbE Unicast, or GbE Multicast.
Multicast.
the port of the incoming Transport Stream to which the Insertion Channel
belongs to.
Insertion Channel.
vii Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command
box ( ).
520 4011746 Rev W

Configuring Splicing Channels using the Service Page of all Transport

Streams on a Particular Port
The following procedure explains how to configure a Splicing Channel using the
Service page of all Transport Streams on a particular GbE port.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port containing the outgoing
Transport Stream, which includes the service that must be configured for DPI.
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Point to the DPI link.
Result: The Service - DPI sub page is displayed.
5 In the DPI Settings table, modify the following parameters to configure a
Splicing Channel:
Tip: The services in the DPI Settings table are labeled with their Service
a Set the Output Channel - Enable check box to define a Splicing Channel for
this service.
4011746 Rev W 521

modes: Off, SCTE-30 / 35, SCTE-35 Only, Manual, or GPIO.
box and enter the delay to cover the processing time in the Splice Delay
(ms) box.
iv Click on the OK command button to confirm and to close the Mode
popup dialog.
522 4011746 Rev W

i In the PMT Mode drop down box, select one of the following values:
Follow Insertion (FI) or Follow Primary (FP).
Channel substitution.
35.
the components of the Primary Channel that do not match a component of
the Insertion Channel.
iv Click on the OK command button to confirm and to close the Options
popup dialog.
4011746 Rev W 523

Result: The Input Selection popup dialog is displayed.
the port of the Insertion Channel belongs to.
ii In the Insertion Channel - Port drop down box, select the number of the
port to which the Insertion Channel belongs to.
type: ASI, GbE Unicast, or GbE Multicast.
Multicast.
the port receiving the Transport Stream the Insertion Channel belongs to.
Insertion Channel.
vii Click on the OK command button to confirm and to close the Input
Selection popup dialog.
box ( ).
Tip: When particular parameters of all Splicing Channels on a particular GbE port
must be changed to similar values, the Update All Channels function of the web
browser user interface can be used. The following procedure explains how to use
this function.
524 4011746 Rev W

a On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link
b In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the corresponding port, right-click on
this port, and point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The TS Output sub page of the corresponding port is displayed.
c Click on the DPI link.
Result: The DPI sub page with the DPI settings of the Output Channels on the
corresponding port is displayed.
d In the Update all channels table, enter the desired value in the box or select
the desired value in the drop down box of the parameter that should be
changed for all channels of the corresponding port.
Note: To set the Mode parameters, tick the Mode check box and point to the
icon.
4011746 Rev W 525

Modify the parameters and click on the OK command button to confirm

and to close the Mode popup dialog.
e Press the Update command button.
Result: The settings are changed in the DPI Settings table.
Note: Particular values in the DPI Settings table can still be changed if
necessary.
f Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
Configuring Splicing Channels using Advanced Routing

The following procedure describes how to configure a Splicing Channel using the
short-cut menu of the Advanced Routing feature.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the service that must be configured for DPI.
3 Right-click on this service and point to Advanced Routing in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Advanced Routing tree for the selected service is displayed.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on Source for Splicing and point to Add
Splice Source in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Splice Source popup dialog is displayed.
526 4011746 Rev W

5 Under Output Channel, enter a name in the Name box to identify the Splicing
Channel.
6 Under DPI Modes, set or clear the check boxes of the following modes: Off,
SCTE-30 / 35, SCTE-35 Only, Manual, or GPIO.
7 Under DPI Modes, tick the Custom PID Mapping check box to enable or clear
this check box to disable this feature.
8 When a splicing event is triggered using the GPIO contacts, complete the
following settings under PIN Mapping.
a In the To Insertion drop down box, select the pin configuration for triggering
a Primary to Insertion Channel substitution
b In the To Main drop down box, select the pin configuration for triggering an
Insertion to Primary Channel substitution.
c In the Splice Delay (ms) box, enter the delay to cover the processing time.
4011746 Rev W 527

Notes: For splicing events triggered by using the GPIO contacts, both the To
Insertion parameter as well as the To Main parameter must be configured.
9 Complete the following settings under the Output Channel Options.
a In the PMT Mode drop down box, select one of the following values: Follow
Insertion (FI) or Follow Primary (FP).
b Set the Add Unspliced Insertion PIDs (AP) selection box to pass
components from the Insertion Channel, that do not match components of the
Primary Channel, to the Output Channel after a Primary to Insertion Channel
substitution.
c Set the Clear PID Bit Rates (CPBR) selection box to clear the bit rates of the
components of the Primary channel that do not match a component of the
Insertion Channel.
10 Under Insertion Channel, complete the following settings to specify the Insertion
Channel.
a In the Insertion Channel - Card drop down box, select the card to which the
port of the Insertion Channel belongs to.
b In the Insertion Channel - Port drop down box, enter the number of the port
to which the Insertion Channel belongs to.
c In the Insertion Channel - Type drop down box, select the input port type:
ASI, GbE Unicast, or GbE Multicast.
d In the Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address box, enter the multicast IP
address to which the source device streams.
applicable if the Insertion Channel - Type parameter is set to GbE Multicast.
e In the Insertion Channel - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the
port of the incoming Transport Stream to which the Insertion Channel belongs
to.
Note: The Insertion Channel - UDP Port parameter is not applicable if the
Insertion Channel belongs to an ASI input port.
f In the Insertion Channel - SID box, enter the service identifier of the
Insertion Channel.
528 4011746 Rev W

Configuring Splicing Channels using the Drag and Drop Method of

Advanced Routing
drag and drop method of the Advanced Routing feature.
4 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to service that has to act as Insertion Channel.
5 Select the branch of this incoming service and drag and drop this service to
Source for Splicing in the Advanced Routing tree.
Important: Since dropping the service to another branch in the advanced routing
tree gives another action, dropping must be done precisely.
4011746 Rev W 529

Channel.
530 4011746 Rev W

Note: For splicing events triggered by using the GPIO contacts, both the To
substitution.
components of the Primary Channel that do not match with a component of
Defining Custom DPI Mapping Entries

Introduction
For manual triggered splicing events, events triggered by a GPIO contact of the
DCM, or events triggered by a Cue Insertion device, the components within the
Output Channel during the splicing event can be specified. Components coming
from the Primary Channel must be passed and components spliced from the Insertion
Channel must be assigned to the corresponding components of the Primary Channel.
Note:
The components of the Primary Channel not passed to the Output Channel will be
blocked during the spicing event.
To have a successful splicing event, assigning one video component is
mandatory, assigning multiple video components is not allowed.
Passing or assigning components can be done by creating Custom PID Mapping
entries for each individual component.
4011746 Rev W 531

Passing Components from the Primary Channel

Perform the following steps to pass components from the Primary Channel to the
Output Channel.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link after
includes the service for which components must be passed from the Primary
Channel.
Result: The DPI settings of the services belonging to the outgoing Transport
Stream are displayed.
5 In the DPI Settings table, point to the arrow in the PIDs column of the service
for which components must be passed from the Primary Channel.
Result: The Custom PID Mapping table is displayed.
Tip: The Custom PID Mapping table is also accessible via the DPI Settings table
containing all outgoing services belonging to a particular GbE port.
Result: A new entry is added in the table.
7 In the Action drop down box, select Pass From Main.
8 In the Input PID Main box, enter the PID of the component that must be passed.
532 4011746 Rev W

Assigning Components from the Insertion Channel to Components of the

Primary Channel
Perform the following steps to assign components from the Insertion Channel to
components of the Primary Channel.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View sub page
includes the service for which components must be assigned.
for which components must be assigned.
Result: A new entry is added in the table.
7 In the Action drop down box, select Splice.
8 In the Input PID Main box, enter the PID of the Primary Channel component to
which an Insertion Channel component must be assigned.
9 In the Input PID Insertion Channel box, enter the PID of the Insertion Channel
component.
Removing Custom PID Mapping Entries

The following steps explain how to remove entries form the Custom PID Mapping
table.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link after
includes the service for which Custom PID Mapping entries must be removed.
4011746 Rev W 533


for which Custom PID Mapping entries must be removed.
6 Tick the check boxes prefixing the entries that should be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Custom PID Mapping
table, tick the check box of the first entry that must be removed, press and hold
down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last entry that must be
removed.
7 Press the Remove Checked Rows command button.
534 4011746 Rev W

Checking the IP Address of the AD Servers
Checking the IP Address of the AD Servers

The following procedure describes how to check the IP address of the AD Server that
has set up a connection for a particular Splicing Channel.
the Splicing Channel for which the AD Server information should be checked.
Result: The DPI sub page is displayed.
5 In the Info column, point to the arrow of the Splicing Channel in question.
Note: This arrow appears when the Output Channel - Mode is set to SCTE30.
Result: The IP address of the corresponding AD Server is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 535

Triggering Splicing Events Manually

Introduction
Splicing events on Splicing Channels of which the Splicing Channel Mode is set to
Manual can be triggered manually via the web browser user interface. More
information concerning the manual Splicing Channel mode can be found in sub topic
Splicing Event Triggered by the Digital Content Manager System earlier in this
chapter.
Note: Splicing events can also be triggered using ROSA's Macro Component.
More information about macro's can be found in topic Using DCM Macros on page
939.
To Trigger a Primary / Insertion Channel Substitution

The following procedure explains how to trigger a Primary to Insertion Channel
substitution
1 On the web user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after pressing
the Service link.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream that
includes the service.
Result: The DPI settings of services belonging to the outgoing Transport Stream
are displayed.
5 In the DPI Start/Stop table, point to the button (Start) of the Splicing Channel
in question.
Result: A Primary to Insertion Channel substitution is triggered.
Tip: After performing the Primary to Insertion Channel substitution, Insertion
appears in the Status column.
To Trigger a Insertion / Primary Channel Substitution

The following procedure explains how to trigger an Insertion to Primary Channel
substitution.
1 On the web user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after pressing
the Service link.
536 4011746 Rev W

Triggering Splicing Events Manually
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream that
includes the service.
Result: The DPI settings of services belonging to the outgoing Transport Stream
are displayed.
5 In the DPI Start/Stop table, point to the button (Start) of the Splicing Channel
in question.
Result: An Insertion to Primary Channel substitution is triggered.
Tip: After performing the Insertion to Primary Channel substitution, Primary
appears in the Status column.
4011746 Rev W 537

Program Switching
Introduction
This section describes the DCM's Alternate Source Selection feature that
can be used for program switching and gives more information on how
to set up such application.
In this section
Introduction ................................................................................................. 540
Configuring Alternate Services................................................................. 542
Performing Program Switching................................................................ 571
4011746 Rev W 539

Introduction
DCM's Alternate Source Selection feature allows switching the source of an outgoing
service to another source without changing the outgoing service settings (like SID,
service name, SI mode...). Component merging, service backup... , which are source
related output settings, can be changed per alternate.
The main service, which is the service that is initially passed from the input to the
output, can be provided with one or multiple inactive sources (called alternate
services). The web browser user interface of the DCM allows starting a program
switch action by activating an alternate source or, when an alternate source is
activated, by activating the main service or another alternate service.
Incoming
Main Service
Service
Outgoing
Service
Incoming Alternate
Service Service
Incoming Alternate
Service Service
Program switching using the Alternate Source Selection feature is not seamless, during
a program switching glitches will occur in the video and audio streams.
Tip: DCM's Digital Program Insertion (DPI) feature can be used for seamless program
switching. More information concerning DPI can be found in section Digital
Program Insertion on page 505.
The Alternate Source Selection feature can perfectly be combined with Digital Program
Insertion. Multiple alternate services can be assigned to the Primary Channel of the
Splicing Channel.
Incoming Main
Service Service
Primary
Channel Spicing
Channel
Incoming
Incoming Alternate
Alternate
Services
Service Services
Service
Incoming Insertion
Service channel
540 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
Components within an incoming service can be merged into the main service or into
the alternate services. All components within an incoming service can be merged
by merged the complete incoming service or component merge rules can be created
to specify the components within a service that should be merged.
For service backup purposes, backup services can be assigned to the main, to the
merged, as well as to the alternate services.
Simple Incoming
Alternate Service
Alternate Incoming
Incoming Backed up Primary
with backup Services
Service Service Channel
Spicing
Incoming
Incoming Backed up Channel
Main alternate Services
Service Service Merge Service
with merging Merge Insertion
and backup Components Channel
Incoming
Incoming Backed up
Services
Service Service
Incoming
Service
Tip: A virtual service, which has no references to the input, can also be assigned to a
main service as alternate service (called virtual alternate service). More information
about virtual services can be found in topic Using Virtual Services on page 263. The
procedure to assign a virtual alternate service can be found in topic Adding a Virtual
Alternate Service on page 544.
Important:
After rebooting the DCM, the main service will always be activated, even if an
alternate service was active before.
Dragging and dropping in the DCM Outputs tree (non-advanced routing view)
always impacts the active alternate.
4011746 Rev W 541

Configuring Alternate Services

Adding or Deleting Alternate Services
Adding an Alternate Service using the Drag and Drop Method
The following steps describe how to add an alternate service to a main service using
the drag and drop method.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming service that should be added.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service to which the alternate
service must be added.
4 Right-click on this outgoing service and point to Advanced Routing in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The Advanced Routing tree of the selected service is displayed.
Sources for Program Switching branch.
Result: An alternate service is added to the Advanced Routing tree.
542 4011746 Rev W

Adding an Alternate Service using the Short-cut Menu

The following procedure describes how to add an alternate service to a main service
using the short-cut menu.
Tip: This method allows adding alternates that are not yet present at the input.
Even if the incoming Transport Stream is not present.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service to which an alternate
short-cut menu.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the Sources for Program Switching
branch and point to Add Alternate Source in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Alternate Source popup dialog is displayed.
5 In the Card drop down box, select the name of the interface card receiving the
Transport Stream to which the incoming service belongs to.
6 In the Port drop down box, select the name of the port receiving this Transport
Stream.
4011746 Rev W 543

7 In the Type drop down box, select the input port type:
device streams.
Note: The IP Address box is only applicable if the Type drop down box is set to
GbE Multicast.
9 In the UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port receiving this
Transport Stream.
Note: The UDP Port box is not applicable if the Type drop down box is set to
ASI.
10 In the SID box, enter the service identifier of the incoming service.
Result: An alternate service is added to the Advanced Routing tree.
Adding a Virtual Alternate Service

The following steps explain how to add a virtual alternate service to a main service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service to which a virtual
alternate service must be added.
short-cut menu.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the Sources for Program Switching
branch and point to Add Alternate Source in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Alternate Source popup dialog is displayed.
544 4011746 Rev W


Result: A virtual alternate service is added to the Advanced Routing tree.
Checking the Alternate Service Routing Overview

The following procedure describes how to display an overview of the alternate
service routing for a particular outgoing service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service for which an overview
of the alternate service routing must be checked.
short-cut menu.
4 Double-click on the main, an alternate, or a virtual service or right-click on the
service and point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Routing tab page of the Service - Alternates page containing the
Alternate Service Routing table is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 545

Tip: The Merged arrow can be used to merge an incoming service in the
corresponding outgoing service.
Determining the PCR of a Main, Alternate, or Virtual Outgoing Service

Introduction
For a main, alternate or virtual outgoing service a PCR PID value can be specified
that will be used in the generated PMT. An incoming PCR PID can be specified or a
dummy PCR (PCR PID without source PID reference) can be configured.
Important: Configuring a dummy PCR means that only the reference to that PCR
value will be updated in the PMT, no PCR packets will be generated.
To Determine the PCR

The following steps describe how to determine the PCR for a main, alternate or
virtual outgoing service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service for which the PCR
must be determined.

546 4011746 Rev W

Note: The No Input check box must not be set.

8 In the Input Selection - Card drop down box, select the card to which the
incoming PCR belongs to.
9 In the Input Selection - Port drop down box, select the port that receives this
PCR.
10 In the Input Selection - Type drop down box, select the input port type.
11 In the Input Selection - IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which
the source device streams.
Note: The Input Selection - IP Address parameter is only applicable if the Input
Selection - Type parameter is set to GbE Multicast.
12 In the Input Selection - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the port of
the incoming Transport Stream to which the PCR belongs to.
Note: The Input Selection - UDP Port parameter is not applicable if the PCR
belongs to an ASI input port.
13 In the Input Selection - PID box, enter the PID of the PRC.
4011746 Rev W 547

Adding a Dummy PCR

The following steps describe how to add a dummy PCR to a main, alternate or
virtual outgoing service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service for which a dummy
PCR must be created.

548 4011746 Rev W

9 Under the Output Selection settings, enter a PID for the PCR in the Preferred
PID box.
Deleting an Alternate Service

The following procedure explains how to delete an alternate service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service for which an alternate
service must be removed.
short-cut menu.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the alternate service that must be
removed and point to Delete in the short-cut menu.
Important:
Removing an alternate service also remove the associated backup and merged
service/components.
Removing an activated alternate source is not possible.
Merging a Service into a Main, Alternate, or Virtual Service

Introduction
All components within a particular incoming service can be merged into a main, an
alternate, or a virtual service. Merging an incoming service into a main, an
alternate, or a virtual service can be done in different ways, the following sub topic
describes these ways.
Tip: For more information concerning service merging please refer to topic Merging
Merging an Incoming Service using the Drag and Drop Method

The following procedure describes how to merge an incoming service into a main,
an alternate, or a virtual service using the drag and drop method.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming service that should be merged.
4011746 Rev W 549

3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service in which this incoming
service must be merged.
short-cut menu.
Main, the Alternate, or the Alternate: Virtual branch.
Result: The merged service is added to the tree.
Merging an Incoming Service using the Short-cut Menu

Perform the following steps to merge an incoming service into a main, an alternate,
or a virtual service using the short-cut menu.
550 4011746 Rev W

2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service in which an incoming
short-cut menu.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the main, alternate, or alternate:
virtual service branch and point to Add Merged Service in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Merged Service popup dialog is displayed.
Stream.
device streams.
GbE Multicast.
Transport Stream.
ASI.
Result: The merged service is added to the tree.
4011746 Rev W 551

Merging an Incoming Service using the Merge Details Sub Page

Perform the following steps to merge an incoming service into a main, alternate, or
virtual service using the Merge Details sub page.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service in which an incoming
short-cut menu.
4 Double-click on the main, an alternate, or an virtual service.
Result: The Alternate Service Routing table is displayed.
5 In the Alternate Service Routing table, click on the Merged arrow of the service
in which an incoming service must be merged.
Result: The Merged Service and Components table and Add New Merged
Service or Merged Service Component settings are displayed.
552 4011746 Rev W

6 Complete the following settings under the Add New Merged Service or Merged
Service Component settings.
service.
box is set to ASI.
g Press the Add command button.
Result: The service is added to the Merged Service and Components table.
4011746 Rev W 553

Removing Merged Services

The following steps describe how to remove merged services from a main, an
alternate, or a virtual service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service for which a merged
short-cut menu.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the merged service that must be
Merging Components into a Main, Alternate, or Virtual Service

Introduction
Particular components of an incoming service can be merged into the main, an
alternate, or a virtual service by defining component merge rules. All components
matching the rules exactly will be merged into the service.
Component merge rules can be defined in different ways:
by right-clicking on the service, specifying the incoming service to which the
components belongs to, and setting up the rule.
by dragging and dropping the incoming component to the service. A
component merge rule matching the component will then be created.
by setting up the rule using the Merge Details sub page.
Component merge rules applying to an incoming service are accommodated under
the Merged Comp branch related to this service. When component merge rules are
already available for a particular incoming service, component merge rules can then
be created by simply dragging a component of the corresponding incoming service
to the Merged Comp branch of this service or by right-clicking on this branch.
Tip: For more information concerning DCM's component merge rule feature, please
refer to topic Merging Particular Components of an Incoming Service in an Outgoing
Service on page 283.
554 4011746 Rev W

Creating a Component Merge Rule by Dragging and Dropping an Incoming

Component
The following procedure explains how to create a component merge rule by
dragging and dropping an incoming component to the main, an alternate, or a
virtual service.
component must be merged.
short-cut menu.
4 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming component for which a
matching component merge rule must be created.
to the branch of the main, the alternate, or the virtual service.
Important: Since dropping the component to another branch in the advanced

routing tree gives another action, dropping must be done precisely.
6 Repeat step 4 up to 5 for all incoming components for which a matching
component merge rule must be created.
Result: A Merged Comp branch is added containing the component merge rules.
4011746 Rev W 555

Note: When component merge rules are created for different incoming services,
a Merged Comp branch is added for each of these incoming services.
Tips:
Once a Merged Comp branch is present for an incoming service, a component
merge rule matching an incoming component of this service can be created by
dragging and dropped the component to this Merged Comp branch. Dragging
and dropping a component to a Merged Comp branch is not allowed if the
component is not part of the corresponding incoming service.
When components are dragged and dropped to the main, alternate, or virtual
service branch and a Merged Comp branch is already present for the
corresponding incoming service, the components are automatically added to this
Merged Comp branch.
Adding Component Merge Rules by using the Short-cut Menu

Perform the following steps to create a component merge rule for the main, an
alternate, or a virtual service.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service in which components
must be merged.
556 4011746 Rev W


short-cut menu.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the branch of the main, alternate, or
virtual service and point to Add Merged Service in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Merged Service popup dialog is displayed.
5 Tick the Select Components check box.
Result: The Input Component Selection dialog is added to the popup dialog.
6 Complete the following settings in the Add Merged Service dialog to specify the
incoming service for which a component merge rule must be created.
a In the Card drop down box, select the name of the interface card receiving
the Transport Stream to which the incoming component belongs to.
b In the Port drop down box, select the name of the port receiving this
Transport Stream.
c In the Type drop down box, select the input port type:
Note: The IP Address box is only applicable if the Type drop down box is set
to GbE Multicast.
e In the UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port receiving
this Transport Stream.
ASI.
f In the SID box, enter the service identifier of the incoming service.
4011746 Rev W 557

7 Complete the following settings in the Input Component Selection dialog to

create the rule.
a In the Track Type drop down box, select the component merge rule type.
b For a Tag type component merge rule, enter the tag of the component in the
Component Tag box.
c For a Stream Type type component merge rule, select the stream type of the
Stream Type box.
d For an ECM PID or ES PID type component merge rule, enter the PID value
Result: The component merge rule is added to the tree.
Tip: Once a Merged Comp branch is added which applies to an incoming service,
right-clicking on this branch and pointing to Add Merged Component in the
short-cut menu opens the Input Component Selection popup dialog that can be
used to create an additional component merge rule for the corresponding service.
558 4011746 Rev W

Adding Component Merge Rules by using the Merge Details Sub Page
The following steps describe how to add component merge rules for a main, an
alternate, or a virtual service using the Merge Details sub page.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service for which component
merge rules must be added.
short-cut menu.
4 Double-click on the main, an alternate, or an virtual service.
Result: The Alternate Service Routing table is displayed.
5 In the Alternate Service Routing table, click on the Merged arrow of the service
for which component merge rules must be created.
Result: The Merged Service and Components table and Add New Merged
Service or Merged Service Component settings are displayed.
complete the following settings to identify the incoming service for which
service.
4011746 Rev W 559


box is set to ASI.
7 Complete the following settings to set up a component merge rule:
a Tick the Select Component Merge Rule check box.
b In the Track Type drop down box, select the component merge rule type.
c For a Tag type component merge rule, enter the tag of the component in the
Component Tag box.
d For a Stream Type type component merge rule, select the stream type of the
Stream Type Value box.
e For an ECM PID or ES PID type component merge rule, enter the PID value
f Click on the Add command button.
Result: The component merge rule is added to the Merged Services and
Components table.
Removing Component Merge Rules

Perform the following steps to remove components merge rules using the Advance
Routing tree.
merge rules must be removed.
short-cut menu.
560 4011746 Rev W

4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the component merge rule that must
be removed and point to Delete in the short-cut menu.
Removing All Component Merge Rules Related to a Particular Incoming Service

Perform the following steps to remove all component merge rules related to a
particular incoming service.
merge rules must be removed.
short-cut menu.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the Merge Comp branch containing the
component merging rules that must be removed and point to Delete in the
short-cut menu.
Adding a Backup Service to a Main, Merged, or Alternate Service

Introduction
The main service as well as the alternate and merged services can be provided with a
backup service. A failing main, alternate, or merged service will then be replaced
by its assigned backup service. Assigning a backup service to the main service or to
an alternate or merged service can be done via a drag and drop action or via the
short-cut menu.
Tip: For detailed information about service backup, please refer to section Service
Backup on page 751.
Note: Assigning a backup service to a virtual alternate service is not possible.
Adding a Backup Service using the Drag and Drop Method

The following procedure describes how to add a backup service to a main, merged,
or alternate service using the drag and drop method.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming service that should be added.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service to which the backup
short-cut menu.
4011746 Rev W 561


Backup branch of the main, merged, or alternate service.
Result: The backup service is added to the corresponding Backup branch.
Adding a Backup Service using the Short-cut Menu

The following steps explain how to add a backup service to a main, merged, or
alternate service using the short-cut menu.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service to which the backup
short-cut menu.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the Backup branch of the main,
merged, or alternate service and point to Add Backup Service in the short-cut
menu.
562 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Add Backup Service popup dialog is displayed.
Stream.
device streams.
GbE Multicast.
Transport Stream.
ASI.
Result: The backup service is added to the corresponding backup branch.
4011746 Rev W 563

Removing Backup Services

The following steps describe how to remove backup services using the Advanced
Routing tree.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service for which the backup
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the backup service that must be
Configuring the Splicing Channel

Introduction
The following sub topics describe how to setup a Splicing Channel and how to
remove a Splicing Channel using the Advanced Routing feature of the DCM. Setting
up a Splicing Channel using Advanced Routing can be started via a drag and drop
action or via the short-cut menu.
Tip: For detailed information about Digital Program Insertion (DPI), please refer to
section Digital Program Insertion on page 505.
Configuring Splicing Channels using the Drag and Drop Method

drag and drop method of the Advanced Routing feature.
4 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to service that has to act as Insertion Channel.
564 4011746 Rev W

5 Select the branch of this incoming service and drag and drop this service to
Source for Splicing in the Advanced Routing tree.
4011746 Rev W 565

Channel.
566 4011746 Rev W

Note: For splicing events triggered by using the GPIO contacts, both the To
substitution.
components of the Primary Channel that do not match with a component of
Configuring Splicing Channels using the Short-cut Menu

short-cut menu of the Advanced Routing feature.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on Source for Splicing and point to Add
Splice Source in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Splice Source popup dialog is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 567

Channel.
568 4011746 Rev W

Notes: For splicing events triggered by using the GPIO contacts, both the To
substitution.
components of the Primary channel that do not match a component of the
Insertion Channel.
10 Under Insertion Channel, complete the following settings to specify the Insertion
Channel.
a In the Insertion Channel - Card drop down box, select the card to which the
port of the Insertion Channel belongs to.
b In the Insertion Channel - Port drop down box, enter the number of the port
to which the Insertion Channel belongs to.
c In the Insertion Channel - Type drop down box, select the input port type:
ASI, GbE Unicast, or GbE Multicast.
d In the Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address box, enter the multicast IP
address to which the source device streams.
applicable if the Insertion Channel - Type parameter is set to GbE Multicast.
e In the Insertion Channel - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the
port of the incoming Transport Stream to which the Insertion Channel belongs
to.
Note: The Insertion Channel - UDP Port parameter is not applicable if the
Insertion Channel belongs to an ASI input port.
f In the Insertion Channel - SID box, enter the service identifier of the
Insertion Channel.
4011746 Rev W 569

Removing the Splicing Channel

Perform the following procedure to remove the Splicing Channel of a service using
the Advanced Routing tree.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service from which the
Splicing Channel must be removed.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the Source for Splicing branch and
point to Delete in the short-cut menu.
570 4011746 Rev W

Performing Program Switching
Performing Program Switching

Introduction
Once alternate services are created and provided with backup, merged services
and/or merged components, a program switching operation can be started by
activating an alternate service or, when an alternate service is activated, by
activating the main service or another alternate service.
Activating the Service

The following procedure describes how to activate a service in the Advanced Routing
tree.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service for which a service
activation must be executed.
4 In the Advanced Routing tree, right-click on the service that must be activated and
point to Activate in the short-cut menu.
4011746 Rev W 571

7 Chapter 7
Scrambling
Introduction
This chapter describes how to integrate the DCM into scrambling
applications.
In This Chapter
Section A DVB Simulcrypt Scrambling........................................ 575
Section B BISS Scrambling.............................................................. 683
4011746 Rev W 573

Section A DVB Simulcrypt Scrambling
Introduction
This section outlines DVB Simulcrypt scrambling.
In this section
Introduction ................................................................................................. 576
Introducing Conditional Access System ................................................. 577
Steps To Take............................................................................................... 592
Changing the Scrambling Mode ............................................................... 595
Allowing Scrambling for Services ............................................................ 597
Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters .................................. 599
Configuring the Access Criteria................................................................ 647
Scrambling Control..................................................................................... 666
4011746 Rev W 575

Chapter 7 Scrambling
Introduction
A DCM is provided with a DVB Simulcrypt compliant scrambler, which is designed
to meet the DVB Simulcrypt conditional access specifications ETSI TS 103 197.
There are many Conditional Access Systems in use today and the goal of the DCM
devices is to integrate the devices in as many CA Systems as possible. The operator
using the DCM has a wide choice of Conditional Access Systems. To achieve this
interoperability, a common set of protocols and interfaces between scramblers and
CA System is required.
The scrambler of the DCM works on a per license basis, meaning each service that
must be scrambled or each service that contains components that must be scrambled
needs a Scrambling license. For more information concerning licenses, please refer
to topic Licensing on page 49.
Note: Scrambling is performed by the Co-Processor Card that is plugged on a GbE
Interface Card or ASI Interface Card. When a service or component in an outgoing
Transport Stream must be scrambled, the interface card streaming this outgoing
Transport Stream should be populated by a Co-Processor Card.
To integrate a DCM into a Conditional Access System, we provide the following
ROSA® NMS components:
SCS Configurator
The SCS Configurator is used to configure the scrambling-specific parameters of
the DCM devices. More information concerning the SCS Configurator can be
found in topic Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters on page 599.
AC Manager Component
The AC Manager Component can be used to specify Transport Streams and
services, to assign services to Transport Streams, to define access criteria, and to
assign access criteria to services. More information concerning the AC Manager
Component can be found in topic Configuring the Access Criteria on page 647.
Scrambling Control Task
The Scrambling Control Task can be used to start or to stop scrambling of
services or components. For more information about the Scrambling Control
Task, please refer to topic Scrambling Control on page 666.
Notes:
The procedure to integrate a DCM into a ROSA Network Management System
can be found in appendix Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS on page 923.
When a third party Event Information Scheduler is used in the Conditional
Access System, both the AC Manager Component and Scrambling Control Task
functionality are taken over by this Event Information Scheduler.
576 4011746 Rev W

Introducing Conditional Access System

Introduction
A Conditional Access System (CAS) is the basis in a Pay TV system to prevent
unauthorized reception of services (picture, sound, or data) and to secure the charge
of the subscribing remuneration. The following illustration depicts DCM
integration into a Conditional Access System.
Event
Information
Scheduler
Access Criteria
Scheduler
(P)SI
ECM Generator
Generator
Access Criteria
Control Word
SCGs
(P)SI Tables
ECMs
Control
Control
Word
Word Simulcrypt (P)SI DCM
Synchronizer Generator
Generator
Control Word
(P)SI
Tables
ECMs
MUX
TS Scrambler TS
Transport Stream
Database
EMM
Generator
Private Data
Generator
Subscriber
Management
System
4011746 Rev W 577

A CAS system combines scrambling of picture, sound, or data services with a

specific Scrambling/Descrambling key management system. Scrambling is the
process that uses a cryptographic algorithm to make services unintelligible for
non-authorized subscribers.
Scrambling, Control Word, and Cryptoperiod

At the transmission site of a Condition Access System (CAS), services multiplexed
into a Transport Stream can be scrambled using a particular scrambling algorithm
(also called DVB Common Scrambling Algorithm) with a scrambling/descrambling
key (named Control Word). At the receiver site the scrambled services can then be
descrambled by an appropriate descrambling algorithm using the same Control
Word (CW).
Transport Transport Stream with Transport
Scrambler Descrambler
Stream Scrambled Services Stream
CW
CW
To increase the security of a CA System the Control Word used to scramble and
descramble services changes periodically (typically every 10 seconds). The duration
of scrambling by one Control Word is named Crypto Period. Control Words, which
are typically 64 bits long, are generated by a Control Word Generator (CWG) and
requested by the Simulcrypt Synchronizer (SCS).
Transport Transport Stream with Transport
Scrambler Descrambler
Stream Scrambled Services Stream
CW
?
CWG
SCS
CW
Control Words cannot be delivered from the transmitter to the receiver site in the
clear, they need to be encrypted. The algorithm used to encrypt the Control Word
is unique to each CA System and implemented in a secure device of the descrambler
and uses the smart card of the customer’s Conditional Access Module (CAM).
Access Criteria and Access Rights

When a subscriber is only interested in particular services like sport and nature, he
only wants to pay for these services. Services, for which the subscriber doesn’t pay,
have to remain unintelligible. Therefore two parameters are defined, namely
Access Criteria and Access Rights:
Access Criteria is Conditional Access vendor specified information and specifies
service-related criteria that are applied to a package of services or elementary
streams. These subscriptions (also called theme or product) are encapsulated into
Entitlement Control Messages (ECMs). More information concerning ECMs can
578 4011746 Rev W

be found in topic Entitlement Control Messages on page 579.

Access Rights are stored on the smart card of the descrambler and determines
which services the subscriber can access. These Access Rights are periodically
reconfirmed using Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs). When the
Access Rights for a particular subscriber should be changed, EMMs are sent to
the descrambler containing the new Access Rights.
Example:
AC criteria 1, subscription = Football ECM1
AC criteria 2, subscription = Tennis ECM2
AC criteria 3, subscription = Snooker ECM3
A subscriber pays to view football and snooker programs. His set top box receives
all ECM packets that contain the appropriate control words. Besides that, the set
top box also receives EMM packets that contain the access rights for this set top box.
These rights are compared with the access criteria and the set top box is only
allowed to decipher the ciphered Control Words of the ECMs for which the
subscriber has Access Rights (ECM1 and ECM3).
Entitlement Control Messages

The Simulcrypt Synchronizer (SCS) triggered from the Event Information Scheduler
(EIS) to start a Conditional Access event, will get every Crypto Period a Control
Word (CW) for this event from the Control Word Generator (CWG).
Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX
Scrambler Transport
Stream ECMs Stream
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
Note: For more information concerning the Event Information Scheduler, please
refer to topic Event Information Scheduler on page 582.
4011746 Rev W 579

The Simulcrypt Synchronizer extracts the Access Criteria from the information
(named Scrambling Control Group) received from the Event Information Scheduler.
The synchronizer sends this Access Criteria together with the Control Word for the
corresponding Crypto Period to the Entitlement Control Message Generator
(ECMG). The Entitlement Control Message Generator encrypts both the Access
Criteria and the Control Word using a particular cryptographic algorithm with a
specific Service Key. This encrypted data is encapsulated into an Entitlement
Control Message (ECM) and sent to the Simulcrypt Synchronizer.
Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX
Stream Scrambler Transport
ECMs Stream
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
A certain time before the first Crypto Period for this event begins, the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer starts sending ECMs for this event at regular times to the multiplexer
(typically every 200 msec). This start time is necessary to give the descrambler time
to decrypt the encrypted Control Word and Access Criteria. The multiplexer
multiplexes this stream of ECMs with the outgoing Transport Stream. When the
event begins, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer sends the Control Word to the scrambler,
which starts scrambling the service(s) associated with this event.
Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX

ECMs Stream
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
580 4011746 Rev W

Before the end of the Crypto Period, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer requests a new
Control Word from the Control Word Generator, sends this new Control Word
together with the Access Criteria to the ECMG, and receives a new ECM for this
event from the ECM Generator. This new generated ECM is multiplexed in the
outgoing Transport Stream. When the Crypto Period is ended, the new Control
Word is sent to the scrambler, which starts scrambling the service(s) using the new
Control Word. This reiterates for every Crypto Period until the end of the event.
Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX
ECMs Stream
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
Entitlement Management Messages

The Entitlement Management Message Generator (EMMG) is a carrousel that
generates an Entitlement Management Messages (EMM) stream containing the
encrypted Access Rights to services.
EMMG
EMMs
Incoming Outgoing
Transport
MUX
Scrambler Transport
Stream ECMs Stream
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
4011746 Rev W 581

The EMM Generator also generates EMMs with encrypted keys to renew the service
and management keys used by the scrambler, and EMMs with instructions for the
descrambler (for instance clear areas of smart card, disable set top boxes...).
The EMM Generator offers the EMMs to the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream
or via the EMMG to MUX interface (TCP or UDP). When the EMMs are offered via
network communication, the multiplexer take cares of the EMM stream generation.
This EMM stream is multiplexed to the outgoing Transport Stream.
Event Information Scheduler

The Event Information Scheduler (EIS) is the functional unit in the Conditional
Access System that holds the schedule information, the configuration, and the
Conditional Access Information required for the complete Conditional Access
System.
Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX
Scrambler Transport
Stream ECMs Stream
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
To start a scrambling event the Event Information Scheduler provides the

Simulcrypt Synchronizer with a Scrambling Control Group (SCG) provisioning
message. A SCG provisioning message contains a list of services and/or
Elementary Streams that must be scrambled at the same time with the same Control
Word and a list with ECM Groups for which ECMs must be generated. An ECM
Group contains the necessary information, like Super_Cas_ID1, ECM_ID2, and Access
Criteria, to bind an ECM stream to a Conditional Access Provider.
1 The Super_Cas_ID is the concatenation of the CA_system_ID and the

CA_Subsystem_ID and is used to identify the ECM Generator within the Contitional
Access System.
2 The ECM_ID identifies an ECM stream within the Conditional Access System.
582 4011746 Rev W

To stop a scrambling event the EIS sends a SCG provisioning message update to the
Simulcrypt Synchronizer. The ECM Group for the event of which scrambling must
be stopped is removed from the SCG provisioning message. The following
illustration shows a SCG provisioning message.
SCG Provisioning
Message
Service ID xxx
.
.
.
SCG ID Components ID xxx
.
.
.
.
Activation Time
1 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
ECM
Groups
.
.
y Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
ECM ID
4011746 Rev W 583

PSI/SI Generator
When EMM and ECM streams are added to a Transport Stream, the Program
Specific Information (PSI) and the Service Information (SI) must be updated.
Conditional Access (CA) descriptors in the Program Map Table (PMT). The CA
descriptors in the PMT point to the Packet Identifier (PID) of the ECM(s).
Conditional Access (CA) descriptors in the Conditional Access Table (CAT).
The CA descriptors in the CAT point to the Packet Identifiers (PIDs) of the
EMMs.
The PSI/SI Generator (named PSIG) provides the multiplexer with the appropriate
PSI and SI tables for the outgoing Transport Stream.
PSIG EMMG
EMMs
(P)SI Tables
Incoming Outgoing
MUX
Transport Scrambler Transport
Stream Stream
P(SI) Tables
PSIG ECMs
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
The PSI/SI Generator inside the DCM responsible for the PSI and the SI table
generation and adaptation for the re-multiplexer functionality is also responsible for
the PMT and CAT adaptation for the scrambling functionality.
When a third party PSI/SI Generator is connected to the DCM, particular tables like
PAT, PMT, and CAT generated by the external connected PSIG overrule the tables
generated by the PSIG of the DCM.
Note: The DCM cannot update CA descriptors in a PMT if the PSI/SI information is
generated by an external PSIG. Therefore the Type parameter of the descriptor rule
must be set to Do Not Insert. For more information, please refer to topic Adding,
Changing, or Removing ECMG Descriptor Rules on page 614.
584 4011746 Rev W

Private Data Generator

The Private Data Generator (PDG) is a carrousel that generates a private data stream
containing data streams likes software upgrades for set top boxes, … The Private
Data Generator offers this stream to the DCM via an ASI input or over IP.
PSIG PDG EMMG
EMMs
Private Data
(P)SI Tables
Incoming Outgoing
MUX
Transport Scrambler Transport
Stream Stream
P(SI) Tables
PSIG ECMs
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
The multiplexer of the DCM inserts this stream into the outgoing Transport Stream.
Note: The Private Data Generator uses the same interface as the Entitlement
Management Message Generator.
4011746 Rev W 585

Scrambling Levels
Scrambling can be done on two different levels, namely: Elementary Stream Level
scrambling and Service Level scrambling. The following list describes these
scrambling levels:
Elementary Stream Level Scrambling: Each component of a service may be
scrambled by a separate Control Word. For example, video and audio may be
scrambled with a separated Control Word. This is useful in multilingual
systems where a premium is charged for a second audio in a different language.
In this case, each component or elementary stream is associated with its own
stream of ECM messages.
EMMG
Input TS Output TS
EMMs
PMT PMT
Transport Stream
MUX
Video PID Video PID
(P)SI Tables Scrambler
Audio PID CA Descriptor
PSIG ECMs
ECM PID
ES Video
CW Audio PID
ES Audio CWG CW
SCS
ES Video (scrambled)
(...,AC,...)
DCM ES Audio
CW/AC
ECMs
ECM PID
EIS EMM PID
ECMG
When scrambling at the elementary stream level, all Elementary Streams within
the service are scrambled using different Control Words. One ECM is required
for each Elementary Stream. The CA descriptors are inserted after each
elementary stream within the PMT.
586 4011746 Rev W

Service Level Scrambling: The alternative to elementary stream level scrambling

is to scramble all components that make up a service with the same Control
Word. In this case, there is only one stream of ECM messages associated with
the service as a whole.
EMMG
Input TS Output TS
EMMs
PMT PMT
MUX
Video PID CA Descriptor
Transport Stream Scrambler
Audio PID ECM PID
ECMs
Video PID
ES Video
CW Audio PID
ES Audio CWG CW
SCS
ES Video (scrambled)
(...,AC,...) DCM ES Audio (scrambled)
CW/AC
ECMs
ECM PID
EIS EMM PID
ECMG
When scrambling at the service level, all Elementary Streams within the service
are scrambled using the same Control Word. Only one ECM is required for
each service. The CA descriptor is inserted near the top of the PMT.
Note: Elementary Stream Level Scrambling and Service Level Scrambling can be
mixed within the scrambler but not within the same service.
4011746 Rev W 587

Simulcrypt Scrambling
Simulcrypt scrambling is a scrambling method whereby a single Transport Stream
contains ECMs and EMMs from different Conditional Access systems. This enables
different CA decoder populations to receive and correctly decode the same video
and audio streams.
Input TS Output TS
EMMG1 EMMG2 EMMGn
PMT PMT
Video PID EMMs CA Descriptor
MUX
Audio PID
Transport Stream Scrambler ECM 1 PID
ES Video ECM 2 PID

ECMs
ES Audio ECM n PID
CW
CWG CW Video PID
SCS
Audio PID
,...,ECMgrpn(...,ACn),...)
CW/ACn
CW/AC1
CW/AC2
(..., ECMgrp1(...,AC1),
ECMgrp2(...,AC2)
CSA(ES Video, CW)

ECM1s
ECMn
ECMs
CSA(ES Audio, CW)
ECM 1 PID
ECMG1 ECMG2 ECMGn ECM 2 PID
ECM n PID
EMM 1 PID
EIS
EMM 2 PID
EMM n PID
588 4011746 Rev W

Timing Parameters
When the Event Information Scheduler (EIS) triggers the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
the start of a new Conditional Access (CA) event using a Scrambling Control Group
(SCG ID 1) provisioning message, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer request a Control
Word (CW 1) from the Control Word Generator. Once the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
has received the Control Word from the CW Generator, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
sends the Control Word together with the Access Criteria and ECM ID extracted
from the Scrambling Control Group provisioning message to the ECM Generator.
The ECM Generator encrypts the Control Word and Access Criteria and
encapsulates this data into an ECM. The ECM Generator sends this ECM to the
Simulcrypt Synchronizer. A certain time before (t1-t2) starting the CA event
(Activation Time) the Simulcrypt Synchronizer start sending ECMs for the first
Crypto Period at regular times to the Multiplexer.
Transition Start Delay3 (t1-t2): represents the amount of time between the start
of the first Crypto Period following a clear to scrambled transition, and the start
of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
The multiplexer multiplexes these ECMs directly into the outgoing Transport
Stream. At the same time a CA descriptor containing the ECM PID is inserted into
the Program Map Table (PMT) of the Transport stream.
SCG SCG
ID 1 ID 1
SCG
Transmission ECM ECM ECM ECM
(CW 1) (CW 2) (CW 3) (CW L)
ECM
Transmission t1 t3 t4 tL+1
Crypto
Period CP 1 CP 2 CP L
t2 t5 tL
Service Clear Scrambled Scrambled Scrambled Clear

Status using CW 1 using CW 2 using CW L
Activation Time from the Activation Time from the

SCG provisioning SCG de-provisioning
message message
The Transition Start Delay must match the time the descrambler needs to
decapsulate the ECM PID from the PMT and to decrypt the Control Word and
Access Criteria. At the begin (t2) of the first Crypto Period (CP 1) the set top box
starts descrambling the scrambled service using CW 1.
3 A positive start delay parameter means that the ECM shall be delayed with respect to
the start of theCrypto Period. A negative delay parameter it means that the ECM shall
be broadcast ahead of this time. Only a negative Transition Start Delay can be used.
4011746 Rev W 589

A certain time (t3-t5) before the end of the running Crypto Period (CP 1) the SCS
stops transmitting ECMs attached to this CP and a certain time (t4-t5) before the next
Crypto Period (CP 2) the SCS starts transmitting ECMs for CP 2.
Stop Delay4 (t3-t5): represents the amount of time between the end of a Crypto
Period, and the end of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
Start Delay5 (t4-t5): represents the amount of time between the start of a Crypto
Period, and the start of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
When the Simulcrypt Synchronizer receives a SCG provisioning message update
from the Event Information Scheduler indicating the end of the running CA event,
the synchronizer extend the last Crypto Period until the end of the period match the
end of the activation time extract from the SCG provisioning message update.
Once the activation time (tl) is reached the set top box stops descrambling the
service. The Simulcrypt Synchronizer stops transmitting ECMs attached to this last
Crypto Period at time (tl+1).
Transition Stop Delay (tl-tl+1): this parameter represents the amount of time
between the end of last Crypto Period preceding a scrambled to clear transition,
and the end of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
When the Simulcrypt Synchronizer receives a SCG provisioning message containing
another Access Criteria for the service(s), the synchronizer stops sending ECMs
containing the previous Access Criteria at time t6 in the last Crypto Period and starts
sending ECMs with the new Access Criteria at time (t7).
SCG
ID 2
SCG
Transmission ECM ECM ECM ECM
(CW L) (CW L+1) (CW L+2) (CW L+3)
ECM
Transmission t 6 t7
Crypto
Period CP L-1 CP L CP L+1 CP L+2
t8
Service Scrambled Scrambled Scrambled Scrambled

Status using CW L-1 using CW L using CW L+1 using CW L+2
Activation Time
SCG ID 2
4 A positive stop delay parameter means that the end of the ECM broadcast shall be
delayed with respect to the end of the Crypto Period. A negative stop delay parameter
means that the ECM broadcast shall be ended ahead of time.
the start of the Crypto Period. A negative delay parameter it means that the ECM shall
be broadcast ahead of this time.
590 4011746 Rev W

AC Start Delay6 (t7-t8): represents the amount of time between the start of the
first Crypto Period following a change in the Access Criteria and the start of the
broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
AC Stop Delay7 (t6-t8): represents the amount of time between the end of the
lastCrypto Period preceding a change in Access Criteria, and the end of the
broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
During the connection setup between the Simulcrypt Synchronizer and the
Entitlement Control Message Generator, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer receives a
Channel Status Message containing particular timing parameters. When timing
parameters are missing or inaccurate, ROSA®’s SCS Configurator allows overruling
these parameters.
When a subscriber tunes into a scrambled service in a particular Crypto Period, the
scrambler is not able to scramble the service during the rest of this Crypto period
because he has only the Control Word for the next period. To solve this problem,
an Entitlement Control Message (ECM) can be provided with more than one Control
Word. The most Conditional Access Systems allow 1 or 2 Control Words in an
ECM. the Control Word of the current Crypto Period and the Control Word of the
next period.
SCG
ID 1
SCG
Transmission ECM ECM ECM
(CW 1-2) (CW 2-3) (CW 3-4)
ECM
Transmission
Crypto
Period CP 1 CP 2 CP 3
Service Clear Scrambled Scrambled Scrambled

Status using CW 1 using CW 2 using CW 3
Activation Time
the start of the Crypto Period. A negative delay parameter it means that the ECM shall
be broadcast ahead of this time.
7 A positive stop delay parameter means that the end of the ECM broadcast shall be
delayed with respect to the end of the Crypto Period. A negative stop delay parameter
means that the ECM broadcast shall be ended ahead of time.
4011746 Rev W 591

Steps To Take
Before the scrambling functionality of a DCM can be used, a number of actions must
be completed.
Installing the ROSA® NMS Software on a Computer
The ROSA NMS software must be installed on a computer. Fore more
information concerning the ROSA NMS software, please refer to the ROSA
Network Management System User’s Guide. Once the ROSA Software is
installed the following drivers must be installed within ROSA NMS. This
allows the computer running the ROSA NMS software to participate in the
Conditional Access System:
- IIOP Protocol Driver
- DCM Device Driver
- SCS Configurator
- AC Manager Component
- Scrambling Control Task Driver
The procedures to install these drivers are described in appendix Integrating a
DCM into ROSA NMS on page 923.
Mapping the DCM into ROSA NMS
The procedure to map a DCM into ROSA NMS can be found in appendix
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS on page 923.
Creating the Transport Stream Multiplex
The following actions must be performed to create a Transport Stream multiplex:
- Create an outgoing Transport Stream. The procedures to create an outgoing
Transport Stream can be found in topic Creating an Outgoing Transport Stream
on page 196.
- Pass the services to this outgoing Transport Stream. More information
about passing services to an outgoing Transport Stream can be found in topic
Passing Incoming Services to an Outgoing Transport Stream.
- Set the Scrambling parameter for the services that must be scrambled and
the services containing components that must be scrambled to Scrambling
Allowed. The procedure to set the Scrambling parameter of a service to
Scrambling Allowed is described in topic Allowing Scrambling for Services on
page 597.
- When EMM components are offered to the DCM via a Transport Stream, the
corresponding EMM components must be passed to the outgoing Transport
Stream. The procedure to pass EMM components can be found in topic
Passing EMM Components on page 312.
592 4011746 Rev W

Steps To Take
- When Private Data components are offered via a Transport Stream, these
components must be passed to this outgoing Transport Stream. The
procedure to pass such components can be found in topic Passing and
Removing Unreferenced Components on page 326.
Configuring the Simulcrypt Controller of the DCM
The following actions must be performed using the SCS Configurator.
- Configure the scrambling specific parameters.
- Assign one or multiple ECM Generator(s) to the DCM and configure the
ECMG-specific parameters.
- Assign one or multiple Event Information Schedulers to the DCM and
configure the EIS-specific parameters.
Detailed information concerning these actions can be found in topic Configuring
the Scrambling-Specific Parameters on page 599.
WARNING:
As long as no Event Information Scheduler is defined, the DCM is not able to
scramble.
Selecting the ECM ID Mode

Before access criteria can be assigned to services, the ECM ID mode must be set
to automatic ECM ID mode or fixed ECM ID mode. More information
concerning the ECM ID mode can be found in topic Changing the ECM ID Mode
on page 672.
Configuring the Access Criteria
The following steps should be executed using the AC Manager Component:
- Specifying the transport streams and services
- Assignment of services to transport streams
- Defining the CA System and the necessary Access Criteria’s
- Assignment of access criteria to the services
Detailed information concerning these steps can be found in topic Configuring the
Access Criteria on page 647.
Finalizing the Transport Stream Multiplex
- When EMM components are offered to the DCM via the EMM to MUX
interface, the corresponding EMM components must be passed to the
outgoing Transport Stream. The procedure to pass EMM components can
be found in topic Passing EMM Components on page 312.
- When Private Data components are offered to the DCM via the PDG to MUX
interface, the corresponding Private Data components must be passed to the
outgoing Transport Stream. The procedure to pass Private Data
components can be found in topic Passing Private Data Components on page
4011746 Rev W 593

320.
- The Streaming parameter of the Transport Stream must be set to Active. The
procedure to change the Streaming parameter is described in topic Activating
or Stopping Streaming on page 439.
Changing the Scrambling Mode
The scrambling mode of the Transport Stream must be set to DVB Simulcrypt.
The procedure to change the scrambling mode of a particular outgoing Transport
Stream can be found in topic Changing the Scrambling Mode for an Outgoing
Transport Stream on page 595.
Starting and Stopping Scrambling
Clear to scrambling or scrambling to clear transitions of services can be
performed using the Scrambling Control Task. Fore more information please
refer to topic Scrambling Control on page 666.
594 4011746 Rev W


Introduction
When a particular outgoing Transport Streams participates into a DVB Simulcrypt
CA application, the scrambling mode for this Transport Stream must be set to DVB
Simulcrypt.
Tip: The scrambling mode for a newly created outgoing Transport Stream will be set
to its default value. When the scrambling mode for most of the newly created
outgoing Transport Streams must be set to DVB Simulcrypt and the default value is
BISS Mode 1, it is useful to change this default value to DVB Simulcrypt. The
procedure to change this default value can be found in topic Changing the Default
Scrambling Mode to DVB Simulcrypt on page 596.
Note: The scrambling mode can only be changed via the web browser user interface
if you are logged on to the web browser user interface using a Security Account
belonging to the Administrators Security Group. More information concerning
security groups can be found in topic Web Browser User Interface Security on page 41.
Changing the Scrambling Mode for a Particular Outgoing Transport

Stream
The following steps explain how to change the scrambling mode for a particular
Security Group.
2 Point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking the Service link.
scrambling mode must be changed.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page containing the Scrambling Settings is
displayed.
5 Select DVB Simulcrypt in the Mode drop down box.

4011746 Rev W 595

Changing the Default Scrambling Mode to DVB Simulcrypt

During the Transport Stream creation process the scrambling parameter is filled in
with its default value. To facilitate the configuration of outgoing Transport
Streams, another value can be given to this default. Perform the following
procedure to change the default scrambling mode.
Security Group.
2 Point to the Configuration link.
default value should be changed.
displayed.
6 Under the Default Scrambling Settings, select DVB Simulcrypt in the Mode drop
down box.
596 4011746 Rev W

Allowing Scrambling for Services
Allowing Scrambling for Services

Before a service or components within a service can be scrambled, the scrambling
parameter of the service must be set to Scrambled Allowed. Each service of which
the Scrambling parameter is set to Scrambling Allowed occupies one Scrambling
license. The following steps explain how to change the Scrambling parameter of a
service.
scrambling parameter must be changed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Scrambling tab.
6 In the Scrambling drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Scrambling allowed: scrambling is allowed for the service or for components
belonging to the service.
No Scrambling: scrambling is not allowed for the service or for components
belonging to the service.
Note: The Scrambling drop down box is only applicable if the interface card of
the outgoing Transport Stream to which the service is passed is provided with a
Co-Processor Card.
4011746 Rev W 597

Tip: Information concerning the other parameters on the Service - Service sub page
can be found in topic Changing Service Parameters on page 413.
Note: If no or no more Scrambling Licenses are available, a warning appears after
pressing the Apply command button. More information concerning Scrambling
Licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 49.
598 4011746 Rev W

Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

Introduction
General
The scrambling-specific configuration parameters of the DCM can be adapted using
ROSA’s SCS Configurator or using the web browser user interface of the DCM.
About the SCS Configuration GUI

After opening the SCS Configurator user interface, all DCM devices that are mapped
into the Server Explorer of ROSA NMS, provided with scrambling licenses, and
containing services for which scrambling is allowed, can be found on the
Configuration tab of the GUI.
The SCS Configurator allows configuring the scrambling specific parameters and
assigning the following CA interfaces:
Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) interfaces
Entitlement Management Message Generator (EMMG) interfaces
Event Information Scheduler (EIS) interfaces
PSI SI generator (PSIG) interfaces
4011746 Rev W 599

Note: The number of CA interfaces that can be assigned to a DCM using the SCS
Configurator is restricted to 20.
Icons indicate the status of the connection between the interfaces and the DCM.
The following table describes the connection status icons.
Status Description
Icon
The connection between the DCM and the ECM Generator is closed.
The DCM tries to connect to the ECM Generator.
The connection between the ECM Generator and the DCM is in channel
establishing state.
The channel between the ECM Generator and the DCM is open.
The DCM waits for a connection from the Event Information Scheduler, the EMM
Generator, or the PSI Generator.
The DCM waits for a channel setup from the Event Information Scheduler, the
EMM Generator, or the PSI Generator.
The channel between the DCM and the Channel Event Information Scheduler, the
EMM Generator, or the PSI Generator is open
Entitlement Control Message Generators

Introduction
To establish communication between the Simulcrypt Synchronizer of the DCM and
an ECM Generator a TCP connection has to be made followed with a channel set up.
During the connection making process the Simulcrypt Synchronizer requires the IP
address and port number of the ECM Generator to establish the TCP connection and
needs a channel identifier to set up a channel. The operator can determine this
channel identifier or the Simulcrypt Synchronizer can pick a channel identifier from
the free channel identification pool.
TS
DCM TS + ECMs
ECMs
CW/AC
ECM
Generator
600 4011746 Rev W

The Simulcrypt Synchronizer also requires the knowledge of the mapping between
the Super CAS ID, which is a concatenation of the CA System identifier and the CA
Subsystem identifier, and the communication parameters. Once the channel is
established and the Event Information Scheduler (EIS) triggers the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer to request ECMs from the ECM Generator, an ECM stream is set up.
The number of ECM streams that can be set up between the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer and the ECM Generator within one channel is limited and depends on
the CA System.
Load Balancing
For backup and/or load sharing purposes several ECM Generators can
be connected to a DCM. The priority assigned to the communication channel
determines if the ECM Generators are used in load balancing or in backup
mode. When the channel priorities of the ECM Generators are equal, the ECM
Generators will work in load sharing mode. When the priority differs, the ECM
Generator with highest priority (= lowest number) acts as Main ECM Generator and
the one with the lowest priority as backup
Whenever DCM needs to set up a new ECM stream, the DCM will select a connected
ECM Generator. Then it will select the ECMG connection with the highest priority
that has available ECM capacity. If the generators have an equal priority, the one
with available ECM capacity and the least open streams will be selected. When the
load on an ECMG decreases, ECM streams will not be automatically spread over
equal priority ECMG.
As soon as channel connection with an ECMG is broken, or the ECMG runs out of
ECMG capacity, a new ECMG is selected according to the criteria above.
The ECMG working modes can be combined, for instance two generators with the
same priority (load sharing mode) and one with a lower priority (backup mode).
Note: If no capacity is available, no ECM stream will be set up and the service(s) can
not be scrambled.
Examples
Load Sharing
Suppose an application with two ECM Generators (IP A and B) with same
priority (prio 1) and with a capacity of 10 streams. During stream setup, the
streams are spread over the ECM Generators as follows:
IP A: streams 1, 3, 5, 7, 9
IP B: streams 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
When the DCM stops scrambling a number of services (corresponding streams 5,
7, and 9), no stream balancing is done.
IP A: streams 1, 3
IP B: streams 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
4011746 Rev W 601

ECMG backup
In our application, ECMG IP A has priority 1 and IP B priority 2. The streams
are shared as follows:
IP A: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
IP B: streams
If IP A fails, IP B takes over the load
IP A: streams
IP B: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
If IP A restores:
IP A: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
IP B: streams
When an additional stream is required, capacity will be taken from IP B.
IP A: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
IP B: streams 11
Load Sharing and ECMG Backup
Suppose an application with three ECM Generators (IP A, B, and C) with a
capacity of 10 streams. IP A and B have priority 1 and IP C priority 2. During
stream setup, the streams are spread over the ECM Generators as follows:
IP A (prio 1): streams 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
IP B (prio 1): streams 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
IP C (prio 2): streams
If IP A fails, the full capacity of IP B will be used and the rest from IP C.
IP A (prio 1): streams
IP B (prio 1): streams 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 1 ,3, 5, 7, 9
IP C (prio 1): streams 11
To Assign an ECMG Interface using the SCS Configurator

The following procedure explains how to add an ECMG interface to a DCM using
the SCS Configurator.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab, right-click on the DCM in question and select Add
ECMG… in the short-cut menu.
Note: The Add ECMG dialog is displayed.
602 4011746 Rev W

3 In ECMG Name box, enter the name of the ECM Generator. This name acts as a
label to facilitate the identification of the ECM Generator in the CA system. A
name of max 20 characters can be given to an ECM Generator.
4 In the ECMG Type drop down box, select one of the following items:
- Standard: DVB Simulcrypt
- Irdeto M_Crypt: (DVB Simulcrypt) creates streams even if no ECMs are
requested and overrules the Access Criteria with a fixed format containing
the Original Network Identifier (ON_ID), the Transport Stream Identifier
(TS_ID), and the Service Identifier (SID).
- Nagra NagraVision: (DVB Simulcrypt) overrules the Access Criteria with the
ECM identifier.
5 In the ECM PID Source drop down box, select the desired ECM PID source:
- ECM ID: the ECM Identifier from the ECM Group in the SCG Provisioning
message is used to determine the ECM Packet Identifier.
- Auto: the multiplexer of the DCM chooses the ECM packet identifier (PID)
from the list of free PIDs.
Note: The list of free PIDs, from which the multiplexer the ECM PID determines,
can be limited by defining limits (ECM PID Lower Limit and ECM PID Upper
Limit).
4011746 Rev W 603

6 In the CA SystemID box, enter the Conditional Access System identifier. This
identifier is defined in table 3 CA_system_ID of ETR 162 and used to indicate the
type of CA system applicable for the associated ECM stream. Contact your CA
vendor for more information.
7 In the CA SubsystemID box, enter the identifier of the Conditional Access sub
system. This parameter is used to differentiate multiple ECM Generators from
the same CA vender in the CA application. Contact your CA vendor for more
information.
8 Click the Add command button to add a connection entry in the Connections
table.
Result: A table entry is added.
9 In the Priority box of this entry, enter a channel priority number to determine the
ECMG working mode. More information concerning the ECMG working mode
can be found in topic Introduction on page 600.
10 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the ECM Generator. The octets of
the IP address must be separated by dots.
11 In the Port box, enter the port number of the ECM Generator used for this
channel.
12 When the Simulcrypt Synchronizer should determine the channel identifier for
this channel, the Automatic Channel ID Selection check box must be set.
Otherwise clear this check box and enter the channel identifier in the Channel ID
box. A number between 0 and 65535 is allowed.
Notes:
- When several ECMG connections should be established, repeat step 8 up to
12 until all these connections are made.
- Not all CA vendors support Automatic ChannelID Selection.
13 Point to the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
Note: A connection entry can always be deleted by pressing the Remove command
button after selecting the entry.
604 4011746 Rev W

To Assign an ECMG Interface using the Web Browser User Interface

The following procedure explains how to add an ECMG interface to a DCM using
the web browser user interface of the DCM.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Proxy link that
Result: The Configuration - Proxy sub page is displayed.
2 On the Configuration - Proxy sub page, click on the ECMg link.
Result: The Configuration - Proxy sub page containing the ECMg Proxy
Settings Overview table is displayed.
3 Point to the Add New ECMg command button.
Result: The Configuration - Proxy sub page containing the ECMg Settings and
the Connections table is displayed.
4 In ECMG Name box, enter the name of the ECM Generator. This name acts as a
label to facilitate the identification of the ECM Generator in the CA system. A
name of max 20 characters can be given to an ECM Generator.
5 In the ECMG Type drop down box, select one of the following items:
Standard: DVB Simulcrypt
Irdeto M_Crypt: (DVB Simulcrypt) allows empty ECM's to reset scrambling
Nagra NagraVision: (DVB Simulcrypt) prefetch less ECM's in advanced to
enable quicker use of updated AC.
6 In the ECM PID Source drop down box, select the desired ECM PID source:
ECM ID: the ECM Identifier from the ECM Group in the SCG Provisioning
message is used to determine the ECM Packet Identifier.
Auto: the multiplexer of the DCM chooses the ECM packet identifier (PID)
from the list of free PIDs.
4011746 Rev W 605

Note: The list of free PIDs, from which the multiplexer the ECM PID determines,
can be limited by defining limits (ECM PID Lower Limit and ECM PID Upper
Limit).
7 In the CA SystemID box, enter the Conditional Access System identifier. This
identifier is defined in table 3 CA_system_ID of ETR 162 and used to indicate the
type of CA system applicable for the associated ECM stream. Contact your CA
vendor for more information.
8 In the CA SubsystemID box, enter the identifier of the Conditional Access sub
system. This parameter is used to differentiate multiple ECM Generators from
the same CA vender in the CA application. Contact your CA vendor for more
information.
9 Click the Add command button to add an ECMG connection entry.
Result: A new row is added in the Connections table.
ECMG working mode.
channel.
Notes:
When several ECMG connections should be established, repeat step 8 up to
12 until all these connections are made.
Not all CA vendors support Automatic ChannelID Selection.
14 Repeat step 9 up to 13 for all connections that must be added.
15 Click on the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload command
606 4011746 Rev W

Adding ECMG Connection Entries using the Web Browser User Interface
The following steps explain how to add ECMG connections to a particular ECMG
interface using the web browser user interface of the DCM.
3 In the ECMg Proxy Settings Overview table, point to the Edit arrow of the
ECMg interface for which ECMG connections must be removed.
Result: The Configuration - Proxy sub page containing the ECMg Settings table
and Connections table is displayed.
4 Press the Add New Row command button.
Result: A new row is added to the Connections table.
ECMG working mode.
channel.
Notes:
When several ECMG connections should be added, repeat step 4 up to 8 until
all connections are made.
Not all CA vendors support Automatic ChannelID Selection.
9 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload command button
4011746 Rev W 607

Removing ECMG Connection Entries using the Web Browser User Interface
Perform the following procedure to remove ECMG connections using the web
browser user interface of the DCM.
ECMg interface for which ECMG connections must be removed.
Result: The Configuration - Proxy sub page containing the ECMg Settings table
and Connections table is displayed.
4 In the Connections table, tick the check box(es) of the connections that must be
removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Connections table, tick the
check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the [SHIFT]
key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be deleted.
5 Click on the Remove Checked Rows command button.
Changing the ECMG Specific Parameters using the SCS Configurator

Perform the following steps to change the properties of an ECM Generator using the
SCS Configurator.
2 On the Configuration tab, right-click on the ECM Generator for which
parameters must be changed and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Properties dialog for the selected ECMG is displayed.
608 4011746 Rev W

3 Adapt the parameters and press the OK command button to confirm or the
Cancel command button to abort the operation.
Note: More information concerning the ECMG parameters can be found in topic
To Assign an ECMG Interface using the SCS Configurator on page 600 or To Assign
an ECMG Interface using the Web Browser User Interface on page 605.
Changing the ECMG Specific Parameters using the Web Browser User Interface
The following procedure explains how to change ECMG interfaces using the web
ECMG interface entry for which settings must be changed.
4 Result: The ECMg Settings are displayed.
5 Modify the settings and press the Apply All command button to confirm or the
Reload command button to abort the operation.
Tip: A description of the ECMG setting can be found in topic To Assign an ECMG
Interface using the SCS Configurator on page 600 or To Assign an ECMG Interface
using the Web Browser User Interface on page 605.
Removing an ECMG Interface using the SCS Configurator

Perform the following steps to remove an ECM Generator using the SCS
Configurator.
2 On the Configuration tab, right-click on the ECM Generator in question and
select Remove in the short-cut menu.
Result: A confirmation box dialog is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 609

3 Press the Yes command button to confirm or the No command button to abort
the operation.
Removing an ECMG Interface using the Web Browser User Interface

Perform the following steps to remove ECMg interfaces using the web browser user
3 In the ECMg Proxy Settings Overview table, tick the check box(es) of the ECMG
interfaces that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the ECMg Proxy Settings
Overview table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press
and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must
be deleted.
610 4011746 Rev W

Overruling the ECMG Channel Status Message Parameter Values

Introduction
In normal circumstances the values in the Channel Status Message generated by the
ECM Generator are used by the Simulcrypt Synchronizer to determine the ECM
transmit timings. When particular values are missing or inaccurate and cannot be
changed on the ECMG, these values can be overruled using the SCS Configuration
GUI. The list below describes the parameters that can be overruled.
Overrule Max. Comp. Time: this parameter represents the worst-case time
needed by an ECM Generator to compute an ECM when all the streams in a
channel are in use. This parameter determines the ECM Request Interval
parameter used by the Simulcrypt Synchronizer. This parameter should be
changed if the ECM Generator complains about ECMG out of computational
resources.
Overrule Min. CP Duration: this parameter indicates the minimum amount of
time a control word shall be active before it can be changed.
Overrule Transition Start Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time
between the start of the first Crypto Period following a clear to scrambled
transition, and the start of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
Overrule Transition Stop Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time
between the end of last Crypto Period preceding a scrambled to clear transition,
and the end of broadcasting the ECM attached to this period.
Overrule Start Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between the
start of a Crypto Period, and the start of broadcasting the ECM attached to this
period.
Overrule Stop Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between the
end of a Crypto Period, and the end of broadcasting the ECM attached to this
period.
AC Start Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between the start
of the first Crypto Period following a change in the Access Criteria and the start
of broadcasting the ECM attached to this period.
Overrule AC Stop Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between
the end of the last Crypto Period preceding a change in Access Criteria, and the
end of broadcasting the ECM attached to this period.
Overrule Repetition Period: this parameter represents the amount of time
between two ECM packets at the output of the scrambler.
Overrule Max. Number of Streams: this parameter represents the maximum
number of simultaneous opened streams supported by an ECMG on a channel.
If the ECMG returns 0 no maximum is known, meaning the scrambler will not
limit the amount of streams on a channel and no ECMs will be requested from
the ECMG backup when maximum capacity is reached on the ECMG. To make
4011746 Rev W 611

sure an ECMG is not overloaded, the maximum number of streams can be

overruled.
The following table shows the minimum, maximum, and default values of these
parameters:
Parameter Minimum Maximum Default

Value Value Value
Maximum Compute Time (msec) 0 60,000 5,000
Minimum Crypto Period Duration (msec) 1,000 120,000 10,000
Transition Start Delay (msec) -30,000 0 -2,000
Transition Stop Delay (msec) 0 30,000 2,000
Start Delay (msec) -30,000 30,000 -2,000
Stop Delay (msec) -30,000 30,000 -2,100
AC Start Delay (msec) -30,000 30,000 -2,000
AC Stop Delay (msec) -30,000 30,000 -2,100
Overrule Repetition Period (msec) 0 30,000 100
Overrule Max. Number of Streams 0 30,000 512
Independent of the active/inactive state of a DCM participating in a CA application,

the DCM will be connected to the ECMG by default. To eliminate additional
ECMGs (main and backup source) to feed a backup DCM or to avoid the need of
additional licenses, this Enable Hot Backup feature can be switched off. When a
service backup trigger is given and this feature is switched off, the connection
between the main DCM and the ECMG will be lost and the connection between the
backup DCM and the ECMG established.
Overruling the ECMG Channel Status Message Parameter Values using the SCS Configurator
The following steps explain how to change the Advanced parameters using the SCS
Configurator.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA software,
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the ECM Generator for which values
must be overruled.
Result: The ECMG Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Select the Advanced tab.
Result: The Advanced tab is displayed.
612 4011746 Rev W

4 Set the check box of the parameter that must be overruled.

Result: The parameter box becomes editable.
5 Modify the corresponding value.
6 Set the Enable Hot Backup check box to enable this feature or clear the check
Overruling the ECMG Channel Status Message Parameter Values using the Web Browser User
Interface
The following steps describe how to change the advanced ECMG interface settings
using the web browser user interface of the DCM.
ECMg interface for which advanced settings must be changed.
Result: The ECMg settings are displayed.
4 Click on the Advanced link.
Result: The Advanced Settings are displayed.
4011746 Rev W 613

5 Set the check box of the parameter that must be overruled.

Result: The parameter box becomes editable.
6 Modify the corresponding value.
7 Set the Enable Hot Backup check box to enable this feature or clear the check
Adding, Changing, or Removing ECMG Descriptor Rules

Introduction
Conditional Access (CA) descriptors are data structures used to carry CA specific
information for services or Elementary Streams. The DCM devices are able to
update PMTs with CA descriptors according to the user configurable CA descriptor
rules. The SCS Configurator allows configuring CA descriptor rules and applying
these rules to descriptors.
Note: When the DCM scrambles a service or components within a service, CA
descriptors in the PMT are sorted using the values of the ECM PIDs to which the CA
descriptors apply, CA descriptors with lowest value come first. When a scrambled
service is passed from input to output of the DCM, the CA descriptor order is not
changed.
Adding a Descriptor Rule using the SCS Configurator

The following procedure explains how to add an ECMG descriptor rule using the
SCS Configurator.
614 4011746 Rev W

2 On the Configuration tab, right-click on the ECM Generator for which descriptor
rules must be created.
3 Select the Descriptor Rules tab.
Result: The Descriptor Rules tab is displayed.
4 Press the Add… command button.

Result: The Add Descriptor Rule dialog is displayed.
5 In the Name box, enter a name to facilitate the identification of the descriptor
rule in the application.
4011746 Rev W 615

6 In the Type drop down box, select the rule type:

- Add Private Data rule type: adds private data to the standard descriptor.
- Do Not Insert rule type: no standard descriptor insertion. This setting
prevents updating the CA descriptors in the PMT by the DCM if the PSI/SI
information is generated by an external connected PSIG.
Notes:
- Both the Insert drop down box and Private Data [Hex] box are grayed, if the
rule type is set to Do Not Insert.
- Private data is CA Vendor proprietary.
7 In the Insert drop down box, select the insertion level mode for the private data
part.
- According to EIS: the Event Information Scheduler determines the insertion
level.
- At ES Level: the insertion is performed at Elementary Stream level (even if
Service Level Scrambling is defined by the Event Information Scheduler).
8 In the Private data box, enter the private date.
Note: The number of characters entered in the Private Data [hex] box must be
even.
9 In the Applies to ECM ID(s) box, point to the Add… command button.
Result: The Add ID dialog displays.
10 In the Enter ID box enter the ECM ID to which the CA descriptor rule must be
applied.
11 Press the OK command button to confirm.
12 Repeat step 9 up to 11 until all ECM IDs are added.
13 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Close command button to
Result: The descriptor rule is displayed on the Descriptor Rules tab of the GUI.
Notes:
A DCM adds a standard CA descriptor to the PMTs of scrambled services or
Elementary Streams.
616 4011746 Rev W

When no IDs are added into the Applies to ECM ID(s) box, the descriptor rule is
applied to all ECMs. Since only one rule with empty Applies to ECM ID(s) box
is allowed, this rule will overrule the standard CA descriptor.
When IDs are added, the rule is only applied to the ECM IDs appearing in the
Applies to ECM ID(s) box. Only one rule can be effective for a certain ECM ID.
ECM IDs added to the Applies to ECM ID(s) box must be unique over all
descriptor rules for a certain ECM Generator.
Adding a Descriptor Rule using the Web Browser User Interface

The following procedure explains how to add an ECMG descriptor rule using the
web browser user interface of the DCM.
ECMg interface for which descriptor rules must be added.
4 Click on the Descriptor Rules link.
Result: The ECMg descriptor rule tables are displayed.
5 Under the New ECMg Descriptor Rule settings, complete the following settings.
a In the Name box, enter a name to facilitate the identification of the descriptor
rule.
b In the Type drop down box, select the rule type:
– Add Private Data rule type: add private data to the standard descriptor.
4011746 Rev W 617

– Do Not Insert rule type: no standard descriptor insertion. This setting

prevents updating the CA descriptors in the PMT by the DCM if the
PSI/SI information is generated by an external connected PSIG.
Notes:
– Both the Insert drop down box and Private Data [Hex] box are grayed, if
the rule type is set to Do Not Insert.
– Private data is CA Vendor proprietary.
c In the Insert drop down box, select the insertion level mode for the private
data part.
– According to EIS: the Event Information Scheduler determines the
insertion level.
– At ES Level: the insertion is performed at Elementary Stream level (even if
Service Level Scrambling is defined by the Event Information Scheduler).
d In the Data ID(s) box enter the ECM ID(s) to which the CA descriptor rule
must be applied. Multiple IDs must be separated by a comma.
e In the Private data box, enter the private date.
Note: The number of characters entered in the Private Data [hex] box must
be even.
f Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload command
Result: The new rule is added to the ECMg Descriptor Rules table.
Notes:
A DCM adds a standard CA descriptor to the PMTs of scrambled services or
Elementary Streams.
When no IDs are added into the Data ID(s) box, the descriptor rule is applied to
all ECMs. Since only one rule with empty Data ID(s) box is allowed, this rule
will overrule the standard CA descriptor.
When IDs are added, the rule is only applied to the ECM IDs appearing in the
Data ID(s) box. Only one rule can be effective for a certain ECM ID.
ECM IDs added to the Data ID(s) box must be unique over all descriptor rules
for a certain ECM Generator.
Changing Descriptor Rules Properties using the SCS Configurator

The following steps explain how to change descriptor rule properties using the SCS
Configurator.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the ECM Generator for which descriptor
rules must be changed.
618 4011746 Rev W


4 Select the CA description rule that should be changed and click on the
Properties… command button.
Note: Double-clicking on the CA description rule also opens the Properties
dialog of the rule.
5 The Descriptor Rule Properties dialog is displayed.
6 Adapt the descriptor rule parameters and press the OK command button to
confirm or the Cancel command button to abort the operation.
Note:
- ECM IDs can be removed by selecting the IDs and pointing to the Remove
command button. To select consecutive rules, click on the first rule that
must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and then click the
last rule that must be removed. To select rules that are not consecutive,
press and hold down [CTRL] key, and then click each rule that must be
removed.
- Deselecting an ID can be done by holding down the [CTRL] key and pointing
to the ID.
Changing Descriptor Rules Properties using the Web Browser User Interface
The procedure below describes how to change ECMG descriptor rules using the web
ECMg interface for which descriptor rules must be changed.
5 In the ECMg Descriptor Rule table, point to the Edit arrow of the descriptor rule
that must be changed.
Result: Edit ECMg Descriptor Rule settings are filled with the settings of the
selected descriptor rule.
4011746 Rev W 619

6 Modify the settings and press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel
Removing Descriptor Rules using the SCS Configurator

The following procedure explains how to remove a descriptor rule using the SCS
Configurator.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the ECM Generator for which descriptor
rules must be removed.
4 Select the CA Description rule(s) that should be removed.
- To select consecutive rules, click the first rule that must be removed, press
and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and then click the last rule that must be
removed.
- To select rules that are not consecutive, press and hold down [CTRL] key,
and then click each rule that must be removed.
5 Press the Remove command button.
620 4011746 Rev W

Removing Descriptor Rules using the Web Browser User Interface

The procedure below describes how to remove ECMG descriptor rules using the
ECMg interface for which descriptor rules must be changed.
5 In the ECMg Descriptor Rules table, tick the check box(es) of the descriptor rules
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the ECMg Descriptor Rules
table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold
deleted.
4011746 Rev W 621

Entitlement Management Message Generators

Introduction
The Entitlement Management Message Generator (EMMG) is a carrousel that
generates an Entitlement Management Messages (EMM) stream containing the
Access Rights to services. The EMM Generator also generates EMMs provided with
encrypted keys to renew the service and management key used by the descrambler
and EMMs with instructions for the descrambler. The EMM stream is multiplexed
into the outgoing Transport Stream.
TS
DCM TS + EMMs
EMMs
EMM
Generator
The EMM Generator presents the EMM stream to the Multiplexer using an ASI
Transport Stream or via a TCP connection. To establish communication over
Ethernet between the EMM Generator and the DCM a TCP connection has to be
made followed by a channel set up. Therefore the EMM Generator requires the IP
address and the listening port used by the DCM for this connection. When the
channel set up is complete a stream is established to transfer the EMMs from the
EMM Generator to the DCM.
The connection between the EMM Generator and the DCM supports both the TCP
and UDP protocol for streaming. In particular applications the UDP protocol is
more useful (less overhead) and in other applications the TCP Protocol (more
robust).
Note: If the EMMs are offered using an ASI stream, the ASI stream must be
connected to an ASI input of the DCM and passed to the output.
To Assign an EMMG Interface using the SCS Configurator

Perform the following steps to assign an EMM Generator to the DCM using the SCS
Configurator.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the DCM in question and select Add
EMMG… in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add EMMG dialog is displayed.
622 4011746 Rev W

3 In the EMMG Name box, enter a name for the EMM Generator. This name acts
as a label to facilitate the identification of the EMM Generator in the CA system.
4 In the TCP Port box, enter the number of the listening port used by the DCM to
establish the TCP connection with the EMM Generator.
Note: The TCP listening port number must be unique and cannot be used by
another EMM Generator, an Event Information Scheduler or a PSI Generator.
5 When the UDP protocol is used for data streaming, set the Use UDP Port check
box and enter the UDP port number, which is used by the DCM to receive UDP
packets, in the Use UDP Port box.
6 In the EMM PID Source drop down box, select one of the following items:
- Stream ID: the stream identifier
- Channel ID: the channel identifier of the connection
- Data ID: the private data stream identifier
- Packet ID: the packet identifier. This selection is only useful when the EMMs
are in transport stream packet format (EMM Section Grouping check box is
cleared).
- Auto: the multiplexer of the DCM chooses the EMM PID from the list of free
PIDs.
Note: The list of free PIDs, from which the multiplexer the EMM PID determines,
can be limited by defining limits (EMM PID Lower Limit and EMM PID Upper
Limit parameter).
4011746 Rev W 623

7 In the Max. Bandwidth box, enter the maximum bandwidth within the outgoing
Transport Stream allocated to the packets containing EMMs.
Note: This parameter is used for bandwidth negotiation purposes with the
EMMG. When the bandwidth of the EMM stream exceeds this parameter, an
error message is sent to the EMM Generator and an alarm is triggered in ROSA®
NMS. No packets will be dropped.
8 Set or clear the EMM Section Grouping check box.
- EMM Section Grouping check box is set: packets are filled with multiple
sections within one EMM provision (only if the section is smaller than the
packet).
Sections Packets
Sections
Packets
Stuffing
Header payload
- EMM Section Grouping check box is clear: the packet is filled with one
section per packet.
Sections Packets
Sections
Packets
Stuffing
Header payload
Sections Packets
Sections
Packets
Stuffing
Header payload
624 4011746 Rev W

To Assign an EMMG Interface using the Web Browser User Interface

The following steps explain how to assign EMMG interfaces to a DCM using the web
2 On the Configuration - Proxy sub page, click on the EMMg link.
Result: The Configuration - Proxy sub page containing the EMMg Proxy
3 Click on the Settings link that appears after pointing to the Add New EMMg
command button.
Result: The EMMG Settings are displayed.
4 In the EMMG Name box, enter a name for the EMM Generator. This name acts
as a label to facilitate the identification of the EMM Generator in the CA system.
establish the TCP connection with the EMM Generator.
another EMM Generator, an Event Information Scheduler or a PSI Generator.
6 When the UDP protocol is used for data streaming, set the UDP Port check box
and enter the UDP port number, which is used by the DCM to receive UDP
packets, in the UDP Port box.
7 Set or clear the EMM Section Grouping check box.
4011746 Rev W 625

EMM Section Grouping check box is set: packets are filled with multiple
sections within one EMM provision (only if the section is smaller than the
packet).
Sections Packets
Sections
Packets
Stuffing
Header payload
EMM Section Grouping check box is clear: the packet is filled with one
section per packet.
Sections Packets
Sections
Packets
Stuffing
Header payload
Sections Packets
Sections
Packets
Stuffing
Header payload
8 In the EMM PID Source drop down box, select one of the following items:
Stream ID: the stream identifier
Channel ID: the channel identifier of the connection
Data ID: the private data stream identifier
Packet ID: the packet identifier. This selection is only useful when the EMMs
are in transport stream packet format (EMM Section Grouping check box is
cleared).
Auto: the multiplexer of the DCM chooses the EMM PID from the list of free
PIDs.
626 4011746 Rev W

Note: The list of free PIDs, from which the multiplexer the EMM PID determines,
can be limited by defining limits (EMM PID Lower Limit and EMM PID Upper
Limit parameter).
9 In the Max. Bandwidth box, enter the maximum bandwidth within the outgoing
Transport Stream allocated to the packets containing EMMs.
Note: This parameter is used for bandwidth negotiation purposes with the
EMMG. When the bandwidth of the EMM stream exceeds this parameter, an
error message is sent to the EMM Generator and an alarm is triggered in ROSA
NMS. No packets will be dropped.
Changing the EMMG Specific Parameters using the SCS Configurator

The following steps explain how to change the EMMG specific parameters using the
SCS Configurator.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the EMM Generator interface for which
parameters must be changed and select Properties… in the short-cut menu.
Result: The EMMG Properties dialog is displayed.
Note: More information concerning the EMMG parameters can be found in topic
To Assign an EMMG Interface using the SCS Configurator on page 622 or To Assign
an EMMG Interface using the Web Browser User Interface on page 625.
Changing the EMMG Specific Parameters using the Web Browser User Interface
The following procedure explains how to change EMMG interfaces using the web
3 In the EMMg Proxy Settings Overview table, point to the Edit arrow of the
EMMG interface entry for which settings must be changed.
4011746 Rev W 627

4 Result: The EMMg Settings are displayed.
5 Modify the settings and press the Apply All command button to confirm or the
Reload command button to abort the operation.
Removing an EMMG Interface using the SCS Configuration

Perform the following steps to remove an EMMG interface from the DCM using the
SCS Configuration.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on EMMG interface that should be removed
and select Remove in the short-cut menu.
Result: A confirmation dialog is displayed.
Removing an EMMG Interface using the Web Browser User Interface

Perform the following steps to remove EMMG interfaces using the web browser user
628 4011746 Rev W

3 In the EMMg Proxy Settings Overview table, tick the check box(es) of the
EMMG interfaces that must be removed.
4
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the EMMg Proxy Settings
Overview table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press
and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must
be deleted.
Adding, Changing, or Removing EMMG Descriptor Rules

Introduction
The DCM devices are able to update CATs with CA descriptors according to the user
configurable CA descriptor rules. The SCS Configurator allows configuring
descriptor rules and applying these rules to descriptors.
Note: In a CAT, CA descriptors are sorted using the values of the EMM data PIDs to
which the CA descriptors applies, CA descriptors with lowest value come first.
Adding Descriptor Rules using the SCS Configurator

Perform the following steps to add an EMMG descriptor rule using the SCS
Configurator.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the EMM Generator for which descriptor
rules must be created.
4011746 Rev W 629

4 Press the Add ... command button.

Result: The Add Descriptor Rule dialog is displayed.
5 In the Name box, enter a name to identify the descriptor in the application.
6 In the Private Data [Hex] box, enter the private data.
Result: The number of characters entered in the Private Data [Hex] box must be
even.
7 In the Applies to Data ID(s) box, point to the Add… command button.
Result: The Add ID dialog is displayed.
630 4011746 Rev W

8 In the Enter ID box, enter the EMM data ID to which the CA descriptor rule
must be applied.
10 Repeat step 8 up to 10 until all EMM data IDs are added.
11 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Close command button to
Result: The descriptor rule is displayed on the Descriptor Rules tab of the GUI.
Notes:
A DCM adds a standard CA descriptor to the CATs of scrambled services or
Elementary Streams if:
- no CA descriptor rule is configured
or
- a CA descriptor rule is configured with empty Applies to Data ID(s) box
The EMM IDs added to the Applies to Data ID(s) box must be unique over all
descriptor rules for a certain EMM Generator.
Adding Descriptor Rules using the Web Browser User Interface

The following procedure explains how to add an EMMG descriptor rule using the
EMMg interface for which descriptor rules must be added.
Result: The EMMg settings are displayed.
Result: The EMMg descriptor rule tables are displayed.
4011746 Rev W 631

5 Under the New EMMg Descriptor Rule settings, complete the following
settings.
a In the Name box, enter a name to identify the descriptor in the application.
b In the Data ID(s) box, enter the EMM data IDs to which the CA descriptor
rule must be applied. Multiple IDs must be separated by a comma.
c In the Private Data [Hex] box, enter the private data.
Note: The number of characters entered in the Private Data [Hex] box must
be even.
d Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload command
Changing Descriptor Rules Properties using the SCS Configurator

The following steps explain how to change descriptor rule properties using the SCS
Configurator.
rules must be changed.
4 Select the CA description rule that should be changed and click on the
Properties… command button.
5 The Descriptor Rule Properties dialog is displayed.
6 Adapt the descriptor rule parameters and press the OK command button to
confirm or the Cancel command button to abort the operation.
632 4011746 Rev W

Note: EMM data IDs can be removed by selecting the IDs and pointing to the
Remove command button. To select consecutive rules, click the first rule, press and
hold down the [SHIFT] key, and then click the last rule. To select rules that are not
consecutive, press and hold down [CTRL] key, and then click each rule.
Deselecting an ID can be done by holding down the [CTRL] key and pointing to the
ID.
Changing Descriptor Rules Properties using the Web Browser User Interface
The procedure below describes how to change EMMG descriptor rules using the
EMMg interface for which descriptor rules must be changed.
5 In the EMMg Descriptor Rule table, point to the Edit arrow of the descriptor
rule that must be changed.
Result: The Edit EMMg Descriptor Rule settings are filled with the settings of
the selected descriptor rule.
6 Modify the settings and press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel
4011746 Rev W 633

Removing Descriptor Rules using the SCS Configurator

The following procedure explains how to remove a descriptor rule using the SCS
Configurator.
rules must be removed.
4 Select the CA Description rule(s) that should be removed.
- To select consecutive rules, click the first rule that must be removed, press
and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and then click the last rule that must be
removed.
- To select rules that are not consecutive, press and hold down [CTRL] key,
and then click on each rule that must be removed.
5 Press the Remove command button.
Removing Descriptor Rules using the Web Browser User Interface

The procedure below describes how to remove EMMG descriptor rules using the
EMMg interface for which descriptor rules must be changed.
634 4011746 Rev W

5 In the EMMg Descriptor Rules table, tick the check box(es) of the descriptor
rules that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the EMMg Descriptor Rules
table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold
deleted.
Event Information Schedulers

Introduction
The Event Information Scheduler (EIS) provides the Simulcrypt Synchronizer with
Scrambling Control Groups (SCGs) containing the relevant information to scramble
services. To establish communication between the EIS and the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer a TCP connection should be made followed by a channel set up. Once
the connection is made the Simulcrypt Synchronizer of the DCM receives Scrambling
Control Groups from the Event Information Scheduler.
TS
DCM TS
SCGs
Event
Information
Scheduler
To set up a TCP connection between the Event Information Scheduler and the DCM,
the EIS requires the knowledge of the IP address and TCP port of the DCM used to
establish the connection.
4011746 Rev W 635

Note: ROSA NMS, our Network Management System, can serve as Event
Information Scheduler if both the AC Management Component and Scrambling
Control Task are installed. The computer running the ROSA software obtains the
required knowledge during the device mapping process.
To Assign an EIS Interface using the SCS Configurator

The following procedure explains how to assign an Event Information Scheduler
interface to a DCM using the SCS Configurator.
Standard EIS in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Standard EIS dialog is displayed.
3 In the EIS Name box, enter a name for the Event Information Scheduler. This
name acts as a label to identify the Event Information Scheduler in the CA
System.
establish the TCP connection with the Event Information Scheduler.
Note: The TCP listening port number must be unique and cannot be used by an
EMM Generator or a PSI Generator.
5 In the EIS Type drop down box, select one of the following items:
- SA Specific: the Event Information Scheduler of ROSA NMS
- General: a third party Event Information Scheduler
Note: Only one SA EIS can be assigned to a DCM.
6 When the Crypto Period parameter encapsulated into Scrambling Control
Groups are missing or inaccurate, this parameter can be overruled by setting the
Overrule Recommended CP Duration check box. In the box that becomes
editable after setting the check box, enter the desired Crypto Period.
636 4011746 Rev W

To Assign an EIS Interface using the Web Browser User Interface

The following procedure explains how to add an EIS interface to the DCM using the
2 On the Configuration - Proxy sub page, click on the EIS link.
Result: The Configuration - Proxy sub page is displayed containing the EIS
Proxy Settings and Add EIS Proxy Setting table.
3 Under the Add EIS Proxy Settings, complete the following settings:
a In the EIS Name box, enter a name for the Event Information Scheduler.
This name acts as a label to identify the Event Information Scheduler in the
CA System.
b In the TCP Port box, enter the number of the listening port used by the DCM
to establish the TCP connection with the Event Information Scheduler.
an EMM Generator or a PSI Generator.
c In the EIS Type drop down box, select one of the following items:
– SA Specific: the Event Information Scheduler of ROSA NMS
– General: a third party Event Information Scheduler
Note: Only one SA EIS can be assigned to a DCM.
d When the Crypto Period parameter encapsulated into Scrambling Control
Groups are missing or inaccurate, this parameter can be overruled by setting
the Overrule Recommended CP Duration check box. In the box that
becomes editable after setting the check box, enter the desired Crypto Period.
e Press the Add command button to confirm.
Result: The EIS interface is added to the EIS Proxy Settings table.
4011746 Rev W 637

Changing the EIS Interface Connection Parameters using the SCS Configurator
The following steps explain how to change the parameters of the EIS interface
connection using the SCS Configurator.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the EIS interface that must be adapted
and select Properties… in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Standard EIS Properties dialog is displayed.
Note: More information concerning the ECMG parameters can be found in
subtopic To Assign an EIS Interface earlier in this topic.
Changing the EIS Interface Connection Parameters using the Web Browser User
Interface
The following procedure explains how to change the settings of an EIS interface
using the web browser user interface of the DCM.
3 In the EIS Proxy Settings table, modify the settings and press the Apply All
operation.
Tip: A description of the PSIG setting can be found in topic
638 4011746 Rev W

Removing an EIS Interface using the SCS Configurator

Perform the following steps to remove an EIS interface from the DCM using the SCS
Configurator.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the EIS interface that should be removed
and select Remove in the short-cut menu.
3 Click the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
Removing an EIS Interface using the Web Browser User Interface

The following procedure describes how to remove EIS interfaces using the web
3 In the EIS Proxy Settings table, tick the check boxes of all EIS interfaces that
must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the EIS Proxy Settings table,
tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the
4011746 Rev W 639

PSI/SI Generators
Introduction
The main function of the PSI/SI Generator (so called PSIG) is to provide the
multiplexer with the necessary Program Specific Information (PSI) / Service
Information (SI) tables for the outgoing Transport Stream. The PSI/SI Generator
receives its primary data from the Event Information Scheduler and supplementary
data from the C(P)SI Generator.
TS
DCM TS
PSI tables
PSI
Generator
The connection between the PSI/SI Generator and the multiplexer of the DCM is a
client/server connection with the PSI/SI Generator the client and the DCM the
server. To establish communication between the PSI/SI Generator and the DCM a
TCP connection have to be made followed with a channel set up and a stream set up.
To Assign a PSI/SI Generator Interface using the SCS Configurator

Perform the following steps to assign a PSI/SI Generator to a DCM using the SCS
Configurator.
Standard PSIG in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Standard PSIG dialog is displayed.
640 4011746 Rev W

3 In the PSIG Name box, enter a name for the PSI/SI Generator. This name acts
as a label to facilitate the identification of the PSI/SI Generator in the CA System.
4 In the TCP Port box, enter the number of the TCP port used by the DCM to
establish connection with the PSI/SI Generator.
Note: The TCP listening port number must be unique and cannot be used by an
EMM Generator or an Event Information Scheduler.
5 In the Max. Bandwidth box, enter the maximum bandwidth for the PSI/SI
stream that can be used between the DCM and the PSI/SI Generator.
6 In the PSIG Type drop down box, select one of the following items:
SA Specific: the PSIG of ROSA NMS
General: a third party PSIG
Note: Only one SA PSIG can be assigned to a DCM.
To Assign a PSI/SI Generator Interface using the Web Browser User Interface
The following steps explain how to add a PSIG interface to the DCM using the web
2 On the Configuration - Proxy sub page, click on the PSIG link.
Result: The Configuration - Proxy sub page is displayed containing the PSIG
Proxy Settings and Add PSIG Proxy Settings table.
3 Under the Add PSIG Proxy Settings, complete the following settings:
a In the PSIG Name box, enter a name for the interface. This name acts as a
label to facilitate the identification of the PSI/SI Generator in the application.
b In the TCP Port box, enter the number of the TCP port used by the DCM to
establish connection with the PSI/SI Generator.
an EMM Generator or an Event Information Scheduler.
c In the Max. Bandwidth box, enter the maximum bandwidth for the PSI/SI
stream that can be used between the DCM and the PSI/SI Generator.
4011746 Rev W 641

d Tick the Do Not Modify check box to enable the Pure Import Tables feature or
disable this check box otherwise.
DCM's Pure Import Tables feature allows inserting PSI/SI/PSIP information
coming from a PSIG into an outgoing Transport Stream without modifying
this information, meaning the tables are played out exactly as imported
(binary identical).
e In the PSIG Type drop down box, select one of the following items:
– SA Specific: the PSIG of ROSA NMS
– General: a third party PSIG
Note: Only one SA PSIG can be assigned to a DCM.
f Press the Add command button to confirm.
Result: The PSIG interface is added to the PSIG Proxy Settings table.
Changing the PSIG Interface Connection Parameters using the SCS Configurator
Perform the following steps to adapt the parameters of the connection between a
PSI/SI generator interface and the DCM using the SCS Configurator.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the PSIG interface that should be
adapted and select Add Standard PSIG in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Standard PSIG Properties dialog is displayed.
Note: More information concerning the PSIG parameters can be found in sub
topic To Assign a PSI/SI Generator Interface using the SCS Configurator on page 640
or To Assign a PSI/SI Generator Interface using the Web Browser User Interface on
page 641.
Changing the PSIG Interface Connection Parameters using the Web Browser
User Interface
Perform the following steps to adapt the parameters of the connection between a
PSI/SI generator interface and the DCM using the web browser user interface of the
DCM.
642 4011746 Rev W

3 In the PSIG Proxy Settings table, modify the settings and press the Apply All
operation.
Tip: A description of the PSIG setting can be found in topic To Assign a PSI/SI
Generator Interface using the SCS Configurator on page 640 or To Assign a PSI/SI
Generator Interface using the Web Browser User Interface on page 641.
Removing a PSIG Interface using the SCS Configurator

Perform the following steps to remove a PSIG interface from the DCM using the SCS
Configuration.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the PSIG interface that should be
removed and select Remove in the short-cut menu.
3 Click the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
Removing a PSIG Interface using the Web Browser User Interface

The following procedure describes how to remove PSIG interfaces using the web
4011746 Rev W 643

3 In the PSIG Proxy Settings table, tick the check boxes of all PSIG interfaces that
must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the PSIG Proxy Settings table,
tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the
Changing the Scrambler Properties

Introduction
The following SCS settings can be changed:
Check Scrambling Control Group at Provisioning Time Option
When the Check SCG at Provisioning Time function is switched on and the
Simulcrypt Synchronizer receives a Scrambling Control Group provisioning
message from the Event Information Scheduler, the DCM will check the presence
of the Elementary Streams/service(s) in the incoming Transport Stream with the
service(s) listed in the Scrambling Control Group provisioning message. If the
incoming Transport Stream contains the service(s) the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
will accept the Scrambling Control Group. Otherwise the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer will refuse the Scrambling Control Group and returns a Scrambling
Control Group error message to the Event Information Scheduler.
When the Check SCG at Provisioning Time function is switched off, the DCM
checks the Transport Stream on service(s) presence at the moment (activation
time) the scrambler starts the scrambling process for this (these) service(s).
Scrambling Control Group Accept Delay
After powering up the DCM the multiplexer starts analyzing the incoming
Transport Stream if the Check Elements at Provisioning Time function is
switched on. During this Transport Stream analyzing process the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer answers on received Scrambling Control Group provisioning
messages with Scrambling Control Group error messages and the Scrambling
Control Groups are refused. Defining a Scrambling Control Group Accept
Delay can solve this problem.
644 4011746 Rev W

Scramble only Audio/Video

The DCM can scramble all components of a service or only the video and audio
component of a service (in case of service level scrambling).
Strong Pairing Enforcement
Switches on or off the NDS strong pairing enforcement.
To Change the Scrambler Properties using the SCS Configuration

Perform the following steps to change scrambler properties using the SCS
Configurator.
2 On the Configuration tab, right-click on the DCM in question and select
Properties… in the short cut menu.
Note: The Scrambler Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Set or clear the Check SCG at Provision Time check box.

4 In the SCG Accept Delay box, enter the amount of time that is used after
powering the device before accepting Scrambling Control Groups. A delay time
between 0 and 120 seconds can be entered.
Note: The SCG Accept Delay box is only applicable if the Check SCG at
Provision Time check box is set.
5 Set or clear the Scramble only Audio/Video check box.
6 Set or clear the Strong Pairing Enforcement check box. This check box is only
applicable for a DCM with software package version 5.5 or higher.
To Change the Scrambler Properties using the Web Browser User Interface
Perform the following steps to change scrambler properties using the web browser
4011746 Rev W 645

2 On the Configuration - Proxy sub page, click on the General link.

Result: The Configuration - Proxy sub page containing the SCS Settings is
displayed.
3 Set or clear the Scramble only Audio/Video check box.

4 Set or clear the Check SCG at Provision Time check box.
5 In the SCG Accept Delay box, enter the amount of time that is used after
powering the device before accepting Scrambling Control Groups. A delay time
between 0 and 120 seconds can be entered.
Note: The SCG Accept Delay box is only applicable if the Check SCG at
Provision Time check box is set.
6 Set or clear the Strong Pairing Enforcement check box.
646 4011746 Rev W


Introduction
General
The ROSA® AC Manager Component allows the following actions:
Specification of transport streams, services, and components
Assignment of services to transport streams
Defining the CA System and the necessary access criteria
Assignment of access criteria to services and components
About the AC Manager Component GUI

After opening the AC Manager Component user interface, the main window gives
an overview of the services, the corresponding transport stream and the assigned
access criteria. A pop-up dialog allows you to configure the access criteria and
assign them to services or components.
4011746 Rev W 647

General Settings
To Change the Number Format
This allows you to change the number format. You can change the number format
from decimal to hexadecimal or vice versa.
1 In the Settings menu, move to NumberFormat.
2 Select the Hex or Dec NumberFormat.
- Hex: to view the values as hexadecimal values.
- Dec: to view the values as decimal values.
Setting up the Transport Stream Model

Introduction
Before Access Criteria can be assigned to services or components, the Transport
Stream model must be setup in the AC Manager Component. This setup can be
performed by loading the Transport Stream model from the DCM device(s) or by
defining the Transport Stream, services, and components manually. The AC
Manager Component supports two different upload scenarios:
The Clear & Reload TS Model upload: this upload scenario replaces the
Transport Stream model of the AC Manager Component by the Transport
Stream model uploaded from the DCM device(s). This action can be executed
for a single Transport Stream or for multiple Transport Streams.
The Check for New Service ID upload: this upload scenario performs a
synchronization action between the AC Manager Component and the DCM
device(s). New services in the Transport Stream of the device(s), of which the
service IDs are not present in the Transport Streams of the AC Manager
Component, will be added to the Transport Stream tree.
Services removed from the Transport Stream of the device(s) remain in the
Transport Stream tree of the AC Manager Component.
WARNING:
After executing a Clear & Reload TS Model upload, services or components with
Access Criteria assignments loose these assignments, meaning scrambled
services or components become clear.
Note: During an upload action only the Transport Stream model is uploaded with:
- the Transport Streams containing services for which scrambling is allowed
- the services for which scrambling is allowed
The corresponding Access Criteria, Access Criteria assignments, and Scrambling
Control Groups (scrambling configuration) are not uploaded.
648 4011746 Rev W

To Set up the TS Model by Uploading the TS Model from the DCM Device(s)
The following steps explain how to upload the Transport Stream model from the
DCM device(s).
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component user
interface.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab page is displayed.
2 Select TransportStreams to upload the model for multiple Transport Streams or
a particular Transport Stream to upload the model for this single Transport
Stream.
3 Right-Click and point to Load Model From Device(s)….
Result: The Load Model from Devices dialog is displayed.
4 Set the Overwrite the Database Model check box to perform a Clear & Reload
TS Model upload or clear the check box to perform a Check for New Service ID
upload.
5 Set the Load Components check box to load services with components (for
Elementary Stream Level scrambling) or clear the check box to load the services
without components (for Service Level scrambling).
6 In the list box, select the Transport Stream(s) for which the TS model must be
uploaded.
Notes:
- You can select a range of devices by holding down the [Shift] key or a
number of devices by holding down the [Ctrl] key.
- On the Load Model from Devices dialog, a Transport stream is indicated
using the following parameters:
4011746 Rev W 649

Device Name: the device name to which the Transport Stream belongs
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream
Additional TS Info: additional information of the Transport Stream like:
board number, port number, IP Address, and UDP Port number.
7 Point to the Select command button.
Note: A selected Transport Stream (indicated by a ) can be deselected by
pointing to the corresponding Transport Stream and clicking the Deselect
command button.
8 Click on the Start command button to start uploading the selected Transport
Stream model(s).
Note: The Transport Stream Upload process can be checked on the Log tab of
GUI.
9 Point to the Close command button to close the Load Model from Device dialog.
Notes:
Using unique labels (ON ID / TS ID combination) is recommended. Uploading
a Transport Stream model with multiple Transport Streams with same ON ID
and TS ID can not be in one upload action. When such model is uploaded in
multiple actions, only one Transport Stream is visible containing the services of
all these Transport Streams.
Once the Transport Stream model is uploaded, the model can always be
modified using the procedures described in topic To Set Up the TS Model
Manually on page 651.
650 4011746 Rev W

To Set Up the TS Model Manually

To Add a Transport Stream
First you have to configure the Transport Streams by adding them to the Transport
Streams tree. The following procedure explains how to add a Transport Stream.
interface.
2 Under TransportStreams, click on the Add… command button to add a new

Transport Stream.
Result: The Add TransportStream dialog is displayed.
3 Type the Transport Stream ID in the TS ID box and the Original Network ID in
the ON ID box.
Note: You can change the number format of ID values from hexadecimal to
decimal and vice versa. For more information, see topic General Settings on page
648.
4011746 Rev W 651

4 Click on the Add command button.

Result: The Transport Stream is added to the TransportStreams tree.
5 Close the dialog box or continue adding more Transport Streams.
To Add a Service to the Services List

Secondly you have to define services to which you want to assign access criteria.
The following steps explain how to add services to a Services list.
interface.
2 Under Services, click on the Add… command button.
Result: The Add Service dialog is displayed.
3 Type the service name in the Service Name box.

4 Type the service provider in the Service Provider box.
Result: The service is added to the Services list.
6 Close the dialog box or continue adding more services.
To Assign a Service to a Transport Stream

Once the services are defined, you can assign them to one or more Transport
Streams. The following procedure explains how to assign services to a Transport
Stream.
interface.
2 Under TransportStreams, select the Transport Stream to which you want to add
a service.
3 Under Services, select the service(s) that you want to add to the Transport
Stream.
Note: You can select a range of services by holding down the [Shift] key or a
number of services by holding down the [Ctrl] key.
4 Click on the >> command button.
Result: The ID for <servicename> dialog appears where <servicename > is
replaced by the name of the service you want to add.
652 4011746 Rev W

Note: If you already assigned the service to another Transport Stream before,
then the service ID that was chosen at that time appears in the dialog box.
5 Type the service ID in the Service ID box.
decimal and vice versa. For info, see topic General Settings on page 648.
6 Click on the OK command button to confirm.
To Add Components to a Service

Finally you have to add components (Elementary Streams) to services. The
following procedure explains how to add components to a service.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component GUI.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab is displayed.
2 In the TransportStream box, select the service (prg) to which you want to add a
component and right-click on Add Component… in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Component dialog is displayed.
3 Enter the Packet Identifier of the component in the PID box.

4 In the Type drop down box, select the component type.
Notes:
- If Reserved or User Private is selected, a value can be selected in the drop
down box beside the Type drop down box.
- If MPEG-1 Audio or MPEG-2 Audio is selected, the language of the audio can
be selected in the Language drop down box.
Result: The component is added to the service.
6 Repeat step 2 up to 5 until all components are added to the service.
7 Point to the Close command button to close the dialog.
4011746 Rev W 653

To Change Transport Stream Properties

The following procedure explains how to change Transport Stream properties.
interface.
2 Under TransportStreams, select the Transport Stream of which you want to
change the properties.
3 Click on the Properties… command button.
Result: The Transport Stream Properties dialog is displayed.
decimal and vice versa. For more information, see topic General Settings on page
648.
4 Change the Transport Stream ID in the TS ID box.
5 Change the Original Network ID in the ON ID box.
6 Click on the OK command button to confirm.
To Change Service Properties

The following steps explain how to change service properties.
interface.
2 Under Services, select the service of which you want to change the properties.
3 Click on the Properties… command button.
Result: The Service Properties dialog is displayed.
4 Type the service name in the Service Name box.

5 Type the service provider in the Service Provider box.
654 4011746 Rev W


abort.
To Remove a Transport Stream

The following steps explain how to remove a Transport Stream.
Important: If you remove a Transport Stream, only the Transport Stream is removed
and not the associated services.
interface.
2 Under TransportStreams, select the Transport Stream you want to remove.
3 Click on the Remove command button.
Result: A confirmation box appears.
4 Click on the Yes command button to confirm or the No command button to

abort.
To Remove a Service from the Services List

The following steps explain how to remove a service from the Services list.
interface.
2 Under Services, select the service you want to remove.
Note: You can select a range of services by holding down the [Shift] key or a
number of services by holding down the [Ctrl] key.
3 Click on the Remove button.
Result: A confirmation box appears.
4 Click on the Yes command button to confirm or the No command button to

abort.
4011746 Rev W 655

To Remove a Service from a Transport Stream

The following steps explain how to remove a service from a Transport Stream.
interface.
2 Under TransportStreams, select the service that you want to remove.
3 Click on the << command button.
Result: The service is removed from the TS.
To Remove a Component from a Service

The following procedure explains how to remove a component from a service.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component GUI.
2 In the TransportStream box, right-click on the component that should be
removed and point to Remove in the short-cut menu.
Result: A confirmation dialog is displayed.
3 Point to the Yes command button to remove the component or the Cancel
656 4011746 Rev W

Defining Access Criteria

Configuration Dialog
When you open the AC Manager Component user interface or when you select the
Access Criteria tab on the AC Manager Component user interface, the Access
Criteria Configuration dialog is automatically displayed.
If the Access Criteria Configuration dialog does not appear or is previously closed,
you can also right-click on the Access Criteria tab page of the AC Manager
Component user interface and click on the Access Criteria Configuration…
command button.
Conditional Access System Information

Adding Conditional Access System
The following procedure explains how to add a Conditional Access (CA) system to
the Access Criteria list.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog right-click on Access Criteria.
Result: A menu appears.
2 Select Add CA System….
Result: The Add CA System dialog is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 657

3 Type the CA system name in the Name box.

4 Type the CA system ID in the CA SystemID box.
5 Type the CA sub system ID in the CA SubSystemID box.
Result: The CA system is added to the Access Criteria list.
7 Close the Add CA System dialog box or continue adding more CA systems.
To Remove a Conditional Access System from the Access Criteria List

The following steps show how to remove a CA system from the Access Criteria list.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog, right-click on the CA system you
want to remove.
2 Select Remove.
Result: The selected CA system is removed from the Access Criteria list.
Important: A CA system cannot always be removed.
- When Access Criteria information is specified for a CA system and the
Access Criteria information is also assigned to one or more services or
components, the Remove option for the CA system will be disabled.
- When Access Criteria information is specified for a CA system but the Access
Criteria is not assigned to any service, the Remove option for the CA system
is enabled. In case of a remove operation the CA system will be removed
together with the corresponding Access Criteria information.
Note: More information about Access Criteria information and assigning Access
Criteria to services or components can be found in topic Access Criteria Information on
page 660 and Assigning Access Criteria on page 660.
658 4011746 Rev W

To Change Conditional Access System Properties

The following steps explain how to change the CA system properties.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog, right-click on the CA system of
which you want to change the properties.
2 Select Properties….
Result: The CA System Properties dialog is displayed.
Important: When Access Criteria information is specified for the CA system and
the Access Criteria information is also assigned to one or more services or
components, the CA system properties are in read-only mode and cannot be
changed.
3 Make the necessary changes on the CA System Properties dialog.
4 Click on the OK command button to confirm the changes or the Cancel
command button to abort.
4011746 Rev W 659

Access Criteria Information

Adding Access Criteria Information
The following procedure explains how to add Access Criteria information.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog right-click on the CA System where
you want to add Access Criteria.
2 Select Add Access Criteria….
Result: The Add Access Criteria dialog is displayed.
3 Type the name in the Name box.

4 Type the data in the Data box.
Note: Data has to be entered in hexadecimal format.
Result: The Access Criteria is added to the CA system in the Access Criteria list.
6 Close the Add Access Criteria dialog box or continue adding more Access
Criteria information.
To Remove Access Criteria Information

The following steps show how to remove Access Criteria from a CA system in the
Access Criteria list.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog, right-click on the Access Criteria
you want to remove.
2 Select Remove.
Result: The selected Access Criteria is removed from the Access Criteria list.
660 4011746 Rev W

Important: When Access Criteria information is specified for a CA system and

components, the Remove option for the Access Criteria will be disabled.
Note: More information about assigning Access Criteria to services or components
can be found in topic Adding Access Criteria on page 660.
To Change Access Criteria Properties

The following steps explain how to change the Access Criteria properties.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog, right-click on the Access Criteria of
which you want to change the properties.
2 Select Properties….
Result: The Access Criteria Properties dialog is displayed.
Important: When Access Criteria information is specified for the CA system and
components, the CA system properties are in read-only mode and cannot be
changed.
3 Make the necessary changes on the Access Criteria Properties dialog.
4 Click on the OK command button to confirm the changes or the Cancel
command button to abort.
4011746 Rev W 661

Assigning Access Criteria

Introduction
The Entitlement Control Message identifier (ECM ID) labeling a ECM group in a
Scrambling Control Group (SCG) provisioning message coming from the Event
Information Scheduler (IES) can automatically be generated by the EIS or can be
defined by the user. The following illustration shows a representation of a SCG
provisioning message.
SCG Provisioning
Message
Service ID xxx
.
.
.
SCG ID Components ID xxx
.
.
.
.
Activation Time
ECM
Groups
.
.
y Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
ECM ID
When the ECM ID Mode is set to fixed, what means that the ECM IDs must be
defined by the user, a unique ECM identifier must be given during the Access
Criteria assignment. More information concerning the ECM ID Mode can be found
in topic Changing the ECM ID Mode on page 672.
662 4011746 Rev W

Note: The ECM ID Mode is shown in the lower left corner of the Access Criteria
Configuration dialog.
The Access Criteria assignment has a number of restrictions. The following list
describes the Access Criteria assignment restrictions for automatic ECM ID Mode:
It is not allowed to assign access criteria to a service if access criteria are already
assigned to one or more components belonging to the service.
The following list describes the Access Criteria assignment restrictions for fixed ECM
ID Mode:
The ECM ID must be unique. An ECM ID that is already in use or still pending
for removal can not be used.
It is not allowed to assign access criteria to a service if access criteria are already
assigned to one or more components belonging to the service.
The assignment of multiple Access Criteria to a service or component must be
done in one assignment operation.
Changing the access criteria for a service or component can only be done after
removal of all Access Criteria assignments for that service or component.
The assignment of Access Criteria using the same ECM ID for several services or
components must be done in one assigning operation.
4011746 Rev W 663

Assigning Access Criteria to Services or Components

The following procedure explains how to assign Access Criteria to services or
components.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog select one or more Access Criteria
from the Access Criteria list.
Note: When you hold the [Control] key you can select multiple Access Criteria in
the Access Criteria list or when you hold the [Shift] key you can make a selection
of multiple consecutive Access Criteria.
2 Select one or more service(s) or component(s) from the TransportStreams list.
Note: When you hold the [Control] key you can select multiple services or
components in the TransportStream list or when you hold the [Shift] key you
can make a selection of multiple consecutive services or components.
Result: The >> command button becomes enabled.
3 Click on the >> command button to assign the selected access criteria to the
selected service or component.
Result: The new assignment appears in the Services to Access Criteria list on the
Access Criteria tab page of the AC Manager Component user interface.
Note: When the ECM ID Mode is set to fixed, the Set ECM ID for < > dialog is
displayed asking a valid ECM ID. Enter a valid ECM identifier in the ECM ID
box and point to the OK command button to confirm.
4 Click on the Apply command button of the AC Manager Component user
interface to confirm the new assignment or click on the Reload command button
to return to the previous status.
Removing Assignments
The following steps explain how to remove assignments.
1 Select one or more assignments in the Services to Access Criteria list on the
Access Criteria tab page of the AC Manager Component user interface.
Note: When you hold the [Control] key you can select multiple assignments in
the Services to Access Criteria list or when you hold the [Shift] key you can make a
selection of multiple consecutive assignments.
2 Click on the Remove command button of the Access Criteria tab.
Result: A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Click on the Yes command button to remove the selected assignment(s) or click
on the No command button to leave without changes.
Result: In case of Yes the selected assignment(s) is (are) removed.
4 Click on the Apply command button to confirm the changes.
664 4011746 Rev W

Note: When Access Criteria is removed from a service or component that

contains multiple Access Criteria assignments and the ECM ID Mode is set to
fixed, all Access Criteria assignments will be removed from this service or
component. The service or component will no longer be scrambled.
4011746 Rev W 665

Scrambling Control
Introduction
About the Scrambling Control Task
The Scrambling Control Task is a part of ROSA's Event Information Scheduler
integrated into ROSA® NMS and allows configuring the scrambling of service(s)
and/or components (Elementary Streams). Next to this scrambling configuration
the Scrambling Control Task also logs the events during the connection making
process with the DCM device(s) and the events during the scrambling status
alteration of service(s) and/or components. The following picture depicts the
Scrambling Control Task graphical user interface.
The Configuration tab of the Scrambling Control Task represents the Transports
Streams, services, and components (Elementary Streams) as configured in the AC
Manager Component. A Transport Stream is identified by its Original Network
identifier (ON_ID) and Transport Stream Identifier (TS_ID). The program (or
service) within a Transport Stream is identified using its Service Identifier
(Service_ID) and Service Name.
In the TransportStream – Services column on the Configuration tab, a Transport
Stream represents all DCM devices of which the ON_ID and TS_ID of the outgoing
Transport Stream match the indicated IDs.
666 4011746 Rev W

Scrambling Control
When a clear to scrambled transition or visa versa is requested for service(s) or

component(s), all DCM devices of which the ON_ID and TS_ID of the outgoing
Transport Stream match the IDs of the Transport Stream containing the service(s) or
components will receive this transition request.
Notes:
The Scrambling Configuration column on the Configuration tab represents the
scrambling made by the task and not the scrambling status of the service(s) and
or Elementary Streams in the outgoing Transport Stream on the DCM.
Since the connection between the computer running the Scrambling Control Task
and a DCM is not synchronized, only one computer running this task can be
used to maintain the scrambling control configuration of the DCM devices.
Communication Setup
During the device-mapping process into ROSA® NMS, the communication between
the DCM devices and the computer running the ROSA® NMS software is established
using the IIOP protocol. The DCM devices of which the Original Network
Identifier (ON_ID) and the Transport Stream Identifier (TS_ID) of the outgoing
Transport Stream match the identifiers of the Transport Streams configured using
the AC Manager Component, are connected using the TCP protocol followed by a
channel setup.
When errors arisen in the communication between the computer running the
Scrambling Control Task and the DCM device(s) or during rebooting a DCM or the
computer, different communication status messages can be displayed in the
Communication Status column on the Configuration tab of the GUI. The
following table describes these communication status messages.
Communication Description
Message
TransportStream An error is arisen during the device-getting process of a DCM of
Initialization Error which the ON_ID and the TS_ID of the outgoing TS match the IDs of
the TS configured using the AC Manager Component.
The IP settings could not be retrieved for one of the DCM devices.
This error may occur when no EIS interface is configured or the
DCM device is not yet responding on IIOP level.
No scramblers The Scrambling Control Task can’t find DCM devices, of which the
ON_ID and TS_ID of the outgoing TS match the configured TS IDs.
Possible causes:
The DCM device(s) is (are) not responding.
The DCM device(s) of which the outgoing TS IDs match the

configured TS IDs is (are) not yet mapped into ROSA® NMS
Note: When the task is running and the DCM becomes responding
the device will automatically be included in the communication.
4011746 Rev W 667

Communication Description
Message
Communication When the TCP connection is made between the computer running
started the Scrambling Control Task and the DCM the channel setup is
started. This message is displayed during the channel setup
process.
Communication The TCP connection between the computer running the Scrambling
stopped Control Task and a DCM device is closed. Possible causes:
A DCM no longer reachable
An error in the communication
An error in the DCM

Note: When the device is reachable again the connection will be
re-established (as long as the device is reachable but not yet
responding an initialization error may be visible). When the device
becomes responding on IIOP level, the driver will try to re-establish
the connection again if it did not succeeded the first time.
Note: The communication states are combined for all DCM devices of which the
outgoing TS IDs match the configured TS IDs. When one DCM fails and the other
DCM devices work fine, a communication status message is given for the device that
fails. More information concerning the failed device can be found in the Log tab of
the GUI.
When the communication between the computer running the Scrambling Control
Task and a DCM fails the computer will check the communication periodically via
ping actions.
When the DCM replies within a certain time the computer supposes that the
communication is restored and starts establishing the TCP connection followed with
a channel set up. If the computer doesn’t receives a reply within this time the
computer supposes a failed communication and continues the communication check.
Particular parameters concerning this restoration action can be configured. More
information concerning this configuration can be found in topic Restoring
Communication on page 678.
Starting and Stopping Scrambling

When service(s) or component(s) should be scrambled the computer running the
Scrambling Control Task sends Scrambling Control Group provisioning messages
with ECM Group(s) to the DCM devices the service(s) or component(s) belongs to.
The DCM devices, which receive such a provisioning message, reply with a
Scrambling Control Group status message or with a Scrambling Control Group error
message.
668 4011746 Rev W

Scrambling Control
When all DCM devices response with a Scrambling Group Control status message
the Scrambling Control Task supposes scrambling is started and the message
Provisioning OK appears in the Communication Status column on the Configuration
tab of the GUI. At the activation time extracted from the SCG provisioning message
the DCM devices start scrambling the service(s) or component(s).
In case a DCM replies with a Scrambling Control Group error message the message
Provisioning Failed appears in the Communication Status column.
If a scrambling event must be stopped the computer running the Scrambling Control
Task sends a Scrambling Control Group provisioning message without ECM groups
to the DCM devices scrambling the service(s) or component(s) belongs to. When
the DCM devices reply with a Scrambling Control Group status message the
Scrambling Control Task supposes the service(s) or component(s) are clear and the
message Deprovisioning OK appears in the Communication Status column. When a
DCM replies with a Scrambling Control Group error message, the Deprovisioning
Failed message appears.
Note: The messages logged by the Scrambling Control Task can be found on the Log
page of the task. This Log tab is very useful for troubleshooting purposes when
errors arise during scrambling/clear transitions. For more information concerning
the Log tab, please refer to topic Event logging further in this chapter.
4011746 Rev W 669

The following table gives an overview of the messages that can be displayed during
starting and stopping scrambling.
Message Description
Provisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
succeeded (clear/scrambling transition request) the computer running the
Scrambling Control Task has received Scrambling Control Group
Status Messages from all DCM devices.
Provisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
failed (clear/scrambling transition request) the computer running the
Scrambling Control Task has received a Scrambling Control Group
Error Message from a DCM.
Deprovisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
succeeded without ECM Groups (scrambling/clear transition request) the
computer running the Scrambling Control Task has received
Scrambling Control Group Status Messages from all DCM devices.
Deprovisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
failed without ECM Groups (scrambling/clear transition request) the
computer running the Scrambling Control Task has received a
Scrambling Control Group Error Message from a DCM.
No scramblers The Scrambling Control Task can’t find DCM devices, of which the
ON_ID and TS_ID of the outgoing TS the service or components
belong to, match the configured TS IDs. Possible causes:
The DCM device(s) is (are) not responding.
The DCM device(s) of which the outgoing TS IDs match the

configured TS IDs is (are) not yet mapped into ROSA® NMS
Note: When the task is running and the DCM becomes responding the
device will automatically be included in the communication.
Note: The states are combined for all DCM devices of which the outgoing TS_IDs
match the configured TS_IDs. When one DCM fails and the other DCM devices
work fine, a status message is given for the device that fails. More information
concerning the failed transition can be found in the Log tab of the GUI.
670 4011746 Rev W

Scrambling Control
General Settings
Starting the Task
The following steps describe how to start the Scrambling Control Task.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select the Control tab.
Result: The Control tab is displayed.
2 Press the Start command button
Automatic Start
When the Automatic Start feature of the Scrambling Control Task is enabled, the task
will restart automatically after starting up the computer running the task. The
following procedure explains how to enable or disable the Automatic Start feature of
the task.
2 In the Task Configuration box, set the Automatic Start check box to enable the
feature or clear the check box to disable the feature.
4011746 Rev W 671

Stopping the Task

The following steps explain how to stop the task.
2 Press the Stop command button.
Synchronizing the Task with the AC Manager Component

The synchronization between the AC Manager Component and the Scrambling
Control Task is automatically performed when the task is running. The following
procedure explains how to synchronize the Scrambling Control Task with the AC
Manager Component when the task is stopped.
2 Press the Init command button.
To Change the Number Format

The read out of some parameters on the Scrambling Control Task can be changed
from decimal to hexadecimal or visa versa. Perform the following procedure to
change the parameter read out.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select NumberFormat in the Settings
menu and point to Hex or Dec.
- Hex: to view the values as hexadecimal values.
- Dec: to view the values as decimal values.
Changing the ECM ID Mode

Introduction
The Entitlement Control Message Identifiers (ECM IDs) labeling ECM groups in
SCG provisioning messages can automatically be generated by the EIS (ECM ID
mode = automatic) or can be defined by the user (ECM ID mode = Fixed (Unique
within System) or Fixed (Unique within TS)). These user-defined ECM IDs can then
be used to determine the ECM Packet Identifiers (ECM PIDs). With Fixed (Unique
within System), the identifiers will be unique within the complete system and with
Fixed (Unique within TS), the identifiers will be unique within the Transport Streams.
When private date should be added to a particular ECM, the ID of that ECM must be
used to identify the correct ECM.
Note: The ECM ID Mode can only be changed when scrambling of all scrambled
services or components is stopped.
672 4011746 Rev W

Scrambling Control
When ROSA's Event Information Scheduler (AC Manager Component and

Scrambling Control Task) is used in combination with a fixed ECM ID mode, the
ECM identifiers must be defined during the Access Criteria assignment process.
More information concerning the ECM identifier definition can be found in
Assigning Access Criteria on page 660.
To Change the ECM ID Mode

The following procedure explains how to change the ECM ID mode.
1 Open the Scrambling Control Task GUI.
2 Click on to the Settings menu, point to ECM ID Mode and select automatic, Fixed
(Unique within System), or Fixed (Unique within TS).
Checking the DCM Devices to which a Transport Stream Belongs

The following procedure explains how to check the DCM devices that correspond
with a particular Transport Stream.
1 On the Configuration tab of the Scrambling Control Task user interface,
right-click on the Transport Stream for which the DCM devices must be checked
and point to Show Corresponding Scramblers... in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Scramblers corresponding with ON ID=X : TS ID=Y dialog is
displayed with the DCM devices that correspond with the selected Transport
Stream.
4011746 Rev W 673

Note: Press the Close command button to close the dialog.
Enabling or Disabling Scrambling

Before a service can participate into a DVB Simulcrypt CA system, scrambling for
the outgoing service must be enabled. As soon as the Simulcrypt Synchronizer of
the DCM receives a Scrambling Control Group (SCG) provisioning message from the
Event Information Scheduler for the corresponding service and the CA application is
properly configured, the DCM starts scrambling this service.
Enabling or disabling scrambling for a service can be done using the Scrambling
Control Task or using the web browser user interface of the DCM.
Note: Each outgoing service for which scrambling is enabled takes one Scrambling
License. More information about licensing can be found in topic Licensing on page
49.
Enabling Scrambling using the Scrambling Control Task

The following procedure explains how to enable scrambling using the Scrambling
Control Task.
1 On the Configuration tab of the user interface, right-click on the service(s) or the
service(s) containing components that must be scrambled.
Notes:
- To select consecutive services, click the first service, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and then click on the last service. To select services that are not
consecutive, press and hold down [CTRL] key, and then click on each service.
- When in a multiple select a collapsed transport stream is selected, all services
of this transport stream are also selected.
2 Select Start Scrambling in the short-cut menu.
674 4011746 Rev W

Scrambling Control
Enabling Scrambling using the Web Browser User Interface

The following steps describe how to enable scrambling using the web browser user
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the service or SPTS that must be scrambled
or the service or SPTS containing the component(s) that must be scrambled.
3 Right-click on this service or SPTS and select Enable Scrambling in the short-cut
menu.
Disabling Scrambling using the Scrambling Control Task

The following procedure explains how to disable scrambling using the Scrambling
Control Task.
1 On the Configuration tab of the user interface, right-click on the service(s) of
which scrambling should be enabled.
4011746 Rev W 675

Notes:
- To select consecutive services, click on the first service, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and then click on the last service. To select services that are
not consecutive, press and hold down [CTRL] key, and then click on each
service.
- When in a multiple select a collapsed transport stream is selected, all services
of this transport stream are also selected.
2 Select Stop Scrambling in the short-cut menu.
Disabling Scrambling using the Scrambling Control Task

The following procedure describes how to disable scrambling using the web browser
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the service or SPTS for which scrambling
must be disabled or the service or SPTS containing the component(s) for which
scrambling must be disabled.
3 Right-click on this service or SPTS and select Disable Scrambling in the
short-cut menu.
676 4011746 Rev W

Scrambling Control
Event logging
The Scrambling Control Task is provided with a powerful event logging system
useful for troubleshooting purposes. The list with logging messages is represented
on the Log tab of the task user interface. The following picture depicts a list with
logging messages.
Each message is accompanied by its generation time and date and the messages are
arranged in chronological order.
4011746 Rev W 677

Advanced Settings
Restoring Communication
Setting the Communication Timeout Parameters
The time between two consecutive ping actions (TS Check TimeOut) can be adapted
just like the time that the DCM has to reply after a ping action (TS ping TimeOut).
The following procedure explains how the change these timeout parameters.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select Advanced Settings… in the Settings
menu.
Result: The Advanced Settings dialog is displayed.
2 Change the timeout parameters.

Note: The TS Check TimeOut parameter is default set to 5 seconds and the TS
Ping TimeOut to 2 seconds.
Performing a Manual Communication Restoration

For particular reasons it can be necessary to start a communication restore attempt
manually. The following steps explain how to perform a manual communication
restoration.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select the Configuration tab.
Result: The Configuration tab is displayed.
2 In the TransportStreams – Services box, select the Transport Stream with bad
communication(s) and point to Retry Communication for Bad Scramblers in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The computer running the Scrambling Control Task attempts a
communication restoration with the DCM device(s). After restoration the current
scrambling configuration made by the Scrambling Control Task is sent to the DCM
devices of which the outgoing Transport Stream matches the selected Transport
Stream.
678 4011746 Rev W

Scrambling Control
Overruling the Scrambling Control Configuration

Introduction
For certain purposes it can be necessary to overrule the scrambling control
configuration of the DCM devices with the configuration made by the Scrambling
Control Task. This overruling can be done for a particular Transport Stream, for a
DCM, or for all devices controlled by the Scrambling Control Task.
WARNING:
During an overruling action all scrambled services and elementary stream
become clear for a while.
Overruling the Scrambling Control Configuration of a Transport Stream

The procedure below describes how to overrule the scrambling control configuration
of a particular Transport Stream.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task user interface, select the Configuration tab.
Result: The Configuration tab is displayed.
2 In the TransportStreams – Services box, right-click on the Transport Stream for
which the scrambling control configuration must be overruled and select Reset
Scrambling in the short-cut menu.
WARNING:
During the overruling action all scrambled services and elementary streams
of the Transport Stream of all devices corresponding with this Transport
Stream become clear for a while.
Overruling the Scrambling Control Configuration of a Device

Perform the following procedure to overrule the scrambling control configuration of
a particular DCM.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task user interface, click on the Tools menu and
point to Device Reset Scrambling....
Result: The Device Reset Scrambling dialog is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 679

2 Right-click on the DCM device for which the scrambling control configuration
should be overruled and point to Reset Scrambling in the short-cut menu.
3 Press the Yes command button to confirm or the No command button to abort
the operation.
WARNING:
During the overruling action all scrambled services and elementary streams of
the Transport Streams of the selected DCM device become clear for a while.
Overruling the Scrambling Control Configuration of all Devices

The following procedure explains how to overrule the scrambling control
configuration of all devices with the configuration made by the Scrambling Control
Task.
2 In the Task Configuration box, set the Re-apply the Database Model at Startup
check box.
3 Press successively the Stop and Start command button.
4 Clear the Re-apply the Database Model at Startup check box.
680 4011746 Rev W

Scrambling Control
WARNING:
During an overruling action all scrambled services and elementary streams
become clear for a while.
4011746 Rev W 681

Section B BISS Scrambling
Introduction
This section outlines BISS scrambling capabilities of the DCM.
In this section
Introduction ................................................................................................. 684
Starting or Stopping Scrambling .............................................................. 685
Transport Stream ........................................................................................ 690
4011746 Rev W 683

Introduction
General
The Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS), which is specified in EBU Tech
3292 and based on the DVB-CSA specifications, is a simplified and standardized
scrambling system suitable for Digital Satellite News Gathering (DSNG), Occasional
Use Television (OUTV) applications...
The scrambler of the DCM, which also supports BISS, works on a license basis,
meaning each service that must be scrambled or each service containing components
that must be scrambled needs a Scrambling license. Information concerning
licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 49.
Note: BISS scrambling is done by the CO-Processor Card that is plugged on an
interface card. When a service or component in an outgoing Transport Stream must
be scrambled, the interface card streaming this outgoing Transport Stream should be
populated by a Co-Processor Card.
About Session Word and Control Word

Instead of using Entitlement Control Messages to provide decryption information
(Control Words) to descramblers and Entitlement Management Messages to provide
the unique character of the CA system, this scrambling system uses a fixed 64-bit key
(called Control Word) for the duration of the session. This Control Word is derived
from a 12- or 16-character Session Word.
A Session Word is directly given to the scrambler and descrambler and when the
Session Word of the descrambler matches the Session Word of the scrambler, the
descrambler is able to decrypt the content received from the scrambler.
Operation Modes
BISS scrambling handles three operation modes:
BISS Mode 0: the content will not be scrambled.
BISS Mode 1: the content will be scrambled using a fixed Control Word derived
from a 12-character clear Session Word.
BISS Mode E: the content will be scrambled using a fixed Control Word derived
from a 16-character encrypted Session Word.
Notes:
DCM with software package version 7.5 doesn't support BISS Mode E.
For BISS mode 1 scrambling the scrambling parity is by default set to even. The
DCM allows modifying this parity to odd.
684 4011746 Rev W

Starting or Stopping Scrambling

Introduction
There are several ways to start or to stop BISS scrambling using the web browser
user interface of the DCM. When scrambling must be started or stopped for a
discrete number of services or for services belonging to several outgoing Transport
Streams, the short-cut menu in the DCM Outputs tree can be used. When
scrambling of multiple services belonging to the same outgoing Transport Stream
must be started or stopped, scrambling of these services can be enabled or disabled
in the Scrambling Settings table of the corresponding outgoing Transport Stream.
As soon as the command is given to start scrambling, free Scrambling licenses are
occupied for each service that must be scrambled and when the conditions are met,
the DCM starts scrambling.
Note: Scrambling will only be started when the BISS scrambling parameters for the
outgoing Transport Stream to which the service(s) belong(s) to are properly
configured and the required scrambling licenses are available. More information
concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 49.
Starting Scrambling using the Short-Cut Menu in the DCM Outputs Tree
The procedure below describes how to start BISS scrambling for outgoing services
using the short-cut menu in the DCM Outputs tree.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the service that must be scrambled or the
service or SPTS containing the component(s) that must be scrambled.
4011746 Rev W 685

3 Right-click on this service or SPTS and select Enable Scrambling in the short-cut
menu.
Starting Scrambling via the Scrambling Settings Table of the Outgoing

Transport Stream
The procedure below describes how to start BISS scrambling by enabling scrambling
for services in the Scrambling Settings table of an outgoing Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream containing services
that must be scrambled.
3 Right-click on this Transport Stream and select Settings in the short-cut menu.
4 Point to the Scrambling tab that appears after clicking on the Service link.
686 4011746 Rev W

5 In the Scrambling Settings table, change the Scrambling drop down box to
Enabled for all services that must be scrambled.
Result: After pressing the Apply command button, the DCM starts scrambling
the services of the corresponding outgoing Transport Stream for which the
Scrambling parameter is set to Enabled.
Stopping Scrambling using the Short-Cut Menu in the DCM Outputs Tree
The procedure below describes how to stop BISS scrambling for outgoing services
using the short-cut menu in the DCM Outputs tree.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the service for which scrambling must be
stopped or the service or SPTS containing the component(s) for which scrambling
must be stopped.
4011746 Rev W 687

3 Right-click on this service or SPTS and select Disable Scrambling in the

short-cut menu.
Starting Scrambling via the Scrambling Settings Table of the Outgoing

Transport Stream
The procedure below describes how to stop BISS scrambling by disabling scrambling
for services in the Scrambling Settings table of an outgoing Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream containing services
for which scrambling must be stopped.
3 Right-click on this Transport Stream and select Settings in the short-cut menu.
4 Point to the Scrambling tab that appears after clicking on the Service link.
688 4011746 Rev W

5 In the Scrambling Settings table, change the Scrambling drop down box to
Disable for all services for which scrambling must be stopped.
4011746 Rev W 689


Transport Stream
Introduction
When a particular outgoing Transport Streams participates into a BISS scrambling
application, the scrambling mode for this stream must be set to BISS Mode 1. Once
the mode is set, the Session Word can be entered and the scrambling parity can be
chosen.
Tip: The scrambling mode for a newly created outgoing Transport Stream will be set
to its default value. When the scrambling mode for most of the newly created
outgoing Transport Streams must be set to BISS Mode 1 and the default value is DVB
Simulcrypt, it is useful to change this default value to BISS Mode 1 and to modify the
default Session Word and Parity parameters. The procedure to change these
default values can be found in topic Changing the Default Scrambling Parameters on
page 691.
Note: The scrambling mode parameters can only be changed via the web browser
user interface if you are logged on to the web browser user interface using a Security
Account belonging to the Administrators Security Group. More information
concerning security groups can be found in topic Web Browser User Interface Security
on page 41.
To Configure the Scrambling Parameters

Perform the following steps to configure the BISS scrambling parameters for an
Security Group.
2 Point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking the Service link.
the scrambling mode must be changed.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page containing the Scrambling Settings is
displayed.
690 4011746 Rev W

Configuring the BISS Scrambling Parameter for an Outgoing Transport Stream
5 Select BISS MODE 1 in the Mode drop down box.

6 Tick the Session Word check box and enter the fixed 12-character Session Word
in both Session Word boxes. Both values are displayed as asterisks.
Note: Both Session Word boxes are only applicable if the Session Word check
box is ticked.
7 In the Parity selection box, select the Odd or Even selection button to determine
the scrambling parity.
Changing the Default Scrambling Parameters

During the Transport Stream creation process the scrambling parameters are filled in
other values can be given to these defaults. Perform the following procedure to
change the default scrambling parameters.
Security Group.
2 Point to the Configuration link.
displayed.
6 Under the Default Scrambling Settings, select DVB Simulcrypt in the Mode drop
down box.
7 Tick the Session Word check box and enter the fixed 12-character Session Word
in both Session Word boxes. Both values are displayed as asterisks.
Note: Both Session Word boxes are only applicable if the Session Word check
box is ticked.
8 In the Parity selection box, select the Odd or Even selection button to determine
the scrambling parity.
4011746 Rev W 691

692 4011746 Rev W

8 Chapter 8
IP Video Gateway
Introduction
This chapter covers the IP Video Gateway feature of the Cisco DCM
Series D9901 Digital Content Manager.
In this Chapter
Introduction ................................................................................................. 694
Specifying Incoming RTP Streams ........................................................... 696
Checking Incoming Video Signal Parameters ........................................ 698
Configuring Incoming Streams................................................................. 699
Routing Streams to the Output ................................................................. 702
Activating or Stopping Streaming............................................................ 707
Configuring Outgoing Streams................................................................. 709
Checking IP Video Gateway Statistics ..................................................... 713
4011746 Rev W 693

Chapter 8 IP Video Gateway
Introduction
General
The IP Gateway Video Card of the Digital Content Manager platform provides IP
encapsulation and decapsulation of uncompressed SDI video. At the transmitter
site, the IP Video Gateway Card encapsulates uncompressed SDI video into RTP
packets to be carried over Ethernet and at the receiver site the IP Video Gateway
Card converts the RTP encapsulated stream back to a baseband SDI signal.
Encapsulating of uncompressed SDI video can be done by routing the incoming SDI
signal to the GbE output and decapsulating SDI video by routing the incoming RTP
stream to an SDI output port. The IP Video Gateway Card also allows routing an
incoming uncompressed SDI video signal from an input SDI port to an output SDI
port and an outgoing SDI signal can be mirrored to other SDI output ports.
An IP Video Gateway Card is equipped with a monitoring SDI port that can be used
to check incoming and outgoing SDI signals. This can be done by simply dragging
and dropping the SDI signal to this monitor (Mon) port.
An IP Video Gateway Card is provided with 6 SDI signal generators that can be used
for replacing a missing SDI signal at the output or for test purposes.
Licensing
Encapsulation and decapsulation of uncompressed SDI video is license based,
meaning each SDI stream that is encapsulated or decapsulated consumes one
license.
a HD SDI stream consumes one GW_HD_SDI license
a SD SDI stream consumes one GW_IP_STREAM license
Each IP Video Gateway Card is provided with one free GW_IP_STREAM license.
Using the 10Gigabit Ethetnet interface of the IP Video Gateway Card needs the
GW_10G_GbE license. More information about licensing can be found in topic
Licensing on page 49.
Tips:
No license is required when an incoming SDI signal is routed to an SDI output.
Mirroring outgoing SDI signals doesn't consume additional licenses.
Note: The free GW_IP_STREAM license is not included in the license count on the
Configuration - Licenses sub page.
694 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
Redundancy
To protect to content of an outgoing SDI or RTP stream, a backup stream can be
assigned to the stream (main stream). This backup stream will be played out if the
source of the main stream fails. A DCM populated with one or two IP Video
Gateway Cards can also be configured for participating into one-to-one device
backup applications or into GbE port backup applications.
More information can be found in chapter Backup Scenarios on page 737.
4011746 Rev W 695

Specifying Incoming RTP Streams

Introduction
Before incoming RTP streams can be routed to SDI output ports, the RTP streams
must be specified at the input by creating RTP stream entries.
Adding RTP Stream Entries

Perform the following steps to add an RTP stream entry.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, double-click on the GbE A - GbE B branch or right-click
on this branch and point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Input RTP Streams sub page containing the Input RTP
Stream Settings table and Add Input Stream settings is displayed.
3 Under the Add Input Stream settings, complete the following steps:
Note: The Video Line Offset and Video Pixel Offset parameter are for future
use.
a In the Username box, enter a name for the stream. This name will be used
by the DCM to identify the stream in the web browser user interface.
b In the Socket Type drop down box, select GbE Unicast or GbE Multicast.
c When the Socket Type parameter is set to GbE Multicast, enter the IP address
of the destination port of the incoming stream in the IP box (first box beside
IP:UDP). The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
d In the UDP box (second box beside IP:UDP), enter the UDP port number of
the destination port of the incoming stream.
e In the Allowed Video Signal drop down box, select the allowed video signal
format(s) for this RTP stream, SD SDI, SD and HD SDI, or SD, HD and 3G.
696 4011746 Rev W

Specifying Incoming RTP Streams
f In the Jitter Tolerance (ms) box, enter the size of the dejittering buffer. A
value can be given between 10 and 60 ms and is by default set to 60 ms.
4 Press the ADD command button.
Result: The entry is added to the Input RTP Stream Settings table.
Note: Maximum six RTP stream entries can be added.
Removing RTP Stream Entries

The following steps describe how to remove RTP stream entries.
Result: The Service - Input RTP Streams sub page containing the Input RTP
3 In the Input RTP Stream Settings table, tick the check box preceding each row
Tips:
To sort the Input RTP Stream Settings table by a particular parameter, click
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input RTP Stream Settings
table, tick the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the
Results: The rows are removed from the Input RTP Stream Settings table.
Note: Only entries for RTP streams that are not routed to the output can be removed.
4011746 Rev W 697

Checking Incoming Video Signal Parameters

Introduction
The following information of an incoming SDI or RTP stream can be checked via the
web browser user interface of the DCM: frame rate, signal rate, video format, aspect
ratio, lines per frame, and frame buildup.
To Check Settings of Incoming Video Signals

The following steps explain how to display the settings of an incoming video signal.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, right-click on the branch of the stream for which
settings must be checked and point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Input SDI Streams or Service - Input RTP Streams sub
page is displayed.
3 Click on the Video Signal link.
Result: The Service - Video Signal sub page containing the video signal
information is displayed.
698 4011746 Rev W

Configuring Incoming Streams

Changing Settings of Incoming SDI Streams
Introduction
The following list describes the parameters that can be changed for incoming SDI
streams:
Username parameter: this parameter determines the name of the stream that is
used by the DCM to identify the stream in the web browser user interface.
Allowed Video Signal parameter: this parameter determines the video signal
format(s) allowed to be processed by the IP Video Adaptor Card, SD SDI, SD and
HD SDI, or SD, HD and 3G.
To Change Incoming SDI Stream Settings

Perform the following steps to modify settings of incoming SDI streams.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, double-click on the branch of the SDI port receiving the
SDI stream or right-click on this branch and point to Settings in the short-cut
menu.
Result: The Input SDI Stream Settings table containing the settings of the
incoming SDI streams is displayed.
3 In the Username box of the SDI signal for which the name must be changed,
enter a new name.
4 In the Allowed Video Signal drop down box, select SD SDI, SD and HD SDI, or
SD, HD and 3G.
4011746 Rev W 699

Changing Settings of Incoming RTP Streams

Introduction
The following list describes the parameters that can be changed for incoming RTP
streams:
Username parameter: this parameter determines the name of the stream used by
the DCM.
Type parameter: this parameter determines the IP transmission: multicast or
unicast.
IP parameter: this parameter determines the multicast IP address of the
incoming RTP stream.
UDP parameter: this parameter determines the UDP port number of the
incoming RTP stream.
Allowed Video Format parameter: this parameter determines the video signal
format(s) allowed to be processed by the IP Video Adaptor Card, SD SDI, SD and
HD SDI, or SD, HD and 3G.
Video Line Offset parameter: for future use
Video Pixel Offset parameter: for future use
Jitter Tolerance (ms) parameter: this parameter determines the size of the
dejittering buffer that is used to reduce network jitter.
To Change Incoming RTP Stream Settings

The following procedure explains how to change settings of incoming RTP streams.
Result: The Service - Input RTP Stream sub page containing the Input RTP
3 In the Input RTP Stream Settings table, modify the following parameters if
needed.
a In the Username box, enter a new name for the stream.
700 4011746 Rev W

b In the Type drop down box, select GbE Unicast or GbE Multicast.
c When the Type parameter is set to GbE Multicast, enter the IP address in the
IP box. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
d In the UDP box, enter the UDP port number.
e In the Allowed Video Signal drop down box, select SD SDI, SD and HD SDI,
or SD, HD and 3G.
f In the Jitter Tolerance (ms) box, enter the size of the dejittering buffer. A
value can be given between 10 and 60 ms and is by default set to 60 ms.
4011746 Rev W 701

Routing Streams to the Output

Routing an Incoming RTP Stream to an SDI Output Port
The following procedure describes how to route an incoming RTP stream to an SDI
output port.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the branch of the RTP stream that must be
routed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the branch of the SDI output port.
4 Select the branch of the RTP stream and drag and drop this stream to the SDI
output port branch.
Result: The SDI stream is decapsulated from the RTP stream and routed to the
corresponding SDI output port. Streaming is automatically activated.
Routing an Incoming SDI Stream to the GbE Port

Perform the following steps to route an incoming SDI stream to the GbE port.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the branch of the SDI stream that must be
routed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE A - GbE B branch.
702 4011746 Rev W

4 Select the branch of the SDI stream and drag and drop this stream to the GbE A -
GbE B branch.
Result: The Configure Output RTP Stream popup dialog is displayed.
5 If the stream must be renamed, tick the Name check box and enter the name in
the corresponding box.
6 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the destination port. The octets of
the address must be separated by dots.
7 In the UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the destination port.
Result: The SDI stream is encapsulated into IP packets and routed to the GbE
output. Streaming can then be started by right-clicking on the outgoing SDI
stream and pointing to Activate Streaming in the short-cut menu.
Routing a Generated SDI Stream to an SDI Output Port

The following steps describe how to route an SDI signal produced by an SDI
generator to an output port.
Note: A generated SDI stream can only be routed if the corresponding SDI generator
is enabled and the SDI No Stream Mode parameter is set to 0 VDC. More
information about enabling SDI generators and the SDI No Stream Mode parameter
can be found in topic Using SDI Generators on page 125.
4011746 Rev W 703


2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the branch of the generated SDI stream that
must be routed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the SDI output port branch to which the
stream must be passed.
4 Select the branch of the generated SDI stream and drag and drop this stream to
the SDI output port branch.
Routing an SDI Stream to the Monitor Port

The following procedure describes how to route an SDI stream to the monitor
output.
2 In the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree, browse to SDI stream that must be
routed to the monitor port.
3 Drag and drop this stream to the branch of the monitor port.
Note: Dragging and dropping an RTP stream to the monitor port is not possible.
704 4011746 Rev W

Viewing Routings
Introduction
The routings made with the IP Video Gateway Card can be checked on the Service -
Table View sub page. The routings to the SDI output ports or to the GbE ports are
accommodated in the IP Gateway Routing table and the routing made to the
Monitor port in the IP Gateway Monitor Ports table.
To View the Routings

Perform the following steps to check the routings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Table View link
Result: The Service - Table View sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input/Output drop down box under the View settings, select the
input/output filter.
3 In the Card drop down box under the View settings, select the card filter.
Result: The selected routing information is displayed.
The following information is available in the IP Gateway Routing table:

Input Streams parameters
- Card parameter: the name of the card receiving the SDI or RTP stream
- Port parameter: the name of the port receiving the SDI or RTP stream
- IP Address parameter: destination IP address of the incoming RTP stream
- UDP Port parameter: UDP port number of the incoming RTP stream
- Name parameter: the name of the stream used by the DCM. Pointing to this
name opens the Service - Input SDI Streams or Service - Input RTP Streams
sub page containing the settings of the incoming stream.
4011746 Rev W 705

- Info parameter: additional information about the incoming stream

Output Streams parameters
- Card parameter: the name of the card transmitting the SDI or RTP stream
- Port parameter: the name of the port transmitting the SDI or RTP stream
- IP Address parameter: the destination IP address of the outgoing RTP stream
- UDP Port parameter: the destination UDP port number of the outgoing RTP
stream
- Name parameter: the name of the stream used by the DCM. Pointing to this
name opens the Service - Input SDI Streams or Service - Input RTP Streams
sub page containing the settings of the outgoing stream.
The following parameters can be found on the IP Gateway Monitor Ports table.
Monitor parameters
- Card parameter: the card to which the monitor port belongs to
- Port parameter: the name of the port
Monitored Stream parameters
- Card parameter: the name of the card receiving the SDI
- Port parameter: the name of the port receiving the SDI
- Name parameter: the name of the stream used by the DCM
- Info parameter: additional information about the routed stream
706 4011746 Rev W

Activating or Stopping Streaming
Activating or Stopping Streaming

Activating Streaming
The following steps describe how to activate an RTP or SDI stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the stream that must be activated and
point to Activate Streaming in the short-cut menu.
Tip: All outgoing RTP streams of an IP Video Gateway Card can be activated in one
action by right-clicking on the GbE A - GbE B branch and clicking on Start
Streaming All Streams in the short-cut menu.
4011746 Rev W 707

Stopping Streaming
Perform the following steps to stop streaming an outgoing RTP or SDI stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the stream for which streaming must be
stopped and point to Stop Streaming in the short-cut menu.
Tip: All activated outgoing RTP streams of an IP Video Gateway Card can be
stopped in one action by right-clicking on the GbE A - GbE B branch and clicking on
Stop Streaming All Streams in the short-cut menu.
708 4011746 Rev W

Configuring Outgoing Streams

Changing Settings of Outgoing SDI Streams
Introduction
The following list describes the settings of an outgoing SDI stream.
User Name parameter: the name of the SDI stream. This name is by default the
name of the SDI input port receiving this SDI stream.
Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter: for future use.
Streaming State parameter: This parameter can be used to active or to stop
streaming the SDI stream.
Delay parameter: This parameter indicates the delay due to the process.
To Change Outgoing SDI Stream Settings

Perform the following steps to change the settings of an outgoing SDI Stream.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, double-click on the SDI stream branch or right-click on
this branch and point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Output SDI Streams sub page containing the Output SDI
Stream Settings table is displayed.
3 If the name of the outgoing SDI stream must be changed, tick the User Name
check box and enter the new name in the corresponding box.
4 In the Streaming State drop down box, select activate to activate streaming of the
RTP stream or Paused to stop streaming.
4011746 Rev W 709

Configuring Settings of Outgoing RTP Streams

Changing the Standard Stream Settings
Introduction
The following list describes the standard settings of an outgoing RTP stream.
User Name parameter: the name of the SDI stream that is encapsulated into the
corresponding RTP stream. This name is by default the name of the SDI input
port receiving this SDI stream.
IP parameter: the IP address of the destination port to which the RTP Stream
streams
UDP parameter: the UDP port number of the destination port to which the RTP
Stream streams.
Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter: for future use
Streaming State parameter: This parameter can be used to active or to stop
streaming the RTP stream.
Delay parameter: This parameter indicates the delay due to the encapsulation
process.
Changing the Standard Stream Settings

The following procedure describes how to modify the standard settings of an
outgoing RTP stream.
Result: The Service - Input RTP Streams sub page containing the Output RTP
Stream Settings table is displayed.
Tip: The Service - Input RTP Streams sub page can also be opened by
right-clicking on the corresponding stream branch under the GbE A - GbE B
branch and pointing to Settings in the short-cut menu. The selected stream will
be highlighted in the table.
3 If the name of the outgoing stream must be changed, tick the User Name check
box and enter the new name in the corresponding box.
710 4011746 Rev W

4 In the IP box, enter the destination IP address. The octets of the IP address must
be separated by dots.
5 In the UDP box, enter the UDP port number of the destination port.
6 In the Streaming State drop down box, select activate to activate streaming of the
RTP stream or Paused to stop streaming.
Changing the Advanced Settings

Introduction
For each outgoing RTP stream on a GbE port, the following advanced setting can be
configured:
TOS parameter: The Type of Service parameter (ToS) determines the IP packet
header field that indicates the type or quality of the service for this IP packet. A
value can be given between 0 and 255 and is default set to 0.
TTL parameter: To prevent indefinite looping of IP packets in a network, the
lifetime of IP packets can be limited by defining a time to live to these packets.
This time to live parameter (TTL) determines a field in IP packet header that
specifies how many routers a packet can pass before being discarded. Each time
an IP packet passes a router, the TTL field of the packet is decreased by one and
will be discarded if it reaches 0. A value can be given between 1 and 255 and is
default set to 64.
Source - UDP parameter: The source UDP port in the IP packets of an outgoing
RTP stream is by default the UDP port of the GbE port. For certain reason (for
instance VLAN applications) it can be useful to change this parameter.
VLAN ID parameter and VLAN priority parameter: When the DCM participates
into VLAN application, the SDI stream can be VLAN tagged. The IP packets in
which an outgoing SDI stream is encapsulated are enlarged with a VLAN header
including VLAN identifier and VLAN priority. The VLAN ID parameter ranges
from 0 to 4094 and the VLAN Priority parameter from 0 to 7.
To Change the Advanced Settings

The following steps describe how to change the advanced settings of an outgoing
RTP stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the GbE A - GbE B branch and point
Result: The Service - Output RTP Streams sub page is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 711

Tip: The Service - Output RTP Streams sub page can also be opened by
right-clicking on the corresponding stream branch under the GbE A - GbE B
branch and pointing to Settings in the short-cut menu.
3 Click on the Advanced tab.
Result: The Advance Settings table is displayed.
4 In the TOS box, enter a correct type of service value.

5 In the TTL box, enter a correct time to live value.
6 In the Source - UDP box, enter the source UDP port for the IP packets of the
outgoing RTP stream.
7 Tick the VLAN - On check box to enabling VLAN tagging for the selected
outgoing RPT stream or clear the check box to disable VLAN tagging.
8 In the VLAN - ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.
9 In the VLAN - Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.
Note: The VLAN - ID and VLAN - Priority parameters are only applicable when
the VLAN - On check box is ticked.
712 4011746 Rev W

Checking IP Video Gateway Statistics
Checking IP Video Gateway Statistics

Introduction
The DCM calculates Cycling Redundancy Check (CRC) / Error Detection and
Handling (EDH) data from the incoming SDI stream and compares these data with
the data encapsulated into this stream. When a mismatch between these data
occurs, the CRC/EDH counters will be increased by one. For each SDI stream, a
counter is foreseen with the errors in the last minute, last hour, and last 24 hours.
To Check the IP Video Gateway Statistics

The following steps describe how to check the IP video gateway statistics.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to IPG Statistics link after
Result: The IPG statistics are displayed.
Reset the IP Video Gateway Statistics

The following procedure explains how to reset the IP video gateway statistics.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to IPG Statistics link after
Result: The IPG statistics are displayed.
2 Under the Reset Counters settings, tick the check box of the card(s) for which the
statistics must be reset.
3 Click on the Reset command button.
4011746 Rev W 713

9 Chapter 9
Transcoding
Introduction
This chapter covers the transcoding option of the Digital Content
Manager platform.
In this section
Introduction ................................................................................................. 716
Routing a Service to the Output via a Transcoder Card ....................... 721
Naming the Service in the DCM Processing Tree .................................. 724
Configuring a Transcoded Video Component ....................................... 725
Determining the Caption Service Descriptor for a Transcoded
Video Component....................................................................................... 727
Configuring a Transcoded Audio Component....................................... 730
Configuring the Service Related Transcode Settings of a
Service........................................................................................................... 734
4011746 Rev W 715

Chapter 9 Transcoding
Introduction
General
DCM's Transcoder Card performs high density MPEG-2 to H.264 video conversion
and audio transcoding from Dolby® digital audio (further referred as AC-3 audio)
or MPEG-1 LayerII to HE-AAC audio and metadata pass-through. This card is
capable of processing a high number of both SD and HD video streams, supporting
1080i and 720p formats at up to full HD resolution. It is designed to support
numerous advanced features like closed captions... The following illustration
depicts a Transcoder Card.
A Transcoder Card has neither inputs nor outputs and presenting the video
component or audio component should be done by routing the corresponding
incoming service from a GbE or ASI Interface Card via the Transcoder Card to the
output.
Important:
After transcoding a video component, the resolution, aspect ratio, GOP structure,
sample rate, 3/2 pull down will be the same as the incoming video component.
The chroma format of the incoming video component must be 4:2:0.
After transcoding a component, the corresponding PSI/SI information will be
adapted ( streamtype in PMT and particular descriptors).
A DCM with software package version 7.5 only supports standard definition
MPEG-2 to H.264 video conversion and MPEG-1 LayerII to HE-AAC audio
conversion.
716 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
Licensing
DCM's transcoding option is license based and depends on the definition of the
video component and the format of the audio component:
Each transcoded SD video component consumes one SD_AVC_TRANSCODE
license.
Each transcoded HD video component consumes one SD_AVC_TRANSCODE
license and one HD_AVC_TRANSCODE_EXTENSION license.
Each Layer II Audio to AAC audio conversion consumes one
LAYERII_AUDIO_TRANSCODE license.
Each AC-3 audio to AAC audio conversion consumes one
LAYERII_AUDIO_TRANSCODE license and one
AC3_AUDIO_TRANSCODE_EXTENSION license
More information concerning licensing can be found in topic Licensing on page 49.
Important: A DCM with software package version 7.5 only supports standard
definition MPEG-2 to H.264 video conversion and AC-3 audio or MPEG-1 LayerII to
HE-AAC audio conversion.
Processing Possibilities
A Transcoder Card is capable to process the following video/audio component
combinations:
HD Video SD Video Audio

0(x) 0 32
0(x) 2 28
0(x) 4 24
0(x) 6 20
0(x) 8 16
0(x) 10 12
0(x) 12 8
0(x) 14 4
0(x) 16 0
(x) A
DCM with software package version 7.5 only supports standard definition
MPEG-2 to H.264 video conversion.
Important: Before starting the transcode configuration, the DCM needs the
knowledge of the used video/audio component combination. The procedure to
modify this combination can be found in topic Configuring the Resource Setup of a
Transcoder Card on page 84. Changing this combination while a transcoding process
is running might interrupt this transcoding process.
4011746 Rev W 717

Service Redundancy
For backup purposes, each service containing transcoded video or audio
components can be provided with a backup service. More information concerning
service redundancy can be found in topic Service Backup on page 751.
Using the Transcode Overview Page

Introduction
To facilitate the transcode configuration, the web browser user interface of the DCM
provides a transcode overview page for each Transcoder Card. Such overview page
contains a Service Overview table populated with the services routed to the
Transcoder Card. Transcoded video or audio components are indicated by and
component that are not transcoded by . The presence of VBI information is
indicated by .
Next to this Service Overview table, the transcode overview page also contains a
transcode settings overview table of each service. Such table gives an overview of
the transcode parameters of the components within a service.
The Service Overview table and a transcode settings overview table of a service are
provided with links to display detailed information. More information about these
links can be found in topic Using the Navigating Possibilities of the Transcode Overview
Page on page 719.
Opening the Transcode Overview Page

The following procedure explains how to open the transcode overview page.
718 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
2 In the DCM Processing tree, double-click on Transcoder Card branch for which
the transcode overview page must be displayed or right-click on this branch and
Result: The Service - Overview sub page is displayed.
Using the Navigating Possibilities of the Transcode Overview Page

As seen in the introduction, the Service Overview table as well as the transcode
settings overview table of a service is provided with links. The following list
describes these links.
Links in the Service Overview table
- Clicking on the SID value highlights the transcode settings overview table of
the corresponding service.
- Clicking on the icon in the Video X field of a service opens the Video tab
page containing the Service Video Settings table. The corresponding video
component is highlighted. More information concerning this table can be
found in topic Configuring a Transcoded Video Component on page 725.
4011746 Rev W 719

- Clicking on the icon in the Audio X field of a service opens the Service -
Audio sub page containing the Service Audio Settings table. The
corresponding audio component is highlighted. More information
concerning this table can be found in topic Configuring a Transcoded Audio
Component on page 730.
Links in the transcode settings overview table of a service
- Clicking in the Video X column opens the Video tab page containing the
Service Video Settings table. The corresponding video component is
highlighted. More information concerning this table can be found in topic
Configuring a Transcoded Video Component on page 725.
- Clicking in the Audio X column opens the Service - Audio sub page
containing the Service Audio Settings table. The corresponding audio
component is highlighted. More information concerning this table can be
found in topic Configuring a Transcoded Audio Component on page 730.
- Clicking on the arrow beside View Bit Rate opens the Bit Rates - Processing
- Processing Service Detail sub page containing the detailed processing
service bit rates.
- The icon at the right hand side of the table header displays the Service
Overview table.
720 4011746 Rev W

Routing a Service to the Output via a Transcoder Card

Introduction
Before a video component or audio component of a particular service can be
transcoded, the service must be passed from the input to the Transcoder Card and
passed from the Transcoder Card to the output. The following topics describe how
to pass a service from the input to the Transcoder Card and from the Transcoder
Card to the output.
Important: The transcoding process will not be stopped if the PID value of the
incoming component changes and if stream types remain the same. For new audio
components, the presence of the language descriptor determines the transcoding
process. If the presence or content of the language descriptor changes, the
transcoding process will be stopped. For example, if an audio component is
transcoded with language descriptor equal to eng and the component is replaced by
an audio component with language descriptor spa, transcoding will be stopped.
Passing an Incoming Service to the Transcoder Card

The following procedure describes how to pass an incoming service to the
Transcoder Card.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the service that must be passed to the
Transcoder Card.
4011746 Rev W 721

3 Drag and drop the branch of this incoming service to the branch of the
Transcoder Card in the DCM Processing tree.
Tip:
The DCM allows transcoding the same incoming service multiple times with
different setting.
A transcoded service can be passed to multiple outgoing Transport Streams.
Note: Deleting a service in the DCM processing tree that is routed to the output is
not possible.
Important: The transcoding process will not automatically be started after routing
the incoming service to the output via the Transcoder Card. This process must be
started manually as described in topic Configuring a Transcoded Video Component on
page 725 or Configuring a Transcoded Audio Component on page 730. As long as the
transcoding process is not properly configured and started, the corresponding
service is grayed in the DCM Processing tree.
Passing a Transcoded Service to the Output

Perform the following steps to pass a service from the Transcoder Card to the
output.
722 4011746 Rev W

2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream in which the
transcoded service must be passed.
3 In the DCM Processing tree, browse to the transcoded service that must be
4 Drag and drop the branch of the transcoded service to the branch of this
4011746 Rev W 723

Naming the Service in the DCM Processing Tree

Introduction
As seen in the introduction, an incoming service can be passed to a Transcoder Card
multiple times. To identify a service in the DCM Processing tree, a user name can
be added to the service. This user name will also be used on the status sub pages
and Bit Rates - Processing sub page but not in the DCM Inputs and DCM Outputs
tree.
Note: The transcoder user name will not replace the name of the service in the
SDT/VCT.
To Name the Service

The following procedure describes how to name a service in the DCM Processing
tree.
2 In the DCM Processing tree, double-click on Transcoder Card branch for which
the transcode overview page must be displayed or right-click on this branch and
Result: The Service Overview table is displayed.
3 In the User Name box, enter a name for the service.

724 4011746 Rev W

Configuring a Transcoded Video Component
Configuring a Transcoded Video Component

Introduction
The following parameters must be configured to transcode a video component.
Transcode parameter: This parameter determines if the video component will be
transcoded or not.
Profile parameter: only high profile
SD Bitrate (Mbps) parameter: This parameter determines the bitrate of the
transcoded SD video component without packetization overhead. For a VBR
service, this is the maximum bitrate rate. This parameter can be set between 1
and 3.5 Mbps.
Max CPB Removal Delay (ms) parameter: The maximum CPB removal delay is
the maximum time a picture remains in the decode buffer before it will be
processed. A higher maximum CPB removal delay enhanced the conversion
process resulting in a better picture quality. The total transcode delay is the
sum of the maximum CPB removal delay and the pre-analysing delay, which
also determines the picture quality (a higher pre-analysing delay also enhanced
the picture quality). To obtain the best picture quality, a balance must be found
between the pre-analysing delay and the maximum CPB removal delay. This
balance can be modified by changing the maximum CPB removal delay and total
transcode delay.
The default values given by the web browser user interface for the maximum
CPB removal delay and total transcode delay after passing the service to the
Transcoder Card are a good choice to start.
Important: The value that can be given for the maximum CPB removal delay
depends on the total transcode delay. Changing this total transcode delay might
change the maximum CPB removal delay.
Tip: The procedure to change the total transcode delay can be found in topic
Configuring the Service Related Transcode Settings of a Service on page 734.
Encoding parameter: This parameter determines if the transcoded video
component will be a CBR or a VBR component.
Closed Caption parameter: This parameter determines the closed captions in the
transcoded video component.
- Disabled: no closed captions will be present in the outgoing video.
- Auto: supported closed captions are copied from the input. If no closed
captions are present at the input, empty CEA 708 closed caption fields will be
present in the outgoing video.
4011746 Rev W 725

To Configure a Transcoded Video Component

The following steps explain how to configure a transcoded video component.
2 In the DCM Processing tree, double-click on Transcoder Card branch containing
the service for which the video component must be transcoded or right-click on
3 Click on the Video link and point to the Video tab.
Result: The Service Video Settings table is displayed.
Tip: In the Service Video Settings table, a video component is indicated by its
PID and the SID and name of the service to which the component belongs to.
4 Tick the check box beside the Transcode - Profile drop down to enable
transcoding or clear this check box to pass through the service without
processing.
Note: The other Transcode parameters are only applicable if this check box is
ticked.
5 In the Transcode - SD Bitrate (Mbps) box, enter the transcode rate for the
service.
6 In the Transcode - Max CPB Removal Delay (ms) box, enter the maximum time
a picture remains in the transcode buffer before processing.
7 In the Transcode - Encoding drop down box, select the desired video encoding
mode: VBR or CBR.
8 In the Transcode - Closed Caption drop down box, select the desired value:
Disabled or Auto.
Important: The transcoding process of a video component will be stopped if the PID
of the corresponding incoming video changes.
726 4011746 Rev W

Determining the Caption Service Descriptor for a Transcoded Video Component
Determining the Caption Service Descriptor for a Transcoded

Video Component
Introduction
The Caption Service Descriptor Settings - Mode parameter determines the caption
service descriptor for the transcoded video component. This mode can be set to
Auto, Add, or None.
Auto: the caption service descriptor will be passed to the output if present at the
input.
Add: the caption service descriptor is generated based on the created caption
services.
None: the caption service descriptor will not be present at the output, even if
present at the input.
When the caption service descriptor is generated by the DCM (Caption Service
Descriptor Settings - Mode parameter set to Add), the descriptor can be populated
with one or more caption services.
Note:
The caption service descriptor can only be adapted if the corresponding video
component is transcoded.
Changing the caption service descriptor does not modify the closed captioning
information of the video component.
To Determine the Caption Service Descriptor

Complete the following procedure to determine the caption service descriptor for a
transcoded video service.
Note: Configuring the caption service descriptor is only possible if the Transcode -
Closed Caption parameter is set to Auto. More information concerning this
parameter can be found in topic Configuring a Transcoded Video Component on page
725.
the video component for which the caption service descriptor must be
determined or right-click on this branch and point to Settings in the short-cut
menu.
4011746 Rev W 727

3 Click on the Video link and point to the Closed Caption tab page.
Result: The Closed Caption Settings table is displayed.
Tip: In the Service Video Settings table, a video component is indicated by its
PID and the SID and name of the service to which the component belongs to.
4 In the Caption Service Descriptor Settings - Mode drop down box, select one of
the following values: Auto, Add, or None.
Auto: the caption service descriptor will be passed to the output if present at
the input.
Add: the caption service descriptor is generated based on the created caption
services.
None: the caption service descriptor will not be present at the output, even if
present at the input
5 If the Caption Service Descriptor Settings - Mode parameter is set to Add, a
caption service can be added to the caption service descriptor by clicking on .
Result: The Add Caption Service Item popup dialog is displayed.
Complete the following steps in the Add Caption Service Item popup dialog.
a If the caption service is a line 21 field, tick the Line 21 check box, otherwise
clear this check box.
b For a line 21 field caption service: select the field in the Field drop down box.
Note: This drop down box is only applicable if the Line 21 check box is
ticked.
c If the caption service is not a line 21 field, enter the number of the caption
service in Caption Service Number box.
728 4011746 Rev W

Determining the Caption Service Descriptor for a Transcoded Video Component
Note: This box is only applicable if the Line 21 check box is cleared.
d In the Language box, enter the 3-character language code (as specified by ISO
639-2 [15]) corresponding the caption.
e Tick the Easy Reader check box to include easy reader captions or clear this
check box otherwise.
f Tick Wide Aspect Ratio check box for wide aspect ratio video services (16/9)
or clear this check box otherwise.
g Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button
Result: The caption service is added to the Caption Services field of the
6 Repeat step 6 for all caption services that must be added to the caption service
descriptor.
Tip: A caption service manually added to the caption service descriptor can easily be
removed by clicking on prefixing the corresponding caption service.
4011746 Rev W 729

Configuring a Transcoded Audio Component

Introduction
For transcoding an audio component, the following parameters must be configured.
Transcode parameter: This parameter determines if the audio component will be
transcoded or not.
Bitrate (kbps) parameter: This parameter determines the bit rate of the
transcoded audio component without packetization overhead. For a VBR audio
component, this is the maximum bit rate. A value can be given between 8 and
576 kbps when the SBR parameter is set to Enabled (HE-AAC) and a value
between 8 and 128 kbps when the SBR parameter is set to Disables (AAC-LC).
The default value is 96 kbps.
Note:
- The bit rates are entered for stereo audio components. For an incoming
mono audio component, the bit rate will be halved. For example, when the
bit rate is set to 16 kbps, the bit rate for the mono audio component will be 8
kbps.
- After entering the bit rate, the DCM will use the nearest value depending on
the sample frequency. For example: For AAC-LC, if the configured bit rate
is 576 kbps, and the sampling frequency is 32 kHz Stereo, the output bit rate
will be 384 kbps.
The following tables give the relation between the sample frequency, the
minimum and maximum value that can be entered (Min. Conf. & Max. Conf.),
the minimum and maximum bit rate used by the DCM (Min. Upd. & Max Upd.)
for mono as well as for stereo audio.
For AAC-LC Audio
Incoming Signal Bitrates (kbps)
Sample Mono/ Min. Min. Max. Max.

Freq. Stereo Conf. Upd. Conf. Upd.
32000 Mono 16 8 576 192
Stereo 16 16 576 384
44100 Mono 16 8 576 264.6
Stereo 16 16 576 529.2
48000 Mono 16 8 576 288
Stereo 16 16 576 576
730 4011746 Rev W

For HE-AAC Audio

Incoming Signal Bitrates (kbps)
Sample Mono/ Min. Min. Max. Max.

Freq. Stereo Conf. Upd. Conf. Upd.
32000 Mono 16 8 128 64
Stereo 16 16 128 128
44100 Mono 16 8 128 64
Stereo 16 16 128 128
48000 Mono 16 8 128 64
Stereo 16 16 128 128
Tip: An Audio Bitrate Altered alarm will be generated when the entered value
does not correspond with the limits of the bit rates for a specific sample
frequency. This alarm will not be generated if a bit rate adaptation is done for a
mono audio component.
Allow AC3 parameter: this parameter determines if AC-3 audio is allowed to be
processed by the IP Video Adaptor Card or not.
Encoding Mode parameter: This parameter determines if the transcoded audio
will be a CBR or a VBR component.
Note: When this parameter is set to VBR, the bit rate of the audio component is
max. 192 kbps.
TNS parameter: This parameter determines if the TNS compression tool will be
used or not for transcoding the audio component.
The basic idea of the Temporal Noise Shaping (TNS) compression tool relies on
the duality of time and frequency domain. TNS uses a prediction approach in
the frequency domain to shape the quantization noise over time. It applies a
filter to the original spectrum and quantizes this filtered signal. Additionally,
quantized filter coefficients are transmitted in the bit stream. These are used in
the decoder to undo the filtering performed in the encoder, leading to a
temporally shaped distribution of quantization noise in the decoded audio signal
(this means the noise can appear shortly after or even before the exciter signal, so
it is an intentional post/pre-echo, but not noticeable if implemented correctly, for
instance, below the masking threshold).
Note: Enabling this parameter can only be done if the SBR parameter is disabled.
SBR parameter: This parameter determines if the SBR (Spectral Band
Replication) compression tool will be used to transcode the audio component. If
the SBR compression tool is enabled, the resulting coding scheme is HE-AAC, if
the SBR compression tool is disabled, the coding scheme is AAC-LC.
SBR is a proprietary Coding Technologies technique that halves the sampling
rate, but encodes the missing higher frequencies at a rate of 1.5 kbit/s and stores
them in the auxiliary data fields of the MPEG format.
4011746 Rev W 731

Note: Enabling this parameter can only be done if the TNS parameter is
disabled.
PNS parameter: This parameter determines if the PNS compression tool will be
used or not to transcode the audio component.
The Perceptual Noise Substitution (PNS) compression tool is a tool used to
optimize the bitrate efficiency of AAC. This tool removes the noise-like parts
from the original spectrum and adds parametric components to the bit stream.
At the decoder side, a noise generator uses these parametric components to
generate a noise that will be inserted into the audio spectrum.
Level (db) parameter: This parameter determines the audio level adjustment of
the transcoded audio component.
To Configure a Transcoded Audio Component

The following procedure describes how to configure a transcoded audio component.
the service for which an audio component must be transcoded or right-click on
3 Click on the Audio link.
Result: The Service Audio Settings table is displayed.
Tip: In the Service Audio Settings table, an audio component is indicated by the
SID and name of the corresponding service and by its PID and language.
4 Tick the check box beside the Transcode - Bitrate (kbps) box to enable audio
transcoding or clear this check box to pass through the audio component without
processing.
Note: The other Transcode parameters are only applicable if this check box is
ticked.
5 In the Transcode - Bitrate (kbps) box, enter the bit rate for the transcoded audio
component.
6 Tick the Allow AC3 check box to allow AC-3 processing or clear this check box
otherwise.
732 4011746 Rev W

7 In the Transcode - Encoding Mode drop down box, select CBR or VBR.
8 In the Transcode - TNS drop down box, select Enabled to enable the Temporal
Noise Shaping (TNS) compression tool or select Disabled to disable this
compression tool.
Note: The Transcode - TNS parameter is not applicable if the Transcode - SBR
parameter is set to Enabled (HE-AAC).
9 In the Transcode - SBR drop down box, select Enabled (HE-AAC) to enable the
Spectral Band Replication (SBR) compression tool or Disabled (AAC-LC) to disable
this compression tool.
Note: The Transcode - SBR parameter is not applicable if the Transcode - TNS
parameter is enabled.
10 In the Transcode - PNS drop down box, select Enabled to enable the Perceptual
Noise Substitution (PNS) compression tool or Disabled to disable this tool.
11 In the Transcode - Level (dB) box, enter the desired audio level. A value can be
given between +20 and -20dB and is by default set to 0 dB.
Important: The transcoding process of an audio component will be stopped if the
PID of the corresponding incoming audio changes.
4011746 Rev W 733

Configuring the Service Related Transcode Settings of a

Service
Introduction
The web browser user interface allows changing the following service related
transcode settings for a transcoded service.
Adapt (P)SI parameter: After transcoding a video and/or audio component,
particular PSI/SI information will be modified. Clearing this parameter
disables this PSI/SI information adaptation.
Note: The parameter has no influence on the closed caption descriptor.
Maximum Bitrate Descriptor Mode parameter: the maximum bitrate descriptor
indicates the maximum bitrate including the transport overhead of services or
components. This descriptor can be passed from the input or a descriptor can
be generated by the DCM.
Delay (ms) parameter: This parameter determines the total transcode delay that
arises during the transcoding process. A higher delay gives better picture
quality. A value can be given between 1000 and 2800 ms and is by default set to
2500 ms.
Note: Changing this total transcode delay might change the maximum CPB
removal delay. More information about this maximum CPB removal delay can
be found in topic Configuring a Transcoded Video Component on page 725.
PCR Interval (ms) parameter: This parameter determines the playout interval of
the PCR. A value can be given between 10 and 300 ms and is by default set to
37 ms.
To Configure the Service Transcode Settings

The following steps describe how to configure the service transcode settings of a
service.
2 In the DCM Processing tree, browse to the service for which service transcode
settings must be configured.
the short-cut menu.
4 Click on the Service link and point to the Settings tab.
Result: The Service Settings table is displayed.
734 4011746 Rev W

Configuring the Service Related Transcode Settings of a Service
5 Tick the Adapt (P)SI check box to modify the PSI/SI/PSIP information or clear
this check box otherwise.
6 In the Maximum Bitrate Descriptor Mode drop down box, select Generate or
Pass.
7 In the Delay (ms) box, enter the total transcode delay.
8 In the PCR Interval (ms) box, enter the playout interval for the PCR packets.
4011746 Rev W 735

10 Chapter 10
Backup Scenarios
Introduction
This chapter describes the port backup feature and the service backup
feature of the DCM.
In this Chapter
GbE Port Backup......................................................................................... 738
Transport Stream Backup .......................................................................... 741
Service Backup ............................................................................................ 751
SDI/RTP Service Backup........................................................................... 760
Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager ..................................... 763
Standalone Device Backup ........................................................................ 769
IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager................. 775
4011746 Rev W 737

Chapter 10 Backup Scenarios
GbE Port Backup

Introduction
For port backup purposes the GbE ports of a GbE Interface Card or IP Video
Gateway Card can be configured in such a way that an inactive port (backup port)
takes over an active port (main port) when the GbE link on this active port
disappears.
GbE
port
Copy 1 IP(TSs) Service 1
Service 2 TS
Port
Pair
GbE Service 3
port
Copy 2 IP(TSs) Port
Backup
Demux Remux
GbE
port
Copy 1 IP(TSs) Service 1
Service 2 TS
Port
Pair
GbE Service 3
port
Copy 2 IP(TSs) Port
Backup
Demux Remux
For a GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card, GbE port 2 can be used to
backup GbE port 1 or vice versa (port pair 1 - 2) and for a GbE Interface card
containing four GbE ports, GbE port 4 can be used to backup GbE port 3 or vice
versa (port pair 3 - 4).
Tip: In the DCM Configuration tree on the Configuration page as well as in the
DCM Outputs tree on the Service - Tree View sub page, an active port is indicated
by a black colored port name and an inactive port by a gray colored port name, see
illustration below.
The active/inactive state of a GbE port can also be checked in the GbE Name and
Network Settings table on the Interface sub page of a GbE Interface Card.
738 4011746 Rev W

GbE Port Backup
The DCM supports the following GbE port backup scenarios:

The main GbE port switches to its backup GbE port when a
backup-transition-trigger-alarm occurs on the main GbE port and the backup
GbE port is backup-transition-trigger-alarm free. The backup GbE port remains
active until a backup-transition-trigger-alarm arises on backup GbE port and the
main GbE port is backup-transition-trigger alarm free again (revertive mode:
inactive).
The main GbE port switches to its backup GbE port when a
backup-transition-trigger-alarm occurs on the main GbE port and the backup
GbE port is backup-transition-trigger-alarm free. The backup GbE port remains
active until the main GbE port becomes backup-transition-trigger-alarm free
(revertive mode: active).
Note: A backup transition can be triggered when a Link Loss alarm or UDP Loss
alarm occurs.
To configure these backup scenarios, the following parameters can be adapted:
Backup Mode parameter: this parameter determines the backup trigger and the
Main and Backup port. The following values can be selected:
- Manual x (with x the GbE port number): the GbE port in question is main port
and remains active until the Backup Mode parameter is changed.
- Auto x (with x the GbE port number): the GbE port in question is main port
and remains active as long as the links on this port is up.
Revertive parameter: this parameter determines the revertive mode. This
parameter is only applicable if the Backup Mode parameter is set to Auto x.
- Active: the backup port remains active until the link on the main port is up
again.
- Inactive: the backup port remains active until the link on backup port
disappears and the link on the main port is up again.
Revert Delay (s) parameter: the time the GbE link on the backup port must be
down before the main port becomes active again. This parameter is only
applicable if the Backup Mode parameter is set to Auto x.
Trigger Alarm parameter: this parameter determines when a backup transition
has to be executed:
- Link Loss: a backup transition will be triggered when a Link Loss alarm
occurs.
- Link Loss and UDP Loss: a backup transition will be triggered when a Link Loss
or UDP Loss alarm occurs.
4011746 Rev W 739

Changing the GbE Port Backup Parameters

Perform the following steps to change the GbE port backup parameters of a GbE
Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card.
which GbE port backup parameters must be changed.
3 Select the Configuration - Backup link.
4 In the Backup Mode drop down box of the port set in question, select the desired
backup mode.
5 In the Revertive drop down box, select the desired revertive mode.
6 In the Revert Delay (s) box, enter the time the GbE link on the backup port must
be down before the main port becomes active again. A delay can be entered
between 0 and 60 seconds.
7 In the Trigger Alarm drop down box, select the desired
backup-transition-trigger-alarm.
740 4011746 Rev W

Transport Stream Backup

Introducing Transport Stream Backup
General
In contrast with DCM's Service Backup feature, Transport Stream backup protects
the content of an outgoing Transport Stream by replacing the complete incoming
Transport Stream by a backup incoming Transport Stream. In the following
example, incoming Transport Stream B is the backup Transport Stream assigned to
incoming Transport Stream A.
Demux
Transport
Stream A
Source 1
Transport
Stream B
Source 2 Transport
Stream
Backup
If services are passed from Transport Stream A to the output and Transport Stream
A fails, the services from Transport Stream A will be replaced by identical services
from Transport Stream B. The matching criteria for services are Service Identifier
(SID).
Note: The services in Transport Stream A and Transport Stream B should be the
same.
Demux
Transport
Stream A
Source 1
TS Loss
Source 2 Transport
Transport
Stream B Stream
Backup
4011746 Rev W 741

Backup Trigger
A Transport Stream backup transition will be triggered by a Transport Stream loss
(TS Loss) alarm. The alarms used to activate a TS Loss alarm are configurable. For
more information, please refer to topic Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm
Triggers on page 802.
Note: Transport Stream backup transitions can also be triggered using ROSA's
Backup to Main Transport Stream Assignment

Before an incoming Transport Stream can be backed up by another incoming
Transport Stream, this backup Transport Stream must be assigned to the main
Transport Stream.
Scenarios
The Transport Stream backup feature of the DCM supports following scenarios:
When a TS Loss alarm is active for a particular time (Main - Backup Delay (s)
parameter) the DCM switch from main to backup Transport Stream and switches
back to main Transport Stream when a manual transition is requested (Revertive
mode disabled).
When a TS Loss alarm is active for a particular time (Main - Backup Delay (s)
parameter) the DCM switches from main to backup Transport Stream. When
the TS Loss alarm is cleared the device switches back to the main Transport
Stream (Revertive mode active) after a particular time (Backup - Main Delay (s)
parameter).
General Notes
In the DCM Outputs tree a Transport Stream in backup state is indicated by an
exclamation mark.
Cascading Transport Stream backups is not possible.
When the Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss parameter is disabled
(default value), a main to backup transition will always be done, even when the
backup source is in TS Loss state. The procedure to change the Don't Switch to
Backup Source in TS Loss parameter can be found in topic Changing the Backup
Switching parameters on page 750.
When the DCM switches from main to backup Transport Stream, the outgoing
service components can be kept static by defining component tracking rules.
For more information concerning tracking rules, please refer to topic Passing,
Blocking, and Remapping Service Components on page 297.
If Transport Stream backup is combined with DPI, component tracking rules
should be created to avoid unnecessary aborts of the advertising.
742 4011746 Rev W

Assigning Backup Transport Streams

A backup Transport Stream can be assigned to another incoming (main) Transport
Stream using the TS Backup table of the incoming Transport Stream or using the TS
Backup table of the port containing the incoming Transport Stream.
Assigning a Backup Transport Stream using the Backup TS table of the Main
Transport Stream
The following procedure describes how to assign a backup Transport Stream to a
main Transport Stream using the TS Backup table of this main Transport Stream.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream to which a backup
Transport Stream must be assigned.
4 Under the Backup TS settings, perform the following settings.
a Tick the Enabled check box to switch on Transport Stream backup for the
selected Transport Stream.
b In the Revertive drop down box, select one of the following settings.
– Enabled: when the TS Loss alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared
and this Transport Stream is in backup state, a backup-to-main transition
will be triggered after a particular time to go to the main Transport
Stream.
– Disabled: The Transport Stream remains in backup state when the TS Loss
alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared.
4011746 Rev W 743

c In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream should be active before a
main-to-backup transition will be triggered.
d In the Backup - Main Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream must be inactive before a
backup-to-main transition will be triggered.
e In the Board drop down box, select the interface card that receives the
backup Transport Stream.
f In the Port drop down box, select the port pair that receives the backup
Transport Steam.
g In the Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
h In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
i In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port that
receives the backup Transport Stream.
box is set to ASI.
Assigning Backup Transport Streams using the Backup TS Table of the Port
The following procedure describes how to assign a backup Transport Stream to a
main Transport Stream using the TS Backup table of the port containing this
Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Stream to
which a backup Transport Stream must be assigned.
short-cut menu.
4 Click on the TS Backup link.
Result: The Service - TS Backup sub page is displayed.
744 4011746 Rev W

5 In the Backup TS table, complete the following settings in the row of the
Transport Stream to which a backup Transport Stream must be assigned.
a Tick the Backup TS ID - Enabled check box to switch on Transport Stream

backup for the selected Transport Stream.
b In the Backup TS ID - Card drop down box, select the interface card that
receives the backup Transport Stream.
c In the Backup TS ID - Port drop down box, select the port pair that receives
the backup Transport Steam.
d In the Backup TS ID - Type drop down box, select one of the following
settings:
e In the Backup TS ID - IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to
which the source device streams.
Note: The Backup TS ID - IP Address box is only applicable if the Backup
TS ID - Type drop down box is set to GbE Multicast.
f In the Backup TS ID - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the
input port that receives the backup Transport Stream.
Note: The Backup TS ID - UDP Port box is not applicable if the Backup TS
ID - Type drop down box is set to ASI.
g In the Revertive drop down box, select one of the following settings.
Stream.
h In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
i In the Backup - Main Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
4011746 Rev W 745

Note: When particular backup Transport Stream settings for all main Transport
Streams with multicast IP address must be changed to similar values, the Update all
TS function of the web browser user interface can be used. The following
procedure describes how to use this function.
1 Under the Update All GbE Multicast Backup TS settings, enter the desired
value in the box or select the desired value in the drop down box of the
parameter that should be changed for all Transport Streams of the selected ports.

Result: The settings are changed in the Backup TS table.
Adding and Removing Preconfigured Transport Stream Entries

The web browser user interface of the DCM allows preconfiguring Transport
Streams with backup Transport Stream settings for a GbE Interface Card. Such
Transport Stream is preconfigured by adding a Preconfigured Transport Stream
entry in the Backup TS table containing all Transport Streams of a particular port.
When the incoming Transport Stream appears at the corresponding port, the
Transport Stream will get these backup Transport Stream settings.
The following steps explain how to add a preconfigured Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which preconfigured Transport
Stream entries should be added.
short-cut menu.
4 Point to the TS Backup link.
746 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Service - TS Settings sub page containing the Add Peconfigured TS
and Backup TS tables are displayed.
5 Under the Add Preconfigured TS settings, complete the following settings:
a In the Main Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
– Unicast: the destination IP address of the main Transport Stream is a
unicast IP address.
– Multicast: the destination IP address of the main Transport Stream is a
b Enter the destination IP address of the main Transport Stream in the IP
Address box and the UDP port number in the UDP box.
c In the Backup Card drop down box, select the interface card that receives the
backup Transport Stream.
d In the Backup Port drop down box, select the port pair that receives the
backup Transport Steam.
e In the Backup Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
f In the Backup IP box, enter the multicast IP address to which the source
device streams.
Note: The Backup IP box is only applicable if the Backup Type drop down
g In the UDP box, enter the UDP port number of the input port that receives
the backup Transport Stream.
Note: The UDP box is not applicable if the Backup Type drop down box is
set to ASI.
4011746 Rev W 747

h In the Revertive drop down box, select one of the following settings.
Stream.
i In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
j In the Backup - Main Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
Result: After pressing the Add command button the preconfigured Transport
Stream is added in the Backup TS table.
Tip: In the Backup TS table, preconfigured Transport Streams with configured
Transport Stream backup settings can be removed by ticking the check box at the left
hand side of the corresponding preconfigured Transport Stream entry and pressing
the Remove Checked Items command button.
Performing a Manual Backup Transition

For test purposes or to perform a backup-to-main transition if the revertive mode is
disabled, the DCM allows triggering a backup transition manually. A manual
backup transition can be done in the TS Backup table of the incoming Transport
Stream or in the TS Backup table of the port containing the incoming Transport
Stream.
Performing a Manual backup Transition using the Backup TS Table of the Main
Transport Stream
The following steps explain how to perform a manual backup transition using the
Backup TS table of the main Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which a manual
backup transition must be triggered.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page containing the Backup TS settings is
displayed.
748 4011746 Rev W

Tip: The active state of the Transport Stream backup is shown in the State box.
4 Click on the Activate - Backup command button (main device active) or the
Activate - Main command button (main device inactive).
Performing a Manual backup Transition using the Backup TS Table of the Port
The following steps explain how to perform a manual backup transition using the
Backup TS table of the port containing main Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the main Transport
Stream for which a manual backup transition must be triggered.
short-cut menu.
4 Click on the TS Backup link.
Result: The Service - TS Backup sub page is displayed.
5 In the Backup TS table, press the Backup command button in the corresponding
backup Transport Stream entry to trigger a main-to-backup transition or the
Main command button to trigger a backup-to-main transition.
4011746 Rev W 749

Changing the Backup Switching Parameters

When a main-to-backup transition is triggered and the backup source is in TS Loss
state, the transition will be performed or interrupted depending on the settings of
the Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss parameter. The following steps
describe how to change the Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss parameter.
Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss parameter should be changed.
3 Point to the TS-Service Backup tab that appears after clicking on the Default
Settings link.
Result: The TS-Service Backup tab page is displayed.
4 Under the Default TS Backup Settings, set or clear the Don't Switch to Backup
Source in TS Loss check box.
750 4011746 Rev W

Service Backup
Service Backup
Introducing Service Backup
General
Service backup is a feature that protects the content of an outgoing Transport Stream
by replacing failing services by backup services. In the example below, the
outgoing Transport Stream is built up with service 1, 2, and 3 from incoming
Transport Stream A. Service 1, 2, and 3 of incoming Transport Stream B are backup
services for service 1, 2, and 3 of incoming Transport Stream A.
Demux Remux
1
e
ic
rv
Se
Transport
Stream A
Service 2
Source 1 Transport
Se
rv Stream
ic
e
3
Transport Service 1
Stream B
Service 2
Source 2 Service 3
Service
Backup
When service 1 of Transport Stream A fails the service backup feature of the DCM
automatically replaces the missing service in the outgoing Transport Stream with
service 1 of Transport Stream B.
Demux Remux
1
e
ic
rv
Se
Transport
Stream A
Service 2
Source 1 Transport
Se
Service 1 rv Stream
Removed ic
e
3
Transport Service 1
Stream B
Service 2
Source 2 Service 3
Service
Backup
4011746 Rev W 751

Backup Trigger
A service backup transition will be triggered by an input service loss alarm. The
alarms used to active a service loss alarm are configurable. For more information,
please refer to topic Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 794.
Tip: A service backup transition can also be triggered using a GPIO contact.
Therefore GPIO must be added to the list of service loss alarm triggers and a GPIO
contact must be assigned.
Note: Service backup can also be triggered using ROSA's Macro Component.
More information about macro's can be found in topic Using DCM Macros on page
939.
Backup to Main Service Assignment

Before an outgoing service (main service) can be backed up by a particular incoming
service (backup service), the backup service must be assigned to this main service.
When services are merged into this main service, backup services can be assigned to
each of these merged services. A particular incoming service can acts as backup
service for multiple main services.
Service 1
Transport
Stream A
M
Source 1 Service 2 ai
n
Service 3
Transport
Stream B Merged service
in
Source 2 ge
d
Transport
Stream
er
M
Transport Service 1 BU
Stream C Service 2 BU
Backup Source
Demux Service Remux

Backup
When the DCM is equipped with a Transcoder Card, a backup service can be
assigned to a transcoded service. When this main service fails, the assigned backup
service will then be transcoded and automatically replaces the missing transcoded
main service.
Backup Scenarios
The service backup feature of the DCM supports following scenarios:
When a service loss is active for a particular time (Main - Backup Delay (s)
parameter) the DCM switch from main to backup service and switches back to
main service when a manual transition is requested (Revertive mode:
NonRevertive).
752 4011746 Rev W

Service Backup
parameter) the DCM switches from main to backup service. When the main
service is back for a particular time (Backup - Main Delay (s) parameter) the
device switches back to the main service (Revertive mode: Revertive).
parameter) and the backup service is service loss alarm free, the DCM switches
from main to backup service. A backup-to-main transition will be triggered
when a service loss alarm is active on the backup service and the main service is
service loss alarm free (Revertive mode: Floating).
General Notes
In the DCM Outputs tree a service in backup state (outgoing service or one of
the merged services) is indicated by an exclamation mark.
When the Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss parameter is disabled
(default value), a main to backup transition will always be done, even when the
backup source is in Service Loss state. The procedure to change the Don't
Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss parameter can be found in topic
Changing the Backup Switching Parameters on page 758.
The name of the outgoing service is by default the name of the active service.
After a main to backup transition, the outgoing service will get the name of the
backup service. The name of the outgoing service can be locked by changing
the name of the outgoing service in the SDTa. The procedure to change the
service name can be found in topic To Change the Service Name of an Outgoing
Service.
When a main to backup transition is executed during a splice event, the splice
event can be interrupted. To deal with this, the components of the main service
participating in the splice event must be forced. For more information, please
refer to chapter Digital Program Insertion on page 505.
Assigning Backup Services to Main and Merged Services

The following steps explain how to configure the backup setting for a service.
the service for which backup settings must be configured.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page for the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 753


Result: The Routing tab page with Service Routing table is displayed.
6 In the row of the service for which backup settings must be configured, point to
the Backup arrow.
Result: The Service - Service - Backup Services sub page for the selected service
is displayed.
Note: For each merged service into the selected service, an additional Merged
Service Source table is added. These tables can be used to assign backup
services to merged services.
7 Under the Service Backup Settings, configure the backup parameters for the
outgoing service as described in the following steps:
a In the Revertive drop down box, select one of the following settings:
NonRevertive, Revertive, or Floating.
b In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds)
that the service loss alarm must be active on the main service before a
main-to-backup transition will be executed.
c In the Backup - Main Delays (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds)
that the service loss alarm must be inactive on the main service after a
main-to-backup transition before a backup-to-main transition will be
executed.
8 In the Main Service Source and each Merged Service Source table, assign
backup services as described in the following steps:
a Add a table entry by pointing to the Add Row command button below the
table.
754 4011746 Rev W

Service Backup
Result: A new table entry is displayed.

b In the Card drop down box, select the card receiving the backup service.
c In the Port drop down box, select the port receiving the backup service.
d In the Type drop down box, select the input port type:
e In the IP Address box, enter the multicast IP Address to which the source
device streams.
Note: The IP Address parameter is only applicable if the Type parameter is
set to GbE Multicast.
f In the UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the port that enters the
Transport Stream to which the backup service belongs to.
Note: The UDP Port parameter is not applicable if the backup service enters
the device via an ASI port.
g In the SID box, enter the service identifier of the backup service.
Tip: The revertive mode for service backup can also be changed by using ROSA's
Assigning Backup Services to a Transcoded Service

The following steps describe how to assign a backup service to a transcoded service.
2 In the DCM Processing tree, browse to the service to which a backup service
must be assigned to.
the short-cut menu.
4 Click on the Service link and point to the Backup tab.
Result: The Service Backup and Service Backup Settings table are displayed.
4011746 Rev W 755

5 In the Service Backup Settings table, complete the following steps.
Tip: In the Service Backup table, a transcoded service is indicated by its service
identifier, user name.
a In the Revertive drop down box of the transcoded service to which a backup
service must be assigned to, select one of the following settings: NonRevertive,
Revertive, or Floating.
b In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box of the service, enter the time (expressed
in seconds) that the service loss alarm must be active on the main service
before a main-to-backup transition will be executed.
c In the Backup - Main Delays (s) box of this service, enter the time (expressed
in seconds) that the service loss alarm must be inactive on the main service
after a main-to-backup transition before a backup-to-main transition will be
executed.
6 In the Service Backup table, complete the following steps.
Tip: In the Service Backup table, a transcoded service is indicated by its service
identifier, user name, name of the incoming service and additional information
like interface card receiving this incoming service...
a Tick the Backup check box.
Note: As long as the Backup check box is not set, the other backup
parameters are not applicable.
b In the Backup - Card drop down box, select the interface card receiving the
backup service that should be assigned to the transcoded service.
c In the Backup - Port drop down box, select the port receiving this backup
service.
d In the Backup - Type drop down box, select the type of this port:
e In the Backup - IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
Note: The Backup - IP Address box is only applicable if the Backup - Type
drop down box is set to GbE Multicast.
756 4011746 Rev W

Service Backup
f In the Backup - UDP box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
receiving this backup service.
Note: The Backup - UDP box is not applicable if the Backup - Type drop
g In the Backup - SID box, enter the service identifier of this backup service.
Performing a Backup Transition

For test purposes or for a backup-to-main service transition for services for which
the Revertive parameter is set to Disabled, a service backup transition can be
triggered via the web browser user interface of the DCM. The following steps
explain how to trigger a service backup transition.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing transport stream containing
the service for which a service backup transition trigger must be given.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page for the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
Result: The Routing tab page with Service Settings table is displayed.
6 In the row of the service for which a service backup transition trigger must be
given, point to the Backup arrow.
Result: The Service - Service - Backup Services sub page for the selected service
is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 757

Tip: The Status column shows the actual status of the service backup.
7 Click on the Activate command button in the row of the service that has to
become active.
Note: The Activate command button is only applicable for a service in Not
Active state.
Changing the Backup Switching Parameters

When a main-to-backup transition is triggered and the backup source is in Service
Loss state, the transition will be performed or interrupted depending on the settings
of the Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss parameter. The following
steps describe how to change the Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss
parameter.
Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss parameter should be changed.
3 Point to the TS-Service Backup link that appears after clicking on the Default
Settings link.
4 Under the Default Service Backup Settings, set or clear the Don't Switch to
Backup Source in Service Loss check box.
758 4011746 Rev W

Service Backup
4011746 Rev W 759

SDI/RTP Service Backup

Introduction
To protect the content of an outgoing SDI or RTP stream, a backup stream can be
assigned to the stream (main stream). The alarms triggering a main-to-backup
transition are:
For an SDI stream: SDI Input loss
For an RTP stream: UDP Stream Loss
Once a main-to-backup transition is executed, a backup-to-main transition must be
triggered manually when the main stream is back. The procedure to trigger a
backup-to-main transition can be found in topic Performing a Main-to-Backup or
Backup-to-Main Transition on page 761.
Assigning a Backup Stream to an SDI Stream

The following steps explain how to assign a backup SDI stream to a main stream.
Note: An SDI stream can only be backed up by an incoming RTP stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing SDI stream to which a backup
stream must be assigned.
3 Double-click on this stream or right-click on this stream and point to Settings in
the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Output SDI Streams sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Backup tab.
Result: The Backup tab page is displayed.
5 In the Backup Stream - Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
No backup
GbE Unicast: for a backup stream belonging to a GbE Unicast input port.
GbE Multicast: for a backup stream belonging to a GbE Multicast input port.
6 In the Backup Stream - IP box, box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
760 4011746 Rev W

SDI/RTP Service Backup
Note: The Backup Stream - IP box is only applicable if the Backup Stream -
Type drop down box is set to GbE Multicast.
7 In the Backup Stream - UDP box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
receiving the stream.
Assigning a Backup Stream to an RTP Stream

The following procedure describes how to assign a backup SDI stream to a main
stream.
Note: An RTP stream can only be backed up by an SDI stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing RTP stream to which a backup
stream must be assigned.
the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Output RTP Streams sub page is displayed.
5 In the Backup Stream - Port drop down box, select the SDI input port receiving
the backup stream.
Performing a Main-to-Backup or Backup-to-Main Transition

The procedure below describes how to perform a main-to-backup or a
backup-to-main transition.
4011746 Rev W 761

2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing stream for which a transition
must be executed.
the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Output RTP Streams or Service - Output RTP Streams
sub page is displayed.
5 In the Backup Settings table, point to the Activate command button to perform a
main-to-backup transition or the Deactivate command button to perform a
backup-to-main transition.
762 4011746 Rev W

Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager

Introduction
About Device Backup using ROSA Element Manager
Device backup using a ROSA Element Manager (EM) is a 1 to 1 backup scenario in
which the functionality of a failing device is taken over by a backup device and for
which monitoring is done by a ROSA EM.
ROSA Element Manager
COM1 COM3 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 CRAFT
RS232 DTE RS232 DTE

TX TX RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE TX
RX RX RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RX
RUN RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422
POWER ALARM COM2 COM4
FAIL
RS232 DTE RS232 DTE
TX TX TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX RX RX
Main DCM (active)
Alarm
Model D9900
PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
Backup DCM (inactive)
Alarm Model D9900

STOP
PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
In a normal situation the main DCM (the active device) as well as the backup DCM
(the inactive device) process the program content, the ROSA EM monitors both
devices. Streaming on the GbE port of the main device is activated and on the GbE
port of the backup DCM is stopped.
When the ROSA EM detects a Device Operational Failure alarm on the active DCM or
detects that the active DCM becomes not responding, it will start a backup
transition. During this transition the active device will be set to inactive and the
inactive device to active. Activating a device can enable streaming on a GbE port
and can activate IP aliasing on the device depending on the configuration of these
features.
COM1 COM3 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 CRAFT
RS232 DTE RS232 DTE

RX RX RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RX
RUN RS485/RS422 RS485 /RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485 /RS422

POW ER ALARM COM2 COM4
FAIL RS232 DTE RS232 DTE
TX TX TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX RX RX
Main DCM (inactive)
Alarm Model D9900

PS 1
PS 2
STOP
Scientific
Atlanta
Backup DCM (active)
Alarm Model D9900

PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
4011746 Rev W 763

The ROSA EM is also able to start a device backup transition when the
communication between the element manager and the main DCM fails due to for
instance a failing main DCM.
CAUTION:
When the communication between the main DCM and the ROSA EM fails and
the main DCM is OK, a backup transition will be triggered to activate the backup
DCM without making the main DCM inactive, meaning both the main DCM as
well as the backup DCM stream.
After a main-to-backup transition (Backup: main device becomes inactive and

backup device active) and the alarm triggering the transition is cleared, a
backup-to-main transition (Restore: main device becomes active and backup device
inactive) can be started manually. Starting a restore transition will be done by
using ROSA EM.
After rebooting a DCM, the device becomes active by default. In device backup
applications it is advisable to inactivate one or both devices after rebooting. Once
the connection is made with the ROSA EM the active/inactive state of the main and
backup device is determined by the element manager.
About ROSA Element Manager

The scenario used by the ROSA® EM to backup and to restore devices is script
driven, meaning scripts are required to perform a backup or restore transition. The
scripts used by the ROSA® Element Manager to backup or restore a DCM are:
for backup: budcm.py
for restore: redcm.py
Note: A ROSA EM participating in a DCM backup application requires software
version V03.02.00.
More information concerning ROSA® EM, scripts..., please refer to the ROSA®
Element Manager Installation and Operation Guide or User's Guide.
764 4011746 Rev W

Special Cases
Application with main and backup routers
When a DCM has to stream to both the main router as well as to the backup
router, the working mode of the ports within the corresponding GbE port pair
(Port Mirroring parameter) has to be set to Mirror X on Y, meaning the backup
port of the port pair streams out an exact copy of the main port.
C OM1 COM 3 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 CRAFT
RS232 DTE RS232 DTE

TX TX RS232 DTE RS232 D TE RS232 DTE RS232 D TE TX
RX RX RS485 RCD S RS485 R CDS RS485 RCD S RS485 RCDS RX
RUN RS485/RS422 RS485/R S422 RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422

POW ER ALARM C OM2 COM4
FAIL
R S232 DTE RS232 DTE
TX TX TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX RX RX
Main Router
Main DCM (active)
Alarm Model D9900

PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
Backup DCM (inactive) Backup Router
Model D9900
STOP
Alarm
PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
Applications with additional clients (AD Servers or EMMGs)

To eliminate additional clients (main and backup source) to feed the backup
DCM in a backup application or to avoid the need for additional client licenses,
the DCM supports IP address takeover by using IP aliasing.
COM1 COM 3 C OM5 C OM6 C OM7 C OM8 CRAFT
RS232 DTE RS232 DTE

RX RX RS485 RCD S RS485 RCD S RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RX
RUN RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485 /RS422 RS485 /RS422
POWER ALAR M COM2 COM4
FAIL
RS232 DTE RS232 DTE
TX TX TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX RX RX
Main DCM (active)
Alarm Model D9900

PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
Alarm
Model D9900
STOP
PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
AD + EMMs
AD + EMMs
SCTE 30
SCTE 30
EMMG
AD Server
Advertising (AD)
EMMs
SCTE 30 messages
LAN
4011746 Rev W 765

DCM's IP Aliasing feature works as follows:

When the client has to send IP packets to a port of the main DCM and the
client's ARP table is not yet or no longer populated with ARP entries for this
port, the client broadcasts an ARP request message containing the IP address
of these packets. When IP aliasing is active on a network interface of the
main DCM, the DCM responds with an ARP reply message containing IP
address and MAC address of the port. When the client receives the ARP
reply, it ads an ARP entry containing the mapping between IP address and
MAC address for this port and starts sending IP packets to this port.
When the backup DCM is activated, it broadcasts several gratuitous ARP
messages containing the alias IP address and the MAC address of the
corresponding backup DCM port. When the client receives such message it
refreshes the ARP entry of the IP address matching the Alias IP address.
Now the IP packets with destination IP address matching the alias IP address
for the main DCM port will be sent to the corresponding backup DCM port.
Steps to Take
Before the device backup application which is monitored by ROSA® Element
Manager can be used, a number of actions must be completed.
Note: The outgoing Transport Stream configuration for both the main and backup
DCM must be identical.
On the Main DCM

Actions to be done on the main DCM by using the DCM GUI.
Configure the triggers that have to generate a Device Operational Failure alarm.
For more information, please refer to topic Configuring Device Operational Failure
Alarm on page 812.
Determine the Active/Inactive state of the main DCM after powering up. More
information can be found in topic Activating or Deactivating the DCM on page 64.
When a single client (AD server) has to feed both the main DCM and the backup
DCM, IP aliasing feature must be set to Auto and IP aliases must be assigned to
the port used to feed the main DCM. For more information please refer to topic
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports on page 71 or
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Gbe Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page
116.
The MPEG data packet filtering must be done using MAC filtering (Filtering
parameter = MAC Only). More information concerning the Filtering parameter
can be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 95.
When the outgoing MPEG data packet streaming must be switched off during
the inactive state of the main DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be set
to Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic Changing
GbE Port Pair Settings on page 98.
766 4011746 Rev W

When the DCM has to stream to a main router and backup router, the working
mode of the ports within the corresponding GbE port pair (Port Mirroring
parameter) has to be set to Mirror X on Y. For more information, please refer to
topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 98.
On the Backup DCM

Actions to be done on the backup DCM by using the DCM GUI.
Determine the Active/Inactive state of the backup DCM after powering up.
More information can be found in topic Activating or Deactivating the DCM on
page 64.
When a single client (AD server) has to feed both the main DCM and the backup
DCM, IP aliasing feature must be set to Auto and IP aliases must be assigned to
the port used to feed the main DCM. The IP alias must be equal to the IP alias
of the main DCM. For more information please refer to topic Configuring the IP
Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports on page 71 or Configuring the IP Aliasing
Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 116.
the inactive state of the backup DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be
set to Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic
Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 98.
mode of the ports within the corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirror
X on Y. For more information, please refer to topic Changing GbE Port Pair
Settings on page 98.
On the ROSA Element Manager

Actions to be done using the ROSA® EM GUI
Add both DCM devices to the device tree of the ROSA® EM.
Enter the following parameters on the Backup tab of the main DCM:
- Backup Mode parameter: Automatic
- Restore Mode parameter: Manual
- Backup Script parameter: budcm.py
- Restore Script parameter: redcm.py
- Backup Device parameter: the name of the backup device as used in the
device tree of the ROSA® EM GUI
For all other parameters on this tab page, use default values.
4011746 Rev W 767

Enter the following parameter on the Properties tab of the main and backup
DCM:
- Script parameter: devdcm.py
For all other parameters on this tab page, use default values.
Note: The backup application can be tested by changing the Backup State parameter
on the Backup tab page of the main DCM from Inactive to Backup and vice versa.
Performing a Manual Restore Action after a Main-to-Backup Transition

After a main-to-backup transition the application can be restore manually using the
ROSA® EM GUI. A restore action is performed by changing the Backup State
parameter on the Backup tab of the main DCM from Backup to Inactive.
768 4011746 Rev W

Standalone Device Backup

Introduction
The Stand Alone device backup is a 1 to 1 backup scenario in which the functionality
of a failing device is taken over by a backup device and for which the trigger for the
transition between the main and backup device is communicated using our
Heartbeat protocol.
LAN
Heart
beats Main DCM (active)
Alarm Model D9900

PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
Alarm
Model D9900
STOP
PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
In a normal situation the main DCM (the active device) as well as the backup DCM
(the inactive device) process the program content and both the main and backup
DCM send heartbeat packets to each other. The active DCM sends active-state
heartbeat packets and the inactive DCM inactive-state heartbeat packets.
An inactive device becomes active when:
a Device Operational Failure alarm occurs on the active DCM, the active DCM
stops sending active-state heartbeat packets and starts sending inactive-state
heartbeat packets after a particular delay; the device becomes inactive. The
backup DCM receives such inactive-state heartbeat packets from the main DCM
and becomes active immediately.
the active device becomes down, the inactive device no longer receives
active-state heartbeat packets from the active device and becomes active after a
while.
4011746 Rev W 769

Activating a device can enable streaming on a GbE port and can activate IP aliasing
on the device depending on the configuration of these features.
LAN
Heart Main DCM (inactive)

beats
Alarm Model D9900
PS 1
PS 2
STOP
Scientific
Atlanta
Backup DCM (active)
Alarm
Model D9900
PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
CAUTION:
When the communication between the main and backup DCM fails and the main
DCM is still OK, a backup transition will be triggered to activate the backup
DCM without making the main DCM inactive, meaning both the main DCM as
well as the backup DCM are active.
After a main-to-backup transition (Backup: main device becomes inactive and

backup device active) and the alarm triggering the transition is cleared, a
backup-to-main transition (Restore: main device becomes active and backup device
inactive) can be started manually. Starting a restore transition will be done via the
GUI of the main DCM. For maintenance or reconfiguration purposes, a
main-to-backup transition can also be triggered manually.
DISCLAIMER
Stand alone device backup of DCM devices participating into IP Statmux
applications combined with encoder backup is not possible.
Steps to Take
On the Main DCM
Actions to be done on the main DCM.
Configure the triggers that have to generate a Device Operational Failure alarm.
For more information, please refer to topic Configuring Device Operational Failure
Alarm on page 812.
Configure the Device Backup Settings for the main DCM. Please refer to topic
Configuring the Device Backup Settings on page 773.
Determine the Active/Inactive state of the main DCM after powering up. More
information can be found in topic Activating or Deactivating the DCM on page 64.
770 4011746 Rev W

When a single client (for instance an AD server) has to feed both the main DCM
and the backup DCM via a GbE port or via the management port, IP aliasing
feature must be set to Auto and IP aliases must be assigned to the port used to
feed the main DCM. For more information please refer to topic Configuring the
IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports on page 71 or Configuring the IP
Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 116.
the inactive state of the main DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be set
to Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic Changing
GbE Port Pair Settings on page 98.
topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 98.Port
On the Backup DCM

Actions to be done on the backup DCM.
Determine the Active/Inactive state of the backup DCM after powering up.
More information can be found in topic Activating or Deactivating the DCM on
page 64.
Configure the Device Backup Settings for the backup DCM. More information
can be found in topic Activating or Deactivating the DCM on page 64.
When a single client (for instance an AD server) has to feed both the main DCM
and the backup DCM, IP aliasing feature must be set to Auto and IP aliases must
be assigned to the port used to feed the main DCM. The IP alias must be equal
to the IP alias of the main DCM. For more information please refer to topic
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports on page 71 or
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page
116.
the inactive state of the backup DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be
set to Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic
Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 98.
4011746 Rev W 771

topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 98.
Special Cases
Application with main and backup routers
When a DCM has to stream to both the main router as well as to the backup
router, the working mode of the ports within the corresponding GbE port pair
(Port Mirroring parameter) has to be set to Mirror X on Y, meaning the backup
port of the port pair streams out an exact copy of the main port.
LAN
Main Router
Heart
beats Main DCM (active)
Alarm Model D9900

PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
Backup DCM (inactive) Backup Router
Model D9900
STOP
Alarm
PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
Applications with additional clients (AD Servers)

To eliminate additional clients (main and backup source) to feed the backup
DCM in a backup application or to avoid the need for additional client licenses,
the DCM supports IP address takeover by using IP aliasing.
AD Server
Advertising (AD)
LAN
SCTE 30 messages
Heart
beats
SCTE 30
SCTE 30
AD
Main DCM (active)
Alarm Model D9900

PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
AD
Alarm Model D9900

STOP
PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
772 4011746 Rev W

DCM's IP Aliasing feature works as follows:

When the client has to send IP packets to a port of the main DCM and the
client's ARP table is not yet or no longer populated with ARP entries for this
port, the client broadcasts an ARP request message containing the IP address
of these packets. When IP aliasing is active on a network interface of the
main DCM, the DCM responds with an ARP reply message containing IP
address and MAC address of the port. When the client receives the ARP
reply, it ads an ARP entry containing the mapping between IP address and
MAC address for this port and starts sending IP packets to this port.
When the backup DCM is activated, it broadcasts several gratuitous ARP
messages containing the alias IP address and the MAC address of the
corresponding backup DCM port. When the client receives such message it
refreshes the ARP entry of the IP address matching the Alias IP address.
Now the IP packets with destination IP address matching the alias IP address
for the main DCM port will be sent to the corresponding backup DCM port.
Configuring the Device Backup Settings

The following procedure describes how to configure the device backup settings for
the main and backup DCM participating into a standalone device backup
application.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Backup link that
Result: The Backup sub page is displayed.
2 In the Device Backup Settings table, perform the following settings:
a In the Device Role drop down box, select one of the following settings:
– Standalone (default): for devices that do not participate into a standalone
device backup application
– Main: for a device that acts as a Main device in a standalone device
backup application
– Backup: for a device that acts as a backup device in a standalone device
backup application
b In the Peer IP Address box, enter the IP address of the peer device. The
octets must be separated by dots.
– For a main device: the IP address of the backup device
– For a backup device: the IP Address of the main device
4011746 Rev W 773

c In the Main to Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time the main device is down
or the time the Device Operational Failure alarm is active on the main before a
main to backup transition will be triggered.
d In the Heartbeat UDP Port box, enter the UDP Port number of the peer
device.
Note: This parameter must be equal for both the main device and backup
device.
e In the Heartbeat Network Interface drop down box, select the network
interface used by the Heartbeat protocol.
774 4011746 Rev W

IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager

Introduction
About IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager
IP Statmux device backup using a ROSA® Element Manager is a 1 to 1 backup
scenario in which the IP Statmux functionality of a failing device is taken over by a
backup device and for which monitoring is done by ROSA® EM.
COM1 C OM3 COM5 COM 6 COM7 COM8 CRAFT
RS232 DTE RS232 DTE

TX TX RS232 D TE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE TX
RX RX RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCD S RX
RUN RS485 /RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485 /RS422 RS485 /RS422

POWER ALARM COM2 C OM4
FAIL RS232 DTE RS232 DTE
TX TX TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX RX RX
Main DCM IP statmux (active)

Alarm
PS 1
Model D9900
Digital Content Manager (DCM) ROSA NMS
PS 2
Backup DCM IP statmux (active)

Alarm
PS 1
PS 2
Model D9900
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Management
SDI Router
Encoder #1
SDI SDI IP
Encoder #2
SDI SDI IP
Encoder #3
Model D9900
SDI SDI IP IP GbE Alarm
PS 1
LAN PS 2
Encoder #4
SDI SDI IP
Encoder #Backup
SDI SDI IP
During IP Statmux controlling both the main DCM and backup DCM process the
messages coming from the MPEG encoders participating into the IP Statmux pool;
only the active device replies to the encoders. For MPEG encoder redundancy, both
devices keep updated their blacklist with inactive MPEG encoders. When the
ROSA® EM detects a Device Operational Failure alarm on the active DCM, it will
start a backup transition. During this transition the blacklist of the backup (active)
device will be checked and updated if required by the ROSA® EM. The main
(inactive) device stops replying to the encoders and the backup (active) device starts
replying.
For more information concerning the IP Statmux feature, please refer to topic IP
Statmux Controller on page 879.
Note: The IP switch beside the DCM Statmux devices can also trigger a backup
transition, for more information, please refer to the ROSA® Element Manager User's
Guide.
4011746 Rev W 775

About ROSA Element Manager

The scenario used by the ROSA® EM to backup and to restore IP Statmux devices is
script driven, meaning scripts are required to perform a backup or restore transition.
The scripts used by the ROSA® Element Manager to backup or restore a DCM IP
Statmux are:
for backup: budcm_smx.py
for restore: redcm_smx.py
Note: A ROSA EM participating in a DCM IP Statmux backup application requires
software version V03.02.00.
More information concerning ROSA® EM, scripts..., please refer to the ROSA®
Element Manager Installation and Operation Guide or User's Guide.
Steps to Take
The following list describes the steps to take for configuring DCM IP Statmux
backup using ROSA EM.
Note: The procedure to setup a DCM IP Statmux application can be found in topic IP
Statmux Controller on page 879. The procedure to setup MPEG encoder backup is
described in the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 IP Statmux Application
Note.
Actions to be done using the ROSA® EM GUI.
1 Add the main, backup DCM IP statmux, and encoders to the ROSA EM device
list and restart the ROSA EM device.
2 Select the alarm(s) that should trigger a backup transition.
3 Configure the backup parameters for the main DCM.
On the Backup tab
– Backup Device: name of backup device
– Backup Script: budcm_smx.py
– Restore Script: redcm_smx.py
4 Configure the backup parameters for the main MPEG encoders.
On the DCM tab
– DCM device: <name of MAIN DCM>
– DCM Blacklist: Select Remove and click on the Execute command button.
The MPEG encoder will be controlled by the DCM IP Statmux.
5 Configure the backup parameters for the backup MPEG encoders.
On the DCM tab
– DCM device: <name of MAIN DCM>
– DCM Blacklist: Select Add and click on the Execute command button.
The MPEG encoder will not be controlled by DCM IP Statmux.
776 4011746 Rev W

4011746 Rev W 777

11 Chapter 11
Alarm Monitoring
Introduction
This chapter provides the procedures to configure the alarms and to
check the alarms generated by the DCM. Next to these procedures
this chapter also contains a description of each alarm that can be
generated by the DCM.
In this Chapter
Alarm Overview ......................................................................................... 780
Configuring the Alarms ............................................................................. 789
Checking the Alarms .................................................................................. 816
4011746 Rev W 779

Chapter 11 Alarm Monitoring
Alarm Overview
Card Related Alarms
ETR 290, 1st Priority Alarms
The following list gives an explanation of the priority 1 errors.
TS Sync Loss: The first byte of a Transport Stream packet header is the
synchronization byte (0x47). In a MPEG-2 decoder, the synchronization byte
serves for synchronization with the packetized Transport Stream. A TS Sync
Loss error arises when the synchronization byte in a sequence of at least two
Transport Stream packets are not detected.
Sync Byte Error: The first byte of the Transport Stream packet header is the
synchronization byte (0x47). In the MPEG-2 decoder the synchronization byte
serves for synchronization with the packetized transport stream. When the
synchronization byte is missing or contains errors too often, a MPEG-2 decoder
will not be able to synchronize to the transport stream. A Sync Byte Error is
generated when the synchronization byte in a TS packet is not detected.
PAT Error: The Program Association Table (PAT) contains a list of all programs
and Packet Identifiers (PIDs) contained in the transport stream and of associated
Program Map Tables (PMTs), which contain detailed program descriptions. If
the PAT is not available within a particular time interval8 or contains an error, a
MPEG-2 decoder will not be able to select and decode a program from the TS.
Notes:
- This alarm is also generated if a table ID different from 0x00 is found on PID
0x0000 or if the Scrambling_control_field is not 0x00 for PID 0x0000.
- An incoming VBR Transport Stream with low bit rate can trigger a PAT
error.
CC Error: Packets with a particular PID value were lost, appeared in an incorrect
order, or appeared more than twice. The PID value appears in the Detail
column of the status overview table.
PMT Error: The PMT (Program Map Table) is a table for detailed program
descriptions referenced in the PAT. As essential information for the MPEG-2
decoder, it contains the PIDs of all packets of the elementary streams as well as
the PIDs of packets serving for the transmission of PCR values associated with
the program. The PMT is of key importance for decoding TV and audio
programs. If the PMT is not available within a particular time interval or
8 The time that a PAT, PMT, or component is not available in the Transport Stream
before a alarm will be generated is adjustable. The procedure to change these time
intervals can be found in topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms.
780 4011746 Rev W

Alarm Overview
contains an error, a MPEG-2 decoder will not be able to select and decode a
program from the transport stream.
PID error: The packet with a particular PID and referred to in the PMT is not
found within the specified time interval9.
Other Alarms
The following list explains the other Transport Stream related alarms.
Async Sources: This Statmux related alarm will only be generated in
synchronous mode. It indicates that the Statmux pool encoder messages were
received outside the time window of 16 ms or that 525 and 625 video sources
were detected within the same Statmux pool.
ASI Input Bandwidth Exceeded: This alarm is generated when the bandwidth of
an incoming Transport Stream on an ASI port exceeds a configurable threshold
(Input Rate Limit parameter). More information can be found in topic ASI Port
Configuration on page 87.
Audio Bitrate Altered: This alarm is generated if the output bitrate of the audio
stream doesn't match the configured bitrate (or half of the configured bitrate if
the input is mono). The actual bitrate is specified in the alarm.
Audio Level Clipped: This alarm is generated when the level of the audio
component changes too much. The outgoing audio component will be distorted.
Audio Mismatch: This alarm is generated when an AC-3 audio components is
offered to the Transcoder Card for transcoding and the Allow AC3 parameter is
disabled.
Bandwidth Exceeded: The sum of the services and components within a
Transport Stream has exceeded the bit rate that is assigned to the Transport
Stream.
Bitrate Too Variable For CBR Dejittering: This alarm gets triggered when an
input TS has its Time Base Selection set to a CBR mode and the DCM was not
able to detect a constant bit stream.
Buffer Overflow: This alarm is generated when the delay buffer used for
transcoding is overflowed. This can happen when to much data is passed to the
Transcoder Card.
Connection with CA System lost: The TCP connection with the Conditional
Access System is interrupted.
Co-Processor Not Operational: The communication between the interface card
and the Co-Processor Card is down.
4011746 Rev W 781

Destination IP Unresolved: This alarm is generated when the MAC address for
a unicast IP address of an outgoing Transport Stream (GbE Interface Card) or
RTP stream (IP Video Gateway Card) can not be resolved.
Device is in Service Mode: This alarm is active during capturing live network
data. More information about capturing network data can be found in topic
Capturing Live Network Data on page 978.
DTF Bandwidth Exceeded: The sum of the bandwidth of the Transport
Streams encapsulated into a DTF Transport Stream exceeds the total bit rate for
the DTF Transport Stream. More information can be found in section Digital
Transport Formatter on page 859.
Encoder Dropout: This Statmux related alarm is generated when encoder
messages from an encoder part of a Statmux pool were not received during 1
frame period.
FEC L/D Error: This alarm is generated when a Transport Stream enters the
device with forward error correction (FEC) scheme L x D > 100. For more
information concerning forward error correction, please refer to section Forward
Error Correction on page 227.
FEC Temperature: This alarm is generated when the temperature of the FEC
engine on the FEC Card exceeds 90° C (185° F) and cleared at 80°C.
Illegal Encoder Version: This alarm is generated when a Statmux pool is
populated with an encoder that is not supported by DCM's IP Statmux feature.
Insertion Channel Active: This DPI related alarm is generated when a splicing
event is started.
IP Gateway License Error: This alarm is generated if an RTP stream is routed to
an SDI output port or when an incoming SDI signal is routed to a GbE port
without a license for that. More information concerning Licences can be found
in topic Licensing on page 49.
Link Loss: The GbE link is down between the source device and the DCM or
between the DCM and the destination device.
Low memory: This alarm is generated when the available memory on an
interface card becomes too low due to for instance too many EIT table...
Missing FEC Stream(s): This alarm is generated if one or both FEC streams are
missing for the incoming Transport Stream.
No AVC Encoder: This alarm is generated when a Combined Statmux pool is only
populated with MPEG2 encoders.
No Components to Scramble: CP Extension: There are no components available
for scrambling.
782 4011746 Rev W

Alarm Overview
No DTF Concentrator License Available: Each ASI Interface Card participating

into a DTF/MTR application consumes one DTF Scrambling License. This
alarm is generated when the card mode of an Interface Card is set to ASI DTF
and there are no more DTF Scrambling Licenses available. More information
concerning Licences can be found in topic Licensing on page 49.
No DTF Scrambling License Available: Each ASI Interface Card participating
into a DTF/MTR application for which the Transport Stream must be scrambled
consumes one DTF Scrambling License. This alarm is generated when the
scrambling feature is switched on and their are no more DTF Scrambling
Licenses available. More information concerning Licences can be found in topic
Licensing on page 49.
No ECM's available: CP Extension: this alarm arises when the DCM no longer
receives ECMs for a scrambled service.
No FEC License Available (Decoding): This alarm is generated if no license is
available at the arrival of an incoming Transport Stream when the Default Input
FEC Settings Mode is set to 1D FEC or 2D FEC. In this case FEC for the
corresponding Transport Stream will be disabled.
No FEC License Available (Encoding): This alarm is generated when not
enough licenses are available after a reboot if the Default Input FEC Settings
Mode is set to 1D FEC or 2D FEC.
No MPEG2 Encoder: This alarm is generated when an MPEG-2 Statmux pool is
populated with an AVC encoder.
No PCR present: This alarm is generated when a service can not be transcoded
due to a missing PCR.
Service Loss at output: This alarm is generated for an outgoing service if the
Service Loss alarm is active of the corresponding incoming service. This alarm
can only be generated if triggers for Service Loss alarm for the incoming service
are defined. More information concerning the configuration of Service Loss
triggers can be found in topic Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 794.
Payload Bitrate Too Low: This alarm is generated when the bit rate of the
payload of an outgoing Transport Stream drops below a configurable threshold.
The procedure to set up this threshold can be found in topic Configuring the
Stuffing Rate Too Low and Payload Bit Rate Too Low Alarm on page 808.
PMT section exceeds 1K: the PMT section is limited to 1 K Byte, this alarm
occurs if the PMT section exceeds this limit.
Port Bandwidth Exceeded: the sum of the bandwidth of all outgoing Transport
Streams on a particular GbE port has exceeded the maximum bandwidth for the
corresponding port.
4011746 Rev W 783

Requested PID could not be allocated: A particular component for scrambling

purposes could no be allocated, for instance the PID is already in use, another
free PID is automatically allocated.
Scrambling not started: Scrambling is not started because there are no
components or no Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) settings.
SD/HD Mismatch:
- Transrating: This alarm is generated when a High Definition (HD) service of
which the SD/HD parameter is set to SD is added to a Transrating Group or .
The corresponding HD service will be blocked.
- Transcoding: This alarm is generated if the incoming video component is HD
but SD is set for the transcoded video component. The video component
will not be transcoded.
Service in Backup (Service Loss): This alarm is generated when a service is in
backup state triggered by a Service Loss alarm.
Service in Backup (TS Loss): This alarm is generated when a service is in
backup state triggered by a TS Loss alarm.
Service Loss: The alarms to trigger a Service Loss alarm are configurable. More
information concerning the configuration of Service Loss triggers can be found in
topic Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 794.
Service loss at output: This alarm is generated when an SDI or RTP stream is
routed to the output and fails at the input.
Service Name Truncated in VCT: The service name in a CVCT or TVCT is
limited to 7 characters. This alarm is generated when the name given in the
CVCT or TVCT table ( PSI/SI/PSIP output standard mode = ATSC) or in CVCT,
TVCT, or SDT table ( PSI/SI/PSIP output standard mode = Mixed) is more than 7
characters.
SFN No valid GPS clock reference present: The ASI SFN Interface Card detects
invalid GPS clock reference signal(s) on its 10 MHz and/or 1 PPS input. For
more information, please refer to topic Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency
Networks on page 869.
Stuffing Rate Too Low: This alarm is generated when the bit rate of the stuffing
within an outgoing Transport Stream drops below a configurable threshold.
The procedure to set up this threshold can be found in topic Configuring the
Stuffing Rate Too Low and Payload Bit Rate Too Low Alarm on page 808.
SDI Input Loss: This alarm is generated when input is missing on an SDI port.
784 4011746 Rev W

Alarm Overview
Slate Generation Problem: This alarm is generated if the service doesn’t contain
the necessary components to generate a still picture clip:
- The service has no PCR PID.
- The service has no MPEG2 video component.
- The service has more than 1 MPEG2 video component.
TS Loss: A Transport Stream Loss alarm can be generated when one of the
following alarms is triggered: Service Loss alarm, Sync Loss alarm, Sync Byte Error
alarm, or Stream Loss alarm. For more information concerning the TS Loss
alarm, please refer to sub topic Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers
on page 802.
Too Many Encoders in Pool: This Statmux related alarm is generated when the
Statmux pool has reached the maximum number of encoders allowed in a pool.
Too Many Encoders Total: This Statmux related alarm is generated when the
maximum number of statmuxing encoders has been exceeded.
Transrating problem: This alarm is generated when the DCM is not able to
transrate the service due to poor quality of the incoming service or because of the
incoming service is scrambled or when the clip used to create still picture
services contains errors.
Transcoding Problem: This alarm is generated if a transcoding problem of an
audio or video component arises. The alarm specifies the PID of the
component. Possible causes are: input is scrambled, input errors, ...
TS Output disabled: An outgoing Transport Stream on an ASI SFN port is
disabled due to invalid GPS clock reference signals or due to missing licenses.
For more information, please refer to topic Integrating the DCM into Single
Frequency Networks on page 869.
Ts Sync Loss: This alarm is generated if sync loss is detected on an SDI port.
UDP Loss: This alarm is generated if a particular port no longer receives UDP
packets.
UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card): The Transport Stream of which services
are passed to the output is not longer detected at the corresponding UDP Port.
Possible causes:
- The corresponding Transport Stream is played out to another UDP port.
- The corresponding Transport Stream is not longer present at the input.
- The UDP Port to which the Transport Stream is played out is lower than the
GbE UDP Boundary setting.
UDP Stream Loss (IP Video Gateway Card): This alarm is generated if an RTP
stream entry is created for an incoming RTP stream and the corresponding RTP
stream is missing at the input.
4011746 Rev W 785

Unable To Scramble Input TS In DTF Combined Transport Stream: This alarm

is generated when a DTF Transport Stream is configured for scrambling one or
more of its services, but the Session Word (SW) at the specified index was not
filled out by uploading a Session Word Distribution File (SWDF).
Unreferenced Pid Error: The Transport Stream is permitted to contain only
packets with program-specific information (PSI and SI tables), packets with
certain PIDs that are reserved in the MPEG-2 standard, and packets that are
identified in a Program Map Table (PMT).
Notes:
- The alarm message reporting for this alarm is default disabled, meaning
ROSA® NMS and/or SNMP TRAP receivers will not be informed when such
alarm arises. The procedure to enabling alarm message reporting can be
found in topic Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all Alarms on
page 790.
- With the exception of Transport Streams with missing PAT, this alarm will
only be generated for components with PID higher than 32.
Unreferenced Pids Maximum Number Reached: The DCM is able to handle 500
incoming unreferenced components per second and per interface card. The
alarm is generated when the number of incoming unreferenced components
exceeds 500. This only limits the number of unreferenced PIDs that can be
shown in the user interface and the number of Unreferenced Pid errors that can be
generated.
User Selected PCR PID Error: This alarm is generated when the Time Base
Selection parameter is set to VBR Forced PCR or CBR Forced PCR and the defined
service is missing, has no PCR PID, or has a PCR PID that doesn't arrive regulary
(within 100 ms).
Device Related Alarms

Active ECMG Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP
connection with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) is removed
while ECMs are still requested via this connection.
Active EIS Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP connection
with the Event Information Scheduler (EIS) is removed.
Active EMMG Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP
connection with the Entitlement Management Message Generator (EMMG) is
removed while EMMs are still requested via this connection.
786 4011746 Rev W

Alarm Overview
Active PSIG Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP connection
with the PSI Generator (PSIG) is removed while PSI/SI information is still
requested via this connection.
Card Not Operational: This alarm is generated when the communication
between the main board of the DCM and the interface card is down. A Card
Not Operation alarm will by default be generated when no card is present in a
card slot. Topic Configuring the Card Not Operational Alarm on page 809
describes how to change this default behavior.
Channel closed by CA System: The channel between the DCM and the
Conditional Access System (CAS) is closed by the CAS.
Device Operational Failure: This alarm can be triggered when a Card Not
Operational alarm is generated. More information concerning the Device
Operational Failure alarm can be found in topic Configuring Device Operational
Failure Alarm on page 812.
Device is in Service Mode: This alarm is generated when the Ethernet capturing
process is started or when the trace level for card trace logs are set to All, Minor,
or Major. More information concerning Ethernet capturing can be found in
topic Capturing Live Network Data on page 978 and for trace logs in topic Viewing
Trace Logs on page 972.
Fan Failure: A fan failure alarm is arisen when a fan is malfunctioning. The
alarm detail indicates the fan number of the failing fan. The procedure to
replace a fan can be found in the system guide shipped with the device. Keep in
mind that only authorized and trained service personnel are allowed to maintain
and service the DCM after reading the Important Safety Instructions in the
system guide.
Hardware Key Inserted: This alarm is generated when the DCM hardware key is
plugged in into the I/O connector at the rear panel of the device.
Heartbeat Protocol Error: This alarm is generated when the UDP port used by
the Heartbeat Protocol for standalone device backup is occupied.
Low Memory: This alarm is generated if less the 50 MB of the available memory
is free. This can be the case in very high load conditions if many services are
passed containing large EITa schedule tables.
NTP Offset: This alarm is generated when the time difference between DCM
and the NTP server exceeds a particular threshold (Alarm Threshold parameter,
by default 15 ms) after a time synchronization action or when the DCM is not
synchronized with a NTP server. The procedure to change the Alarm
Threshold parameter can be found in topic Synchronizing with a Time-Server on
page 66.
4011746 Rev W 787

No ECMG Connection Available: This alarm is generated when there is no link

with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) or when there is no
channel capacity available.
No EMM resources available: The maximum number of generated EMM10
streams that can be passed is 64. This alarm occurs if the number of generated
EMM streams passed to the output exceeds 64.
Not Receiving Heartbeat Messages From Peer: In a standalone device backup
application the main and backup device communicates using heartbeat packets.
This alarm is generated when a device doesn't receive heartbeat packets from its
peer. More information about standalone device backup can be found in topic
Standalone Device Backup on page 769.
Operational Temperature: This alarm is generated when the device temperature
exceeds 65° C (149° F).
PS 1 Failure: This alarm is generated when the power supply unit in slot PS1 is
failing. The procedures to remove and to install a PSU can be found in the
system guide shipped with the device. Keep in mind that only authorized and
trained service personnel are allowed to maintain and to service the DCM after
reading the Important Safety Instructions in the system guide.
PS 2 Failure: This alarm is generated when the power supply unit in slot PS2 is
failing. The procedures to remove and to install a PSU can be found in the
system guide shipped with the device. Keep in mind that only authorized and
trained service personnel are allowed to maintain and to service the DCM after
reading the Important Safety Instructions in the system guide.
Power Up: A power up message is generated after powering up or rebooting the
DCM.
Received Channel Error Message: The DCM received a channel error message
from the Conditional Access System.
Test Message: A test message is generated. More information concerning test
messages can be found in sub topic Generating Test Messages on page 790.
Time Table Acquisition Timeout: This alarm is generated if the DCM fails to
synchronize its clock to an incoming SI table within a certain timeout period.
For more information concerning time synchronization to a SI table, please refer
to topic Synchronizing Using an SI Table on page 69.
10 Generated Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) are messages received from an

Entitlement Management Message Generator via the EMMG to MUX interface and
passed to an outgoing Transport Stream.
788 4011746 Rev W

Configuring the Alarms

Introduction
When an alarm becomes active on the DCM, the alarm is added to the Status page of
the web browser user interface and an alarm message is generated for reporting
ROSA® messages or SNMP traps. The alarm messages coming from the DCM are
logged on the ROSA® Message Viewer or SNMP TRAP receiver.
Note: The communication between the DCM and ROSA® NMS or SNMP TRAP
receivers can be checked by generating test messages. More information
concerning generating test messages can be found in topic Generating Test Messages
on page 790.
The alarm message reporting by DCM can be enabled or disabled for all alarms or
for individual alarms. The procedure to enable or disable the alarms message
reporting for all alarms can be found in topic Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message
Reporting for all Alarms on page 790 and for individual alarms in topic Configuring the
Settings of the Device Alarms on page 791 or Configuring the Settings of the Interface
Alarms on page 792.
Each alarm is accompanied with a colored bullet indicating the severity level of the
alarms. The severity of an alarm can be changed using the web browser user
interface. The following list shows the severity levels used by the DCM:
Colored Bullet Severity Level Description

(magenta) Indeterminate The severity level cannot be determined.
Critical The service is affected and an urgent corrective action
is required.
(red) Major The service is affected and a corrective action is
required.
(yellow) Minor A non-service affecting error occurred and action is
required to prevent more errors.
(blue) Warning A potential service affecting error is detected.
(white) Information Information message
For more information about changing the severity level of an alarm, please refer to
sub topic Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms on page 791 or sub topic
Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms on page 792 further in this topic.
4011746 Rev W 789

Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all Alarms

The following procedure explains how to enable or disable alarm message reporting
for all alarms.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Alarms link that
Result: The Configuration - Alarms sub page for the device is displayed.
2 In the Enabled drop down box under the All Alarms settings, select Yes to
enable or No to disable alarm message reporting for all alarms (device and
interface alarms).
Note: The presence and status of both power supply units are represented using
LEDs on the front panel of the DCM. When a PSU slot is empty, the corresponding
LED illuminates red. By disabling the corresponding alarm, this LED can be
extinguished.
Generating Test Messages

The communication between the DCM and ROSA® NMS or SNMP TRAP receivers
can be checked by generating a test message.
Note: Before ROSA NMS is able to receive test messages, the DCM must be mapped
into ROSA NMS. The procedure to map a DCM into ROSA NMS can be found in
appendix Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS on page 923.
The following procedure explains how to generate a test message.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Alarms link after
2 Press the Generate Test Message command button at the bottom of the Global
Alarm Settings table.
Result: A test message is sent to ROSA NMS and/or SNMP TRAP receivers.
Note: For some reasons it can be useful to change the severity level of a test message.
The procedure to change the severity level can be found in topic Configuring the
Settings of the Device Alarms on page 791 or topic Configuring the Settings of the
Interface Alarms on page 792.
790 4011746 Rev W

Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms

Perform the following steps to configure the device alarms settings.
pointing to the Configuration link.
Result: The device Configuration - Alarms sub page for the device is displayed.
2 In the Global Alarm Settings table, enable or disable the alarm message
reporting by selecting Yes or No in the Enabled drop down box of the alarm in
question.
3 In the (Major) Severity drop down box of the alarm, select the severity.
4 In the Begin Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be present before
an alarm message is generated.
5 In the End Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be cleared before
the corresponding alarm message is cleared.
4011746 Rev W 791

Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms

The following procedure explains how to configure the interface alarm settings.
alarm setting must be configured.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page for the interface card in question
is displayed.
3 Select the Alarms link.
Result: The Configuration - Alarms sub page is displayed.
4 In the Generate Alarms drop down box under the TS Loss and Service Loss
Alarm Generation settings, select For All Services to generate a service alarm / TS
Loss alarm for all services / Transport Streams missing at the input or select Only
for Groomed Services for services / Transport Streams only passed to the output.
792 4011746 Rev W

5 In the Global Alarm Settings table, change the following parameters for each
alarm that must be adapted:
a Enable or disable the alarm message reporting by selecting Yes or No in the

Enabled drop down box.
b In the (Major) Severity drop down box of the alarm, select the desired
severity.
c In the Begin Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be present
before an alarm message is generated.
e In the End Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be cleared
before the corresponding alarm message is cleared.
4011746 Rev W 793

6 Under the Error Intervals (ms) settings, change the following error intervals if
required:
PAT Error parameter: the time that the PAT is allowed to be not present in
the Transport Stream before a PAT error will be generated
PMT Error parameter: the time that the PMT is allowed to be not present in
the Transport Stream before a PMT error will be generated
PID Error (Audio/Video) parameter: the time that a particular audio or video
component is allowed to be not present in the Transport Stream before a PID
error will be generated.
PID Error (Data) parameter: the time that a particular data component is
allowed to be not present in the Transport Stream before a PID error will be
generated.
Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers

Introduction
To activate an Input Service loss alarm following triggers can be set:
TS Sync Loss: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the synchronization
byte of the Transport Stream to which the service belongs, is not detected in a
sequence of at least two Transport Stream packets.
Link Loss: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the GbE link is down
between the source device and the DCM.
UDP Loss: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the corresponding port no
longer receives UDP packets.
UDP Stream Loss: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the port of the
incoming Transport Stream to which the service belongs to no longer detects
packets at the corresponding UDP port.
Missing in PAT: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the PMT reference in
the PAT for the service is missing. A trigger will also be given when the PAT of
the incoming Transport Stream to which the service belongs to is missing after a
device reboot action.
794 4011746 Rev W

PMT Error: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the PMT for the service is
not available within a particular time interval or contains errors.
Scrambled Service: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the incoming
service is scrambled.
PID Error: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when components with PMT
reference are not found within a particular time interval.
PID Bitrate Error: a Service Loss alarm will be generated when the bitrate of
components with PMT reference drops below a specified threshold. These
thresholds are interface-card level parameters, meaning these settings apply to
all services on the corresponding interface card. The procedure to specify these
thresholds can be found in topic Changing the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms
on page 801.
When PID Error or PID Bitrate Error is selected, a trigger can be given for each
component in the service (PID Type parameter: Any) or a list can be entered
(PID List parameter) containing the PIDs of the components (PID type
parameter: List) for which a trigger must be given. The PID Error / PID List
combination act as a filter for the generated PID Errors. PIDs for components
which have no reference in the PMT of the service will be ignored (also PMT
PIDs or other SI PIDs).
When the PID Type parameter is set to Smart, the DCM will examine the service
type.
- For video services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered for the video
component or for an audio component, not for data components.
- For audio services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered for an audio
component, not for data components.
- For data services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered for the data
component.
GPIO: a Service Loss alarm can be triggered by means of a GPIO contact. More
information concerning GPIO contacts can be found in topic Configuring the
GPIO Contacts on page 80.
The DCM handles a particular alarm hierarchy. For example: if a UDP Stream Loss
is detected, Missing in PAT, PMT Error, an PID Error/ PID Bitrate Error will not be
triggered. This means that a Service Loss alarm will not be triggered when a TS
Sync Loss is detected and TS Sync Loss is not defined as Service Loss alarm trigger
even if other alarms are defined to trigger a service loss alarm. The following table
shows this alarm hierarchy.
Hierarchy Alarm
1 TS Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card)
Link Loss (GbE Interface Card)
2 UDP Loss (GbE Interface Card)
4011746 Rev W 795

Hierarchy Alarm
2 UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card)
2 Missing in PAT
3 PMT Error
4 Scrambled Service
5 PID Error/PID Bitrate Error
- GPIO
Tip: When most of the incoming services must be defined with the same Service
Loss trigger alarms, the configuration can be simplified by using default settings.
Each new incoming service and each incoming service for which the Service Loss -
Mode is set to Default will be configured with these settings. The default
parameters are dynamic, meaning when these default parameters are changed, all
incoming services for which the Service Loss mode is set to Default will get these
new settings. The procedure to configure these default parameters can be found in
sub topic Changing the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms on page 801.
Notes:
Depending on the setting of the Generate Alarms parameter, alarms can be
generated for all incoming services and components or only for services and
components which are passed to the output. For more information concerning
the Generate Alarms parameter, please refer to topic Configuring the Settings of
the Interface Alarms on page 792.
For preconfiguration purposes the DCM allows adding service loss alarm
triggers (called preconfigured triggers) for services not (yet) present at the input
of the device. The procedure to add preconfigured triggers can be found in sub
topic Adding Preconfigured Triggers on page 798.
Service Loss alarm triggers can also be configured using ROSA's Macro
Component. More information about macro's can be found in topic Using DCM
Macros on page 939.
To Configure Triggers for Services Present at the Input

The following procedure explains how to change the Service Loss alarm triggers.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream containing
the service for which the Service Loss alarm triggers must be changed.
796 4011746 Rev W


Result: The Service - Settings sub page containing the Service Settings table is
displayed.
5 In the Service Settings table, configure the following parameters in the rows of
the services for which Service Loss alarm setting must be changed.
Note: The picture above depicts the Service Settings table of an ASI Interface
Card, the Service Settings table of a GbE Interface Card is similar.
In the Mode drop down box, select the desired Service Loss trigger mode:
– Disabled: Service Loss alarm trigger is disabled.
– Default: the default alarms as defined on the configuration page of the
corresponding interface card will be used to trigger a Service Loss alarm.
– Specific: the alarms triggering a Service Loss alarm are selectable.
When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms
that have to trigger a Service Loss alarm: TS Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card
only), Link Loss (GbE Interface Card only), UDP Loss (GbE Interface Card
only) UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Missing in PAT, PMT Error,
Scrambled Service, PID Error/PID Bitrate Error, and/or GPIO.
When the PID Error/PID Bitrate Error check box is ticked, select PID Error or
PID Bitrate Error in the drop down box beside this check box.
When PID Error or PID Bitrate Error is set as trigger, select one of the
following settings in the PID Type drop down box:
– Any: a trigger will be given for all components within the incoming
service.
– List: a trigger will be given for the components as specified in the PID list
box.
– Smart: a trigger will be given depending on the component type.
Tip: The thresholds used to trigger a PID Bitrate Error are interface-card
level parameters, meaning these settings apply to all services on the
corresponding interface card. The procedure to specify these thresholds
can be found in topic Changing the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms on
page 801.
4011746 Rev W 797

When List is selected in the PID Type drop down box, enter the PID of the
components(s) for which a trigger must be given. Multiple PIDs must be
separated by commas.
When the GPIO check box is set, select the GPIO pin used to trigger the
alarm in the GPIO drop down box.
Note: Only the GPIO pins which are enabled can be chosen.
Adding Preconfigured Triggers

The following procedure describes how to create preconfigured triggers.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which preconfigured triggers
must be created.
short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page containing the Service Settings and Add
Preconfigured Trigger table is displayed.
4 Under the Add Preconfigured Trigger settings, complete the following
parameters:
Notes: The picture above shows the Add Preconfigured Trigger settings for
services on a GbE port. The settings for services on an ASI port does not contain
the Socket Type, IP Address, and UDP Port parameter.
– Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream to
which the service belongs to is a unicast IP address.
– Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream to
which the service belongs to is a multicast IP address.
798 4011746 Rev W

b Enter the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream to which

the service belongs to in the IP Address box and the UDP port number in the
UDP Port box.
c In the SID box enter the Service Identifier of the service.
d In the Mode drop down box, select the desired Service Loss trigger mode:
– Disabled: Service Loss alarm trigger is disabled.
e When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms
that have to trigger a Service Loss alarm: TS Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card
only), Link Loss (GbE Interface Card only), UDP Loss (GbE Interface Card
only) UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Missing in PAT, PMT Error,
Scrambled Service, PID Error/PID Bitrate Error, and/or GPIO.
f When the PID Error/PID Bitrate Error check box is ticked, select PID Error or
PID Bitrate Error in the drop down box beside this check box.
g When PID Error or PID Bitrate Error is set as trigger, select one of the
following settings in the PID Type drop down box:
– Any: a trigger will be given for all components within the incoming
service.
– List: a trigger will be given for the components as specified in the PID list
box.
– Smart: a trigger will be given depending on the component type.
Tip: The thresholds used to trigger a PID Bitrate Error are interface-card
level parameters, meaning these settings apply to all services on the
corresponding interface card. The procedure to specify these thresholds
can be found in topic Changing the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms on
page 801.
h When List is selected in the PID Type drop down box, enter the PID of the
components(s) for which a trigger must be given. Multiple PIDs must be
separated by commas.
i When the GPIO check box is set, select the GPIO pin used to trigger the
Result: The preconfigured trigger is added to the Service Settings table.
Tips:
Each preconfigured trigger entry in the Service Settings table for which the
service is not yet present at the input is suffixed by a check box, this check box
can be used to delete the entry.
4011746 Rev W 799

The service loss parameters for both the services present at the input and the
services not yet present can be changed in the Service Settings table. The
procedure is similar to the procedure described in sub topic To Configure Triggers
for Services Present at the Input on page 796.
Deleting Preconfigured Triggers

The following procedure explains how to delete preconfigured triggers.
must be deleted.
3 Double-clicking on this port or right-click on this port and point to Settings in
the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Services sub page containing the Service Settings and
Add Preconfigured Trigger table is displayed.
4 In the Service Settings table, tick the check boxes in front of the row(s) of the
preconfigured triggers that must be removed.
Note: The picture above depicts the Service Settings table of an ASI Interface
Card, the Service Settings table of a GbE Interface Card is similar.
Tips:
To set check boxes of consecutive rows on the Service Settings table, tick the
check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the
The rows in the Service Settings table can be sorted by a specific parameter
by pointing to the column header of this parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by clicking the header.
5 Click on the Remove Checked Items command button to remove the selected
rows or the Reload command button to abort the operation.
Note: Triggers for which the service is present at the input can not be removed or set
to default.
800 4011746 Rev W

Changing the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms

For each incoming service, one or more alarms can be defined to trigger a Service
Loss alarm. When incoming services must be defined with the same Service Loss
trigger alarms, the configuration can be simplified by using default settings. Each
new incoming service and each incoming service for which the Service Loss - Mode
is set to Default will be configured with these settings.
WARNING:
The Default Service Loss Trigger parameters are dynamic, meaning when these
default parameters are changed, all incoming services for which the Service Loss
mode is set to Default will get these new settings.
The following procedure explains how to change the default service loss trigger
alarms.
default service loss trigger alarms should be changed.
displayed.
4 Click on the TS-Service Backup tab.
Result: The TS-Service Backup tab page is displayed containing the Default
Service Backup Settings.
5 Under the Default Service Backup Settings, perform the following steps to
configure the default service loss trigger alarms:
Note: The picture above depicts the Default Service Backup Settings of a GbE
Interface Card, the Default Service Backup Settings of an ASI Interface Card are
similar.
a In the Service Loss Trigger Mode drop down box, select the desired Service
Loss trigger mode:
– Disabled: service loss alarm trigger is disabled.
4011746 Rev W 801

b When the Service Loss Trigger Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the
Service Loss Trigger Options check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger
a Service Loss alarm: TS Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card only), Link Loss (GbE
Interface Card only), UDP Loss (GbE Interface Card only) UDP Stream Loss
(GbE Interface Card only), Missing in PAT, PMT Error, Scrambled Service, PID
Error/PID Bitrate Error, and/or GPIO.
c When the PID Error/PID Bitrate Error check box is ticked, select PID Error or
PID Bitrate Error in the drop down box beside this check box and select one of
the following settings in the second drop down box: Any or Smart.
d When the GPIO check box is set, select the GPIO pin used to trigger the
e In the Video Bit Rate Threshold (Kbps) box enter the PID Bitrate Error
threshold value for video components
f In the Audio Bit Rate Threshold (Kbps) box enter the PID Bitrate Error
threshold value for audio components
g In the Data Bit Rate Threshold (Kbps) box enter the PID Bitrate Error
threshold value for data components
Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers

Introduction
To activate a Transport Stream Loss alarm following triggers can be set:
Service Loss alarm: a Transport Stream Loss alarm will be triggered when a
Service Loss alarms occurs. The alarms to trigger a Service Loss alarm are also
configurable. More information about the configuration of Service Loss alarms
can be found in topic Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 794.
Sync Loss alarm (ASI Interface Card only): a Transport Stream Loss alarm will be
triggered when the synchronization byte in a sequence of at least two Transport
Stream packets are not detected.
Sync Byte Error alarm (ASI Interface Card only): a Transport Stream Loss alarm
will be triggered when the synchronization byte in a Transport Stream packet is
not detected.
UDP Stream Loss alarm (GbE Interface Card only): a Transport Stream Loss alarm
will be triggered when the Transport Stream, for which services are passed to the
output, is not longer detected at the corresponding UDP port.
Link Loss alarm: a Transport Stream alarm will be triggered when the GbE link is
down between the source device and the DCM.
802 4011746 Rev W

UDP Loss alarm: a Transport Stream alarm will be triggered when the
corresponding port no longer receives UDP packets.
PAT Error alarm: a Transport Stream alarm will be triggered if the PAT of the
corresponding Transport Stream is not available within a particular time interval11
or contains an error. This alarm will also be triggered when a table ID different
from 0x00 is found on PID 0x0000.
The DCM handles a particular alarm hierarchy. For instance if a UDP Loss alarm is
detected, Sync Loss alarm will not be triggered. This means that the DCM will not
start a Transport Stream backup transition when a UDP Loss alarm is detected and
UDP Loss is not defined as Transport Stream Loss trigger even if other alarms are
defined to trigger a Transport Stream backup. The following table shows this alarm
hierarchy.
Hierarchy Alarm
1 Link Loss
2 UDP Loss
3 Stream Loss
4 Sync Loss
5 Sync Byte Error
6 PAT Error
Note: Since a similar hierarchy is used to trigger a Service loss alarm, a Service loss
alarm will not mask any other alarm.
Tips:
When most of the incoming Transport Streams must be defined with the same
Transport Stream loss alarms, the configuration can be simplified by using
default settings. Each new incoming Transport Stream and each incoming
Transport Stream for which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will be
configured with these settings. The default parameters are dynamic, meaning
when these default parameters are changed, all incoming Transport Stream for
which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will get these new settings. The
procedure to configure these default parameters can be found in sub topic
Changing the Default Transport Stream Loss Trigger Alarms on page 806.
For preconfiguration purposes the DCM allows adding TS loss alarm triggers
(called preconfigured triggers) for Transport Streams not (yet) present at the
input of the device. To procedure to add preconfigured trigger can be found in
sub topic Preconfiguring the TS Loss Triggers on page 805.
4011746 Rev W 803

To Configure Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers

To Configure Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers for a Single Transport Stream
The following procedure explains how to change the Transport Stream loss alarm
triggers for a single Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream for which the
Transport Stream loss alarm triggers must be changed.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page is displayed containing the TS Loss
settings.
Note: The picture above shows the TS Loss settings of a GbE Interface Card.
The TS Loss settings for an ASI Interface Card is similar.
4 In the TS Loss table, configure the following parameters.
a In the Mode drop down box, select the desired TS loss trigger mode:
– Disabled: Transport Stream loss alarm trigger is disabled.
corresponding interface card will be used to trigger a Transport Stream
loss alarm.
– Specific: the alarms triggering a Transport Stream Loss alarm are
selectable.
b When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms
that have to trigger a Transport Stream loss alarm: UDP Loss (GbE Interface
Card only), Link Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Service Loss, UDP Stream Loss
(GbE Interface Card only), Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card only), Sync Byte
Error (ASI Interface Card only), and/or PAT Error.
To Configure Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers for Multiple Transport Stream on a
Particular Port
Perform the following procedure to change the Transport Stream loss alarm triggers
for multiple Transport Stream on a particular port.
804 4011746 Rev W


2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which Transport Stream Loss
Alarm Triggers should be changed.
short-cut menu.
4 Click on the TS Loss link.
Result: The Service - TS Loss sub page is displayed containing the TS Loss
table.
Note: The picture above shows the TS Loss table of a GbE Interface Card. The
TS Loss table for an ASI Interface Card is similar.
a In the Mode drop down box, select the desired TS loss trigger mode:
corresponding interface card will be used to trigger a Transport Stream
loss alarm.
– Specific: the alarms triggering a Transport Stream Loss alarm are
selectable.
that have to trigger a Transport Stream loss alarm: UDP Loss (GbE Interface
Card only), Link Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Service Loss, Stream Loss (GbE
Interface Card only), Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card only), Sync Byte Error (ASI
Interface Card only), and/or PAT Error.
c Repeat step a and b for all Transport Streams for which Transport Stream loss
alarm triggers must be configured.
Preconfiguring the TS Loss Triggers

The following steps explain how to preconfigure the TS Loss triggers.
4011746 Rev W 805


must be created.
short-cut menu.
4 Click on the TS Loss link.
Result: The Service - TS Loss sub page is displayed containing the TS Loss
settings.
Note: The picture above shows the TS Loss settings for a GbE Interface Card.
The TS Loss settings for an ASI Interface Card is similar.
a In the Mode drop down box, select the desired service loss trigger mode:
corresponding Interface Card will be used to trigger a Transport Stream loss
alarm.
– Specific: the alarms triggering a Transport Stream Loss alarm are selectable.
that have to trigger a Transport Stream loss alarm: Service Loss, Stream Loss
(GbE Interface Card only), Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card only), and/or Sync
Byte Error (ASI Interface Card only).
Changing the Default Transport Stream Loss Trigger Alarms

For each incoming Transport Stream, one or more alarms can be defined to trigger a
Transport Stream loss alarm. When incoming Transport Streams must be defined
with the same Transport Stream trigger alarms, the configuration can be simplified
by using default settings. Each new incoming Transport Stream and each incoming
Transport Stream for which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will be configured
with these settings.
WARNING:
The Default TS Loss Trigger parameters are dynamic, meaning when these
default parameters are changed, all incoming Transport Streams for which the TS
Loss - Mode is set to Default will get these new settings.
The following procedure explains how to change the default Transport Stream loss
trigger alarms.
806 4011746 Rev W

default Transport Stream loss trigger alarms should be changed.
displayed.
4 Click on the TS-Service Backup tab.
Result: The TS-Service Backup tab page is displayed containing the Default TS
Backup Settings table.
5 Under the Default TS Backup Settings, perform the following steps to configure
the default Transport Stream loss trigger alarms:
Note: The picture above shows the Default TS Backup Settings of a GbE
Interface Card. The Default TS Backup Settings for an ASI Interface Card are
similar.
a In the TS Loss Trigger Mode drop down box, select the desired Transport
Stream loss trigger mode:
– Specific: the alarms triggering a Transport Stream loss alarm are
selectable.
b When the TS Loss Trigger Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the TS Loss
Trigger Options check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a Transport
Stream loss alarm: Service Loss, Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Sync
Loss (ASI Interface Card only), and/or Sync Byte Error (ASI Interface Card
only).
4011746 Rev W 807

Configuring the Stuffing Rate Too Low and Payload Bit Rate Too Low
Alarm
Introduction
When the bit rate of the payload of an outgoing Transport Stream drops below a
certain threshold, which can point to services or components missing at the output,
an alarm (called Stuffing Rate Too Low alarm) can be generated. An alarm can
also be generated when the bit rate of the stuffing within an outgoing Transport
Stream drops below a certain threshold.
Notes:
When the outgoing Transport Stream is in VBR mode, the Stuffing Rate Too
Low alarm will not be generated.
Short drops in the stuffing bit rates do not generate an alarm.
When a Transport Stream stops streaming while one of the alarms is active, the
alarm is not cleared or updated until the transport streams starts streaming again
or until the alarm is disabled.
Changing the Stuffing Rate Too Low and Payload Bit Rate Too Low Alarm
Settings for an Outgoing Transport Stream
The following steps explain how to change the Stuffing Rate Too Low and Payload
Bit Rate Too Low alarm settings for an outgoing Transport Stream.
the alarm settings should be changed.
4 On the Service - TS Output sub page, point to the Advanced link.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page containing the Alarm Settings is
displayed.
5 Tick the Enabled check box for the alarm(s) that must be enabled and enter a
threshold value in the Threshold box.
808 4011746 Rev W

Changing the Default Values of the Stuffing Rate Too Low and Payload Bit Rate
Too Low Alarm
During the Transport Stream creation process particular parameters are filled in
other values can be given to these defaults. Perform the following steps to change
the default values of the Stuffing Rate Too Low and Payload Bit Rate Too Low
alarm.
displayed.
Result: The Advanced tab page containing the Alarm Settings is displayed.
5 Tick the Enabled check box for the alarm(s) that must be enabled and enter a
threshold value in the Threshold box.
Configuring the Card Not Operational Alarm

Introduction
When the alarm is enabled, the Card Not Operational alarm will be generated if the
connection between the main board and corresponding card fails. For particular
reasons, for example in backup applications, it can be useful that the Card
Operational Failure alarm is triggered when other alarms arise. In the Global
Alarm Settings table of a card, the alarms that can be used to trigger the Card Not
Operational alarm are indicated by the icon.
If an I/O slot of the DCM housing is not populated with a card, the Card Not
Operational alarm generation can be switched off, see topic Switching off the Alarm
Generation on page 812.
4011746 Rev W 809

Adding Card Operational Failure Triggers

The procedure below explains how to add Card Operational Failure triggers.
Result: The device Configuration page for the device is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the card for which triggers to
activate the Card Operational Failure alarm must be added and point to the
Alarms link.
Result: The Configuration - Alarms sub page of the selected card is displayed.
3 In the Global Alarm Settings table, tick the icon in the row of the alarm that
has to trigger the Card Operational Failure alarm.
Result: The selected alarm is added to the Card Operational Failure Triggers
table and Yes is displayed beside the icon of the corresponding alarm in the
Global Alarm Settings table.
810 4011746 Rev W

4 Repeat step 3 for all alarms that have to trigger the Card Operational Failure
alarm.
Removing Card Operational Failure Triggers

The following steps describe how to remove Card Operational Failure triggers.
Result: The device Configuration page for the device is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the card for which triggers to
activate the Card Operational Failure alarm must be removed and point to the
Alarms link.
Result: The Configuration - Alarms sub page of the selected card is displayed.
3 In the Card Operational Failure Triggers table, tick the check box(es) of the
trigger(s) that should be removed.
Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Card Operational Failure
Triggers table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press
and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that
must be deleted.
The rows in the Card Operational Failure Triggers table can be sorted by a
specific parameter by pointing to the column header of this parameter. You
can toggle between ascending and descending order by clicking on the
parameter header.
triggers.
4011746 Rev W 811

Switching off the Alarm Generation

When a slot of a DCM is not populated with a card, a Card Not Operation alarm will
be generated. To suppress this alarm generation, this default behavior can be
changed. The following steps describe how to configure the Card Not Operational
alarm.
pointing to the Configuration link.
Result: The device Configuration - Alarms sub page for the device is displayed.
2 In the Global Alarm Settings table, click on in the Card Not Operational
alarm row.
Note: The Card Not Operational alarm can only be configured if it's enabled.
Result: The Card not operational popup dialog is displayed.
3 In the drop down box of the card for which the alarm must be configured, select
one of the following settings:
Always: the default alarm generation behaviour will be used.
- If card present: an alarm will only be generated if the slot was occupied with a
card at boot time and the card is removed or is no longer detected due to a
malfunction.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
Configuring Device Operational Failure Alarm

Introduction
The Device Operation Failure alarm, that can be used to start for instance a device
backup transition, can be triggered by several alarms. In the Global Alarm
Settings table of the device, the alarms that can be used to trigger the Device
Operation Failure alarm are indicated by the icon.
812 4011746 Rev W

Adding Device Operational Failure Alarm Triggers

The following steps describes how to add Device Operational Failure alarm triggers.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Configuration link
and point to the Alarms link.
2 In the Global Alarm Settings table, tick the icon in the row of the alarm that
has to trigger the Device Operational Failure alarm.
Note: Clicking on the icon in the row of the Card Not Operational alarm opens
the Add Device Operational Failure popup dialog.
4011746 Rev W 813

In the Add Device Operational Failure popup dialog, tick the check box of
the card(s) for which the Card Not Operational alarm has to trigger a Device
Operational Failure alarm and click on the OK command button to confirm or
the Cancel command button to abort the operation.
Result: The selected alarm is added to the Card Operational Failure Triggers
table and Yes is displayed beside the icon of the corresponding alarm in the
Global Alarm Settings table.
3 Repeat step 2 for all alarms that have to trigger a Device Operation Failure alarm.
Removing Device Operational Failure Alarm Triggers

The following steps explain how to remove Device Operation Failure alarm triggers.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Configuration link
and point to the Alarms link.
814 4011746 Rev W

2 In the Device Operational Failure Triggers table, tick the check box(es) of the
trigger(s) that should be removed.
Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Device Operational Failure
Triggers table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press
and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that
must be deleted.
The rows in the Device Operational Failure Triggers table can be sorted by a
specific parameter by pointing to the column header of this parameter. You
can toggle between ascending and descending order by clicking on the
parameter header.
triggers.
4011746 Rev W 815

Checking the Alarms

Introduction
The details of the generated alarms of the DCM can be found on the Status page of
the web browser user interface of the DCM. These alarms are categorized in a
number of tables:
Input TS Status Overview table: this table represents the alarms related to the
Detailed TS Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the alarms
related to the incoming Transport Streams.
Input Service Status Overview table: this table contains the incoming service
related alarms.
Detailed Service Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the
alarms related to the incoming services.
Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table: this table represents the
alarms of incoming SDI or RTP streams.
Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table: this table contains the
details of the alarms of incoming SDI or RTP streams.
Output TS Status Overview table: this table represents the alarms related to the
outgoing Transport Streams.
Detailed TS Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the alarms
related to the outgoing Transport Streams.
Output Service Status Overview table: this table contains the outgoing service
related alarms.
Detailed Service Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the
alarms related to the outgoing services.
Device Status Overview table: this table shows the alarms related to the device,
cards, and ports.
Output RAW Video Streams Status Overview table: this table represents the
alarms of outgoing SDI or RTP streams.
Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table: this table contains the
details of the alarms related to outgoing SDI or RTP streams.
A summary of all active alarms is given on the Summary sub page. The Alarm
Summary table on this sub page provides the number of alarms for each alarm
category together with a link to the corresponding table.
816 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Alarms
Notes:
After loading a status overview table from the DCM, the table is refreshed at
regular time, meaning no command button should be pressed to reload the table.
For some reasons it can be useful to switch of these automatic refresh actions.
Therefore the Status sub pages are provided with a refresh ( ) drop down box
that can be used to switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the automatically refresh
actions.
When a Service Loss or TS Loss alarm arises, the icon of the branch responsible
for the alarm is adapted in the tree on the Service page. The status indication of
a critical or major alarm is propagated to the interface card branch. The
following picture shows the status propagation of a service loss alarm.
Checking the Alarm Summary Page

The following steps describe how to check the alarm summary table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Summary link that
appears after pressing the Status link.
Result: The Status - Summary sub page containing the Alarm Summary table is
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 817

Alarms Related to Incoming Transport Streams

The following procedure explains how to check the Input TS Status Overview table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Input link that
Result: The Status - Input sub page containing the Input TS Status Overview
table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Input TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the header.
The following information can be found on the Input TS Status Overview table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest
severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic
Card: the name of the interface card receiving the Transport Stream in question
Port: the name of the input port receiving the Transport Stream in question
IP Address: the multicast IP Address of the IP stream containing the incoming
Transport Stream in question.
UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port, which receives the
incoming Transport Stream in question.
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the incoming Transport Stream in
question
TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the incoming Transport Stream in
question
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the Transport Stream in
question
Detail: link to the detailed transport stream status overview
818 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Alarms
Alarms Details Related to Incoming Transport Streams

Perform the following steps to check the Detailed TS Status Overview table of
appears after clicking on the Status link.
table is displayed.
2 In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow.
Result: The Detailed TS Status Overview table of the TS alarm in question is
displayed.
Tips:
- The Detailed TS Status Overview table can also be opened in a popup
window by right-clicking on the corresponding Transport Stream in the
DCM Inputs tree on the Service sub page and pointing to Status in the
short-cut menu.
- To sort the Detailed TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter,
The following information can be found on the Detailed TS Status Overview table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more
information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page
789.
Measurement: the alarm name
SID: the Service Identifier of the failing service (if applicable)
Name: the name of the failing service (if applicable)
PID: the Packet Identifier of the failing component (if applicable)
Value(s): the details of an alarm
- Active
- Not active
4011746 Rev W 819

Alarms Related to Incoming Services

The following procedure explains how to check the Input Service Status Overview
table.
table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box select Service.
Result: The Input Service Status Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Input Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter,
click on the header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
In the Input Service Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied with the
following information:
Card: the name of the interface card receiving the Transport Stream to which the
service in question belongs
Port: the name of the input port receiving the Transport Stream to which the
IP Address: the multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the incoming
Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port receiving the
incoming Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
820 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Alarms
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the incoming Transport Stream to

which the service in question belongs
TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the incoming Transport Stream to
SID: the Service Identifier of the corresponding incoming service
Name: the name of corresponding incoming service
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the corresponding incoming
service
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Status Overview table containing the alarm
details of the corresponding incoming service
Alarms Details Related to Incoming Services

Perform the following steps to check the Detailed Service Status Overview table.
table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box select Service.
3 Result: The Input Service Status Overview table is displayed.
4 In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow in
the Detail column.
Result: The Detailed Service Status Overview table of the service alarm in
question is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed Service Status Overview table by a particular

The following information can be found on the Detailed Service Status Overview
table:
789.
4011746 Rev W 821


- Active
- Not active
Detail: alarm details
Note: IP address 0.0.0.0 in the detail of an alarm generated on a GBE port
indicates that the alarm is generated on a Transport Stream with the same IP
address as the IP address of the port.
Alarms related to Incoming SDI or RTP Streams

The following procedure explains how to check the Input RAW Video Streams
Status Overview table.
table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box select RAW Video Streams.
Result: The Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table by a
particular parameter, click on the header of the parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the header.
In the Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied
with the following information:
Card: the name of the IP Video Gateway Card receiving the SDI or RTP stream
Port: the name of the input port receiving the SDI or RTP stream
IP Address: the multicast IP address of the RTP stream
UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms
details of the corresponding stream
822 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Alarms
Alarm Details related to incoming SDI or RTP Streams

Perform the following steps to check the Detailed RAW Video Stream Status
Overview table.
table is displayed.
Result: The Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table is displayed.
the Detail column.
Result: The Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table with details is
displayed.
The following information can be found on the Detailed RAW Video Stream Status
Overview table:
789.
- Active
- Not active
Alarms Related to Outgoing Transport Streams

The following procedure explains how to check the Input TS Status Overview table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Output link that
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The Status - Output sub page containing the Output TS Status
Overview table is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 823

Tip: To sort the Output TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter,

The following information can be found on the Output TS Status Overview table:
Card: the name of the interface card streaming the Transport Stream in question
Port: the name of the input port streaming the Transport Stream in question
IP Address: the destination multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the
outgoing Transport Stream
UDP Port: the destination UDP port number of the IP stream containing the
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream in
question
TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream in
question
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the Transport Stream in
question
Detail: link to the detailed transport stream status overview
Alarms Details Related to Outgoing Transport Streams

Perform the following steps to check the Detailed TS Status Overview table of
outgoing Transport Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Status link.
Result: The Status - Output sub page containing the Output TS Status
3 In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow.
Result: The Detailed TS Status Overview table of the TS alarm in question is
displayed.
824 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Alarms
Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter,

The following information can be found on the Detailed TS Status Overview table:
789.
SID: the Service Identifier of the failing service (if applicable)
Name: the name of the failing service (if applicable)
PID: the Packet Identifier of the failing component (if applicable)
- Active
- Not active
Alarms Related to Outgoing Services

The following procedure explains how to check the Output Service Status
Overview table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Output link after
Result: The Status - Output sub page containing the Output Service Status
4011746 Rev W 825

Tip: To sort the Output Service Status Overview table by a particular

parameter, click on the header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
In the Output Service Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied with the
following information:
Card: the name of the interface card streaming the Transport Stream to which the
Port: the name of the input port streaming the Transport Stream to which the
IP Address: the destination multicast IP Address of the IP stream containing the
outgoing Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
UDP Port: the destination UDP port number of the IP stream containing the
outgoing Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream to
TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream to
SID: the Service Identifier of the corresponding outgoing service
Name: the name of corresponding outgoing service
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the corresponding outgoing
service
details of the corresponding outgoing service
Alarms Details Related to Outgoing Services

Perform the following steps to check the Detailed Service Status Overview table.
the Detail column.
Result: The Detailed Service Status Overview table of the outgoing service
alarm in question is displayed.
826 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Alarms
Tip: To sort the Detailed Service Status Overview table by a particular

The following information can be found on the Detailed Service Status Overview
table:
789.
- Active
- Not active
Alarms related to Outgoing SDI or RTP Streams

The following procedure explains how to check the Output RAW Video Streams
Status Overview table.
Result: The Output RAW Video Streams Status Overview table is displayed.
In the Output RAW Video Streams Status Overview table each alarm is
accompanied with following information:
Card: the name of the IP Video Gateway Card transmitting the SDI or RTP
stream
4011746 Rev W 827

Port: the name of the output port transmitting the SDI or RTP stream
IP Address: the destination multicast IP Address of the outgoing RTP stream
UDP Port: the destination UDP port number of the outgoing RTP stream
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the corresponding outgoing
service
Detail: link to the Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table
containing the alarm details of the corresponding stream.
Alarm Details related to outgoing SDI or RTP Streams

Perform the following steps to check the Detailed RAW Video Stream Status
Overview table.
Result: The Output RAW Video Streams Status Overview table is displayed.
the Detail column.
Result: The Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table with details is
displayed.
The following information can be found on the Detailed RAW Video Stream Status
Overview table:
789.
- Active
- Not active
828 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Alarms
To Check the Device Status Overview Table

Perform the following procedure to check the Device Status Overview table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Device link that
Result: The Device Status Overview table is displayed.
Each row in the Device Status Overview table is provided with the following
information:
789.
Card: the card name of the interface card on which an alarm arises
Port: the name of the port on which an alarm arises
Detail: the alarm details (if applicable)
Downloading the Alarm History

A file containing the history of the alarms generated by the DCM can be
downloaded from the device. The downloaded file is a comma-delimited file (CSV
extension) that can be opened with Notepad or Microsoft Excel. The following
procedure describes how to download de alarm history.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Summary link that
Result: The Status - Summary sub page is displayed.
2 Click on the Download command button located beside Download Alarm
History.
3 Result: The File Download dialog is displayed.

4 Click on the Open command button to open the file or click on the Save
command button to save the file to your PC.
4011746 Rev W 829

12 Chapter 12
Checking Bit Rates
Introduction
This chapter describes the procedures to check the bit rates of the
incoming and outgoing Transport Streams. Next to these procedures,
this chapter also contains a description of the parameters accompanied
with the bit rate figures.
In this section
Checking the Bit Rates in the DCM Input and Output Tree................. 832
Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables................................................. 835
4011746 Rev W 831

Chapter 12 Checking Bit Rates
Checking the Bit Rates in the DCM Input and Output Tree
To Check the Bit Rates in the Service Overview Trees
With the exception of the component leaves, all branches in the DCM Inputs, DCM
Outputs, and DCM Processing tree are provided with bit rates figures. The bit rate
figures of a particular branch appear by pausing the cursor on the arrow beside the
branch.
The following list describes the bit rates figures in these trees.
The total incoming or outgoing bit rate of the device
The total incoming or outgoing bit rate of a Interface Card
The total incoming or outgoing bit rate of a port
For a GbE Interface Card, the current bit rate is accompanied with line rate
figures of both port pair ports. The current bit rate shows the bit rate of all
Transport Streams without stuffing and overhead. The line rate represents the
bit rate of all Transport Streams with stuffing and overhead.
For an IP Video Gateway Card, the line rates for both ports are shown.
The bit rate figures of a Transrating Group (ASI and GbE Interface Card only)
The bit rate figures of an incoming or outgoing Transport Stream (ASI and
GbE Interface Card only)
The bit rate figures of an incoming or outgoing service
Notes:
In contrast with the input bit rate figures, which include the stuffing rate, the
output bit rate figures do not include stuffing bit rates.
The bit rate figures shown in the trees are not automatically updated. These
figures will be updated by pressing the Reload command button.
832 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Bit Rates in the DCM Input and Output Tree
Opening a Popup Window with Transport Stream Bit Rates

The bit rates of services and components within an incoming or outgoing Transport
Stream can be checked by using a popup window. The following procedure
explains how to open such popup window.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View sub page
after clicking on the Service link.
2 In the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for
which the bit rates of Transport Stream details must be checked.
3 Right-click on the Transport Stream and point to Bit Rates in the short-cut menu.
Result: A popup window containing the bit rates of the Transport Stream details
is displayed.
After loading the tables from the DCM, the bit rate figures are refreshed at
regular time, meaning no command button should be pressed to reload the
figures. For some reasons it can be useful to switch off these automatically
refresh actions. Therefore this popup window is provided with a refresh ( )
drop down box that can be used to switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the
automatically refresh actions.
4011746 Rev W 833

Tips:
The identification parameters of the Transport Stream are shown above the table.
For more information concerning the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview and
PSI/SI/PSIP Overview table, please refer to topic Checking the Bit Rates Overview
Tables on page 835.
834 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables

Introduction
The bit rates of the incoming Transport Streams as well as the bit rates of the
outgoing Transport Streams are categorized in a number of tables. The following
overview lists the bit rates overview tables that can be checked using the web
Input bit rates tables
- Service Bit Rates Overview table: shows the bit rates of all incoming
services.
- Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of the
components within an incoming service.
- TS Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of the incoming
Transport Streams.
- Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of the services
within an incoming Transport Stream.
- Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of
the components within an incoming Transport Stream.
Output bit rates table
- Service Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of all outgoing
services.
- Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of the
components within an outgoing Service.
- TS Bit Rates Overview table: shows the bit rates of all outgoing Transport
Streams.
- Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of the services
within an outgoing Transport Stream.
- Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of
the components within an outgoing Transport Stream.
- Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table: shows the bit rates of the
services that participate in a Transrating Group.
- Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit
rates of the services within a Transrating Group.
4011746 Rev W 835

DCM Processing bit rates

- Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table: shows the bit rates of service
population in the Transcoding Processing tree.
- Detailed Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit
rates of the components within a service.
After loading a table from the DCM, the bit rate figures are refreshed at regular time,
meaning no command button should be pressed to reload the figures. For some
reasons it can be useful to switch of these automatically refresh actions. Therefore
each bit rate sub page is provided with a Refresh drop down box that can be used to
switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the automatically refresh actions.
Checking the Input Bit Rates

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Incoming Services
The bit rates overview of all incoming services are categorized in the Service Bit
Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an example of a Service Bit
Rates Overview table.
Each row in the table represents an incoming service containing the following
information:
Card: the slot name of the interface card receiving the Transport Stream to which
the service belongs
Port: the name of the input port receiving the Transport Stream to which the
service belongs
IP Address: the multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the Transport
Stream to which the service belongs (if applicable)
836 4011746 Rev W

UDP Port: the UDP port number of the GbE port receiving the Transport Stream
to which the service belongs (if applicable)
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream the service
belongs to
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream the service
belongs to
SID: the Service Identifier of the service
Name: the name of the service
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the service
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the service since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the service since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the service since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table
Perform the following steps to check the bit rates overview of the incoming services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Service.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within an Incoming Service
The bit rates overview of the components within an incoming service can be found
in the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an
example of a Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the service to which the components belong to
are shown above the table.
4011746 Rev W 837

Each row in the table represents a component containing the following information:
PID: the packet identifier of the component
Name: the name of the component
ES Type: the component type
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the component
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the component since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the component since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the component since reset
Perform the following steps to check the bit rates overview of the components of the
incoming services.
3 In the row of the service for which component bit rates must be checked, point to
the arrow in the Detail column.
Result: The Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table of the selected service is
displayed
Tip: To sort the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular
parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending
and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
838 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Incoming Transport Streams

The bit rates of the incoming Transport Streams are categorized in the TS Bit Rates
Overview table. The following picture depicts a TS Bit Rates Overview table.
Each row represents an incoming Transport Stream containing the following

information.
Card: the slot name of the interface card receiving the Transport Stream
Port: the name of the port receiving the Transport Stream
IP Address: the Multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the incoming
Transport Stream (if applicable)
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the GbE port that enters the Transport
Stream (if applicable)
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream
Total (Mbps): the bit rates of the incoming Transport Stream (with null packets)
- Current: the actual bit rate
- Avg: the average bit rate since reset
- Min: the minimum bit rate since reset
- Peak: the maximum bit rate since reset
Stuffing (Mbps): the bit rates of the null packets in the incoming Transport
Stream
4011746 Rev W 839


Detail: link to the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview and Detailed TS Component
Bit Rates Overview table
Tip: Pressing the TS ID value opens the Service sub page of the corresponding
Transport Stream.
The following steps explain how to check the bit rates overview of the incoming
Transport Streams.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
840 4011746 Rev W

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Services within an Incoming Transport
Stream
A bit rates overview of all services within a particular incoming Transport Stream
can be found in the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture
shows an example of a Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the services
belong to are shown above the table.
Each row in the table represents a service containing the following information:
SID: the service identifier (SID) of the incoming service
Name: the name of the incoming service
4011746 Rev W 841

Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table, more information
concerning this table can be found in topic Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the
Components within an Incoming Services on page 837.
The following procedure explains how to check the bit rates overview of the services
within a particular incoming Transport Stream.
3 In the row of the incoming Transport Stream for which the service bit rates must
be checked, point to the arrow.
Result: The Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table of the Transport Stream in
question is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Notes:
The bit rates shown in the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table are on PID
level, meaning the bit rates of tables with same PID are shown in one figure,
example: the bit rate of the TOT is included into the bit rates of the TDT.
The bit rates of the services within a particular incoming Transport Stream can be
opened in a popup window by right-clicking on the Transport Stream in the
DCM Inputs tree on the Service page and pointing to Bit Rates in the short-cut
menu.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within a Transport Stream
The bit rates of the components within a Transport Stream are categorized in the
Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts
such table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the components
belong to are shown above the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table.
842 4011746 Rev W

PID: the packet identifier of the table
Type: the table type
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the table
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the table since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the table since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the table since reset
The following procedure explains how to check the bit rates of the components
within a Transport Stream.
3 In the row of the Transport Stream for which component bit rates must be
checked, point to the arrow in the Detail column.
4 Result: The Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table of the selected
Transport Stream is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table by a particular
Note: The bit rates of the components within a particular incoming Transport Stream
can be opened in a popup window by right-clicking on the Transport Stream in the
DCM Inputs tree on the Service page and pointing to Bit Rates in the short-cut
menu.
4011746 Rev W 843

Checking the Output Bit Rates

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Outgoing Transport Streams
The bit rates of the outgoing Transport Streams are categorized in the TS Bit Rates
Overview table. The following picture shows a TS Bit Rates Overview table.
Each row represents an outgoing Transport Stream containing the following

information.
Card: the interface card used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream
Port: the number of the port used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream
IP Address: the IP address of the destination device for the outgoing Transport
Stream
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the destination device for the outgoing
Transport Stream
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream
Payload (Mbps): bit rates of the payload in the outgoing Transport Stream
Stuffing (Mbps): bit rates of the stuffing in the outgoing Transport Stream
844 4011746 Rev W


Detail: link to the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview and Detailed TS Component
Bit Rates Overview table
Tip: Pressing the TS ID value opens the TS Outputs sub page of the corresponding
Transport Stream.
Perform the following steps to check the bit rate overview of outgoing Transport
Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
Tip: To sort the TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Services within an Outgoing Transport
Stream
The bit rates of the services within a particular outgoing Transport Stream are
categorized in the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture
depicts such table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the services
belong to are displayed above the table.
4011746 Rev W 845

SID: the service identifier of the outgoing service
Name: the name of the outgoing service
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the outgoing service
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table.
Perform the following steps to check the bit rates of the services within a particular
3 In the detail column, point to the arrow of the Transport Stream for which the
service bit rates must be checked.
Result: The Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Note: The bit rates of the services within a particular outgoing Transport Stream can
be opened in a popup window by right-clicking on the Transport Stream in the
DCM Outputs tree on the Service page and pointing to Bit Rates in the short-cut
menu.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within an Outgoing

Transport Stream
The bit rates of the components within an outgoing Transport Stream are
categorized in the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table. The
following picture depicts such table.
846 4011746 Rev W

Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the tables
belong to are displayed above the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview
table.
Each row in the table represents a table containing the following information:
PID: the packet identifier of the table
Type: the table type
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the table
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the table since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the table since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the table since reset
Note: The bit rates shown in the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table
are on PID level, meaning the bit rates of tables with same PID are shown in one
figure, for example: the bit rate of the TOT is included into the bit rate of the TDT.
Perform the following steps to check the bit rates of the components within a
3 In the detail column, point to the arrow of the Transport Stream for which the
component bit rates must be checked.
Result: The Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table by a particular
and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.
4011746 Rev W 847

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Outgoing Services

The Service Bit Rates Overview table on the Bit Rates - Output sub page provides a
bit rates overview of all outgoing services. The following picture shows a Service
Bit Rates Overview table.
Each row in this table represents an outgoing service containing the following
information:
Card: the interface card used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream the
service belongs to
Port: the port name used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service belongs to
Stream the service belongs to (if applicable)
Transport Stream the service belongs to (if applicable)
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream to
which the service belongs to
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream the
service belongs to
SID: the Service Identifier of the outgoing service
Name: the name of the outgoing service
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the outgoing service
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
848 4011746 Rev W

Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table

Tip: Pressing the TS ID value opens the TS Output sub page of the corresponding
Transport Stream.
The following procedure explains how to check the bit rates overview of the
outgoing services.
appears after clicking on the Bit Rates link.
Tip: To sort the Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within an Outgoing Service
The bit rates overview of the components within an outgoing service can be found in
the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an
example of a Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the service to which the components belong to
are shown above the table.
4011746 Rev W 849

displayed
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Transrating Groups

The bit rates of the Transrating Groups are categorized in the Transrating Group Bit
Rates Overview table. The picture below shows such a table.
Each row represents a service containing the following information:

Group Name: the name of the transrating group
Card: the interface card used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream(s) of the
Transrating Group
Port: the port name used to stream the Transport Stream(s) of the Transrating
Group
850 4011746 Rev W

Payload (Mbps): bit rates of the payload in the Transrating Group

Stuffing (Mbps): bit rates of the stuffing in the Transrating Group
Detail: link to the Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table.
Tip: Pressing the Group Name parameter opens the Transrater sub page of the
corresponding Transrating Group.
Perform the following steps to check the services that belong to Transrating Groups.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Transrating Group.
Result: The Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table by a particular
4011746 Rev W 851

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Services within an Transrating Group
The bit rates of the services within a Transrating Group are categorized in the
Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table. The following table shows
a Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the Transrating Group, to which the services in
the Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table belong to, are shown
above the table.
Transport Stream to which the service belongs to
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream to which the
service belongs to
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream to which the
service belongs to
Name: the name of the service
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table, more information
concerning this table can be found in topic Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the
Outgoing Services on page 848.
852 4011746 Rev W

The following procedure explains how to check the bit rates of the services within a
Transrating Group.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Transrating Group.
Result: The Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the row of the Transrating Group for which service bit rates must be checked,
point to the arrow in the Detail column.
4 Result: The Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table of the
selected Transrating Group is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table by a
particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.
Checking the Bit Rates of the Services in the DCM Processing Tree
Checking the Bit Rates of the Services
The bit rates of the services routed to the output via a Transcoder Card are
categorized on the Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following
picture shows a Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table.
Each row in this table represents a service containing the following information:
Card: the Transcoder Card to which the service belongs to
Name: the user name of the service
Detail: link to the Detailed Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table
4011746 Rev W 853

The following procedure explains how to check the bit rates overview of the
outgoing services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Processing link that
appears after clicking on the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular
parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within a Service

The bit rates overview of the components within a service can be found in the
Detailed Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture
depicts an example of a Detailed Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Processing link that
854 4011746 Rev W

displayed
parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Restarting the Bit Rate Measurement

The bit rates measurements can be restarted for each individual interface card.
Restarting can be done on both the Input sub page and Output sup page of the Bit
Rates page.
The following procedure explains how to restart the bit rate measurements.
1 On the Input or Output sub page of the Bit Rates page, tick the check box(es)
under the Reset Board Bit Rates settings for the interface card(s) for which the
bit rate measurement must be restarted.
2 Point to the Reset command button.

Result: The bit rate measurement of the selected interface card(s) is restarted.
4011746 Rev W 855

13 Chapter 13
Additional Features
Introduction
This chapter outlines the additional features of the DCM.
In This Chapter
Section A Digital Transport Formatter......................................... 859
Section B Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency
Networks............................................................................................. 869
Section C IP Statmux Controller.................................................... 879
4011746 Rev W 857

Section A Digital Transport Formatter
In this section
Introduction .................................................................................................860
Changing the ASI Interface Card Mode ..................................................862
Configuring a DTF Transport Stream ......................................................863
Configuring Scrambling.............................................................................865
4011746 Rev W 859

Chapter 13 Additional Features
Introduction
General
The purpose of DCM's Digital Transport Formatter (DTF) feature is to encapsulate
multiple MPTS or SPTS source streams as embedded private data inside an outgoing
Transport Stream. At the receiver side a Multi Transport Receiver (MTR), for
instance our D9804 Multi Transport Receiver, decapsulates and outputs the original
Transport Streams with a fixed latency.
Source Stream Combining

Combining multiple incoming Transport Streams into one outgoing Transport
Stream is accomplished by mapping the original Transport Stream packets into
Digital Transport Formatter (DTF) data packets. DTF data packets containing
packets belonging to the same incoming Transport Stream are labeled with the same
PID. At the MTR side, these PIDs will then be used to route the Transport Stream
to the correct output.
An outgoing DTF Transport Stream can also be populated with data packets to
provide the MTR with additional data. Such data packets should not be
encapsulated and stuffing can be removed.
Scrambling
Each encapsulated Transport Stream can be encrypted by using Basic Interoperable
Scrambling System Fixed Key scrambling (BISS mode 1). Even/odd pairs of
Session Words used to derive the Control Words are offered to the DCM by
uploading a Session Word Distribution File (SWDF) using FTP.
Once the SWDF is uploaded the DCM starts using the new Session Word. When
the file is successfully processed, the file will immediately be removed from the
device and the DCM starts using the new uploaded Session Words to derive the
Control Words for scrambling.
In the SWDF each Session Word is accompanied by an index. When a DTF
Transport Stream or Transport Stream within this DTF stream must be scrambled,
the Session Word must be chosen by means of its index.
Scrambling encapsulated Transport Streams by using BISS mode 1 is license based,
meaning for each ASI Interface Card for which the encapsulated services must be
scrambled needs one DTF_SCRAMBLING license. More information concerning
licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 49.
860 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
ASI Interface Card Mode

Before a DCM can participate into a DTF/MTR application, DTF_CONCENTRATOR
licenses are required and the card mode for one or more ASI Interface Cards must be
set to ASI DTF. This action configures an ASI Interface Card into a Digital
Transport Formatter and ports 1 up to 7 become input ports and ports 8 up to 10
output ports. The outgoing DTF Transport Stream is mirrored to the output ports.
4011746 Rev W 861

Changing the ASI Interface Card Mode

The following procedure describes how to change the ASI Interface Card mode.
WARNING:
Changing the ASI Interface Card mode involves removal of all output
configurations for the ASI Interface Card.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the ASI Interface Card for
which the card mode must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the interface card is displayed.
3 Under the Card Settings, select the desired card mode in the Type drop down
box.
ASI DTF: the DTF feature for the ASI Interface Card is enabled.
ASI (default): the standard re-multiplexing mode is enabled.
Note: The Type parameter is only applicable when the DCM is provided with
DTF_CONCENTRATOR Licenses.
Result: After changing the Type parameter the following confirmation box is
displayed.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
862 4011746 Rev W

Configuring a DTF Transport Stream
Configuring a DTF Transport Stream

The following steps describe how to configure a DTF Transport Stream.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the DTF Transport Stream (DTF TS) that
must be configured.
3 Right-click on this Transport Stream and point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
4 Under the TS Settings, enter the total bit rate for the DTF Transport Stream in
the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box. The value of the total bit rate depends on the
packet mode of the outgoing Transport Stream. For Byte mode a value can be
given between 0.1 and 155 Mbps and for Packet mode a value between 0.1 and
213 Mbps. The default value is 40 Mbps.
5 Perform the following steps in the Input Multiplexing table.
Tip: In the Input Multiplexing table each row represents an input port, which is
indicated by card name (Input Card parameter) and port name (Input Port
parameter).
a In the Status drop down box, select one of the following settings:
– Added: The Transport Stream is passed to the outgoing DTF Transport
Stream.
– Blocked: The Transport will be blocked.
b Set the Encapsulate check box to pass the Transport Stream packets with
DTF encapsulation or clear this check box to pass the packets without
encapsulation.
c When the Encapsulate check box is set, enter the insertion rate for the
adaptation fields in the AF Insertion Rate (ms) box. A value in the range
from 10 to 500 ms can be entered and is default set to 40 ms.
4011746 Rev W 863

d When the Encapsulate check box is cleared, tick the Remove Stuffing check
box to remove the stuffing.
e In the Output PID box, enter the PID value for the DTF packets containing
the packets of the corresponding incoming Transport Stream.
Note: In DTF mode, the device does not perform PID remapping in case PID
collisions occur between non encapsulated and encapsulated streams. Be
sure that no PID collisions can happen.
f Perform step a up to e for all input ports.
864 4011746 Rev W

Configuring Scrambling
Uploading the SWDF
Introduction
When the DTF Transport Streams or Transport Streams within the DTF stream must
be scrambled, a Session Word Distribution File must be uploaded to the DCM using
FTP.
To Upload an SWDF using FTP

The following procedure describes how to upload a SWDF using FTP.
1 Launch the Internet Explorer browser and in the Address line of the browser
enter the following instruction:
ftp://X.X.X.X/swdf/
Where X.X.X.X is the IP address of your DCM.
Result: The Log On As dialog is displayed.
2 Enter Guest in both the User name drop down box and Password box and press
the Log On command button.
3 Drag and drop the SWDF into this directory.
Result: When the SWDF is successfully processed by the DCM, the file will be
removed from device after a while.
4011746 Rev W 865

Configuring the Scrambling Parameters of the DTF Transport Stream

The following steps explain how to set the scrambling parameters of the DTF
Transport Stream.
Security Group.
2 Point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the Service link.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the DTF Transport Stream (DTF TS) for
which scrambling parameters must be configured.
Result: The TS Output sub page containing the Scrambling Settings table of the
selected DTF stream is displayed.
5 When all Transport Streams within the DTF stream must be scrambled with the
same Control Word, tick the Index check box and enter the index of the
corresponding Session Word in the Index box.
6 When an odd or even Session Word must be used for all Transport Streams
within the DTF stream, tick the Parity check box and select the Odd or Even
selection button.
Configuring the Scrambling Parameters for Transport Streams within a

DTF
The following procedure describes how to change scrambling parameters for
Transport Streams belonging to a DTF Stream.
The following steps explain how to set the scrambling parameters of the DTF
Transport Stream.
Security Group.
2 Point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the Service link.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the DTF Transport Stream (DTF TS) for
which scrambling parameters must be configured.
866 4011746 Rev W

5 In the Input Multiplex table, perform the following settings.
Note: The scrambling parameters are not applicable if the Index check box in the
Scrambling Setting table is ticked. Fore more information, please refer to
previous sub topic.
a Set or clear the Scramble check box.
b In the Index box, enter the index of the Session Word.
c In the Parity selection box, select the Odd or Even selection button.
Note: The Index box and Parity selection box are only applicable if the
Scramble check box is set.
d Repeat step a up to c for all Transport Streams within the selected DTF
stream.
4011746 Rev W 867

Section B Integrating the DCM into Single
Frequency Networks
In this section
Introduction .................................................................................................870
Steps to Take ................................................................................................872
Changing Reference Clock Settings..........................................................873
Changing SFN Adaptation Settings .........................................................875
4011746 Rev W 869

Introduction
About Single Frequency Networks
A Single Frequency Network (SFN) is a network of terrestrial transmitters in which
several transmitters simultaneously broadcast the same services over the same
channel frequencies. Due to the differences in distance between the site containing
the source services and the transmitter sites, the delay can vary greatly. Therefore
the transmitters must accurately be synchronized.
The Transport Stream distributed to the transmitter sites is provided with special
timing information packets (called Mega-frame Initialization Packets or MIPs). The
timing information in these MIPs is referenced to a 10 MHz and a 1 PPS signal
obtained from a GPS receiver. The Transport Stream is divided into sections of
uniform length (called mega frames) each carrying a MIP. The MIPs also provide
information about the transmission mode to ensure that all modulators operate alike.
At the transmitter sites, COFDM modulators receive the Transport Stream with MIP
packets. With the timing information decapsulated from the MIP packets and the
10 MHz and 1 PPS signal obtained from a GPS receiver, the modulator will perform
time and frequency synchronization. This allows sending the same signal at the
same time and same frequency at the transmitter sites.
The following illustration depicts the integration of a DCM into a typical SFN
application.
870 4011746 Rev W

Introduction
About the Timing Information

As seen in the previous sub topic, the timing information incapsulated into the MIP
packets is referenced to the GPS reference clock signals (10 MHz and 1 PPS). This
timing data is also derived from a configurable delay value (called Maximum Delay
parameter). This Maximum Delay parameter must be set to a value larger than the
longest propagation delay between the DCM output and the transmitters.
This timing data informs the COFDM modulators about the time the first packet in
the mega frame must be transmitted.
Integrating a DCM into a SFN Application

For participating into SFN applications, the DCM can be provided with one or more
ASI SFN Interface Cards. Such interface card is populated with 8 ASI interface
ports, a 10 MHz and a 1 PPS input connector.
DCM's SFN feature is license based, meaning each outgoing Transport Stream for
which SFN is enabled requires a MIP_INSERTION License. More information
about licensing can be found in topic Licensing on page 49.
Note: An ASI SFN Interface Card can not be integrated into DTF applications.
4011746 Rev W 871

Steps to Take
The following steps explain how to integrate a DCM populated with ASI SFN
Interface Card(s) into a SFN application.
a Configure the reference clock settings of the ASI SFN Interface Card as
described in topic Changing Reference Clock Settings on page 873.
b Configure the ASI ports of the ASI SFN Interface Card as described in topic
ASI Port Configuration on page 87.
c Create a Transport Stream multiplex by
– passing an incoming Transport Stream to an ASI port as described in
topic Creating a Transport Stream by Passing an Incoming Transport Stream to
a Port on page 202
or
– populating the outgoing Transport Stream of an ASI port with services as
described in section Service Re-Multiplexing on page 251.
d If necessary, pass, block, and/or remap components as described in section
Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components on page 271.
e If necessary, modify the PSI/SI/PSIP information as describes in section
PSI/SI/PSIP Information on page 351.
f When the ASI SFN Interface Card is provided with a Co-Processor card,
advanced MPEG processing like transrating, digital program insertion... can
be done. For more information, please refer to the corresponding chapter.
g Configure the SFN adaptation settings for the outgoing Transport Stream as
described in topic Changing SFN Adaptation Settings on page 875.
h Repeat step c up to g for all SFN Transport Streams
Notes:
If PID 0x15 is already in use the SFN feature can not be enabled.
The SFN feature of an outgoing Transport Stream that is transparently passed
from the input can not be enabled.
After enabling the SFN feature, the bit rate of the corresponding outgoing
Transport Stream becomes fixed.
872 4011746 Rev W

Changing Reference Clock Settings
Changing Reference Clock Settings

Introduction
Before the ASI SFN Interface Card can participate into an SFN application, the DCM
needs the knowledge of following parameters.
10 MHz GPS Settings
- Impedance parameter: This parameter determines the 10 MHz signal
termination, 50 Ohm or High impedance (default).
- Clock Edge parameter: This parameter determines the edge (falling or rising
(default)) of the 10 MHz signal that is used to clock the 1 PPS signal.
1 PPS GPS Settings
- Impedance parameter: This parameter determines the 1 PPS signal
termination, 50 Ohm or High impedance (default).
- Slice Level (mV) parameter: The level detection of the 1 PPS signal can
automatically be set (default) or can be set manually.
- Edge parameter: As count reference the falling or rising edge (default) of the
1 PPS signal can be chosen.
To Change Reference Clock Settings

The following steps explain how to change the reference clock settings.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the ASI SFN Interface Card for
which reference clock settings must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the I/O and reference
clock setting of the selected ASI SFN Interface Card is displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the Reference Clock Settings table:
4011746 Rev W 873

a In the Impedance drop down box under 10 MHz GPS Settings, select High
or 50 Ohm.
b In the Clock Edge drop down box under 10 MHz GPS Settings, select Rising
or Falling.
c In the Impedance drop down box under 1 PPS GPS Settings, select High or
50 Ohm.
d In the Slice Level (mV) drop down box under 1 PPS GPS Settings, select
Automatic or Manual.
e When the Slice level parameter is set to Manual, enter the slice level in the
box beside the Slice Level (mV) drop down box.
f In the Edge drop down box under 1 PPS GPS Settings, select Rising or
Falling.
874 4011746 Rev W

Changing SFN Adaptation Settings

Introduction
The SFN Mode parameter enables or disables the encapsulation of MIPs into the
outgoing Transport Stream. Once the SFN Mode parameter is enabled, the other
SFN adaptation settings can be configured.
Tip: In the DCM Outputs tree, a Transport Stream for which the SFN Mode is
enabled is suffixed by (SFN Enabled).
The Maximum Delay (µs) parameter, which determines the timing information into
the MIPs, must be set to a value larger than the longest propagation delay between
the DCM output and the transmitters.
The parameters below determine the modulation and coding information added into
the MIP packet.
Constellation parameter: QPSK (default value), 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
Hierarchy And Interleaving parameter: Non Hierarchical (default value), Alpha 1,
Alpha 2, or Alpha 4
Code Rate parameter: 1/2 (default value), 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8
Guard Interval parameter: 1/32 (default value), 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4
FFT Mode parameter: 2K (default value) or 8K
Channel Bandwidth parameter: 6 MHz, 7 Mhz, or 8 MHz (default value)
TS Priority parameter: Low or Non Hierarchical or High (default value)
DVB-H Timeslicing parameter: Enabled or Disabled (default value)
DVB-H MPE FEC parameter: Used or Not Used (default value)
To Change SFN Adaptation Settings

The following procedure explains how to change the SFN adaptation settings for a
Tip: Before changing the SFN adaptation settings it is strongly advised to stop
streaming the corresponding outgoing Transport Stream. Once the settings are
properly configured, streaming the Transport Stream can be activated again. The
procedure to stop and to activate streaming can be found in topic Activating or
Stopping Streaming on page 439.
4011746 Rev W 875


2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which settings
must be changed.
Result: The Service - TS Output page containing the SFN Adaptation Settings
for the selected Transport Stream is displayed.
Note: Changing SFN adaptation settings may results in temporary service loss.
4 In the SFN Mode drop down box, select Enabled or Disabled.
Note: The other parameters in the SFN Adaptation Settings table are only
applicable when the SFN Mode parameter is set to Enabled.
5 In the Maximum Delay (µs) box, enter a value between 0 and 1,000,000. µs.
6 In the Constellation drop down box, select QPSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.
7 In the Hierarchy And Interleaving drop down box, select Non Hierarchical, Alpha
1, Alpha 2, or Alpha 4.
8 In the Code Rate drop down box, select 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.
9 In the Guard Interval drop down box, select 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4
10 In the FFT Mode drop down box, select 2K or 8K
11 In the Channel Bandwidth drop down box, select 6 MHz, 7 Mhz, or 8 MHz.
12 In the TS Priority drop down box, select Low or Non Hierarchical or High.
13 In the DVB-H Timeslicing drop down box, select Enabled or Disabled.
14 In the DVB-H MPE FEC drop down box, select Used or Not Used.
876 4011746 Rev W

Notes:
Each outgoing Transport Stream for which the SFN mode is enabled consumes
one MIP_INSERTION License.
If the SFN mode is enabled for an outgoing Transport Stream and the
MIP_INSERTION License is no longer present, the SFN mode can be disabled
but can not be enabled again.
4011746 Rev W 877

Section C IP Statmux Controller
In this section
DCM IP Statmux Concept..........................................................................880
IP Statmux Configuration ..........................................................................885
Changing Statmux Pool Settings using the DCM GUI ..........................896
4011746 Rev W 879

DCM IP Statmux Concept

Introduction
Overview
The DCM IP Statmux feature allows transforming a GbE Interface Card into an IP
statistical multiplex controller. A GbE interface of such interface card must be
connected to a number of encoders via Ethernet in order to control their video rate in
one or multiple Statmux pools.
WARNING:
A GbE Interface Card transformed into an IP Statmux controller can no longer
participates into re-multiplex applications.
The following illustration depicts a typical statistical multiplex application with

Continuum® DVP™ Encoder Model D9032 devices and DCM.
Encoder #1 IP or ASI
SDI SDI
SDI SDI
SDI SDI
Modulators
Power T
Vu M
SDI SDI
DCM Power T
Vu M
Encoder #5 IP or ASI ASI Router IP-GbE or Multiple ASI

Al
ar
Model 990
Digital
D
D
0Content( C )
Multiple ASI
SDI
P
SDI Scie
m1
S
P
S
2
Manager
M
SDI Router Or
Atla
ntific
nta
Power T
Vu M
IP Switch
Power T
Vu M
Power T
Vu M

Power T
Vu M
SDI SDI

SDI SDI
IP Switch
I
P
ROSA NMS
ROSA CLIENT
Features
The DCM IP Statmux controller has the following features:
Supports a maximum number of 60 encoders / GbE Interface Card
Allows a mix of MPEG2 and AVC encoders, standard definition (SD) and high
definition (HD) on the same pool
Connects via Ethernet to the encoders
880 4011746 Rev W

IP based communication between DCM IP statmux card and encoders

Support of up to 20 Statmux pools / GbE Interface Card and up to 60 encoders
per pool
Allows a mix of fixed rate and statistically multiplexed channels on the same
multiplex
Supports default target bitrate, minimum and maximum bitrate allocation,
priority and quality limit for each channel
Flexible management of services and pools using the Statmux Pool Manager tool
integrated in ROSA NMS
Interaction with ROSA DHB task and/or ROSA EM for advanced redundancy
support (IP Statmux controller as well as encoder backup)
Statmux pool and service information available on the DCM web browser user
interface
Requirements
A DCM participation into an IP Statmux application needs a number of products.
The following table shows the software requirements for these products.
Product Software Version

MPEG2 Combined
(MPEG2/AVC)
Continuum® DVP™ Encoder Model D9032 2.12.08 or higher 3.00.02 or higher
HD Encoder Model D9050 4.00.04 or higher 4.00.04 or higher

HDTV Encoder Model D9054 - 3.05.12 or higher
ROSA Network Management System 3.0 Build 15 or higher 3.0 Build 17 or higher
Statmux Pool Manager (SPM) driver for 3.0.0 or higher 3.0.3 or higher
ROSA NMS
Digital Content Manager (DCM) device 3.0.18 or higher 6.00.72 or higher
driver for ROSA NMS
Continuum DVP Encoder Model D9032 3.0.6/3.0.6.0 or higher 3.0.8 or higher
device driver for ROSA NMS
TV Encoder Model D9050 device driver for 3.0.7 or higher 3.0.7 or higher
ROSA NMS
HDTV Encoder Model D9054 device driver - 3.0.7 or higher
for ROSA NMS
For combined statmux, the GbE Interface Card performing the aggregation of the
statmuxed streams must be populated with a Co-Processor Card and a delay must
be given to the AVC streams, for more information see topic Combined Statistical
Multiplexing on page 884.
4011746 Rev W 881

DCM IP Statistical Multiplexing

Statistical Multiplexing
The statistical multiplexing concept is based on the idea that statistically, at any
particular point in time, not all of the services within a multiplex of compressed
video services require the maximum allocated bitrate to provide an artifact free
image. It works on the basis that complex video scenes require more bandwidth
than simple scenes and that there is a statistical probability that some services will be
encoding highly complex material while others will not. This allows dynamically
re-allocation of bandwidth resulting in a more efficient use of the total available
bandwidth for the multiplex without any appreciable artifacts.
Statmux Pool
A Statmux pool is a group of services that share a limited amount of bandwidth for
statistical multiplexing. The Statmux pool bit rate is the total amount of available
bandwidth. During the statmuxing process each service is continuously allocated a
controlled amount of bandwidth.
At startup, the encoder starts at a default bit rate. As soon as the encoder
established communication with the DCM IP Statmux controller, statmuxing may
start. Only active services contribute to the Statmux pool and participate in the
statmuxing process. When a service is disabled, or for example the IP link with the
controller is down, statmuxing continues for the remaining services of the Statmux
pool only.
A DCM Statmux pool can handle a mix of standard definition (SD) and high
definition (SD) services and MPEG-2 and AVC services.
IP-Based Statistical Multiplexing

The new generation IP-based statistical multiplexing technology offers a flexible
platform that can support a large number of encoders within multiple pools all
managed by a single Statmux controller. The signaling between encoders and
controller can be sent over IP networks which makes it easy to reconfigure local and
remote encoders.
DCM IP Statmux Controller

The DCM IP Statmux controller intelligently controls the MPEG-2/AVC encoding
process to ensure that the specified bandwidth constraint is met, while optimizing
the overall picture quality. This is based on a proprietary rate control algorithm
with bitrate adjustment on a frame-by-frame basis ensuring that no more bits are
used than necessary.
882 4011746 Rev W

The MPEG-2/AVC encoders make predictions about the required bandwidth and
send it to the Statmux controller via their Ethernet interface. The controller then
transmits bandwidth allocation messages to all the encoders part of the Statmux
pool. Bandwidth is assigned based on the encoder’s demand, user’s setup, total
available bandwidth, and requirements of other services in the Statmux pool. Each
encoder is directly controlled to provide the optimal bitrate.
For each encoder it is possible to specify a minimum, maximum, and default bit rate,
as well as priorities for each service to balance higher priority services with others.
The sum of the default bit rates equals the Statmux pool bit rate.
The following illustration shows how the rate of each service in a Statmux pool may
vary and end up in 100 percent Statmux pool usage.
When the total bit rate of all statmuxed services approaches the Statmux pool bit
rate, the DCM IP Statmux controller prioritizes the services to stay below the
Statmux pool bit rate limit. You may define the priority setting for each encoder.
Quality Controlled Statistical Multiplexing

As a variation of the normal statistical multiplexing concept, the DCM Statmux
controller offers an extra option for quality controlled encoding. The operator may
predefine a target video quality parameter on the encoder to indicate an acceptable
level of video quality. In this way a satisfying video quality is provided without
using more bits than needed and leaving more bandwidth to other encoders without
a quality limitation. If all encoders of the Statmux pool are quality controlled, then
there may often remain unused bandwidth, which may subsequently be used for
time-insensitive data services.
4011746 Rev W 883

Synchronous Versus Asynchronous Operation

To further improve the overall performance, the DCM Statmux controller offers
further efficiency improvements in synchronous operation for MPEG-2 encoders in
the pool. Synchronous operation can be used if all the video sources are locked
phase and frequency wise. When synchronous operation is enabled, output
stuffing is minimized and the dynamic behavior is further improved. For around
5% bandwidth can be saved for the MPEG-2 encoders in the pool by using the
synchronous mode compared to asynchronous.
Important: For a combined Statmux pool with synchronous mode, only a benefit on
MPEG-2 encoders can be achieved, not on AVC encoders. A combined Statmux
pool with 7 D9032 (MPEG-2) and 2 D9054 (AVC) encoders gives more benefit than a
pool with 2 D9032 and 7 D9054 encoders.
Combined Statistical Multiplexing

The DCM IP Statmux feature allows controlling pools with MPEG-2 encoders only
(MPEG-2) and pools with MPEG-2 and AVC encoders (Combined MPEG-2/AVC).
When MPEG-2 and AVC encoders are combined in the same pool, the total
bandwidth for all AVC encoders and the individual bandwidths for the MPEG-2
encoders are controlled by the DCM. The individual bandwidths for the AVC
encoders are controlled by the internal standalone Statmux controller of the AVC
encoders.
For quality controlled encoding the DCM offers an extra option by shifting more
bandwidth from the AVC encoders to the MPEG-2 encoders or vice versa.
Note: Due to architecture differences between AVC and MPEG2 encoders, an AVC
encoder streams some frames earlier that an MPEG2 encoder. To avoid bandwidth
overflow, the streams from the AVC encoders must be aligned with the streams
from the MPEG2 encoders. Aligning these streams can be done by creating a
Transrating group populated with the streams coming from the AVC encoders and
delaying these streams. Proceed as follows:
Change the Transrater delay parameters of the GbE Interface Card on which the
Transrating Group must be created, to the following values:
- Coarse Delay parameter: predifined
- Fine Delay parameter: low, normal, or high depends on the Maximum Video
Delay parameter of the MPEG2 encoders.
Create a Transrating group populated with the streams coming from the AVC
encoders.
Change the Transrater Settings - Rate Control parameter of these streams to
Pass Through.
More information about Transrating can be found in topic Transrating on page 463.
884 4011746 Rev W

IP Statmux Configuration
Introduction
Before a DCM can act as IP Statmux Controller, the Statmux Controller function of
one or more GbE Interface Cards must be enabled. Enabling this function involves
removing of all configuration settings of the interface card and the Boundary
parameter is set to 6000. The procedure to enable the Statmux Controller function
of a GbE Interface Card is described in topic Enabling or Disabling the Statmux
Controller Function on page 885. For more information concerning Boundary
parameter, please refer to sub topic Settings the GbE UDP Boundary on page 100.
For each individual encoder participating into the Statmux application, the Statmux
parameters as well as the bit rate budget must be configured. The configuration of
these parameters can be done on the user interface of the encoders or via our
Statmux Pool Manager (SPM) tool, which is integrated into ROSA NMS.
For redundancy purposes the DCM IP Statmux Controller has been developed to
support device backup as well as encoder backup. Both device scenarios can be
controlled by means of ROSA Element Manager or by means of ROSA DHB Task.
More information concerning DCM IP Statmux redundancy can be found in the
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 IP Statmux Application Note.
Setting the DCM IP Statmux Controller Setting

Enabling or Disabling the Statmux Feature
The following steps explain how to enable or disable the Statmux Controller function
of a GbE Interface Card.
Note: A GbE Interface Card for which the Statmux Controller is enabled can no
longer participate into re-multiplexing applications (multiplexing, transrating,
digital program insertion...).
which the Statmux Controller function must be enabled or disabled.
displayed.
3 In the Statmux drop down box in the Card Settings, select Enabled or Disabled.
4011746 Rev W 885


Changing the Backup Type Mode of the IP Statmux Controller

When the DCM IP Statmux Controller participates into a device backup application
controlled by ROSA EM, the inactive/active state of the IP Statmux controller has to
follow the device activation mode of the device. This can be done by changing the
Backup Type parameter of the IP Statmux controller to Auto. When the IP Statmux
controller doesn't participate into a backup application, change this parameter to Off.
The following procedure explains how to change the Backup Type parameter.
displayed.
3 Point to the Statmux link.
Result: The Configuration - Statmux sub page containing the Statmux Settings
is displayed.
4 In the Backup Type drop down box, select the initial state for the IP Statmux
Controller, Auto or Off.
Setting Up
Introduction
Before the SPM tool can be used to manage encoders in a statmux application, an
SPM resource must be created and the encoders must be mapped into ROSA NMS.
Once the SPM resource is created and the encoders are mapped, logical relations
must be created between the encoders and the SPM resource.
886 4011746 Rev W

Notes:
For each Statmux pool in the statistical multiplex application an SPM resource
must be created.
For Combined Statmux applications, two SPM resources must be created: a
resource for the MPEG-2 encoders and a resource for the AVC encoders.
This topic describes how to create a Statmux Pool Manager resource in ROSA, and
how to setup a map with relations between the encoders and the Statmux Pool
Manager resource. The procedure to install the SPM tool is described in topic
Installing the ROSA 3.0 Drivers on page 925. The procedure to install the encoder
driver, to detect the encoders, and to map the encoders into ROSA can be found in
the ROSA Network Manager System User's Guide or in the documentation shipped
with your encoders.
Creating an SPM Resource in ROSA

The following procedure explains how to create an SPM resource in the Server
Explorer tree.
1 In the Server Explorer tree, right-click on the Units node and point to Units... in
the short-cut menu.
Results: The Units dialog is displayed.
2 Click on the Add... command button.

Result: The Add Unit dialog is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 887

3 In the Name box, enter a name for this SPM resource.

Result: The Statmux Pool Manager resource is added to the tree.
5 Press the Close command button to close the Add Unit dialog.
6 Press the Close command button to close the Units dialog.
Setting Up the Map

The following procedure explains how to set up a map.
1 Set the Map Mode of the ROSA user interface to Editing mode by clicking on the
Maps menu and ticking Allow Editing.
2 In the Maps Explorer, browse to the map for which a Statmux setup must be
created or create a new map by performing the following steps:
a In the Maps Explorer, right-click on Maps and point to New/link in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The New/Link Map dialog is displayed.
b In the Map Name box, enter a name for the new map and press the OK
command button.
Result: The new map appears.
3 Drag the SPM and encoder resources, which participate into the Statmux
application, from the Units node in the Server Explorer tree and drop them into
the map.
4 Create a logical relation between each encoder and the SPM resource as
described in the following steps:
a Activate the relation tool by pointing to Relation in the Draw menu.
b Click on the first encoder and then on the SPM resource.
888 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Add relation dialog is displayed.
Note: Creating a relation from the encoder to the SPM or from the SPM to the
encoder makes no difference.
c Click on the Add command button.
Result: The logical relation between the first encoder and the SPM resource is
created.
d Repeat step b and c for all encoders.
To Set Up the Bit Rate Budget

Perform the following steps to change the default video bit rate of services and to
control the bit rate budget.
1 On the SPM user interface, click on the Bit Rate Budget tab.
Result: The Bit Rate Budget tab is displayed showing the various encoder bit
rates.
4011746 Rev W 889

Tips:
Inactive encoders (for instance backup encoders not in use or main encoders
in backup state) are represented in italic and all fields are read-only. These
inactive encoders are ignored for bit rate budget allocation or setting the Pool
ID and Target IP Address.
The ROSA name of a not-responding encoder is colored red and all other
fields are empty.
2 In the Pool Bit Rate box, enter the total available bandwidth for the Statmux
pool.
Tip: By setting the pool bit rate as a first step, you will be informed if at any
stage the total of the individual service settings exceeds this bit rate.
Note: For a Combined Statmux application, the sum of the Pool Bit Rate
parameters of both SPM resources must match the total bit rate of the pool. For
example: a Combined Statmux application with five MPEG-2 encoders (SD
services) and 2 AVC encoders (HD services) with a total pool bit rate equal to 30
Mbps; the pool bit rate of the MPEG-2 encoders can be set to 13 Mbps and for the
AVC encoders to 17 Mbps.
3 In the Reserved Bit Rate box, type the bit rate amount that should not be used by
the services and is reserved for instance for data communication.
Tip: Click on the Leverage Bit Rate command button to view the optimal default
video bit rates according to the stuffing bit rate.
4 In the Bit Rates - Video Default column, change the default video bit rate for
each encoder.
890 4011746 Rev W

The default rate determines the encoding rate at which the encoder starts after
power-up. Also, it determines the rate the encoder settles to in the event of
communication errors between the IP Statmux Controller and the encoder, or
when the IP Statmux Controller is disconnected.
The default rate is also used to set up the Pool Bit Rate budget. The sum of the
default rates for the active Statmux programs equals the size of the Statmux Bit
Rate pool. The total rate of the Statmux programs will not go beyond the
Statmux Bit Rate size, but may go lower depending on the maximum quality
limit.
Notes:
When an encoder doesn't participate into a Statmux application and the
encoder is set to Standalone VBR mode, the Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR
parameter shows the maximum Standalone VBR rate. When the encoder is
change from Stand-alone Variable Bit Rate mode to Statistical Multiplexing
mode the value in the Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR parameter will show
the fixed bit rate.
When the Video Rate Mode parameter of an encoder is set to Fixed, the Bit
Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR parameter can be used to set the Fixed Video
Rate parameter.
5 Click on the Leverage Bit Rate command button if the video default rates must
be adjusted so that the Pool Bit Rate is met.
This means that all the Statmux programs will have the same default rate. The
default rate determines the encoding rate at which the encoder starts after
power-up. Also, it determines the rate the encoder settles to during
communication errors between the IP Statmux Controller and the encoder, or
when the IP Statmux Controller is disconnected.
Note: The video rates shown on the SPM are Elementary Stream (ES) rates, no
Transport Stream (TS) rates.
4011746 Rev W 891

To Set Up the Statistical Multiplexing Parameters

Perform the following steps to set up the statistical multiplexing parameters.
1 On the SPM user interface, click on the Statmux tab.
Result: The Statmux tab is displayed.
Tips:
Inactive encoders (for instance backup encoders not in use or main encoders
in backup state) are represented in italic and all fields are read-only. These
inactive encoders are ignored for bit rate budget allocation or setting the Pool
ID and Target IP Address.
The ROSA name of a not-responding encoder is colored red and all other
fields are empty.
Note: The video rates shown on the SPM are Elementary Stream (ES) rates, no
Transport Stream (TS) rates.
2 In the Pool ID box, type the Statmux pool identification number.
3 In the Target IP Address box, type the IP address of the IP Statmux Controller
port.
Both a unicast IP address and a multicast IP address can be used. If the IP
Statmux application involves IP Statmux one to one device backup, a multicast
IP address must be used.
892 4011746 Rev W

Notes:
Multicast IP addresses (class) must, for practice use, be in the range from
224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.
When the Pool ID and/or Target IP Address of an MPEG-2 encoder are not
matching the Pool ID and Target IP Address defined in the Statmux Pool
Manager, the field of the mismatched Pool ID and/or Target IP Address is
colored red. The Pool ID and Target IP Address defined in the Statmux
Pool Manager can be applied to the corresponding MPEG-2 encoder(s) by
clicking the Apply command button that becomes applicable when such
mismatch occurs.
For the SPM resource of the AVC encoders participating into a Combined
Statmux application, the IP address must be set to 0.0.0.0.
4 Click on the Statmux parameter of the service that has to participate into the
Statmux application and select ON in the drop-down box.
Note: If you activate more Statmux services than supported by the IP Statmux
Controller, only the programs that are activated first will take part in the
statmuxing.
5 In the Min - Video Rate parameter, enter the minimum rate for the service.
The instantaneous rate during Statmux operation will not go below the stated
minimum rate. The instantaneous rate may be higher than the stated minimum
rate if so determined by the rate algorithm. The minimum Statmux rate
depends on the complexity of the picture and the picture resolution. Setting the
minimum rate to half the default rate as a start point is recommended.
6 In the Max. - Video Rate parameter, enter the maximum rate for the service.
This setting is used to prevent the rate for an individual program from exceeding
a specified value. The range is from 1.5 Mbit/s to 15 Mbit/s
If you do not need limitation to a specific rate, we recommend that you use a
setting about 2 to 3 times the default rate, or just leave the setting at its maximum
(15 Mbit/s).
Example: You may need to use a lower maximum rate setting if you want to
de-multiplex the transport stream at a later stage and you have limited
bandwidth available for that program. In this case you cannot permit the bit
rate to exceed the specified level and therefore you need to cap it by using the
maximum rate setting.
Note: Stating a maximum rate limit may reduce the probability of reaching the
maximum quality limit.
You should use the maximum quality limit setting and not the maximum rate
limit setting to choose your maximum picture quality limit.
The maximum rate setting does not imply that the IP Statmux Controller will
always try to reach that level, but simply that it will not supersede that rate.
4011746 Rev W 893

7 If relevant change the Delay.

It may be useful to use the Normal delay setting for a return channel that is for
game shows with viewer interaction.
Notes:
SPM automatically sets the delay of all Statmux services to the same setting
as this is required for Statmux services.
SPM does not support the Low delay mode. If the encoder is in this mode
SPM will change it to the Normal delay mode.
8 Set the Priority parameter.
Enter the priority for the program in the Priority column. The priority setting
can be set to prioritize which programs get access to bandwidth if there is not
enough bandwidth available.
In normal circumstances all programs will have the same priority setting but if a
program has consistently low action content (for instance a talk back show) you
may decide to allocate a lower priority to that program, knowing that the
program can perhaps afford a reduction in picture quality from time to time. A
total of 16 different priority settings from 0 to 15 allow you to allocate a different
priority to each of 16 possible programs. The standard setting is 8.
9 Set the max. Quality Limit parameter.
Enter the maximum quality limit for the program in the Quality Limit column.
This parameter sets the maximum quality for the video channel. It is used to
free capacity for opportunistic IP data when your video quality requirements are
met. The joint rate control algorithm ensures that the encoders do not spend
more bits on the video than required.
The standard setting for all channels is 15. If you leave the maximum quality
limit for all channels at 15, the IP Statmux Controller will attempt to use all of the
Statmux pool.
Tip: Keep the target quality setting at 15 if you do not want to insert IP data. If
you want to make room for IP data, you may experiment to reduce the quality
limit to find the level that is appropriate for your service.
The following settings for the various applications are recommended:
Application Max. Quality Limit

Best possible quality 15
High quality 14, 13, 12
Medium quality 11, 10, 9
Reduced quality 8, 7, 6, 5
Low quality 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
894 4011746 Rev W

Note: The smaller the Statmux pool, the less frequently the target quality limit
will be reached. How often depends on the video material. As a rule of
thumb, the more important IP data is, compared to the video, the lower the
target quality limit should be.
4011746 Rev W 895

Changing Statmux Pool Settings using the DCM GUI

Changing Statmux Pool Settings
Introduction
Using the web browser user interface of the DCM, the following Statmux Pool
parameters can be changed.
Name parameter: the name for the Statmux pool.
Statmux Mode parameter: Synchronous , Asynchronous, or Disabled.
Synchronous pools require that all encoders are locked to the same video source.
For this reason, a synchronous pool cannot contain a mix of video signal types.
The first encoder joining the statmux pool defines the video signal type required
for all other encoders. Encoders with another video type are not allowed to join
the pool.
Statistical Multiplexing is switched of by setting this parameter to Disabled. The
MPEG 2 encoders will then be fixed at their default rate. In Combined Mode
the AVC encoders will be assigned the sum of the AVC default rates. Note that
the internal statmuxing among AVC encoders is not disabled.
Content Mode parameter: MPEG2 for a Statmux Pool with MPEG 2 encoders
only or Combined MPEG/AVC for a Statmux Pool with MPEG2 and AVC
encoders
Priority parameter: determines the bit portion between MPEG-2 encoders and
AVC encoders. A priority can be given between 1 and 255. Priority 1 gives the
most bits to the MPEG2 encoders while 255 gives the most bits to the AVC
encoders, 128 represents equal priority.
MPEG-2 Communication parameter: The IP address of the IP Statmux controller
port for the MPEG 2 encoder pools.
AVC Communication parameter: The IP address of the IP Statmux controller
port for the AVC encoder pool. When multiple AVC encoder pools are used the
IP addresses must be unique.
Note: The MPEG2 Communication parameter is a interface card wide setting and
common to all pools of the interface card while the AVC Communication parameter
is specific to the pool.
Changing the MPEG-2 Communication Parameter

The following procedure describes how to change the MPEG-2 communication IP
address for the MPEG-2 encoders.
896 4011746 Rev W

displayed.
3 Point to the Statmux link.
Result: The Configuration - Statmux sub page containing the Statmux Settings
table is displayed.
4 In the MPEG-2 Communication box, enter the IP address as defined by the SPM
for the MPEG-2 encoders. The octets of the IP address must be separated by
dots.
Tip: The MPEG-2 Communication parameter can also be changed on the Service -
Settings sub page that appears after clicking on the Statmux pools node.
Notes:
Both a unicast IP address and a multicast IP address can be used. If the IP
Statmux application involves IP Statmux one to one device backup, a multicast
IP address must be used.
Multicast IP addresses (class) must, for practice use, be in the range from
224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Changing Statmux Pool Settings for a Particular Pool

The procedure below describes how to change the Statmux pool settings for a
particular pool.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the Statmux pool for which Statmux
pool setting must be changed and point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The sub page containing the Statmux Pool Setting is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 897

3 Under the Statmux Pool Settings, modify the following parameters:

a In the Name box, enter a name for the Statmux pool.
b In the Statmux Mode drop down box, select Synchronous, Asynchronous, or
Disabled.
c In the Content Mode drop down box, select MPEG2 or Combined
MPEG/AVC.
d In the Priority box, enter the correct value to determine the distribution of the
bits between MPEG-2 encoders and AVC encoders.
e Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
Tip: The ID parameter shows the Statmux pool number and the Video Bit Rate
(Mbps) parameter shows the bit rate of the Statmux pool.
Note: Both the Name, Statmux Mode, Content Mode, and Priority parameter are
configurable when at least one active encoder populates the pool. When the pool is
empty, these parameters show the previous defined name / Statmux mode /
priority.
Changing Statmux Pool Settings for Multiple Pools

The procedure below describes how to change the Statmux pool settings for multiple
pools.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the Statmux pools node and point to
Result: The Statmux Pool Setting table is displayed.
898 4011746 Rev W

3 In the Statmux Pool Settings table, modify the following parameters for each
pool if required:
a In the Name box, modify the name for the Statmux pool.
b In the Statmux Mode drop down box, select Synchronous, Asynchronous, or
Disabled.
c In the Content Mode drop down box, select MPEG2 or Combined
MPEG/AVC.
d In the AVC Communication box, enter the IP address of the IP Statmux
controller port for the AVC encoder pool.
e Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
Tip: In the Statmux Pool Setting table each pool is accompanied with the following
information:
ID parameter: shows the Statmux pool identifier.
Video Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter: shows the bit rate of the Statmux pool.
Active parameter: represents the active state of the pool.
AVC Communication parameter: represents the Multicast IP address used by
the AVC encoders for Statmux that corresponds with the Statmux Pool identifier.
4011746 Rev W 899

Checking the Statmux Settings of the Encoders

The following procedure explains how to check the Statmux settings of the encoders.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the Statmux pool for which encoder
settings must be checked and point to Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The sub page containing the Encoders table is displayed.
The following information is available in the Encoders table:

Management - Port parameter: shows the port pair on the GbE Interface card
used as IP Statmux controller.
Source - IP Address parameter: shows the source IP address of the IP
Statmux controller port.
Destination - IP Address parameter: represents the IP address of the encoder
Ethernet port that has to receive Statmux IP messages from the IP Statmux
controller.
Destination - UDP Port parameter: represents the UDP port number of the
destination port to which the IP Statmux controller sends IP statmux control
messages.
Type parameter: represents the encoder type, MPEG-2 or AVC.
Name parameter: shows the name of the encoder as set on the encoder’s front
panel user interface or embedded user interface.
SID parameter: shows the service identifier of the corresponding service.
Frames parameter: represents the frame rate.
Format parameter: represents the video definition (SD or HD).
Priority parameter: represents the priority of the service in the Statmux pool
as set on the encoder. This setting determines the priority of the video
quality of this service with respect to other services in the Statmux pool.
The priority value ranges between 0 and 15.
State parameter: shows the Statmux messaging status.
900 4011746 Rev W

Bit Rate (Mbps) - Min parameter: represents the minimum video bit rate as
set on the encoder. The video bit rate during Statmux operation does not go
below the minimum video bit rate value.
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Max parameter: represents the maximum video bit rate as
set on the encoder. The video bit rate during Statmux operation does not
exceed the maximum video bit rate value.
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Default parameter: shows the bit rate capacity from the
total Statmux pool capacity granted as default to the service. The sum of the
default video bit rates for the services part of a Statmux pool equals the size
of the Statmux pool bit rate.
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Target parameter: represents the target bit rate as
determined by the Statmux controller.
Notes:
Only active encoders are shown in the Encoders table. Encoders without valid
input signal are not shown, even if they are setup to produce black or color bar
when having input loss. Pools without active encoders are also not shown, until
at least one active encoder joins the pool.
The Name, Format, and Priority parameter of an AVC encoder is not displayed.
Checking the Video Bit Rate Overview of a Statmux Pool

Once the components of a Statmux pool are properly configured, a graphical
representation of the bit rates of the services is depicted on the Service - Graph sub
page of the corresponding Statmux pool.
4011746 Rev W 901

The Service - Graph sub page is refreshed automatically every 10 seconds. A

following illustration shows an example of a Service - Graph sub page.
The Services table and Null Packets table provide the legend of the diagram
together with the following information:
Encoder IP Address: IP address of the encoder to which the service belongs to
Name: name of the service
SID: service identifier of the service
Avg Video Bit Rate: the average bit rate of the video component of the service
header.
902 4011746 Rev W

Perform the following steps to check the Service - Graph sub page of a Statmux
Pool.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Statmux pool for which the video bit
rate graph must be checked.
3 Double-click on this Statmux pool or right-click on this Statmux pool and point
Result: The Service - Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Graph link.
Result: The Service - Graph sub page is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 903

14 Chapter 14
Software Upgrade
Introduction
This chapter outlines the guidelines to upgrade the software of the
DCM.
In this Chapter
Introduction ................................................................................................. 906
Installing the Upgrade-It Software Package ........................................... 907
Upgrading the DCM Software.................................................................. 910
4011746 Rev W 905

Chapter 14 Software Upgrade
Introduction
About the Upgrade Software
To facilitate the software upgrade of a DCM, we have developed the Upgrade-It
software package. The Upgrade-It software package runs as a stand-alone
application on a remote PC, which is connected to the same LAN as the
10/100Base-T or GbE port of the DCM.
System Requirements
To install the Upgrade-It software package and to run the application, the PC should
meet the following minimum requirements.
Pentium™ processor, minimum 166 MHz.
128Mb of RAM
SVGA Graphics Adapter with minimum 800x600 resolution
Windows compatible mouse
Operating system
Windows 98 or Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
906 4011746 Rev W

Installing the Upgrade-It Software Package

The following procedure explains how to install the Upgrade-It software package.
1 Double-click on the Setup.exe file of the Upgrade-It installation software or
right-click on the file and select Open. The necessary installation information
will be collected.
Result: The InstallShield Wizard dialog is opened.
2 Click on the Next command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the installation.
Result: The Choose Destination Location page of the InstallShield Wizard is
displayed.
4011746 Rev W 907

3 Click on the Browse command button to choose another destination folder to

install Upgrade-IT.
Note: By default, Upgrade-It is installed in the Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta
\ Upgrade-It folder on your system hard disk.
4 Point to the Next command button.
Result: The dialog shows the program folders available on your system.
5 Choose a program folder or enter a new one and click on the Next command
button.
Result: The installation is started and the setup progress is displayed.
Result: After a while the dialog shows that the installation is completed.
908 4011746 Rev W

6 Click on the Finish command button to end the installation procedure.

Result: Now you can run the Upgrade-It software.
Note: When the Upgrade-It software is already installed, restarting the installation
procedure will result in a dialog with other options. The options allow you to
modify, repair or remove the installation. If you want to upgrade with a new
software version, choose the Repair option.
4011746 Rev W 909

Upgrading the DCM Software

Introduction
After upgrading the DCM, the device will be rebooted. When the device
participates into a device backup application and the device is active, a manual
main-to-backup or backup-to-main transition must be performed before upgrading
the device. The following steps explain how to perform a manual transition:
1 Check if the inactive device is up and running.
2 Check if the configuration of the inactive device matches the configuration of the
active device and modify if required.
3 Perform a manual transition:
Device backup controlled by ROSA's Digital Headend Backup Task
On the GUI of the DHB task, click on the Backup Status tab, select the DCM
section, and point to the Backup command button to inactivate a main device
or to the Restore command button to inactivate a backup device. For more
information concerning the Digital Headend Backup task, please refer to the
Digital Headend Backup - User's Guide.
Device backup controlled by ROSA Element Manager
On the GUI of the ROSA EM device, change the Backup State parameter on
the Backup tab of the main device to:
– Backup to inactivate a main device
– Inactive to inactivate a backup device
More information concerning device backup controlled by ROSA EM can be
found in topic Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager on page 763 or in
the ROSA Element Manager - User's Guide.
Standalone device backup
On the web browser user interface of the main DCM, click on the
Configuration link and point to the Backup link. Click on the Manual
Backup command button to inactivate a main device or to the Manual
Restore command button to inactivate a backup device. For more
information concerning the standalone backup, please refer to Standalone
Device Backup on page 769.
910 4011746 Rev W

Opening the Upgrade-It Tool

Perform the following steps to open the Upgrade-It tool.
1 In the start menu, click on the Start button and browse to the Upgrade-It
application.
Result: The Upgrade-It dialog is displayed.
Notes:
The Upgrade-It tool is provided with a Reboot after Upgrade function that gives
an additional and unnecessary reboot command to the DCM after the
upgrading-process when enabled.
WARNING:
For DCM devices with software package lower than version 2.5, this
additional reboot action will clear all configuration settings stored on the
device. Make sure this Reboot after Upgrade function is disabled.
Disabling this function can be done by pointing to the Settings menu and
unchecking the Reboot after Upgrade menu item.
4011746 Rev W 911

The Upgrade-It tool is provided with an option that removes installation files
after flashing. When this option is enabled during a DCM upgrade a number of
error messages will be displayed. These errors have no effect on the upgrading
process. Disabling this function can be done by pointing to the Settings menu
and unchecking the Delete Files after Flashing menu item.
Selecting the Software Module

Perform the following steps to select a software module and documentation package
(configuration guide and online help) to upgrade the DCM software.
1 In the Available Modules box, click on the Open... command button.
Result: The Open dialog is displayed.
2 Browse to the folder containing the software module (*.txt).
3 Select the file and point to the Open command button.
Note: The DCM can be equipped with a 1 GB or a 16 GB compact flash card.
Select the file that corresponds with the installed compact flash card. The size of
the installed compact flash card can be checked on the Configuration - Version
Info sub page of the web browser user interface.
Result: The software module is displayed in the Available Modules box.
912 4011746 Rev W

4 In the Available Modules box, check the software module that must be used to
upgrade the DCM.
Selecting the Device

The following procedure explains how to select the DCM that should be upgraded.
1 In the Target box, click on the Add... command button.
Result: The Add Target IP dialog is displayed.
2 Select IP Address or IP Address Range in the drop down box.

3 Enter the IP address of the DCM or the beginning address of the IP address
range in the From box.
4 If IP Address Range is selected in the drop down box, enter the ending address of
the IP address range in the To box.
5 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
Result: The devices corresponding the entered IP address or IP address range are
reflected in the Targets box.
Note: The Type parameter in the Targets box originates from the target.
6 In the Targets box, check the device that should be upgraded.
4011746 Rev W 913

7 Click the Refresh command button to refresh the Slot Details of the selected
targets.
8 Select the file to be upgraded by selecting the check box manually in the Slot
Details list or by pressing the Select command button.
Flashing the Software

The following procedure explains how to flash the software.
1 When Available Modules, Targets, and Slot Details are configured correctly,
press the Flash command button to start the upgrading process.
Result: The Flash Status dialog box with the status of the software upgrade
process is displayed.
Note: After upgrading the software and publication package, the device will
automatically reboot, which takes several minutes.
General Remarks
When the web browser user interface was open during the upgrading process,
you have to restart the web browser because the browser's cache may contain
erroneous data.
Upgrading the DCM from a software package version lower that V5.1 to
software package version 5.5 or higher has to be done in two steps. First the
DCM must be upgraded as described in previous sub topic. After this
914 4011746 Rev W

upgrading process the Slot Details box shows a publication package without
version number; the publication package is not yet present on the DCM.
Second, upgrade the publication package by selecting UserManual in Available

Modules box, configuring Targets and Slot Details, and pressing the Flash
command button to start the upgrading process of the publication package.
After upgrading, the publications will be present on the DCM but needs to be
loaded in the web browser user interface of the DCM. This can be done by
rebooting the DCM or pressing the Load Manual command button on the
Maintenance page that appears after pointing to the Help and Maintenance link
in the web browser user interface of the DCM.
4011746 Rev W 915

A
Appendix A
Appx auto letter
Customer Information
Introduction
This chapter contains information on obtaining product support.
In this Appendix
Product Support................................................................................. 918
Return Products for Repair .............................................................. 920
4011746 Rev W 917

Appendix A
Product Support
Obtaining Support
IF... Then...
you have general questions about this contact your distributor or sales agent for
product product information or refer to product data
sheets on www.Cisco.com.
you have technical questions about this call the nearest Technical Support center or
product Cisco office.
you have customer service questions or call the nearest Customer Service center or Cisco
need a return material authorization office.
(RMA) number
Support Telephone Numbers

This table lists the Technical Support and Customer Service numbers for your area.
Region Centers Telephone and Fax Numbers
North America Cisco Services For Technical Support, call:
Atlanta, Toll-free: 1-800-722-2009
Georgia Local: 678-277-1120 (Press 2 at the prompt)
United States For Customer Service, call:
Toll-free: 1-800-722-2009
Local: 678-277-1120 (Press 3 at the prompt)
Fax: 770-236-5477
Email: customer-service@cisco.com
Europe, Belgium For Technical Support, call:
Middle East, Telephone: 32-56-445-197 or 32-56-445-155
Africa Fax: 32-56-445-061
For Customer Service, call:
Telephone: 32-56-445-444
Fax: 32-56-445-051
Email: service-elc@cisco.com
Japan Japan Telephone: 81-3-5908-2153 or +81-3-5908-2154
Fax: 81-3-5908-2155
Korea Korea Telephone: 82-2-3429-8800
Fax: 82-2-3452-9748
Email: songk@cisco.com
China (mainland) China Telephone: 86-21-2401-4433
Fax: 86-21-2401-4455
Email: xishan@cisco.com
All other Asia Pacific Hong Kong Telephone: 852-2588-4746
countries & Australia Fax: 852-2588-3139
Email: saapac-support@cisco.com
918 4011746 Rev W

Product Support
Region Centers Telephone and Fax Numbers

Brazil Brazil Telephone: 11-55-08-9999
Fax: 11-55-08-9998
Email: fattinl@cisco.com or ecavalhe@cisco.com
Mexico, Mexico For Technical Support, call:
Central America, Telephone: 52-3515152599
Caribbean Fax: 52-3515152599
Telephone: 52-55-50-81-8425
Fax: 52-55-52-61-0893
Email: sa-latam-cs@cisco.com
All other Argentina For Technical Support, call:
Latin America countries Telephone: 54-23-20-403340 ext 109
Fax: 54-23-20-403340 ext 103
Telephone: 770-236-5662
Fax: 770-236-5888
Email: keillov@cisco.com
4011746 Rev W 919

Appendix A
Return Products for Repair

Introduction
You must have a return material authorization (RMA) number to return a product.
Contact the nearest customer service center and follow their instructions.
Returning a product to Cisco for repair includes the following steps:
Obtaining a RMA number
Obtaining a customer service center shipping address
Packing and shipping the product
Obtaining an RMA Number and Shipping Address

You must have an RMA number to return products.
RMA numbers are valid for 60 days. If you already have a number, but it is older
than 60 days, you must contact a customer service representative to revalidate the
number. You can return the product after the RMA number is revalidated.
Follow these steps to obtain an RMA number and shipping address.
1 Contact a customer service representative to request a new RMA number or
revalidate an existing one.
Refer to the earlier section titled Support Telephone Numbers to find a
customer service telephone number in your area.
2 Provide the following information to the customer service representative:
Product name, model number, part number, serial number (if applicable)
Quantity of products to return
A reason for returning the product
Your company name, contact, telephone number, email address, and fax
number
Any service contract details
Purchase order number of repair disposition authority, if available
Result: The customer service representative issues the RMA number and
provides the shipping address.
Notes: If you cannot provide a purchase order number:
A proforma invoice listing all costs incurred will be sent to you at the
completion of product repair.
Customer service must receive a purchase order number within 15 days after
you receive the proforma invoice.
920 4011746 Rev W

Return Products for Repair
Products can accrue costs through damage or misuse, or if no problem is

found. Products incurring costs will not be returned to you without a valid
purchase order number.
Proceed to Packing and Shipping the Product.
Packing and Shipping the Product

Follow these instructions to pack the product and ship it to Cisco.
1 Are the product’s original container and packing material available?
If yes, pack the product in the container using the packing material.
If no, pack the product in a sturdy, corrugated box, and cushion it with
packing material.
Important:
You are responsible for delivering the returned product to Cisco safely and
undamaged. Shipments damaged due to improper packaging may be
refused and returned to you at your expense.
Do not return any power cords or accessories.
2 Write the following information on the outside of the container:
Your name
Your complete address
Your telephone number
RMA number
Problem description
Note: Absence of the RMA number may delay processing of product repair
and/or result in the equipment being returned unrepaired. Include the RMA
number in all correspondence.
3 Ship the product to the address provided by the customer service representative.
Note: Cisco does not accept freight collect. Be sure to prepay and insure all
shipments.
4011746 Rev W 921

B
Appendix B
Appx auto letter
Integrating a DCM into ROSA

NMS
Introduction
This appendix describes how to integrate a DCM into the ROSA®
Network Management System (NMS).
In this Appendix
Introduction ........................................................................................924
Installing the ROSA NMS Drivers ...................................................925
Making Task Instances ......................................................................930
Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS...................................................932
Working with the Graphical User Interfaces..................................935
Using DCM Macros............................................................................939
4011746 Rev W 923

Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS
Introduction
About ROSA NMS
ROSA Network Management System (NMS) is a complete solution to manage our
equipment in the most efficient, cost-effective manner possible. The ROSA platform
supports a wide range of broadcast and broadband networks with a complete set of
protocol and device drivers, automation tasks, and service description models. This
network management system also contains a complete toolbox to integrate
third-party equipment.
The ROSA NMS allows creating customized views like geographical views, rack
layout views, equipment interconnection views… to make the diagnostic process
easier.
The ROSA NMS automation tasks help the user to build self-healing systems by
using a wide palette of tasks for backup equipment, transmission links or services.
The ROSA NMS Notification task can send pager, SMS and E-mail messages to
service technicians when certain alarm conditions occur. This task is highly
configurable, different rules and schedules can be defined for each scenario and
service technician.
924 4011746 Rev W

Installing the ROSA NMS Drivers

Introduction
Before the DCM can be integrated into ROSA NMS, a number of ROSA NMS drivers
should be installed. The following list shows these drivers:
IIOP Protocol Driver
The IIOP Protocol driver is a protocol driver that is used to establish
communication with IIOP devices. The driver scans for IIOP devices and allows
mapping of IIOP devices to ROSA resources.
DCM Device Driver
The DCM Device Driver allows integrating the embedded GUI of the DCM into
ROSA NMS.
SCS Configurator
The SCS Configurator is used to configure the scrambling-specific parameters of
the DCM.
AC Manager Component
The AC Management Component can be used to create, edit, and delete access
criteria and services.
SI Distributor
A part of the SI Distributor functionality is used by the AC Manager component.
Scrambling Control Task Driver
The Scrambling Control Task Driver acts as a scrambling/descrambling switch.
Statmux Pool Manager (SPM)
The Statmux Pool Manager tool allows easy and quick configuration of multiple
encoders participating into a Statmux application controlled by DCM's IP
Statmux Controller.
Macro Component
The Macro Component can be used to execute the DCM macros. More
information can be found in topic Using DCM Macros on page 939.
Notes:
When the ROSA system is used for management or configuration purposes, both
the IIOP Protocol Driver and DCM Device driver are required.
When the ROSA NMS system and DCM(s) participate into CA systems, with the
exception of the Macro Component and Statmux Pool Manager driver, all drivers
mentioned above must be installed. The AC Manager Component driver and
the Scrambling Control Task Driver should not be installed when the Event
Information Scheduler (EIS) functionality is performed by a third party device.
4011746 Rev W 925

Appendix B
Pay attention to the following remarks before installing the drivers into the ROSA
software:
You cannot install drivers with a lower product version.
To upgrade a driver, simply install the newer driver. The old driver will be
replaced automatically. Do NOT uninstall the old driver first!
Downgrading drivers within the same product version is not possible unless you
uninstall the drivers first. Uninstalling a driver results in the loss of all
configurations because all resources using the driver are removed from the
Server Explorer tree.
If you install drivers that require a server software version higher than the
current installed version, the server software will be upgraded automatically.
For detailed information concerning the installation of drivers, please refer to the
User’s Guide of the ROSA software.
To Install the ROSA Drivers

The following procedure explains how to install the drivers into the ROSA Software.
1 In the Server Explorer tree of the ROSA system, select the server in which the
DCM must be integrated.
2 In the Config menu, point to Drivers….
Result: The Installed Drivers dialog is displayed.
3 Press the Install… command button.

Result: The Open dialog is displayed.
4 Browse to the folder containing the driver files. These driver files can be found
on the ROSA Installation CD-Rom or on the following location:
926 4011746 Rev W

ROSA Device Configuration Shell: in the folder \ Program Files \

Scientific-Atlanta \ ROSADevConfShell \ Copernicus \ Drivers\ on the hard
disk of the PC running the ROSA software.
ROSA Single User: in the folder \ Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \
ROSASingleUser \ Copernicus \ Drivers \ on the hard disk of the PC
running the ROSA software.
ROSA Client: on the server’s hard disk in the shared folder \ Copernicus \
Drivers
Notes:
If the \ Drivers folder on the server’s hard disk is no longer shared, you can
download all driver files to the hard disk of your client computer. On the
Installed Drivers dialog, click on the Get Drivers from Server command
button.
The files are then copied into the folder \ ROSA3 \ Copernicus \ drivers on
your local hard disk.
When the drivers are downloaded from our FTP server, browse to the
location where you stored these files.
5 Select the driver files required for your application. The following table lists the
driver files.
ROSA NMS Driver File Name

IIOP Protocol Driver IIOP Protocol.rsd
DCM Device Driver DCM.rsd
AC Manager Component AC Manager Component.rsd
Scrambling Control Task Driver Scrambling Control Task.rsd
DVB SI Distributor SI Distributor.rsd
SCS Configurator SCS Configurator.rsd
Statmux Pool Manager SPM.rsd
To select multiple drivers, press and hold down the [CTRL] key, and point to
each file.
6 Press the Open command button.
4011746 Rev W 927

Appendix B
Result: After successful installation, the names of the drivers are added to the
Installed Drivers dialog.
7 Press the Close command button to close the dialog.

Note: After selecting the driver files and pressing the Open command button, it may
be possible that the server must be rebooted, in this case the following message box
is displayed.
The following procedure describes how to reboot the server.

Close the Please, reboot server (via ROSA)! message box by pointing to the OK
command button.
On the Installed Drivers dialog, click on the Close command button to close the
dialog.
In the Server menu, select Manage and point to Reboot Server...
928 4011746 Rev W

Click on the Yes command button to reboot the server.

Result: The server starts rebooting.
4011746 Rev W 929

Appendix B
Making Task Instances

Introduction
After the installation of the Scrambling Control Task driver and SI Distributor Task
driver, task instances for these tasks must be created.
Note: As long as no task instance is created for a task, the task will not appear in the
Explorer Tree.
To Make a Task Instance

The following procedure explains how to create a task instance for the Scrambling
Control Task. The procedure to make a task instance for the SI Distributor Task is
similar.
1 In the Server Explorer tree of ROSA, select the server that participates into the
CAS system.
2 In the Config menu, point to Drivers….
Result: The Installed Drivers dialog is displayed.
3 Select Scrambling Control Task and click on the Make Task command button.
Result: The Make Task dialog is displayed.
930 4011746 Rev W

Making Task Instances

Result: The Scrambling Control Task is added to the Explorer Tree.
5 Click on the Close command button to close the Installed Drivers dialog.
4011746 Rev W 931

Appendix B
Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS

Introduction
Before a DCM can be mapped into the ROSA software, a scan operation must be
executed to detect the device. If the scan operation is successfully performed and
the device is mapped, the unit will be displayed into the Server Explorer tree of the
ROSA system. The procedure to scan and to map a DCM using the IIOP Protocol
Driver can be found in following subtopic.
To Map a DCM into ROSA NMS

The following procedure is designed to be used as step-by-step instructions for
mapping a DCM using the IIOP Protocol driver.
Note: More detailed information concerning the IIOP Protocol drive can be found in
the IIOP Protocol Driver User’s Guide.
1 In the Server Explorer tree of the ROSA system, right-click on the IIOP Protocol
node and point to Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The user interface of the IIOP Protocol driver is displayed.
2 Click on the Add... command button.
932 4011746 Rev W

Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS
Result: The Add devices to scan dialog is displayed.
3 In Identify device by drop down box, select how to identify the device.
4 If IP address is selected, then type the IP address in the From box. If IP address
range is selected, then type the IP address range values in the From and To box.
5 In the Time Out box, type a timeout value between 10 and 60000 ms.
6 In the Retry Count box, type a retry value between 1 and 5.
7 Click on the OK command button to confirm and to close the dialog.
8 Point to the Apply command button.
9 Select the Map Resources tab on the user interface of the IIOP Protocol driver.
Result: The Map Resources tab is displayed.
4011746 Rev W 933

Appendix B
10 Select the DCM that must be mapped and click on the New Resource...
command button.
Result: The New Resource dialog is displayed.
11 Enter a resource name in the Name box and press the OK command button to
confirm.
Result: The new DCM will be added to the Server Explorer tree.
934 4011746 Rev W

Working with the Graphical User Interfaces

Opening the Web Browser User Interface
Perform the following steps to open the web browser user interface of the DCM via
ROSA NMS.
1 In the Server Explorer or Group Explorer tree of the ROSA system, right-click on
the DCM resources for which the web browser user interface must be opened
and point to Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The web browser user interface of the selected DCM resource will be
opened.
Note: The User Interface can also be opened by on the unit in a map. The following
picture depicts a DCM.
4011746 Rev W 935

Appendix B
Opening the Graphical User Interface of a Task or Component

The following steps explain how to open the AC Manager Component. The
procedures to open the SCS Configurator, the Scrambling Control Task, and Statmux
Pool Manager are similar.
Note: Since only a part of the SI Distributor Task functionality is used for DVB
Scrambling, an empty GUI will be displayed with the message SI Distributor Control
Panel not available due to missing License after opening the task.
1 In the Explorer Tree of the server that participates in the Conditional Access
System, right-click on AC Manager Component and point to Properties in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The AC Manager Component with the Access Criteria dialog is
displayed.
To Resize the Graphical User Interface

The size of the user interface of a task or component can be increased or
decreased by dragging the lower right corner of the dialog.
Note: The user interface of a task or component cannot be made smaller than the
size it was opened.
936 4011746 Rev W

To Maximize the Graphical User Interface

The user interface of a task or component can be maximized by clicking on the
maximize button in the upper right corner of the window.
To Close the Graphical User Interface
The user interface of a task or component can be closed in one of the following
ways:
- On the File menu, click on Exit.
- Press [Alt] + [F4]
- Click on the close button in the upper right corner of the window.
The Apply command button
When changes are made to settings on the user interface, the new settings must
be sent to the device by clicking on the Apply command button. When settings
are made on different tabs of the user interface, these settings can be activated all
at once by clicking on the Apply command button.
The Reload command button
When settings are accidentally changed, the previous settings can be restored by
clicking on the Reload command button.
Note: This reload function works only before the Apply command button has
been pressed.
Checking the Driver Version
There are three different ways to check the user interface of a task or component.
- In the Installed Drivers dialog, check the Driver Version column.
4011746 Rev W 937

Appendix B
- In the Installed Drivers dialog, select the line of the driver and click on the
Details command button.
- On the user interface of a task or component, click on About in the Help

menu.
938 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
Using DCM Macros

Introduction
Particular configuration settings of the DCM can be adapted by executing macros
using ROSA’s Macro Component. The Macro Component allows manipulating and
executing predefined set(s) of macros on one or multiple resources. A macro can
range from a single action on a device to a full script that interacts with several
devices. Macros can have a wide set of parameters such as numbers, strings,
devices or other resources. With the Scheduler tool, the time the macro must be
executed can be determined. The Scheduler supports single shot and recurring
macro schedules: a single shot macro is executed only once at a specified date and
time, a recurring macro schedule follows a schedule that is defined with help of the
ROSA Schedule Database Component.
For more detailed information about the Macro Component please refer to the
Macro Component User’s Guide.
DCM macros can be used to perform the following actions:
Adding and removing service component tracking rules
Importing and removing PSI/SI information
Starting and stopping streaming of outgoing Transport Streams
Adding or removing services to or from outgoing Transport Streams
Starting and stopping spicing events
Configuring service loss alarm triggers
Changing the service backup revertive mode for one or more services
Triggering service backup transitions
Performing Transport Stream backup transitions
Joining GbE port pairs to multicast groups
Modifying the Unsolicited IGMP Message version parameter
Before DCM macros can be executed, the Macro Component and these macros must
be installed into ROSA NMS. The procedure to install the Macro Component is
described in topic Installing the ROSA 3.0 Drivers on page 925 and in the Macro
Component User's Guide. The procedure to install the DCM Macros is described in
the following topic.
4011746 Rev W 939

Appendix B
Installing the DCM Macros

The DCM Macros are not installed by default; perform the following steps to install
these macros.
1 Browse to the folder containing the driver files. These drivers can be found on
the ROSA Installation CD-Rom or on the following location:
- ROSA Single User: in the folder \ Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \
ROSASingleUser \ Copernicus \ Drivers\ on the hard disk of the PC
running the ROSA software.
- ROSA Client: on the server’s hard disk in the shared folder \ Copernicus \
Drivers
Notes:
- If the \Drivers folder on the server’s hard disk is no longer shared, you can
download all driver files to the hard disk of your client computer. On the
Installed Drivers dialog, click the Get Drivers from Server command button.
The files are then copied into the folder \ ROSA3 \ Copernicus \ drivers on
your local hard disk.
- When the macros are downloaded from our FTP server, browse to the
location where you stored these files.
2 Copy the files with .bnm or .rcm extension to the following location:
\ Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \ ROSASingleUser \ Copernicus \
MacrosAndScripting
3 Copy the DCM.py file to the following location:
\ Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \ ROSASingleUser \ Copernicus \
MacrosAndScripting \ Scripts
4 Stop and reconnect to the server as described in the ROSA Network
Management System User's Guide.
Result: The DCM Macros are added to the list of the Macro Component.
940 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
Creating Config Files

Particular macros require additional information by uploading a configuration file.
Such DCM_Config file can be created using a standard text editor like Notepad or
using Microsoft Excel. A DC_Config file is built up in two parts: a Header part and
a Data Lines part (see illustration below).
The header of the DCM_Config file is mandatory and has the following syntax:
Version,1
Note: Version and 1 has to be separated by a comma.
A row in the Data Lines part consist of a number of parameters each separated by a
comma.
To enhance the readability of the configuration file or to provide additional
information, comment lines can be added. A comment line should be prefixed by a
hash mark (#). The following picture depicts a DCM_Config file with comments.
4011746 Rev W 941

Appendix B
Since Microsoft Excel is able to import and to create comma-delimited text files, a
DCM_Config file can be created and/or adapted using this spreadsheet application.
Once the file is ready, the file should be saved as a comma-delimited file (CSV
extension). The following illustrations show a DCM_Config opened with Microsoft
Excel.
Adding Service Component Tracking Rules

Introduction
The DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro allows adding service component tracking
rules which are used to keep the content of a service in an outgoing Transport
Stream constant and to block unnecessary components. By using this macro service
component tracking rules are defined by uploading a configuration file.
More information concerning service component tracking rules can be found in topic
Tracking Rules on page 303.
Parameters
Before the DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro can be executed, the component needs
the knowledge of the following information:
The DCM device affected by the macro (IDCM_ResId parameter)
The full path of the configuration file containing the component tracking rule
definitions (strConfigFile parameter)
Note: Defining service component tracking rules using the
DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro and using the web browser user interface of the
DCM can not be combined for the same services.
942 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
About the DCM_Config File

During executing the DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro, a DCM_Config file will be
uploaded by the Macro Component containing the service component tracking rules.
The following illustration shows the syntax of the data lines.
4,1, 225.0.0.1 ,49410 ,stream type , ,Audio ,0 x81 , en4 , , ,2 ,86 , pass
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14
11
1 Input - Card parameter
2 Input - Port parameter
3 Input - IP Address parameter
4 Input - UDP parameter
5 Tracking type parameter
Valid values: ES PID, PCR, ECM PID, ES ECM PID, Stream Type, and Component
Tag
6 Tag parameter
7 Streamtype parameter
Valid values: Video, Audio, DVB Subtitles, DVB Teletext, Data, and User Defined
8 Streamtype Value parameter
9 Language parameter
10 Input PID parameter
11 ES Output parameter
12 Output SID parameter
13 Output PID parameter
14 Status New parameter
Valid values: pass, and block
Note: The Tracking type, Streamtype, and Status New parameter are case
insensitive.
With the exception of the Transport Stream specification parameters (first 4
columns), the layout of the DCM_Config file is similar to the Component Tracking
Rules table on the Components sub page of the web browser user interface of the
DCM. For more information about these parameters, please refer to topic Tracking
Rules on page 303.
Note: For an outgoing Transport Stream on an ASI Interface Card, both the Input -
IP Address parameter and the Input - UDP parameter should be left empty.
4011746 Rev W 943

Appendix B
The parameters that must be entered to define a tracking rule depend on the
tracking rule type. The table below shows the parameters that must be entered for
the different rule types.
pe
V eam e
D ut
p
D
pu e
ue y
ty
In u a g
ES PI
p
al t
ut
am
us
t
ng
O
pe
re
at
g
r
Ty
La
Ta
SI
PI
St
St
St
ES PID
ES ECM PID
ECM PID
PCR
Streamtype (*)
Comp. Tag
(*) only if streamtype is Audio (may also be left empty)
The picture below depicts an example of a comma-delimited text file opened with
Microsoft Excel.
Removing Service Component Tracking Rules

Introduction
The DCM.RemoveRules macro allows removing service component tracking rules
using ROSA's Macro Component.
Parameters
Before the DCM.RemoveRules macro can be executed, the component needs the
knowledge of the following information:
944 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
The DCM (IDCM_ResId parameter) for which service component tracking rules
must be removed
The slot position of the interface card (ICard parameter) and the number of the
port (IPort parameter) containing the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service component tracking rules apply
When the outgoing Transport Stream belongs to a GbE port, the destination IP
address (strIPAddress parameter) and UDP port (IUDPPort parameter)
The SID of the service to which the tracking rules apply (ISID parameter).
When this parameter is set to -1, the tracking rules applied to all services of the
specified outgoing Transport Stream will be removed.
Importing PSI/SI Data

Program Specific Information (PSI) and Service Information (SI) exported from the
DCM or created by means of ROSA's SI Editor can be uploaded to the DCM using
the Macro Component.
Note: The PSI/SI is uploaded via the PSIG To MUX interface, therefore a specific
PSIG proxy (: SA Specific) must be configured for the DCM using the SCS
Configurator. More information can be found in topic PSI/SI Generators on page
640.
To execute the DCM.ImportSIData macro, the Macro Component needs the following
knowledge:
The DCM (IDCM_ResId parameter) containing the outgoing Transport Stream
to which PSI/SI must be loaded
The ON ID (IONID parameter) and TS ID (ITSID parameter) of this outgoing
Transport Stream
The PID (IPID parameter) to which PSI/SI must be added
The path and the name of the file containing the PSI/SI
- For DCM software package version lower than 5.0 / DCM Driver upto and
including 3.0.22
If this path is left empty, the table on the specified PID for the specified
Transport Stream will be removed.
- For DCM software package version higher than or equal to 5.0 / DCM
Driver higher than or equal to 3.0.24
This parameter must always be filled in.
4011746 Rev W 945

Appendix B
Starting or Stopping Streaming

Introduction
Streaming of outgoing Transport Streams can be activated or stopped by using the
following macros:
DCM.SwitchStreaming: Activates or stops streaming of a single outgoing
Transport Stream
DCM.SwitchStreamingTSWithFile: Activates or stops streaming of multiple
outgoing Transport Streams. A Config file containing the Transport Stream
identification parameters are uploaded during the macro execution.
DCM.switchStreamingTSWithFileForResourceSet: Activates or stops streaming of
multiple outgoing Transport Streams on multiple DCMs. A Config file
containing the Transport Stream identification parameters are uploaded during
the macro execution.
Requirements: The DCM.SwitchStreaming macro requires DCM Rosa/Copernicus
driver 3.0.15 or higher and DCM.py script 1.4 or higher and the
DCM.SwitchStreamingTSWithFile macro needs DCM Rosa/Copernicus driver 3.0.24
or higher and DCM.py script 1.10 or higher.
Parameters
To execute a macro, the following information is required:
The DCM (IDCM_ID parameter) for which an outgoing Transport Stream must
be activated or stopped
The name of the ResourceSet (Devices parameter) containing the DCM devices
affected by this macro
(DCM.switchStreamingTSWithFileForResourceSet macro only)
The interface card slot position (ICardNr parameter) and port number (IPortNr
parameter) containing this outgoing Transport Stream (DCM.SwitchStreaming
macro only)
The ON ID (IONID parameter) and TS ID (ITSID parameter) of the Transport
Stream (DCM.SwitchStreaming macro only)
When the outgoing Transport Stream belongs to a GbE port, the destination IP
address (strIPAddress parameter) and UDP port (IUDPPort parameter)
(DCM.SwitchStreaming macro only)
The path and name of the Config file (File Location parameter)
(DCM.SwitchStreamingTSWithFile and
DCM.switchStreamingTSWithFileForResourceSet macro only)
946 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
The streaming status (IStreamingOn parameter)

- 1 : activating
- 0 : stopping
About the Config File

During executing the DCM.SwitchStreamingTSWithFile macro, a Config file will be
uploaded by the Macro Component specifying the Transport Streams for which
streaming must be activated or stopped. The following illustrations show the
syntax of the data lines and an example of a comma-delimited text file opened with
Microsoft Excel.
Note: For services on an ASI Interface Card, the IP Address and UDP Port field
must be empty.
Tip: For more information concerning Config files, please refer to topic Creating a
Config File on page 941.
Removing PSI/SI from an Outgoing Transport Stream

The DCM.RemoveSIData macro allows removing MPEG2 and/or DVB-SI tables from
a particular outgoing Transport Stream. To remove PSI/SI from an outgoing
Transport Stream using the DCM.RemoveSIData macro, the following information is
required.
4011746 Rev W 947

Appendix B
The DCM (IDCMResID parameter) containing the outgoing Transport Stream
for which a table must be removed
The ON-ID (IONID parameter) and TS-ID (ITSID parameter) of this outgoing
Transport Stream
The PID (IPID parameter) for which a table must be removed
The table ID (ITableID parameter), table ON-ID (ITableONID parameter), table
TS-ID (ITableTSID parameter) and table ID Ext (ITableIDExt parameter) to
fully identify which table must be removed. These parameters depend on
which table should be removed. The following table lists these parameters.
Table TableID TableONID TableTSID TableIDExt

PAT 0x00 -1 TableTSID -1
CAT 0x01 -1 -1 65535
PMT 0x02 -1 -1 ServiceID
NITa 0x40 -1 -1 NetworkID
NITo 0x41 -1 -1 NetworkID
SDTa 0x42 TableONID TableTSID -1
SDTo 0x46 TableONID TableTSID -1
BAT 0x4A -1 -1 BouquetID
EITp/f a 0x4E TableONID TableTSID ServiceID
EITp/f o 0x4F TableONID TableTSID ServiceID
EITsch a 0x50…0x5F TableONID TableTSID ServiceID
EITsch o 0x60…0x6F TableONID TableTSID ServiceID
Requirements: This macro requires DCM Rosa/Copernicus driver 3.0.24 or higher

and DCM software package version 5.0 or higher.
Notes:
The PSI/SI is uploaded via the PSIG To MUX interface, therefore a specific PSIG
proxy (SA Specific) must be configured for the DCM using the SCS Configurator.
More information can be found in topic PSI/SI Generators on page 640.
Removal of EITp/f a, EITp/f o, EITsch a and EITsch o is only supported in DCM
software package version 5.1 or higher.
Tip: Removing PSI/SI for DCM ESW lower than 5.0 and DCM driver upto and
including 3.0.22 can be done using the DCM.ImportSIData macro.
948 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
Passing Incoming Services to an Outgoing Transport Stream

The DCM.AddService macro allows passing services to a particular outgoing
Transport Stream using ROSA's Macro Component. Therefore the following
information is required:
The DCM containing the outgoing Transport Stream to which a service must be
passed (lDCM_ID parameter)
The interface card slot position (IOutputBoard parameter) and port number
(IOutputPort parameter) containing this outgoing Transport Stream
The ON-ID (IOutONID parameter) and TS-ID (IOutTSID parameter) of this
For an outgoing Transport Stream on a GbE Interface Card, the destination IP
Address (strOutIPAddress parameter) and UDP Port (IOutUDPPort parameter)
of this outgoing Transport Stream
The SID (IOutSID parameter) for this outgoing service
The interface card slot position (IInputBoard parameter) and port number
(IInputPort parameter) of the incoming Transport Stream to which the service
belongs to.
The ONID (IInONID parameter) and TSID (IInTSID parameter) of this
incoming Transport Stream
For an incoming Transport Stream on a GbE Interface Card, the destination IP
Address (strInIPAddress parameter) and UDP Port (IInIPAddress parameter) of
this incoming Transport Stream
The SID (IInSID parameter) of the incoming service that must be passed to the
Requirements: The DCM.AddService macro requires DCM Rosa/Copernicus driver
3.0.17 or higher and DCM.py script 1.5 or higher.

The DCM.RemoveServices macro allows removing services from a particular outgoing
Transport Stream using ROSA's Macro Component. Therefore the following
information is required:
The DCM containing the outgoing Transport Stream from which a service must
be removed (lDCM_ID parameter)
The interface card slot position (IBoard parameter) and port number (IPort
parameter) containing this outgoing Transport Stream
The ON-ID (IONID parameter) and TS-ID (ITSID parameter) of this outgoing
Transport Stream
4011746 Rev W 949

Appendix B
For an outgoing Transport Stream on a GbE Interface Card, the destination IP
Address (strIPAddress parameter) and UDP Port (IUDPPort parameter) of this
The SIDs (strSIDs parameter) of the services that must be removed
Requirements: The DCM.RemoveServices macro requires DCM Rosa/Copernicus
driver 3.0.17 or higher and DCM.py script 1.5 or higher.
Starting a Splicing Event

Introduction
To start a splicing event, the following macros can be used:
DCM.startSplice: Triggers a manual Primary to Insertion Channel substitution for a
Splicing Channel on a particular DCM.
DCM.startSpliceForResourceSet: Triggers a manual Primary to Insertion Channel
substitution for a Splicing Channel on multiple DCM devices.
DCM.editAndStartSplice: Change the Insertion Channel of a Splicing Channel and
triggers a manual Primary to Insertion Channel substitution for this Splicing
Channel on a particular DCM.
DCM.editAndStartSpliceForResourceSet: Change the Insertion Channel of a Splicing
Channel and triggers a manual Primary to Insertion Channel substitution for this
Splicing Channel on multiple DCM devices.
Requirements: These macros require DCM Rosa/Copernicus driver 3.0.19 or higher
and DCM.py script 1.8 or higher.
Parameters
Before a splicing event macro can be executed, the following information is required:
DCM.startSplice macro
- The name of the DCM affected by this macro (Device parameter)
- The slot position of the interface card where the Splicing Channel is located
(Board parameter)
- The name of the Splicing Channel for which a Primary to Insertion Channel
substitution must be triggered (Name parameter)
DCM.startSpliceForResourceSet macro
- The name of the ResourceSet containing the DCM devices affected by this
macro (Devices parameter)
(Board parameter)
950 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
- The name of the Splicing Channel for which a Primary to Insertion Channel
DCM.editAndStartSplice macro
- The name of the Splicing Channel (Splice Name parameter)
- The slot number of the interface card where the Splicing Channel is located
(Board parameter)
- The slot number of the interface card where the new Insertion Channel is
located (InsBoardID parameter)
- The port number of the new Insertion Channel (InsPortID parameter)
- For a new Insertion Channel on a GbE Interface Card, the destination IP
Address (InsIPAddress parameter) and UDP Port (InsUDPPort parameter)
of this Insertion Channel
- The SID of the new Insertion Channel (InsSID parameter)
DCM.editAndStartSpliceForResourceSet macro
- The slot number of the interface card where the Splicing Channel is located
(Board parameter)
- The name of the Splicing Channel (SpliceName parameter)
- The slot number of the interface card where the new Insertion Channel is
located (InsBoardID parameter)
- The port number of the new Insertion Channel (InsPortID parameter)
- For a new Insertion Channel on a GbE Interface Card, the destination IP
Address (InsIPAddress parameter) and UDP Port (InsUDPPort parameter)
of this Insertion Channel
- The SID of the new Insertion Channel (InsSID parameter)
Notes:
The Splicing Channels has to be configured correctly (Splicing Channel Mode
parameter set to Manual)
All DCMs in the ResourceSet for the DCM.startSpliceForResourceSet or
DCM.editAndStartSpliceForResourceSet macro must have the same
configuration.
4011746 Rev W 951

Appendix B
Stopping a Splicing Event

Introduction
Stopping a splicing event can be done by executing one of the following macros:
DCM.stopSplice: Triggers a manual Insertion to Primary Channel substitution for a
Splicing Channel on a particular DCM.
DCM.stopSpliceForResourceSet: Triggers a manual Insertion to Primary Channel
substitution for a Splicing Channel on multiple DCM devices.
Parameters
To trigger an Insertion to Primary Channel substitution, the following information is
required:
DCM.stopSplice macro
(Board parameter)
- The name of the Splicing Channel for which an Insertion to Primary Channel
DCM.stopSpliceForResourceSet macro
(Board parameter)
- The name of the Splicing Channel for which an Insertion to Primary Channel
Notes:
The spicing channels has to be configured correctly (Splicing Channel Mode
parameter set to Manual)
All DCMs in the ResourceSet for the DCM.startSpliceForResourceSet or
DCM.editAndStartSpliceForResourceSet macro must have the same
configuration.
952 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers

Introduction
The triggers used to activate a Service Loss alarm can be configured using the
following macros:
DCM.ASIServiceLossTriggers: Changes the Service Loss alarm triggers for a
particular service on an ASI Interface Card of a single DCM.
DCM.ASIServiceLossTriggersForResourceSet: Changes the Service Loss alarm
triggers for a particular service on an ASI Interface Card of multiple DCMs.
DCM.GBEServiceLossTriggers: Changes the Service Loss alarm triggers for a
particular service on an GbE Interface Card of a single DCM.
DCM.GBEServiceLossTriggersForResourceSet: Changes the Service Loss alarm
triggers for a particular service on an GbE Interface Card of multiple DCMs.
Tip: More information concerning Service Loss alarm triggers can be found in topic
Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 794.
Parameters
Before a macro can be executes, the following information is required:
The name (Device parameter) of the DCM affected by this macro
(DCM.ASIServiceLossTriggers and DCM.GBEServiceLossTriggers macro only)
affected by this macro (DCM.ASIServiceLossTriggersForResourceSet and
DCM.GBEServiceLossTriggersForResourceSet macro only)
The slot position of the interface card (Board parameter) and the number of the
port (Port parameter) containing the service for which the Service Loss alarm
triggers should be changed
The SID of this service (Service Id parameter)
The triggers to be enabled or disabled. When the Enabled Triggers parameter
is set to 0, all triggers will be disabled. When this parameter is set to 1, the
triggers will be enabled or disabled as specified in the corresponding triggers (1
enables the trigger and 0 disables the trigger).
These triggers are:
- for a GbE Interface Card: UDP Stream Loss alarm (Enable UDP Stream Loss
parameter), Missing in PAT alarm (Enable Missing PAT parameter), PMT
Error alarm (Enable PMT Error parameter), and PID Error alarm (Enable
PID Error parameter)
4011746 Rev W 953

Appendix B
- for an ASI Interface Card: TS Sync Loss alarm (Enable ASI Sync Loss
parameter), Missing in PAT alarm (Enable Missing PAT parameter), PMT
Error alarm (Enable PMT Error parameter), and PID Error alarm (Enable
PID Error parameter)
Notes:
The Service Loss - Mode parameter must be set to Specific using the web browser
All DCMs in the ResourceSet for the DCM.ASIServiceLossTriggersForResourceSet
or DCM.GBEServiceLossTriggersForResourceSet macro must have the same
configuration.
Changing the Service Backup Revertive Mode

Introduction
The following macros can be used to change the service backup revertive mode for
one or more services:
DCM.setBackupRevertiveMode: Changes the revertive mode for a service on a
singe DCM.
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesOnBoard: Changes the revertive mode
for all services of a particular interface card on a singe DCM.
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesOnDevice: Changes the revertive mode
for all services on a singe DCM.
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesOnPort: Changes the revertive mode
for all services of a particular port on a singe DCM.
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesOnTS: Changes the revertive mode for
all services of a particular Transport Stream on a singe DCM.
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForResourceSet: Changes the revertive mode for a
service on multiple DCMs.
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesOnBoardForResourceSet: Changes the
revertive mode for all services of a particular interface card on multiple DCMs.
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesOnDeviceForResourceSet: Changes the
revertive mode for all services on multiple DCMs.
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesOnPortForResourceSet: Changes the
revertive mode for all services of a particular port on multiple DCMs.
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesOnTSForResourceSet: Changes the
revertive mode for all services of a particular Transport Stream on multiple
DCMs.
954 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeWithFile: Changes the revertive mode for all services

described in the Config file.
Requirements: DCM.setBackupRevertiveMode and
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForResourceSet macros require DCM Rosa/Copernicus
driver 3.0.19 or higher and DCM.py script 1.8 or higher.
DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeWithFile macro requires DCM Rosa/Copernicus driver
3.0.24 or higher and DCM.py script 1.10 or higher.
Parameters
Before executing a macro, the following information may be required:
The slot position of the interface card (Board parameter) containing the service(s)
for which the Service Loss alarm triggers should be changed
The number of the port (Port parameter) containing the service(s) for which the
Service Loss alarm triggers should be changed
The destination IP address (IP Address parameter) and UDP port number (UDP
Port parameter) of the Transport Stream for which the revertive mode for all
services must be changed
The SID (Service ID parameter) of the service fro which the revertive mode must
be changed
The revertive mode (Revertive Mode ON or Revertive Mode Enabled
parameter), 1 = enabled and 0 = disabled
4011746 Rev W 955

Appendix B
The following table shows the parameters for the different macros.
Note: All DCMs in a ...ResourceSet macro must have the same configuration.
956 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros

During executing a ...WithFile macro, a Config file will be uploaded by the Macro
Component specifying the services for which the revertive mode must be changed.
The following illustrations show the syntax of the data lines and an example of a
comma-delimited text file opened with Microsoft Excel.
Note: For services on an ASI Interface, the IP Address and UDP Port field must
be empty.
Triggering a Service Backup Transition

Introduction
The following macros can be used to trigger a main-to-backup or backup-to-main
service transition:
DCM.activateMainOrBackupService: Triggers a service backup transition for a
service on a singe DCM.
4011746 Rev W 957

Appendix B
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServicesOnBoard: Triggers a service
backup transition for all services of a particular interface card on a singe DCM.
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServicesOnDevice: Triggers a service
backup transition for all services on a singe DCM.
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServicesOnPort: Triggers a service
backup transition for all services of a particular port on a singe DCM
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServicesOnTS: Triggers a service
backup transition for all services of a particular Transport Stream on a singe
DCM.
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForResourceSet: Triggers a service backup
transition for a service on multiple DCMs.
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServicesOnBoardForResourceSet:
Triggers a service backup transition for all services of a particular interface card
on multiple DCMs.
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServicesOnDeviceForResourceSet:
Triggers a service backup transition for all services on multiple DCMs.
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServicesOnPortForResourceSet:
Triggers a service backup transition for all services of a particular port on
multiple DCMs.
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServicesOnTSForResourceSet:
Triggers a service backup transition for all services of a particular Transport
Stream on multiple DCMs.
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceWithFile: Triggers a service backup
transition for all services specified in the Config file.
Parameters
The slot position of the interface card (Board parameter) containing the service(s)
for which a service backup trigger must be given
The number of the port (Port parameter) containing the service(s) for which a
service backup trigger must be given
958 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
The destination IP address (IP Address parameter) and UDP port number (UDP
Port parameter) of the Transport Stream for which a service backup trigger for
all services must be given
The SID (Service ID parameter) of the service for which a service backup trigger
must be given
The activate main mode (ActivateMain or Main On parameter), 1 = main active
and 0 = backup active
The following table shows the parameters for the different macros.
Note: All DCMs in a ...ResourceSet macro must have the same configuration.
4011746 Rev W 959

Appendix B

During executing the DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceWithFile macro, a Config file
will be uploaded by the Macro Component specifying the services for which a
transition must be triggered. The following pictures show the syntax of the data
lines and an example of a comma-delimited text file opened with Microsoft Excel.
Note: For services on an ASI Interface, the IP Address and UDP Port field must
be empty.
Performing a Transport Stream Backup Transition

Introduction
To force a main-to-backup or backup-to-main Transport Stream transition, the
following macros can be used:
DCM.activateMainOrBackupTS: allows triggering a transition for a single
Transport Stream.
960 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
DCM.activateMainOrBackupTSWithFile: allows triggering a transition for multiple

Transport Streams. The Transport Streams for which a transition must be
triggered should be specified in the Config file.
DCM.activateAndMonitorMainOrBackupTSWithFile: starts a transition for multiple
Transport Streams and a TS in Backup message will be logged on a monitoring
device. The purpose of this macro is having directly feedback whether the main
or backup TS is active. The severity level of the messages that are logged on the
monitoring device is Warning and the behavior Cleared by System. The Transport
Streams for which a transition must be triggered should be specified in the
Config file.
To have a successful transition, the backup Transport Stream(s) for the concerning
input Transport Stream(s) must properly be configured using the web browser user
Parameters
To execute a macro, the following information is required:
The interface card slot position (Board parameter) and port number (Port
parameter) containing the Transport Stream for which a transition must be
triggered (DCM.activateMainOrBackupTS macro only)
When the Transport Stream belongs to a GbE port, the destination IP address (IP
Address parameter) and UDP port (UDP Port parameter)
(DCM.activateMainOrBackupTS macro only)
The path and name of the Config file (File Location parameter) (...WithFile
macros only)
The transition status (Main On parameter)
- 1 : main activated (backup-to-main transition)
- 0 : main deactivated (main-to-backup transition)
The resourceID (Monitor parameter) of the monitoring system on which
messages must be logged.
4011746 Rev W 961

Appendix B

During executing a ...WithFile macro, a Config file will be uploaded by the Macro
Component specifying the Transport Streams for which a transition must be
triggered. The following illustrations show the syntax of the data lines and an
example of a comma-delimited text file opened with Microsoft Excel.
Note: For services on an ASI Interface Card, the IP Address and UDP Port field
must be empty.
Joining GbE Port Pairs to a Multicast Group

Introduction
The following macros can be used to join GbE port pairs of a GbE Interface Card to a
multicast group:
joinMulticastStream: joins a GbE port to a multicast group.
joinMulticastStreamWithFile: joins GbE ports to multicast groups as specified in
the Config file.
joinMulticastStreamWithFileForResourceSet: joins GbE ports to multicast groups as
specified in the Config file for multiple DCM's.
962 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
Requirements: These macros require DCM Rosa/Copernicus driver 3.0.30 or higher,

DCM.py script 1.17 or higher.
Parameters
The name (DCM Unit parameter) of the DCM affected by this macro
The name of the ResourceSet (ResourceSet Name parameter) containing the DCM
devices affected by this macro
The slot position of the GbE Interface Card (Board ID parameter) containing the
GbE port pairs that must be joined
(joinMulticastStream and joinMulticastStreamWithFile macro only)
The ID of the GbE port pair (Port Pair ID parameter), 0 for port pair 1-2 and 2 for
port pair 3-4
(joinMulticastStream macro only)
The VLAN ID (VLAN ID parameter) corresponding the VLAN port pair
The Ip address (Multicast IP Address parameter) of the multicast group
The source filtering (Filter parameter)
- Include: adds the IP address(es) to the include list of sources. An Include
source list contains the IP addresses from which multicast reception is
allowed.
- Exclude: adds the IP address(es) to exclude list of sources. An Exclude source
list contains the IP addresses from which multicast reception is not allowed.
The IP address(es) (Source IP Address parameter) that must be added to the
Include or Exclude source list.
The path and name of the Config file (CSV File name with full path parameter)
(joinMulticastStreamWithFile and joinMulticastStreamWithFileForResourceSet macro
only)
4011746 Rev W 963

Appendix B

During executing the joinMulticastStreamWithFile and
joinMulticastStreamWithFileForResourceSet macro, a Config file will be uploaded by
the Macro Component specifying GbE port pairs that must be joined to multicast
groups. The following illustrations show the syntax of the data lines and an
example of a comma-delimited text file opened with Microsoft Excel.
Tip: Multiple source IP addresses must be separated by a "/", a range of IP addresses

by a "_", for example: a range between 10.0.0.1 and 10.0.0.10 can be given by
10.0.0.1_10.
Modifying the Unsolicited IGMP Message Version Parameter

Introduction
The following macros can be used to modify the Unsolicited IGMP Message Version
parameter of GbE Interface Card:
setUnsolicitedIGMPMsgVersion macro: modifies Unsolicited IGMP Message
Version parameter
964 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
setUnsolicitedIGMPMsgVersionForResourceSet macro: Unsolicited IGMP Message

Version parameter for multiple DCM's
Requirements: These macros require DCM Rosa/Copernicus driver 3.0.30 or higher,
DCM.py script 1.17 or higher.
Parameters
The name (DCM Unit parameter) of the DCM affected by this macro
The name of the ResourceSet (ResourceSet Name parameter) containing the DCM
devices affected by this macro
The slot position of the GbE Interface Card (Board ID parameter)
The Unsolicited IGMP Message version (IGMP Version parameter), 2 or 3
Executing a Macro
Perform the following procedure to execute a macro.
1 In the list box on the Macros tab of the Macro Component user interface, select
the macro and point to the Execute... command button.
Result: The Macro Detail dialog is displayed.
2 In the Parameter list box, select a parameter and point to the Edit... command
button.
Result: The Parameter Detail dialog for the selected parameter is displayed.
3 In the Value box, select or enter the desired value

Particular parameters must be specified by means of resource sets, perform the
following steps to add and to select a resource set.
a On the Parameter Detail dialog, click on the ... command button beside the
Value box.
4011746 Rev W 965

Appendix B
Result: The Unit Set dialog is displayed.
b Click on the Create command button.

Result: The Unit Set Properties dialog is displayed.
c In the Unit Set Name box, enter a name for this resource set.
966 4011746 Rev W

Using DCM Macros
d In the Driver drop down box, select the driver of the unit (DCM) that must
be selected.
e In the list box, click on the units that must be selected. A selected unit is
indicated by a tick mark.
Tip: When all units must be selected, point to the All selection button.
f Point to the arrow downcommand button.
Result: The selected units appear in the Selected Units list box.
g Click on the OK command button to close the Unit Set Properties dialog and
to return to the Unit Set dialog.
h In the Unit Set list box, select the resource set and click on the Select
command button.
Result: The selected resource set is added to the Value box on the Parameter
Detail dialog.
5 Repeat step 2 up to 4 for all parameters.
6 Point to the Finish command button.
4011746 Rev W 967

C
Appendix C
Appx auto letter
Extended Operations
Introduction
This appendix describes how to download MIBs and traces from the
DCM.
In this Appendix
Downloading MIBs from the DCM................................................. 970
Viewing Trace Logs ........................................................................... 972
Capturing Live Network Data ......................................................... 978
Restarting the System........................................................................ 980
4011746 Rev W 969

Appendix C
Extended Operations
Downloading MIBs from the DCM

Introduction
In order to build your own GUI, the MIB files used by the DCM can be downloaded
from the DCM to the hard disk of your PC using the File Transfer Protocol (FTP).
To Download MIB files

The procedure below describes how a MIB file can be copied from a DCM to the
hard disk of a PC using FTP.
1 Launch the Internet Explorer browser and in the Address line of the browser
enter the following instruction:
ftp://X.X.X.X/mibs/
Where X.X.X.X is the IP address of your DCM.
Result: The Log On As dialog is displayed.
2 Enter guest in both the User name drop down box and Password box and press
the Log On command button.
970 4011746 Rev W

Downloading MIBs from the DCM
Result: The directory containing the MIB files is shown.
3 Copy the MIB file to your local hard disk.
4011746 Rev W 971

Appendix C
Extended Operations
Viewing Trace Logs

Introduction
The DCM keeps a number of trace logs containing data of particular events. These
trace logs are useful for trouble shooting purposes and can directly be opened using
the web browser user interface of the DCM or can be downloaded to the hard disk of
your PC.
The web browser user interface of the DCM allows consulting the following trace
logs:
Security Log
GUI Trace
Action Log
ORB Trace
ORB Timings
Mainboard Trace
Board 1 - 4 Trace
Transrater Trace
DPI Trace
SNMP Trace
Transcoder Trace
972 4011746 Rev W

Viewing Trace Logs
The following illustration shows an example of a GUI trace log:
Note: For certain reasons it can be useful to filter the trace logs. The trace logs of
the Main Board (Mainboard Trace) and the trace logs of the cards (Board 1 - 4 Trace)
can be filtered by assigning particular filter values. The ORB Trace logs can be
filtered by changing the ORB Trace Level. The ORB Trace Level value as well as the
filter values will be passed by your Customer Service representative.
Filtering the Card Trace Logs

The following procedure explains how to change the trace logs filtering parameters.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that
4011746 Rev W 973

Appendix C
Extended Operations
Result: The Traces sub page containing the Device Trace Settings table is
displayed.
2 In the Device Trace Settings table, configure the following settings:

a In the Trace Level drop down box of the Main Card, select one of the
following values: None, All, Minor, or Major.
Note: When the Trace Level parameter is set to All, Minor, or Major, a
warning icon is added in the header of the web browser user interface
indicating the DCM is in service mode.
b In the Modules box of the Main Card, tick or clear the desired module check
box(es).
Note: All module check boxes can be set or cleared by pointing to the
corresponding Enabled All or Disabled All command button.
c Repeat step a and b for all interface cards.
3 Point to the Apply command button.
Changing the ORB Trace Level

The following steps explain how to change the ORB Trace level.
Result: The Traces sub page is displayed.
2 In the ORB Trace Level drop down box under the ORB Trace Settings, select the
ORB Trace level received from our representative.
974 4011746 Rev W

Viewing Trace Logs
Checking the Trace Logs

The following procedure explains how to view a trace log.
2 In the Trace Logs table, press the desired trace link.
Result: The selected trace log opens.
4011746 Rev W 975

Appendix C
Extended Operations
Downloading Trace Logs

Introduction
The web browser user interface of the DCM allows downloading individual trace log
files or exporting of all trace log files compressed into one file.
Downloading a Single Trace Log File

The procedure below explains how to download a single trace log file.
2 In the Trace Logs table, right-click on the desired trace link and point to Save
Target As... in the short-cut menu.

3 In the Save in: drop down box, browse to the folder in which the file should be
saved.
4 In the File name drop down box, enter the file name.
5 Press the Save command button to save the file.
Exporting the Trace Log Files

The export function of the web browser user interface of the DCM compresses all
trace log files into a single file and exports this file to the hard disk of your PC. This
file can also include the Core files and hardware statistics of the DCM.
Note: A file containing the core files is very large.
The following procedure explains how to download the trace log files using the
export function.
976 4011746 Rev W

Viewing Trace Logs
2 Under the Trace Export settings, tick the Include Core Files check box if the
Core files of the DCM must be included and the Include Hardware Statistics
check box if the hardware statistics must be included.
3 Press the Export command button.

Result: The File Download dialog appears after a while.
7 When the core files are exported, press the Delete command button beside
Delete Core Files to remove the core files from the device.
4011746 Rev W 977

Appendix C
Extended Operations
Capturing Live Network Data

Introduction
For troubleshooting purposes the DCM allows capturing Ethernet network data on
its management ports, local host, or on the ports of its GbE Interface Card(s). The
captured information (max. 150 MB) is stored into multiple files and compressed
into a single file. This file can then be offered to our Customer Service department
for further investigation.
CAUTION:
Capturing network data introduces additional CPU load and can influence the
correct operation of the DCM.
To Capture Network Data

The following steps explain how to capture network data and to download this
information to your PC.
Security Group.
2 Click on the Maintenance link that appears after clicking on the Help link.
3 In the Board drop down box under the Capture Settings, select the board.
4 For a GbE Interface Card, complete the following settings to specify the network
details:
a Enter the name of the port in the TS GbE Port box.
b Enter the destination IP address in the TS IP Address box.
c Enter the UDP port number in the TS UDP Port box.
5 Click on the Start command button.
Result: The capturing process is started.
978 4011746 Rev W

Capturing Live Network Data
Note: The network data capturing process is a circular process, meaning when
the last file is filled up with data, the process starts overwriting the first file with
new recorded data.
6 Once the event for which network data information should be recorded arose the
Stop command button must be pressed.
Result: The following message box is displayed.
7 Click on the OK command button to close the message box.

8 Click on the Export command button and save the file to the hard disk of your
PC.
Note: The captured information is removed after exporting the file.
4011746 Rev W 979

Appendix C
Extended Operations
Restarting the System

Introduction
The DCM or a IP Video Gateway Card of the DCM can be restarted from a remote
location using its web browser user interface. A restart can be performed with its
previous settings (called Warm Restart) or with factory settings (called Cold Restart).
When a cold restart is performed for a device, all previous configuration settings will
be lost except the IP settings of the 10/100 and 10/100/1000Base-T port of the
device. After restarting the device remains accessible by the web browser user
interface.
Note: Performing a cold restart can only be done using the web browser user
interface when you are logged on to the DCM with a security account belonging to
the Administrators security group.
A warm restart of the DCM can also be triggered using a GPIO contact. The
procedure to configure the GPIO contacts and to assign a GPIO contact for rebooting
the DCM can be found in topic Configuring the GPIO Contacts on page 80.
When the device participates into a device backup application and the device is
active, a manual main-to-backup or backup-to-main transition must be performed
before restarting the device (Warm Restart). The following steps explain how to
perform a manual transition:
1 Check if the inactive device is up and running.
2 Check if the configuration of the inactive device matches the configuration of the
active device and modify if required.
3 Perform a manual transition:
Device backup controlled by ROSA's Digital Headend Backup Task
On the GUI of the DHB task, click on the Backup Status tab, select the DCM
section, and point to the Backup command button to inactivate a main device
or to the Restore command button to inactivate a backup device. For more
information concerning the Digital Headend Backup task, please refer to the
Digital Headend Backup - User's Guide.
Device backup controlled by ROSA Element Manager
On the GUI of the ROSA EM device, change the Backup State parameter on
the Backup tab of the main device to:
– Backup to inactivate a main device
– Inactive to inactivate a backup device
More information concerning device backup controlled by ROSA EM can be
found in topic Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager on page 763 or in
the ROSA Element Manager - User's Guide.
980 4011746 Rev W

Restarting the System
Standalone device backup

On the web browser user interface of the main DCM, click on the
Configuration link and point to the Backup link. Click on the Manual
Backup command button to inactivate a main device or to the Manual
Restore command button to inactivate a backup device. For more
information concerning the standalone backup, please refer to Standalone
Device Backup on page 769.
To Restart the DCM System

The following steps explain how to restart a DCM or an IP Video Gateway Card
using the web browser user interface.
Security Group when the device or IP Video Interface Card must be restarted
using a Cold Restart.
2 On the web browser user interface, point to the Maintenance link that appears
3 Under Reboot in the drop down box beside the Reboot command button, select
Device to restart the device or select the IP Video Gateway Card that must be
restarted.
4 Click on the Warm or Cold selection button.
WARNING:
After restarting the DCM using a Cold Restart, all configuration settings will
be lost.
After restarting the DCM using a Warm Restart, the outgoing services will be
interrupted.
5 Press the Reboot command button.
Result: A confirmation popup window is displayed.
Warm Restart confirmation popup window
4011746 Rev W 981

Appendix C
Extended Operations
Cold Restart confirmation popup window

Notes:
Booting the DCM can take some time depending on the configuration and the
features of the device.
After changing settings using the web browser user interface, it takes at most 5
minutes before these settings are stored in non-volatile memory. When the
DCM is powered down during this time, these settings will be lost. To deal
with this, wait 5 minutes before powering down the DCM or trigger a Warm
Restart and wait 20 seconds before powering down the DCM by unplugging the
power cord.
982 4011746 Rev W

D
Appendix D
Appx auto letter
Additional Configuration
Introduction
This appendix outlines the following additional configurations:
Configuring IP Security on a computer running Windows XP,
Windows 2003 server, or Windows Vista.
4011746 Rev W 983

Appendix D
Configuring IPsec on Windows

Introduction
To ensure secure communication between the DCM and the computer running the
web browser user interface of the DCM, IP Security (IPsec) can be used. The
procedures in this topic describe the IP Security configuration for a computer
running Windows XP Professional or Windows 2003 Server and for a computer
running Windows Vista. The procedure to configure IPsec for DCM is described in
topic Configuring IP Security on page 75.
Note: The DCM uses Internet Key Exchange (IKE) for IP security. IKE is configured
to use preshared keys that can be set by the user. The DCM supports 3DES
encryption, MD5/SHA1 hashing, and Diffie-Hellman group 2.
The procedures to configure a computer running Windows XP, 2003 Server, or
Windows are set up as an example with correct settings for the DCM and with MD5
hashing. Note that the DCM also supports SHA1 hashing.
To Configure IPsec on a Computer Running Windows XP or Windows 2000

Server
Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server can be configured to use IPsec using the
Microsoft Management Console (MMC). The MMC is a generic management
console that can manage many different Windows components.
IPsec configuration in Windows consists of four main tasks:
Access the IPsec management console.
Create IP address lists to identify computers.
Create Filter actions to define encryption parameters.
Create Policies that put IP address lists and filter actions together.
Each of these tasks is described below.
Note: You must be an Administrator user to perform these tasks.
Accessing the IPsec Management Console

The following steps explain how to open the IPsec management console.
Launching MMC
The following steps explain how to open the MMC main screen.
1 From the Windows desktop, click on the Start button in the System Tray, and
then choose Run… from the Start menu.
984 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Run dialog box appears.
2 Enter mmc in the Open drop down box, and then click on the OK command
button.
Result: The MMC main screen appears as shown below.
Adding the Appropriate Snap-In

In order for MMC to manage the IPsec component, you must add the appropriate
IPsec snap-in as follows:
1 From the File menu, choose Add/Remove Snap-in.
4011746 Rev W 985

Appendix D
Result: The Add/Remove Snap-in dialog appears as shown below.

Result: The Add Standalone Snap-in dialog appears as shown below.
3 In the Available Standalone Snap-ins box, choose IP Security Policy Management

and then click on the Add command button.
986 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Select Computer or Domain dialog appears as shown below.
4 Confirm that the Local computer selection button is selected, and then click on
the Finish command button.
5 Click on the Close command button to close the Add Standalone Snap-in dialog
and to return to the Add/Remove Snap-in dialog.
6 Confirm that IP Security Policies on Local Computer now appears in the
Standalone tab of this dialog.
7 Click on the OK command button to return to the management console.
4011746 Rev W 987

Appendix D
Result: The screen should now appear as shown below.
Note: If Console Root is highlighted in the left pane, click on IP Security

Policies on Local Computer to display the options shown in the right pane
above.
Tip: The IP Security Policies on Local Computer settings can also be accessed via
Control Panel / Administrative Tools / Local Security Policy.
Creating a New IP List

Complete the following steps to create a new IP list.
1 In the left pane of the Management Console, right-click on the IP Security Policies
on Local Computer item and choose Manage IP filter lists and filter actions from
the short-cut menu.
988 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Manage IP filter lists and filter Actions dialog appears as shown
below.
2 Click on the Add command button to open the IP Filter List dialog.
Result: The IP Filter List dialog is displayed. Note that the default name New
IP Filter List appears in the Name box.
3 In the Name box, replace the default name with a new list name that is
meaningful to you (Headend IPs in the example below).
4011746 Rev W 989

Appendix D
4 Confirm that the Use Add Wizard check box is checked, and then click on the
Add command button to start the IP Filter List wizard.
5 Complete the steps of the wizard as follows:
a IP Filter Description and Mirrored property (Windows 2003 Server only):
This specifies a filter in each direction. Tick the Mirrored. Match packets
with the exact opposite source and destination addresses check box.
b IP Traffic Source. This identifies the source of IP traffic for this list. Choose
My IP Address from the drop down box, and then click on the Next
command box.
c IP Traffic Destination. This identifies the destination of the IP traffic for this
list. Choose A specific IP Address from the drop down box, then enter the
IP address of the destination device, and then click on the Next command
button.
d IP Protocol Type. This identifies what protocols are valid for this list.
Choose Any from the drop down box, and then click on the Next command
button.
e Click on the Finish command button.
For a computer running Windows 2003 Server, the IP Filter Properties dialog
is displayed.
Click on the OK command button to close the IP Filter Properties dialog.
990 4011746 Rev W

Result: The IP Filter List dialog should now appear as shown below.
6 Click on the OK command button to return to the Manage IP filter lists and
filter actions dialog.
7 Confirm that the new IP list now appears in the IP Filter Lists box.
Creating a New Filter Action

Complete the following steps to create a new filter action.
1 Click on the Manage Filter Actions tab to show current filter actions and to add
a new entry for the DCM.
4011746 Rev W 991

Appendix D
Result: The tab opens as shown below.
2 Click on the Add command button to start the Filter Action wizard.
3 At the wizard welcome screen, click on the Next > command button.
4 Complete the steps of the wizard as follows:
a Filter Action Name. Replace the default name New Filter Action with a
meaningful name for the new action (for instance Headend IPsec Filter), and
then click on the Next > command button.
b Filter Action General Options. Select the Negotiate Security selection
button, and then click on the Next > command button.
c Communicating with computers that do not support IPsec. Choose Do not
communicate with computers that do not support IPsec, and then click on
the Next > command button.
d IP Traffic Security. Select the Custom selection button, and then click on
the Settings command button.
992 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Custom Security Method Settings dialog appears as shown

below.
e Tick the Data integrity and encryption (ESP) check box and then select MD5
and 3DES from the Integrity algorithm and Encryption algorithm drop
down boxes, respectively.
f Click on the OK command button to save your selections and return to the
Filter Action wizard IP Traffic Security wizard page.
g Click on the Next command button to proceed to the final page of the Filter
Action wizard.
h Click on the Finish command button.
4011746 Rev W 993

Appendix D
Result: The new filter action should now appear in the Filter Actions box as
shown below.
5 Double-click on the filter action you just created to open the Headend IPsec
Filter Properties dialog.
994 4011746 Rev W

6 On the Security Methods tab, confirm that the Session key perfect forward
secrecy check box is checked and the other boxes are cleared, as shown in the
picture below.
7 When finished, click on the OK command button to close the Headend IPsec
filter Properties dialog and return to the Manage IP filter lists and filter actions
dialog.
4011746 Rev W 995

Appendix D
8 Click on the Close command button to close this dialog and return to the MMC
dialog.
To Create a New IPsec Policy

Complete the following steps to create a new IPsec policy.
1 Right-click on the right pane of the MMC, and then point to Create IP Security
Policy... in the short-cut menu to open the IP Security Policy wizard.
2 At the wizard welcome screen, click on the Next > command button to continue,
and then complete the steps of the wizard as follows:
996 4011746 Rev W

a IP Security Policy Name. In the Name box, replace the default policy name
with a name that is more meaningful to you (for instance Headend Policy),
and then click on the Next > command button.
b Requests for Secure Communication. Confirm that the Activate the

default response rule check box is not checked, and then click on the Next >
command button.
c On the final page of the wizard, confirm that the Edit Properties check box is
checked, and then click on the Finish command button.
4011746 Rev W 997

Appendix D
Result: The Headend Policy Properties dialog appears as shown below.
3 Select the General tab and click on the Advanced command button.
Result: The Key Exchange Settings dialog is displayed.
4 Point to the Methods... command button.
998 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Key Exchange Security Methods dialog is displayed.
5 In the Security method preference order list box, select a security method with
3DES encryption and move it to the top of the list by clicking on the Move up
button.
Note: When the desired method is not available, an existing method can be
modified by clicking on the Edit... button or a new method can be created by
clicking on the Add... button.
Select the desired Integrity algorithm, Encryption Algorithm (3DES), and

Diffie-Hellman group (Medium (2)) in the corresponding drop down boxes
and press the OK command button to close the dialog.
6 Click on the OK command button to close the Key Exchange Security Methods
dialog and to return to the Key Exchange Settings dialog.
7 Click on the OK command button to close the Key Exchange Settings dialog and
to return to the Headend Policy Properties dialog.
4011746 Rev W 999

Appendix D
8 Clear the Use Add Wizard check box and then click on the Add… command
button.
Result: The New Rule Properties dialog appears as shown below.
9 On the IP Filter List tab, select the Headend IPs selection button.
10 On the Filter Action tab, select the Headend IPsec Filter selection button.
11 On the Authentication Methods tab, click on the Add command button.
1000 4011746 Rev W

Result: The New Authentication Method Properties dialog appears as shown

below.
12 Select the Use this string (preshared key) selection button, and then enter
alphanumeric string (between 1 and 200 characters).
Note: Be sure to make a note of this string, as it must exactly match the
preshared key entered in the destination device.
13 Click on the OK command button to save the preshared key entry and return to
the New Rule Properties dialog.
4011746 Rev W 1001

Appendix D
Result: The preshared key is added to the Authentication method preference
order box.
14 Select the existing Kerberos entry, and then click on the Remove command button
to delete this entry from the list.
15 In the confirmation dialog, click on the Yes command button to accept the
changes.
16 Click on the OK command button to close the New Rule Properties dialog.
1002 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Edit Rule Properties dialog should now display only the newly
entered rule.
17 Close the dialog to return to the MMC. Confirm that the new policy now appears
on the right pane.
18 Right-click on the new policy, and then choose Assign in the short-cut menu to
activate the policy.
If all of the above steps were performed correctly and the destination device is also
configured properly, the computer will now require IPsec to talk to the destination
device.
Note: If you have difficulty communicating with the destination device after
completing this procedure, ask your system administrator for assistance.
To Unassign IPsec
To disable IPsec on a computer running Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server, you
must unassign the IPsec policy as follows:
1 Open the Management Console as described in topic Accessing the IPsec
Management Console on page 984.
2 In the right hand pane of the Management Console, right-click on the IPsec
policy and point to Un-assign in the short-cut menu.
4011746 Rev W 1003

Appendix D
For Further Information

Additional information on configuring IPsec for Windows XP Professional and
Windows 2003 Server is available on the following web page:
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=a774012a-ac25-4a1d-
8851-b7a09e3f1dc9&displaylang=en
1004 4011746 Rev W

To Configure IPsec on a Computer Running Windows Vista

IPsec configuration in Windows Vista consists of two main tasks:
Setting up the IPsec connection
Changing the IPsec connection defaults
Note: You must be an Administrator user to perform these tasks.
Setting Up the IPsec Connection

The following procedure explains how to set up an IPsec connection for Windows
Vista.
1 From the Windows desktop, click on the Start button in the System Tray, and
then choose Control Panel.
Result: The Control Panel dialog is displayed.
2 In the left hand pane of the Control Panel dialog, point to Classic View.
3 In the right hand pane of the Control Panel dialog, double-click on
Administrative Tools.
Result: The Control Panel - Administrative Tools dialog is displayed.
4 Double-click on Windows Firewall with Advanced Security.
Result: The User Account Control might appear.
5 Click on the Continue command button.
4011746 Rev W 1005

Appendix D
Result: The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog is displayed.
6 Select Connection Security Rules in the left hand pane of the dialog.
7 Right-click in the Connection Security Rules pane and point to New Rule... in
the short-cut menu.
1006 4011746 Rev W

Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Rule Type dialog is
displayed.
8 Select the Server-to-server selection button and click on the Next > command
button.
4011746 Rev W 1007

Appendix D
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Endpoints dialog is
displayed.
9 Under Which computers are in Endpoint 1?, select the These IP addresses
selection button and click on the Add... command button.
Result: The IP Address dialog for Endpoint 1 appears.
1008 4011746 Rev W

10 Select the This IP address or subnet selection button.

11 Enter the IP address of this computer in the corresponding box and press the OK
button to close the IP Address dialog and to return to the New Connection
Security Rule Wizard - Endpoints dialog.
12 Under Which computers are in Endpoint 2?, select the These IP addresses
selection button and click on the Add... command button.
Result: The IP Address dialog for Endpoint 2 appears.
13 Select the This IP address or subnet selection button.
14 Enter the IP address of the destination device in the corresponding box and press
the OK command button to close the IP Address dialog and to return to the New
Connection Security Rule Wizard - Endpoints dialog.
15 Click on the Next > command button.
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Requirements dialog is
displayed.
16 Select the Required authentication for inbound and outbound connections

selection button and click on the Next > command button.
4011746 Rev W 1009

Appendix D
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Authentication Method
dialog is displayed.
17 Select the Preshared Key selection button.

18 In the Key box, enter the preshared key and press the Next > command button.
1010 4011746 Rev W

Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Profile dialog is displayed.
19 Leave all check boxes ticked and press the Next > command button.
4011746 Rev W 1011

Appendix D
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Name dialog is displayed.
20 In the Name box, enter a name for the IPsec connection (Headend IPs in the
example).
21 Click on the Finish button to close the wizard and to return to the Windows
Firewall with Advanced Security dialog.
Changing IPsec Connection Defaults

Perform the following steps to change the IPsec connection defaults.
1 In the left hand pane of the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog,
right-click on Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer
and point to Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer
dialog is displayed.
2 Click on the IPsec Settings tab
1012 4011746 Rev W

Result: The IPsec Settings tab page is displayed.
3 Press the Customize... command button.
4011746 Rev W 1013

Appendix D
Result: The Customize IPsec Settings dialog appears.
4 In the Key exchange (Main Mode) selection box, select the Advanced selection
button and point to the corresponding Customize... command button.
1014 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog is displayed.
5 In the Key exchange algorithm selection box, select the desired algorithm for key
exchange (Diffie-Hellman Group 2).
6 In the Security methods box, press the Add command button.
4011746 Rev W 1015

Appendix D
Result: The Security Method dialog appears.
a In the Encryption algorithm selection box, select the desired encryption

algorithm for key exchange (3DES).
b In the Integrity algorithm selection box, select the desired integrity algorithm
(MD5).
c Press the OK command button to close the Security Method dialog and to
return to the Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog.
Result: The selected key exchange method is added to the Security methods list
box.
Note: In the Security methods box, at least one method must match a key
exchange method of the destination device.
7 Click on the OK command button to close the Customize Advanced Key
Exchange Settings dialog and to return to the Customize IPsec Settings dialog.
8 In the Data protection (Quick Mode) selection box, select the Advanced
selection button and press the corresponding Customize... command button.
1016 4011746 Rev W

Result: The Customize Data Protection Settings dialog is displayed.
9 In the Data integrity and encryption box, point to the Add... command button.
4011746 Rev W 1017

Appendix D
Result: The Integrity and Encryption Algorithms dialog is displayed.
a In the Protocol selection box, select the desired protocol for data protection
(ESP).
b In the Encryption algorithm selection box, select the desired encryption
algorithm for data protection (3DES).
c In the Integrity algorithm selection box, select the desired integrity algorithm
(MD5)
d In the Key lifetime (in minutes) box, enter or choose the time a key will be
used for data integrity before a new key will be generated. A lifetime can be
chosen in the range from 5 minutes up to 2,879 minutes.
e In the Key lifetime (in KB) box, enter or choose the amount of data that will
be sent with a key before a new key will be generated. A lifetime can be
chosen in the range from 20,480 KB up to 2,147,483,647 KB.
f Press the OK button to close the Integrity and Encryption Algorithms dialog
and to return to the Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog.
Result: The selected data protection method is added to the Data integrity and
encryption algorithms box.
Note: In the Data integrity and encryption algorithms box, at least one method
must match a data protection method of the destination device.
1018 4011746 Rev W

10 Press the OK command button to close Customize Data Protection Settings

dialog and to return to the Customize IPsec Settings dialog.
11 Press the OK command button to close the Customize IPsec Settings dialog and
to return to the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer
dialog.
12 Close the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog.
Enabling or Disabling IPsec

Enabling or disabling IPsec on a computer running Windows Vista can be done as
follows:
1 Open the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog as described in
topic Settings Up the IPsec Connection on page 1005.
2 In the left hand pane of the dialog, point to Windows Firewall with Advanced
Security on Local Computer.
3 In the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer pane,
right-click on the IPsec entry and select Enable Rule or Disable Rule in the short-cut
menu.
4011746 Rev W 1019

Glossary
Glossary
AAC
advanced audio coding.
AC
access criteria.
ac, AC
alternating current. An electric current that reverses its direction at regularly
recurring intervals.
AC-3
audio compression - 3. Digital audio encoding technique developed by Dolby®
for multi-channel sound applications.
AD
advertising.
AES
advanced encryption standard.
AH
authentication header.
AIT
application information table.
AP
add unspliced insertion PIDs
4011746 Rev W 1021

Glossary
ARP
address resolution protocol. Internet protocol used to map an IP addresses to
physical (hardware) addresses on local area networks.
ASI
asynchronous serial interface. Allows the intermittent transfer of data one bit at
a time rather than in a steady stream.
ASM
any source multicast
ATSC
Advanced Television Systems Committee of the USA.
AVC
advanced video coding.
Avg
average.
BAT
bouquet association table.
BISS
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System
CA
conditional access. The system, software, and components necessary to provide
or deny subscribers selective access to specific services.
CAM
conditional access module.
CAS
conditional access system.
CAT
conditional access table.
1022 4011746 Rev W

Glossary
CBR
constant bitrate.
CC
continuity counter.
CEAM
cable emergency alert message.
COFDM
coded orthogonal frequency division multiplexing.
COP
code of practice.
CP
crypto period.
CPB
coded picture buffer.
CPBR
clear PID bit rates
CPU
central processing unit.
CRC
cyclic redundancy code.
CSV
comma-separated values. A data file format supported by many spreadsheet
programs, in which fields are separated by commas. Also referred to as comma
delimited.
CVCT
cable virtual channel table.
4011746 Rev W 1023

Glossary
CW
control word.
CWG
control word generator.
dc, DC
direct current. An electric current flowing in one direction only and
substantially constant in value.
DC-II
DigiGipher-II
DCM
digital content manager.
DES
data encryption standard.
DHB
digital headend backup.
DPI
digital program insertion.
DSL
digital subscriber line. A technology for bringing up to 8.0 Mb/s of bandwidth
to homes and small businesses over ordinary twisted-pair copper telephone
lines.
DSM-CC
digital storage media - command and control. DSM-CC, Part 6 of MPEG-2, is an
ISO/IEC standard developed to provide the control functions and operations
specific to managing MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 bitstreams. These protocols may be
used to support applications in both stand-alone and heterogeneous network
environments. In the DSM-CC model, a stream is sourced by a server and
delivered to a client. Both the server and the client are considered to be users of
the DSM-CC network. DSM-CC defines a logical entity called the Session and
Resource Manager (SRM) which provides a (logically) centralized management
1024 4011746 Rev W

Glossary
of the DSM-CC Sessions and Resources.
DSNG
digital satellite news gathering.
DTF
digital transport formatter
DTS
decode time stamp.
DVB
A standard developed by the Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Group, which is
a European organization that has authored many specifications for satellite and
cable broadcasting of digital signals. Part of the DVB work has been focused
specifically on conditional access.
DVB-CSA
digital video broadcasting - common scrambling algorithm
DVB-H
digital video broadcasting - handhelds.
DVB-T
Digital Video Broadcasting baseline system for digital terrestrial television.
EAS
Emergency Alert System.
EBIF
ETV binary interchange format.
EBU
European broadcasting union.
ECM
entitlement control message.
4011746 Rev W 1025

Glossary
ECMG
entitlement control message generator.
EIS
event information scheduler.
EISS
ETV integrated signaling stream.
EIT
event information table.
EITa p/f
event information table actual present/following.
EITa sch
event information table actual schedule.
EITo p/f
event information table other present/following.
EITo sch
event information table other schedule.
EM
element manager.
EMM
entitlement management message.
EMMG
entitlement management message generator.
EN
European norm.
1026 4011746 Rev W

Glossary
ES
elementary stream.
ESP
encapsulation security payload.
ETM
extended text message.
ETR
ETSI technical report.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
ETT
extended text table.
ETV
enhanced television.
FCS
frame check sequence
FEC
multi-protocol encapsulation - forward error correction is a method that is
introduced by DVB-H to provide immunity to interference experienced in mobile
environments. This method organizes IP packets into a table and protects each
row with Reed-Solomon overhead. The IP packets and FEC overhead are
separately incapsulated and transmitted.
FEC
forward error correction. System of data transmission in which redundant bits
generated at the transmitted end are used by the receiver to detect, locate, and
correct transmission errors before delivering the data to the local data
communications link. This avoids requiring the transmitter to resend
information.
4011746 Rev W 1027

Glossary
FI
follow insertion.
FM
frequency modulation. A transmission technique in which the frequency of the
carrier varies in accordance with the modulating signal.
FP {follow primary}
follow primary.
FTP
file transfer protocol. Allows users to transfer text and binary files to and from
a personal computer, list directories on the foreign host, delete and rename files
on the foreign host, and perform wildcard transfers between hosts.
GbE or GigE
gigabit Ethernet. A LAN transmission standard that provides a data rate of 1
billion bits per second. Gigabit Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3z standard.
Gigabit Ethernet is carried primarily on optical fiber.
GMT
Greenwich mean time.
GOP
group of pictures.
GPIO
general purpose input output
GPS
global positioning system.
GUI
graphical user interface. A program interface that takes advantage of a
computer graphics capabilities to make the program visually easier to use.
HD or HDTV
high definition. A digital television format providing picture quality similar to
35 mm movies with sound quality similar to compact disk (CD).
1028 4011746 Rev W

Glossary
HE-AAC
high efficient advanced audio coding.
HTML
hypertext mark-up language. A language used to create documents on the
World Wide Web.
I/O
input/output.
IANA
Internet assigned number authority.
ID
identifier.
IEC
International Electro-technical Commission.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE was founded in 1963. It
is an organization composed of engineers, scientists, and students and is best
known for developing standards for the computer and electronics industries.
IGMP
Internet group management protocol. A protocol used to established host
memberships in particular multicast groups on a single network.
IIOP
Internet inter-ORB protocol. A protocol developed to implement CORBA
solutions over the web. It enables browsers and servers to exchange integers,
arrays, and more complex objects. It is a protocol for communication between
an application programming interface (API) and an external client.
IKE
internet key exchange
4011746 Rev W 1029

Glossary
IP
Internet protocol. A standard that was originally developed by the United
States Department of Defense to support the internetworking of dissimilar
computers across a network. IP is perhaps the most important of the protocols
on which the Internet is based. It is the standard that describes software that
keeps track of the internetwork addresses for different nodes, routes, and
outgoing/incoming messages on a network. Some examples of IP applications
include email, chat, and Web browsers.
IPMP
intellectual property management and protection
IPsec
internet protocol security.
ISO
International Organization for Standardization. An international body that
defines global standards for electronic and other industries.
ITU
International Telecommunications Union.
ITU-T
international telecommunication union - telecommunication.
LAN
local area network. A communications link between two or more points within
a small geographical area, such as between buildings. Typically permits data
rates up to 100 Mbps. Smaller than a metropolitan area network (MAN) or a
wide area network (WAN).
LED
light-emitting diode. An electronic device that lights up when electricity passes
through it.
MAC
media access control. The layer in the OSI model above the physical layer. It
defines media access control methods and parameters for access to the physical
media.
1030 4011746 Rev W

Glossary
MD5
message digest 5 algorithm.
MGT
master guide table.
MHEG
multimedia/hypermedia expert group
MIB
management information base. SNMP collects management information from
devices on the network and records the information in a management
information base. The MIB information includes device features, data
throughput statistics, traffic overloads, and errors.
MIP
mega-frame initialization packets.
MMC
Microsoft management console.
MPE
multi-protocol encapsulation.
MPEG
Motion Picture Experts Group. A joint committee of the International Standards
Organization (ISO) and the International Electrotechnical Commission (EG).
This committee develops and maintains the MPEG specification for a series of
hardware and software standards designed to reduce the storage requirements
of digital video and audio. The common goal of MPEG compression is to
convert the equivalent of about 7.7 MB down to under 150 K, which represents a
compression ratio of approximately 52 to 1. Current standards are MPEG-1,
MPEG-2, and MPEG-4.
MPTS
multi-program transport stream.
4011746 Rev W 1031

Glossary
MQAM modulator
multiple quadrature amplitude modulation modulator. A device with two
input ports that allow it to receive MPEG transport streams simultaneously from
two different sources. The MQAM separates the content in these transport
streams, encrypts it, modulates it, and then sends it to DHCTs on the cable
network. The four, independent radio frequency (RF) outputs on the back panel
of an MQAM allow the cable operator to use only one unit of rack space for the
hardware and one unit of rack space for ventilation, while providing the same
number of RF output channels as four QAMs.
MTR
multi transport receiver
mux
multiplexer. A device that combines two or more signals into one output.
NIT
network information table.
NITa
network information table actual.
NITo
network information table other.
NMS
network management system. A software system designed specifically to
monitor a network and to facilitate troubleshooting.
NTP
network time protocol.
NTSC
National Television Standards Committee. A committee that determines video
signal standards for television displays in the United States, Canada, Mexico,
and Japan, as well as other Latin American and Asian countries. The NTSC
standard calls for fixed-resolution, interlaced displays that are updated 30 times
per second with a resolution of 525 lines.
1032 4011746 Rev W

Glossary
NVOD
near video on demand.
ON ID
original network identifier.
ORB
object request broker.
OUTV
occasional use television.
PAL
phase alternate line.
PAT
program association table.
PC
personal computer.
PCR
program clock reference.
PD
private data.
PDG
private date generator.
PES
packetized elementary stream
PID
packet identifier or program identifier.
4011746 Rev W 1033

Glossary
PMT
program map table. Identifies and indicates the locations of the streams that
make up each service, and the location of the Program Clock Reference fields for
a service.
PNS
perceptual noise substitution.
PPS
pulse per second.
PS
power supply.
PSI
program specific information.
PSIG
program specific information/service information generator.
PSIP
program and system information protocol. (A digital TV data transport
standard.)
PSU
power supply unit.
PTS
presentation time stamp.
QAM
quadrature amplitude modulation. A phase modulation technique for
representing digital information and transmitting that data with minimal
bandwidth. Both phase and amplitude of carrier waves are altered to represent
the binary code. By manipulating two factors, more discrete digital states are
possible and therefore larger binary schemes can be represented.
1034 4011746 Rev W

Glossary
QAM256
A QAM technique that produces 256 discrete states, each state representing 8 bits
of information. The most complex of common QAM techniques.
QAM64
A QAM technique that produces 64 discrete states, each state representing 6 bits
of information.
QPSK
quadrature phase-shift keying. A phase modulation technique for representing
digital information. QPSK produces four discrete states, each state representing
two bits of information.
RAM
random access memory. A type of computer memory that can be read from or
written to in a nonlinear fashion.
RCDS
remote control and diagnostics system.
RFC
request for comments.
RMA
return material authorization. A form used to return products.
ROSA®
RCDS open system architecture.
RRT
ratings region table.
RST
running status table.
RTP
real-time transport protocol.
4011746 Rev W 1035

Glossary
RU
rack unit. RU is the measuring unit of vertical space in a standard equipment
rack. One RU equals 1.75" (44.5 mm).
SBR
spectral band replication. This is a technology to enhance audio or speech codex,
especially at low bit rate.
SCG
scrambling control group.
SCS
simulcrypt synchronizer.
SCTE
Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers, Inc. A not-for-profit
professional organization formed in 1969 to promote the sharing of operational
and technical knowledge in the field of cable television and broadband
communications.
SD or SDTV
standard definition. A digital television format providing picture quality
similar to digital versatile disk (DVD).
SDI
serial digital interface.
SDT
service description table.
SDTa
service description table actual.
SDTo
service description table other.
SECAM
séquentiel couleur avec mémoire. (French color TV standard.)
1036 4011746 Rev W

Glossary
SFN
single frequency network.
SFP
small form-factor pluggable.
SHA1
secure hash algorithm version 1.0.
SI
system or service information. Tuning information sent from the DNCS to
DHCTs which provides the information that DHCTs need to be able to tune to a
particular service.
SID
service identifier.
SL
sync layer.
SNMP
simple network management protocol. A protocol that governs network
management and the monitoring of network devices and their functions.
SPM
statmux pool manager
SPTS
single program transport stream.
SSM
synchronous status message.
Statmux
statistical multiplexing.
STT
system time table.
4011746 Rev W 1037

Glossary
SVGA
super video graphics adapter. (800 by 600 pixels, 1.33:1 aspect ratio.)
SW
session word.
SWDF
session word distribution file.
TCP
transmission control protocol. One of the main protocols in TCP/IP networks.
TCP enables two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data.
TCP guarantees delivery of data and packets, and will be delivered in the same
order in which they were sent. While IP takes care of handling the actual
delivery of the data, TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of
data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing through
the Internet.
TCP/IP
transmission control protocol/Internet protocol. Two interrelated protocols that
are part of the Internet protocol suite. TCP operates on the OSI transport layer
and breaks data into packets. IP operates on the OSI network layer and routes
the packets. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery of the data, TCP
takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a
message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet.
TDT
time and date table.
Timeslicing
Time slicing is a technique that is used in DVB-H applications to increase the
battery life time of mobile DVB-H receivers (for instance cell phones, PDAs...).
Chunks of data will be transmitted in burst, which allows the mobile receiver to
be switched off when no data is transmitted. During this inactivity the mobile
receiver can scan neighboring cells in order to select the best reception conditions
and to be prepared for seamless handovers.
TNS
temporal noise shaping.
1038 4011746 Rev W

Glossary
ToS
type of service
TOT
time offset table
TR
transrating.
TS
transport stream.
TS ID
transport stream identifier.
TTL
time to live. A field in many packet protocols that is used to ensure that packets
that do not find their destinations are eventually eliminated from the network.
TV
television.
TVCT
terrestrial virtual channel table.
UDP
user datagram protocol. A connectionless protocol, like TCP, that runs on top of
IP networks. Unlike TCP/IP, UDP/IP provides very few error recovery
services, offering instead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP
network without acknowledgements for guaranteed delivery.
URL
uniform resource locator. A standardized way of representing different
documents, media, and network services on the World Wide Web. The URL is
most commonly referred to as the Web address for a particular item. For
example, the URL, or Web address, for Cisco is http://www.Cisco.com.
UTC
coordinated universal time.
4011746 Rev W 1039

Glossary
VBR
variable bitrate.
VCT
Virtual Channel Table.
VLAN
virtual local area network. A local area network with a definition that maps
workstations on some other basis than geographic location (for example, by
department, type of user, or primary application). The virtual LAN controller
can change or add workstations and manage load balancing and bandwidth
allocation more easily than with a physical picture of the LAN. Network
Management System software keeps track of relating the virtual picture of the
local area network with the actual physical picture. VLANs are based on logical
instead of physical connections.
VSB
vestigial side band
XOR
exclusive or.
1040 4011746 Rev W

Index
Index
Activate Streaming command • 440
1 Activate the default response rule • 996
1 PPS GPS settings • 873 ActivateMain parameter • 957
10 MHz GPS settings • 873 Activating streaming • 439, 707
1024-max byte frames counter • 119 Activating the DCM • 64
128-255 byte frames counter • 119 Active ECMG Removed alarm • 780
1D FEC profile • 228 Active EIS Removed alarm • 780
Active EMMG Removed alarm • 780
2 Active parameter • 82
256-511 byte frames counter • 119 Active PSIG Removed alarm • 780
2D FEC profile • 228 AD server • 511
Add Alternate Service popup dialog • 542
3 Add Backup Service popup dialog • 562
3DES • 991 Add CA System dialog • 657
Add Component dialog • 652
5 Add Custom PID Row table • 289, 291, 293
512-1023 byte frames counter • 119 Add Descriptor Rule dialog • 614, 629
Add devices to scan dialog • 932
6 Add ECMG dialog • 602
64 byte frames counter • 119 Add EIS Proxy Setting table • 637
65-127 byte frames counter • 119 Add EMMG dialog • 622
Add ES Type Overrule table • 336
A Add Exception List Item popup dialog • 375
About ROSA NMS • 924 Add ID dialog • 614, 629
About sub page • 39 Add Input Stream table • 696
About the web browser user interface • 36 Add Merged Service popup dialog • 550
AC • 578 Add New Alias table • 72, 117
AC Manager Component • 576, 647, 925 Add New IPsec table • 76
AC Start Delay • 589 Add New Merged Service method • 280
AC Start Delay parameter • 611 Add New Merged Service or Merged Service
AC stop delay • 589 Component table • 280, 284
Access Controlled parameter • 400 Add New SNMP Trap Destination table • 61
Access Criteria • 578, 647 Add New Static ARP Entry table • 102
Access Criteria Configuration dialog • 657, 658, Add New Static Route table • 74, 105
660, 661, 662, 664 Add New Transrating Group table • 473, 487
Access Criteria information • 660 Add New TS table • 200
Access Criteria list • 657, 660 Add New User table • 44
Access Criteria tab • 657 Add New VLAN table • 108
Access Rights • 578, 581 Add Other Table • 371
Accessing the IPsec Management Console • 984 Add PMT Rule table • 344, 345
Action Log • 972 Add PMT Setting table • 340, 341, 348
Action parameter • 532, 533 Add Preconfigured Services table • 255
4011746 Rev W 1041

Index
Add Preconfigured Trigger table • 798 Adding SPTSs to Multi-TS Transrating Groups •
Add Preconfigured TS table • 190, 237 489
Add Private Data rule type • 614, 617 Adding static route entries • 75, 103
Add PSIG Proxy Settings table • 641 Adding the Appropriate Snap-In • 985
Add relation dialog • 888 Adding Time Offset Descriptors • 397
Add Row command • 72 Adding tracking rules • 304
Add Server to List command • 66 Adding VLAN port pairs • 108
Add Service dialog • 652 Additional features • 859
Add Service Location Descriptor parameter • Additional TS Info parameter • 649
403 Administrator security group • 41
Add Specific Other Table • 374 Advance Settings table • 711
Add Splice Source popup dialog • 526 Advanced parameters • 611
Add Standalone Snap-in dialog • 985 Advanced Routing tree • 156
Add Standard EIS command • 636 Advanced Settings dialog • 678
Add Standard EIS dialog • 636 Advanced Settings table • 219, 220, 613
Add Standard PSIG dialog • 640 Advanced tab • 219, 221, 612
Add Table command • 360 Advanced tab page • 219, 221
Add Target IP dialog • 910 Advanced TS Settings table • 221
Add Time Offset Descriptor table • 397 Advertising server • 511
Add Unit dialog • 887, 889 AF Insertion Rate parameter • 863
Add unspliced insertion • 508 AIT • 352, 360, 385, 391
Add Unspliced Insertion PIDs (AP) parameter • Alarm message reporting • 790
433, 517, 521 Alarm monitoring • 779
Add Unspliced Insertion PIDs parameter • 433, Alarm overview • 780
514, 526, 529 Alarm severity • 789
Add/Remove Snap-in dialog • 985 Alarm Summary Page • 817
Adding a Service Location Descriptor to a VCT Alarm Summary table • 817
• 403 Alarms • 780, 789, 816
Adding a Service to the Services List • 652 Alarms details related to incoming services • 821
Adding a Transport Stream • 651 Alarms details related to incoming Transport
Adding Access Criteria information • 660 Streams • 819
Adding alternate services • 542, 543 Alarms details related to outgoing services • 826
Adding Backup Services • 561, 562 Alarms details related to outgoing Transport
Adding Component Merge Rules • 284, 288 Streams • 824
Adding Components to a Service • 653 Alarms related to incoming services • 820
Adding Conditional Access System • 657 Alarms related to incoming Transport Streams •
Adding ECMG connection entries • 607 818
Adding ECMG Descriptor Rules • 614, 629, 631 Alarms related to outgoing services • 825
Adding EMMG Descriptor Rules • 629 Alarms related to outgoing Transport Streams •
Adding individual Transport Streams • 200 823
Adding IPsec peers • 76 Alarms sub page • 790, 791, 792
Adding login information • 47 Algorithm Optimization parameter • 471
Adding PID Sync Delay Groups • 425 All Alarms table • 790
Adding PMT descriptors • 340 Alternate Service branch • 159
Adding preconfiguring service loss alarm Alternate Services • 542
triggers • 798 Alternate source selection • 540
Adding RTP stream entries • 696 Annex A FEC sending arrangement • 232
Adding security accounts • 44 Annex B FEC sending arrangement • 232
Adding Service Component Tracking Rules • Applies to Data ID(s) parameter • 629
942 Applies to ECM ID(s) parameter • 614
Adding Services to a Transrating Group • 475 Apply command button • 38
1042 4011746 Rev W

Index
Apply to EIT command • 369, 372 B

ARP parameter • 114
ARP sub page • 103, 104 Backup - Main Delays parameter • 743, 753
Backup Device parameter • 767, 775
ARP table entries • 102
Backup Mode parameter • 738, 767
ASI input bandwidth limitation • 87, 88
Backup parameter • 281, 293
ASI input port configuration • 88
Backup scenarios • 752
ASI input type • 255, 293, 379
ASI Interface Card Backup Script parameter • 767, 775
Concept • 32 Backup Service branch • 159
Backup Services sub page • 753, 757
Principle • 34
Backup sub page • 55, 56, 740, 773, 812
ASI Interface Card mode • 861, 862
Backup tab • 775
ASI output port configuration • 90
ASI port configuration • 87 Backup to main service assignment • 752
ASI Port numbering • 87 Backup to Main Transport Stream Assignment •
742
ASI port parameters • 92
Backup trigger • 742, 752
ASI SFN Interface Card • 30, 32, 34, 87
Backup TS table • 743, 748
Assigning a backup Transport Stream • 743
Backup Type parameter • 885
Assigning a Service to a Transport Stream • 652
Assigning Access Criteria • 662 Bad Packets parameter • 247
Assigning Access Criteria to Services or Bandwidth Exceeded alarm • 780
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System Fixed
Components • 664
Key scrambling • 860
Assigning Backup Services • 753
BAT • 352, 360, 379, 385, 391, 410
Assigning ECMG interfaces • 602, 605
Assigning EIS interfaces • 636, 637 Begin Debouncing parameter • 791, 792
Assigning EMMG interfaces • 622, 625 BISS mode 1 scrambling • 860
BISS Scrambling • 684
Assigning GPIO contacts • 82
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Default parameter • 900
Assigning PSI/SI generator interface • 640, 641
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Max parameter • 900
Async Sources alarm • 780
Asynchronous Operation • 884 Bit Rate (Mbps) - Min parameter • 900
ATSC EIT Current PID Usage table • 382 Bit Rate (Mbps) - Target parameter • 900
Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter • 709, 710
ATSC EIT Settings table • 382
Bit Rate Budget • 889
ATSC input standard • 185
Bit Rate Budget tab • 889
ATSC Output Standard Mode • 356
Bit rate figures • 831
ATSC-EIT Current PID Usage table • 382
Authentication Methods tab • 996 Bit rate limiting • 465
Auto Negotiation parameter • 95, 101 Bit rate overload protection • 466
Bit rate reduction • 466
Auto Pass All EIT Other pf Tables table • 375
Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR parameter • 889
Auto Pass Rules • 224
Bit Rates - Video Default parameter • 889
Auto Referenced time base selection • 185
Auto time base selection • 185 Bit rates in service overview trees • 832
Auto type • 303 Bit rates overview of components within an
incoming service • 837
Automatic Channel ID Selection parameter •
Bit rates overview of components within
602, 605, 607
outgoing services • 849
Automatic ECM ID Mode • 673
Bit rates overview of components within
Automatic mode • 393
Automatic Start parameter • 671 outgoing Transport Streams • 846
Available Modules box • 910 Bit rates overview of components within
Transport Streams • 842
Available Standalone Snap-ins box • 985
Bit rates overview of incoming services • 836
Available VLAN IDs parameter • 110
Bit rates overview of incoming Transport
Streams • 839
4011746 Rev W 1043

Index
Bit rates overview of outgoing services • 848 Changing Access Criteria properties • 661
Bit rates overview of outgoing Transport Changing advanced Transport Stream settings •
Streams • 844 219, 220
Bit rates overview of services within incoming Changing backup switching parameters • 750
Transport Streams • 841 Changing Conditional Access System properties
Bit rates overview of services within outgoing • 659
Transport Streams • 845 Changing default advanced Transport Stream
Bit rates overview of services within Transrating settings • 221
Groups • 852 Changing default PMT descriptor rule
Bit rates overview of Transrating Groups • 850 parameters • 348
Bit rates overview tables • 835 Changing Default Scrambling Parameters • 596
Bite Rate parameter • 215, 896 Changing default service auto pass rules • 259
Block aligned FEC linearisation • 232 Changing default service loss trigger alarms •
Block CA Info parameter • 428 801
Blocking components • 272 Changing default tracking rules • 309
Blocking service components • 297 Changing default TS loss alarms triggers • 806
Board parameter • 369, 743, 950, 952, 953, 954, Changing DPI settings outgoing services • 433
957, 978 Changing ECMG Descriptor Rules • 618, 619
Board X Trace • 972 Changing ECMG Specific Parameters • 602, 605
Boundary parameter • 100, 885 Changing EIS interface connection parameters •
Bouquet Association Table • 352 638
Bouquet ID parameter • 360 Changing EMMG Descriptor Rules • 632, 633
Broadcast frames counter • 119 Changing EMMG specific parameters • 627
Buffer underrun counter • 119 Changing ES type overrule entries • 336
Bypassing IP security • 79 Changing GbE port backup parameters • 740
Bytes parameter • 344, 345, 348 Changing IPsec connection defaults • 1012
Changing IPsec filter • 78
C Changing login information • 48
CA ID parameter • 303 Changing ORB Trace Level • 974
CA SubsystemID parameter • 602, 605, 657 Changing outgoing service settings • 417
CA system • 577 Changing PSI/SI generation mode • 379
CA System Properties dialog • 659 Changing PSIG interface connection parameters
CA SystemID parameter • 602, 605, 657 • 642
Cable Emergency Alert Message table • 352 Changing PSIP Information • 400
CAM • 578 Changing scrambler properties • 644
Capture Settings table • 978 Changing scrambling parameters • 597
Capturing Live Network Data • 978 Changing scrambling settings outgoing services
Card branch • 135 • 428
Card configuration • 84 Changing SDT settings • 394
Card filter • 458 Changing security account settings • 45
Card name • 84 Changing service backup switching parameters •
Card Not Operational alarm • 786 757
Card parameter • 122, 171, 281, 283, 303, 315, Changing Service Properties • 654
331, 379, 458, 542, 550, 562, 753 Changing service settings • 413
Card representation mode • 169 Changing Session Timeout • 48
Card Settings table • 84, 862 Changing settings of incoming RTP streams •
CAS • 577 700
CAT • 352, 360, 365, 379, 385, 391, 410 Changing settings of incoming SDI streams •
CC error alarm • 780 699
CEAM • 352, 391 Changing settings of outgoing SDI streams • 709
Certificate key • 49 Changing SI Information • 393
1044 4011746 Rev W

Index
Changing the ASI Interface Card Mode • 862 Checking EMM Component parameters • 315
Changing the Output Standard Mode • 356, 357, Checking incoming video signal parameters •
358 698
Changing the Scrambling Mode • 595 Checking individual merged components • 293
Changing the SDI No Stream Mode • 127 Checking merged services • 281
Changing the standard stream settings • 710 Checking output bit rates • 844
Changing the Start PID of the EIT Tables • 406 Checking Private Data component parameter •
Changing the Time Zone • 405 321
Changing Transport Stream Properties • 654 Checking service component settings • 303
Changing transrating board settings • 471 Checking service routing • 415
Changing Transrating Group parameters • 477 Checking Statmux Pool settings • 896
Changing Transrating settings • 488, 493 Checking the input bit rates • 836
Changing transrating specific outgoing service Checking Trace Logs • 975
settings • 430 Checking transrating comparison • 481, 498
Channel Bandwidth parameter • 875 Checking unreferenced components settings •
Channel Closed by CA System alarm • 780 331
Channel ID parameter • 315, 321, 605, 607 Choose Destination Location page • 907
Channel Number parameter • 400 Choose File dialog • 52, 56, 341
Check SCG at Provision Time parameter • 645 Clear PID bit rates • 508
Check Scrambling Control Group at Clear PID Bit Rates (CPBR) parameter • 433,
Provisioning Time Option parameter • 644 514, 517, 521
Checking AD Server IP Address • 535 Clear PID Bit Rates parameter • 433, 526, 529
Checking alarms • 816 Client ID parameter • 315, 321
Checking bit rates in service overview trees • Clock • 65
832 Clock Edge parameter • 873
Checking bit rates overview of components Clock sub page • 65, 66, 68
within an incoming service • 837 Coarse Delay parameter • 470, 471
Checking bit rates overview of components Code Rate parameter • 875
within outgoing services • 849 Cold reboot • 981
Checking bit rates overview of components Collapsing trees • 132
within outgoing Transport Streams • 846 Color (RGB) parameters • 126
Checking bit rates overview of components Color Mode parameter • 126
within Transport Streams • 842 Column FEC Stream IP parameter • 234, 235,
Checking bit rates overview of incoming 243, 245
services • 836 Column IP parameter • 237
Checking bit rates overview of incoming Column Socket Type parameter • 237
Transport Streams • 839 Combined Statistical Multiplexing • 884
Checking bit rates overview of outgoing services Communicating with computers that do not
• 848 support IPsec • 991
Checking bit rates overview of outgoing Communication for Bad Scramblers command •
Transport Streams • 844 678
Checking bit rates overview of services within Communication messages • 667
incoming Transport Streams • 841 Communication parameter • 885
Checking bit rates overview of services within Communication setup • 667
outgoing Transport Streams • 845 Communication started • 667
Checking bit rates overview of services within Communication Status column • 666, 668
Transrating Groups • 852 Communication stopped • 667
Checking bit rates overview of Transrating Communication Timeout Parameters • 678
Groups • 850 Community String parameter • 61
Checking bit rates overview tables • 835 Community strings • 63
Checking Component Merge Rules • 286 Community Strings table • 63
4011746 Rev W 1045

Index
Comparison sub page • 481, 483 Configuring SDI Generators • 126

Component branch • 152 Configuring security • 44
Component description • 303 Configuring service loss alarm triggers • 796
Component Merge Rule - Input PID parameter • Configuring settings of outgoing RTP streams •
286, 556 710
Component Merge Rule - Language parameter • Configuring splice channels • 514, 517, 521,
286, 556 526, 529
Component Merge Rule - Stream Type Configuring the DTF Scrambling Parameters •
parameter • 286, 556 860
Component Merge Rule - Stream Type Value Configuring transport stream loss alarm triggers
parameter • 286, 556 • 802
Component Merge Rule - Tag parameter • 286, Connection with CA System lost alarm • 780
556 Connections table • 602, 605, 607, 608
Component Merge Rule - Type parameter • 286, Constellation parameter • 875
556 Context Sensitive Online Help • 37
Component Merge Rule branch • 161 Control frames counter • 119
Component Merge Rules • 283, 555, 556 Control tab • 671, 672
Component Tag component tracking rule • 297 Control word • 578, 684
Component Tag parameter • 284, 556 Control Word Generator • 578, 579
Component tracking rule • 303 Co-Processor Card
Components sub page • 291, 304, 305, 306, 307, Concept • 32
308, 371, 382 Principle • 34
Components Tracking Rules table • 304, 305, Co-Processor Not Operational alarm • 786
306, 307, 308 Count parameter • 51, 110
Concept • 32 Country Code parameter • 397
Conditional Access Module • 578 CP • 578
Conditional Access System • 577 Creating a New Filter Action • 991
Conditional Access System Information • 657 Creating an SPM resource • 887
Conditional Access Table • 352 Creating an SPTS • 205
Conditional Access vendor • 578 Creating config files • 941
Configuration page • 60, 72, 73, 92, 117, 118 Creating outgoing Transport Streams • 196
Configuration settings • 55, 56 Creating Transrating Groups • 473
Configuration tab • 602, 608, 611, 622, 627, 628, Critical severity level • 789
629, 632, 634, 636, 638, 639, 640, 642, 643, Cryptoperiod • 578, 637
645, 666, 668, 678 Cue insertion device • 512
Configure Output RTP Stream popup dialog • Cue Messages • 511
702 Current Activation parameter • 64
Configure TOT command • 211 Current parameter • 303, 315, 321, 331
Configuring Access Criteria • 647 Custom DPI Mapping Entries • 531
Configuring alarms • 789 Custom PID Mapping parameter • 433, 514, 517,
Configuring Alternate Services • 542 521, 526, 529
Configuring BISS Scrambling • 690 Custom PID Mapping table • 532, 533
Configuring device backup settings • 773 Custom PID Settings table • 291, 293, 295
Configuring device operational failure alarm • Custom PIDs sub page • 291
812 Custom Security Method Settings dialog • 991
Configuring DTF Transport Streams • 863 Custom Settings FEC streams • 237
Configuring GPIO contacts • 82 Custom type • 303
Configuring incoming streams • 699 Customer support • 39
Configuring IPsec on Windows • 984 Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings
Configuring outgoing streams • 709 dialog • 1012
Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams • 209
1046 4011746 Rev W

Index
Customize Data Protection Settings dialog • DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServi

1012 cesOnPortForResourceSet macro • 957
Customized IPsec Settings dialog • 1012 DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServi
CVCT • 352, 365, 385, 391, 400 cesOnTS macro • 957
CVCT Settings table • 401 DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServi
CVCT TS Settings table • 403 cesOnTSForResourceSet macro • 957
CW • 578 DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForResourc
CWG • 578, 579 eSet macro • 957
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceWithFile
D macro • 957
D parameter • 228, 234, 235, 243, 245, 247, 248 DCM.activateMainOrBackupTSWithFile macro
Data ID parameter • 315, 321, 617, 631 • 960
Data integrity and encryption (ESP) parameter • DCM.AddService macro • 949
991 DCM.ASIServiceLossTriggers macro • 953
Data integrity and encryption parameter • 1012 DCM.ASIServiceLossTriggersForResourceSet
Data parameter • 340, 660 macro • 953
Data protection parameter • 1012 DCM.editAndStartSplice macro • 950
DC-II input standard • 185 DCM.editAndStartSpliceForResourceSet macro
DCM • 950
Browsing • 37 DCM.GBEServiceLossTriggers macro • 953
Browsing through a tree • 37 DCM.GBEServiceLossTriggersForResourceSet
DCM Blacklist parameter • 775 macro • 953
DCM Device Driver • 925 DCM.RemoveServices macro • 949
DCM device parameter • 775 DCM.RemoveSIData macro • 947
DCM Inputs tree • 132, 164 DCM.setBackupRevertiveMode macro • 954
Browsing • 37 DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesO
Locating a passed service • 174 nBoard macro • 954
Settings • 164 DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesO
DCM IPs • 996 nBoardForResourceSet marcro • 954
DCM IPsec Filter • 991, 996 DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesO
DCM IPsec Filter Properties dialog • 991 nDevice macro • 954
DCM Macros • 939 DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesO
DCM Outputs tree • 132, 164 nDeviceForResourceSet macro • 954
Browsing • 37 DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesO
Locating a passed service • 175 nPort macro • 954
Settings • 164 DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesO
DCM Policy Properties dialog • 996 nPortForResourceSet macro • 954
DCM.activateAndMonitorMainOrBackupTSWit DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesO
hFile macro • 960 nTS macro • 954
DCM.activateMainOrBackupService macro • DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForAllServicesO
957 nTSForResourceSet macro • 954
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServi DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeForResourceSet
cesOnBoard macro • 957 macro • 954
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServi DCM.setBackupRevertiveModeWithFile macro
cesOnBoardForResourceSet macro • 957 • 954
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServi DCM.startSplice macro • 950
cesOnDevice macro • 957 DCM.startSpliceForResourceSet macro • 950
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServi DCM.stopSplice macro • 952
cesOnDeviceForResourceSet macro • 957 DCM.SwitchStreamingTSWithFile macro • 946
DCM.activateMainOrBackupServiceForAllServi Deactivating the DCM • 64
cesOnPort macro • 957 Default Gateway parameter • 103, 105, 248
4011746 Rev W 1047

Index
Default Input FEC Settings table • 240 Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview
Default mode • 234, 235 table • 835, 846
Default Output FEC Settings table • 248 Detailed TS Status Overview table • 816, 819
Default Output Service Settings table • 446 Device Backup Settings table • 773
Default Response Rule Authentication Method • Device backup using ROSA EM • 763
996 Device clock • 65
Default Scrambling Settings table • 596, 691 Device configuration • 59
Default Service Auto Pass Rules table • 259 Device Host ID parameter • 49, 51
Default Service Backup Settings table • 758, 801 Device is in Service Mode alarm • 786
Default service loss trigger alarms • 801 Device name • 60
Default Settings sub page • 128, 167, 191, 215, Device Name parameter • 649
240, 248, 348, 407, 758 Device Operational Failure alarm • 763, 769,
Default Settings table • 404 786, 812
Default SI table playout • 389 Device Operational Failure Trigger table • 812
Default SI Table Playout table • 389, 407 Device parameter • 950, 952, 953, 954, 957
Default Tracking Rules table • 309 Device related alarms • 786, 791
Default TS Backup Settings table • 750, 806 Device Role parameter • 773
Default TS loss alarms triggers • 806 Device settings • 55
Default values • 191, 215, 240, 348, 388, 407 Device Status Overview table • 829
Default VLAN Settings table • 221 Device time • 65
Defining Access Criteria • 657 Device Trace Settings table • 973
Defining SNMP Trap destinations • 61 Devices parameter • 950, 952, 953, 954, 957
Delay parameter • 68, 423, 425, 709, 710, 892 Digital Program Insertion • 505
Delaying Service Components • 423 Digital Transport Formatter • 860
Delete command • 454, 480, 496 Digital Transport Formatter data packets • 860
Delete core files • 976 Directory Default (Kerberos V5 Protocol)
Deleting alternate services • 549 Activate • 996
Deleting IPsec peers • 77 Disable Mode parameter • 98
Deleting PID Sync Delay Groups • 426 Disabled mode • 234, 235, 237, 240, 243, 245,
Deleting security accounts • 45 247, 248, 393
Deleting static ARP entries • 104 Disabling alarm message reporting • 790
Deleting tracking rules • 308 Disabling login information • 48
Deprovisioning failed message • 668 Display Login screen info text parameter • 47,
Deprovisioning succeeded message • 668 48
Descriptor Rule Properties dialog • 618 Display mode • 128
Descriptor Rules tab • 629, 632 Display Mode table • 128, 167
Destination - IP Address parameter • 900 Do Not Insert rule type • 614, 617
Destination - UDP Port parameter • 900 Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss
Destination IP Unresolved alarm • 780 parameter • 753, 758
Destinations Overview table • 114 Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss
Destinations sub page • 114 parameter • 742, 750
Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview Downloading MIBs • 970
table • 823, 828 Downloading Single Trace Log Files • 976
Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table • 835, Downloading Trace Logs • 976
837, 849 DPI • 505
Detailed Service Status Overview table • 816, DPI Modes parameter • 433, 517, 521, 526, 529
821, 826 DPI Modes table • 433, 517, 521, 526, 529
Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview DPI settings outgoing services • 433
table • 835 DPI Settings table • 517, 521, 532, 533
Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table • 833, 835, DPI Start/Stop table • 536
841, 845 DPI sub page • 514
1048 4011746 Rev W

Index
DPI tab page • 414 EIT • 352, 365, 385

DPI Trace • 972 EIT only for <service> filter • 391
Driver parameter • 965 EIT Present/Following parameter • 394
Drop on SPTS EIT sch TS settings table • 379
desired action parameter • 164, 167 EIT Schedule Flag parameter • 394
Drop TS on GbE Port EIT TS Configuration table • 372, 382
desired action parameter • 164, 202 EIT_FILTERING license • 49, 371
DTF • 860 EIT_FILTERING_ADVANCED license • 49,
DTF data packets • 860 371
DTF license • 49 EITa p/f • 352, 365, 379, 385, 391, 410
DTF Transport Stream • 863 EITa sch • 352, 360, 365, 379, 385, 391, 410
DTF_CONCENTRATOR license • 49, 860 EITa sch after 8 days • 352, 365, 379, 385, 391,
DTF_SCRAMBLING license • 49, 860 410
Dummy EISS and EBIF Component References EITa sch first 8 days • 352, 365, 379, 385, 391,
• 289 410
Duplicated Packets counter • 241 EITo pf • 352, 360, 365, 379, 385, 391, 410
DVB Common Scrambling Algorithm • 577 EITo sch • 352, 360, 365, 379, 385, 391, 410
DVB input standard • 185 Elementary Stream Level Scrambling • 586
DVB Output Standard Mode • 356 Elementary Stream node • 152
DVB Simulcrypt compliant scrambler • 576 Elementary Stream Type • 335
DVB-H MPE FEC parameter • 875 Elementary stream type overrule entries • 336,
DVB-H Timeslicing parameter • 875 337
EMM components • 312
E EMM Generated table • 312, 320
ECM ID Mode • 662, 672 EMM PID display mode • 128
ECM PID component tracking rule • 297 EMM PID Source parameter • 599, 625
ECM PID Lower Limit parameter • 602, 605 EMM PIDs main node • 152
ECM PID Source parameter • 602, 605 EMM Section Grouping parameter • 622, 625
ECM PID Upper Limit parameter • 602, 605 EMM Settings sub page • 317, 318
ECM_ID • 582 EMM Settings table • 315
ECMG Descriptor Rules • 614 EMMG • 581, 622
ECMg Descriptor Rules table • 617, 619, 621 EMMg Descriptor Rule table • 633, 634
ECMG Name parameter • 602, 605 EMMG Descriptor Rules • 629
ECMG Properties dialog • 612, 614, 618, 620 EMMG interfaces • 599, 609
ECMg Proxy Settings Overview table • 605, EMMG Name parameter • 622, 625
607, 608, 609, 610, 613, 617, 619, 621 EMMG Properties dialog • 629, 632, 634
ECMg Settings table • 605, 608, 609 EMMg Proxy Settings Overview table • 625,
ECMG Specific Parameters • 602, 605 627, 628, 631, 633, 634
ECMG Type parameter • 602, 605 EMMG Settings table • 625, 627
ECMGs • 600 EMMG Specific Parameters • 622, 625, 627
ECMs • 578, 579 EMMs • 578, 581
ECMs service passing rules • 258 EMMs table • 315, 318
Edge parameter • 873 Enable ASI Sync Loss parameter • 953
Edit ECMg Descriptor Rule table • 619 Enable Hot Backup feature • 611
Edit EMMg Descriptor Rule table • 633 Enable Hot Backup parameter • 64
EIS • 579, 582 Enable Missing PAT parameter • 953
EIS interface connection parameters • 638 Enable parameter • 82, 88, 90, 98, 125, 126, 375,
EIS interfaces • 599 423
EIS Name parameter • 636, 637 Enable PID Error parameter • 953
EIS Proxy Settings table • 637, 638, 639 Enable PMT Error parameter • 953
EIS Type parameter • 636, 637 Enable UDP Stream Loss parameter • 953
4011746 Rev W 1049

Index
Enabled mode • 393 Exclude Scrambler Configurator Settings

Enabled parameter • 743 parameter • 56
Enabled Triggers parameter • 953 Exclude Settings Backup's Own Settings
Enabling alarm message reporting • 790 parameter • 56
Encapsulate parameter • 863 Exclude Static Routes for Mainboard Settings
Encapsulated Security Payload Header (ESP) • parameter • 56
76 Excluded Encoders table • 885
Encoder Dropout alarm • 780 Executing macros • 965
Encoders table • 900 Expanding trees • 132
Encryption algorithm • 991 Export command • 411
Encryption algorithm parameter • 1012 Export Device Settings to File command • 55
End Debouncing parameter • 791, 792 Export to File command • 410
Enter ID parameter • 614, 629 Exporting configuration settings • 55
Entitlement Control Message Generator Exporting device settings • 55
(ECMG) interfaces • 599 Exporting PSI • 410
Entitlement Control Message Generator Exporting Trace Log Files • 976
interfaces • 599 Extended Coarse Delay mode • 470
Entitlement Control Messages • 578, 579 Extended TR delay • 471
Entitlement Management Message Generator •
581, 600, 622
F
Entitlement Management Message Generator Fan Failure alarm • 786
interfaces • 599 FCS/CRC error counter • 119
Entitlement Management Messages • 578, 581 FEC • 228
Error Intervals (ms) table • 792 FEC 1D mode • 234, 235, 237, 240, 243, 245,
ES ECM PID component tracking rule • 297 247, 248
ES ECMs service passing rules • 258 FEC 2D mode • 234, 235, 237, 240, 243, 245,
ES Output PID parameter • 307 247, 248
ES PID component tracking rule • 300 FEC Card
ES PID parameter • 297 Concept • 32
ES service passing rule • 258 Principle • 34
ES Stream Type Overrule Entries • 336, 337 FEC Error Generation table • 247
ES Type Overrule table • 336, 337 FEC errors • 247
ES Type parameter • 303 FEC L/D Error alarm • 780
ETR290 1st priority alarms • 780 FEC latencies • 232
Event Information Scheduler • 352, 579, 582, FEC license • 49
635 FEC overhead • 232
Event Information Scheduler interfaces • 599 FEC overhead parameter • 234, 235
Event Information Table • 352 FEC packet transportation • 232
Event logging • 677 FEC Profiles • 228
Exception List • 375 FEC requirements • 232
Exclude 1 FEC Scheme limitations • 231
1 Device Backup Settings parameter • 56 FEC Schemes • 231
Exclude All GbE Settings parameter • 56 FEC sending arrangement • 232
Exclude Basic GbE Settings parameter • 56 FEC settings for incoming Transport Streams •
Exclude Device Name and Board Names 234
parameter • 56 FEC Settings table • 235, 243, 245
Exclude EIT (p/f and sch) filter • 391 FEC statistics • 240
Exclude IGMP Settings parameter • 56 FEC Streams parameter • 237, 240, 248
Exclude IPsec Settings parameter • 56 FEC Temperature alarm • 786
Exclude NTP's Drift File parameter • 56 FFT Mode parameter • 875
File Download dialog • 55, 411
1050 4011746 Rev W

Index
File Location parameter • 954, 957, 960 GbE port backup parameters • 740
File Name parameter • 55, 410, 411, 976 GbE port backup scenarios • 738
Filter Action General Options • 991 GbE port configuration • 94
Filter Action Name • 991 GbE port settings • 95
Filter Action tab • 996 GbE Settings table • 98
Filter parameter • 110 GbE statistics • 119, 122
Filtering Card Trace Logs • 973 GbE Statistics sub page • 119, 122
Filtering parameter • 95 GbE UDP Boundary Settings table • 100
Find Active Source command • 174 GbE Unicast input type • 255, 293, 379
Find Destination command • 174, 175 General EIS type • 636, 637
Find Source command • 174 General PSIG type • 640, 641
Finding a service in a tree • 173 Generate Alarms parameter • 792
Finding a Transport Stream in a tree • 173 Generate All EITa sch mode • 379
Fine Delay parameter • 470, 471 Generate EITa sch first 8 days mode • 379
First Input PID parameter • 326 Generate FEC errors • 247
First IP Address parameter • 108 Generate mode • 379
First Output PID parameter • 326 Generate Test Message command • 790
First Source IP Address parameter • 110 Generated EMMs table • 315, 317, 318
First Subnet Mask parameter • 108 Generated Entitlement Management Message
Fixed (Unique within System) ECM ID Mode • Packet Identifier display mode • 128
673 Generating test messages • 790
Fixed (Unique within TS) ECM ID Mode • 673 Global (Counters) table • 119
Fixed Packets counter • 241 Global Alarm Settings parameter • 792
Fixed Video Rate parameter • 889 Global counters • 119
Flash Status dialog • 910 Good Packets parameter • 247
For all Applicable Rows command • 305, 306 GPIO contacts • 80
Force Audio 3 output standard mode • 209 GPIO parameter • 82, 794, 796, 798, 801
Force Uplink output standard mode • 209 GPIO Settings table • 82
Force Video output standard mode • 209 GPS receiver • 870
Forced Name parameter • 417 GPS UTC Offset parameter • 404
Forced PCR time base selection • 185 Guard Interval parameter • 875
Forced SID parameter • 417 Guest security group • 41
Format parameter • 62, 900 GUI Trace • 972
Forward Error Correction • 228 GUI version information • 39
Fragments counter • 119 GW_IP_STREAM license • 49, 694
Frames parameter • 900
Frames Received OK (Counters) table • 119
H
Frames Received OK counters • 119 Hardware configuration • 60
Frames Transmitted OK (Counters) table • 119 Hardware key • 79
Frames Transmitted OK counters • 119 Hardware Key Inserted alarm • 79
Free CA Mode parameter • 394 Heartbeat Network Interface parameter • 773
Heartbeat Protocol Error alarm • 786
G
Heartbeat UDP Port parameter • 773
G • 74, 105 Help page • 37
GbE Interface Card Hesule web server application • 49
Concept • 32 Hidden parameter • 400
Principle • 34 Hide Guide parameter • 400
GbE interface parameters • 101 Hierarchy And Interleaving parameter • 875
GbE Multicast input type • 255, 293, 379 High definition • 49
GbE Name and Network Settings table • 95 Highlight Destination command • 175
GbE port backup • 738 Hot Swap command • 86
4011746 Rev W 1051

Index
Housing Input - Present parameter • 286

Concept • 32 Input (XXX) parameter • 377
Principle • 34 Input bit rates • 836
Input bit rates tables • 835
I Input Board Type Delay parameter • 470, 471
I/O parameter • 82 Input Card parameter • 69, 224, 255, 280, 284,
I/O Settings table • 88, 90, 91 291, 293, 326
IBoard parameter • 949 Input -Card parameter • 286
ICard parameter • 944 Input -Card parameter • 369
ICardNr parameter • 946 Input -Card parameter • 372
ICIM Policy Properties dialog • 996 Input -Card parameter • 415
ID for <servicename> dialog • 220, 652 Input Component Selection popup dialog • 556
ID parameter • 209, 215, 219, 221, 896 Input EMM table • 312, 320
IDCM_ID parameter • 947, 949 Input filter • 458
IDCM_ResId parameter • 945, 947 Input IP Address parameter • 69, 224, 255, 280,
Identify device by parameter • 932 284, 291, 293, 326, 743
Identify Me utility • 58 Input -IP Address parameter • 286
IGMP Multicast Groups • 110 Input -IP Address parameter • 369
IGMP Settings table • 110, 113 Input -IP Address parameter • 372
IGMP sub page • 110, 113 Input -IP Address parameter • 415
IInIPAddress parameter • 949 Input Multiplexing table • 863
IInONID parameter • 949 Input -Name parameter • 286, 415
IInputBoard parameter • 949 Input -ON ID parameter • 286, 415
IInputPort parameter • 949 Input parameter • 206, 277, 312, 377, 394, 476
IInSID parameter • 949 Input PID Insertion Channel parameter • 533
IInTSID parameter • 949 Input PID Main parameter • 532, 533
IIOP Protocol Driver • 925, 932 Input PID parameter • 284, 291, 293, 307, 326,
Image legend • 38 556
Impedance parameter • 873 Input port configuration • 88
Import Data From File parameter • 341 Input Port parameter • 69, 224, 255, 280, 284,
Import Device Settings from File parameter • 56 291, 293, 326, 863
Importing configuration settings • 56 Input -Port parameter • 286
Importing device settings • 55 Input -Port parameter • 369
Importing PMT descriptors • 341 Input -Port parameter • 372
Importing PSI • 410 Input -Port parameter • 415
Importing SI Data • 945 Input Rate Limit (Mbps) parameter • 87, 88
Include Core Files parameter • 976 Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview
Incoming Service Bit Rate diagram • 481, 498 table • 822
Incoming services Input RTP Stream Settings table • 697, 700
Modifying Settings • 181 Input SDI Stream Settings table • 699
Representation mode • 169, 172 Input Selection popup • 433, 517, 521
Increment Scheme parameter • 215 Input Selection popup parameter • 433
Indeterminate severity level • 789 Input Service Status Overview table • 816, 820
Index parameter • 865 Input Services table • 206, 253, 277, 279, 476,
Information severity level • 789 491
Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table • 345, Input SID parameter • 255, 280, 284
347, 348 Input -SID parameter • 286
Inner Loop Descriptor Removal Rules table • Input -SID parameter • 415
344, 347, 348 Input Standard parameter • 185, 188, 189, 190,
In-point • 508 191
Input - PID parameter • 369, 372 Input Streams parameters • 705
1052 4011746 Rev W

Index
Input -TS ID parameter • 286, 415 Interface parameters • 94, 101

Input TS Status Overview table • 816, 818 Interface sub page • 84, 88, 90, 91, 95, 98, 100,
Input TS table • 261 117, 118, 471, 862, 889
Input Type parameter • 69, 224, 255, 280, 284, Internal PSIP Generator • 365
291, 293, 326, 369, 372 Internet Key Exchange (IKE) • 76
Input UDP Port parameter • 69, 224, 258, 280, Interval parameter • 386, 388, 389
284, 291, 293, 326, 743 Invalid Opcode counter • 119
Input -UDP Port parameter • 286 IONID parameter • 945, 946, 947, 949
Input -UDP Port parameter • 369 IOutONID parameter • 949
Input -UDP Port parameter • 372 IOutputBoard parameter • 949
Input -UDP Port parameter • 415 IOutputPort parameter • 949
InsBoardID parameter • 950 IOutSID parameter • 949
Insert IP Address Range parameter • 110 IOutTSID parameter • 949
Insert parameter • 614, 617 IOutUDPPort parameter • 949
Insert PID Range parameter • 326 IP Address dialog • 607, 1005
Insert Range command • 110, 326 IP Address increment scheme • 215
Insertion channel • 508 IP Address parameter • 61, 68, 72, 74, 76, 95,
Insertion Channel - Card parameter • 433, 514, 101, 103, 105, 114, 117, 171, 190, 200, 209,
517, 521, 526 281, 283, 303, 315, 331, 379, 458, 542, 550,
Insertion Channel - Info parameter • 514, 517 562, 602, 605, 702, 753, 910, 954, 957
Insertion Channel - License parameter • 514 IP Address Range parameter • 910
Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address IP Alias 10/100 Port table • 73
parameter • 433, 514, 517, 521, 526 IP Alias GbE Port table • 73
Insertion Channel - PID parameter • 514 IP Alias Port parameter • 117
Insertion Channel - Port parameter • 433, 514, IP Alias table • 72, 117
521, 526 IP Aliasing mode • 71, 72, 116, 117
Insertion Channel - SID parameter • 433, 514, IP Aliassing • 71, 116
517, 521, 526 IP Filter Description and Mirrored property •
Insertion Channel - Status parameter • 514 991
Insertion Channel - Type parameter • 433, 514, IP Filter List tab • 996
517, 521, 526 IP Filter Properties dialog • 991
Insertion Channel - UDP Port parameter • 433, IP Gateway License Error alarm • 780
514, 517, 521, 526 IP Gateway Monitor Ports table • 705
Insertion Channel Active alarm • 780 IP Gateway Routing table • 705
Insertion to Primary Channel substitution • 508 IP Only filtering • 95
InsIPAddress parameter • 950 IP parameter • 237, 369, 696
Installed Drivers dialog • 926, 930 IP security
Installed parameter • 51 Bypassing • 79
Installing license file • 52 Introduction • 75
Installing ROSA Drivers • 925 IPsec packets • 76
Installing the DCM Macros • 940 Key Exchange • 76
Installing the Upgrade-It software package • 907 IP Security Policies on Local Computer • 985
InstallShield Wizard dialog • 907 IP Security Policies on Local Computer
InsUDPPort parameter • 950 parameter • 985
Integrating into ROSA • 923 IP Security Policy Management • 985
Integrity algorithm • 991 IP Security Policy Name • 996
Integrity algorithm parameter • 1012 IP Statmux Configuration • 885
Integrity and Encryption Algorithms dialog • IP Statmux Controller • 880, 882
1012 IP Statmux Controller Setting • 885
Interface C • 84 IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA EM •
Interface Card related alarms • 780 775
4011746 Rev W 1053

Index
IP Traffic Security. • 991 Leaving GbE ports to IGMP Multicast groups •

IP Video Gateway • 693 110, 113
IP Video Gateway Card LEDS • 58
Concept • 32 Legend • 38
Introduction • 30 Legend sub page • 38
Principle • 34 Length/Type out of range counter • 119
IP-Based Statistical Multiplexing • 882 Leverage Bit Rate command • 889
IPID parameter • 945, 947 License file • 49, 52
IPort parameter • 944, 949 License overview • 51
IPortNr parameter • 946 License Overview table • 51
IPsec packets • 76 Licenses • 576
IPsec parameter • 73, 78 Licenses sub page • 51, 52
IPsec peers Licensing • 49
Adding • 76 Link Loss alarm • 780
Deleting • 76 Link Loss and UDP Loss trigger alarm • 738
IPsec Settings tab • 1012 Link Loss trigger alarm • 738
IPsec Settings table • 76, 77, 78 Load Balancing • 601
Irdeto M_Crypt ECMG type • 602, 605 Load Components parameter • 649
ISID parameter • 944 Load Model from Devices dialog • 649
IStreamingOn parameter • 946 Locating a passed service in a tree • 174, 175
ITableID parameter • 947 Log On As dialog • 970
ITableIDExt parameter • 947 Log tab • 677
ITableONID parameter • 947 Logging off • 42
ITableTSID parameter • 947 Logging on • 42
ITSID parameter • 945, 946, 947, 949 Login information
IUDPPort parameter • 944, 946, 949 Adding • 47
Changing • 48
J Disabling • 48
Jitter parameter • 68 Introduction • 47
Jitter Tolerance parameter • 696, 700 Login page • 42
Join or Modify Multicast Group table • 110 Logout • 42
Joining GbE ports to IGMP Multicast groups • Long Name parameter • 400
110 Low Memory alarm • 786
Joint command • 110
M
K MAC & IP filtering • 95
Key Exchange • 76 MAC Address parameter • 101, 103
Key exchange algorithm parameter • 1012 MAC Only filtering • 95
Key exchange parameter • 1012 Macro Component • 925
Key lifetime parameter • 1012 Macro Detail dialog • 965
Key parameter • 51, 863, 1005 Macros • 939
Macros tab • 965
L Main - Backup Delay parameter • 743, 753
L parameter • 228, 234, 235, 243, 245, 247, 248 Main On parameter • 957, 960
Language parameter • 284, 303, 307, 556, 653 Main Service branch • 159
Last Input PID parameter • 326 Main Service Source table • 753
Last Poll parameter • 68 Main to Backup Delay parameter • 773
Latency parameter • 234, 235 Mainboard Trace • 972
Launching MMC • 984 Maintenance sub page • 58, 978, 981
lDCM_ID parameter • 949 Major severity level • 789
Major Severity parameter • 791, 792
1054 4011746 Rev W

Index
Make Task dialog • 930 Modifying incoming Transport Stream settings •

Making task instances • 930 185
Manage Filter Actions tab • 991 Modifying PMT descriptors • 339
Management - Port parameter • 900 Modifying the GPS UTC Offset • 404
Map Name parameter • 888 Modifying the STT • 404
Map Resources tab • 932 Modifying the TVCT or CVCT • 400
Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS • 932 Modifying tracking rules • 307
Master Guide Table • 352 Modulation Mode parameter • 400
Matching behavior component tracking rule • Modules parameter • 973
297 Monitor parameters • 705
Max Bit Rate parameter • 430, 469, 477, 493 Monitor port • 704
Max. - Video Rate parameter • 892 Monitored Stream parameters • 705
Max. Bandwidth parameter • 622, 625, 640, 641 MPEG2 Output Standard Mode • 356
Maximum Delay (µs) parameter • 875 MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group •
Maximum Delay parameter • 871 468, 473
MD5 • 991 MPTS transrating • 468
Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor mode MTR • 860
parameter • 185, 188, 189, 190, 191 Multi Transport Receiver • 860
Mega-frame initialization packet • 870 Multicast column socket type • 237
Menu appearance parameter • 164, 167 Multicast frames counter • 119
Mered Services and Components table • 286, Multicast IP Address assignment • 199
288 Multicast IP Address parameter • 110
Merged Components branch • 160 Multicast row socket type • 237
Merged Service branch • 159 Multicast socket type • 190, 237
Merged Service Source table • 753 Multicast type • 234
Merged Services table • 281, 283 Multiplexing • 179
Merging an incoming service • 277, 549, 550 Multi-TS Transrating Groups • 487
Merging components • 277, 554, 555, 556 Muxing sub page • 206, 253, 312, 377, 476, 491
Merging individual components • 291 mystro-videoport MIB • 62
Merging particular components • 283
Merging unreferenced components • 290, 291,
N
292 Nagra NagraVision ECMG type • 602, 605
MGT • 352, 365, 385, 391 Name parameter • 60, 82, 84, 88, 90, 92, 95, 101,
Min - Video Rate parameter • 892 125, 171, 281, 293, 303, 340, 394, 458, 473,
Min Bit Rate parameter • 430, 469, 477, 493 477, 487, 488, 614, 617, 629, 631, 657, 660,
Minor severity level • 789 702, 887, 889, 896, 900, 932, 950, 952, 1005
MIP • 870 Network ID parameter • 360
MIP_INSERTION license • 49 Network PID insertion • 393
Mirror of Port parameter • 90, 91 Network Settings table • 78
Mirror port configuration • 91 New Authentication Method Properties dialog •
Mirroring parameter • 98 996
Missing FEC Stream(s) alarm • 780 New Connection Security Rule Wizard -
Missing in PAT - service loss alarm trigger • 794 Authentication Method dialog • 1005
Missing Packets counter • 241 New Connection Security Rule Wizard -
Mixed Output Standard Mode • 356 Endpoints dialog • 1005
MMC main screen • 984 New Connection Security Rule Wizard - name
Mode parameter • 64, 72, 122, 126, 234, 235, dialog • 1005
237, 240, 243, 245, 247, 248, 363, 369, 379, New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Profile
382, 393, 798, 804, 805, 812 dialog • 1005
Modifying incoming service settings • 182 New Connection Security Rule Wizard -
Requirements dialog • 1005
4011746 Rev W 1055

Index
New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Rule Online product info • 39

Type dialog • 1005 Opening the Upgrade-It tool • 910
New ECMg Descriptor Rule table • 617 Operational Temperature alarm • 786
New EMMg Descriptor Rule table • 631 Options popup • 433
New ES Type parameter • 336 Options popup dialog • 433, 517, 521
New parameter • 307, 315, 317, 321, 323, 331 ORB Timings • 972
New Resource dialog • 932 ORB Trace • 972
New Rule Properties dialog • 996 ORB Trace Level parameter • 974
New/Link Map dialog • 888 Ordering PMT descriptors • 345
NIT • 360, 385, 391, 410 Original Network Identifier display mode • 128
NIT in PAT table • 393 Other alarms • 780
NITa • 360, 379, 385, 391, 410 Out of Band parameter • 400
NITo • 360, 379, 385, 391, 410 Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules table • 345,
No Components to Scramble 347, 348
CP Extension alarm • 780 Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules table •
No DTF Concentrator License Available alarm • 344, 347, 348
780 Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram • 481, 498
No DTF Scrambling License Available alarm • Outgoing service settings • 417
780 Out-point • 508
No ECMG Connection Available alarm • 780 Output - Mode parameter • 369
No ECM's available Output - Name parameter • 415
CP Extension alarm • 780 Output - PID parameter • 375
No EMM resources available alarm • 780 Output - SID parameter • 415
No FEC License Available (Decoding) alarm • Output bit rates • 844
780 Output bit rates table • 835
No FEC License Available (Encoding) alarm • Output channel • 508
780 Output Channel - Add Unspliced Insertion PIDs
No scramblers • 667 parameter • 514
No scramblers message • 668 Output Channel - Clear PID Bit Rates parameter
Non block aligned FEC arrangement • 232 • 514
NTP client • 512 Output Channel - Custom PID Mapping
NTP Clock Offset alarm • 786 parameter • 514
NTP server • 66, 512 Output Channel - DPI Modes table parameter •
NTP Server Configuration parameter • 66 514
NTP Server IP Address parameter • 66 Output Channel - Mode parameter • 433
NTP Servers table • 66 Output Channel - Name parameter • 433, 514,
NTP Statistics • 68 521, 526
NTP Statistics command • 68 Output Channel - PIN Mapping - Splice Delay
NTP Statistics sub page • 68 parameter • 514
NTP Statistics table • 68 Output Channel - PIN Mapping - To Insertion
Number Format parameter • 648, 672 parameter • 514
Number parameter • 92, 101 Output Channel - PIN Mapping - To Main
NumberFormat parameter • 648, 672 parameter • 514
Output Channel - PMT Mode parameter • 433,
O 514
Obtaining license files • 49 Output Channel Options table • 526, 529
Offset parameter • 68 Output ES Type parameter • 289, 291, 293
ON ID display mode • 128 Output filter • 458
ON ID parameter • 128, 171, 209, 281, 293, 303, Output GbE Ports table • 206
315, 331, 360, 375, 458, 649, 651, 653 Output Mode parameter • 90, 92
Online Help link • 37 Output parameter • 206, 277, 394, 476
1056 4011746 Rev W

Index
Output PID parameter • 326, 330, 331, 863 Pass ES ECMs parameter • 258, 259
Output port configuration • 90 Pass ESs parameter • 258, 259
Output Protocol parameter • 200, 209, 215 Pass Services rule • 196, 224
Output Rate parameter • 200, 209 Pass Through rate control • 477, 493
Output RAW Video Streams Status Overview Pass Through transrating mode • 469
table • 827 Pass Unreferenced PIDs rule • 196, 224
Output SDI Stream Settings table • 709 Passing all services • 260
Output Service Branch • 157 Passing components • 272
Output Service Status Overview table • 816, 825 Passing EMM components • 312
Output Services table • 277, 279 Passing individual components • 274
Output SID parameter • 291, 293 Passing individual services • 252
Output Standard parameter • 200, 209, 215 Passing Private Data components • 320
Output Standard tab • 357 Passing rules • 258
Output Streaming parameter • 64, 98 Passing service components • 297
Output Streams parameters • 705 Passing Sub Table Information • 371, 372, 374,
Output Transport Stream table • 261 377
Output Transport Streams table • 253, 312, 320, Passing Through All EIT other p/f Tables • 375
377 Passing Transport Streams to a port • 202
Output Transrating Groups table • 476, 491 Passing unreferenced components • 326
Overload Protection • 464 Password parameter • 41, 42, 44, 970
Overrule AC Stop Delay parameter • 611 PAT • 352, 360, 365, 379, 385, 391, 410
Overrule Max. Comp. Time parameter • 611 PAT Error alarm • 780
Overrule Max. Number of Streams parameter • PAT Error parameter • 792
611 Path Select parameter • 400
Overrule Min. CP Duration parameter • 611 Pause frames counter • 119
Overrule Recommended CP Duration parameter PCR component tracking rule • 297
• 636, 637 PCR Continuity parameter • 470, 471
Overrule Repetition Period parameter • 611 PD PID display mode • 128
Overrule Start Delay parameter • 611 PDG • 585
Overrule Stop Delay parameter • 611 Peer IP Address parameter • 773
Overrule Transition Start Delay parameter • 611 Performing a Manual Communication
Overrule Transition Stop Delay parameter • 611 Restoration • 678
Overruling ECMG Channel Status Message Performing a manual device restore action • 767
Parameter Values • 612, 613 Performing a Manual Transport Stream Backup
Overruling Elementary Stream Type • 335 Transition • 748
Overruling the Scrambling Control Performing Program Switching • 571
Configuration • 679 PID display mode • 128
Oversized frames counter • 119 PID error - service loss alarm trigger • 794
Overwrite the Database Model parameter • 649 PID Error (Audio/Video) parameter • 792
PID Error (Data) parameter • 792
P PID Error alarm • 780
P • 78 PID Error parameter • 796, 798
Package version information • 39 PID List parameter • 423, 425, 794
Packet Format parameter • 88, 90, 92 PID Multiplexing table • 326
Packet Identifier display mode • 128 PID parameter • 128, 303, 307, 315, 331, 336,
Packet Reordering mode • 234, 235, 237, 240 340, 369, 379, 391, 652
Packets Out of Range counter • 241 PID Sync Delay feature • 423
Parameter Detail dialog • 965 PID Sync Delay table • 423, 425, 426
Parity parameter • 595, 865 PID Type parameter • 794, 796, 798
Pass ECMs parameter • 258, 259 PIN Mapping - Splice Delay parameter • 514
Pass EMMs rules • 196, 224 PIN Mapping - To Insertion parameter • 514
4011746 Rev W 1057

Index
PIN Mapping - To Main parameter • 514 Primary Channel - SID parameter • 433, 514
PIN Mapping table • 433, 517, 526, 529 Primary Channel parameter • 433
Pin parameter • 82 Primary to Insertion Channel substitution • 508
Please, reboot server (via ROSA)! message box • Principle • 34
926 Priority parameter • 209, 215, 219, 220, 221,
PMT • 352, 360, 365, 379, 385, 391, 410 430, 469, 477, 493, 602, 605, 607, 892, 900
PMT Descriptor Rules • 215 Private Data components • 320
PMT descriptors • 339 Private Data Generator • 585
PMT error - service loss alarm trigger • 794 Private Data Packet Identifier display mode •
PMT Error alarm • 780 128
PMT Error parameter • 792 Private data parameter • 614, 617, 629, 631
PMT Mode parameter • 433, 514, 517, 521, 526, Private Data PIDs table • 321, 323, 324
529 Private Data table • 312, 320
PMT section exceeds 1K alarm • 780 Product information • 39
PMT Settings table • 340, 343 Pro-FEC Code of Practice (COP) #3 release 2 •
PMT sub page • 339, 340, 341, 343, 344, 347 228
Poll Int parameter • 68 Program Association Table • 352
Pool Bit Rate parameter • 889 Program Map Table • 352
Pool ID parameter • 892 Program Specific Information • 352
Popup window with Transport Stream bit rates • Program Switching • 539
833 Program System Information Protocol • 352
Popup windows • 39 Properties dialog • 608
Port backup • 738 Properties tab • 767
Port backup scenarios • 738 Protocol parameter • 1012
Port Bandwidth Exceeded alarm • 780 Providing PSI/SI/PSIP • 365
Port branch • 136 Provisioning failed message • 668
Port Mirroring • 87 Provisioning succeeded message • 668
Port numbering • 87, 94 Proxy Name parameter • 315, 321
Port Pair parameter • 108, 110 PS 1 Failure alarm • 786
Port pair settings • 98 PS 2 Failure alarm • 786
Port pairs • 94, 98 PSI • 352
Port parameter • 103, 114, 117, 171, 281, 283, PSI SI generator interfaces • 599, 641
303, 315, 331, 369, 379, 458, 542, 550, 562, PSI/SI generation mode • 379
602, 605, 607, 743, 753, 953, 954, 957 PSI/SI Generator • 584, 640
Port representation mode • 169, 170 PSI/SI generator interfaces • 640
Power Up Activation parameter • 64 PSI/SI information • 351
Power Up alarm • 786 PSI/SI output mode • 379
Pre Shared key parameter • 76, 1005 PSI/SI table playout rate • 385
Preconfigured Transport Streams • 190, 237 PSI/SI/PSIP Generation Mode • 365
Preconfiguring service loss alarm triggers • 798 PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode • 356
Preconfiguring Services PSI/SI/PSIP Overview table • 833
Adding • 255 PSIG • 584
Introduction • 255 PSIG Information from other sources • 365
Removing • 257 PSIG interface connection parameters • 642
Preconfiguring TS loss triggers • 804, 805 PSIG interfaces • 599
Predefined Coarse Delay mode • 470 PSIG Name parameter • 640, 641
Present parameter • 281, 293 PSIG Proxy Settings table • 641, 642, 643
Primary channel • 508 PSIG Type parameter • 640, 641
Primary Channel - Enable parameter • 514, 517 PSIP • 352
Primary Channel - Name parameter • 433, 514, PSIP-EIT Start PID parameter • 406
517 PSU
1058 4011746 Rev W

Index
Concept • 32 Removing ECMG connection entries • 608

Principle • 34 Removing ECMG Descriptor Rules • 620, 621
Removing ECMG Interfaces • 609, 610
Q Removing EIS interfaces • 639
Quality Controlled Statistical Multiplexing • 883 Removing EMM components • 318
Quality Limit parameter • 892 Removing EMMG Descriptor Rules • 634
Removing EMMG Interfaces • 628
R Removing ES type overrule entries • 337
Range parameter • 382 Removing individual services • 450
Rate Control parameter • 430, 477, 493 Removing merged services • 283, 554
Rate Limited rate control • 477, 493 Removing multiple services • 451
Rate Limited transrating mode • 469 Removing multiple Transport Streams • 455
Rate Limiting • 464 Removing outgoing services • 449
Rate parameter • 209 Removing PMT descriptors • 343, 344
Ratings Region Table • 352 Removing PMT rules • 347
Reach parameter • 68 Removing preconfigured services • 257
Read Community parameter • 63 Removing preconfiguring service loss alarm
Read community string • 63 triggers • 800
Re-apply the Database Model at Startup Removing Private Data components • 324
parameter • 679 Removing PSI/SI • 947
Reboot after Upgrade function • 910 Removing PSIG Interfaces • 642, 643
Reboot table • 82 Removing RTP stream entries • 697
Rebooting • 82, 980 Removing Service Component Tracking Rules •
Received Channel Error Message alarm • 780 944
Reception Errors (Counters) table • 119 Removing Services from a Transport Stream •
Reception Errors counters • 119 656
Re-Compressing of Services • 464 Removing Services from the Services List • 655
Re-Compressing of Transport Streams • 464 Removing single Transport Stream • 454
Ref ID parameter • 68 Removing static route entries • 75, 104
Ref Type parameter • 68 Removing Time Offset descriptors • 397
Reference clock settings • 873 Removing Transport Streams • 454, 655
Reference Clock Settings table • 873 Removing Transrating Groups • 480, 496
Refresh parameter • 122 Removing unreferenced components • 333
Region ID parameter • 397 Removing VLAN port pairs • 109
Reload command button • 38 Reordered Packets • 241
Remapping components • 272 Representation mode incoming services • 169,
Remapping EMM components • 317 172
Remapping Private Data components • 323 Requested PID could not be allocated alarm •
Remapping PSI/SI/PSIP tables • 391 780
Remapping service components • 297 Requests for Secure Communication • 996
Remapping unreferenced components • 326, 330 Required authentication for inbound and
Removal Warning in Tree parameter • 164, 167 outbound connections parameter • 1005
Remove all Services command • 452 Reserved Bit Rate parameter • 889
Remove from Output command • 450 Reset Scrambling command • 679
Removing Access Criteria information • 660 Restarting • 980
Removing Assignments • 664 Restarting bit rate measurement • 855
Removing backup services • 564 Restore Mode parameter • 767
Removing Component Merge Rules • 288, 560, Restore Script parameter • 767, 775
561 Restoring Communication • 678
Removing Components from a Service • 656 Retry Count parameter • 932
Removing Conditional Access System • 658 Revert Delay (s) parameter • 738
4011746 Rev W 1059

Index
Revertive Mode Enabled parameter • 954 Scrambling license • 49, 576

Revertive Mode ON parameter • 954 Scrambling not started alarm • 780
Revertive parameter • 738, 743, 753 Scrambling parameter • 428, 597, 685
RFC1157 • 61 Scrambling settings outgoing services • 428
ROSA Element Manager • 764, 775 Scrambling Settings table • 595, 685, 690, 860,
ROSA NMS • 924 863
Routes sub page • 74, 75, 105, 106 Scrambling tab page • 414, 428, 597
Routes to Destinations • 114 Scrambling-Specific Parameters • 599
Routing parameter • 114 Script parameter • 767
Routing streams to the output • 702 SCS • 578, 579
Routing tab • 255, 257, 415, 451 SCS Configurator • 576, 599, 925
Routing tab page • 255, 257, 414, 415, 451 SCS Configurator dialog • 602, 608, 609, 611,
Row FEC Stream IP parameter • 234, 235, 237, 614, 618, 620, 622, 627, 628, 629, 632, 634,
243, 245 636, 638, 639, 640, 642, 643, 645
Row Socket Type parameter • 237 SCS Settings table • 645
RRT • 352, 365, 385, 391 SCTE 30 • 433, 511
RTP output protocol • 209 SCTE 35 • 433, 512
RTP stream entries • 696, 697 SCTE-30/35 mode • 433
Running Status parameter • 394 SCTE-35 Only (Custom) mode • 433
Running Status Table • 352 SCTE-35 Only mode • 433
SD/HD Mismatch alarm • 780
S SD/HD parameter • 417
SA Specific EIS type • 636, 637 SDI branch • 143
SA Specific PSIG type • 640, 641 SDI Generator Settings table • 126
SA_Europe_DCM_SMI2.mib • 87, 224, 243, SDI Generators • 126
245, 433 SDI Input Loss alarm • 780
Same IP and UDP + 2, UDP + 4 FEC streams • SDI No Stream Mode parameter • 127
237, 240, 248 SDI Port Configuration • 124
Same UDP and IP + 1, IP + 2 FEC streams • SDI Port Settings table • 125
237, 240, 248 SDT • 352, 360, 365, 379, 385, 391, 394, 410
Save As dialog • 55, 410, 411 SDT parameter • 394
Save command • 410 SDT Settings table • 396
SCG • 582 SDTa • 360, 365, 379, 385, 391, 394, 410
SCG Accept Delay parameter • 645 SDTo • 360, 365, 379, 385, 391, 394, 410
SCG provisioning message • 582 Search command • 173
Scramble only Audio/Video parameter • 644, Search Next command • 173
645 Searching a service in a tree • 173
Scramble parameter • 863 Searching a Transport Stream in a tree • 173
Scrambler Properties • 644 Second IP Address parameter • 108
Scrambler Properties dialog • 645 Second Subnet Mask parameter • 108
Scramblers corresponding with ON ID=X Security • 41
TS ID=Y dialog • 673 Configuring • 44
Scrambling • 573, 578 Security accounts • 41, 44, 45
Scrambling Control • 666 Security Accounts table • 44, 45
Scrambling Control Group • 582 Security Group parameter • 44, 45
Scrambling Control Group Accept Delay Security groups • 41
parameter • 644 Security Log • 972
Scrambling Control Group provisioning message Security Method dialog • 1012
• 582 Security methods parameter • 1012
Scrambling Control Task • 576, 666, 925 Security page • 44, 45
Scrambling levels • 586 Select Component Merge Rule parameter • 284
1060 4011746 Rev W

Index
Select Computer or Domain dialog • 985 Services table • 481, 498

Selected Units list • 965 Services to Access Criteria list • 664
Selective Services type Transrating Group • 468, Services Trees • 132
473 Session key perfect forward secrecy parameter •
Sending Arrangement parameter • 243, 245, 248 991
Sending Arrangements • 232 Session parameters • 48
Service Auto Pass Rules table • 224, 258 Session Timeout • 48
Service auto passing rules Session Word • 684
Changing defaults • 259 Session Word Distribution File • 860, 865
Introduction • 258 Session Word parameter • 595
Switching on or off • 258 Setting the Communication Timeout parameters
Service backup • 751 • 678
Service Backup Settings table • 753 Setting up Bit Rate Budget • 889
Service Bit Rates Overview table • 835, 836, 848 Setting up IP statmux • 886
Service branch • 147 Setting up maps • 888
Service Components Settings table • 303, 304, Setting up Statistical Multiplexing Parameters •
305, 306, 307, 423 892
Service definition • 49 Setting up the IPsec connection • 1005
Service Description Table • 352 Setting up the Transport Stream Model • 648
Service grooming • 457 Setting Up the TS Model Manually • 651
Service Grooming table • 461 Settings menu • 648, 673, 678
Service ID parameter • 652, 953, 954, 957 Settings sub page • 796
Service Identifier display mode • 128 Settings tab page • 414, 417
Service in Backup (Service Loss) alarm • 780 Settings table • 127
Service in Backup (TS Loss) alarm • 780 Severity level • 789
Service information • 352 SFN • 870
Service Level Scrambling • 586 SFN adaptation settings • 875
Service loss - Transport Stream loss alarm SFN Adaptation Settings table • 875
trigger • 802 SFN Mode parameter • 875
Service Loss alarm • 780 SFN No valid GPS clock reference present alarm
Service loss alarm triggers • 794 • 780
Service Loss at Output alarm • 780 Short Name parameter • 400
Service Loss Trigger Mode parameter • 801 Short-cut menu • 37
Service Loss Trigger Options parameters • 801 Show All filter • 391
Service Name parameter • 652, 654 Shutdown card for hot swap setting • 86
Service parameter • 360, 401 Shutting Down the IP Video Gateway Card • 86
Service passing rules • 258 SI • 352
Service Properties dialog • 654 SI Components tab • 356, 369, 371, 372, 382,
Service Provider Name parameter • 394 391, 401
Service Provider parameter • 652, 654 SI Distributor • 925
Service re-multiplexing • 251 SI Output Standard table • 357, 358
Service representation mode • 169, 171 SI Table In Tree table • 360
Service Routings table • 415, 451 SI Table Playout parameter • 215, 386
Service settings • 413 SI Table Settings table • 363, 369, 371, 379, 391,
Service Settings table • 182, 183, 417, 445, 451, 393, 401, 411
757, 796, 800 SI Table sub page • 363, 379, 386, 391, 411
Service sub page • 182, 255, 451, 597, 798, 800 SI Tree • 360
Service Type parameter • 394, 400 SI View sub page • 360, 410
Service View sub page • 132 SID • 753, 900
Services list • 652 SID display mode • 128
Services sub page • 183 SID Ext parameter • 371, 372
4011746 Rev W 1061

Index
SID List parameter • 371, 374, 375 Standard Coarse Delay mode • 470
SID parameter • 128, 171, 188, 189, 190, 281, Standard definition • 49
293, 303, 307, 458, 550, 562, 798 Standard ECMG type • 602, 605
Simulcrypt Scrambling • 588 Standard EIS Properties dialog • 638
Simulcrypt Synchronizer • 578, 579 Standard PSIG Properties dialog • 640, 642
Single Frequency Network • 870 standard TR delay • 471
Single Frequency Networks • 869 Start Delay • 589
Slice Level (mV) parameter • 873 Start IP Address parameter • 215
Slot Details box • 910 Start Streaming All Streams command • 707
SNMP • 61 Start Streaming all TSs command • 441
SNMP sub page • 61, 62, 63 Start UDP Port parameter • 215
SNMP Trace • 972 Starting or Stopping Streaming • 946
SNMP Trap Destination Setting table • 61, 63 Starting scrambling • 668, 674, 685
SNMP Trap destinations • 61, 63 Starting streaming • 439
SNMP Trap format • 62 Starting the Scrambling Control Task • 671
SNMP Trap table • 62 Stat Muxed rate control • 477, 493
Socket Type parameter • 190, 237, 696, 743 Stat Muxed transrating mode • 469
Software upgrade • 905 State parameter • 92, 101, 748
Sort GbE TS in Tree by parameter • 164, 167 Static ARP Settings table • 103, 104
Sort Services in Tree by parameter • 164, 167 Static ARP table entries • 102
Source - IP Address parameter • 900 Static route entries
Source for Program Switching branch • 158 Adding • 74
Source for Splicing branch • 162 Introduction • 73
Source ID parameter • 400 Removing • 75
Source IP Address parameter • 110 Static Route Settings table • 74, 75, 105, 106
Source IP parameter • 218, 219, 220, 221 Static Route table • 105, 106
Source Stream Combining • 860 Static routes • 73
Source TS - Board parameter • 374, 375 Static routes table • 73
Source TS - IP parameter • 374, 375 Statistical Multiplexing • 882
Source TS - PID parameter • 375 Statistical re-multiplexing • 466
Source TS - Port parameter • 374, 375 Statmux mode • 896
Source TS - Type parameter • 374, 375 Statmux parameter • 892
Source TS - UDP parameter • 374, 375 Statmux Pool • 882
Source UDP parameter • 218, 219, 220, 221, 711 Statmux Pool branch • 146
Specifying Incoming RTP Streams • 696 Statmux Pool Manager • 886, 925
Splice channels • 514 Statmux Pool Setting table • 896
Splice Delay parameter • 433, 517, 521, 526, 529 Statmux Pool settings • 896
Splice Insert Cue messages • 512 Statmux Pools branch • 146
Splice Request messages • 511 Statmux Settings of the Encoders • 900
SpliceName parameter • 950 Statmux Settings table • 885
Splicing Channel Mode parameter • 950, 952 Statmux tab • 892
Splicing Event Duration • 511 Status parameter • 863
Splicing license • 49 Steps to take
SPM • 886 Device backup using ROSA EM • 766
SPM resource • 887 IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA EM
SPM Resource in ROSA • 889 • 775
SPTS Transrating • 484 Scrambling • 592
SST • 352 Standalone device backup • 770
Standalone Device Backup • 769 Stop All EITa sch mode • 379
Standalone tab • 985 Stop delay • 589
Stand-Alone VBR parameter • 889 Stop Streaming All Streams command • 707
1062 4011746 Rev W

Index
Stop Streaming all TSs command • 442 Table on Input - Table ID parameter • 374
Stop Streaming command • 442 Table on Input - TSID parameter • 374
Stop, mode • 379 Table on Output - ON ID parameter • 372
Stopping scrambling • 668, 675, 691 Table on Output - PID parameter • 374
Stopping streaming • 439, 707 Table on Output - SID-Ext parameter • 374
Stopping the Scrambling Control Task • 672 Table on Output - Table ID parameter • 372
Stratum parameter • 68 Table on Output - TSID parameter • 374
Stream ID parameter • 315, 321 Table parameter • 410
Stream loss - Transport Stream loss alarm trigger Tag parameter • 303, 307, 340, 344, 345, 348
• 802 Tally parameter • 68
Stream Type component tracking rule • 297 Target IP Address parameter • 892
Stream Type parameter • 274, 284, 307, 556 Targets parameter • 910
Stream Type Value parameter • 284, 556 Task intances • 930
Streaming • 439 TCP Port parameter • 622, 625, 636, 637, 640,
Streaming parameter • 200, 202, 209, 445, 446 641
Streaming State parameter • 709, 710 TDT • 69, 352, 360, 365, 379, 385, 391, 410
strInIPAddress parameter • 949 Technical support • 39
strIPAddress parameter • 946, 949 Test Message alarm • 786
Strong Pairing Enforcement parameter • 645 Test messages • 790
strOutIPAddress parameter • 949 The Check for New Service ID upload • 648
strSIDs parameter • 949 The Clear & Reload TS Model upload • 648
STT • 69, 352, 385, 391 This IP address or subnet parameter • 1005
Sub table passing • 371 Time and Date Table • 352
Subnet Mask parameter • 74, 95, 101, 105 Time Base Selection parameter • 185, 188, 189,
Sum of CBR TS parameter • 200 190, 191
Super_Cas_ID • 582 Time Offset Descriptor table • 397
SWDF • 860, 865 Time Offset Descriptors • 397
Switching on or off service auto passing rules • Time Offset Table • 352
258 Time Out parameter • 932
Sync byte error - Transport Stream loss alarm Time Sync using SI Table • 69
trigger • 802 Time synchronization • 512
Sync Byte Error alarm • 780 Time Table parameter • 69
Sync Interval parameter • 69 Time to Live parameter • 218
Sync loss - Transport Stream loss alarm trigger • Time Zone parameter • 397
802 Time Zone Selection parameter • 65, 66, 69
Sync now command • 69 Timeout parameter • 48
Synchronization parameter • 65 Timing Parameters • 589
Synchronization Type parameter • 66 To Create a New IPsec Policy • 996
Synchronizing the Scrambling Control Task • To Insertion parameter • 433, 517, 521, 526, 529
672 To Main parameter • 433, 517, 521, 526, 529
Synchronizing using an SI table • 69 To Unassign IPSec • 1003
Synchronizing with NTP server • 66 Too many encoders in pool alarm • 780
Synchronous Operation • 884 Too many encoders total alarm • 780
System Settings table • 60, 64 Toolbars • 39
System sub page • 64, 74, 76, 77 Top Node • 134
System Time Table • 352 ToS parameter • 218, 219, 220, 221, 711
TOT • 69, 352, 360, 365, 379, 385, 391, 410
T Total Bit Rate parameter • 200, 209, 473, 477,
Table on Input - ONID parameter • 374 487, 488, 863
Table on Input - PID parameter • 374 Total Bytes received counter • 119
Table on Input - SID-Ext parameter • 374 Total Bytes transmitted counter • 119
4011746 Rev W 1063

Index
Total frames received counter • 119 Transrating group • 468, 473, 475, 480, 487
Total frames transmitted counter • 119 Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table •
TR / Delay tab page • 414, 430 835, 850
TR Delay parameter • 471 Transrating Group branch • 151
TR Group Name parameter • 430 Transrating Group Settings table • 473, 477, 487,
Trace Export table • 976 488, 493, 496, 497
Trace Level parameter • 973 Transrating license • 49
Trace Logs table • 975, 976 Transrating mode • 469
Traces sub page • 973, 974, 975, 976 Transrating problem alarm • 780
Track Type parameter • 284, 556 Transrating specific outgoing service settings •
Tracking Rule command • 303 430
Tracking Rules • 303 Transrating sub page • 477, 487, 493, 496, 497
Transition start delay • 589 Tree
Transition stop delay • 589 Browsing • 37
Transmission errors (Counters) table • 119 Finding Services • 173
Transmission errors counters • 119 Finding Transport Streams • 173
Transparent Generated mode • 379 Settings • 164
Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams Tree Refresh Rate parameter • 164, 167
Introduction • 198 Tree View sub page • 172, 173
Passing • 207 Trees To Refresh parameter • 164, 167
Undo Loop Throught command • 207 Trigger Alarm parameter • 738
Transparent mode • 379 Triggered by GPIO parameter • 82
Transparent output standard mode • 209 Triggering Splicing Events Manually • 536
Transparently Passing PSI/SI/PSIP Information • Triggers parameter • 805
369 TS Advanced sub page • 220, 309
Transport Stream advanced settings • 218 TS Auto Pass Rules • 224
Transport Stream auto pass rules • 196, 224 TS Auto Pass Rules table • 224
Transport Stream backup • 741 TS Bit Rates Overview table • 835, 839, 844
Transport Stream Backup scenarios • 742, 752 TS branch • 139
Transport Stream backup trigger • 742 TS Check TimeOut parameter • 678
Transport Stream branch • 139 TS Component Settings table • 330, 331, 333
Transport Stream creation methods • 199 TS Components sub page • 321, 323, 324, 326,
Transport Stream Identifier display mode • 128 330, 331, 333
Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers • 804 TS Default Settings table • 191, 215
Transport Stream Model • 648 TS FEC sub page • 237, 247
Transport Stream Properties dialog • 653 TS FEC table • 234, 235, 245
Transport Stream representation mode • 169, 170 TS GbE Port parameter • 978
TransportStream dialog • 651 TS ID display mode • 128
TransportStream Initialization Error • 667 TS ID parameter • 128, 171, 209, 281, 293, 303,
TransportStreams - Services tab • 649, 651, 652, 315, 331, 360, 374, 458, 649, 651, 653
653, 654, 655, 656, 678 TS Input sub page • 188, 189, 190, 234, 743,
TransportStreams list • 664 748, 804
Transrated Services Settings table • 430 TS IP Address box • 978
Transrater delay • 470 TS IP parameter • 247
Transrater Trace • 972 TS Loss alarm • 780
Transrating • 463 TS Loss sub page • 805
Transrating board settings • 470 TS Loss table • 804, 805
Transrating Board Settings table • 471 TS Loss Trigger Mode parameter • 806
Transrating comparison • 481, 498 TS Loss Trigger Options parameters • 806
Transrating Comparison command • 483 TS Output sub page • 200, 211, 213, 224, 258,
Transrating examples • 500 455, 473
1064 4011746 Rev W

Index
TS Ping TimeOut parameter • 678 Unsolicited IGMP Message parameter • 110

TS Priority parameter • 875 Update all channels table • 521
TS representation mode • 169, 170 Update All table • 477, 493
TS Settings table • 188, 189, 200, 211, 213, 455, Update All Transrating Groups table • 487
863 Update all TS table • 213, 220, 245, 488
TS SI Settings table • 406 Update License File parameter • 52
TS sync loss - service loss alarm trigger • 794 Upgrade-It dialog • 910
TS Sync Loss alarm • 780 Upgrade-It software package • 907
TS tab • 259 Upgrade-It tool • 907, 910
TS tab page • 259, 309 Upgrading software • 905
TS UDP Port • 978 Upgrading the DCM software • 910
TS-Service Backup tab page • 750, 801, 806 Usage parameter • 51
TTL parameter • 218, 219, 220, 221, 711 Use Default Settings parameter • 200
TVCT • 352, 365, 385, 391, 400 Use this string (preshared key) • 996
TVCT Settings table • 401 Use UDP Port parameter • 622, 625
TVCT TS Settings table • 403 User Account Control dialog • 1005
Type of Service parameter • 218 User Name parameter • 41, 42, 44, 45, 182, 183,
Type parameter • 51, 88, 90, 92, 101, 234, 235, 709, 710, 970
281, 283, 303, 307, 315, 321, 331, 344, 345, User Selected PCR PID Error alarm • 780
348, 369, 379, 473, 542, 550, 562, 614, 617, User Time parameter • 65
653, 753, 862 User Time table • 65
Username parameter • 696, 699, 700
U Users security group • 41
UDP boundary • 100 Using DCM Scripts • 939
UDP Loss alarm • 780
V
UDP output protocol • 209
UDP parameter • 234, 235, 237, 243, 245, 247, Valid Packets counter • 241
281, 283, 303, 315, 331, 369, 379, 458, 562, Value parameter • 965
696, 702, 753 VCT • 352, 385, 391, 400
UDP Port + 1 increment scheme • 215 Version • 39
UDP Port + 2 increment scheme • 215 Version Info sub page • 54
UDP Port parameter • 171, 190, 200, 209, 542, Version information • 54
550, 954 Video Quality Algorithm Optimization
UDP Size parameter • 218, 219, 220, 221 parameter • 470
UDP stream loss - service loss alarm trigger • Video Rate Mode parameter • 889
794 Video Signal Info table • 698
UDP Stream Loss alarm • 780 Viewing PSI/SI information • 360
Undersized frames counter • 119 Viewing Routings • 705
Undo Loop Throught command • 207 Viewing service grooming • 457
Unicast column socket type • 237 Viewing Trace Logs • 972
Unicast row socket type • 237 Virtual Channel Table • 352
Unicast socket type • 190, 237 Virtual Local Area Network • 107
Unicast type • 234 VLAN
Unit Set dialog • 965 Adding VLAN port pairs • 108
Unit Set Name box • 965 Introduction • 107
Unit Set Properties dialog • 965 Limitations • 108
Units dialog • 887, 889 Removing VLAN port pairs • 109
Unreferenced Pid Error alarm • 780 VLAN ID parameter • 108, 209, 215, 711
Unreferenced PIDS main node • 152 VLAN identifier parameter • 218
Unreferenced Pids Maximum Number Reached VLAN ON parameter • 215, 219, 220, 221
alarm • 780 VLAN port pairs
4011746 Rev W 1065

Index
Adding • 108
Introduction • 107
Removing • 109
VLAN Priority parameter • 209, 218
VLAN Settings • 215
VLAN Settings table • 108, 109, 209, 211, 215
VLAN sub page • 108, 109
VLAN tagged counter • 119
W
Warm reboot • 981
Warning severity level • 789
Web browser user interface
Introduction • 36
Logging on or off • 42
Security • 41
Security accounts • 41, 44, 45
Toolbars • 39
Version • 39
Why is this TS visible in the input tree? table. •
176
Windows Firewall with Advanced Security
dialog • 1005, 1012
Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on
Local Computer dialog • 1012
Write Community parameter • 63
Write community string • 63
1066 4011746 Rev W

Scientific-Atlanta Europe NV Luipaardstraat 12 B-8500 Kortrijk, Belgium
www.scientificatlanta.com
This document includes various trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.
Please see the Trademarks section of this document for a list of the Cisco Systems, Inc.,
trademarks used in this document.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners.
Product and service availability subject to change without notice.
© 2009 Scientific-Atlanta Europe NV. All rights reserved.
September 2009 Printed in Belgium Part Number 4011746 Rev W

DCM Config Guide

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

DCM Config Guide

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

4011746 Rev W

Digital Content Manager (DCM)

For Your Safety

Explanation of Warning and Caution Icons

4011746 Rev W iii

Accordingly, please be advised that service providers, content providers and

4011746 Rev W vii

Safe Operations vii

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View 131

SDI Branch .................................................................................................. 143

Chapter 4 Multiplexing 179

Introduction ................................................................................................ 185

xii 4011746 Rev W

To Configure the FEC Settings for a Preconfigured Incoming

4011746 Rev W xiii

Adding Dummy Component References into a PMT .......................... 289

xiv 4011746 Rev W

To Change the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode for

Adding a Dummy PCR to an Outgoing Service.................................... 421

Chapter 5 Transrating 463

xvi 4011746 Rev W

Transrating Board Settings ....................................................................... 470

Chapter 6 Digital Program Insertion and Program Switching 505

4011746 Rev W xvii

Program Switching .............................................................................................................. 539

Chapter 7 Scrambling 573

xviii 4011746 Rev W

Defining Access Criteria ........................................................................... 657

Chapter 8 IP Video Gateway 693

4011746 Rev W xix

Routing Streams to the Output ............................................................................. 702

Chapter 9 Transcoding 715

Chapter 10 Backup Scenarios 737

Chapter 11 Alarm Monitoring 779

4011746 Rev W xxi

Chapter 12 Checking Bit Rates 831

Chapter 13 Additional Features 857

xxii 4011746 Rev W

Configuring the Scrambling Parameters of the DTF Transport

Chapter 14 Software Upgrade 905

4011746 Rev W xxiii

Appendix A Customer Information 917

Appendix B Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS 923

xxiv 4011746 Rev W

Appendix C Extended Operations 969

Appendix D Additional Configuration 983

4011746 Rev W xxv

4011746 Rev W xxvii

IIOP Protocol Driver - User's Guide, part number: 6985041

xxviii 4011746 Rev W

Introducing the Digital Content Manager

Each I/O slot can be populated with:

Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager

The following DCM equipment is available:

ASI Interface Card with Co-Processor Card

GbE Interface Card with Co-Processor Card and FEC Card

IP Video Gateway Card

Introducing the Web Browser User Interface

Using the Context Sensitive Online Help

Browsing through a Tree

To collapse a branch, point to the - sign in front of the branch.

Using Short-Cut Menus

Device Host ID table

License Overview table